HSC Part 4 E-July16

Part 4: Craft Systems and Machinery
RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING
HIGH-SPEED CRAFT
2016
PART 4
CRAFT SYSTEMS AND MACHINERY
(Updated July 2016 – see next page)
American Bureau of Shipping

Incorporated by Act of Legislature of
the State of New York 1862
 2015 American Bureau of Shipping. All rights reserved.

ABS Plaza
16855 Northchase Drive
Houston, TX 77060 USA
Updates
July 2016 consolidation includes:

• February 2016 version plus Notice No. 1
February 2016 consolidation includes:

• January 2016 version plus Corrigenda/Editorials
R u l e C h a n g e N o t i c e ( 2 0 1 6 )
Rule Change Notice (2016)

The effective date of each technical change since 1993 is shown in parentheses at the end of the
subsection/paragraph titles within the text of each Part. Unless a particular date and month are shown, the
years in parentheses refer to the following effective dates:
(2000) and after 1 January 2000 (and subsequent years) (1996) 9 May 1996
(1999) 12 May 1999 (1995) 15 May 1995
(1998) 13 May 1998 (1994) 9 May 1994
(1997) 19 May 1997 (1993) 11 May 1993
Listing by Effective Dates of Changes from the 2015 Rules
Notice No. 1 (effective on 1 July 2015) to the 2015 Rules, which is incorporated in the 2016 Rules, is summarized
below.
EFFECTIVE DATE 1 July 2015 – shown as (1 July 2015)

(based on the contract date for new construction between builder and Owner)
Part/Para. No. Title/Subject Status/Remarks
4-5-2/9.1 Fixed Local Application Fire-fighting To delete the reference to the vessel's main propulsion and power
Systems generation, in line with IMO MSC.338(91). (Incorporates Notice No.
1)
EFFECTIVE DATE 1 January 2016 – shown as (2016)

4-3-1/5.3.1 General To include the requirements of 2-3-7/1 for propulsion shafts and to
clarify that the part can comply with only one, not all, specifications.
4-3-3/5.5.6 Keyless Coupling To align the requirements with industry practice.
4-4-2/7.5.7(b) Multi-core Metallic Tubes Sheathed To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
by Plastic Materials
4-4-3/7 Emergency Bilge Suctions for Main To specify an adequate flow to the emergency bilge pump to maintain
Machinery Space its discharge capacity.
4-4-4/1.1.3 Service and Settling Tanks To clarify the condition of special consideration for the capacity of the
service tanks, in line with Annex 12 of the 2000 HSC Code.
4-4-4/3.7 Valves on Oil Tanks To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-4-7/1.3.3 Electrical Installation in Storage To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
Room
4-4-7/3.3.6 Electrical Equipment To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-4-7/3.5.4 Electrical Equipment To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-1/3.9.2 <No Title> To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-1/3.21.1 Category “ia” To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-1/3.23 Low Voltage To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-1/Table 3 Degree of Protection of Electrical To include degree of protection “IP X9”, in line with the latest IEC
Equipment (Second IP Numeral) requirements.
4-6-2/1.3 Short-circuit Data To align the requirements with 4-8-1/5.1.3 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
4-6-2/9.5.2(a) Instantaneous Trip To specify that if generators are fitted with differential protection
systems, then they need not simultaneously have a separate
instantaneous trip function.
ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 iii
4-6-3/3.7.2(a) Large Batteries To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-3/9.1.1(a) Electrical Equipment Types To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-3/9.5.1 General To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-4/7.13.1(a) Systems Exceeding 50 Volts To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-4/7.13.1(b) Systems of 50 Volts and Less To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-4/10.5.10 Electrical Protection To clarify overvoltage, overcurrent and short circuit protection
requirements of the semiconductor converter and the semiconductor
devices associated with or contained within. To reduce the proscribed
protection requirements is to allow equipment makers to provide
protection for their semiconductor converters and semiconductor
devices that is appropriate to the semiconductor technology that they
utilize. To consolidate alarm annunciation requirements upon
operation of the protection scheme. To remove the requirement for
the provision of an individual semiconductor fuse for each
semiconductor device.
4-6-4/10.7 Inspection and Testing To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-4/13.1.1 General To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-4/13.1.2(a) Standards To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-4/13.1.3 Fire Resistant Property To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
4-6-4/Table 5 Factory Testing Schedule for To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
Switchboards, Chargers, Motor
Control Centers and Controllers
4-6-5/1.11.2(a) Mechanical Construction and To align the requirements with the latest IEC requirements.
Configuration
4-6-5/3.3.1 General To remove the option for a single electrical propulsion motor with two
sets of windings.
4-6-5/3.7.5 Semiconductor Converters To remove redundant requirements.
(Deleted)
4-7-9/Table 9 Type Tests for Control, Monitoring To align the requirements with IACS UR E10.
and Safety Equipment
4-7-9/Table 10 Tests for Unit Certification of To align the requirements with IACS UR E10.
Control, Monitoring and Safety
Equipment
Listing by Effective Dates of Changes from the 2016 Rules
Notice No. 1 (effective on 1 July 2016) to the 2016 Rules, is summarized below.
EFFECTIVE DATE 1 July 2016 – shown as (1 July 2016)

4-6-2/11.1 Power Supply Feeders To align the requirements with IACS UI SC242. (Incorporates
Notice No. 1)
4-6-3/3.7.5 Maintenance Schedule of Batteries To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E18, which
clearly defines the stages for submitting the Maintenance Schedule
of batteries. (Incorporates Notice No. 1)
iv ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

4-6-3/3.31 High Fire Risk Areas To align the requirements with IACS UR E15, which specifies that
spaces having little or no fire risk as defined by SOLAS and
MSC/Circ.1120 (i.e., spaces containing generators and major
electrical units; refrigerating, stabilizing, ventilation and air
conditioning machinery; and trunk to such spaces, provided they are
not handling or using flammable liquids) are not considered to be
high fire risk areas. (Incorporates Notice No. 1)
4-6-5/1.1.3(d) Creepage Distances To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
aligns with IEC 60502-1 (2009) and IEC 60502-2 (2005) with
respect to testing. (Incorporates Notice No. 1)
4-6-5/1.1.3(e) Creepage Distances To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
(Renumbered) aligns with IEC 60502-1 (2009) and IEC 60502-2 (2005) with
4-6-5/1.1.3(f) Non-standardized Parts To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
(Deleted) aligns with IEC 60502-1 (2009) and IEC 60502-2 (2005) with
4-6-5/1.9.2(b) Warning Plate To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
4-6-5/1.9.3(h) Cable Test after Installation To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
4-6-5/1.11.2(d) Shutters To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
4-6-5/1.11.2(f) Arc Flash and Associated Installation To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
Requirements aligns with IEC 60502-1 (2009) and IEC 60502-2 (2005) with
4-6-5/1.11.3(a) Application To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
4-6-5/1.13.4 Accessibility To align the requirements with the updated IACS UR E11, which
ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 v

PART Table of Contents
4
Craft Systems and Machinery
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 General .................................................................................................... 1
Section 1 Classification of Machinery ....................................................3
CHAPTER 2 Prime Movers ........................................................................................ 14

Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears ...........16
Section 2 Gas Turbines .......................................................................25
Section 3 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length ......................28
CHAPTER 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery............................................ 29

Section 1 Propulsion Shafting ..............................................................34
Section 2 Propellers .............................................................................43
Section 3 Steering Gear .......................................................................56
Section 4 Waterjets ..............................................................................69
Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy .......................................................71
Section 6 Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft ...............79
Section 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length ......................80
CHAPTER 4 Pumps and Piping Systems ................................................................ 83

Section 1 General Provisions...............................................................89
Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings ......................................97
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks ...............................124
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks ...............137
Section 5 Internal Combustion Engine Systems................................144
Section 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems ....................................145
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks ......................................149
CHAPTER 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems .............................................................. 154

Section 1 All Craft ..............................................................................157
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over ............165
Section 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons .................174
Section 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length ..................176
CHAPTER 6 Electrical Installations........................................................................ 179

Section 1 General ..............................................................................187
Section 2 Shipboard Systems ............................................................197
Section 3 Shipboard Installation ........................................................225
vi ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

Section 4 Machinery and Equipment ................................................. 248
Section 5 Specialized Installations… ................................................. 287
Section 6 Specialized Craft and Services … ..................................... 310
Section 7 Craft Less Than 24 Meters (79 feet) in Length … ............. 312
CHAPTER 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation .................................. 313

Section 1 General Provisions............................................................. 319
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control ................................................ 328
Section 3 ACCU Notation .................................................................. 336
Section 4 Craft Classed with ABCU Notation .................................... 355
Section 5 Craft Less than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than
24 meters (79 feet)............................................................. 356
Section 6 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length .................. 359
Section 7 Installation, Tests and Trials .............................................. 360
Section 8 Computer-based Systems ................................................. 362
Appendix 1 – Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests
and Evidence of Quality Assurance in
4-7-8/Table 3 ............................................... 369
Section 9 Equipment .......................................................................... 372
ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 vii
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
PART Chapter 1: General
4
CHAPTER 1 General
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 Conditions of Classification of Machinery ........................................... 3
1 General ............................................................................................... 3
3 Certification of Machinery ................................................................... 3
3.1 Basic Requirements ........................................................................ 3
3.3 Type Approval Program................................................................... 3
3.5 Non-mass Produced Machinery ...................................................... 4
3.7 Details of Certification of Some Representative Products ............... 4
5 Shipboard Automatic or Remote Control and Monitoring
Systems .............................................................................................. 4
7 Machinery Plans and Data .................................................................. 4
7.1 General............................................................................................ 4
7.3 Automation and Remote Control Systems....................................... 4
7.5 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers ............................ 5
7.7 Electrical Systems ........................................................................... 5
7.9 Fire Safety ....................................................................................... 6
7.11 Gas Turbines ................................................................................... 6
7.13 Diesel Engines ................................................................................ 6
7.15 Lift Devices ...................................................................................... 7
7.17 Piping Systems................................................................................ 7
7.19 Propellers ........................................................................................ 8
7.21 Reduction Gears ............................................................................. 8
7.23 Shafting ........................................................................................... 8
7.25 Steering Gears ................................................................................ 8
7.27 Steering Vanes ................................................................................ 8
7.29 Thrusters (Steerable, Athwartship) .................................................. 8
7.31 Waterjets ......................................................................................... 9
7.33 Windlass or Winch ........................................................................... 9
9 Machinery ........................................................................................... 9
11 Machinery Spaces .............................................................................. 9
13 Definitions ........................................................................................... 9
13.1 Category A Machinery Spaces ........................................................ 9
13.3 Machinery Spaces ........................................................................... 9
13.5 Oil Fuel Unit..................................................................................... 9
13.7 Accommodation Spaces .................................................................. 9
13.9 Public Spaces................................................................................ 10
13.11 Service Spaces ............................................................................. 10
13.13 Cargo Spaces................................................................................ 10
13.15 Special Category Spaces .............................................................. 10
ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 1

13.17 Sources of Ignition ......................................................................... 10
13.19 Vital Systems ................................................................................. 10
13.21 Cargo Craft .................................................................................... 11
13.23 Dead Craft Condition ..................................................................... 11
13.25 Blackout ......................................................................................... 11
15 Astern Propulsion Power ..................................................................11
15.1 General .......................................................................................... 11
17 Inclinations ........................................................................................11
19 Dead Craft Start ................................................................................11
21 Machinery Equations ........................................................................11
23 Machinery Space Ventilation ............................................................11
25 Engineers’ Alarm ...............................................................................11
27 Automatic Trips .................................................................................12
29 Thrusters and Dynamic Positioning Systems ...................................12
31 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Turbines ...........................................12
33 Sea Trial ............................................................................................12
33.1 General .......................................................................................... 12
33.3 Residual Fuel ................................................................................. 12
35 Units ..................................................................................................12
37 Materials Containing Asbestos .........................................................12
39 Ambient Temperature .......................................................................12
TABLE 1 Machine Installations – Inclinations ........................................13

TABLE 2 Ambient Temperatures for Unrestricted Service.....................13
2 ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

PART Section 1: Conditions of Classification of Machinery
4
CHAPTER 1 General
SECTION 1 Conditions of Classification of Machinery
1 General
The provisions of Part 1, Chapter 1, “Scope and Conditions of Classification,” are applicable to the classification
of machinery.
3 Certification of Machinery
3.1 Basic Requirements

These Rules define, to varying degrees, the extent of evaluation required for products, machinery, equipment
and their components based on the level of criticality of each of those items. There are three basic evaluation
constituents:
• Design review; prototype testing;
• Survey during construction and testing at the plant of manufacture; and
• Survey during installation onboard the craft and at trials.
Where design review is required by these Rules, a letter will be issued by ABS upon satisfactory review of
the plans to evidence the acceptance of the design. In addition to, or independent of, design review, ABS may
require survey and testing of forgings, castings and component parts at the various manufacturers’ plants as
well as survey and testing of the finished product. A certificate or report will be issued upon satisfactory
completion of each survey to evidence acceptance of the forging, casting, component or finished product.
Design review, survey and the issuance of reports or certificates constitute the certification of machinery.
Based on the intended service and application, some products do not require certification because they are
not directly related to the scope of classification or because normal practices for their construction within
the industry are considered adequate. Such products may be accepted based on the manufacturers’
documentation on design and quality.
In general, surveys during installation onboard the craft and at trials are required for all items of machinery.
This is not considered a part of the product certification process. There may be instances, however, where
letters or certificates issued for items of machinery contain conditions which must be verified during
installation, tests or trials.
3.3 Type Approval Program

Products that can be consistently manufactured to the same design and specification may be Type
Approved under the ABS Type Approval Program. The ABS Type Approval Program is a voluntary option
for the demonstration of the compliance of a product with the Rules or other recognized standards. It may
be applied at the request of the designer or manufacturer. The ABS Type Approval Program generally
covers Product Type Approval (1-1-4/11.9.3), but is also applicable for a more expeditious procedure
towards Unit-Certification, as specified in 1-1-4/11.9.2.
See the ABS Type Approval Program in Appendix 1-1-A2. The ABS Type Approval Program and the
indicated references are available for download from the ABS website at http://www.eagle.org.

Part 4 Craft Systems and Machinery
Chapter 1 General
Section 1 Conditions of Classification of Machinery 4-1-1
3.5 Non-mass Produced Machinery

Non-mass produced critical machinery, such as propulsion boilers, slow speed diesel engines, turbines,
steering gears and similar critical items are to be individually unit certified in accordance with the
procedure described in 4-1-1/3.1. However, consideration will be given to granting Type Approval to such
machinery in the category of Recognized Quality System (RQS). The category of Product Quality Assurance
(PQA) will not normally be available for all products, and such limitations will be indicated in 4-1-1/Table 1
through 4-1-1/Table 6 of the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels (Steel Vessel Rules). In
each instance where Type Approval is granted, in addition to quality assurance and quality control
assessment of the manufacturing facilities, ABS will require some degree of product-specific survey during
manufacture.
3.7 Details of Certification of Some Representative Products

4-1-1/Tables 1 through 6 of the Steel Vessel Rules provide abbreviated certification requirements of
representative machinery based on the basic requirements of the Rules for machinery. The tables also provide
the applicability of the Type Approval Program for each of these machinery items.
For easy reference, the tables contain six product categories, as follows:
• Prime movers
• Propulsion, maneuvering and mooring machinery
• Electrical and control equipment
• Fire safety equipment
• Boilers, pressure vessels, fired equipment
• Piping system components
5 Shipboard Automatic or Remote Control and Monitoring Systems

Automatic or remote control and monitoring systems associated with propulsion machinery and monitoring
systems of propulsion-machinery space installed onboard classed craft are to comply with the requirements in
Sections 4-7-1 and 4-7-2 or Section 4-7-4 or Section 4-7-6, as applicable. Additionally, where requested by
the Owner and provided that compliance with Section 4-7-3 or Section 4-7-4 is met, the aforementioned
systems will be assigned the optional notations ACCU or ABCU, respectively. See Section 4-7-1.
7 Machinery Plans and Data

The following plans and data, as applicable for each craft to be built under survey, are to be submitted and
approved before construction is commenced, in accordance with Section 1-1-6. The sizes, dimensions,
welding and other details, make and size of standard approved appliances are to be shown on the plans as
clearly and fully as possible.
7.1 General
Details of dead craft start arrangements (see 4-1-1/19)
Description of all automatic trips that may affect the craft’s propulsion system
7.3 Automation and Remote Control Systems

A list of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic equipment associated with the particular systems, including the
data listed in 4-7-1/7
A list of all major components installed within the particular equipment (i.e., control console, etc.) and the
data as required in 4-7-1/7

Chapter 1 General
Certificates or test reports attesting to the suitability of the particular equipment in compliance with the
environmental criteria set forth in 4-7-7 and 4-7-9, as applicable. For equipment that have been already
certified by ABS and provided their certification remains valid, the submission of a copy of pertinent
certificate will suffice (see 4-7-9/13.5).
Plans showing the location of control and monitoring stations, controlled equipment and piping/cable runs,
etc.
Arrangements and details of the control consoles and panels, including plan views and elevation details,
installation details and wiring data as listed in 4-7-1/7.5
A list of all cables connecting equipment associated with the systems (see 4-7-1/7.7.2)
A complete operational description of the automatic or remote control and monitoring systems (see 4-7-1/7.3)
A simplified one-line diagram (electrical and piping) of all power and automatic or remote control and
monitoring systems (see 4-7-1/7.3.11)
A schematic diagram of all control, alarm, display and safety systems
For computer-based systems, the following is to be included:
• Overall description and specification of the systems and equipment
• Block diagrams for the computer hardware showing interfacing between the work stations, input/output
(I/O) units, local controllers, traffic controllers, data highways, etc.
• Logic flow chart or ladder diagrams
• Description of the alarm system indicating the ways it is acknowledged, displayed on the monitor or
mimic display board, etc.
• Description of the system redundancy and back-up equipment, if any
• Description of the data communication protocol, including anticipated data process response delays
• Description of the system’s security protocol to prevent unauthorized program changes which may
compromise the integrity of the automatic or remote systems
• Description of the system with regard to the degree of independence or redundancy provided for the
control systems, alarm/display systems and safety systems
• Description of system’s task priorities
• Where applicable, description of UPS (uninterruptible power supply) and their capacities, including
system’s power consumption
• Equipment ratings and environmental parameters
Installation methods (electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic) (see 4-7-9/13)
7.5 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers

Arrangements and details of boilers, pressure vessels and heat exchangers required by Part 4, Chapter 4 of
the Steel Vessel Rules
Plans and data for hydraulic and pneumatic power cylinders, as required by 4-4-6/3
7.7 Electrical Systems

One line diagrams for the following electrical systems containing the information specified in 4-6-2/1.1.2.
• Power supply and distribution
• Lighting including navigation lights
• Internal communication
• General emergency alarm

Chapter 1 General
• Fire detection and alarm

• Steering gear control
• Intrinsically-safe equipment
• Emergency generator starting
• Inert gas control, monitoring and alarm
• Semiconductor converters for propulsion
Short-circuit data (see 4-6-2/1.3)
Protective device coordination study (see 4-6-2/1.5)
Electric-plant load analysis (see 4-6-2/1.7)
Booklet of standard wiring practices and details (see 4-6-3/1.1)
General arrangement plan of electrical equipment showing the location of the equipment listed in 4-6-3/1.3
Location of splices and cable boxes together with information of their services
Hazardous area plan (see 4-6-3/1.5)
List of all equipment in hazardous areas (see 4-6-3/1.5)
Details of electrical components, as required by 4-6-4/1
7.9 Fire Safety

Arrangement and details of control station for emergency closing of openings and stopping machinery
Details and location of fireman’s outfits
Details of fire extinguishing appliances
Fire control plans (see 4-5-1/1.9)
Plans of the following systems:
• Fire main system
• Foam smothering system
• Fire detection systems
• Fixed gas extinguishing system
• Fixed water spraying system
Other fire extinguishing arrangements
For craft 500 GRT and over, the most severe service condition for the operation of the emergency fire
pump (e.g., lightest draft as shown in Trim and Stability Booklet, etc.)
For craft 500 GRT and over, calculations and pump data demonstrating that the emergency fire pump
system can meet the operational requirements specified in 4-5-2/5.3.3 and 4-5-2/5.3.6 with the proposed
pump location and piping arrangements (e.g., adequate suction lift, discharge pressure, capacity, etc.) at the
most severe service condition
7.11 Gas Turbines

Plans and particulars as required by Section 4-2-3 of the Steel Vessel Rules
Additionally, details of the manufacturer’s proposed automatic safety devices in accordance with 4-2-2/1.7 of
these Rules
7.13 Diesel Engines

Plans and particulars as required by Section 4-2-1 of the Steel Vessel Rules

Chapter 1 General
7.15 Lift Devices

Details and material specifications of torque transmitting parts
Design basis stress calculations for the propellers, impellers, shafting, gears, belt drives, couplings, keys,
bearings, and control mechanism (see Section 4-3-6)
7.17 Piping Systems

Diagrammatic plans, as applicable, of the following piping systems containing the information specified in
4-4-1/3.3:
• Ballast system
• Bilge system
• Cargo systems
• Compressed air systems (including starting air systems and control systems)
• Cooling water systems
• Deck drains and scuppers
• Exhaust gas systems
• Essential fresh water service systems
• Fuel oil filling, transfer and service systems
• Hydraulic power piping systems
• Lubricating oil systems
• Potable water system
• Sanitary system
• Essential Sea water service systems
• Steam system
• Vent, sounding and overflow piping
• Systems conveying toxic liquids, liquids with a flash point below 60°C (140°F), or flammable gases
• All Group I piping systems not covered above unless it is part of an independently manufactured unit
(such as air conditioning or refrigeration) that does not form part of a craft’s piping system
A booklet of standard piping practices and details (see 4-4-1/3.5)
Plans of molded or built-up flexible expansion joints in piping systems over 150 mm (6 in.), including
details of the reinforcement arrangements (see 4-4-1/9.7)
Specifications for plastic pipes and components, including thermal and mechanical properties and chemical
resistance (see 4-4-2/7, 4-4-2/9.11 and 4-4-2/17.7)
Drawings of non-standard valves and fittings showing details of construction, materials and basis for
pressure rating (see 4-4-2/11.1.2 and 4-4-2/13.5)
Valve operating systems for all remote-controlled valves

Chapter 1 General
7.19 Propellers
For all propellers (air or water), a propeller plan giving design data and characteristics of the material
For skewed propellers or propeller blades of unusual design, a detailed stress analysis, as required by 4-3-2/5.5
or 4-3-2/5.7
For controllable pitch propellers, plans of the propeller hub, propeller blade flange and bolts, internal
mechanisms, hydraulic piping control systems, and instrumentation and alarm systems; also strength
calculations for the internal mechanism
Detailed stress calculations and fitting instructions for keyless propeller connections
7.21 Reduction Gears

Arrangements, details and data as required by Section 4-3-1 of the Steel Vessel Rules
7.23 Shafting
Detailed plans with material specifications of the propulsion shafting, couplings, coupling bolts, propulsion
shafting arrangement, tailshaft bearings and lubrication system, if oil-lubricated
Calculations for flexible couplings and demountable couplings (see 4-2-1/17 and 4-3-1/19.7)
Shaft alignment and vibration calculations, if required by 4-3-1/21
Detailed preloading and stress calculations and fitting instructions for non-fitted coupling bolts (see 4-3-1/19.3)
7.25 Steering Gears

General arrangements of the main and auxiliary steering gears and steering compartment
Assembly of upper rudder stock, tiller, tie rod, rudder actuators, etc.
Construction details of all torque-transmitting components such as tiller, tiller pin, tiller/rudder stock
interference fit mechanism, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc., including bill of materials, welding procedures
and nondestructive testing, as applicable
Control system incorporating schematic electrical control logic diagram, instrumentation, alarm devices,
etc., and including bill of materials
Design calculations for torque-transmitting components such as tiller, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc.
Details of electrical power supply to power units and to steering gear control, including schematic diagram
of motor controllers, feeder cables and feeder cable electrical protection
Rated torque of main steering gear
Schematic hydraulic piping plan incorporating hydraulic logic diagram and including bill of materials,
typical pipe to pipe joint details, pipe to valve joint details, pipe to equipment joint details, pressure rating
of valves and pipe fittings and pressure relief valve settings
7.27 Steering Vanes

Details and material specifications of torque transmitting parts
Airfoil analysis including vane freestream characteristics (lift and drag characteristics)
Control system arrangements
7.29 Thrusters (Steerable, Athwartship)

Drawings and data as per 4-3-5/1.7 of the Steel Vessel Rules

Chapter 1 General
7.31 Waterjets
Details and material specifications of force transmitting parts
Design basis stress calculations for the impellers, shafting, steering mechanism and reversing mechanism
(see 4-3-4/1.3)
Calculations or test results to substantiate the suitability and strength of the pressure and suction housing
(see 4-3-4/1.5)
7.33 Windlass or Winch

Arrangements, details and stress calculations for the windlass or winch, drums, brakes, shaft, gears, coupling
bolts, wildcat, sheaves, pulleys and foundation.
Control arrangements
Electric one-line diagram, including power ratings and cable specifications
Piping system diagram, including working pressures, welding details, material specifications and pipe
specifications
9 Machinery
Rotating machinery of 100 kilowatts (135 horsepower) and over is to be in accordance with the requirements
of Part 4, Chapters 1 through 6, as applicable. Machinery of less than 100 kilowatts (135 horsepower) is to
be designed, constructed and equipped in accordance with good commercial practice, and will be accepted
subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor after installation.
11 Machinery Spaces
Machinery spaces are to be arranged so as to provide access to all machinery and controls as necessary for
operation or maintenance.
13 Definitions
For the purpose of machinery installations, electrical installations, periodically unattended machinery
spaces, fire protection, fire detection and fire extinction, the following terms are defined:
13.1 Category A Machinery Spaces

Machinery spaces of Category A are those spaces and trunks to such spaces that contain: internal combustion
machinery used for main propulsion; internal combustion machinery used for purposes other than main
propulsion, where such machinery has an aggregate total power output of not less than 375 kW (500 HP);
oil fired equipment such as an incinerator, waste disposal unit, etc.; or any oil fuel units.
13.3 Machinery Spaces

Machinery spaces are Category A spaces and all other spaces containing propelling machinery, internal
combustion engines, boilers, generators, major electrical equipment, refrigerating, stabilizing, ventilation
and air conditioning machinery, similar spaces and trunks to such spaces.
13.5 Oil Fuel Unit

An oil-fuel unit is any equipment, such as pumps, filters and heaters, used for the preparation and delivery
of fuel oil to oil-fired boilers (including incinerators, internal combustion engines or gas turbines at a
pressure of more than 1.8 bar (1.8 kgf/cm2, 26 psi).
13.7 Accommodation Spaces

Accommodation spaces are those spaces used for public spaces, corridors, lavatories, cabins, offices, hospitals,
cinemas, games and hobbies rooms, barber shops, pantries containing no cooking appliances and similar
spaces.

Chapter 1 General
13.9 Public Spaces

Public spaces are those portions of the accommodations which are used for meeting halls, dining rooms,
lounges and similar permanently enclosed spaces.
13.11 Service Spaces

Service spaces are those spaces used for galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, lockers, mail and
specie rooms, storerooms, workshops other than those forming part of the machinery spaces, similar spaces
and trunks to such spaces.
13.13 Cargo Spaces

Cargo spaces are all spaces used for cargo (including cargo oil tanks) and trunks to such spaces.
13.15 Special Category Spaces

Special category spaces are those enclosed spaces above or below the bulkhead deck intended for the
carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such
vehicles can be driven and to which passengers have access.
13.17 Sources of Ignition

Sources of ignition are considered to include a flame, arc, spark and electrical equipment, machinery and
other equipment having hot surfaces with the potential of causing a non-intentional explosion or fire when
exposed to an explosive or flammable atmosphere or material.
13.19 Vital Systems

Vital systems are those systems necessary for the craft’s survivability and safety, including:
i) Systems for fill, transfer and service of fuel oil.
ii) Fire-main systems, including emergency fire pump.
iii) Other required fire-extinguishing and detection systems.
iv) Bilge systems, including emergency bilge suction.
v) Ballast systems.
vi) Steering systems and steering control systems.
vii) Propulsion systems and their necessary auxiliaries (fuel oil, lube oil, cooling water, starting system,
etc.) and control systems.
viii) Systems for transfer and control of cargo.
ix) Craft’s service and emergency electrical generation systems and their auxiliaries (fuel oil, lube oil,
cooling water, starting system, etc.) and control systems.
x) Venting and sounding systems.
xi) Engine room ventilation systems.
xii) Other required ventilation systems.
xiii) Controllable pitch propeller systems, including controls.
xiv) Electrical power and lighting systems.
xv) Systems used for navigation.
xvi) Required communication and alarm systems.
xvii) Hydraulic systems for anchor windlass/winch.
xviii) Systems necessary due to special characteristics or special service of a craft.
xix) Any other system identified by ABS as crucial to the survival of the craft or to the protection of
the personnel aboard.

Chapter 1 General
13.21 Cargo Craft

Any craft other than a passenger craft, which is capable of maintaining the main functions of safety systems
of unaffected spaces after damage in any one compartment on board. The notation Cargo Craft defines a
craft that is certified in accordance with the IMO International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft.
13.23 Dead Craft Condition

Dead craft condition means a condition under which:
i) The main propulsion plant, boilers and auxiliary machinery are not in operation due to the loss of
the main source of electrical power, and
ii) In restoring propulsion, the stored energy for starting the propulsion plant, the main source of
electrical power and other essential auxiliary machinery is assumed to be not available.
13.25 Blackout
Blackout situation means the loss of the main source of electrical power resulting in the main and auxiliary
machinery to be out of operation.
15 Astern Propulsion Power
15.1 General
Sufficient power for going astern is to be provided to secure proper control of the craft in all normal
circumstances. The astern power of the main propelling machinery is to be capable of maintaining in free
route astern at least 70% of the ahead rpm corresponding to the maximum continuous ahead power. For
main propulsion systems with reversing gears, controllable pitch propellers or electric propulsion drive,
running astern is not to lead to overload of the propulsion machinery. The ability of the machinery to
reverse the direction of thrust of the propeller in sufficient time, and so to bring the craft to rest within a
reasonable distance from maximum ahead service speed, is to be demonstrated and recorded during trials.
17 Inclinations
Machinery installations are to be designed to operate under the conditions as shown in 4-1-1/Table 1.
19 Dead Craft Start

Means are to be provided to bring the machinery into operation from a “dead craft” condition as defined in
4-1-1/13.23. See 4-6-2/3.1.3 and 4-6-3/3.27 for the required starting arrangements.
21 Machinery Equations
The equations for rotating parts of the machinery in the following sections are based upon strength
considerations only. Their application does not relieve the manufacturer from responsibility for the presence
of dangerous vibrations in the installation at speeds within the operating range. See also 4-3-1/21.
23 Machinery Space Ventilation

Machinery spaces are to be ventilated so as to ensure that when machinery is operating at full power in all
weather conditions, including heavy weather, an adequate supply of air is maintained for operation of the
machinery and safety of the personnel.
25 Engineers’ Alarm
Engineers’ alarms are required on craft of 500 gross tons and over, which are intended for international
voyages. An engineers’ alarm is to be operable from the main propulsion control station. It is to be
audible in the engineers’ accommodations. See 4-6-2/17.3.

Chapter 1 General
27 Automatic Trips
A description of all automatic trips that may affect the craft’s propulsion system is to be submitted for review.
29 Thrusters and Dynamic Positioning Systems

Compliance with Section 4-3-5 of the Steel Vessel Rules is required as a condition for Class for main
propulsion thrusters and is optional for propulsion-assist thrusters and athwartship thrusters. Dynamic
positioning systems, including their thrusters, are to comply with the ABS Guide for Dynamic Positioning
Systems.
31 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Turbines

When fitted, boilers and pressure vessels are to be designed and constructed in accordance with Part 4,
Chapter 4 of the Steel Vessel Rules. Turbines are to comply with Sections 4-2-3 and 4-2-4 of the Steel Vessel
Rules.
33 Sea Trial
33.1 General
A final underway trial is to be made of all machinery, including the steering gear, anchor windlass and
ground tackle. The entire installation is to be operated in the presence of the Surveyor to demonstrate its
reliability and capability to function satisfactorily under operating conditions and its freedom from harmful
vibrations within the operating range. The ability of the machinery to reverse the direction of thrust of the
propeller from maximum ahead speed and to bring the craft to rest is to be demonstrated on sea trials to the
satisfaction of the Surveyor.
All automatic controls, including trips which may affect the craft’s propulsion system, are to be tested
underway or alongside the pier to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
See also 4-3-3/15.3, 4-2-1/19 and 4-2-1/21.
33.3 Residual Fuel

The viscosity of the fuel used on the sea trial will be entered in the classification report.
35 Units
These Rules are written in three systems of units, i.e., SI units, MKS units and US customary units. Each
system is to be used independently of any other system. Unless indicated otherwise, the format presentation
in these Rules of the three systems of units is as follows:
SI units (MKS units, US customary units).
37 Materials Containing Asbestos

Installation of materials which contain asbestos is prohibited.
39 Ambient Temperature
For craft of unrestricted service, ambient temperature, as indicated in 4-1-1/Table 2, is to be considered in
the selection and installation of machinery, equipment and appliances. For craft of restricted (see 1-2-2/7) or
special service, the ambient temperature appropriate to the special nature is to be considered.

Chapter 1 General
TABLE 1
Machine Installations – Inclinations
Angle of Inclination, Degrees (1)
Athwartships Fore & Aft
Installations, Components Static Dynamic Static Dynamic
Main and auxiliary machinery 15 22.5 5 7.5
Safety Equipment
emergency power installations (3) 22.5 22.5 10 10
emergency fire pumps and their drives 22.5 22.5 10 10
Switchgear
electrical and electronic appliances 22.5 (2) 22.5 (2) 10 10
and remote control systems
Notes:
1 Athwartships and fore-aft inclinations occur simultaneously.
2 Up to an angle of inclination of 45 degrees, switches and controls are to remain in their last set
position.
3 In craft designed for the carriage of liquefied gases and of chemicals, the emergency power
installation is to remain operable with the craft flooded to its permissible athwartships inclination up
to a maximum of 30 degrees.
TABLE 2
Ambient Temperatures for Unrestricted Service (2014)
Air
Installations, Location, Temperature Range (°C)
Components Arrangement (1, 2)
Machinery and Enclosed Spaces – General 0 to +45
electrical Components mounted on machinery According to specific machinery and
installations associated with high temperature installation
In spaces subject to higher According to the actual maximum
temperature (details to be submitted) ambient temperature
In spaces with temperature lower than According to the actual ambient
+45°C (details to be submitted) temperature subject to minimum +40
Open Deck −25 to +45
Water
Coolant Temperature (°C)
Seawater +32
Notes:
1 (2014) Electronic equipment is to be suitable for operations up to 55°C.
2 (2014) For environmentally controlled spaces, see 4-6-1/17.3. For automatic or remote control
and monitoring systems required to meet 4-7-9/Table 9 or 4-9-8/Table 1 of the Steel Vessel
Rules, see test 3 of 4-7-9/Table 9, or test 3 of 4-9-8/Table 1 of the Steel Vessel Rules.

PART Chapter 2: Prime Movers
4
CHAPTER 2 Prime Movers
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears ......................... 16
1 General .............................................................................................16
1.1 Construction and Installation ......................................................... 16
1.3 Piping Systems .............................................................................. 16
1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers ....................................... 16
1.7 Torsional Vibration Stresses .......................................................... 16
1.9 Crankcase Ventilation .................................................................... 16
1.11 Warning Notices ............................................................................ 17
1.13 Bedplate ........................................................................................ 17
1.15 Engine Air Intake System .............................................................. 17
3 Fuel Oil Pumps and Oil Heaters .......................................................17
3.1 Transfer Pumps ............................................................................. 17
3.3 Booster Pumps .............................................................................. 17
3.5 Heaters .......................................................................................... 17
5 Fuel Oil Pressure Piping ...................................................................17
7 Fuel Oil Injection System ..................................................................18
7.1 General .......................................................................................... 18
7.3 Piping Between Injection Pump and Injectors ................................ 18
7.5 Piping Between Booster Pump and Injection Pumps ..................... 18
9 Lubricating Oil Systems ....................................................................19
9.1 General .......................................................................................... 19
9.3 Low Oil Pressure Alarms, Temperature and Level Indicators ........ 19
9.5 Drain Pipes .................................................................................... 19
9.7 Lubricating Oil Pumps.................................................................... 19
9.9 Filters ............................................................................................. 19
9.11 Lubricating-Oil Systems for Reduction Gears ................................ 19
11 Cooling Water Systems ....................................................................20
11.1 General .......................................................................................... 20
11.3 Sea Suctions ................................................................................. 20
11.5 Strainers ........................................................................................ 20
11.7 Circulating Water Pumps ............................................................... 20
13 Starting Systems ...............................................................................21
13.1 Starting Air Systems ...................................................................... 21
13.3 Starting Air Capacity ...................................................................... 21
13.5 Starting Air Compressors ............................................................... 22
13.7 Protective Devices for Starting-air Mains ....................................... 22
13.9 Electrical Starting ........................................................................... 22
13.11 Hydraulic Starting .......................................................................... 22

15 Engine Exhaust Systems .................................................................. 23
15.1 General.......................................................................................... 23
15.3 Exhaust System Materials ............................................................. 23
15.5 Exhaust Gas Temperature ............................................................ 23
17 Couplings .......................................................................................... 23
17.1 Flexible Shaft Couplings ................................................................ 23
17.3 Flanged Couplings and Coupling Bolts ......................................... 24
19 Testing of Pumps Associated with Engine and Reduction Gear
Operation .......................................................................................... 24
19.1 Pumps Hydrostatic Tests............................................................... 24
19.3 Capacity Tests............................................................................... 24
21 Trial ................................................................................................... 24
SECTION 2 Gas Turbines ........................................................................................ 25

1 General ............................................................................................. 25
1.1 Construction and Installation ......................................................... 25
1.3 Piping Systems.............................................................................. 25
1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers ....................................... 25
1.7 Automatic Safety Devices.............................................................. 25
3 Fuel Oil System................................................................................. 26
3.1 General.......................................................................................... 26
3.3 Pumps, Heater and Strainers ........................................................ 26
3.5 Shielding of Fuel Oil Service Piping .............................................. 26
3.7 Fuel Oil Shutoff .............................................................................. 26
3.9 Drainage of Excess Fuel ............................................................... 26
3.11 Low Flash Point Fuel for Gas Turbines ......................................... 26
5 Starting Arrangements ...................................................................... 27
7 Exhaust Systems .............................................................................. 27
9 Turbine Enclosures ........................................................................... 27
11 Turbines Driving Generators ............................................................. 27
SECTION 3 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length ..................................... 28

1 Diesel Engines .................................................................................. 28
1.1 Sea Suction ................................................................................... 28
3 Gas Turbines .................................................................................... 28

PART Section 1: Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears
4
SECTION 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears
1 General
1.1 Construction and Installation

Internal combustion engines of 100 kW [135 horsepower (hp)] and over and associated reduction gears are
to be constructed in accordance with Part 4, Chapters 2 and 3 of the Steel Vessel Rules and installed in
accordance with the following requirements to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. Engines of less than 100 kW
(135 hp) and associated reduction gears are to be constructed and equipped in accordance with good
commercial practice, and will be accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the
satisfaction of the Surveyor after installation.
For engines driving generators, refer to the applicable requirements of 4-6-4/3.17 and 4-6-4/3.19.
1.3 Piping Systems

In addition to requirements for the specific system in this section, piping systems are to comply with the
applicable requirements in Part 4, Chapter 4.
1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers

Pressure vessels and heat exchangers are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Part 4,
Chapter 4 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
1.7 Torsional Vibration Stresses

Refer to 4-3-1/21.
1.9 Crankcase Ventilation

1.9.1 General
Provision is to be made for ventilation of an enclosed crankcase by means of a small breather or
by means of a slight suction not exceeding 25.4 mm (1 in.) of water. Crankcases are not to be
ventilated by a blast of air. Otherwise, the general arrangements and installation are to be such as
to preclude the possibility of free entry of air to the crankcase.
1.9.2 Piping Arrangement
Crankcase ventilation piping is not to be directly connected with any other piping system.
Crankcase ventilation pipes from each engine are normally to be led independently to the weather
and fitted with corrosion-resistant flame screens. However, crankcase ventilation pipes from two
or more engines may lead to a common oil mist manifold.

Chapter 2 Prime Movers
Section 1 Internal Combustion Engines and Reduction Gears 4-2-1
Where a common oil mist manifold is employed, the vent pipes from each engine are to be led
independently to the manifold and fitted with a corrosion-resistant flame screen within the manifold.
The arrangement is not to violate the engine manufacturer’s recommendations for crankcase
ventilation. The common oil mist manifold is to be accessible at all times under normal conditions
and effectively vented to the weather. Where venting of the manifold to the weather is accomplished
by means of a common vent pipe, the location of the manifold is to be as close as practicable to
the weather such that the length of the common vent pipe is no greater than one deck height. The
clear open area of the common vent pipe is not to be less than the aggregate cross-sectional area of
the individual vent pipes entering the manifold. The manifold is also to be fitted with an appropriate
draining arrangement.
1.11 Warning Notices

Suitable warning notices are to be attached in a conspicuous place on each engine and are to caution
against the opening of a hot crankcase for a specified period of time after shutdown based upon the size of
the engine, but not less than 10 minutes in any case. Such notice is also to warn against restarting an
overheated engine until the cause of overheating has been remedied.
1.13 Bedplate
The bedplate or crankcase is to be of rigid construction, oiltight, and provided with a sufficient number of
bolts to secure the same to the craft’s structure. The structural arrangements for supporting and securing
the main engines are to be submitted for approval. Refer to 3-2-5/1.1.3 for structural requirements. For
welded construction, see also Chapter 4 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).
1.15 Engine Air Intake System

Engine Air intakes are to be provided with filters to protect against damage from foreign matter.
3 Fuel Oil Pumps and Oil Heaters
3.1 Transfer Pumps

Refer to 4-4-4/3.
3.3 Booster Pumps (2014)

A stand-by fuel-oil booster pump is to be provided for main engines having independently driven booster
pumps. For main engines having attached fuel pumps, a complete pump may be carried as a spare in lieu of
the standby pump.
The spare pump need not be provided for multiple-engine installations provided that, in the event of the
loss of one engine, at least forty percent of the total rated propulsion power remains.
3.5 Heaters
When fuel oil heaters are required for main engine operation, at least two heaters of approximately equal
size are to be installed. The combined capacity of the heaters is to be not less than required to supply the
main engine(s) at full power.
5 Fuel Oil Pressure Piping

Pipes from booster pumps to injection systems are to be at least standard seamless steel. Pipes conveying
heated oil are to be at least standard seamless or electric-resistance-welded steel. ERW pipe is to be straight
seam and fabricated with no filler metal (e.g., ABS Grade 2 or 3 ERW). Valves and fittings may be screwed
in sizes up to and including 60 mm O.D. (2 in. N.P.S.), but screwed unions are not to be used on pressure
lines in sizes 33 mm O.D. (1 in.) and over. Valves are to be so constructed as to permit packing under pressure.

7 Fuel Oil Injection System
7.1 General
Strainers are to be provided in the fuel oil injection pump suction line.
For main propulsion engines, the arrangement is to be such that the strainers may be cleaned without
interrupting the fuel supply to the engine. However, where multiple engines are provided, a dedicated simplex
strainer may be fitted for each engine, provided the craft can maintain at least one-half of the design speed
or seven knots, whichever is less, while operating with one engine temporarily out of service until its
strainer can be cleaned.
For auxiliary engines, the arrangement is to be such that the strainers may be cleaned without undue
interruption of power necessary for propulsion. Multiple auxiliary engines, each fitted with a separate strainer
and arranged such that changeover to a standby unit can be accomplished without loss of propulsion
capability, will be acceptable for this purpose.
Where strainers are fitted in parallel to enable cleaning without disrupting the oil supply, means are to be
provided to minimize the possibility of a strainer being opened inadvertently. Strainers are to be provided
with suitable means for venting when being put in operation and being depressurized before being opened.
Strainers are to be so located that in the event of leakage, oil cannot be sprayed on to the exhaust manifold
or surfaces with temperatures in excess of 220°C (428°F).
The injection lines are to be of seamless drawn pipe. Fittings are to be extra heavy. The material used may
be either steel or nonferrous, as approved in connection with the design. Also refer to 4-4-4/3.7.
7.3 Piping Between Injection Pump and Injectors

7.3.1 Injection Piping
All external high pressure fuel delivery lines between the high-pressure fuel pumps and fuel
injectors are to be protected with a jacketed piping system capable of containing fuel from a high-
pressure line failure. A jacketed pipe incorporates an outer pipe into which the high-pressure fuel
pipe is placed, forming a permanent assembly. Metallic hose of an approved type may be accepted
as the outer pipe, where outer piping flexibility is required for the manufacturing process of the
permanent assembly. The jacketed piping system is to include means for collection of leakages
and arrangements are to be provided for an alarm to be given of a fuel line failure.
7.3.2 Fuel oil Return Piping
When the peak to peak pressure pulsation in the fuel oil return piping from the injectors exceeds
20 bar (20.5 kgf/cm2, 285 psi), jacketing of the return pipes is also required.
7.3.3 High Pressure Common Rail System
Where a high pressure common rail system is fitted to an engine, the high pressure common rail is
to be in accordance with Section 4-4-1 of the Steel Vessels Rules for pressure vessels, or a recognized
standard as listed in 4-4-1/1.5 of the Steel Vessels Rules. Alternatively, the design may be verified
by certified burst tests. Components are to be made of steel or cast steel. Components made of
steel, other than cast steel, are to withstand not less than 4 times the maximum allowable working
pressure. The cast steel common rails are to withstand not less than 5 times the maximum allowable
working pressure. The use of non-ferrous materials, cast iron and nodular iron is prohibited.
Materials are to comply with Chapter 3 of the ABS Rule for Materials and Welding (Part 2).
The high pressure common rail system is required to be properly enclosed and provided with
arrangement for leak collection and alarm in case of a failure of high pressure common rail
system, see 4-2-1/7.3.1.
7.5 Piping Between Booster Pump and Injection Pumps

Spray shields are to be fitted around flanged joints, flanged bonnets and any other flanged or threaded
connections in fuel oil piping systems under pressure exceeding 1.8 bar (1.84 kgf/cm2, 26 psi) which are
located above or near units of high temperature, including boilers, steam pipes, exhaust manifolds, silencers
or other equipment required to be insulated by 4-4-4/1.1.2, and to avoid as far as practicable oil spray or oil
leakage into machinery air intakes or other sources of ignition. The number of joints in such piping systems is
to be kept to a minimum.

9 Lubricating Oil Systems
9.1 General
The following requirements are applicable for main and auxiliary diesel engines and for reduction gears
associated with diesel propulsion. See also 4-1-1/17 and 4-4-4/9.
9.3 Low Oil Pressure Alarms, Temperature and Level Indicators

An alarm device with audible and visual signals for failure of the lubricating oil system is to be fitted.
Pressure and temperature indicators are to be installed in lubricating oil systems indicating that the proper
circulation is being maintained.
9.5 Drain Pipes

Lubricating oil drain pipes from the sump to the drain tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends. No
interconnection is to be made between the drain pipes from the crankcases of two or more engines.
9.7 Lubricating Oil Pumps (2014)

In cases where forced lubrication is used for propulsion engines, one independently driven standby pump is
to be provided in addition to the necessary pumps for normal operation. Where the size and design of an
engine is such that lubrication before starting is not necessary and an attached lubricating pump is normally
used, an independently driven standby pump is not required if a complete duplicate of the attached pump is
carried as a spare.
9.9 Filters
Oil filters are to be provided. In the case of main propulsion engines which are equipped with full-flow-
type filters, the arrangement is to be such that the strainers may be cleaned without interrupting the oil
supply. However, where multiple engines are provided, a dedicated simplex strainer may be fitted for each
engine provided the craft can maintain at least one-half of the design speed or 7 knots, whichever is less,
while operating with one engine temporarily out of service until its filter can be cleaned.
For auxiliary engines, the arrangement is to be such that the filters may be cleaned without undue interruption
of power necessary for propulsion. Multiple auxiliary engines, each fitted with a separate filter and arranged
such that changeover to a standby unit can be accomplished without loss of propulsion capability, will be
acceptable for this purpose.
The arrangement of the valving is to be such as to avoid release of debris into the lubricating-oil system
upon activation of the relieving mechanism.
Where filters are fitted in parallel to enable cleaning without disrupting the oil supply, means are to be
provided to minimize the possibility of a filter under pressure being opened inadvertently. Filters are to be
provided with suitable means for venting when being put in operation and being depressurized before
being opened. Valves and cocks with drain pipes led to a safe location are to be used for this purpose.
Filters are to be so arranged as to prevent, in the event of leakage, spraying of oil onto the exhaust manifold
and surfaces with temperatures in excess of 220°C (428°F).
9.11 Lubricating-Oil Systems for Reduction Gears

Where a reduction gear is driven by a single engine and a common lubricating-oil system is used for both
the engine and gear, the requirements in 4-2-1/9.1 through 4-2-1/9.9 are applicable.
Where a reduction gear is driven by more than one engine or any other case where a separate lubricating-
oil system is provided for the reduction gear, the following requirements are applicable.

9.11.1 Pumps
Two lubricating-oil pumps are to be provided, at least one of which is to be independently driven.
The capacity of each pump is to be sufficient for continuous operation of the main propulsion
plant at its maximum rated power.
9.11.2 Coolers
One or more lubricating oil coolers with means for controlling the oil temperature is to be provided
together with two separate cooling water pumps, at least one of which is to be independently driven.
The coolers are to have sufficient capacity to maintain the required oil temperature while the main
propulsion plant is operating continuously at its maximum rated power.
9.11.3 Indicators
Indicators are to be fitted by which the pressure and temperature of the water inlet and oil outlet
may be determined. Gravity tanks are to be fitted with a low level alarm and a sight glass is to be
fitted in the overflow line to the sump. Pressure systems are to be fitted with a low pressure alarm.
Sump and gravity tanks are to be provided with suitable gauges for determining the level of oil
within the tank.
9.11.4 Filters
A filter is to be provided in the lubricating-oil piping to each reduction gear. The requirements in
4-2-1/9.9 are applicable.
11 Cooling Water Systems
11.1 General
Means are to be provided to ascertain the temperature of the circulating water at the return from each
engine and to indicate that the proper circulation is being maintained. Drain cocks are to be provided at the
lowest point of all jackets. For relief valves, see 4-4-1/9.15.
11.3 Sea Suctions

At least two independent sea suctions are to be provided for supplying water to the engine jackets or to the
heat exchangers, except that for multihull craft classed with restricted service (see 1-1-2/7), special
consideration may be given. The sea suctions are to be located as to minimize the possibility of blanking
off the cooling water. For multiple engine installations fitted with individual sea suctions for each engine,
two means of supplying cooling water to each engine may be omitted where the craft are fitted with three
or more propulsion units and can maintain half (1/2) design speed with one propulsion shut down.
11.5 Strainers
Where seawater is used for direct cooling of the engines, unless other equivalent arrangements are specially
approved, suitable strainers are to be fitted between the sea valves and the pump suctions. The strainers are
to be either of the duplex type or otherwise arranged so they can be cleaned without interrupting the cooling
water supply.
11.7 Circulating Water Pumps (2014)

There are to be at least two means for supplying cooling water to main and auxiliary engines, compressors,
coolers, reduction gears, etc. One of these means is to be independently driven and may consist of a
connection from a suitable pump of adequate size normally used for other purposes, such as a general
service pump, or in the case of fresh-water circulation one of the craft’s fresh-water pumps. Where, due to
the design of the engine, the connection of an independent pump is impracticable, the independently driven
stand-by pump will not be required if a complete duplicate of the attached pump is carried as a spare.

13 Starting Systems
13.1 Starting Air Systems (2013)

The design and construction of all air reservoirs are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements
of Part 4, Chapter 4 of the Steel Vessel Rules. The piping system is to be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Part 4, Chapter 4 of these Rules. The air reservoirs are to be so installed as to make the
drain connections effective under extreme conditions of trim. Compressed air systems are to be fitted with
relief valves and each air reservoir which can be isolated from a relief valve is to be provided with its own
safety valves or equivalent.
All discharge pipes from starting air compressors are to be led directly to the starting air reservoirs, and all
starting pipes from the air reservoirs to main or auxiliary engines are to be entirely separate from the
compressor discharge piping system.
13.3 Starting Air Capacity (2013)

Craft having main engines arranged for air starting are to be provided with at least two starting-air
reservoirs of approximately equal size. The total capacity of the starting-air reservoirs is to be sufficient to
provide, without recharging the air reservoirs, at least the number of starts stated below.
If other compressed air systems, such as control air, are supplied from starting air reservoirs, the capacity
of the air reservoirs is to be sufficient for continued operation of these systems after the air necessary for
the required number of consecutive starts has been used.
13.3.1 Diesel Propulsion
The minimum number of consecutive starts (total) required to be provided from the starting-air
reservoirs is to be based upon the arrangement of the engines and shafting systems as indicated in
the following table.
Single Propeller Craft Multiple Propeller Craft

Engine Type One engine coupled Two or more One engine coupled Two or more engines
to shaft directly or engines coupled to to each shaft coupled to each shaft
through reduction shaft through clutch directly or through through clutch and
gear and reduction gear reduction gear reduction gear
Reversible 12 16 16 16
Non-reversible 6 8 8 8
For arrangements of engine and shafting systems which differ from those indicated in the table, the
capacity of the starting-air reservoirs will be specially considered based on an equivalent number
of starts.
13.3.2 Diesel-electric Propulsion
The minimum number of consecutive starts required to be provided from the starting-air reservoirs
is to be determined from the following equation:
S = 6 + G(G − 1)
where
S = total number of consecutive starts
G = number of engines necessary to maintain sufficient electrical load to permit
craft transit at full seagoing power and maneuvering. The value of G need
not exceed 3.

13.5 Starting Air Compressors (2013)

For craft having internal-combustion engines arranged for air starting, there are to be two or more air
compressors, at least one of which is to be driven independently of the main propulsion unit, and the total
capacity of air compressors driven independently of the main propulsion unit is to be not less than 50% of
the total required.
The total capacity of the air compressors is to be sufficient to supply within one hour the quantity of the air
need to satisfy 4-2-1/13.3 by charging the reservoirs from atmospheric pressure. The capacity is to be
approximately equally divided between the number of compressors fitted, excluding an emergency compressor,
where fitted.
The arrangement for dead ship air starting is to be such that the necessary air for the first charge can be
produced onboard without external aid. See 4-1-1/19.
13.7 Protective Devices for Starting-air Mains

In order to protect starting air mains against explosions arising from improper functioning of starting
valves, an isolation non-return valve or equivalent is to be installed at the starting air supply connection to
each engine. Where engine bores exceed 230 mm (91/16 in.), a bursting disc or flame arrester is to be fitted
in way of the starting valve of each cylinder for direct reversing engines having a main starting manifold or
at the supply inlet to the starting-air manifold for non-reversing engines.
The above requirement is applicable to engines where the air is directly injected into the cylinder. It is not
intended to apply to engines utilizing air start motors.
13.9 Electrical Starting

13.9.1 Main Engine
Where the main engine is arranged for electric starting, at least two separate batteries (or separate
sets of batteries) are to be fitted. The arrangement is to be such that the batteries (or sets of
batteries) cannot be connected simultaneously in parallel. Each battery (or set) is to be capable of
starting the main engine when in cold and ready to start conditions. The combined capacity of the
batteries is to be sufficient without recharging to provide within 30 minutes the number of starts of
main engines as required for air starting in 4-2-1/13.3, and if arranged also to supply starting for
auxiliary engines, the number of starts required in 4-2-1/13.9.2. See also 4-2-1/13.9.3.
13.9.2 Auxiliary Engine
Electric starting arrangements for auxiliary engines are to have at least two separate batteries (or
separate sets of batteries) or may be supplied by separate circuits from the main engine batteries
when such are provided. Where one auxiliary engine is arranged for electric starting, one battery
(or set) may be accepted in lieu of two separate batteries (or sets). The capacity of the batteries for
starting the auxiliary engines is to be sufficient for at least three starts for each engine.
13.9.3 Other Requirements
The starting batteries (or set of batteries) are to be used for starting and for engine’s own control
and monitoring purpose only. When the starting batteries are used for engine’s own control and
monitoring purpose, the aggregate capacity of the batteries is to be sufficient for continued operation
of such system in addition to the required number of starting capacity. Provisions are to be made
to continuously maintain the stored energy at all times. See also 4-6-2/5.19 and 4-6-3/3.7.
13.11 Hydraulic Starting

Hydraulic oil accumulators for starting the main propulsion engines are to have sufficient capacity without
recharging for starting the main engines, as required in 4-2-1/13.3.

15 Engine Exhaust Systems
15.1 General (2014)

All engine exhaust systems are to be adequate to carry out the designed function of the machinery and that
safe operation of the craft is not put at risk. The exhaust pipes are to be water-jacketed or effectively
insulated. Exhaust systems are to be so installed that the craft’s structure cannot be damaged by heat from
the systems. Exhaust pipes of several engines or gas turbines are not to be connected together but are to be
run separately to the atmosphere unless arranged to prevent the return of gases to an idle engine or turbine.
Exhaust lines which are led overboard near the waterline are to be protected against the possibility of the
water finding its way inboard. As a minimum, the highest point of the line (measured to the bottom of the
pipe) is to be not less than 0.02L above the deepest seagoing draft, or to be above the deepest waterline
accounting for trim (see 3-2-2/1.1), whichever is greater. The exhaust opening in the shell shall be above
deepest seagoing draft. Exhaust systems are to be so arranged as to minimize the intake of exhaust gases
into manned spaces, air-conditioning systems, and engine intakes. Exhaust systems are not to discharge
into air-cushion intakes, where provided.
15.3 Exhaust System Materials

Materials used in the exhaust system are to be resistant to saltwater corrosion, galvanically compatible to
each other and resistant to exhaust products. Plate flanges will be considered where the specified material
is suitable for exhaust piping pressures and temperatures.
15.5 Exhaust Gas Temperature

Propulsion engines with a power rating exceeding 500 kW/cylinder are to be fitted with means to display
the exhaust as temperature gauge at each cylinder.
17 Couplings
17.1 Flexible Shaft Couplings (2014)

Details of the various components of flexible couplings for main propulsion machinery and ship’s service
generator sets are to be submitted for approval.
17.1.1 Design
Flexible couplings intended for use in propulsion shafting are to be of approved designs. Couplings
are to be designed for the rated torque, fatigue and avoidance of overheating. Where elastomeric
material is used as a torque-transmitting component, it is to withstand environmental and service
conditions over the design life of the coupling, taking into consideration the full range of maximum
to minimum vibratory torque. Flexible coupling design will be evaluated, based on submitted
engineering analyses.
17.1.2 Torsional Displacement Limiter
Flexible couplings with elastomer or spring type flexible members, whose failure will lead to total
loss of propulsion capability of the craft, such as that used in the line shaft of a single propeller
craft, are to be provided with a torsional displacement limiter. The device is to lock the coupling
or prevent excessive torsional displacement when a pre-determined torsional displacement limit is
exceeded. Operation of the craft under such circumstances may be at reduced power. Warning
notices for such reduced power are to be posted at all propulsion control stations.
17.1.3 Barred Range
Conditions where the allowable vibratory torque or the allowable dissipated power may be
exceeded under the normal operating range of the engine are to be identified and are to be marked
as a barred range in order to avoid continuous operation within this range.
17.1.4 Diesel Generators
Flexible couplings for diesel generator sets are to be capable of absorbing short time impact torque
due to electrical short-circuit conditions up to 6 (six) times the nominal torque.

17.3 Flanged Couplings and Coupling Bolts

Refer to 4-3-1/19.5 for flanged couplings.
Elongation for auxiliary machinery coupling bolts made of steel having an ultimate tensile strength over
690 N/mm2 (70 kgf/mm2, 100,000 psi) will be subject to special consideration. Also refer to 4-3-1/19.1 and
4-3-1/19.3.
19 Testing of Pumps Associated with Engine and Reduction Gear

Operation
Pumps associated with engine and reduction gear operation (oil, water, fuel) utilized with engines having
bores exceeding 300 mm (11.8 in.) are to be provided with certificates issued by the Surveyor. The following
tests are to be conducted to the Surveyor’s satisfaction:
19.1 Pumps Hydrostatic Tests

Independently-driven pumps are to be hydrostatically tested to 4 bar (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi), but not less than
1.5P, where P is the maximum working pressure in the part concerned.
19.3 Capacity Tests

Tests of pump capacities are to be conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor with the pump operating at
design conditions. Capacity tests will not be required for individual pumps produced on a production line
basis, provided the Surveyor is satisfied from periodic inspections and the manufacturer’s quality assurance
procedures that the pump capacities are acceptable.
21 Trial
Before final acceptance, the entire installation is to be operated in the presence of the Surveyor to
demonstrate its ability to function satisfactorily under operating conditions and its freedom from harmful
vibration at speeds within the operating range. See also 4-1-1/33.
For conventional propulsion gear units above 1120 kW (1500 HP), a record of gear-tooth contact is to be
made at the trials. To facilitate the survey of extent and uniformity of gear-tooth contact, selected bands of
pinion or gear teeth on each meshing are to be coated beforehand with copper or layout dye. See 7-6-2/1.1.2.
The gear-tooth examination for conventional gear units 1120 kW (1500 HP) and below and all epicyclic gear
units will be subject to special consideration. The gear manufacturer’s recommendations will be considered.

PART Section 2: Gas Turbines
4
SECTION 2 Gas Turbines
1 General
1.1 Construction and Installation

Gas turbines having a rated power of 100 kW (135 hp) and over, intended for propulsion and for auxiliary
services essential for propulsion, maneuvering and safety (see 4-1-1/3.1) of the craft, are to be designed,
constructed, tested, certified and installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 4-2-3 of the Steel
Vessel Rules and this Section.
Gas turbines having a rated power of less than 100 kW (135 hp) are not required to comply with the
provision of this Section but are to be designed, constructed and equipped in accordance with good
commercial and marine practice. Acceptance of the gas turbines will be based on the manufacturer’s
affidavit, verification of gas turbines nameplate data and subject to a satisfactory performance test after
installation conducted in the presence of the Surveyor.
Gas turbines having a rated power of 100 kW (135 hp) and over, intended for services considered not
essential for propulsion, maneuvering and safety, are not required to be designed, constructed and certified
by ABS in accordance with the provisions of this section. They are to comply with safety features, such as
overspeed protection, etc., as provided in 4-2-3/7 of the Steel Vessel Rules hereunder, as applicable, and
are subject to a satisfactory performance test after installation, conducted in the presence of the Surveyor.
1.3 Piping Systems

Piping systems for gas turbines are to comply with the applicable requirements in Part 4, Chapter 4 of
these Rules in addition to this section.
1.5 Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers

Pressure vessels and heat exchangers are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Part 4,
Chapter 4 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
1.7 Automatic Safety Devices

Details of the manufacturer’s proposed automatic safety devices to guard against hazardous conditions
arising in the event of malfunction in the turbine installation are to be provided together with the Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA).

Section 2 Gas Turbines 4-2-2
3 Fuel Oil System
3.1 General
In addition to 4-2-1, 4-4-4/1, 4-4-4/3 and 4-4-4/7, fuel oil systems for gas turbines are to comply with the
following.
3.3 Pumps, Heater and Strainers

There are to be at least two independent fuel oil service pumps, each of sufficient capacity to supply
turbines at full power and arranged that one may be overhauled while the other is in service.. Oil heaters
are to be similarly installed in multiples.
Oil strainers are to be installed in the suction and discharge lines and are to be either of the duplex type or
other approved filter which is capable of being cleaned without interrupting the oil supply. Where
strainers are fitted in parallel to enable cleaning without disrupting the oil supply, means are to be provided
to minimize the possibility of a strainer under pressure being opened inadvertently. Strainers are to be
provided with suitable means for venting when being put into operation and being depressurized before
being opened. Valves or cocks with drain pipes led to a safe location are to be used for this purpose.
3.5 Shielding of Fuel Oil Service Piping

Piping between the service pump and the combustor is to be effectively jacked or shielded as in 4-2-1/5,
4-2-1/7.3.1 and 4-2-1/7.3.2.
3.7 Fuel Oil Shutoff

3.7.1 Automatic Shutoff
Each gas turbine is to be fitted with a quick closing device which will automatically shut off the
fuel supply upon sensing malfunction on its operation. Refer to 4-2-3/7.7 of the Steel Vessel Rules
for complete list automatic shutdowns.
3.7.2 Hand Trip Gear
Hand trip gear for shutting off the fuel supply in an emergency is also to be fitted. Refer to 4-2-3/7.9
of the Steel Vessel Rules.
3.9 Drainage of Excess Fuel

Provision is to be made to drain all excess fuel oil, particularly fuel which might reach the interior of the
jet pipe or exhaust system after a false start or after stopping, to a safe position so as to avoid a fire hazard.
3.11 Low Flash Point Fuel for Gas Turbines

Fuel with a flash point below 43°C (109°F), but not less than 35°C (95°F), may be permitted for gas
turbine installations, provided the arrangements for storage, distribution and utilization of the fuel are
suitable with regard to the hazard of fire and explosion which the use of such fuel may entail, and the
safety of the craft and persons on board is preserved
The arrangements are to comply with the following provisions:
3.11.1 Storage Tanks
Tanks for the storage of such fuel are to be located outside of any machinery space and at a distance
of not less than 760 mm (30 in.) inboard from the shell and bottom plating and from decks and
bulkheads. A lesser distance may be specially considered where the craft’s arrangements do not
permit such an installation.
3.11.2 Overpressure
Arrangements are to be provided to prevent overpressure in any fuel tank or in any part of the oil
fuel system, including the filling pipes. Any relief valves and air or overflow pipes are to discharge
to a safe position and are to terminate with approved flame arrestors.

Section 2 Gas Turbines 4-2-2
3.11.3 Ventilation
The spaces in which fuel tanks are located are to be mechanically ventilated, using exhaust fans and
providing not less than six air changes per hour. The fans are to be such as to avoid the possibility
of ignition of flammable gas-air mixtures. Suitable wire mesh guards are to be fitted over inlet and
outlet ventilation openings. The outlets for such exhausts are to be discharged to a safe position.
‘No Smoking’ signs are to be posted at the entrances to such spaces.
3.11.4 Electrical Distribution
Earthed electrical distribution systems are not to be used, with the exception of earthed intrinsically
safe circuits.
3.11.5 Electrical Equipment
Suitable certified safe type electrical equipment is to be used in all spaces where fuel leakage
could occur, including the ventilation system. Only electrical equipment and fittings essential for
operational purposes are to be fitted in such spaces.
3.11.6 Vapor Detection
A fixed vapor detection system is to be installed in each space through which fuel lines pass, with
alarms provided at the continuously manned control station.
3.11.7 Leakage
Every fuel tank is, where necessary, to be provided with “savealls” or gutters which would catch
any fuel which may leak from such a tank.
3.11.8 Fueling Arrangements
Craft-to-shore fuel connections are to be of a closed type and are to be provided with suitable
earthing arrangements to be used during bunkering operations. ‘No Smoking’ and ‘No Naked
Lights’ signs are to be posted in the vicinity of the bunkering station.
3.11.9 Fire Detection
Each space containing a non-integral fuel tank is to be fitted with fire-detection and fixed fire
extinguishing systems complying with 4-5-1/13.
5 Starting Arrangements
Staring arrangements for gas turbines installations are to be capable of providing an equivalent number of
starts as that required in 4-2-1/13
7 Exhaust Systems
Exhaust gas systems are to be in accordance with 4-2-1/15 as well as in accordance with the turbine
manufacturer’s recommendations. Gas turbine exhausts are to be located and arranged so that hot exhaust
gases are directed away from walkways and other areas to which personnel have access.
9 Turbine Enclosures
Where an acoustic enclosure is fitted which completely surrounds the gas turbine and the high-pressure oil
pipes, a fire detection and extinguishing system is to be provided for the acoustic enclosure.
11 Turbines Driving Generators

Gas turbines driving generators are also to comply with Section 4-2-3 of the Steel Vessel Rules.

PART Section 3: Craft less than 24 meters (70 feet) in Length
4
SECTION 3 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length
1 Diesel Engines
Diesel engines are to meet the requirements of Section 4-2-1, as applicable except that:
1.1 Sea Suction

At least two independent sea suctions are to be provided for supplying water to the engine jackets or to the
heat exchangers, except that for multihull craft classed with restricted service (see 1-1-2/7), special consideration
may be given. The sea suctions are to be located as to minimize the possibility of blanking off the cooling
water. For multiple engine installations fitted with individual sea suctions for each engine, two means of
supplying cooling water to each engine may be omitted where the craft are fitted with two or more
propulsion units and can maintain half (1/2) design speed with one propulsion shut down.
3 Gas Turbines
Gas turbines are to meet the requirements of Section 4-2-2, as applicable

PART Chapter 3: Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
4
CHAPTER 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 Propulsion Shafting ............................................................................. 34
1 General ............................................................................................. 34
1.1 Definitions...................................................................................... 34
3 Plans and Data to be Submitted ....................................................... 34
5 Materials and Testing........................................................................ 34
5.1 Material.......................................................................................... 34
5.3 Material Tests ................................................................................ 35
5.5 Inspection ...................................................................................... 35
5.7 Weldability ..................................................................................... 35
7 Design and Construction................................................................... 35
7.1 Shaft Diameters ............................................................................. 35
7.3 Hollow Shafts ................................................................................ 37
9 Key .................................................................................................... 37
11 Tail Shaft Liners ................................................................................ 38
11.1 Thickness at Bearings ................................................................... 38
11.3 Thickness Between Bearings ........................................................ 38
11.5 Continuous Fitted Liners................................................................ 38
11.7 Fit Between Bearings .................................................................... 38
11.9 Material and Fit .............................................................................. 38
11.11 Glass Reinforced Plastic Coating .................................................. 38
11.13 Stainless Steel Cladding................................................................ 39
13 Tail Shaft Bearings............................................................................ 39
13.1 Water Lubricated Bearings ............................................................ 39
13.3 Oil Lubricated Bearings ................................................................. 39
15 Tail Shaft Propeller End Design........................................................ 39
15.1 Keyed ............................................................................................ 39
15.3 Keyless .......................................................................................... 39
17 Flexible Couplings............................................................................. 40
19 Solid Couplings ................................................................................. 40
19.1 Fitted Bolts .................................................................................... 40
19.3 Non-fitted Bolts .............................................................................. 40
19.5 Flanges.......................................................................................... 41
19.7 Locking Arrangement .................................................................... 41
19.9 Demountable Couplings ................................................................ 41
21 Cardan Shaft ..................................................................................... 41

23 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibration ........................................41
23.1 General .......................................................................................... 41
23.3 Craft 61 m (200 ft) in Length and Over .......................................... 42
23.5 Craft Below 61 m (200 ft) in Length ............................................... 42
25 Circulating Currents ..........................................................................42
TABLE 1 Shaft Design Factor K for Line Shafts, Thrust Shafts, and
Oil Distribution Shafts..............................................................36
TABLE 2 Shaft Design Factor K for Tail Shafts and Stern Tube
Shafts ......................................................................................37
SECTION 2 Propellers .............................................................................................. 43

1 General .............................................................................................43
1.1 Application ..................................................................................... 43
1.3 Definitions ...................................................................................... 43
1.5 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted ........................................... 44
3 Materials............................................................................................45
3.1 Normally Used Propeller Materials ................................................ 45
3.3 Stud Materials ................................................................................ 45
3.5 Material Testing ............................................................................. 45
5 Design ...............................................................................................45
5.1 Blade Thickness – Fixed Pitch Propeller ....................................... 45
5.3 Blade Thickness – Controllable-pitch Propellers............................ 47
5.5 Blade Thickness – Highly Skewed Fixed-pitch Propellers ............. 48
5.7 Blades of Unusual Design ............................................................. 49
5.9 Blade-root Fillets ............................................................................ 49
5.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Pitch Actuation System ................. 49
5.13 Propeller Fitting.............................................................................. 51
7 Certification .......................................................................................54
7.1 Material Tests ................................................................................ 54
7.3 Inspection and Certification ........................................................... 54
9 Installation, Tests and Trial ...............................................................55
9.1 Keyed Propellers ........................................................................... 55
9.3 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Fit of Studs and Nuts .................... 55
9.5 Protection Against Corrosion ......................................................... 55
9.7 Circulating Currents ....................................................................... 55
9.9 Keyed and Keyless Propellers – Contact Area Check and
Securing ........................................................................................ 55
9.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Hydrostatic Tests .......................... 55
9.13 Sea Trial ........................................................................................ 55
TABLE 1 Propeller Materials ..................................................................45

TABLE 2 Material Constants ..................................................................53
TABLE 3 Estimated Propeller Thrust, T .................................................53
FIGURE 1 Maximum Skew Angle ............................................................44

FIGURE 2 Rake and Rake Angle .............................................................44
FIGURE 3 Theoretical Contact Surface Between Hub and Shaft ............52

SECTION 3 Steering Gear ........................................................................................ 56
1 General ............................................................................................. 56
1.1 Application ..................................................................................... 56
1.3 Definitions...................................................................................... 56
1.5 Plans and Data .............................................................................. 57
1.7 Power Operation ........................................................................... 57
1.9 Main Steering Gear ....................................................................... 57
1.11 Auxiliary Steering Gear.................................................................. 57
1.13 Steering Gear Compartment Unit Location.................................... 58
3 Materials............................................................................................ 58
3.1 General.......................................................................................... 58
5 Design ............................................................................................... 59
5.1 Power Gear Stops ......................................................................... 59
5.3 Mechanical Components ............................................................... 59
5.4 Steering Gear Torque .................................................................... 59
5.5 Tiller .............................................................................................. 60
5.7 Pin ................................................................................................. 61
5.9 Tie Rod (Jockey Bar) ..................................................................... 61
5.11 Rudder Actuators .......................................................................... 61
5.13 Mechanical Steering Gear ............................................................. 62
7 Hydraulic System .............................................................................. 62
7.1 Pipes, Valves and Fittings ............................................................. 62
7.3 Relief Valves ................................................................................. 62
7.5 Filtration......................................................................................... 62
7.7 Single Failure ................................................................................ 63
7.9 Reservoir and Storage Tank.......................................................... 63
9 Power Units ....................................................................................... 63
9.1 Prototype Test ............................................................................... 63
9.3 Production Unit Test ...................................................................... 63
11 Steering Gear Control System .......................................................... 64
11.1 Locations of Control ...................................................................... 64
11.3 General.......................................................................................... 64
11.5 Control System Power Supply ....................................................... 65
11.7 Communication ............................................................................. 65
11.9 Instrumentation and Alarms........................................................... 65
11.11 Operating Instructions ................................................................... 67
13 Electrical Power Supply .................................................................... 67
15 Testing and Trials ............................................................................. 67
15.1 Testing of Piping System ............................................................... 67
15.3 Trials ............................................................................................. 68
SECTION 4 Waterjets ............................................................................................... 69

1 General ............................................................................................. 69
3 Design ............................................................................................... 69
5 Housings ........................................................................................... 69
7 Reversing Mechanisms..................................................................... 70
9 Impeller Bearings .............................................................................. 70

SECTION 5 Propulsion Redundancy ...................................................................... 71
1 General .............................................................................................71
1.1 Application ..................................................................................... 71
1.3 Objective ........................................................................................ 71
1.5 Definitions ...................................................................................... 71
1.7 Plans and Data to be Submitted .................................................... 72
3 Classification Notations.....................................................................72
5 Single Failure Concept......................................................................74
5.1 Single Failure Criteria .................................................................... 74
7 Propulsion and Steering Capability ...................................................74
7.1 Craft Without + in Class Notation ................................................... 74
7.3 Craft with + in Class Notation ........................................................ 74
9 System Design ..................................................................................75
9.1 Propulsion Machinery and Propulsors ........................................... 75
9.3 System Segregation ...................................................................... 75
9.5 Steering Systems........................................................................... 75
9.7 Auxiliary Service Systems ............................................................. 76
9.9 Electrical Distribution Systems ...................................................... 76
9.11 Control and Monitoring Systems .................................................... 77
9.13 Communication Systems ............................................................... 77
11 Fire Precautions ................................................................................77
13 Operating Manual .............................................................................77
15 Test and Trial ....................................................................................78
15.1 Fault Simulation Test ..................................................................... 78
15.3 Communication System Test ......................................................... 78
17 Survey After Construction .................................................................78
FIGURE 1 Arrangements of Propulsion Redundancy ..............................73
SECTION 6 Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft ............................ 79
1 General .............................................................................................79
1.1 Application ..................................................................................... 79
1.3 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted ........................................... 79
3 Materials............................................................................................79
3.1 General .......................................................................................... 79
5 Design ...............................................................................................79
5.1 General .......................................................................................... 79
SECTION 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length ..................................... 80

1 General .............................................................................................80
3 Shafting and Gears ...........................................................................80
3.1 Outboard Engines .......................................................................... 80
3.3 Inboard/Outboard Installations ....................................................... 80
3.5 Inboard Installations....................................................................... 80
3.7 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibrations .................................... 80
3.9 Materials ........................................................................................ 80

5 Propellers .......................................................................................... 81
7 Steering Gears .................................................................................. 81
7.1 General.......................................................................................... 81
7.3 Materials ........................................................................................ 81
7.5 System Arrangements ................................................................... 81
7.7 Mechanical Steering Gears ........................................................... 81
9 Inboard/Outboard and Outboard Installations .................................. 82
9.1 General.......................................................................................... 82
9.3 Instrumentation .............................................................................. 82
9.5 Communications ............................................................................ 82
9.7 Certification ................................................................................... 82
9.9 Installation, Tests and Trials .......................................................... 82
11 Waterjets ........................................................................................... 82

PART Section 1: Propulsion Shafting
4
SECTION 1 Propulsion Shafting
1 General
The construction of the propellers and propulsion shafting is to be carried out in accordance with the
following requirements and to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
1.1 Definitions (2014)

For the purposes of using shaft diameter formulas in this section, the following definitions apply.
1.1.1 Tail Shaft
Tail Shaft is the part of the propulsion shaft aft of the forward end of the propeller end bearing.
1.1.2 Stern Tube Shaft
Stern Tube Shaft or Tube Shaft is the part of the propulsion shaft passing through the stern tube
from the forward end of the propeller end bearing to the in-board shaft seal.
1.1.3 Line Shaft
Line Shaft is the part of the propulsion shaft in-board of the vessel.
1.1.4 Thrust Shaft
Thrust Shaft is that part of the propulsion shaft which transmits thrust to the thrust bearing.
1.1.5 Oil Distribution Shaft
Oil Distribution Shaft is a hollow propulsion shaft where the bore and radial holes are used for
distribution of hydraulic oil in controllable pitch propeller installations.
3 Plans and Data to be Submitted

Plans and specifications are to be submitted in accordance with 4-1-1/7.23, as indicated in the following:
Detailed plans together with material specifications of the propulsion shafting, couplings, coupling bolts,
propulsion shafting arrangement, tail shaft bearings and lubrication system, if oil-lubricated, are to be
submitted. Calculations are to be included for flexible couplings and demountable couplings. See 4-2-1/17
and 4-3-1/19.9. See also 4-3-1/23.
5 Materials and Testing
5.1 Material
Materials for propulsion shafts, couplings and coupling bolts, keys and clutches are to be of forged steel or
rolled bars, as appropriate, in accordance with Section 2-3-7 and Section 2-3-8 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2) or other specifications as may be specially approved with a specific design.
Where materials other than those specified in the Rules are proposed, full details of chemical composition,
heat treatment and mechanical properties, as appropriate, are to be submitted for approval.

Chapter 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery
Section 1 Propulsion Shafting 4-3-1
5.1.1 Ultimate Tensile Strength

In general, the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of steel used for propulsion shafting is
to be between 400 N/mm2 (40.7 kgf/mm2, 58,000 psi) and 930 N/mm2 (95.0 kgf/mm2, 135,000 psi).
5.1.2 Elongation
Carbon Steel with elongation (Lo/d = 4) of less than 16% or (Lo/d = 5) of less than 15% is not to be
used for any shafting component, with the exception that material for non-fitted alloy steel
coupling bolts manufactured to a recognized standard may have elongation (Lo/d = 4) of not less
than 10% or (Lo/d = 5) of not less than 9%.
Alloy steels with elongation less than (Lo/d = 4) 16% or (Lo/d = 5) 15% may be applied subject to
approval.
5.3 Material Tests

5.3.1 General (2016)
Materials for all torque-transmitting parts, including shafts, clutches, couplings, coupling bolts and
keys are to be tested in the presence of the Surveyor. The materials are to meet the specifications
of 2-3-7/1, 2-3-7/5, 2-3-7/7, or 2-3-8/1 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) or
other specifications approved in connection with the design.
5.3.2 Alternative Test Requirements
Materials for shafting, couplings and coupling bolts transmitting 373 kW (500 HP) or less will be
accepted based on the manufacturer’s certified mill tests and hardness check witnessed by the Surveyor.
Bolts manufactured to a recognized standard and used as coupling bolts will not require material testing.
5.5 Inspection
Shafting and couplings are to be surface-examined at the manufacturer. Tail shafts in the finished machine
condition are to be subjected to a nondestructive examination such as magnetic particle, dye penetrant or
other nondestructive methods and are to be free of linear discontinuities greater than 3.2 mm (1/8 in.),
except that in the following locations, the shafts are to be free of all linear discontinuities:
5.5.1 Tapered Tail Shafts
The forward one-third length of the taper, including the forward end of any keyway and an equal
length of the parallel part of the shaft immediately forward of the taper.
5.5.2 Flanged Tail Shafts
The flange fillet area.
5.7 Weldability
Steel used for tail shafts is to have carbon content in accordance with 2-3-7/1.1.2 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2).
7 Design and Construction
7.1 Shaft Diameters

The least diameter of propulsion shafting is to be determined by the following equation:
D = 100K 3 ( H R)[c1 (U + c 2 )]
where
c1 = 560 (41.95, 3.695) for single screw craft 45.7 m (150 ft) in length and over and
multiple screw craft 61 m (200 ft) in length and over.
= 416.4 (31.22, 2.75) for single screw craft below 45.7 m (150 ft) and multiple screw
craft below 61 m (200 ft).
c2 = 160 (16.3, 23180)

D = greater of the required solid shaft diameter as required by 4-3-1/7 or 4-3-1/23

(reflective of static and dynamic stresses), except hollow shaft; mm (in.)
K = shaft design factor (see 4-3-1/Table 1 and 4-3-1/Table 2)
H = power at rated speed, kW (PS, HP), [1 PS = 0.735 kW, 1 HP = 0.746 kW]
R = rpm at rated speed
U = minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of the material, in N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi).
For calculation purposes, U is not to be taken as more than the following:
= 415 N/mm2 (42.2 kgf/mm2, 60,000 psi) for carbon, and alloy steel tail shafts fitted
with salt-water lubricated bearings and non-continuous shaft liners.
= 600 N/mm2 (61.2 kgf/mm2, 87,000 psi) for carbon, alloy and austenitic stainless steel tail
shafts fitted with oil lubricated bearings or with continuous shaft liners or equivalent.
= 930 N/mm2 (95.0 kgf/mm2, 135,000 psi) for other shaft sections and for tail shafts
manufactured of age-hardened martensitic stainless steels, higher-strength austenitic
stainless steels such as ASTM Type XM-19, XM-21, or XM-28, or other high
strength alloy materials.
Note: In general, the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of steel used for propulsion shafting is to be between
400 N/mm2 (40.7 kgf/mm2, 58,000 psi) and 930 N/mm2 (95.0 kgf/mm2, 135,000 psi). See also 4-3-1/5.1.
TABLE 1
Shaft Design Factor K for Line Shafts, Thrust Shafts, and Oil Distribution Shafts
Design Features (1)
In way of
Axial
Radial On Both Bearings
Holes, Sides of used as
Integral Shrink Fit Transverse Longitudinal Thrust Thrust Straight
Propulsion Type Flange Coupling Keyways (2) Holes (3) Slots (4) Collars Bearings Sections
Turbine
Electric Drives
Diesel Drives through 0.95 0.95 1.045 1.045 1.14 1.045 1.045 0.95
slip couplings (electric
or hydraulic)
All Other Diesel Drives 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0
Notes:
1 Geometric features other than those listed will be specially considered
2 After a length of not less than 0.2D from the end of the keyway, the shaft diameter may be reduced to the diameter
calculated for straight sections.
Fillet radii in the transverse section of the bottom of the keyway are to be not less than 0.0125D
3 Diameter of bore not more than 0.3D
4 Length of the slot not more than 1.4D, width of the slot not more than 0.2D, whereby D is calculated with k = 1.0

TABLE 2
Shaft Design Factor K for Tail Shafts and Stern Tube Shafts (See Note 1)
Propeller Attachment Method (2)
Propulsion Keyless Attachment
Type Stern Tube Configuration Keyed (3) by Shrink Fit (4) Flanged (5) Stern Tube Shafts (7, 8)
All Oil-lubricated bearings 1.26 1.22 1.22 1.15
All Water-lubricated bearings 1.26 1.22 1.22 1.15
with continuous shaft liners
or equivalent
All Water-lubricated bearings 1.29 1.25 1.25 1.18
with non-continuous shaft
liners(6)
Notes:
1 The tail shaft diameter may be reduced to the stern tube shaft diameter forward of the bearing supporting
the propeller, and the stern tube shaft diameter reduced to the line shaft diameter inboard of the forward
stern tube seal.
2 Other attachments are subject to special consideration.
3 Fillet radii in the transverse section at the bottom of the keyway are not to be less than 0.0125D.
4 See also 4-3-1/15.
5 The fillet radius in the base of the flange for the tail shaft supporting the propeller is to be at least 0.125D.
Special consideration will be given to fillets of multiple radii design. The fillet radius is to be accessible
for nondestructive examination during tail shaft surveys. See 7-5-1/3 and Section 7-5-2 of the ABS
Rules for Survey After Construction (Part 7). For other fillet radii, see 4-3-1/19.5.
6 For Great Lakes service, K factor corresponding to continuous liner configuration may be used.
7 K factor applies to shafting between the forward edge of the propeller-end bearing and the inboard stern
tube seal.
8 Where keyed couplings are fitted on stern tube shaft, the shaft diameters are to be increased by 10% in
way of the coupling. See Note 2 of 4-3-1/Table 1.
7.3 Hollow Shafts

For hollow shafts where the bore exceeds 40% of the outside diameter, the minimum shaft diameter is not
to be less than that given by the following equation:
Do = D 3 1 /[1 − ( Di / Do ) 4 ]
where
Do = required outside diameter, in mm (in.)
D = solid shaft diameter required by 4-3-1/7, as applicable, in mm (in.)
Di = actual shaft bore, in mm (in.)
9 Key
In general, the key material is to be of equal or higher strength than the shaft material. The effective area of
the key in shear is to be not less than A, given below. The effective area is to be the gross area subtracted
by materials removed by saw cuts, set screw holes, chamfer, etc., and is to exclude the portion of the key in
way of spooning of the key way.
D 3 YS
A= ⋅
5.1rm YK

where
A = shear area of key, mm2 (in2)
D = line shaft diameter, mm (in.), as determined by 4-3-1/7.1
rm = shaft radius at mid-length of the key, mm (in.)
YS = specified yield strength of shaft material, N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
YK = specified yield strength of key material, N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
11 Tail Shaft Liners
11.1 Thickness at Bearings

11.1.1 Bronze Liner
The thickness of bronze liners to be fitted to tail shafts or tube shafts is not to be less than that
given by the following equation:
t = T/25 + 5.1 mm t = T/25 + 0.2 in.
where
t = thickness of liner, in mm (in.)
T = required diameter of tail shaft, in mm (in.)
11.1.2 Stainless Steel Liner
The thickness of stainless steel liners to be fitted to tail shafts or tube is not to be less than one-half
that required for bronze liners or 6.5 mm (0.25 inches), whichever is greater.
11.3 Thickness Between Bearings

The thickness of a continuous bronze liner between bearings is to be not less than three-fourths of the
thickness, t, determined by the foregoing equation.
11.5 Continuous Fitted Liners

Continuous fitted liners are to be in one piece or, if made of two or more lengths, the joining of the separate
pieces is to be done by an approved method of fusion through not less than two-thirds the thickness of the
liner or by an approved rubber seal.
11.7 Fit Between Bearings

If the liner does not fit the shaft tightly between the bearing portions, the space between the shaft and liner
is to be filled by pressure with an insoluble, non-corrosive compound.
11.9 Material and Fit

Fitted liners are to be of a high-grade composition, bronze or other approved alloy, free from porosity and
other defects, and are to prove tight under hydrostatic test of 1.0 bar (1 kgf/cm2, 15 psi). All liners are to be
carefully shrunk or forced upon the shaft by pressure and they are not to be secured by pins.
11.11 Glass Reinforced Plastic Coating

Glass reinforced plastic coatings may be fitted on propulsion shafting when applied by an approved procedure
to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. Such coatings are to consist of at least four plies of cross-woven glass
tape impregnated with resin, or an equivalent process. Prior to coating, the shaft is to be cleaned with a suitable
solvent and grit-blasted. The shaft is to be examined prior to coating and the first layer is to be applied in
the presence of the Surveyor. Subsequent to coating, the finished shaft is to be subjected to a spark test or
equivalent to verify freedom from porosity to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. In all cases where reinforced
plastic coatings are employed, effective means are to be provided to prevent water having access to the
shaft. Provisions are to be made for overlapping and adequately bonding the coating to fitted or clad liners.
The end of the liner is to be stepped and tapered as required to protect the end of the wrapping.

11.13 Stainless Steel Cladding

Stainless steel cladding of shafts is to be carried out in accordance with an approved procedure. See
Appendix 7-A-11, “Repair and Cladding of Shafts” of the Rules for Survey After Construction (Part 7).
13 Tail Shaft Bearings
13.1 Water Lubricated Bearings

13.1.1 Wood Bearings (resinous, dense hardwoods)
The length of the bearing next to and supporting the propeller is to be not less than four times the
required tail shaft diameter.
13.1.2 Synthetic Bearings (rubber, reinforced resins, plastic materials)
The length of the bearing next to and supporting the propeller is to be not less than four times the
required tail shaft diameter.
For a bearing design substantiated by experimental tests to the satisfaction of ABS, consideration
may be given to a bearing length of less than four times, but not less than two times, the required
tail shaft diameter.
13.3 Oil Lubricated Bearings

13.3.1 White Metal Lined
The length of white-metal lined, oil-lubricated propeller-end bearings fitted with an approved oil-
seal gland is to be on the order of two times the required tail shaft diameter. The length of the bearing
may be less, provided the nominal bearing pressure is not more than 0.80 N/mm2 (0.0815 kgf/mm2,
116 psi) as determined by static bearing reaction calculation taking into account shaft and propeller
weight which is deemed to be exerted solely on the aft bearing, divided by the projected area of
the shaft. The minimum length, however, is not to be less than 1.5 times the actual diameter.
13.3.2 Synthetic Bearings (rubber, reinforced resins, plastic, etc.)
The length of synthetic rubber, reinforced resin or plastic oil-lubricated propeller end bearings fitted
with an approved oil-seal gland is to be on the order of two times the required tail shaft diameter.
The length of the bearing may be less, provided the nominal bearing pressure is not more than
0.60 N/mm2 (0.0611 kgf/mm2, 87 psi), as determined by static bearing reaction calculation taking
into account shaft and propeller weight which is deemed to be exerted solely on the aft bearing,
divided by the projected area of the shaft. The minimum length, however, is not to be less than 1.5
times the actual diameter. Where the material has demonstrated satisfactory testing and operating
experience, consideration may be given to increased bearing pressure.
15 Tail Shaft Propeller End Design

Tail shafts are to be provided with an accurate taper fit in the propeller hub, particular attention being given to
the fit at the large end of the taper.
15.1 Keyed
The key is to fit tightly in the keyway and be of sufficient size to transmit the full torque of the shaft, but it
is not to extend into the liner counterbore on the forward side of the hub. The forward end of the keyway is
to be so cut in the shaft as to give a gradual rise from the bottom of the keyway to the surface of the shaft.
Ample fillets are to be provided in the corners of the keyway and, in general, stress concentrations are to
be reduced as far as practicable.
15.3 Keyless
Where propellers are fitted without keys, detailed stress calculations and fitting instructions are to be
submitted for review. See 4-3-2/19.

17 Flexible Couplings
See 4-2-1/17.1.
19 Solid Couplings
19.1 Fitted Bolts

The minimum diameter of fitted shaft coupling bolts is to be determined by the following equation.
db = 0.65 D 3 (U + c) / NBU b mm (in.)
where
db = diameter of bolts at joints, in mm (in.)
D = minimum required shaft diameter designed considering the largest combined torque
(static and dynamic), acting at the shaft in vicinity of the respective coupling flanges;
mm (in), see 4-3-1/23, but not less than the minimum required line shaft diameter, as
per 4-3-1/7, in mm (in.)
U = minimum specific tensile strength of shaft material, in N/mm2, (kgf/mm2, psi)
c = 160 (16.3, 23180)
N = number of bolts fitted in one coupling
B = bolt circle diameter, in mm (in.)
Ub = minimum specific tensile strength of bolt material, in N/mm2, (kgf/mm2, psi). To be
not less than U. Ub, is to be taken not more than 1.7U or 1000 N/mm2 (102 kgf/mm2,
145,000 psi), whichever is less, for calculation purposes.
Notes:
1 The bolts are to be assembled with an interference fit.
2 The use of other materials will be subject to special consideration based on submitted engineering
analyses.
19.3 Non-fitted Bolts

The diameter of pre-stressed, non-fitted coupling bolts will be considered upon the submittal of detailed
preloading and stress calculations and fitting instructions. The tensile stress on the bolt due to pre-stressing
and astern pull is not to exceed 90% of the minimum specified yield strength of the bolt material. In
addition, the bearing stress on any member such as the shaft, bolt, threads or nut is not to exceed 90% of
the minimum specified yield strength of the material for that member.
19.3.1 Power Transmitted by Prestress Only
Where bolts are under pure tension, the factor of safety against slip under the worst of the operating
conditions, including mean transmitted torque plus vibratory torque due to torsional loads, is to be
at least as follows:
i) Inaccessible couplings (external to the hull or not readily accessible) 2.8
ii) Accessible couplings (internal to the hull) 2.0
19.3.2 Power Transmitted by Combination Prestress and Shear
Where the power is transmitted by a combination of fitted bolts and pre-stressed, non-fitted bolts,
the components are to meet the following criteria:
19.3.2(a) Fitted Bolts. The shear stress under the maximum torque corresponding to the worst
loaded condition is to be not more than 50% of the minimum specified tensile yield strength of the
bolt material.
19.3.2(b) Non-Fitted Bolts. The factor of safety against slip under the maximum torque
corresponding to the worst loaded condition and the specified bolt tension is to be at least 1.6 for
inaccessible couplings and 1.1 for accessible couplings.

19.3.3 Dowels Used for Transmitting Power

Dowels connecting the tail shaft flange to the controllable pitch propeller hub, utilized with non-
fitted bolts to transmit power, are considered equivalent to fitted coupling bolts and are to comply
with 4-3-1/19.1 and, if applicable, 4-3-1/19.3.2(a). The dowels are to be accurately fitted and
effectively secured against axial movement. The coupling is to be satisfactory for astern condition.
19.5 Flanges
The thickness of coupling flanges is not to be less than the minimum required diameter of the coupling
bolts or 0.2 times D (as defined in 4-3-1/7), whichever is greater. The fillet radius at the base of an integral
flange is not to be less than 0.08 times the actual shaft diameter. Consideration of a recognized shaft coupling
standard will be given to fillets of multiple radii design. In general, the surface finish for fillet radii is not
to be rougher than 1.6 µmeters (63 µin.) RMS. For the fillet radius for tail shaft to propeller coupling flange,
see Note 4 in 4-3-1/Table 2.
19.7 Locking Arrangement (2014)

After assembly, all coupling bolts and associated nuts are to be fitted with locking arrangement.
19.9 Demountable Couplings

Couplings are to be made of steel or other approved ductile material. The strength of demountable couplings
and keys is to be equivalent to that of the shaft. Couplings are to be accurately fitted to the shaft. Where
necessary, provisions for resisting thrust loading are to be provided.
Hydraulic and other shrink fit couplings will be specially considered upon submittal of detailed preloading
and stress calculations and fitting instructions. In general, the torsional holding capacity is to be at least 2.8
times the transmitted mean torque plus vibratory torque due to torsionals for inaccessible couplings
(external to the hull or not readily accessible) and at least 2.0 times for accessible couplings (internal to the
hull). The preload stress is not to exceed 70% of the minimum specified yield strength.
21 Cardan Shaft
Cardan shafts are to be designed in accordance with the equation for propulsion shaft in 4-3-1/7.1, and flanges
and bolts are to be in accordance with 4-3-1/19.1, 4-3-1/19.3 and 4-3-1/19.5. The design of splines, yokes
and cross-members are to be evaluated based on engineering analyses which are to be submitted for review.
Where applicable, the cardan shaft assembly is to contain provisions for bearing thrust or pull from the
propeller.
23 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibration
23.1 General
Propulsion shafting is to be aligned with the location and spacing of the shaft bearings, being such as to
give acceptable bearing reactions and shaft bending moments and also acceptable amplitudes of vibration
for all conditions of craft loading and operation.
The designer or the builder is to evaluate the propulsion shafting system, taking into consideration any
forces or factors which may affect the reliability of the propulsion shafting system, including weight of the
propeller and shafts, hydrodynamic forces acting on the propeller, number of propeller blades in relation to
diesel engine cylinders, misalignment forces, thermal expansion, flexibility of engine and thrust bearing
foundations, engine induced vibrations, gear tooth loadings, flexible couplings, effect of power take-off
arrangements from the propulsion shafting system driving auxiliaries, etc., as applicable, as well as any
limits for vibrations and loadings specified by the equipment manufacturers.

23.3 Craft 61 m (200 ft) in Length and Over

23.3.1 Shaft Alignment Calculations
The requirements in 4-3-2/7.3 of the Steel Vessel Rules are to be complied with.
23.3.2 Torsional Vibrations
The requirements in 4-3-2/7.5.1 of the Steel Vessel Rules are to be complied with.
23.3.3 Axial Vibrations
23.3.4 Lateral (Whirling) Vibrations
23.3.5 Cast Resin Chocks
Resin chocks and their installation are to comply with the requirements in 4-3-2/11.1.2 of the Steel
Vessel Rules.
23.5 Craft Below 61 m (200 ft) in Length

23.5.1 Torsional Vibration
For craft fitted with an unusual propulsion arrangement or without vibration dampers, a torsional
vibration analysis of the propulsion system showing compliance with 4-3-2/7.5.1 of the Steel
Vessel Rules is to be submitted. This is not required for craft under 20 m (65 ft) in length or where
the installation is essentially the same as previous designs which have been proven satisfactory.
25 Circulating Currents (2014)

Where means are provided to prevent circulating currents from passing between the propeller, shaft and the
hull, a warning notice plate is to be provided in a visible place cautioning against the removal of such
protection.

PART Section 2: Propellers
4
SECTION 2 Propellers
1 General
1.1 Application
This section applies to propellers intended for propulsion. It covers fixed pitch and controllable pitch
propellers. Propellers for thrusters used for maneuvering and dynamic positioning are covered in Section
4-3-5. Performance of propellers, in respect to developing the designed output, is to be demonstrated
during sea trials.
For planing and semi-planing craft, the propellers need not be designed and constructed in accordance with
these requirements, provided they do not exceed 1.5 m (60 in.) in diameter and are part of a manufacturer’s
standard product line. In such instances, neither the Surveyor’s attendance for the material testing and
inspection nor the design review will be required.
1.3 Definitions
For purpose of this section, the following definitions apply.
1.3.1 Skew Angle
Skew Angle (θ) of a propeller is the angle measured from ray ‘A’ passing through the tip of blade
at mid-chord line to ray ‘B’ tangent to the mid-chord line on the projected blade outline. See
4-3-3/Figure 1.
1.3.2 Highly Skewed Propeller
A Highly Skewed Propeller is one whose skew angle is more than 25°.
1.3.3 Propeller Rake
1.3.3(a) Rake. Rake is the distance at the blade tip between the generating line and the line
perpendicular to the propeller axis that meets the generating line at the propeller axis. See
4-3-3/Figure 2.
1.3.3(b) Rake Angle (φ). Rake Angle of a propeller is the angle measured from the plane perpendicular
to shaft centerline to the tangent to the generating line at a specified radius (0.6 × radius for the
purpose of this section). See 4-3-2/Figure 2.
1.3.4 Wide Tipped Blade Propeller (2014)
A propeller blade is to be considered as a wide tipped blade if the maximum expanded blade cord
length occurs at or above 0.8R, with R being the distance measured from the centerline of the
propeller hub.

Section 2 Propellers 4-3-2
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2
Maximum Skew Angle Rake and Rake Angle
C D

skew B Rake
A angle 
mid-chord 0.6
line radius
leading
edge
1.5 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted

1.5.1 Fixed Pitch Propeller of Conventional Design
Material
Design characteristics of propeller
Dimensions and tolerances
Propeller plan
Blade thickness calculations
1.5.2 Controllable Pitch Propeller of Conventional Design
As per 4-3-2/1.5.1
Hub and hub to tail shaft flange attachment bolts
Propeller blade flange and bolts
Internal mechanism
Hydraulic piping control system
Instrumentation and alarm system
Strength calculations for internal mechanism
1.5.3 Highly Skewed Propeller and Other Unconventional Designs
In addition to the foregoing, where propeller blade designs are of the types for which these Rules
do not provide simplified blade thickness calculations, such as
 Highly skewed propellers with   50°;
 High skewed propellers made of other than type 4 materials with 50°    25°;
 Controllable pitch propellers with   25°;
propeller load and stress analyses demonstrating adequacy of blade strength are to be submitted.
1.5.4 Keyless Propeller
Where propellers are to be fitted to the shaft without keys, stress calculations for hub stresses and
holding capacity, along with fitting instructions, are to be submitted.

3 Materials
3.1 Normally Used Propeller Materials

4-3-2/Table 1 shows the properties of materials normally used for propellers. See 2-3-14/3 and Section
2-3-15 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) for full details of the materials.
Where an alternative material specification is proposed, detailed chemical composition and mechanical
properties similar to those in Section 2-3-14 and Section 2-3-15 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding
(Part 2) are to be submitted for approval. The f and w values of such materials to be used in the equations
hereunder will be specially considered upon submittal of complete material specifications including corrosion
fatigue data to 108 cycles.
TABLE 1
Propeller Materials
Elongation, %
Tensile Strength Yield Strength Gauge Length
Type Material N/mm2 kgf/mm2 lb/in2 N/mm2 kgf/mm2 lb/in2 4d 5d
2 Manganese bronze 450 46 65,000 175 18 25,000 20 18
3 Nickel-manganese 515 53 75,000 220 22.5 32,000 18 16
bronze
4 Nickel-aluminum 590 60 86,000 245 25 36,000 16 15
bronze
5 Manganese-nickel- 630 64 91,000 275 28 40,000 20 18
aluminum bronze
CF-3 Stainless steel 485 49 70,000 205 21 30,000 35 32
3.3 Stud Materials

The material of the studs securing detachable blades to the hub is to be of at least Grade 2 forged steel or
equally satisfactory material; see 2-3-7/7 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) for specifications
of Grade 2 forged steel.
3.5 Material Testing

Materials of propellers cast in one piece and materials of blades, hub, studs and other load-bearing parts of
controllable pitch propellers are to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor. For requirements of material
testing, see 2-3-14/3 and Section 2-3-15 and 2-3-7/7 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).
5 Design
5.1 Blade Thickness – Fixed Pitch Propeller

The thickness of the propeller blades of conventional design (θ ≤ 25°) is not to be less than that determined
by the following equations:
AH  C  BK 
t 0.25 = K 1 ±  s  
C n CRN  C n  4C 
6.0
A = 1.0 + + 4.3P0.25
P0.70
2 3
 4300wa  R   D 
B=    
 N  100   20 
C = (1 + 1.5P0.25 )(Wf − B )

where (units of measures are given in SI (MKS, and US) units, respectively):
a = expanded blade area divided by disc area
as = area of expanded cylindrical section at 0.25 radius; mm2 (in2)
Cn = section modulus coefficient at the 0.25 radius. Cn is to be determined by the
following equation.
I0
Cn =
U f WT 2
If the calculated Cn value exceeds 0.10, the required thickness is to be computed with
Cn = 0.10. For craft below 61 m (200 ft) in length, the required thickness may be
computed with the assumed value Cn = 0.10.
Cs = section area coefficient at 0.25 radius and is to be determined by the following equation.
For craft below 61 m (200 ft) in length, the required thickness may be computed with
the assumed value Cs = 0.69.
as
Cs =
WT
The values of Cs and Cn, computed as stipulated above, are to be indicated on the propeller drawing.
D = propeller diameter; m (ft)
f, w = material constants from the following table:
Material type SI and MKS units US units
(see 4-3-3/3.1) F w F w
2 2.10 8.3 68 0.30
3 2.13 8.0 69 0.29
4 2.62 7.5 85 0.27
5 2.37 7.5 77 0.27
Cast Steel 2.10 8.30 68 0.30
CF-3 2.10 7.75 68 0.28
Note:
The f and w values of materials not covered will be specially
considered upon submittal of complete material specifications
including corrosion fatigue data to 108 cycles.
H = power at rated speed; kW (PS, hp)
I0 = moment of inertia of expanded cylindrical section at 0.25 radius about a straight line
through the center of gravity parallel to the pitch line or to the nose-tail line; mm4 (in4)
K = rake of propeller blade, in mm (in.) (positive for aft rake and negative for forward
rake)
K1 = coefficient as given below
SI MKS US
K1 337 289 13
N = number of blades
P0.25 = pitch at one-quarter radius divided by propeller diameter, corresponding to the design
ahead condition
P0.70 = pitch at seven-tenths radius divided by propeller diameter, corresponding to the
design ahead condition


t0.25 = minimum required thickness at the thickest part of the blade section at one quarter
radius; mm (in.)
T = maximum designed thickness of blade section at 0.25 radius from propeller drawing;
mm (in.)
Uf = maximum nominal distance from the moment of inertia axis to points of the face
boundary (tension side) of the section; mm (in.)
W = expanded width of a cylindrical section at 0.25 radius; mm (in.)
5.3 Blade Thickness – Controllable-pitch Propellers

The thickness of the controllable pitch propeller blade of conventional design (θ ≤ 25°) is not to be less
than determined by the following equation:
AH  C  BK 
t 0.35 = K 2 ±  s  
C n CRN  C n  6.3C 
6.0
A = 1.0 + + 3P0.35
P0.70
2 3
 4900wa  R   D 
B=    
 N  100   20 
C = (1 + 0.6 P0.35 )(Wf − B )
where the symbols used in these formulas are the same as those in 4-3-2/5.1, except as modified below:
as = area of expanded cylindrical section at 0.35 radius; mm2 (in2)
Cn = section modulus coefficient at the 0.35 radius and is to be determined by the following
equation:
I0
Cn =
U f WT 2
If the Cn value exceeds 0.10, the required thickness is to be computed with Cn = 0.10.
the assumed value Cn = 0.10.
Cs = section area coefficient at 0.35 radius and is to be determined by the following equation:
as
Cs =
WT
the assumed value Cs = 0.69.
The values of Cs and Cn, computed as stipulated above, are to be indicated on the propeller drawing.
I0 = moment of inertia of expanded cylindrical section at 0.35 radius about a straight line
through the center of gravity parallel to the pitch line or to the nose-tail line; mm4 (in4)
K2 = coefficient as given below
SI MKS US
K2 271 232 10.4

P0.35 = pitch at 0.35 radius divided by D

T = maximum designed thickness of blade section at 0.35 radius from propeller drawing;
mm (in.)
t0.35 = required minimum thickness of the thickest part of the blade section at 0.35 radius;
mm (in.)
W = expanded width of a cylindrical section at 0.35 radius; mm (in.)
5.5 Blade Thickness – Highly Skewed Fixed-pitch Propellers

5.5.1 Propeller Blades with Skew Angle θ; Where 25° < θ ≤ 50° (2015)
The provisions of 4-3-2/5.5.1 are applicable to fixed pitch propellers having a skew angle over 25°
but not exceeding 50°, and made of Type 4 material only. For propellers of other materials, see
4-3-3/5.5.2. Where skew angle is greater than 50°, see 4-3-2/5.5.2.
5.5.1(a) Blade Thickness at 0.25 Radius. The maximum thickness at 0.25 radius is to be not less
than the thickness required in 4-3-3/5.1 for fixed pitch-propellers multiplied by the factor m as
given below:
m = 1 + 0.0065(θ − 25)
5.5.1(b) Blade Thickness at 0.6 Radius. The maximum thickness of the blade section at 0.6 radius
is to be not less than that obtained from the following equations:
0.5
  HDΓ 
= K 3 ⋅ (1 + C 0.9 )1 +
2C 0.9
t 0.6  
 RP Y 
 C 0.6  0.6 
 θ − 25  2
Γ = 1 +
θ 
(
 φ + 0.16φ ⋅ θ ⋅ P0.9 + 100 )

where:
C0.6 = expanded chord length at the 0.6 radius divided by propeller diameter
C0.9 = expanded chord length at the 0.9 radius divided by propeller diameter
K3 = coefficient as given below:
SI MKS US
K3 12.6 6.58 1.19
P0.6 = pitch at the 0.6 radius divided by propeller diameter

P0.9 = pitch at the 0.9 radius divided by propeller diameter
t0.6 = required thickness of the blade section at 0.6 radius; mm (in.)
Y = minimum specified yield strength of type 4 propeller material; N/mm2
(kgf/mm2, psi). See 4-3-2/Table 1.
θ = skew angle in degrees (see 4-3-2/1.3.1)

φ = rake angle in degrees [see 4-3-2/1.3.3(b)] at 0.6 radius, positive for aft rake
H, D, and R are as defined in 4-3-2/5.1.

5.5.1(c) Blade Thickness Between 0.6 and 0.9 Radii. The maximum thickness at any radius
between 0.6 and 0.9 radii is to be not less than that obtained from the following equation:
tx = 3.3D + 2.5(1 – x)(t0.6 – 3.3D) mm; or
tx = 0.04D + 2.5(1 – x)(t0.6 – 0.04D) in.
where
tx = required minimum thickness of the thickest part of the blade section at radius
ratio x.
t0.6 = thickness of blade section at the 0.6 radius, as required by 4-3-2/5.5.1(b)
x = ratio of the radius under consideration to D/2; 0.6 < x ≤ 0.9

5.5.1(d) Trailing Edge Thickness at 0.9 Radius. The edge thickness at 0.9 radius measured at 5%
of chord length from the trailing edge is to be not less than 30% of the maximum blade thickness
required by 4-3-2/5.5.1(c) above at that radius.
5.5.2 Propeller of Other Than Type 4 Materials with Skew Angle θ; Where 25°< θ ≤ 50°
Propellers made of materials other than Type 4 and with skew angle 25°< θ ≤ 50° are subject to
special consideration. Design analyses, as indicated in 4-3-2/5.7, are to be submitted.
5.5.3 Propeller Blades with Skew Angle θ > 50°

Propellers with the maximum skew angle exceeding 50° will be subject to special consideration.
Design analyses, as indicated in 4-3-2/5.7, are to be submitted.
5.7 Blades of Unusual Design

Propellers of unusual design, such as those indicated in 4-3-2/5.5.2 and 4-3-2/5.5.3, controllable pitch propeller
of skewed design (θ > 25°), skewed propeller (θ > 25°) with wide-tip blades, cycloidal propellers, etc., are
subject to special consideration based on submittal of propeller load and stress analyses. The analyses are
to include, but be not limited to the following:
• Description of method to determine blade loading;
• Description of method selected for stress analysis;
• Ahead condition is to be based on propulsion machinery’s maximum rating and full ahead speed;
• Astern condition is to be based on the maximum available astern power of the propulsion machinery
(the astern power of the main propelling machinery is to be capable of 70% of the ahead rpm corresponding
to the maximum continuous ahead power, as required in 4-1-1/15.1); and is to include crash astern
operation;
• Fatigue assessment; and
• Allowable stress and fatigue criteria.
5.9 Blade-root Fillets

Fillets at the root of the blades are not to be considered in the determination of blade thickness.
5.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Pitch Actuation System

5.11.1 Blade Flange and Mechanisms
The strength of the propeller blade flange and pitch changing mechanism of controllable-pitch
propellers subjected to the forces from propulsion torque is to be at least 1.5 times that of the
blade at design pitch conditions.
5.11.2 Stud Bolt Area
The sectional area of the stud bolts at the bottom of the thread, s, is to be determined by the following
equations.

SI units MKS units US units

2
s 0.056Wkft 0.35 0.0018Wkft 02.35 2
mm2 in
rn rn
k 621 63.3 90,000
U + 207 U + 21.1 U + 30,000
where
s = area of one stud at bottom of thread
n = number of studs on driving side of blade
r = radius of pitch circle of the studs; mm (in.)
k = material correction factor for stud materials better than ABS Gr. 2 forged
steel
U = ultimate tensile strength of the stud material; N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
See 4-3-2/5.1 for f and 4-3-2/5.3 for W and t0.35.
5.11.3 Blade Pitch Control

5.11.3(a) Bridge Control. Where the navigation bridge is provided with direct control of propulsion
machinery, it is to be fitted with means to control the pitch of the propeller.
5.11.3(b) Duplication of Power Unit. At least two hydraulic power pump units for the pitch
actuating system are to be provided and arranged so that the transfer between pump units can be
readily effected. For propulsion machinery spaces intended for unattended operation (ACCU,
ABCU notation), automatic start of the standby pump unit is to be provided.
The emergency pitch actuating system [as required by 4-3-2/5.11.3(c)iii)] may be accepted as one
of the required hydraulic power pump units, provided it is no less effective.
5.11.3(c) Emergency Provisions. To safeguard the propulsion and maneuvering capability of the
craft in the event of any single failure in either the remote pitch control system or the pitch actuating
system external to the propeller shaft and oil transfer device (also known as oil distribution box),
the following are to be provided:
i) Manual control of pitch at or near the pitch-actuating control valve (usually the directional
valve or similar).
ii) The pitch is to remain in the last ordered position until the emergency pitch actuating system
is brought into operation.
iii) An emergency pitch actuating system. This system is to be independent of the normal
system up to the oil transfer device, provided with its own oil reservoir and able to change
the pitch from full ahead to full astern.
5.11.3(d) Integral Oil Systems. Where the pitch actuating hydraulic system is integral with the
reduction gear lubricating oil system and/or clutch hydraulic system, the piping is to be arranged
such that any failure in the pitch actuating system will not leave the other system(s) non-operational.
5.11.3(e) Provisions for Testing. Means are to be provided in the pitch actuating system to
simulate system behavior in the event of loss of system pressure. Hydraulic pump units driven by
main propulsion machinery are to be fitted with a suitable by-pass for this purpose.
5.11.3(f) Multiple Propellers. For craft fitted with more than one controllable pitch propeller,
each of which is independent of the other, only one emergency pitch actuating system [as required
by 4-3-3/5.11.3(c)iii)] need be fitted, provided it is arranged such that it can be used to provide
emergency pitch-changing for all propellers.
5.11.3(g) Hydraulic Piping. Hydraulic piping is to meet the requirements of Section 4-4-6.

5.11.4 Instrumentation
All controllable pitch propeller systems are to be provided with instrumentation as provided below:
5.11.4(a) Pitch Indicators. A pitch indicator is to be fitted on the navigation bridge. In addition,
each station capable of controlling the propeller pitch is to be fitted with a pitch indicator.
5.11.4(b) Monitoring. Individual visual and audible alarms are to be provided at the engine room
control station to indicate hydraulic oil low pressure and high temperature and hydraulic tank low
level. A high hydraulic oil pressure alarm is to be fitted if required by the proposed system design
and, if fitted, is to be set below the relief valve setting.
For craft assigned with ACCU or ABCU notations, see 4-7-2/Table 1 and 4-7-3/Table 2 for
monitoring on the navigation bridge and in the centralized control station, respectively.
5.13 Propeller Fitting

5.13.1 Keyed Fitting
For shape of the keyway in the shaft and size of the key, see 4-3-2/9.
5.13.2 Keyless Fitting
5.13.2(a) Design Criteria. The factor of safety against slip of the propeller hub on tail shaft taper
at 35°C (95°F) is to be at least 2.8 under the action of maximum continuous ahead rated torque
plus torque due to torsional vibrations. For oil injection method of fit, the coefficient of friction is
to be taken no greater than 0.13 for bronze/steel propeller hubs on steel shafts. The maximum
equivalent uniaxial stress (von Mises-Hencky criteria) in the hub at 0°C (32°F) is not to exceed
70% of the minimum specified yield stress or 0.2% proof stress of the propeller material.
Stress calculations and fitting instructions are to be submitted (see 4-3-2/1.5.4) and are to include
at least the following:
• Theoretical contact surface area;
• The maximum permissible pull-up length at 0°C (32°F) as limited by the maximum permissible
uniaxial stress specified above;
• The minimum pull-up length and contact pressure at 35°C (95°F) to attain a safety factor against
slip of 2.8;
• The proposed pull-up length and contact pressure at fitting temperature; and
• The rated propeller ahead thrust.
5.13.2(b) Nomenclature. The symbols used are defined as follows.
A = 100% of contact surface area between propeller hub and shaft taper; mm2
(in2). Oil grooves may be ignored. The propeller hub forward and aft
counterbore lengths (1 and 2 in 4-3-3/Figure 3) and the forward and aft
inner edge radii (r1 and r2 in 4-3-3/Figure 3), if any, are to be excluded.
B = dimensionless constant based on µ, θ, and S
c = coefficient, dependent on the type of propulsion drive: 1.0 for drives such as
turbine, geared diesel, electric, and direct diesel with elastic coupling; and
1.2 for direct diesel drive. This value may have to be increased for cases
where extremely high pulsating torque is expected in service.
Db = mean outer diameter of propeller hub corresponding to Ds; mm (in.) Db is to
be calculated as the mean of Dbm, Dbf and Dba, outer diameters of hub
corresponding to Ds, the forward point of contact and the aft point of contact,
respectively, see 4-3-3/Figure 3.
Dba + Dbm + Dbf
Db =
3

Dbm = mean outer diameter of propeller boss, in mm (in.), at the axial position
corresponding to Ds, see 4-3-2/Figure 3.
Ds = diameter of shaft at mid-point of the taper in axial direction; mm (in.), taking
into account the exclusion of forward and aft counterbore length and the
forward and aft edge radii, see 4-3-2/Figure 3.
FIGURE 3
Theoretical Contact Surface Between Hub and Shaft
r2
r1
Dba Ds Dbm Dbf
EQ EQ
Eb = modulus of elasticity of hub material, see 4-3-2/Table 2

Es = modulus of elasticity of shaft material, see 4-3-2/Table 2
Fv = shear force at propeller/shaft interface; N, (kgf, lbf)
H = power at rated speed; kW (PS, hp)
K = ratio of Db to Ds, see 4-3-2/Figure 3.
P = mean propeller pitch; mm (in.)
Pmin = minimum required mating surface pressure at 35°C (95°F); N/mm2
(kgf/mm2, psi)
Pt = minimum required mating surface pressure at temperature t; N/mm2
(kgf/mm2, psi)
Pmax = maximum permissible mating surface pressure at 0°C; N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
Q = rated torque corresponding to H and R; N-mm (kgf-mm, lbf-in)
S = factor of safety against slippage at 35°C (95°F)
T = rated propeller thrust; N (kgf, lbf)
tref = 35°C (95°F)
v = craft speed at rated power; knots (knots)
b = coefficient of linear expansion of propeller hub material; mm/mm°C
(in/in°F); see 4-3-2/Table 2
s = coefficient of linear expansion of shaft material; mm/mm°C (in/in°F);
see 4-3-2/Table 2

δmin = minimum pull-up length at 35°C (95°F); mm (in.)
δt = minimum pull-up length at temperature t; mm (in.)
δmax = maximum permissible pull-up length at 0°C (32°F); mm (in.)
θ = half taper of shaft; e.g. if taper =1/15, θ = 1/30

σy = yield stress or 0.2% proof stress of propeller material; N/mm2, (kgf/mm2, psi)
µ = coefficient of friction between mating surfaces; to be taken as 0.13 for fitting

methods using oil injection and hubs of bronze of steel
νb = Poisson’s ration of hub material, see 4-3-2/Table 2
νs = Poisson’s ratio of shaft material, see 4-3-2/Table 2
TABLE 2
Material Constants
Modulus of Elasticity Poisson’s Coefficient of Expansion
Material N/mm2 kgf/mm2 psi Ratio mm/mm°C in/in°F
Cast and forged steel 20.6 × 104 2.1 × 104 29.8 × 106 0.29 12.0 × 10−6 6.67 × 10−6
Bronzes, Types 1 &2 10.8 × 104 1.1 × 104 15.6 × 106 0.33 17.5 × 10−6 9.72 × 10−6
Bronzes, Types 3 & 4 11.8 × 104 1.2 × 104 17.1 × 106 0.33 17.5 × 10−6 9.72 × 10−6
5.13.2(c) Equations. The taper on the tail shaft cone is not to exceed 1/15. Although the equations
given below are for ahead operation, they may be considered to provide an adequate safety margin
for astern operation also.
The minimum mating surface pressure at 35°C (95°F), Pmin, is to be:
 
 2
ST   Fv  
Pmin = 
− Sθ + µ 2
+ B   

N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
AB   T 
  
 
The rated propeller thrust, T, submitted by the designer is to be used in these calculations. In the
event that this is not submitted, one of the equations in 4-3-2/Table 3 may be used, subject to
whichever yields the larger value of Pmin.
TABLE 3
Estimated Propeller Thrust, T
SI units (N) MKS units (kgf) US units (lbf)
H H H
1762 or 132 or 295 or
v v v
H H H
57.4 × 10 6 ⋅ 4.3 × 10 6 ⋅ 0.38 × 10 6 ⋅
PR PR PR

The shear force at interface, Fv, is given by

2cQ
Fv = N (kgf, lbf)
Ds
Constant B is given by:
B = µ2 – S2θ2
The corresponding [i.e., at 35°C (95°F)] minimum pull-up length, δmin, is:
Ds  1  K 2 +1  1 
δmin = Pmin   2 + ν b  + (1 − ν s ) mm (in.)
2θ  Eb  K − 1  Es 
Db
K=
Ds
The minimum pull-up length, δt, at temperature, t, where t < 35°C (95°F), is:
Ds
δt = δmin + (αb – αs)(tref – t) mm (in.)
2θ
The corresponding minimum surface pressure, Pt, is:
δt
Pt = Pmin N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
δ min
The maximum permissible mating surface pressure, Pmax, at 0°C (32°F) is:
0.7σ y  K 2 − 1
 
Pmax = N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
3K + 1 4
and the corresponding maximum permissible pull-up length, δmax, is:

Pmax
δ max = δ mm (in.)
Pmin min
7 Certification
7.1 Material Tests

Propeller materials are to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor. See 4-3-2/3.5.
7.3 Inspection and Certification

Finished propellers are to be inspected and certified at the manufacturer’s plant by a Surveyor. The blade
forms, pitch, blade thickness, diameters, etc. are to be checked for conformance with approved plans. The entire
surface of the finished propeller is to be examined visually and by liquid penetrant method. See 2-3-14/3.21
of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2). All finished propellers are to be statically balanced
in the presence of the Surveyor. As far as practicable, reference is to be made to the provisions of ISO 484
for these purposes.
The surfaces of stainless steel propellers are to be suitably protected from the corrosive effect of the
industrial environment until fitted on the craft. See 2-3-15/3 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding
(Part 2).

9 Installation, Tests and Trial
9.1 Keyed Propellers

The sides of the key are to have a true fit in the keyways of the propeller hub and the shaft. See also
4-3-2/15 for tail shaft propeller-end design.
9.3 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Fit of Studs and Nuts

Studs, nuts and bolts are to have tight-fitting threads and are to be provided with effective means of locking.
Effective sealing arrangements are to be provided in way of the bolt or stud holes against sea water ingress
or oil leakage. Bolts, nuts and studs are to be of corrosion resistant materials or adequately protected from
corrosion.
9.5 Protection Against Corrosion

The exposed steel of the shaft is to be protected from the action of the water by filling all spaces between
cap, hub and shaft with a suitable material. The propeller assembly is to be sealed at the forward end with a
well-fitted soft-rubber packing ring. When the rubber ring is fitted in an external gland, the hub counterbore
is to be filled with suitable material, and clearances between shaft liner and hub counterbore are to be kept
to a minimum. When the rubber ring is fitted internally, ample clearance is to be provided between liner
and hub. The rubber ring is to be sufficiently oversized to squeeze into the clearance space provided; and,
where necessary, a filler piece is to be fitted in way of the propeller-hub keyway to provide a flat unbroken
seating for the rubber ring.
9.7 Circulating Currents

Where means are provided to prevent circulating currents from passing between the propeller, shaft and the
hull, a warning notice plate is to be provided in a visible place cautioning against the removal of such protection.
9.9 Keyed and Keyless Propellers – Contact Area Check and Securing
The propeller hub to tail shaft taper contact area is to be checked in the presence of a Surveyor. In general,
the actual contact area is to be not less than 70% of the theoretical contact area. Non-contact bands
extending circumferentially around the propeller hub or over the full length of the hub are not acceptable.
Installation is to be in accordance with the procedure referred to in 4-3-2/5.13.2(a) and final pull-up travel
is to be recorded. After final pull-up, propellers are to be secured by a nut on the after end of the tail shaft.
The nut is to be secured to the tail shaft against loosening. See also 4-3-2/15
9.11 Controllable Pitch Propellers – Hydrostatic Tests

The completed piping system of the controllable pitch propeller hydraulic system is to be hydrostatically
tested at a pressure equal to 1.5 times the design pressure in the presence of a Surveyor. Relief-valve operation
is to be verified.
9.13 Sea Trial

The designed performance of the propeller at rated speed is to be demonstrated during sea trial. For
controllable pitch propellers, the blade pitch control functions, from full ahead through full astern, are to be
demonstrated. The emergency provisions in 4-3-2/5.11.3(c) are also to be demonstrated.

PART Section 3: Steering Gear
4
SECTION 3 Steering Gear
1 General
1.1 Application
These requirements apply to craft which have rule-required upper rudder stock diameter less than 230 mm
(9 in.). Where the rule-required upper rudder stock diameter is 230 mm (9 in.) or above, the Steel Vessel
Rules are to be applied.
Where a rudder is not fitted and steering is achieved by change of setting of the propulsion units, such as
the use of cycloidal, azimuthing or similar type propulsion systems, Section 4-3-5 in Part 4 of the Steel
Vessel Rules is to be applied.
1.3 Definitions
1.3.1 Main Steering Gear
Main steering gear is the machinery, rudder actuators, power units, ancillary equipment and the means
of applying torque to the rudder stock (e.g., tiller or quadrant) necessary for effecting movement
of the rudder for the purpose of steering the craft.
1.3.2 Auxiliary Steering Gear
Auxiliary steering gear is the equipment other than any part of the main steering gear necessary to
steer the craft in the event of failure of the main steering gear, but not including the tiller, quadrant
or components serving the same purpose.
1.3.3 Control System
Steering gear control system is the equipment by which orders are transmitted from the navigation
bridge to the steering gear power actuating system. Steering gear control systems comprise
transmitters, receivers, hydraulic control pumps and their associated motors, motor controllers,
piping and cables required to control the steering gear power actuating system. For the purpose of
these Rules, steering wheels, steering levers, and rudder angle feedback linkages are not considered
to be part of the control system.
1.3.4 Power Units
A steering gear power unit is:
i) In the case of electric steering gears, an electric motor and its associated electrical
equipment,
ii) In the case of electro-hydraulic steering gears, an electric motor and its associated
electrical equipment and connected pump(s), and
iii) In the case of other hydraulic steering gears, a driving engine and connected pump(s).
1.3.5 Power Actuating System
Power actuating system is the hydraulic equipment provided for supplying power to turn the
rudder stock, comprising a power unit or units together with the associated pipes and fittings and a
rudder actuator. The power actuating systems may share common mechanical components (i.e.,
tiller, quadrant, rudder stock, or components serving the same purpose).

Section 3 Steering Gear 4-3-3
1.3.6 Rudder Actuator

Rudder actuator is the component which directly converts hydraulic pressure into mechanical
action to move the rudder.
1.3.7 Maximum Working Pressure
Maximum working pressure is the expected pressure in the system when the steering gear is
operated to comply with 4-3-3/1.9.
1.5 Plans and Data

Plans and data of the steering gear system to be submitted are as follows:
1.5.1 Plans
General arrangements of the main and auxiliary steering gears, and of the steering gear compartment.
Assembly of upper rudder stock, tiller, tie rod, rudder actuators, etc., as applicable.
Construction details of all torque-transmitting components of steering gear, such as tiller, tiller pin,
tiller/rudder stock interference fit mechanism, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc., including bill of materials,
welding procedures, nondestructive testing, as applicable.
Schematic hydraulic piping diagram, incorporating hydraulic logic diagram, and including bill of
materials, typical pipe to pipe joint details, pipe to valve joint details, pipe to equipment joint details,
pressure rating of valves and pipe fittings and pressure relief valve settings.
Steering gear control system incorporating schematic electrical control logic diagram, instrumentation,
alarm devices, etc., and including bill of materials.
Electrical power supply to power units and to steering gear control, including schematic diagram
of motor controllers, feeder cables, feeder cable electrical protection.
1.5.2 Data
Rated torque of main steering gear.
Calculations of torque-transmitting components such as tiller, tie rod, rudder actuator, etc.
1.7 Power Operation

The main steering gear is to be power-operated by one or more power units if the rule-required upper rudder
stock diameter is 120 mm (4.7 in.) or greater.
Notwithstanding the above, the performance requirements stated in 4-3-3/1.9 and 4-3-3/1.11 are to be used
to determine if it is necessary for the main and auxiliary steering gears to be power-operated.
1.9 Main Steering Gear

The main steering gear is to be capable of putting the rudder from 35° on one side to 35° on the other side
with the craft running ahead at maximum continuous shaft rpm and at the summer load waterline; and
under the same conditions, the travel time from 35° on either side to 30° on the other side is not to be more
than 28 seconds. For controllable pitch propellers, the propeller pitch is to be at the maximum design pitch
approved for the above maximum continuous ahead rated rpm.
1.11 Auxiliary Steering Gear

The auxiliary steering gear is to be capable of putting the rudder from 15° on one side to 15° on the other
side in not more than 60 seconds with the craft running ahead at half speed, or seven knots, whichever is
greater.
The auxiliary steering gear is to be so arranged that the failure of the main steering gear will not render it
inoperative. Likewise, failure of the auxiliary steering gear is not to affect the main steering gear.
An auxiliary steering gear is not required under the following conditions.

1.11.1
When the main steering gear comprises two or more power units, and is so arranged that after a
single failure in its piping system or in one of the power units, the defect can be isolated so that
the steering capability can be maintained or regained; and provided that
1.11.1(a) For passenger craft, the main steering gear is capable of operating the rudder, as required
in 4-3-3/1.9, while any one of the power units is out of operation; and
1.11.1(b) For cargo craft, the main steering gear is to be capable of operating the rudder, as required
by 4-3-3/1.9, while all the power units are in operation.
1.11.2
When the main steering gear is non-power-operated such as an orbitrol system, or consists solely
of mechanical components such as sheaves, blocks, wires, chains, etc.
1.13 Steering Gear Compartment Unit Location

The main and the auxiliary steering gears are to be protected from weather. The power units may be
located either within or outside of the compartment containing the rudder actuators. In the event of loss of
hydraulic fluid and of the need to restore the operation of the main or the auxiliary steering gear, the steering
gear compartment is to be provided with handrails and gratings or other non-slip surfaces to promote suitable
working conditions.
In the event of control system failure, or the need to operate the main or the auxiliary steering gear from
within the steering compartment or from positions other than the navigation bridge, craft of 500 gross tons
and above are to be provided with a means to indicate the position of the rudder at these positions where
emergency steering is to be conducted.
3 Materials
3.1 General
All steering gear components transmitting a force to the rudder and pressure retaining components of the
hydraulic rudder actuator are to be of steel or other approved ductile material. The use of gray cast iron or
other material having an elongation less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.) is not acceptable.

Except as modified below, materials for the parts and components mentioned in 4-3-3/3.1 are to be tested
in the presence of the Surveyor in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2).
Material tests for steering gear coupling bolts and torque transmitting keys need not be witnessed by the
Surveyor.
Material tests for commercially supplied tie-rod nuts need not be witnessed by the Surveyor, provided the
nuts are in compliance with the approved steering gear drawings and are appropriately marked and
identified in accordance with a recognized industry standard. Mill test reports for the tie-rod nuts are to be
made available to the Surveyor upon request. For all non-standard tie-rod nuts, material testing is required
to be performed in the presence of the Surveyor.
Material tests for forged, welded or seamless steel parts (including the internal components) and all non-
ferrous parts of rudder actuators that are under 150 mm (6 in.) in internal diameter need not be carried out
in the presence of the Surveyor. Such parts are to comply with the requirements of Chapter 3 of the above
referenced Part 2, or such other appropriate material specifications as may be approved in connection with
a particular design, and will be accepted on the basis of presentation of mill certificates to the Surveyor for
verification.

5 Design
5.1 Power Gear Stops

Power-operated steering gears are to be provided with arrangements, such as limit switches, for stopping
the steering gear before the structural rudder stops (see 3-2-8/1.7) or positive mechanical stops within the
steering gear are reached. These arrangements are to be synchronized with the rudder stock or position of
the steering gear itself rather than with the steering-gear control system.
5.3 Mechanical Components

All steering gear parts transmitting force to or from the rudder, such as tillers, quadrants, rams, pins, tie
rods and keys, are to be proportioned to have strength equivalent to that of the rule-required upper rudder
stock diameter.
5.4 Steering Gear Torque

5.4.1 Minimum Required Rated Torque
The rated torque of the steering gear is not to be less than the expected torque, as defined in
3-2-8/1.5.
5.4.2 Maximum Allowable Torque
The transmitted torque, Tmax, of the steering gear is not to be greater than the maximum allowable
torque, Tar, based on the actual rudder stock diameter.
5.4.2(a) Transmitted torque. The transmitted torque, Tmax, is to be based on the relief valve
setting and to be determined in accordance with the following equations:
For ram type actuator:
Tmax = P·N·A·L2/(C·cos2θ) kN-m (tf-m, Ltf-ft)
For rotary vane type actuator:
Tmax = P·N·A·L2/C kN-m (tf-m, Ltf-ft)
For linked cylinder type actuator:
Tmax = P·N·A·L2 cos θ/C kN-m (tf-m, Ltf-ft)
where
P = steering gear relief valve setting pressure, bar (kgf/cm2, psi)
N = number of active pistons or vanes
A = area of piston or vane, mm2 (cm2, in2)
L2 = torque arm, equal the distance from the point of application of the force on
the arm to the center of the rudder stock at 0 deg of the rudder angle, m (ft)
C = factor, 10000 (1000, 2240)
θ = maximum permissible rudder angle (normally 35 degrees)
5.4.2(b) Maximum allowable torque for rudder stock. The maximum allowable torque “Tar” for
the actual rudder stock diameter is to be determined in accordance with the following equation:
Tar = 2.0(Dr/Nu)3/Ks kN-m (tf-m, Ltf-ft)
where
Ks = material factor for rudder stock (see 3-2-8/1.3)
Dr = actual rudder stock diameter at minimum point below the tiller or the rotor,
mm (in.)
Nu = factor, 42.0 (89.9, 2.39)

5.5 Tiller
Tillers are to comply with the following requirements. All terms in the formulae are to have consistent units.
5.5.1
Depth of the tiller hub is not to be less than the rule-required upper rudder stock diameter.
5.5.2
Thickness of the tiller hub is not to be less than one third of the rule-required upper rudder stock
diameter.
5.5.3
Notwithstanding 4-3-3/5.5.2 above, the polar section modulus of the tiller hub is not to be less than:
Kh
0.196S 3
Ks
where
S = rule-required upper rudder stock diameter.
Ks = material factor of the rudder stock (see 3-2-8/1.3)
Kh = material factor of the hub (see 3-2-8/1.3)
5.5.4
The shear area of the tiller key is not to be less than:
0.196 S 3 K k
⋅
r Ks
where
r = mean radius of the rudder stock in way of the key
Kk = material factor of the key (see 3-2-8/1.3)
Other symbols are defined above.
5.5.5
Bearing stress of the tiller and rudder stock keyways are not to be more than 0.9 times the material
yield stress.
5.5.6 (2016)
If the tiller is shrink-fitted to the rudder stock, preloading and stress calculations and fitting instructions
are to be submitted. The calculated torsional holding capacity is to be at least two times the transmitted
torque based on the steering gear relief valve setting. Preload stress is not to exceed 90% of the
minimum yield strength. Maximum equivalent Von-Mises Stress is not to exceed minimum yield
strength considering all loads including preload stress and two times transmitted torque.
5.5.7
Section modulus of the tiller arm at any point within its length is not to be less than:
0.167 S 3 (L2 − L1 ) K t
⋅
L2 Ks
where
L2 = distance from the point of application of the force on the tiller to the center
of rudder stock
L1 = distance between the section of the tiller arm under consideration and the
center of the rudder stock

Kt = material factor of the tiller or quadrant arm (see 3-2-8/1.3)

5.5.8
Split or semi-circular tiller or quadrant hubs assembled by bolting are to have bolts on each side
having a total cross-sectional area not less than that given below (use a consistent system of units):
0.196S 3 K b
⋅
L3 Ks
where
L3 = distance between the center of the bolts and the center of the rudder stock
Kb = material factor of bolt (see 3-2-8/1.3)
Other symbols are as defined above.
The thickness of the bolting flange is not to be less than the minimum required diameter of the bolt.
5.5.9
Where the tiller is of welded construction, weld design and weld sizes are to be proportioned such
that they are commensurate with the strength of the tiller.
5.7 Pin
Shear area of the tiller pin is not to be less than:
0.196S 3 K p
⋅
L2 Ks
where
Kp = material factor of the pin (see 3-2-8/1.3)
5.9 Tie Rod (Jockey Bar)

The buckling strength of the tie rod is not to be less than:
0.113S 3U R
L2
where
UR = ultimate tensile strength of the rudder stock
5.11 Rudder Actuators

5.11.1 General
Rudder actuators are to meet the requirements in 4-3-3/3 for materials and material tests and 2-4-2/1
for welding. They are also to meet the requirements for pressure vessels in the Steel Vessel Rules,
specifically 4-4-1A1/3.1 (for malleable cast iron, use y = 0.5), 4-4-1A1/5 and 4-4-1A1/7 (in association
with S, as defined below) for design and 4-4-1A1/21 for hydrostatic tests. The maximum allowable
stress, S, is not to exceed the lower of the following:
U Y
or
A B

where
U = minimum specified tensile strength of material at room temperature
Y = minimum specified yield point or yield strength
A, B = factors as given in the following table.
Factor Rolled or Forged Cast Steel Nodular
Steel Cast Iron
A 3.5 4 5
B 1.7 2 3
5.11.2 Oil Seals
Oil seals between non-moving parts forming the external boundary are to be of the pressure seal
type. Oil seals between moving parts forming the external pressure boundary are to be fitted in
duplicate so that the failure of one seal does not render the actuator inoperative. Alternative seal
arrangement may be acceptable, provided equivalent protection against leakage can be ensured.
5.13 Mechanical Steering Gear

Where mechanical steering systems are permitted, the following are applicable.
5.13.1 Steering Chains and Wire Ropes
Steering chains and wire rope are to be tested as required by Sections 2-2-1 and 2-2-2 of the ABS
Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2), respectively.
5.13.2 Sheaves
Sheaves are to be of ample size and so placed as to provide a fair lead to the quadrant and avoid
acute angles. Parts subjected to shock are not to be of cast iron. Guards are to be placed around the
sheaves to protect against injury. For sheaves intended for use with ropes, the radius of the grooves
is to be equal to that of the rope plus 0.8 mm (1/32 in.), and the sheave diameter is to be determined
on the basis of wire rope flexibility. For 6 × 37 wire rope, the sheave diameter is to be not less
than 18 times that of the rope. For wire ropes of lesser flexibility, the sheave diameter is to be
increased accordingly. Sheave diameters for chain are to be not less than 30 times the chain diameter.
5.13.3 Buffers
Steering gears other than the hydraulic type are to be designed with suitable buffer arrangement to
relieve the gear from shocks to the rudder.
7 Hydraulic System
7.1 Pipes, Valves and Fittings

Pipes, valves and fittings are to meet the requirements of 4-4-6/1, as applicable. The design pressure of piping
components subject to internal hydraulic pressure is to be at least 1.25 times the maximum working pressure
of the system. Arrangements for bleeding air from the hydraulic system are to be provided, where necessary.
7.3 Relief Valves

Relief valves are to be provided for the protection of the hydraulic system at any part which can be isolated
and in which pressure can be generated from the power source or from external forces. Each relief valve is
to be capable of relieving not less than 110% of the full flow of the pump(s) which can discharge through
it. With this flow condition, the maximum pressure rise is not to exceed 10% of the relief valve setting,
taking into consideration increase in oil viscosity for extreme ambient conditions.
The relief valve setting is to be at least 1.25 times the maximum working pressure (see 4-3-3/1.3.7), but is
not to exceed the maximum design pressure (see 4-3-3/7.1).
7.5 Filtration
A means is to be provided to maintain cleanliness of the hydraulic fluid.

7.7 Single Failure

Where multiple power units are provided and an auxiliary steering gear is not fitted, the steering gear
hydraulic system is to be designed so that after a single failure in its piping system, one of the power units,
or mechanical connection to the power units, the defect can be isolated so that the integrity of the remaining
part of the system will not be impaired and the steering capability can be maintained or regained. For this
purpose, the piping system associated with each power unit is to be independent of that of the other units as
far as practicable and connections are to be made only where necessary. Isolation valves are to be fitted, as
necessary, to allow any single failure in the piping system to be isolated and the steering gear to be operated
with the remaining intact part of the system. Isolation valves are to be fitted at the pipe connections to rudder
actuators. Where a non-duplicated rudder actuator is employed, the isolation valves are to be mounted
directly on the actuator. Piping systems are to be so arranged that transfer between power units can be
readily affected.
7.9 Reservoir and Storage Tank

All open-loop hydraulic systems are to be provided with an oil reservoir of suitable capacity. In addition,
for craft of 500 gross tons and above, a fixed storage tank having sufficient capacity to recharge at least
one hydraulic power system including the reservoir is to be provided. The tank is to be permanently
connected by piping in such a manner that the system can be readily recharged from a position within the
steering gear compartment.
9 Power Units
If the rule required upper rudder stock diameter is 120 mm (4.7 in.) or greater, power units are to be tested
and certified in accordance with the following requirements. If the rule-required upper rudder stock diameter
is less than 120 mm (4.7 in.), and if the craft is 500 gross tons or greater, power units are to be tested and
certified in accordance with 4-3-3/9.3 only. For craft less than 500 gross tons, power units may be accepted
based on manufacturer’s guarantee for suitability for the intended purpose and subject to satisfactory
functional tests after installation.
9.1 Prototype Test

A prototype of each new design power unit pump is to be shop-tested for a duration of not less than 100
hours. The testing is to be carried out in accordance with an approved agenda and is to include the following
as a minimum.
9.1.1
The pump and stroke control (or directional control valve) is to be operated continuously from full
flow and relief valve pressure in one direction through idle to full flow and relief valve pressure in
the opposite direction.
9.1.2
Pump suction conditions are to simulate lowest anticipated suction head. The power unit is to be
checked for abnormal heating, excessive vibration or other irregularities. Following the test, the
power unit pump is to be disassembled and inspected in the presence of a Surveyor.
9.3 Production Unit Test

Each power unit pump is to meet the hydrostatic and capacity tests in accordance with 4-4-2/1, as applicable.

11 Steering Gear Control System
11.1 Locations of Control

11.1.1 Main Steering Gear
The main steering gear is to be provided with control from the navigation bridge and local control
from within the steering gear compartment. However, if the power unit is located in a space other
than the steering compartment, the local control is to be provided in that space instead of the
steering compartment. For the purpose of local control from the steering gear compartment (or the
space containing the power unit), a means is to be provided in the steering compartment (or the
space containing the power unit) to disconnect any control system from the navigation bridge.
Such means for disconnecting are to be operable by a single person without the need for tools.
11.1.2 Auxiliary Steering Gear
The auxiliary steering gear is to be operable from a space in which the operation of the auxiliary
steering gear can be effectively carried out, or from within the steering compartment. However, if
power operated, it is to be provided with control from the navigation bridge also.
11.1.3 Duplicate Power Units
Where duplicate (or more) power units are provided and an auxiliary steering gear is not fitted,
two independent systems of control are to be provided. Each of these systems is to meet the
requirements of the control system of the main steering gear (See 4-3-3/11.1.1). Where the control
system consists of a hydraulic telemotor, a second independent system need not be fitted.
11.1.4 Manual Means
If the steering gear is operated by manual means only, such as by means of a steering wheel through
a mechanical or a non-power-operated hydraulic system, only the requirements of 4-3-3/11.7 and
4-3-3/11.9.1 are applicable.
11.3 General
11.3.1 Main and Auxiliary Steering Gears
Control systems of the main and the auxiliary steering gears are to be independent of each other in
all respects. The independent control systems are to meet the following requirements.
11.3.1(a) Redundancy. These control systems are to be independent in all respects and are to
provide on the navigation bridge all necessary apparatus and arrangements for the starting and stopping
of steering gear motors and the rapid transfer of steering power and control between units.
The control cables and piping are to be separated throughout their length as widely as is practicable.
Wires, terminals and the components for duplicated steering gear control systems installed in
units, control boxes, switchboards or bridge consoles are to be separated throughout their length as
widely as is practicable. Where physical separation is not practicable, separation may be achieved
by means of a fire retardant plate.
11.3.1(b) Duplication. All electric components of the steering gear control system are to be
duplicated. This does not require duplication of a steering wheel or steering lever.
11.3.1(c) Steering Mode Selector Switch. If a joint steering mode selector switch (uniaxial switch)
is employed for both steering gear control systems, the connections for the circuits of the control
systems are to be divided accordingly and separated from each other by an isolating plate or by air gap.
11.3.1(d) Follow-up Amplifier. In the case of double follow-up control, the amplifiers are to be
designed and fed so as to be electrically and mechanically separated. In the case of non-follow-up
control and follow-up control, the follow-up amplifiers are to be protected selectively.
11.3.1(e) Additional Control Systems. Control circuits for additional control systems (e.g., steering
lever or autopilot) are to be designed for all-pole disconnection.

11.3.1(f) Feed-back Units and Limit Switches. The feed-back units and limit switches, if any, for
the steering gear control systems are to be separated electrically and mechanically connected to
the rudder stock or actuator separately.
11.3.1(g) Hydraulic Control Components. Hydraulic system components in the power actuating
or hydraulic servo systems controlling the power systems of the steering gear, (e.g., solenoid
valves, magnetic valves) are to be considered as part of the steering gear control system and shall
be duplicated and separated.
Hydraulic system components in the steering gear control system that are part of a power unit may
be regarded as being duplicated and separated when there are two or more separate power units
provided and the piping to each power unit can be isolated.
11.3.2 Duplicate Power Units
If the main steering gear consists of duplicated (or more) power units and an auxiliary steering is
not fitted, the two independent means of control are to comply with the requirements of 4-3-3/11.3.1.
11.3.3 Single Power Units
If the main steering gear consists of a single power unit and the auxiliary steering gear is not power
operated, only one control system for the main steering gear need be provided.
11.3.4 Computer-based Systems
Steering control systems that are computer-based systems are to comply with Section 4-9-3 of the
Steel Vessel Rules and are to be considered Category III.
11.5 Control System Power Supply

Electrical power for the steering gear control system is to be derived from the motor controller of the power
unit that it is controlling, or from the main switchboard at a point adjacent to the supply to the power unit.
11.7 Communication
A means of communication is to be provided between the navigation bridge and all other locations where
steering can be effected, such as the steering gear compartment, the space where the power units are located
and the space where auxiliary steering gear is to be operated, as applicable.
11.9 Instrumentation and Alarms

The following instruments and alarms are to be provided. The audible and visual alarms are to have provisions
for testing.
11.9.1 Rudder Position Indicator
The angular position of the rudder is to be indicated on the navigational bridge and all other locations
where steering can be effected, such as the steering gear compartment, the space where the power
units are located and the space where auxiliary steering gear is to be operated, as applicable. The
rudder angle indication is to be independent of the steering gear control system.
11.9.2 Autopilot
Where autopilot is fitted, a visual and audible alarm is to be provided on the navigation bridge to
indicate its failure.
Where a power unit is provided and steering is controlled from navigation bridge, the following are applicable:
11.9.3 Motor Alarm
A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and the engine room control
station to indicate an overload condition of the steering gear power unit motor. Where three phase
electrical power is used, a visual audible alarm is to be installed which indicates failure of any one
of the supply phases. The operation of these alarms is not to interrupt the circuit.

11.9.4 Motor Running Indicators

Indicators for running indication of motors are to be installed on the navigation bridge and the
engine room control station.
11.9.5 Power Failure
A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and engine room control station
to indicate a power failure to any one of the steering gear power units.
11.9.6 Control Power Failure
A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and the engine room control
station to indicate an electrical power failure in any steering gear control circuit or remote control
circuit.
In addition, hydraulic power operated steering gear is to be provided with the following:
11.9.7 Low Oil Level Alarm
A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge and engine room control station
to indicate a low oil level in any power unit reservoir.
11.9.8 Hydraulic Lock
Where the arrangement is such that a single failure may cause hydraulic lock and loss of steering,
an audible and visual hydraulic lock alarm which identifies the failed system or component is to
be provided on the navigation bridge. The alarm is to be activated upon steering gear failure if:
• Position of the variable displacement pump control system does not correspond to the given
order, or
• Incorrect position of the 3-way full flow valve or similar in the constant delivery pump system
is detected.
Alternatively, an independent steering failure alarm for follow-up control systems complying with
the following requirements may be provided in lieu of a hydraulic lock alarm.
Where an independent steering failure alarm is installed for follow-up control systems it is to
comply with the following:
11.9.8(a) The steering failure alarm system is to actuate an audible and visible alarm in the
wheelhouse when the actual position of the rudder differs by more than 5 degrees from the rudder
position ordered by the follow-up control systems for more than:
• 30 seconds for ordered rudder position changes of 70 degrees;
• 6.5 seconds for ordered rudder position changes of 5 degrees; and
The time period calculated by the following formula for ordered rudder positions changes between
5 degrees and 70 degrees:
t = (R/2.76) + 4.64
where:
t = maximum time delay in seconds
R = ordered rudder change in degrees
11.9.8(b) The steering failure alarm system must be separate from, and independent of, each steering
gear control system, except for input received from the steering wheel shaft.
11.9.8(c) Each steering failure alarm system is to be supplied by a circuit that:
i) Is independent of other steering gear system and steering alarm circuits.
ii) Is fed from the emergency power source through the emergency distribution panel in the
wheelhouse, if installed; and
iii) Has no overcurrent protection except short circuit protection

11.9.9 Autopilot Override

11.9.9(a) Steering gear systems provided with an autopilot system are to have a device at the
primary steering station to completely disconnect the autopilot control to permit change over to
manual operation of the steering gear control system. A display is to be provided at the steering
station to ensure that the helmsman can readily and clearly recognize which mode of steering
control (autopilot or manual) is in operation.
11.9.9(b) In addition to the changeover device as in 4-3-3/11.9.9(a), for primary steering stations,
where fitted with an automatic autopilot override to change over from autopilot control to manual
operation, the following are to be provided.
i) The automatic override of the autopilot is to occur when the manual helm order is 5 degrees
of rudder angle or greater.
ii) An audible and visual alarm is to be provided at the primary steering station in the event
that the automatic autopilot override fails to respond when the manual helm order is 5
degrees of rudder angle or greater. The alarm is to be separate and distinct from other
bridge alarms and is to continue to sound until it is acknowledged.
iii) An audible and visual alarm that is immediately activated upon automatic autopilot override
actuation is to be provided at the primary steering station. The alarm is to be distinct from
other bridge alarms and is to continue to sound until it is acknowledged.
The following instrumentation and alarms are to be provided.
11.9.10 Loop Failures
A visual and audible alarm is to be given on the navigation bridge to indicate a loop failure.
Note: Monitoring is to be provided for short circuit, broken connections and earth faults for command and feedback
loops. Monitoring for loop failures is not required, when a steering failure alarm system is provided.
See 4-3-3/11.9.8(a), (b) and (c).
11.9.11 Computer-based System Failures

For steering control systems that are computer-based systems, a visual and audible alarm is to be
given on the navigation bridge to indicate a computer-based system failure.
Note: Monitoring is to be provided for data communication errors, computer hardware failures and software
failure. See also Section 4-9-3 of the Steel Vessel Rules. Monitoring for computer-based system failures
is not required, when a steering failure alarm system is provided. See 4-3-3/11.9.8(a), (b) and (c).
11.11 Operating Instructions

Appropriate operating instructions with a block diagram showing the change-over procedures for steering
control systems and steering gear power units are to be permanently posted at a conspicuous location on
the navigation bridge and in or near the steering gear compartment. Where system failure alarms in 4-3-3/11.9.8
are provided, appropriate instructions are to be permanently posted on the navigation bridge to shut down
the failed system.
13 Electrical Power Supply

Electrical power circuits are to meet the requirements of 4-6-2/11 and 4-6-2/5.3.5.
15 Testing and Trials
15.1 Testing of Piping System

The following tests are to be performed in the presence of the Surveyor.
15.1.1 Shop Tests
After fabrication, each component of the steering gear piping system, including the power units,
hydraulic cylinders and piping, is to be hydrostatically tested at the plant of manufacture to 1.5
times the relief valve setting.

15.1.2 Installation Tests

After installation in the craft, the complete piping system, including power units, hydraulic cylinders
and piping, is to be subjected to a hydrostatic test equal to 1.1 times the relief valve setting, including
a check of the relief valve operation.
15.3 Trials
The steering gear is to be tried out on the trial trip in order to demonstrate to the Surveyor’s satisfaction
that the requirements of the Rules have been met. The trial is to include the operation of the following:
15.3.1 (1 July 2012)
The main steering gear, including demonstration of the performance requirements of 4-3-3/1.9 or
with the rudder fully submerged. Where full rudder submergence cannot be obtained in ballast
conditions, steering gear trials are to be conducted at a displacement as close as reasonably possible
to full-load displacement as required by Section 6.1.2 of ISO 19019:2005 on the conditions that
either the rudder is fully submerged (zero speed waterline) and the vessel is in an acceptable trim
condition, or the rudder load and torque at the specified trial loading condition have been
predicted and extrapolated to the full load condition.
In any case for the main steering gear trial, the speed of the vessel corresponding to the number of
maximum continuous revolution of main engine and maximum design pitch applies.
15.3.2
The auxiliary steering gear, if required, including demonstration to the performance requirements
of 4-3-3/1.11 and transfer between main and auxiliary steering gear.
15.3.3
The power units, including transfer between power units.
15.3.4
The emergency power supply required by 4-6-2/5.3.5.
15.3.5
The steering gear controls, including transfer of control and local control.
15.3.6
The means of communications, as required by 4-3-3/11.7.
15.3.7
The alarms and indicators required by 4-3-3/11.9 (test may be done at dockside).
15.3.8
The storage and recharging system contained in 4-3-3/7.9 (test may be done at dockside).
15.3.9
The isolating of one power actuating system and checking for regaining steering capability are
required by 4-3-3/7.7, if applicable (test may be done at dockside).
15.3.10
Where the steering gear is designed to avoid hydraulic locking, this feature is to be demonstrated.

PART Section 4: Waterjets
4
SECTION 4 Waterjets
1 General
Full details are to be submitted for the force transmitting parts of waterjet units, including material
specifications. For craft over 24 m (79 ft), the units are to be manufactured under Surveys. Mill certificates
are to be provided for the components of the steering section. The material tests for the impellers, shafts
and couplings are to be witnessed by the Surveyor. Hydraulic cylinders are to be manufactured and inspected
in accordance with the requirements of 4-4-6/3. The use of galvanically dissimilar metallic materials is to
be considered in the waterjet design.
3 Design
Design basis stress calculations for the impellers, shafting, steering mechanism and reversing mechanism
are to be submitted to substantiate the suitability and strength of component parts for the intended service.
For the purpose of design review, the stress calculations are to cover the “worst case” condition for each
component. The factor of safety for the above components is not to be less than 2.0 when determined by
the following equation:
1 S S
= s + a
FS U E
nor less than 4.0 when determined by the following equation:
U
FS =
Ss
where
FS = factor of safety
Ss = steady stress of low cycle alternating stress
Sa = alternating stress
U = ultimate tensile strength of material
E = corrected fatigue strength of material (based on 108 cycles)
5 Housings
Calculations or test results to substantiate the suitability and strength of the pressure and suction housing
are to be submitted for review. The condition with the inlet of the suction blocked is also to be considered.
A factor of safety of not less than four based on the ultimate tensile strength of the material (or two based
on the yield strength) is to be maintained at each point in the housing. Housing are to be hydrostatically
tested to 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or to 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi), whichever is greater.

Part 4 Vessel Systems and Machinery
Section 4 Waterjets 4-3-4
7 Reversing Mechanisms
Astern thrust is to be provided in sufficient amounts to secure proper control of the craft in all normal
circumstances. The reversing mechanism is to provide for reversing at full power.
9 Impeller Bearings
Antifriction bearings are to have a B10 life of at least 80,000 hours.

PART Section 5: Propulsion Redundancy
4
SECTION 5 Propulsion Redundancy
1 General
1.1 Application
The requirements in this Section apply to craft equipped with propulsion and steering systems designed to
provide enhanced reliability and availability through functional redundancy. Application of the requirements of
this Section is optional. When a craft is designed, built and surveyed in accordance with this Section, and
when found satisfactory, a classification notation, as specified in 4-3-5/3, as appropriate, may be granted.
It is a prerequisite that the craft is also to be classed to either À ACCU or À ABCU notation, in accordance
with Part 4, Chapter 7.
1.3 Objective
The objective of this Section is to provide requirements which reduce the risk to personnel, the craft, other
vessels or structures, the environment and the economic consequences due to a single failure causing loss
of propulsion or steering capability. This is achieved through varying degrees of redundancy based upon
the craft’s Classification Notations, as described in 4-3-5/3.
The requirements in this Section are intended so that, following a single failure, the craft is capable of either:
i) Maintaining course and maneuverability at reduced speeds without intervention by other vessels, or
ii) Maintaining position under adverse weather conditions, as described in 4-3-5/7.1, to avoid uncontrolled
drift, and navigating back to safe harbor when weather conditions are suitable.
In addition, this Section addresses aspects which would reduce the detrimental effects to the propulsion
systems due to a localized fire in the machinery spaces.
1.5 Definitions
For the purpose of this Section, the following definitions are applicable:
1.5.1 Auxiliary Services System
All support systems (e.g., fuel oil system, lubricating oil system, cooling water system, compressed
air and hydraulic systems, etc.) which are required to run propulsion machinery and propulsors.
1.5.2 Propulsion Machinery Space
Any space containing machinery or equipment forming part of the propulsion systems.
1.5.3 Propulsion Machine
A device (e.g., diesel engine, turbine, electrical motor, etc.) which develops mechanical energy to
drive a propulsor.
1.5.4 Propulsion System
A system designed to provide thrust to a craft, consisting of one or more propulsion machines, one
or more propulsors, all necessary auxiliaries and associated control, alarm and safety systems.

Section 5 Propulsion Redundancy 4-3-5
1.5.5 Propulsor
A device (e.g., propeller, waterjet) which imparts force to a column of water in order to propel a
craft, together with any equipment necessary to transmit the power from the propulsion machinery to
the device (e.g., shafting, gearing, etc.).
1.5.6 Steering System
A system designed to control the direction of movement of a craft, including the rudder, steering
gear, etc.
1.7 Plans and Data to be Submitted

In addition to the plans and data required by the Rules, the following are to be submitted:
i) Results of computations showing that, upon any single failure in the propulsion and steering systems,
the craft is able to meet the capability requirements of 4-3-5/7.1, if applicable, with details of the
computational methods used. Alternatively, the results of model testing are acceptable as evidence.
ii) A Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) or equivalent. The integrity of the propulsion systems,
steering systems and auxiliary service systems is to be verified by means of a Failure Mode and
Effect Analysis (FMEA) or equivalent method and is to show that a single failure will not compromise
the criteria as specified in 4-3-5/7.
iii) A Testing Plan to cover the means whereby verification of the redundancy arrangements will be
accomplished.
iv) A general arrangement detailing locations of all machinery and equipment necessary for the correct
functioning of the propulsion and steering systems, including the routing of all associated power,
control and communication cables. (Required for R1-S and R2-S only).
v) Operating Manual, as required in 4-3-5/13.
3 Classification Notations
Where requested by the Owner, propulsion and steering installations which are found to comply with the
requirements specified in this Section and which have been constructed and installed under survey by the
Surveyor may be assigned with the following class notations, as appropriate.
i) R1 A craft fitted with multiple propulsion machines but only a single propulsor and steering
system will be assigned the class notation R1.
ii) R2 A craft fitted with multiple propulsion machines and also multiple propulsors and steering
systems (hence, multiple propulsion systems) will be assigned the class notation R2.
iii) R1-S A craft fitted with only a single propulsor but having the propulsion machines arranged in
separate spaces such that a fire or flood in one space would not affect the propulsion machine(s) in
the other space(s) will be assigned the class notation R1-S.
iv) R2-S A craft fitted with multiple propulsors (hence, multiple propulsion systems) which has the
propulsion machines and propulsors, and associated steering systems arranged in separate spaces
(propulsion machinery space and steering gear flat) such that a fire or flood in one space would
not affect the propulsion machine(s) and propulsor(s), and associated steering systems in the other
space(s) will be assigned the class notation R2-S.
Example arrangements for each of the above notations are shown in 4-3-5/Figure 1.
v) + (Plus Symbol) The mark + will be affixed to the end of any of the above class notations
(e.g., R1+, R2-S+) to denote that the craft’s propulsion capability is such that, upon a single
failure, propulsive power can be maintained or immediately restored to the extent necessary to
withstand adverse weather conditions without drifting, in accordance with 4-3-5/7.3. The lack of
the mark + after the class notation indicates that the craft is not intended to withstand the adverse
weather conditions in 4-3-5/7.3, but can maintain course and maneuverability at a reduced speed
under normal expected weather conditions, in accordance with 4-3-5/7.1.

FIGURE 1
Arrangements of Propulsion Redundancy
R1 R1-S
A-0 BHD
A-60/WT BHD
SG PM-1 SG PM-1
RG RG
PM-2 PM-2
R2 R2-S
SG1 RG 1 SG1 RG 1
PM-1 PM-1
A-0 BHD A-60/WT BHD
SG2 SG2
PM-2 PM-2
RG 2 RG 2
STEERING GEAR
REDUCTION PROPULSION
GEAR MACHINERY E-MOTOR
AZIMUTH THRUSTER
R2 (An Alternate Design Concept)
E-MOTOR
SG RG
PM
AZIMUTH THRUSTER

5 Single Failure Concept

The degree of redundancy required to meet the objectives of this Section is based upon a single failure
concept. The concept accepts that failures may occur but that only one such failure is likely at any time.
The final consequence of any single failure is not to compromise the propulsion and steering capability
required in 4-3-5/7, unless otherwise specified.
5.1 Single Failure Criteria

5.1.1 R1 Notation
For R1, the single failure criterion is applied to the propulsion machines, its auxiliary service
systems and its control systems. This notation does not consider failure of the propulsor or rudder,
or total loss of the propulsion machinery space or steering gear flat due to fire or flood.
5.1.2 R2 Notation
For R2, the single failure criterion is applied to the propulsion machines, propulsors, auxiliary
service systems, control systems and steering systems. This notation does not consider total loss
of the propulsion machinery space or steering gear flat due to fire or flood.
5.1.3 R1-S Notation
For R1-S, the single failure criterion is applied as for R1, but a fire or flood in one of the propulsion
machinery spaces is also considered.
5.1.4 R2-S Notation
For R2-S, the single failure criterion is applied as for R2, but a fire or flood in one of the propulsion
machinery spaces or steering gear flats is also considered.
7 Propulsion and Steering Capability
7.1 Craft Without + in Class Notation

Upon a single failure, the propulsion system is to be continuously maintained or restored within two (2)
minutes (for alternate standby propulsion per 4-3-5/7.3 below) such that the craft is capable of advancing
at a speed of at least one-half its design speed or seven knots, whichever is less, for at least 36 hours when
the craft is fully loaded. Adequate steering capability is also to be maintained at this speed.
7.3 Craft with + in Class Notation

In addition to 4-3-5/7.1 above, upon a single failure, the propulsion and steering system is to be continuously
maintained or immediately restored within two (2) minutes, as in the case when an alternate standby type
of propulsion is provided, (e.g., electric motor, diesel engine, waterjet propulsion, etc.) such that the craft is
capable of maneuvering into an orientation of least resistance to the weather, and once in that orientation,
maintaining position such that the craft will not drift for at least 36 hours. This may be achieved by using
all available propulsion and steering systems including thrusters, if provided. This is to be possible in all
weather conditions up to a wind speed of 17 m/s (33 knots) and significant wave height of 4.5 m (15 ft)
with 7.3 seconds mean period, both of which are acting concurrently in the same direction. The severest
loading condition for craft’s maneuverability is also to be considered for compliance with this weather
criterion. Compliance with these capability requirements is to be verified by computational simulations,
and the detailed results are to be submitted for approval. The estimated optimum capability is to be
documented in the operating manual, as required in 4-3-5/13.

9 System Design
9.1 Propulsion Machinery and Propulsors

At least two independent propulsion machines are to be provided. As appropriate, a single failure in any
one propulsion machine or auxiliary service system is not to result in propulsion performance inferior to
that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.
9.1.1 R1 Notation
For R1 notation, the propulsion machines and auxiliary service systems may be located in the
same propulsion machinery space and the propulsion machines may drive a single propulsor.
9.1.2 R2 Notation
For R2 notation, at least two propulsors are to be provided such that a single failure of one will
not result in propulsion performance inferior to that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.
The propulsion machines and auxiliary service systems may, however, be located in the same
propulsion machinery space.
9.1.3 R1-S Notation
For R1-S notation, the propulsion machines and auxiliary service systems are to be separated in
such a way that total loss of any one propulsion machinery space (due to fire or flood) will not
result in propulsion performance inferior to that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.
The propulsion machines may, however, drive a single propulsor, and the main propulsion gear or
main power transmitting gear is to be located outside the propulsion machinery spaces separated
by a bulkhead meeting the criteria per 4-3-5/9.3.
9.1.4 R2-S Notation
For R2-S notation, at least two propulsors are to be provided, and the propulsion systems are to be
installed in separate spaces such that a single failure in one propulsor or a total loss of any one
propulsion machinery space (due to fire or flood) will not result in propulsion performance inferior
to that required by 4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable.
9.3 System Segregation

Where failure is deemed to include loss of a complete propulsion machinery space due to fire or flooding
(R1-S and R2-S notations), redundant components and systems are to be separated by watertight bulkheads
with an A-60 fire classification.
Service access doors which comply with 3-2-7/7.1.1 of the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel
Vessels Under 90m (295) ft in Length, may be provided between the segregated propulsion machinery
spaces. A means of clear indication of open/closed status of the doors is to be provided in the bridge and at
the centralized control station. Unless specially approved by the flag Administration, these service access
doors are not to be accounted for as the means of escape from the machinery space Category A required by
the requirements of Chapter 4.7 of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft, as amended.
9.5 Steering Systems

An independent steering system is to be provided for each propulsor. Regardless of the type and the size
of craft, each steering system is to meet the requirements of Chapter 4.7 of the International Code of Safety
for High-Speed Craft.
The rudder design is to be such that the craft can turn in either direction with one propulsion machine or
one steering system inoperable.
For R2-S notation, the steering systems are to be separated such that a fire or flood in one steering compartment
will not affect the steering system(s) in the other compartment(s), and performance in accordance with
4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable, is maintained.
For R2 and R2-S notations, in the event of steering system failure, means are to be provided to secure
rudders in the amidships position.

9.7 Auxiliary Service Systems

At least two independent auxiliary service systems, including fuel oil service tanks, are to be provided and
arranged such that a single failure will not result in propulsion performance inferior to that required by
4-3-5/7.1 or 4-3-5/7.3, as applicable. However, a single failure in the vital auxiliary machinery (e.g., pumps,
heaters, etc.), excluding failure of fixed piping, is not to result in reduction of the full propulsion capability.
In order to meet this requirement, it will be necessary to either cross-connect the auxiliary service systems
and size the components (pumps, heaters, etc.) to be capable of supplying two or more propulsion machines
simultaneously, or provide duplicate components (pumps, heaters, etc.) in each auxiliary system in case
one fails.
With the exception of the fuel oil service tank venting system, interconnections between auxiliary service
systems will be considered, provided that the same are fitted with means (i.e., valves) to disconnect or
isolate the systems from each other.
For R1-S and R2-S notations, the above-mentioned independent auxiliary service systems are to be segregated
in the separate propulsion machinery spaces. With the exception of fuel oil service tank venting systems,
interconnections of auxiliary service systems will be acceptable, provided that the required disconnection
or isolation means are fitted at both sides of the bulkhead separating the propulsion machinery spaces.
Position status of the disconnection or isolation means is to be provided at the navigation bridge and the
centralized control station. Penetrations in the bulkhead separating the propulsion machinery spaces and
steering gear flats (as in the case of R2-S notation) are not to compromise the fire and watertight integrity
of the bulkhead.
9.9 Electrical Distribution Systems

Electrical power generation and distribution systems are to be arranged such that following a single failure
in the systems, the electrical power supply is maintained or immediately restored to the extent that the
requirements in 4-3-5/7 are met.
Where the craft’s essential equipment is fed from one main switchboard, the bus bars are to be divided into
at least two sections. Where the sections are normally connected, detection of a short circuit on the bus
bars is to result in automatic separation. The circuits supplying equipment essential to the operation of the
propulsion and steering systems are to be divided between the sections such that a loss of one section will
not result in performance inferior to that defined in 4-3-5/7. A fully redundant power management system
is to be provided so that each section of the switchboard can function independently.
For R1-S and R2-S notations, the craft service power generators, their auxiliary systems, the switchboard
sections and the power management systems are to be located in at least two machinery spaces separated
by watertight bulkheads with an A-60 fire classification. The power distribution is to be so arranged that a
fire or flooding of one machinery space is not to result in propulsion capability inferior to that defined in
4-3-5/7. Where an interconnection is provided between the separate propulsion machinery spaces, a
disconnection or isolation means are to be provided at both sides of the bulkhead separating the propulsion
machinery spaces. Position status of the disconnection or isolation means is to be provided at the
navigation bridge and the centralized control station. Fire or flooding of one machinery space is not to
result in propulsion capability inferior to that defined in 4-3-5/7. The power cables from the service
generator(s) in one propulsion machinery space are not to pass through the other propulsion machinery
space containing the remaining service generator(s).
Additionally, for R1-S and R2-S notations, subject to approval by the Administration, the requirements
for self-contained emergency source of power may be considered satisfied without an additional emergency
source of electrical power, provided that:
i) All generating sets and other required sources of emergency source of power are designed to
function at full rated power when upright and when inclined up to a maximum angle of heel in the
intact and damaged condition, as determined in accordance with Part 3, Chapter 3. In no case
need the equipment be designed to operate when inclined more than 22.5° about the longitudinal
axis and/or when inclined 10° about the transverse axis of the craft.
ii) The generator set(s) installed in each machinery space is of sufficient capacity to meet the requirements
of 4-6-2/3 and 4-6-2/5.
iii) The arrangements required in each machinery space are equivalent to those required by 4-6-2/5.5.2,
4-6-2/5.9 and 4-6-2/5.15, so that a source of electrical power is available at all times for the
services required by 4-6-2/5.

9.11 Control and Monitoring Systems

The control systems are to be operable both independently and in combination from the bridge or the
centralized control station. The mode of operation is to be clearly indicated at each position from which
the propulsion machinery may be controlled.
It is to be possible to locally control the propulsion machinery and the propulsor.
For R1-S and R2-S notations, the control and monitoring system for the propulsor (e.g., controllable pitch
propeller control), including all associated cabling, is to be duplicated in each space, and fire or flooding of
one space is not to adversely affect operation of the propulsor from the other space.
9.13 Communication Systems

The requirements of 4-6-2/15 are to be complied with for all installed propulsion control positions.
For R1-S and R2-S notations, the communications cables to each control position are not to be routed
through the same machinery space.
11 Fire Precautions
The requirements of this section apply to Category A machinery spaces only.
For R1 and R2 notations, the following requirements are to be complied with in order to minimize the risk
of common damage due to a localized fire in the machinery space.
i) Each auxiliary services system is to be grouped and separated as far as practicable.
ii) Electrical cables supplying power to redundant equipment are to exit the switchboard and be
routed to the equipment, as far apart as practicable.
13 Operating Manual
An operating manual, which is consistent with the information and criteria upon which the classification is
based, is to be placed aboard the craft for the guidance of the operating personnel. The operating manual is
to give clear guidance to the craft’s crew about the craft’s redundancy features and how they may be
effectively and speedily put into service in the event that the craft’s normal propulsion capability is lost.
The operating manual is to include the following, as a minimum:
i) Craft’s name and ABS ID number
ii) Simplified diagram and descriptions of the propulsion systems in normal condition
iii) Simplified diagram and descriptions of the propulsion redundancy features
iv) Reduced propulsion capability in terms of estimated worst sea-states which the craft may
withstand without drifting (for craft with + in the Class Notation)
v) Test results for the craft’s maneuverability at reduced speed (for craft without + in the Class Notation).
vi) Step-by-step instructions for the use of the redundancy features
vii) Description of the communication systems
viii) Detailed instructions for local propulsion machinery control
The operating manual is to be submitted for review by ABS solely to verify the presence of the above
information, which is to be consistent with the design information and limitations considered in the craft’s
classification. ABS is not responsible for the operation of the craft.
Any modifications made to the existing propulsion systems are to be approved by ABS. The operating
manual is to be updated accordingly and submitted to ABS for review.

15 Test and Trial

During the sea trial, the propulsion and steering capability are to be tested in accordance with an approved
test program to verify compliance with this Section.
15.1 Fault Simulation Test

Simulation tests for the redundancy arrangements are to be carried out to verify that, upon any single failure,
either the propulsion and steering systems remain operational, or the back-up propulsion and steering
systems may be speedily brought into service.
15.3 Communication System Test

The effectiveness of the communication systems, as required in 4-3-5/9.13 above, is to be tested to verify
that local control of the propulsion systems may be carried out satisfactorily.
17 Survey After Construction

The surveys after construction are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements as contained in the
ABS Rules for Surveys After Construction (Part 7).

PART Section 6: Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft
4
SECTION 6 Propulsion and Lift Devices for Air Cushion Craft
1 General
1.1 Application
Provisions of this Section apply to all air cushion craft
1.3 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted

Full details are to be submitted for all components that directly provide thrust and lift including all machinery
items and any associated air propellers, ducts, vanes, scoops and nozzles.
3 Materials
3.1 General
The design of propulsion and lift devices is to pay due regard to the effects of allowable corrosion, electrolytic
action between different metals, erosion or cavitation which may result from operation in environments in
which they are subjected to spray, debris, salt, sand, icing, etc.

3.3.1 Testing by a Surveyor
The materials of the shafts, impellers, and couplings are to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor
for verification of their compliance with the applicable requirements of Chapter 3 of the ABS
Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2), or such other appropriate material specifications as may
be approved in connection with a particular design.
5 Design
5.1 General
5.1.1 Arrangements
Propulsion and lift arrangements may be provided by separate devices, or be integrated into a
single propulsion and lift device. Propulsion devices are those which directly provide the propulsive
thrust. Appropriate arrangements are to be made to ensure that:
i) Ingestion of debris or foreign matter is minimized:
ii) The possibility of injury to personnel from shafting or rotating parts is minimized; and
iii) Where necessary, inspection and removal of debris can be carried out safely in service.
5.1.2 Calculations
Design basis stress calculations for propulsion and lift devices are to be submitted to substantiate
the suitability and strength of the components for the intended service and compliance with a
recognized standard or code of practice.

PART Section 7: Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length
4
SECTION 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length
1 General
This Section is applicable to all craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length. Sections 4-3-1 through 4-3-6
are applicable except as modified herein.
3 Shafting and Gears
3.1 Outboard Engines

Outboard gasoline engines are to be built to an international or national standard acceptable to ABS or
have at least two years of service in the marine industry. The installation is to be in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.3 Inboard/Outboard Installations

3.3.1 Inboard/Outboard Propulsion Systems
Inboard/outboard propulsion systems (gearing, transmission, etc.) are to be rated for the maximum
rating and RPM of the associated prime mover. The installation is to be in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.3.2 Gears for Inboard and Inboard/Outboard Propulsion Systems
Gears for inboard and inboard/outboard propulsion systems are to be designed and built for
installation in a marine environment and rated to the maximum rating and RPM of the associated
prime mover. The gears are to be built to a standard acceptable to ABS or have at least two years
of service in the marine industry. The installation is to be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.5 Inboard Installations

Propulsion shafting installations are to comply with one of the following:
• 4-3-1/7, or
• American Boat and Yacht Council (ABYC), Section P-6.5 using a design coefficient (Cd) of at least 15, or
• Another National or International Standard acceptable to ABS, or
• Submission of a fatigue analysis showing that the proposed shafting size has a safety factor of at least
two (2).
3.7 Propulsion Shaft Alignment and Vibrations

Section 4-3-1 is not applicable to craft under 24 meters (79 feet) in length.
3.9 Materials
Torque transmitting components are not required to be tested in the presence of a Surveyor. Material
certificates are to be provided for these items.

Section 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-3-7
5 Propellers
Propellers for craft under 24 meters (79 feet) in length are to be part of a manufacturer’s standard product
line and are not required to have a Surveyor’s attendance or material testing and inspection.
7 Steering Gears
7.1 General
Hydraulic and electrical power operated steering gears and orbitrol systems are to comply with Section
4-3-3, except as modified below:
• Rudder actuators will be accepted based on Manufacturer’s Certification
• Hydraulic power units will be accepted based on Manufacturer’s Certification
or
Alternatively, the following ISO standards, as applicable, may be substituted for the requirements of this
Section:
• ISO 8847 Small Craft – Steering Gear – Wire Rope and Pulley Systems
• ISO 8848 Small Craft – Remote Steering System
• ISO 9775 Small Craft – Remote Steering Systems for Single Outboard Motors of 15 kW to 40 kW Power
• ISO 10592 Small Craft – Hydraulic Steering Systems
7.3 Materials
Materials are to meet the requirements of 4-3-3/3.1, but are not required to be tested in accordance with
4-3-3/3.3.
7.5 System Arrangements

Steering systems are to meet the requirements of 4-3-3/7.7 and 4-3-3/11.3.1, except when the craft can
meet one of the following requirements to the satisfaction of the Technical Office and Surveyor:
• For craft fitted with multiple propulsion units and the steering system disabled and/or locked in a
neutral position, steering can be effected by varying the speed and direction of the propulsion units.
The propulsion units are to be spaced as widely as practical and be capable of steering the craft in the
worst anticipated operational conditions.
• When using mechanical steering systems, sufficient supplies are carried so as to be capable of
temporarily repairing the steering system in a timely manner until permanent repairs can be affected at
the nearest port of refuge.
• The steering can be effected manually under the worst anticipated operational conditions (i.e. physically
turning the rudder, outboard motor, etc.).
7.7 Mechanical Steering Gears

Where mechanical steering systems are permitted, the following are applicable.
7.7.1 Steering Chains and Wire Ropes
Steering chains and wire rope are to be tested, as required by of the ABS Rules for Materials and
Welding (Part 2).

Section 7 Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-3-7
7.7.2 Sheaves
Sheaves are to be of ample size and so placed as to provide a fair lead to the quadrant and avoid
acute angles. Parts subjected to shock are not to be of cast iron. Guards are to be placed around the
sheaves to protect against injury. For sheaves intended for use with ropes, the radius of the
grooves is to be equal to that of the rope plus 0.8 mm (1/32 in.), and the sheave diameter is to be
determined on the basis of wire rope flexibility. For 6 × 37 wire rope, the sheave diameter is to be
not less than 18 times that of the rope. For wire ropes of lesser flexibility, the sheave diameter is to
be increased accordingly. Sheave diameters for chain are to be not less than 30 times the chain
diameter.
7.7.3 Buffers
Steering gears other than hydraulic type are to be designed with suitable buffer arrangement to
relieve the gear from shocks to the rudder.
9 Inboard/Outboard and Outboard Installations
9.1 General
Steering installations for Inboard/Outboard and Outboard installations are to be in accordance manufacturer’s
recommendations as well as the applicable requirements of this Section. Steering components which are
provided as part of the Inboard/Outboard or Outboard installation are not required to be certified under
4-3-3/5.
9.3 Instrumentation
Instrumentation is to be in accordance with 4-3-3/11.9, as applicable, except that a rudder angle indicator is
not required for that craft for which the rudder or outboard motor is in a direct line of sight from the navigation
bridge and the steering angle can be determined visually.
9.5 Communications
A means of communication is not required for craft which have a direct line of sight between the main
steering control station and the location of the steering gear.
9.7 Certification
Steering gears are not required to be certified under 4-3-3/3, 4-3-3/9.1, 4-3-3/9.3, and 4-3-3/15.1.1
9.9 Installation, Tests and Trials

Steering gear operation is to be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Surveyor in accordance with
4-3-3/11.11, 4-3-3/15.1.2 and 4-3-3/15.3.
11 Waterjets
Waterjets will be accepted based on manufacturer’s certification.

PART Chapter 4: Pumps and Piping Systems
4
CHAPTER 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 General .................................................................................................. 89
1 Construction and Installation ............................................................ 89
1.1 General Requirements .................................................................. 89
1.3 Piping Groups................................................................................ 89
3 Plans and Data to be Submitted ....................................................... 89
3.1 Plans ............................................................................................. 89
3.3 All Piping Systems ......................................................................... 89
3.5 Booklet of Standard Details ........................................................... 89
5 Material Tests and Inspection ........................................................... 90
5.1 Specifications and Purchase Orders ............................................. 90
5.3 Special Materials ........................................................................... 90
7 Definitions ......................................................................................... 90
7.1 Piping/Piping Systems ................................................................... 90
7.3 Joints ............................................................................................. 90
7.5 Fittings ........................................................................................... 90
7.7 Positive Closing Valves ................................................................. 90
7.9 Recognized Standard of Construction ........................................... 90
7.11 Standard or Extra-Heavy Pipe ....................................................... 90
9 General Installation Details ............................................................... 91
9.1 Protection ...................................................................................... 91
9.3 Pipes Near Switchboards .............................................................. 91
9.5 Expansion or Contraction Stresses ............................................... 91
9.7 Molded Expansion Joints............................................................... 91
9.9 Bulkhead, Deck or Tank Top Penetrations .................................... 92
9.11 Collision-Bulkhead Penetrations.................................................... 92
9.13 Sluice Valves and Cocks ............................................................... 93
9.15 Relief Valves ................................................................................. 93
9.17 Instruments.................................................................................... 93
9.19 Flexible Hoses ............................................................................... 93
9.21 Control of Static Electricity............................................................. 96
9.23 Leakage Containment ................................................................... 96
9.25 Piping on Aluminum Craft .............................................................. 96
9.27 Craft Subject to Damage Stability .................................................. 96

SECTION 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings ..................................................... 97
1 Pumps ...............................................................................................97
1.1 General .......................................................................................... 97
1.3 Hydrostatic Test ............................................................................. 97
1.5 Capacity Test ................................................................................. 97
1.7 Relief Valve Capacity Test ............................................................. 97
3 Pressure Tests ..................................................................................98
3.1 General .......................................................................................... 98
3.3 Fuel Oil Service System ................................................................ 98
3.5 Fuel Oil Suction and Transfer Lines............................................... 98
3.7 Starting Air Piping .......................................................................... 98
3.9 Hydraulic Power Piping.................................................................. 98
3.11 All Piping ........................................................................................ 98
3.13 Specific Systems ........................................................................... 98
3.15 Hydrostatic Tests of Shell Valves .................................................. 98
3.17 Pneumatic Tests in Lieu of Hydrostatic Tests ................................ 98
5 Metallic Pipes ....................................................................................99
5.1 Test and Inspection of Group I Piping............................................ 99
5.3 Steel Pipe ...................................................................................... 99
5.5 Aluminum Pipe .............................................................................. 99
5.7 Copper Pipe ................................................................................... 99
5.9 Brass Pipe ..................................................................................... 99
5.11 Design ......................................................................................... 100
5.13 Working Pressure and Thickness – Alternative Consideration .... 101
7 Plastic Pipes....................................................................................101
7.1 General ........................................................................................ 101
7.3 Plans and Data to be Submitted .................................................. 101
7.5 Design ......................................................................................... 102
7.7 Installation of Plastic Pipes .......................................................... 105
7.9 Manufacturing of Plastic Pipes .................................................... 106
7.11 Plastic Pipe Bonding Procedure Qualification .............................. 107
7.13 Tests by the Manufacturer – Fire Endurance Testing of Plastic
Piping in the Dry Condition (For Level 1 and Level 2).................. 107
7.15 Test by Manufacturer – Fire Endurance Testing of Water-Filled
Plastic Piping (For Level 3) .......................................................... 109
7.17 Tests by Manufacturer – Flame Spread....................................... 111
7.19 Testing By Manufacturer – General ............................................. 111
7.21 Testing Onboard After Installation ............................................... 111
7.23 Acceptance of Flag State Requirements ..................................... 111
9 Material of Valves and Fittings ........................................................115
9.1 General ........................................................................................ 115
9.3 Forged or Cast Steel.................................................................... 115
9.5 Cast Iron ...................................................................................... 115
9.7 Ductile (Nodular) Iron................................................................... 115
9.9 Brass and Bronze ........................................................................ 116
9.11 Plastic .......................................................................................... 116

11 Valves ............................................................................................. 116
11.1 General........................................................................................ 116
11.3 Construction ................................................................................ 116
11.5 Hydrostatic Test and Identification .............................................. 117
13 Pipe Fittings .................................................................................... 117
13.1 General........................................................................................ 117
13.3 Hydrostatic Test and Identification .............................................. 117
13.5 Nonstandard Fittings ................................................................... 117
13.7 Mechanical Joints ........................................................................ 117
15 Welded Nonstandard Valves and Fittings....................................... 118
17 Flanges ........................................................................................... 118
17.1 General........................................................................................ 118
17.3 Group I Piping Flanges ................................................................ 118
17.5 Group II Piping Flanges ............................................................... 118
17.7 Group II Plastic Piping Flanges ................................................... 118
19 Sea Inlets and Overboard Discharges ............................................ 118
19.1 Installation ................................................................................... 118
19.3 Valve Connections to Shell.......................................................... 119
19.5 Materials ...................................................................................... 119
19.7 Shell Reinforcement .................................................................... 119
19.9 Common Overboard Discharge ................................................... 119
21 Machinery and Pumping Systems .................................................. 119
21.1 Valves Required .......................................................................... 119
21.3 Sea Chests .................................................................................. 119
23 Scuppers and Drains ...................................................................... 120
23.1 General........................................................................................ 120
23.3 Protection from Sea Water Entry ................................................. 120
23.5 Gravity Drains from Superstructures or Deckhouses .................. 122
23.7 Craft Receiving Subdivision Loadlines ........................................ 122
25 Cooler Installations External to the Hull .......................................... 123
25.1 General........................................................................................ 123
25.3 Integral Keel Cooler Installations ................................................. 123
25.5 Non-integral Keel Cooler Installations ......................................... 123
TABLE 1 Allowable Stress Values S for Steel Piping ........................... 101

TABLE 2 Fire Endurance Requirements Matrix for Plastic Pipes ........ 112
TABLE 3 Standards for Plastic Pipes – Typical Requirements for
All Systems ........................................................................... 114
TABLE 4 Standards for Plastic Pipes – Additional Requirements
Depending on Service and/or Location of Piping.................. 115
FIGURE 1 Fire Endurance Test Burner Assembly ................................. 109

FIGURE 2 Fire Endurance Test Stand with Mounted Sample ............... 110
FIGURE 3 Overboard Discharges – Valve Requirements ..................... 121

SECTION 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks .............................................. 124
1 General Arrangement of Bilge Systems .........................................124
3 Bilge Pumps ....................................................................................124
3.1 Number of Pumps ........................................................................ 124
3.3 Capacity....................................................................................... 125
3.5 Centrifugal Pumps ....................................................................... 125
3.7 Independent Power Bilge Pumps................................................. 125
5 Bilge and Ballast Piping ..................................................................125
5.1 General ........................................................................................ 125
5.3 Installation ................................................................................... 125
5.5 Manifolds, Cocks and Valves ....................................................... 126
5.7 Strainers ...................................................................................... 126
5.9 Size of Bilge Suctions .................................................................. 126
5.11 Gravity Drains .............................................................................. 127
5.13 Ballast Water Treatment Systems ............................................... 128
7 Emergency Bilge Suctions for Main Machinery Spaces .................128
9 Vent Pipes .......................................................................................128
9.1 General ........................................................................................ 128
9.3 Height and Wall Thickness .......................................................... 128
9.5 Size.............................................................................................. 129
9.7 Location ....................................................................................... 129
9.9 Vent Outlets ................................................................................. 129
11 Overflow Pipes ................................................................................134
11.1 General Requirements................................................................. 134
11.3 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid Tanks ......... 134
11.5 Overflow Common Header .......................................................... 134
13 Sounding .........................................................................................134
13.1 General ........................................................................................ 134
13.3 Sounding Pipes ........................................................................... 134
13.5 Gauge Glasses ............................................................................ 135
13.7 Level Indicating Systems and Devices ........................................ 135
15 Oil Pollution Prevention Measures ..................................................136
15.1 General ........................................................................................ 136
15.3 Oily Water Filtering or Separating Equipment .............................. 136
15.5 Sludge Tank ................................................................................ 136
15.7 Sludge Piping System.................................................................. 136
TABLE 1 Dimensions and Details of Standard Discharge

Connection Flange ................................................................136
FIGURE 1 Example of Normal Position ..................................................132

FIGURE 2 Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing
Upward ..................................................................................132
Downward .............................................................................133
Sideways ...............................................................................133

SECTION 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks ............................ 137
1 Fuel Oil Piping Systems .................................................................. 137
1.1 General Arrangement .................................................................. 137
1.3 Piping, Valves and Fittings .......................................................... 138
1.5 Oil Heating Arrangements ........................................................... 138
1.7 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid Tanks......... 139
1.9 Fuel Oil Purifiers .......................................................................... 139
3 Fuel Oil Transfer and Filling ............................................................ 139
3.1 General........................................................................................ 139
3.3 Pipes in Oil Tanks ....................................................................... 139
3.5 Control Valves or Cocks .............................................................. 139
3.7 Valves on Oil Tanks .................................................................... 139
3.9 Remote Shutdown of Pumps ....................................................... 140
3.11 Oil Drain Tanks............................................................................ 140
5 Fuel Oil Service and Injection Systems .......................................... 140
7 Low Flash Point Fuels..................................................................... 141
7.1 General........................................................................................ 141
7.3 Fuel Heating ................................................................................ 141
7.5 Fuel Oil Tank Vents ..................................................................... 141
9 Lubricating Oil Systems .................................................................. 141
9.1 General........................................................................................ 141
9.3 Sight Flow Glasses ...................................................................... 141
9.5 Internal Combustion Engines ...................................................... 141
9.7 Reduction Gears ......................................................................... 141
9.9 Electrical Machinery .................................................................... 141
9.11 Hose Reels .................................................................................. 142
11 Additional Measures for Oil Pollution Prevention ........................... 142
11.1 General........................................................................................ 142
11.3 Tank Protection Requirements .................................................... 142
11.5 Class Notation – POT .................................................................. 143
FIGURE 1 Acceptable Fuel Oil Tanks Arrangements Inside

Category A Machinery Spaces ............................................. 137
SECTION 5 Internal Combustion Engine Systems .............................................. 144

1 Fuel Oil System............................................................................... 144
3 Lubricating Oil System .................................................................... 144
5 Cooling Water System .................................................................... 144
7 Exhaust Piping ................................................................................ 144
9 Starting-air Systems........................................................................ 144
SECTION 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems ................................................... 145

1 Hydraulic Systems .......................................................................... 145
1.1 General........................................................................................ 145
1.3 Valves.......................................................................................... 145
1.5 Piping .......................................................................................... 145

1.7 Pipe Fittings ................................................................................. 145
1.9 Accumulators and Fluid Power Cylinders .................................... 146
1.11 Design Pressure .......................................................................... 146
1.13 Segregation of High Pressure Hydraulic Units ............................. 146
3 Fluid Power Cylinders .....................................................................146
3.1 General ........................................................................................ 146
3.3 Non-compliance with a Recognized Standard ............................. 146
3.5 Materials ...................................................................................... 147
3.7 Rudder Actuators ......................................................................... 147
3.9 Cylinders below Pressures or Temperatures Indicated in
4-4-6/3.1 ...................................................................................... 147
3.11 Exemptions .................................................................................. 147
5 Pneumatic Systems ........................................................................147
5.1 Application ................................................................................... 147
5.3 Pneumatic System Components.................................................. 147
5.5 Pneumatic System Requirements................................................ 147
SECTION 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks...................................................... 149

1 Fixed Oxygen-Acetylene Installations.............................................149
1.1 Application ................................................................................... 149
1.3 Gas Storage ................................................................................ 149
1.5 Piping System Components ........................................................ 149
1.7 Testing ......................................................................................... 150
3 Fuel Storage and Refueling Systems for Helicopter Facilities........151
3.1 Fuels with Flash Point Above 60°C (140°F)................................. 151
3.3 Fuels with Flash Point at or Below 60°C (140°F) – Installations
on an Open Deck ......................................................................... 151
3.5 Fuels with Flash Points at or Below 60°C (140°F) – Installation
within Enclosed Spaces ............................................................... 151
5 Liquefied Petroleum Gases.............................................................153
5.1 General ........................................................................................ 153
5.3 Storage Cylinders ........................................................................ 153
5.5 Installation and Testing ................................................................ 153
7 Fast Supply Craft ............................................................................153
9 Liquid Mud Cargo Tanks .................................................................153

PART Section 1: General
4
SECTION 1 General
1 Construction and Installation
1.1 General Requirements

All craft are to be provided with the necessary pumps and piping systems for safe and efficient operation in
the service for which they are intended. Materials and workmanship are to be in accordance with good
marine practice and to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. The arrangements and details are to comply with
the following requirements which are applicable to all oceangoing craft but which may be modified for
craft classed for limited service.
1.3 Piping Groups

To distinguish between detail requirements for the various systems, the shipboard piping systems are
divided into two groups.
Group I, in general, includes all piping intended for working pressures or temperatures in various services,
as follows:
Service Pressure bar (kgf/cm2, psi) Temperature °C (°F)

Vapor and Gas over 10.3 (10.5, 150) over 343 (650)
Water over 15.5 (15.8, 225) over 177 (350)
Lubricating Oil over 15.5 (15.8, 225) over 204 (400)
Fuel Oil over 10.3 (10.5, 150) over 66 (150)
Hydraulic Fluid over 15.5 (15.8, 225) over 204 (400)
Group II includes all piping intended for working pressures and temperatures below those stipulated under
Group I. Group II also includes open-ended lines such as drains, overflows, engine exhausts, boiler escape
pipes, and vents, regardless of the working pressures or temperatures.
3.1 Plans
Before proceeding with the work, plans in accordance with 4-1-1/7 are to be submitted, showing clearly
the diagrammatic details or arrangement of the equipment.
3.3 All Piping Systems

The plans are to consist of a diagrammatic drawing of each system accompanied by lists of material giving
size, wall thickness, maximum working pressure and material of all pipes and the type, size, pressure rating
and material of valves and fittings.
3.5 Booklet of Standard Details

A booklet of standard piping practices and details, including such items as bulkhead, deck and shell
penetrations, welding details including dimensions, pipe joining details, etc., is to be submitted. Pipe
welding details are to comply with Chapter 4 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).

Chapter 4 Pumps and Piping Systems
Section 1 General 4-4-1
5 Material Tests and Inspection
5.1 Specifications and Purchase Orders

The appropriate material to be used for the various pipes, valves and fittings is indicated in this section.
The material is to be made in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for
Materials and Welding (Part 2), except that tests of material for valves, fittings, fluid power cylinders and
Group II piping need not be witnessed by the Surveyor. Where electric resistance welding is used, the
requirements of Chapter 4 of the above referenced Part 2 are also applicable. Copies in duplicate of the
purchase orders for material requiring test and inspection at the mills or place of manufacture are to be
forwarded to ABS for the information of the Surveyor.
5.3 Special Materials

If it is desired to use special alloys or other materials not covered by the Rules, the use of such materials
will be specially considered for approval.
7 Definitions
7.1 Piping/Piping Systems

The terms Piping and Piping Systems include the pipe, fittings, system joints, method of joining and any
internal or external liners, coverings and coatings required to comply with the performance criteria. For
example, if the basic material needs a fire protective coating to comply with the fire endurance requirements,
then the piping should be manufactured and tested with both the basic material and coating attached, and
details are to be submitted to ABS for approval.
7.3 Joints
The term Joint refers to the method of connecting pipes by adhesive bonding, brazing, welding, bolted
flanging, threading, etc.
7.5 Fittings
The term Fittings refers to bends, elbows, fabricated branch pieces, etc.
7.7 Positive Closing Valves

Positive Closing Valves are valves that are capable of maintaining a set position under all operating conditions.
7.9 Recognized Standard of Construction

Recognized Standards of Construction are published construction standards from organizations, such as
but not limited to the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Society of Testing
and Materials (ASTM), Department of Transportation (DOT), Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS), German
Design Standard (DIN), British Standard Code of Practice (BSI), which are recognized by ABS as being
acceptable standards for a specific purpose or service. Each standard is to be used independently and in a
consistent manner.
7.11 Standard or Extra-Heavy Pipe

Pipe thickness referred to as Standard or Extra-Heavy are the equivalent of American National Standards
Institute Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe up to a maximum wall thickness of 9.5 mm (0.375 in.) and
12.5 mm (0.5 in.), respectively.

9 General Installation Details
9.1 Protection
Pipes, valves and operating rods are to be effectively secured and adequately protected from mechanical
damage. These protective arrangements are to be fitted so that they may be removed to enable examination
of the pipes, valves and operating rods.
9.3 Pipes Near Switchboards

The leading of pipes in the vicinity of switchboards is to be avoided as far as possible. When such leads are
necessary, care is to be taken to fit no flanges or joints over or near the switchboards unless provision is
made to prevent any leakage from damaging the equipment.
9.5 Expansion or Contraction Stresses

Provision is to be made to take care of expansion or contraction stresses in pipes due to temperature changes
or working of the hull. Suitable provisions include, but are not limited to, piping bends, elbows, offsets,
changes in direction of the pipe routing or expansion joints. Slip joints of an approved type may be used in
systems and locations where possible leakage will not be hazardous
Where expansion joints are used, the following requirements apply:
• Pipe support. Adjoining pipes are to be suitably supported so that the expansion joints do not carry
any significant pipe weight.
• Alignment. Expansion joints are not to be used to make up for piping misalignment errors. Misalignment
of an expansion joint reduces the rated movements and can induce severe stresses into the joint material,
thus causing reduced service life. Alignment is to be within tolerances specified by the expansion joint
manufacturer.
• Anchoring. Expansion joints are to be installed as close as possible to an anchor point. Where an
anchoring system is not used, control rods may be installed on the expansion joint to prevent excessive
movements from occurring due to pressure thrust of the line.
• Mechanical damage. Where necessary, expansion joints are to be protected against mechanical damage.
• Accessible location. Expansion joints are to be installed in accessible locations to permit regular inspection
and/or periodic servicing.
• Mating flange. Mating flanges are to be clean and usually of the flat faced type. When attaching
beaded end flange expansion joints to raised face flanges, the use of a ring gasket is permitted. Rubber
expansion joints with beaded end flange are not to be installed next to wafer type check or butterfly
valves. Serious damage to the rubber flange bead can result due to lack of flange surface and/or bolt
connection.
9.7 Molded Expansion Joints

Molded expansion joints may be Type Approved. See 1-1-A2/1.
9.7.1 Circulating Water Systems
Molded expansion fittings of reinforced rubber or other suitable materials may be used in circulating
water piping systems in machinery spaces. Such fittings are to be oil-resistant. The maximum
working pressure is not to be greater than 25% of the hydrostatic bursting pressure of the fitting as
determined by a prototype test. Manufacturer’s name and the month and year of manufacture are
to be embossed or otherwise permanently marked on the outside edge of one of the flanges or
other easily examined area of all flexible expansion joints intended for use in piping systems over
150 mm (6 in.). Plans of the molded or built-up flexible expansion joints in piping systems over
150 mm (6 in.), including details of the internal reinforcement arrangements, are to be submitted
for approval.

9.7.2 Oil Systems

Where molded expansion joints of composite construction utilizing metallic material, such as steel
or stainless steel or equivalent material, with rubberized coatings inside and/or outside or similar
arrangements are proposed for use in oil piping systems (fuel, lubricating, or hydraulic oil), the
following requirements apply:
9.7.2(a) Expansion joint ratings for temperature, pressure, movements and selection of materials
are to be suitable for the intended service.
9.7.2(b) The maximum allowable working pressure of the system is not to be greater than 25% of
the hydrostatic bursting pressure determined by a burst test of a prototype expansion joint. Results
of the burst test are to be submitted.
9.7.2(c) The expansion joints are to pass the fire-resistant test specified in 4-4-1/9.7.3, below.
9.7.2(d) The expansion joints are to be permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name and
the month and year of manufacture.
9.7.3 Fire-Resistant Test
In order for a molded expansion joint of composite construction utilizing metallic material, as
referenced in 4-4-1/9.7.2, to be considered fire-resistant, a prototype of the molded expansion joint is to
be subjected to a fire test for at least 30 minutes at a temperature of not less than 800°C (1472°F) while
water at the maximum service pressure is circulated inside. The temperature of the water at the outlets
is not to be less than 80°C (176°F) during the test. The tested molded expansion joint is to be complete
with end fittings and no leakage is to be recorded during or after the test. In lieu of maximum service
pressure, the fire test may be conducted with the circulating water at a pressure of at least 5 bar
(5.1 kgf/cm2, 72.5 lb/in2), and with a subsequent pressure test to twice the design pressure.
9.9 Bulkhead, Deck or Tank Top Penetrations (2013)

9.9.1 Watertight Integrity
Where it is necessary for pipes to penetrate watertight bulkheads, decks or tank tops, the penetrations
are to be made by methods which will maintain the watertight integrity. For this purpose, bolted
connections are to have bolts threaded into the plating from one side; through bolts are not to be
used. Welded connections are either to be welded on both sides or to have full penetration welds
from one side.
9.9.2 Firetight Integrity
Where pipes penetrate bulkheads, decks or tank-tops which are required to be firetight or smoketight,
the penetrations are to be made by approved methods which will maintain the same degree of
firetight or smoketight integrity.
9.11 Collision-Bulkhead Penetrations (2014)

9.11.1 Allowed Penetrations
A collision bulkhead may be penetrated only as follows:
i) Except as provided in 4-4-1/9.11.1ii), the collision bulkhead may be pierced below the
bulkhead deck by not more than one pipe for dealing with fluid in the forepeak tank, provided
that the pipe is fitted with a screwdown or butterfly valve capable of being operated from
above the bulkhead deck; the valve chest being secured to the collision bulkhead inside
the forepeak.
ii) If the forepeak is divided to hold two kinds of liquids, the collision bulkhead may be pierced
below the margin line by two pipes, each of which is fitted as required by 4-4-1/9.11.1i),
provided there is no practical alternative to the fitting of such a second pipe and that,
having regard to the additional subdivision provided in the forepeak, the safety of the
craft is maintained.
iii) The valve in 4-4-1/9.11.1ii) may be fitted of on the after side of the collision bulkhead
provided that the valve is readily accessible under all service conditions and the space in
which they are located is not a cargo space. Local operation of the valve is acceptable.

9.11.2 Penetrations Details

Piping penetrating collision bulkheads is to comply with the following requirements:
i) Cast iron is not to be used for these valves. The use of nodular iron, also known as ductile
iron or spheroidal-graphite iron, will be accepted, provided the material has an elongation
not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.).
ii) Tanks forward of the collision bulkhead are not to be arranged for the carriage of oil or
other liquid substances that are flammable.
9.13 Sluice Valves and Cocks

No valve or cock for sluicing purposes is to be fitted on a collision bulkhead. Sluice valves or cocks may
be fitted only on other watertight bulkheads, where they are accessible for examination at all times. The
control rods are to be operable from the bulkhead deck and are to be provided with an indicator to show
whether the valve or cock is open or closed. The control rods are also to be properly protected from injury
and their weight is not to be supported by the valve or cock.
9.15 Relief Valves

All systems which may be exposed to pressures greater than that for which they are designed are to be
safeguarded by suitable relief valves or the equivalent. Pressure containers such as evaporators, heaters,
etc., which may be isolated from a protective device in the line are to have such devices either directly on
the shell or between the shell and the isolation valve.
9.15.1 Exceptions
In pumping systems such as oil piping and fire main, where relief valves are ordinarily required at
the pump, such valves need not be fitted when the system is served only by centrifugal pumps so
designed that the pressure delivered cannot exceed that for which the piping is designed.
9.17 Instruments
9.17.1 Temperature
Thermometers and other temperature sensing devices registering through pressure boundaries are
to be provided with instrument wells to allow for instrument removal without impairing the
integrity of the pressurized system.
9.17.2 Pressure
Pressure sensing devices are to be provided with valve arrangements to allow for instrument
isolation and removal without impairing the pressurized system’s integrity.
9.17.3 Tanks
Pressure, temperature and level sensing devices installed on tanks at locations where they are
subjected to a static head of liquid are to be fitted with valves or arranged such that they may be
removed without emptying the tank.
9.19 Flexible Hoses

9.19.1 Definition
A flexible hose assembly is a short length of metallic or non-metallic hose normally with prefabricated
end fittings ready for installation.
9.19.2 Scope
The requirements 4-4-1/9.19 apply to flexible hoses of metallic or non-metallic material intended
for a permanent connection between a fixed piping system and items of machinery. The requirements
may also be applied to temporary connected flexible hoses or hoses of portable equipment.

Flexible hose assemblies as defined in 4-4-1/9.19.1 are acceptable for use in oil fuel, lubricating,
hydraulic and thermal oil systems, fresh water and sea water cooling systems, compressed air systems,
bilge and ballast systems. The flexible hoses are acceptable for steam systems with pressure below
7 bar (7.1 kgf/cm2, 101.5 psi) and temperature below 150°C (302°F), where they comply with
4-4-1/9.19.
Flexible hoses are not acceptable in high pressure fuel oil injection systems.
These requirements for flexible hose assemblies are not applicable to hoses intended to be used in
fixed fire extinguishing systems.
9.19.3 Design and Construction
9.19.3(a) Hose Material. Flexible hoses are to be designed and constructed in accordance with
recognized National or International standards acceptable to ABS. Flexible hoses constructed of
rubber or plastics materials and intended for use in bilge, ballast, compressed air, oil fuel,
lubricating, hydraulic and thermal oil systems are to incorporate a single or double closely woven
integral wire braid or other suitable material reinforcement. Where rubber or plastics materials
hoses are to be used in oil supply lines to burners, the hoses are to have external wire braid
protection in addition to the integral reinforcement. Flexible hoses for use in steam systems are to
be of metallic construction.
9.19.3(b) Hose End Fittings. Flexible hoses are to be complete with approved end fittings in
accordance with manufacturer’s specification. Flanged end connections are to comply with 4-4-2/17
and threaded end connections with 4-4-2/13.1, as applicable and each type of hose/fitting combination
is to be subject to prototype testing to the same standard as that required by the hose with particular
reference to pressure and impulse tests.
The use of hose clamps and similar types of end attachments is not acceptable for flexible hoses in
piping systems for steam, flammable media, starting air or for sea water, where failure may result
in flooding*. In other piping systems, the use of hose clamps may be accepted where the working
pressure is less than 5 bar (5.1 kgf/cm2, 72.5 psi) and provided there are double clamps at each end
connection. The hose clamps are to be at least 12 mm (0.5 in.) wide and are not to be dependent
upon spring tension to remain fastened.
* Note: For sea water systems, where flooding can be prevented by the installation of a readily accessible shutoff
valve immediately upstream of the hose, double clamps at each end connection may be accepted.
9.19.3(c) Fire Resistance. Flexible hose assemblies constructed of non-metallic materials intended
for installation in piping systems for flammable media and sea water systems where failure may
result in flooding are to be of a fire-resistant type**. Fire resistance is to be demonstrated by
testing to ISO 15540 and ISO 15541.
** Note: The installation of a shutoff valve immediately upstream of a sea water hose does not satisfy the requirement
for fire resistant type hose.
9.19.3(d) Hose Application. Flexible hose assemblies are to be selected for the intended location
and application taking into consideration ambient conditions, compatibility with fluids under working
pressure and temperature conditions consistent with the manufacturer’s instructions and other
relevant requirements of this Section.
Flexible hose assemblies intended for installation in piping systems where pressure pulses and/or
high levels of vibration are expected to occur in service, are to be designed for the maximum
expected impulse peak pressure and forces due to vibration. The tests required by 4-4-1/9.19.5 are
to take into consideration the maximum anticipated in-service pressures, vibration frequencies and
forces due to installation.

9.19.4 Installation
In general, flexible hoses are to be limited to a length necessary to provide for relative movement
between fixed and flexibly mounted items of machinery, equipment or systems.
Flexible hose assemblies are not to be installed where they may be subjected to torsion deformation
(twisting) under normal operating conditions.
The number of flexible hoses, in piping systems is to be kept to minimum and is to be limited for
the purpose stated in 4-4-1/9.19.2.
Where flexible hoses are intended to be used in piping systems conveying flammable fluids that
are in close proximity of heated surfaces the risk of ignition due to failure of the hose assembly
and subsequent release of fluids is to be mitigated as far as practicable by the use of screens or
other similar protection.
Flexible hoses are to be installed in clearly visible and readily accessible locations (i.e., the hose is
to be located such that inspection can be accomplished without the need to remove any bolted
inspection plate or similar obstruction. A mirror or other means may be used for inspection where
space is limited).
The installation of flexible hose assemblies is to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and use limitations with particular attention to the following:
• Orientation
• End connection support (where necessary)
• Avoidance of hose contact that could cause rubbing and abrasion
• Minimum bend radii
9.19.5 Tests
9.19.5(a) Test Procedures. Acceptance of flexible hose assemblies is subject to satisfactory
prototype testing. Prototype test programmes for flexible hose assembles are to be submitted by
the manufacturer and are to be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate performance in accordance
with the specified standards.
The tests are, as applicable, to be carried out on different nominal diameters of hose type complete
with end fittings for pressure, burst, impulse resistance and fire resistance in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant standard. The following standards are to be used as applicable.
• ISO 6802 – Rubber and plastics hoses and hose assemblies – Hydraulic pressure impulse test
without flexing.
• ISO 6803 – Rubber and plastics hoses and hose assemblies – Hydraulic pressure impulse test
with flexing.
• ISO 15540 – Ships and marine technology – Fire resistance of hose assemblies – Test methods.
• ISO 15541 – Ships and marine technology – Fire resistance of hose assemblies – Requirements
for test bench.
• ISO 10380 – Pipework – Corrugated metal hoses and hose assemblies.
Other standards may be accepted where agreed.
9.19.5(b) Burst test. All flexible hose assemblies are to be satisfactorily prototype burst tested to
an international standard to demonstrate they are able to withstand a pressure not less than four (4)
times its design pressure without indication of failure or leakage.
Note: The international standards (e.g., EN or SAE for burst testing of non-metallic hoses) require the pressure
to be increased until burst without any holding period at 4 x MWP.

9.19.6 Marking
Flexible hoses are to be permanently marked by the manufacturer with the following details:
• Hose manufacturer’s name or trademark
• Date of manufacture (month/year)
• Designation type reference
• Nominal diameter
• Pressure rating
• Temperature rating
Where a flexible hose assembly is made up of items from different manufacturers, the components
are to be clearly identified and traceable to evidence of prototype testing.
9.21 Control of Static Electricity

Cargo tanks and cargo piping systems carrying flammable liquids and piping systems that are routed
through hazardous areas are to be suitably grounded either by welding or bolting the tanks, pipes or their
supports directly to the hull of the craft or through the use of bonding straps. In general, the resistance
between ground points along the length, across joints, and from pipe to ground is not to exceed 1 megohm.
Where bonding straps are used, they are to be clearly visible, protected from mechanical damage and of a
type not affected by corrosive product and paint. Bonding straps are required for cargo tanks and piping
systems which are not permanently connected to the hull, including independent cargo tanks, cargo tanks
and piping systems which are electrically separated from the hull, and pipe connections arranged for
removal of spool pieces. The foregoing is not applicable to tank containers.
Components of alarms and level indicating devices located within cargo tanks are to be designed to account
for conductivity.
9.23 Leakage Containment

For areas where leakage may be expected, such as oil burners, purifiers, oil drains, valves under day tanks,
etc., means of containing the leakage are to be provided. Where drain pipes are fitted for collected leakages,
they are to be led to a suitable oil drain tank not forming part of an overflow system.
9.25 Piping on Aluminum Craft

On a craft with an aluminum hull, the use of steel, cooper or other non-aluminum pipes, valves and fittings
will require special attention to avoid galvanic corrosion with dissimilar metals. Piping runs of materials
not compatible with aluminum are to be isolated from the hull by suitable isolating brackets of insulating
material. Where non-aluminum pipes pass through decks, bulkheads, tank tops and shell plating, they are
to be isolated from the craft’s structure with suitable insulation.
9.27 Craft Subject to Damage Stability

Progressive Flooding detail is to be submitted for review. The details and arrangements should indicate all
piping passing within the assumed extent of damaged area required for damage stability calculations
together with potential progressive flooding location from those pipes.

PART Section 2: Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings
4
SECTION 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings
1 Pumps
1.1 General
For self-propelled craft 500 gross tons and above, the following pumps are to meet the test requirements of
4-4-2/1.3 and 4-4-2/1.5:
• Fire pump, including emergency fire pump
• Other fire fighting service pumps, such as, pumps for fixed water-based systems, or equivalent, local
application fire-fighting systems, sprinkler systems, deck foam systems, etc.
• Bilge pump
• Ballast pump
• Hydraulic pumps for steering gears, anchor windlasses and controllable pitch propellers
• Pumps associated with inert gas systems, i.e.:
Fuel oil pumps for boilers/inert gas generators
Cooling water pumps for flue gas scrubber
The tests are to be carried out at the manufacturer’s plant in the presence of the Surveyor. The capacity test
will not be required nor will the hydrostatic test need to be witnessed by the Surveyor for individual pumps
assembled on a production line basis, provided the Surveyor is satisfied from periodic inspections and from
the manufacturer’s quality assurance procedures that the pump capacities are acceptable and that hydrostatic
testing is being performed. See 4-1-1/3. For pumps associated with reciprocating internal combustion
engines and reduction gears, see 4-2-1/19.
1.3 Hydrostatic Test

All pumps are to be hydrostatically tested to 1.5P, but not less than 3.9 bar (4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi), where P is
the maximum working pressure of the part concerned. When the suction and discharge sides of the pump
are tested independently, the pump suction is to be tested to 1.5 times Ps, but not less than 3.9 bar
(4 kgf/cm2, 57 psi), where Ps is the maximum pressure available from the system at the suction inlet. For
steering gear pumps, also see 4-3-3/15.1.
1.5 Capacity Test

Pump capacities are to be checked with the pump operating at design conditions (rated speed and pressure
head). For centrifugal pumps, the pump characteristic (head capacity) design curve is to be verified to the
satisfaction of the Surveyor.
1.7 Relief Valve Capacity Test

For positive displacement pumps with an integrated relief valve, the valve’s setting and full flow capacity
corresponding to the pump maximum rating is to be verified. The operational test for relief valve capacity
may be waived if previous satisfactory tests have been carried out on similar pumps.

Section 2 Pumps, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 4-4-2
3 Pressure Tests
3.1 General
In addition to the testing and inspection of materials, as required in Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for Materials
and Welding (Part 2), the following tests on the fabricated piping are to be witnessed by the Surveyor after
bending and the attachment of flanges.
Small bore pipes and tubes of less than 15 mm outside diameter may be exempted from the required
hydrostatic tests.
3.3 Fuel Oil Service System

Pressure lines are to be tested before installation to 1.5 times the design pressure of the system, but not less
than 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi).
3.5 Fuel Oil Suction and Transfer Lines

Transfer systems and fuel oil suction lines are to be tested before installation to 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi).
3.7 Starting Air Piping

Piping in starting-air systems is to be tested, preferably before installation, to 1.5 times the design pressure
of the system.
3.9 Hydraulic Power Piping

After fabrication, the hydraulic power piping system or each piping component is to be tested to 1.5 times
the design pressure. For steering gear piping tests, see 4-3-3/15. For controllable pitch propeller system
piping, a test, including a check of relief valve operation, is to be performed after installation in the presence
of the Surveyor.
3.11 All Piping

After installation, all piping is to be tested under working conditions.
Where it is not possible to carry out the required hydrostatic tests for all segments of pipes and integral
fittings before installation, the remaining segments, including the closing seams, may be so tested after
installation. Or, where it is intended to carry out all of the required hydrostatic tests after installation, such
tests may be conducted in conjunction with those required by this paragraph. In both of these respects,
testing procedures are to be submitted to the Surveyor for acceptance.
3.13 Specific Systems

3.13.1 Gas and Liquid Fuel Systems and Heating Coils in Tanks
The following piping systems are to be hydrostatically tested in the presence of the Surveyor to
1.5P, but not less than 4 bar (4.1 kgf/cm2, 58 psi), after installation:
i) Gas and liquid fuel systems
ii) Heating coils in tanks
3.15 Hydrostatic Tests of Shell Valves

All valves intended for installation on the side shell at or below the load waterline, including those at the
sea chests, are to be hydrostatically tested before installation and in the presence of the Surveyor to a
pressure of at least 5 bar (5.1 kgf/cm2, 72.5 psi).
3.17 Pneumatic Tests in Lieu of Hydrostatic Tests (1 July 2012)

In general, a pneumatic test in lieu of a hydrostatic test is not permitted. Where it is impracticable to carry out
the required hydrostatic test, a pneumatic test may be considered. In such cases, the procedure for carrying
out the pneumatic test, having regard to safety of personnel, is to be submitted to the applicable ABS
Divisional Assistant Chief Surveyor’s Office for special consideration.

5 Metallic Pipes
5.1 Test and Inspection of Group I Piping

Pipes intended for use in Group I piping systems are to be tested in the presence of and inspected by the
Surveyor in accordance with Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) or such other
appropriate material specification as may be approved in connection with a particular design. See 4-4-6/1.5
for pipe used in hydraulic systems.
5.3 Steel Pipe

5.3.1 Seamless Pipe
Seamless-drawn steel pipe may be used for all purposes.
5.3.2 Welded Pipe
Electric-resistance-welded steel pipe may be used for temperatures up to 343°C (650°F).
Consideration will be given to the use of electric-resistance-welded (ERW) pipe for use above
343°C (650°F) where the material is shown to be suitable for the intended service (i.e. in a non-
corrosive environment where the design temperature is below the lowest graphitization temperature
specified for the material, etc.). Furnace butt-welded pipe up to and including 115 mm O.D. (4 in.
NPS) may be used for Group II piping for temperatures up to 232°C (450°F), but is not to be used
for flammable or combustible fluids.
5.5 Aluminum Pipe

5.5.1 (2014)
Piping containing flammable fluids is to be constructed of steel or other materials approved by ABS.
Other equivalent material with a melting point above 930°C (1706°F), and with an elongation
above 12% may be accepted.
Aluminum and aluminum alloys which are characterized by low melting points, below 930°C
(1706°F), are considered heat sensitive materials and are not to be used to convey flammable
fluids, except for such piping as arranged inside cargo tanks or heat exchangers or as otherwise
permitted for engine attached filters, see 4-2-1/7.7 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
Aluminum pipe is also not to be used for bilge piping within the machinery space or for fire fighting
systems. The above is applicable to all craft unless as modified below. See also 4-4-3/5.3, 4-4-4/3.7
and 4-5-1/3.1.
5.5.2
For cargo craft under 500 Gross Tons (ITC) aluminum pipe may be used in Fuel Oil, Lubrication
Oil, Hydraulic oil, Bilge and other flammable or combustible liquids provided all pipe is of marine
grade aluminum and has a minimum wall thickness of extra heavy construction (Schedule 80).
Welded or flanged joints complying with a recognized standard are permitted, but threaded joints
in aluminum piping are not to be used.
5.5.3
Aluminum pipe may be used for all other services on craft constructed of aluminum or fiber-
reinforced plastic, including vents and sounding pipes from oil tanks.
5.7 Copper Pipe

Seamless-drawn and welded copper pipe, unless otherwise prohibited, may be used for all purposes where
the temperature does not exceed 208°C (406°F) and within the limitations specified in the material specification.
5.9 Brass Pipe

Seamless-drawn brass pipe, unless otherwise prohibited, may be used where the temperature does not exceed
208°C (406°F).

5.11 Design
5.11.1 Maximum Allowable Working Pressure and Minimum Thickness
The maximum allowable working pressure and the minimum thickness of pipes are to be determined
by the following equations, with due consideration being given to the reduction in thickness at the
outer radius of bent pipes:
KS (t − C ) WD
W= t= +C
D − M (t − C ) KS + MW
where
W = maximum allowable working pressure, in bar, kgf/cm2 (psi). See Note 1.
t = minimum thickness of pipe, in mm (in.). See Note 5.
K = 20 (200, 2)
D = actual external diameter of pipe, in mm (in.)
S = maximum allowable fiber stress, in N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi) from 4-4-2/Table 1.
See Note 2.
M = factor from 4-4-2/Table 1
C = allowance for threading, grooving or mechanical strength
= 1.65 mm (0.065 in.) for plain-end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing up to
115 mm O.D. (4 in. NPS). See Note 3.
= 0.00 mm (0.000 in.) for plain-end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing up to
115 mm O.D. (4 in. NPS) used for hydraulic piping systems. See Note 3.
= 0.00 mm (0.000 in.) for plain-end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing 115 mm
O.D. (4 in. NPS) and larger. See Note 3.
= 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) for all threaded pipe 17 mm O.D. (3/8 in.) and smaller
= depth of thread, h, for all threaded pipe over 17 mm O.D. (3/8 in.). See Note 4.
= depth of groove for grooved pipe
= 0.00 mm (0.000 in.) for plain-end nonferrous pipe or tubing. See Note 3.
Notes:
1 The value of W used in the equations is to be not less than 8.6 bar (8.8 kgf/cm2, 125 psi),
except that for suction and other low-pressure piping of nonferrous material, the actual
working pressure may be applied if a suitable addendum is provided against erosion
and outside damage. However, in no case is the value of W to be less than 3.4 bar
(3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi) for use in the equations.
2 Values of S for other materials are not to exceed the stress permitted by ASME B31.1
Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping.
3 Plain-end pipe or tubing includes those joined by any method in which the wall thickness
is not reduced.
4 The depth of thread, h, may be determined by the equation h = 0.8/n where n is the
number of threads per inch, or in metric units by the equation h = 0.8n where n is the
number of mm per thread.
5 If pipe is ordered by its nominal wall thickness, the manufacturing tolerance on wall
thickness is to be taken into account.
5.11.2 Pipe Bending

Pipe bending is to be in accordance with 2-3-12/25 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding
(Part 2). Alternatively, bending in accordance with a recognized standard (e.g., ASME B31.1-
Section 129.1 and 129.3) or other approved specification to a radius that will result in a surface
free of cracks and substantially free of buckles may be acceptable.
5.13 Working Pressure and Thickness – Alternative Consideration

Consideration will be given to the maximum allowable working pressure and the minimum thickness of
piping determined from criteria of applicable recognized standards.
TABLE 1
Allowable Stress Values S for Steel Piping N/mm2 (kgf/mm2, psi)
Service Temperature—Degrees C (F)
Part 2, Chapter 3,
Section 12/Paragraph −29°C (−20°F) to
No. and (Grade) 334°C (650°F) 372°C (700°F) 399°C (750°F) 427°C (800°F)
Nominal Composition Tensile Strength M = 0.8 M = 0.8 M = 0.8 M = 0.8
2-3-12/5.1 (Gr. 1) 310 46.9 46.6
Elec. res. Carbon Steel (31.5, 45000) (4.78, 6800) (4.75, 6500)
2-3-12/5.1 (Gr. 2) 330 70.3 68.3 62.8 53.1
Elec. res. Carbon Steel (33.7, 48000) (7.17, 10200) (6.96, 9900) (6.40, 9100) (5.41, 7700)
330 82.8 80.6 73.7 62.1
Seamless Carbon Steel (33.7, 48000) (8.44, 12000) (8.22, 11700) (7.52, 10700) (6.33, 9000)
2-3-12/5.1 (Gr. 3) 415 88.3 84.1 75.8 63.4
Elec. res. Carbon Steel (42, 60000) (9.0, 12800) (8.58, 12200) (7.73, 11000) (6.47, 9200)
415 103.5 99.2 89.6 74.4
Seamless Carbon Steel (42, 60000) (10.55, 15000) (10.12, 14400) (9.14, 13000) (7.59, 10800)
2-3-12/5.3 (Gr. 4) 330 82.8 80.7 73.7 62.1
Carbon Steel (33.7, 48000) (8.44, 12000) (8.23, 11700) (7.52, 10700) (6.33, 9000)
2-3-12/5.3 (Gr. 5) 415 103.5 99.2 89.6 74.4
Carbon Steel (42, 60000) (10.55, 15000) (10.12, 14400) (9.14, 13000) (7.59, 10800)
Notes:
1 Intermediate values of S may be determined by interpolation.
2 For grades of piping other than those given in 4-4-2/Table 1, S values are not to exceed those permitted by
ASME B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping. See 4-4-2/5.11.
3 Consideration is to be given to the possibility of graphite formation in carbon steel at temperatures above
425°C (800°F).
7 Plastic Pipes
7.1 General (2015)

Pipes and piping components made of thermoplastic or thermosetting plastic materials with or without
reinforcement may be used in piping systems referred to in 4-4-2/Table 2 subject to compliance with the
following requirements. For the purpose of these Rules, “plastic” means both thermoplastic and thermosetting
plastic materials with or without reinforcement, such as polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and fiber reinforced
plastics (FRP). Plastic includes synthetic rubber and materials of similar thermo/mechanical properties.
7.3 Plans and Data to be Submitted

Rigid plastic pipes are to be in accordance with a recognized national or international standard acceptable
to ABS. Specification for the plastic pipe, including thermal and mechanical properties and chemical
resistance, is to be submitted for review together with the spacing of the pipe supports.
The following information for the plastic pipes, fittings and joints is to be submitted for approval.
7.3.1 General Information

i) Pipe and fitting dimensions
ii) Maximum internal and external working pressure
iii) Working temperature range
iv) Intended services and installation locations
v) Level of fire endurance
vi) Electrically conductive
vii) Intended fluids
viii) Limits on flow rates
ix) Serviceable life
x) Installation instructions
xi) Details of marking
7.3.2 Drawings and Supporting Documentation
i) Certificates and reports for relevant tests previously carried out.
ii) Details of relevant standards.
iii) All relevant design drawings, catalogues, data sheets, calculations and functional descriptions.
iv) Fully detailed sectional assembly drawings showing pipe, fittings and pipe connections.
7.3.3 Materials
i) Resin type.
ii) Catalyst and accelerator types and concentration employed in the case of reinforced polyester
resin pipes or hardeners where epoxide resins are employed.
iii) A statement of all reinforcements employed where the reference number does not identify
the mass per unit area or the tex number of a roving used in a filament winding process,
these are to be detailed.
iv) Full information regarding the type of gel-coat or thermoplastic liner employed during
construction, as appropriate.
v) Cure/post-cure conditions. The cure and post-cure temperatures and times employ for
given resin/reinforcement ratio.
vi) Winding angle and orientation.
7.5 Design
7.5.1 Internal Pressure
A pipe is to be designed for an internal pressure not less than the design pressure of the system in
which it will be used. The maximum internal pressure, Pint, for a pipe is to be the lesser of the
following:
Psth Plth
Pint = Pint =
4 2.5
where
Psth = short-term hydrostatic test failure pressure
Plth = long-term hydrostatic test failure pressure (> 100,000 hours)
The hydrostatic tests are to be carried out under the following standard conditions:
• Atmospheric pressure = 1 bar (1 kgf/cm2, 14.5 psi)
• Relative humidity = 30%
• Fluid temperature = 25°C (77°F)
The hydrostatic test failure pressure may be verified experimentally or determined by a combination
of testing and calculation methods which are to be submitted to ABS for approval.
7.5.2 External Pressure
External pressure is to be considered for any installation which may be subject to vacuum conditions
inside the pipe or a head of liquid on the outside of the pipe. A pipe is to be designed for an external
pressure not less than the sum of the pressure imposed by the maximum potential head of liquid
outside the pipe plus full vacuum, 1 bar (1 kgf/cm2, 14.5 psi), inside the pipe. The maximum external
pressure for a pipe is to be determined by dividing the collapse test pressure by a safety factor of 3.
The collapse test pressure may be verified experimentally or determined by a combination of testing
and calculation methods which are to be submitted to ABS for approval.
7.5.3 Axial Strength
7.5.3(a) The sum of the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight and other dynamic and sustained
loads is not to exceed the allowable stress in the longitudinal direction. Forces due to thermal
expansion, contraction and external loads, where applicable, are to be considered when determining
longitudinal stresses in the system.
7.5.3(b) In the case of fiber reinforced plastic pipes, the sum of the longitudinal stresses is not to
exceed one-half of the nominal circumferential stress derived from the maximum internal pressure
determined according to 4-4-2/7.5, unless the allowable longitudinal stress is verified experimentally
or by a combination of testing and calculation methods.
7.5.4 Temperature
The maximum allowable working temperature of a pipe is to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, but in each case, it is to be at least 20°C (36°F) lower than the minimum heat
distortion temperature of the pipe material determined according to ISO 75 method A or equivalent.
The minimum heat distortion temperature is not to be less than 80°C (176°F). This minimum heat
distortion temperature requirement is not applicable to pipes and pipe components made of
thermoplastic materials, such as polyethylene (PE), polypropylene (PP), polybutylene (PB) and
intended for non-essential services.
Where low temperature services are considered, special attention is to be given with respect to
material properties.
7.5.5 Impact Resistance
Plastic pipes and joints are to have a minimum resistance to impact in accordance with a recognized
national or international standard such as ASTM D2444 or equivalent. After the impact resistance
is tested, the specimen is to be subjected to hydrostatic pressure equal to 2.5 times the design
pressure for at least one hour.
7.5.6 Fire Endurance (2015)
4-4-2/Table 2 specifies fire endurance requirements for pipes based upon system and location.
Pipes and their associated fittings whose functions or integrity are essential to the safety of the
craft are to meet the indicated fire endurance requirements which are described below.
i) Level 1 intends to ensure the integrity of the system during a full scale hydrocarbon fire
and is particularly applicable to systems where loss of integrity may cause outflow of
flammable liquids and worsen the fire situation. Piping having passed the fire endurance
test specified in 4-4-2/7.13 for a duration of a minimum of one hour without loss of
integrity in the dry condition is considered to meet Level 1 fire endurance standard (L1).
Level 1W – Piping systems similar to Level 1 systems except these systems do not carry
flammable fluid or any gas and a maximum 5% flow loss in the system after exposure is
acceptable. The flow loss must be taken into account when dimensioning the system.
ii) Level 2 intends to ensure the availability of systems essential to the safe operation of the
craft, after a fire of short duration, allowing the system to be restored after the fire has been
extinguished. Piping having passed the fire endurance test specified in 4-4-2/7.13 for a
duration of a minimum of 30 minutes without loss of integrity in the dry condition is
considered to meet Level 2 fire endurance standard (L2).
Level 2W – Piping systems similar to Level 2 systems except a maximum 5% flow loss in
the system after exposure is acceptable. The flow loss must be taken into account when
dimensioning the system.
iii) Level 3 is considered to provide the fire endurance necessary for a water filled piping system
to survive a local fire of short duration. The system’s functions are capable of being restored
after the fire has been extinguished. Piping having passed the fire endurance test specified
in 4-4-2/7.15 for a duration of a minimum of 30 minutes without loss of integrity in the
wet condition is considered to meet Level 3 fire endurance standard (L3).
Where a fire protective coating of pipes and fittings is necessary for achieving the fire endurance
standards required, the following requirements apply.
i) Pipes are generally to be delivered from the manufacturer with the protective coating applied,
with on-site application limited to that necessary for installation purposes (i.e., joints).
See 4-4-2/7.7.7 regarding the application of the fire protection coating on joints.
ii) The fire protection properties of the coating are not to be diminished when exposed to salt
water, oil or bilge slops. It is to be demonstrated that the coating is resistant to products
likely to come in contact with the piping.
iii) In considering fire protection coatings, such characteristics as thermal expansion, resistance
against vibrations and elasticity are to be taken into account.
iv) The fire protection coatings are to have sufficient resistance to impact to retain their integrity.
v) Random samples of pipe are to be tested to determine the adhesion qualities of the coating
to the pipe.
7.5.7 Flame Spread
7.5.7(a) Plastic Pipes. All pipes, except those fitted on open decks and within tanks, cofferdams,
void spaces, pipe tunnels and ducts, are to have low flame spread characteristics. The test procedures
in IMO Resolution A.653(16) Recommendation on Improved Fire Test Procedures for Surface
Flammability of Bulkhead, Ceiling, and Deck Finish Materials, modified for pipes as indicated in
4-4-2/7.17, are to be used for determining the flame spread characteristics. Piping materials giving
average values for all of the surface flammability criteria not exceeding the values listed in
Resolution A.653(16) are considered to meet the requirements for low flame spread.
Alternatively, flame spread testing in accordance with ASTM D635 may be used in lieu of the
IMO flame spread test, provided such test is acceptable to the Administration.
7.5.7(b) Multi-core Metallic Tubes Sheathed by Plastic Materials (2016). The multi-core tubes
in “bundles” made of stainless steel or copper tubes covered by an outer sheath of plastic material
are to comply with the flammability test criteria of IEC 60332-3-22 or 60332-3-21, for Category A
or A F/R, respectively. Alternatively, the tube bundles complying with at least the flammability
test criteria of IEC 60332-1-2 or a test procedure equivalent thereto are acceptable provided they
are installed in compliance with approved fire stop arrangements.
7.5.8 Electrical Conductivity
7.5.8(a) Piping conveying fluids with a conductivity less than 1000 pico siemens per meter are to
be electrically conductive.
7.5.8(b) Regardless of the fluid being conveyed, plastic pipes are to be electrically conductive if
the piping passes through a hazardous area.
7.5.8(c) Where electrically conductive pipe is required, the resistance per unit length of the pipes
and fittings is not to exceed 1 × 105 Ohm/m (3 × 104 Ohm/ft). See also 4-4-2/7.7.4.
7.5.8(d) If the pipes and fittings are not homogeneously conductive, the conductive layers are to
be protected against the possibility of spark damage to the pipe wall.
7.5.9 Marking
Plastic pipes and other components are to be permanently marked with identification in accordance
with a recognized standard. Identification is to include pressure ratings, the design standard that
the pipe or fitting is manufactured in accordance with, the material with which the pipe or fitting is
made, and the date of fabrication.
7.7 Installation of Plastic Pipes

7.7.1 Supports
7.7.1(a) (2015) Selection and spacing of pipe supports in shipboard systems are to be determined
as a function of allowable stresses and maximum deflection criteria. Support spacing is not to be
greater than the pipe manufacturer’s recommended spacing. The selection and spacing of pipe supports
are to take into account pipe dimensions, length of the piping, mechanical and physical properties
of the pipe material, mass of pipe and contained fluid, external pressure, operating temperature,
thermal expansion effects, loads due to external forces, thrust forces, water hammer and vibrations
to which the system may be subjected. Combinations of these loads are to be checked.
7.7.1(b) Each support is to evenly distribute the load of the pipe and its contents over the full
width of the support. Measures are to be taken to minimize wear of the pipes where they contact
the supports.
7.7.1(c) Heavy components in the piping system such as valves and expansion joints are to be
independently supported.
7.7.1(d) The supports are to allow for relative movement between the pipes and the craft’s structure,
having due regard for the difference in the coefficients of thermal expansion and deformations of
the craft’s hull and its structure.
7.7.1(e) When calculating the thermal expansion, the system working temperature and the
temperature at which assembling is performed are to be taken into account.
7.7.2 External Loads
When installing the piping, allowance is to be made for temporary point loads, where applicable.
Such allowances are to include at least the force exerted by a load (person) of 980 N (100 kgf, 220 lbf)
at mid-span on any pipe more than 100 mm (4 in.) nominal diameter.
Pipes are to be protected from mechanical damage where necessary.
7.7.3 Plastic Pipe Connections
7.7.3(a) The strength of fittings and joints is not to be less than that of the piping they connect.
7.7.3(b) Pipes may be joined using adhesive-bonded, welded, flanged or other joints.
7.7.3(c) Tightening of flanged or mechanically coupled joints is to be performed in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
7.7.3(d) Adhesives, when used for joint assembly, are to be suitable for providing a permanent
seal between the pipes and fittings throughout the temperature and pressure range of the intended
application.
Joining techniques are to be in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines. Personnel
performing these tasks are to be qualified to the satisfaction of ABS, and each bonding procedure
is to be qualified before shipboard piping installation commences. Requirements for joint bonding
procedures are in 4-4-2/7.11.
7.7.4 Electrical Conductivity

Where electrically conductive pipe is required by 4-4-2/7.5.8, installation of the pipe is to be in
accordance with the following:
7.7.4(a) The resistance to earth (ground) from any point in the system is not to exceed 1 meg-
ohm. The resistance is to be checked in the presence of the Surveyor.
7.7.4(b) Pipes and fittings with conductive layers are to be protected against a possibility of spark
damage caused by a different conductivity of the conductive layers.
7.7.4(c) Where used, earthing wires or bonding straps are to be accessible for inspection. The
Surveyor is to verify that they are in visible locations.
7.7.5 Shell Connections
Where plastic pipes are permitted in systems connected to the shell of the craft, the valves and the
pipe connection to the shell are to be metallic. The side shell valves are to be arranged for remote
control from outside the space in which the valves are located. For further details of the shell valve
installation, their connections and material, refer to 4-4-2/19.
7.7.6 Bulkhead and Deck Penetrations
7.7.6(a) The integrity of watertight bulkheads and decks is to be maintained where plastic pipes
pass through them.
7.7.6(b) Where plastic pipes pass through “A” or “B” class divisions, arrangements are to be made
to ensure that the fire endurance is not impaired. These arrangements are to be tested in accordance
with IMO Resolution. A 754 (18), Recommendation on Fire Resistance Tests for “A”, “B” and
“F” Class Divisions, as amended.
7.7.6(c) If the bulkhead or deck is also a fire division and destruction by fire of plastic pipes may
cause inflow of liquid from a tank, a metallic shut-off valve operable from above the bulkhead
deck is to be fitted at the bulkhead or deck.
7.7.7 Application of Fire Protection Coatings
Fire protection coatings are to be applied on the joints, where necessary for meeting the required
fire endurance criteria in 4-4-2/7.5.6, after performing hydrostatic pressure tests of the piping
system (see 4-4-2/7.19). The fire protection coatings are to be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, using a procedure approved in each particular case.
7.9 Manufacturing of Plastic Pipes

The manufacturer is to have a quality system and be certified in accordance with 1-1-A2/5.3 and 1-1-A2/5.5
or ISO 9001 (or equivalent). The quality system is to consist of elements necessary to ensure that pipes and
components are produced with consistent and uniform mechanical and physical properties in accordance
with recognized standards and including testing to demonstrate the compliance of plastic pipes, fittings and
joints with 4-4-2/7.5.1 through 4-4-2/7.5.8 and 4-4-2/7.19, as applicable.
Where the manufacturer does not have a certified quality system in accordance with 1-1-A2/5.3 and 1-1-A2/5.5
or ISO 9001 (or equivalent), the tests in with 4-4-2/7.5.1 through 4-4-2/7.5.8 and 4-4-2/7.19, as applicable,
will be required using samples from each batch of pipes being supplied for use aboard the craft and are to be
carried out in the presence of the Surveyor.
Each length of pipe and each fitting is to be tested at the manufacturer’s production facility to a hydrostatic
pressure not less than 1.5 times the maximum allowable internal pressure of the pipe in 4-4-2/7.5.1.
Alternatively, for pipes and fittings not employing hand layup techniques, the hydrostatic pressure test may
be carried out in accordance with the hydrostatic testing requirements stipulated in the recognized national
or international standard to which the pipe or fittings are manufactured, provided that there is an effective
quality system in place.
Depending upon the intended application, ABS reserves the right to require the hydrostatic pressure testing
of each pipe and/or fitting.
If the facility does not have a certified quality system in accordance with 1-1-A2/5.3 and 1-1-A2/5.5 or
ISO 9001 (or equivalent), then the production testing must be witnessed by the Surveyor.
The manufacturer is to provide documentation certifying that all piping and piping components supplied
are in compliance with the requirements of Section 4-4-2.
7.11 Plastic Pipe Bonding Procedure Qualification

7.11.1 Procedure Qualification Requirements
7.11.1(a) To qualify joint bonding procedures, the tests and examinations specified herein are to
be successfully completed. The procedure for making bonds is to include the following:
i) Materials used
ii) Tools and fixtures
iii) Environmental requirements
iv) Joint preparation requirements
v) Cure temperature
vi) Dimensional requirements and tolerances
vii) Test acceptance criteria for the completed assembly
7.11.1(b) Any change in the bonding procedure which will affect the physical and mechanical
properties of the joint will require the procedure to be requalified.
7.11.2 Procedure Qualification Testing
7.11.2(a) A test assembly is to be fabricated in accordance with the procedure to be qualified and
it is to consist of at least one pipe-to-pipe joint and one pipe-to-fitting joint. When the test assembly
has been cured, it is to be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure at a safety factor of 2.5 times the
design pressure of the test assembly for not less than one hour. No leakage or separation of joints
is to be allowed. The test is to be conducted so that the joint is loaded in both the longitudinal and
circumferential direction.
7.11.2(b) Selection of the pipes used for test assembly is to be in accordance with the following:
i) When the largest size to be joined is 200 mm (8 in.) nominal outside diameter or smaller,
the test assembly is to be the largest pipe size to be joined.
ii) When the largest size to be joined is greater than 200 mm (8 in.) nominal outside diameter,
the size of the test assembly is to be either 200 mm (8 in.) or 25% of the largest piping
size to be joined, whichever is greater.
7.11.2(c) When conducting performance qualifications, each bonder and each bonding operator
are to make up test assemblies, the size and number of which are to be as required above.
7.13 Tests by the Manufacturer – Fire Endurance Testing of Plastic Piping in the Dry Condition
(For Level 1 and Level 2)
7.13.1 Test Method
7.13.1(a) The specimen is to be subjected to a furnace test with fast temperature increase similar
to that likely to occur in a fully developed liquid hydrocarbon fire. The time/temperature is to be
as follows:
at the end of 5 minutes 945°C (1733°F)

7.13.1(b) The accuracy of the furnace control is to be as follows:

i) During the first 10 minutes of the test, variation in the area under the curve of mean furnace
temperature is to be within ±15% of the area under the standard curve.
ii) During the first 30 minutes of the test, variation in the area under the curve of mean furnace
temperature is to be within ±10% of the area under the standard curve.
iii) For any period after the first 30 minutes of the test, variation in the area under the curve
of mean furnace temperature is to be within ±5% of the area under the standard curve.
iv) At any time after the first 10 minutes of the test, the difference in the mean furnace
temperature from the standard curve is to be within ±100°C (±180°F).
7.13.1(c) The locations where the temperatures are measured, the number of temperature
measurements and the measurement techniques are to be approved by ABS.
7.13.2 Test Specimen
7.13.2(a) The test specimen is to be prepared with the joints and fittings intended for use in the
proposed application.
7.13.2(b) The number of specimens is to be sufficient to test typical joints and fittings including
joints between non-metal and metal pipes and metal fittings to be used.
7.13.2(c) The ends of the specimen are to be closed. One of the ends is to allow pressurized
nitrogen to be connected. The pipe ends and closures may be outside the furnace.
7.13.2(d) The general orientation of the specimen is to be horizontal and it is to be supported by
one fixed support with the remaining supports allowing free movement. The free length between
supports is not to be less than 8 times the pipe diameter.
7.13.2(e) Most materials will require a thermal insulation to pass this test. The test procedure is to
include the insulation and its covering.
7.13.2(f) If the insulation contains or is liable to absorb moisture, the specimen is not to be tested
until the insulation has reached an air dry-condition, defined as equilibrium with an ambient
atmosphere of 50% relative humidity at 20 ± 5°C (68 ± 9°F). Accelerated conditioning is permissible,
provided the method does not alter the properties of the component material. Special samples are
to be used for moisture content determination and conditioned with the test specimen. These
samples are to be so constructed as to represent the loss of water vapor from the specimen having
similar thickness and exposed faces.
7.13.3 Test Condition
A nitrogen pressure inside the test specimen is to be maintained automatically at 0.7 ± 0.1 bar
(0.7 ± 0.1 kgf/cm2, 10 ± 1.5 psi) during the test. Means are to be provided to record the pressure
inside the pipe and the nitrogen flow into and out of the specimen in order to indicate leakage.
7.13.4 Acceptance Criteria
7.13.4(a) During the test, no nitrogen leakage from the sample is to occur.
7.13.4(b) (2015) After termination of the furnace test, the test specimen together with fire
protective coating, if any, is to be allowed to cool in still air to ambient temperature and then
tested to the maximum allowable pressure of the pipes, as defined in 4-4-2/7.5.1 and 4-4-2/7.5.2.
The pressure is to be held for a minimum of 15 minutes. Pipes without leakage qualify as Level 1
or 2 depending on the test duration. Pipes with negligible leakage (i.e., not exceeding 5% flow loss)
qualify as Level 1W or Level 2W depending on the test duration. Where practicable, the hydrostatic
test is to be conducted on bare pipe (i.e., coverings and insulation removed) so that any leakage
will be apparent.
7.13.4(c) Alternative test methods and/or test procedures considered to be at least equivalent,
including open pit testing method, may be accepted in cases where the pipes are too large for the
test furnace.
7.15 Test by Manufacturer – Fire Endurance Testing of Water-Filled Plastic Piping (For Level 3)
7.15.1 Test Method
7.15.1(a) A propane multiple burner test with a fast temperature increase is to be used.
7.15.1(b) For piping up to and including 152 mm (6 in.) O.D., the fire source is to consist of two
rows of five burners, as shown in 4-4-2/Figure 1. A constant heat flux averaging 113.6 kW/m2
(36,000 BTU/hr-ft2) ± 10% is to be maintained 12.5 ± 1 cm (5 ± 0.4 in.) above the centerline of
the burner array. This flux corresponds to a pre-mix flame of propane with a fuel flow rate of 5 kg/hr
(11 lb/hr) for a total heat release of 65 kW (3700 BTU/min.). The gas consumption is to be
measured with an accuracy of at least ±3% in order to maintain a constant heat flux. Propane with
a minimum purity of 95% is to be used.
7.15.1(c) For piping greater than 152 mm (6 in.) O.D., one additional row of burners is to be
included for each 51 mm (2 in.) increase in pipe diameter. A constant heat flux averaging
113.6 kW/m2 (36,000 BTU/hr-ft2) ± 10% is still to be maintained at the 12.5 ± 1 cm (5 ± 0.4 in.)
height above the centerline of the burner array. The fuel flow is to be increased as required to
maintain the designated heat flux.
7.15.1(d) The burners are to be type “Sievert No. 2942” or equivalent which produces an air
mixed flame. The inner diameter of the burner heads is to be 29 mm (1.14 in.). See 4-4-2/Figure 1.
The burner heads are to be mounted in the same plane and supplied with gas from a manifold. If
necessary, each burner is to be equipped with a valve in order to adjust the flame height.
7.15.1(e) The height of the burner stand is also to be adjustable. It is to be mounted centrally
below the test pipe with the rows of burners parallel to the pipe’s axis. The distance between the
burner heads and the pipe is to be maintained at 12.5 ± 1 cm (5 ± 0.4 in.) during the test. The free
length of the pipe between its supports is to be 0.8 ± 0.05 m (31.5 ± 2 in.). See 4-4-2/Figure 2.
FIGURE 1
Fire Endurance Test Burner Assembly
50
90 +
+ 70
70 +
+ 70
70 +
420
+ 70
70 + 32
+ 70
70 + 85
+ 90
50
20 60 20 100
100
a) Top View b) Side View of
one Burner
FIGURE 2
Fire Endurance Test Stand with Mounted Sample
1500 ± 100
800 ± 50
125 ± 10
7.15.2 Test Specimen

7.15.2(a) Each pipe is to have a length of approximately 1.5 m (5 ft).
7.15.2(b) The test pipe is to be prepared with permanent joints and fittings intended to be used.
Only valves and straight joints versus elbows and bends are to be tested as the adhesive in the joint
is the primary point of failure.
7.15.2(c) The number of pipe specimens is to be sufficient to test all typical joints and fittings.
7.15.2(d) The ends of each pipe specimen are to be closed. One of the ends is to allow pressurized
water to be connected.
7.15.2(e) If the insulation contains or is liable to absorb moisture, the specimen is not to be tested
until the insulation has reached an air dry-condition, defined as equilibrium with an ambient
atmosphere of 50% relative humidity at 20 ± 5°C (68 ± 9°F). Accelerated conditioning is permissible,
provided the method does not alter the properties of the component material. Special samples are
to be used for moisture content determination and conditioned with the test specimen. These samples
are to be so constructed as to represent the loss of water vapor from the specimen having similar
thickness and exposed faces.
7.15.2(f) The pipe samples are to rest freely in a horizontal position on two V-shaped supports.
The friction between pipe and supports is to be minimized. The supports may consist of two stands,
as shown in 4-4-2/Figure 2.
7.15.2(g) A relief valve is to be connected to one of the end closures of each specimen.
7.15.3 Test Conditions
7.15.3(a) The test is to be carried out in a sheltered test site in order to prevent any draft influencing
the test.
7.15.3(b) Each pipe specimen is to be completely filled with deaerated water to exclude air bubbles.
7.15.3(c) The water temperature is not to be less than 15°C (59°F) at the start and is to be measured
continuously during the test. The water is to be stagnant and the pressure maintained at 3 ± 0.5 bar
(3.1 ± 0.5 kgf/cm2, 43.5 ± 7.25 psi) during the test.
7.15.4 Acceptance Criteria
7.15.4(a) During the test, no leakage from the sample(s) is to occur except that slight weeping
through the pipe wall may be accepted.
7.15.4(b) After termination of the burner test, the test specimen together with fire protective coating,
if any, is to be allowed to cool to ambient temperature and then tested to the maximum allowable
pressure of the pipes, as defined in 4-4-2/7.5.1 and 4-4-2/7.5.2. The pressure is to be held for a
minimum of 15 minutes without significant leakage [i.e., not exceeding 0.2 1/min. (0.05 gpm)].
Where practicable, the hydrostatic test is to be conducted on bare pipe (i.e., coverings and
insulation removed) so that any leakage will be apparent.
7.17 Tests by Manufacturer – Flame Spread

7.17.1 Test Method
Flame spread of plastic piping is to be determined by IMO Resolution A.653(16) entitled,
“Recommendation on Improved Fire Test Procedures for Surface Flammability of Bulkhead,
Ceiling, and Deck Finish Materials” with the following modifications.
7.17.1(a) Tests are to be made for each pipe material and size.
7.17.1(b) The test sample is to be fabricated by cutting pipes lengthwise into individual sections
and then assembling the sections into a test sample as representative as possible of a flat surface.
A test sample is to consist of at least two sections. The test sample is to be at least 800 ±5 mm
(31.5 ± 0.2 in.) long. All cuts are to be made normal to the pipe wall.
7.17.1(c) The number of sections that must be assembled together to form a test sample is to be
that which corresponds to the nearest integral number of sections which makes up a test sample
with an equivalent linearized surface width between 155 mm (6 in.) and 180 mm (7 in.). The
surface width is defined as the measured sum of the outer circumference of the assembled pipe
sections that are exposed to the flux from the radiant panel.
7.17.1(d) The assembled test sample is to have no gaps between individual sections.
7.17.1(e) The assembled test sample is to be constructed in such a way that the edges of two
adjacent sections coincide with the centerline of the test holder.
7.17.1(f) The individual test sections are to be attached to the backing calcium silicate board
using wire (No. 18 recommended) inserted at 50 mm (2 in.) intervals through the board and tightened
by twisting at the back.
7.17.1(g) The individual pipe sections are to be mounted so that the highest point of the exposed
surface is in the same plane as the exposed flat surface of a normal surface.
7.17.1(h) The space between the concave unexposed surface of the test sample and the surface of
the calcium silicate backing board is to be left void.
7.17.1(i) The void space between the top of the exposed test surface and the bottom edge of the
sample holder frame is to be filled with a high temperature insulating wool if the width of the pipe
segments extend under the side edges of the sample holding frame.
7.19 Testing By Manufacturer – General

Testing is to demonstrate the compliance of plastic pipes, fittings and joints for which approval, in accordance
with Section 4-4-2, is requested. These tests are to be in compliance with the requirements of relevant
standards as per 4-4-2/Table 3 and 4-4-2/Table 4.
7.21 Testing Onboard After Installation

Piping systems are to be subjected to a hydrostatic test pressure of not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
For piping required to be electrically conductive, earthing is to be checked and random resistance testing is
to be conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
7.23 Acceptance of Flag State Requirements

For a craft intended for service in domestic waters, ABS will consider the recognized published standards
of the Flag Administration in lieu of the requirements of 4-4-2/7.
TABLE 2
Fire Endurance Requirements Matrix for Plastic Pipes (2015)
LOCATION
PIPING SYSTEMS A B C D E F G H I J K
CARGO (Flammable cargoes with flash point ≤60°C (140°F)
1 Cargo lines NA NA L1 NA NA 0 NA 0 (10) 0 NA L1 (2)
2 Crude oil washing lines NA NA L1 NA NA 0 NA 0 (10) 0 NA L1 (2)
3 Vent lines NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA 0 (10) 0 NA X
INERT GAS
4 Water seal effluent line NA NA 0 (1) NA NA 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1) 0 (1) NA 0
(1) (1)
5 Scrubber effluent line 0 0 NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 (1) NA 0
6 Main line 0 0 L1 NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA L1 (6)
7 Distribution lines NA NA L1 NA NA 0 NA NA 0 NA L1 (2)
FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (flash point > 60°C (140°F)
8 Cargo lines X X L1 X X NA (3) 0 0 (10) 0 NA L1
9 Fuel oil X X L1 X X NA (3) 0 0 0 L1 L1
10 Lubricating oil X X L1 X X NA NA NA 0 L1 L1
11 Hydraulic oil X X L1 X X 0 0 0 0 L1 L1
SEA WATER (See Note 1)
12 Bilge main and branches L1 (7) L1 (7) L1 X X NA 0 0 0 NA L1
13 Fire main and water spray L1 L1 L1 X NA NA NA 0 0 X L1
14 Foam system L1W L1W L1W NA NA NA NA NA 0 L1W L1W
15 Sprinkler system L1W L1W L3 X NA NA NA 0 0 L3 L3
16 Ballast L3 L3 L3 L3 X 0 (10) 0 0 0 L2W L2W
17 Cooling water, essential services L3 L3 NA NA NA NA NA 0 0 NA L2W
18 Tank cleaning services, fixed machines NA NA L3 NA NA 0 NA 0 0 NA L3 (2)
19 Non-essential systems 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0
FRESH WATER
20 Cooling water, essential services L3 L3 NA NA NA NA 0 0 0 L3 L3
21 Condensate return L3 L3 L3 0 0 NA NA NA 0 0 0
22 Non-essential systems 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0
SANITARY/DRAINS/SCUPPERS
23 Deck drains (internal) L1W L1W NA L1W 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0
(4) (4) (4)
24 Sanitary drains (internal) 0 0 NA 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0

25 Scuppers and discharges (overboard) 0 (1,8) 0 (1,8) 0 (1,8) 0 (1,8) 0 (1,8) 0 0 0 0 0 (1,8) 0
VENTS/SOUNDING
26 Water tanks/dry spaces 0 0 0 0 0 0 (10) 0 0 0 0 0
27 Oil tanks (flashpoint 60°C (140°F)) X X X X X X (3) 0 0 (10) 0 X X
MISCELLANEOUS
28 Control air L1 (5) L1 (5) L1 (5) L1 (5) L1 (5) NA 0 0 0 L1 (5) L1 (5)
29 Service air (non-essential) 0 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0
30 Brine 0 0 NA 0 0 NA NA NA 0 0 0
31 Auxiliary low pressure steam (pressure L2W L2W 0 (9) 0 (9) 0 (9) 0 0 0 0 0 (9) 0 (9)
≤ 7 bar (7 kgf/cm2, 100 psi))
Locations Abbreviations
A Category A machinery spaces L1 Fire endurance test in dry conditions, 60 minutes, in
B Other machinery spaces accordance with 4-4-2/7.13
C Cargo pump rooms L2 Fire endurance test in dry conditions, 30 minutes, in
D Ro/Ro cargo holds accordance with 4-4-2/7.13
E Other dry cargo holds L3 Fire endurance test in wet conditions, 30 minutes, in
F Cargo tanks accordance with 4-4-2/7.15
G Fuel oil tanks 0 No fire endurance test required
H Ballast water tanks NA Not applicable
I Cofferdams, void spaces, pipe tunnels and ducts X Metallic materials meeting the requirements of 4-4-2/5
J Accommodation, service and control spaces
K Open decks
TABLE 2 (continued)
Fire Endurance Requirements Matrix for Plastic Pipes (2015)
Notes:
1 Where non-metallic piping is used, remotely controlled valves are to be provided at the craft’s side. These valves
are to be controlled from outside the space.
2 Remote closing valves are to be provided at the cargo tanks.
3 When cargo tanks contain flammable liquids with a flash point greater than 60°C (140°F), “0” may replace “NA”
or “X”.
4 (2015) For drains serving only the space concerned, “0” may replace “L1W”.
5 When controlling functions are not required by statutory requirements, “0” may replace “L1”.
6 For pipe between machinery space and deck water seal, “0” may replace “L1”.
7 For passenger craft, “X” is to replace “L1”.
8 Scuppers serving open decks in positions 1 and 2, as defined in Regulation 13 of the International Convention on
Load Lines, 1966, are to be “X” throughout, unless fitted at the upper end with the means of closing capable of
being operated from a position above the freeboard deck in order to prevent downflooding.
9 For essential services such as fuel oil tank heating and ship’s whistle, “X” is to replace “0”.
10 For tankers where compliance with paragraph 3(f) of Regulation 13F of Annex I of MARPOL 73/78 is required,
“NA” is to replace “0”.
TABLE 3
Standards for Plastic Pipes – Typical Requirements for All Systems
Test Typical Standard Notes
1 Internal pressure (1) 4-4-2/7.5.1 Top, Middle, Bottom (of each
ASTM D 1599 pressure range)
ASTM D 2992 Tests are to be carried out on pipe
spools made of different pipe sizes,
ISO 15493 or equivalent fittings and pipe connections.
2 External pressure (1) 4-4-2/7.5.2 As above, for straight pipes only.
ISO 15493 or equivalent
3 Axial strength (1) 4-4-2/7.5.3 As above.
4 Load deformation ASTM D 2412 or equivalent Top, Middle, Bottom (of each
pressure range)
5 Temperature limitations (1) 4-4-2/7.5.4 Each type of resin
ISO 75 Method A GRP piping system:
HDT test on each type of resin acc. to
ISO 75 method A.
Thermoplastic piping systems:
ISO 75 Method AISO 306 Plastics –
Thermoplastic materials –
Determination of Vicat softening
temperature (VST)
VICAT test according to ISO 2507
Polyesters with an HDT below 80°C
should not be used.
6 Impact resistance (1) 4-4-2/7.5.5 Representative sample of each type of
ISO 9854: 1994, ISO 9653: 1991 ISO construction
15493
ASTM D 2444, or equivalent
7 Ageing Manufacturer’s standard Each type of construction
ISO 9142:1990
8 Fatigue Manufacturer’s standard or service Each type of construction
experience.
9 Fluid absorption ISO 8361:1991
10 Material compatibility (2) ASTM C581
Manufacturer’s standard
Notes:
1 Where the manufacturer does not have a certified quality system, test to be witnessed by the Surveyor. See 4-4-2/7.9.
2 If deemed applicable by the Flag Administration.
TABLE 4
Standards for Plastic Pipes – Additional Requirements
Depending on Service and/or Location of Piping
Test Typical Standard Notes
(1,2)
1 Fire endurance 4-4-2/7.5.6 Representative samples of each type
of construction and type of pipe
connection.
2 Flame spread (1,2) 4-4-2/7.5.7 Representative samples of each type
of construction.
3 Smoke generation (2) IMO Fire Test Procedures Code Representative samples of each type
of construction.
4 Toxicity (2) IMO Fire Test Procedures Code Representative samples of each type
of construction.
5 Electrical conductivity (1,2) 4-4-2/7.5.8 Representative samples of each type
ASTM F1173-95 or ASTM of construction
D 257, NS 6126/ 11.2 or equivalent
Notes:
1 Where the manufacturer does not have a certified quality system, test to be witnessed by the Surveyor. See 4-4-2/7.9.
2 If deemed applicable by the Flag Administration.
Note: Test items 1, 2 and 5 in 4-4-2/Table 4 are optional. However, if not carried out, the range of approved
applications for the pipes will be limited accordingly (see 4-4-2/Table 2).
9 Material of Valves and Fittings
9.1 General
The physical characteristics of such material are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) or other such appropriate material specifications
as may be approved in connection with a particular design for the stresses and temperatures to which they
may be exposed. Manufacturers are to make physical tests of each melt and, upon request, are to submit
the results of such tests to ABS.
9.3 Forged or Cast Steel

In any system, forged or cast steel may be used in the construction of valves and fittings for all pressures
and temperatures. Consideration is to be given to the possibility of graphite formation in the following steels:
Carbon steel above 425°C (800°F); carbon-molybdenum steel above 468°C (875°F); chrome-molybdenum
steel (with chromium under 0.60%) above 524°C (975°F).
9.5 Cast Iron

For temperatures not exceeding 232°C (450°F), cast iron of the physical characteristics specified in Section
2-3-6 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2) may be used in the construction of valves and
fittings, except in locations for which it is specifically prohibited elsewhere in the Rules.
9.7 Ductile (Nodular) Iron

Nodular-iron applications for valves will be specially considered when the material has an elongation of
not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.) and where the temperature does not exceed 343°C (650°F). See Section
2-3-5 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).
9.9 Brass and Bronze

Brass or bronze having the physical characteristics as specified in Chapter 3 of the ABS Rules for Materials
and Welding (Part 2) may be used in the construction of valves and fittings intended for temperatures up to
208°C (406°F). For temperatures greater than 208°C (406°F) but not in excess of 288°C (550°F), high-
temperature bronze is to be used and the chemical and physical characteristics are to be submitted for approval.
Valves, fittings and flanges of nonferrous material may be attached to nonferrous pipe by an approved
soldering method. For pressures up to 6.9 bar (7 kgf/cm2, 100 psi) and temperatures not exceeding 93°C
(200°F), ordinary solder may be used, but for higher pressures and temperatures, the method and the quality
of solder to be used will be considered for each case.
9.11 Plastic
Rigid plastic compounds for valves and fittings in plastic piping systems will be considered for Group II
piping systems. The design pressure and temperature together with the physical characteristics of the
material verifying compliance with the requirements of 4-4-2/7 are to be submitted in all cases.
11 Valves
11.1 General
11.1.1 Standard Valves
Valves constructed and tested in accordance with a recognized standard may be used, subject to
compliance with 4-4-2/11.5.
11.1.2 Non-Standard Valves
All other valves not certified by the manufacturer as being in accordance with a recognized standard
may be accepted based on evidence verifying their suitability for the intended service. Acceptable
evidence includes testing or analysis demonstrating adequacy including both structural and material
capability aspects. Drawings of such valves showing details of construction and materials are to be
submitted for review, as well as the basis for valve pressure rating, such as design calculations or
appropriate burst test data.
11.3 Construction
All valves are to close with a right hand (clockwise) motion of the handwheel when facing the end of the
stem and are to be either of the rising-stem type or fitted with an indicator to show whether the valve is
open or closed.
All valves of Group I piping systems having nominal diameters exceeding 50 mm (2 in.) are to have
bolted, pressure seal or breech lock bonnets and flanged or welding ends. Welding ends are to be the butt
weld type, except that socket weld ends may be used for valves having nominal diameters of 80 mm (3 in.)
or less, up to and including 39.2 bar (40.0 kgf/cm2) pressure rating class (ASME 600 Class), and for valves
having nominal diameters of 65 mm (2.5 in.) or less, up to and including 98.1 bar (100 kgf/cm2) pressure
rating class (ASME 1500 Class).
All cast iron valves are to have bolted bonnets or are to be of the union bonnet type. For cast iron valves of
the union bonnet type, the bonnet ring is to be of steel, bronze or malleable iron.
Stems, discs or disc faces, seats and other wearing parts of valves are to be of corrosion-resistant materials
suitable for the intended service.
Valves are to be designed for the maximum pressure to which they will be subjected. The design pressure
is to be at least 3.4 bar (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi). Valves used in open systems, such as vent and drain lines, (for
example, level gauge and drain cocks) may be designed for a pressure below 3.4 bar (3.5 kg/cm2, 50 psi),
subject to the requirements of 4-4-2/11.1. Large fabricated ballast manifolds which connect lines exceeding
200 mm (8 in.) nominal pipe size may be used when the maximum pressure to which they will be subjected
does not exceed 1.7 bar (1.75 kgf/cm2, 25 psi).
All valves for Group I piping systems and valves intended for use in oil lines are to be constructed so that
the stem is positively restrained from being screwed out of the body (bonnet). Plug valves, butterfly valves
and valves employing resilient material will be subject to special consideration. Valve operating systems
for all valves which cannot be manually operated are to be submitted for approval.
11.5 Hydrostatic Test and Identification

All valves are to be subjected by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic test at a pressure equal to that stipulated
by the American National Standards Institute or other recognized standard. They are to bear the trademark
of the manufacturer legibly stamped or cast on the exterior of the valve and the primary pressure rating at
which the manufacturer identifies the valve as meeting the requirements of the standards.
13 Pipe Fittings
13.1 General
All fittings in Group I piping are to have flanged or welded ends in sizes over 89 mm O.D. (3 in. N.P.S.).
Screwed fittings may be used in Group I piping systems, provided the temperature does not exceed 496°C
(925°F) and the pressure does not exceed the maximum pressure indicated below for the pipe size.
Pipe Size Maximum Pressure

mm O.D. (in. N.P.S.) bar (kgf/cm2, psi)
above 89 (3) not permitted in Group I piping service
above 60 (2) through 89 (3) 27.6 (28.10, 400)
above 33 (1) through 60 (2) 41.4 (42.20, 600)
above 27 (0.75) through 33 (1) 82.8 (84.40, 1200)
27 (0.75) and smaller 103 (105.50, 1500)
Flared, flareless and compression fittings may be used for tube sizes not exceeding 60 mm O.D. (2 in.
NPS) in Group I piping. In Group II piping, screwed fittings, flared, flareless and compression tube fittings
will be accepted without size limitations. Flared fittings are to be used for flammable fluid systems, except
that both flared and flareless fittings of the non-bite type may be used when the tubing system is of steel or
nickel-copper or copper-nickel alloys. Only flared fittings are to be used when tubing for flammable fluid
systems is of copper or copper-zinc alloys. See 4-4-6/1.7 for hydraulic systems.
13.3 Hydrostatic Test and Identification

All fittings are to be subjected by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic test at a pressure equal to that
stipulated by the American National Standards Institute or other recognized standard. They are to bear the
trademark of the manufacturer legibly stamped or cast on the exterior of the fitting and also the primary
pressure rating at which the manufacturer guarantees the fitting to meet the requirements of the standards.
13.5 Nonstandard Fittings

Fittings which are not certified by the manufacturer as being in accordance with a recognized standard may
be accepted based on evidence verifying their suitability for the intended service. Acceptable evidence
includes testing or analysis demonstrating adequacy including both structural and material capability
aspects. Drawings of such fittings showing details of construction, material and design calculations or test
results are to be submitted for review.
13.7 Mechanical Joints

The installation of mechanical pipe joints, as covered by 4-4-2/13.1 and 4-4-2/13.5, is to be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s assembly instructions. Where special tools and gauges are required for installation
of the joints, these are to be specified and supplied as necessary by the manufacturer. These special tools
are to be kept onboard.
15 Welded Nonstandard Valves and Fittings

Non-Standard steel valves and fittings fabricated by means of fusion welding are to also comply with the
requirements of Chapter 4 of the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2). However, after a
manufacturer’s procedure in the fabrication of equipment of this kind has been demonstrated by tests to the
satisfaction of an ABS Surveyor, subsequent tests on the product need not be witnessed, but the manufacturer’s
guarantee that the Rules are complied with will be accepted as to other valves and fittings which conform
to standards of the American National Standards Institute or other recognized standards.
17 Flanges
17.1 General
Flanges are to be designed and fabricated in accordance with a recognized standard. Slip-on flanges from
flat plate may be substituted for hubbed slip-on flanges in Group II piping systems.
17.3 Group I Piping Flanges

In Group I piping, flanges may be attached to the pipes by any of the following methods appropriate for the
material involved:
17.3.1 Steel Pipe
Over 60 mm O.D. (2 in. NPS) steel pipes are to be expanded into steel flanges, or they may be
screwed into the flanges and seal-welded. They may in all cases be attached by fusion welding in
compliance with the requirements of 2-4-2/9. Smaller pipes may be screwed without seal-welding,
but oil lines are, in addition, to be expanded into the flanges in order to insure uniformly tight threads.
17.3.2 Nonferrous Pipe
In Group I, nonferrous pipes are to be brazed to composition metallic or steel flanges, and in sizes
of 60 mm O.D. (2 in. NPS) and under, they may be screwed.
17.5 Group II Piping Flanges

Similar attachments are also to be used in Group II piping. However, modifications are permitted for welded
flanges, as noted in 2-4-2/9.5 and 2-4-2/9.7, and screwed flanges of suitable material may be used in all sizes.
17.7 Group II Plastic Piping Flanges

Rigid plastic compounds for flanges in plastic piping systems will be considered for Group II piping
systems. The design pressure and temperature together with the physical characteristics of the material are
to be submitted in all cases.
19 Sea Inlets and Overboard Discharges
19.1 Installation
Piping connections bolted to the shell plating are to have the bolt heads countersunk on the outside and the
bolts threaded through the plating. Where a reinforcing ring of sufficient thickness is welded to the inside
of the shell, studs may be used. For compensation in way of holes in the shell plating, see 3-2-5/1.19.
Threaded connections outboard of the shell valves are not considered an acceptable method of connection
pipe to the shell unless the following is met;
For cargo craft under 500 gross tons, screwed connections may be permitted where all pipes and fittings
forming part of the discharge connection, as required by 4-4-2/19 and 4-4-2/23, are constructed of
corrosion resistant materials, and its thickness after threading is no less effective than Extra Heavy. Where
screwed connections are used, appropriate polymer coating is to be used on the connection to isolate any
dissimilar metals.
19.3 Valve Connections to Shell (2015)

Wafer type valves are not to be used for any connections to the craft’s shell unless specially approved. Lug
type butterfly valves used as shell valves are to have a separate set of bolts on each end of the valve so that
the inboard end may be disconnected with the valve closed to maintain its watertight integrity.
Where a distance piece is fitted between the shell and the shell valves, the pipe is to be as short as possible
and of wall thickness not less than that specified in 4-4-2/23.3.4(a).
19.5 Materials
All shell fittings and valves required by 4-4-2/21 and 4-4-2/23 are to be of steel, bronze or other approved
ductile material. Valves of ordinary cast iron or similar material are not acceptable. The use of nodular
iron, also known as ductile iron or spheroidal-graphite iron, will be accepted, provided the material has an
elongation of not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.). All pipes to which this subsection refers are to be of steel
or other equivalent material, subject to special approval.
19.7 Shell Reinforcement

Overboard discharges are to have spigots extending through the shell plate and doubling plate, where
fitted, but need not project beyond the outside surface of the craft.
19.9 Common Overboard Discharge

In general, various types of systems which discharge overboard are not to be interconnected without special
approval; that is, closed pumping systems, deck scuppers, gravity drains, etc. are not to have a common
overboard discharge.
21 Machinery and Pumping Systems
21.1 Valves Required

Positive closing valves are to be fitted at the shell in inlet and discharge piping. The controls are to be
readily accessible and are to be provided with indicators showing whether the valves are open or closed. In
order to be considered readily accessible, the controls, during normal operating conditions, are to be:
i) Located in a space normally entered without using tools,
ii) Clear of or protected from obstructions, moving equipment and hot surfaces that prevent operation
or servicing, and
iii) Within operator’s reach.
Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used for connection to the shell where the
failure of the material in the event of a fire would give rise to danger of flooding.
For cargo craft less than 500 Gross ton constructed of aluminum and FRP, pipes, valves and fittings which
are required to be ‘not readily rendered ineffective by heat” may be accepted provided the solidus melting
point of the material is greater than or equal to that of the material forming the bottom shell plating.
21.3 Sea Chests

The locations of sea chests are to be such as to minimize the probability of blanking off the suction and
arranged so that the valves may be operated from the floors or gratings. Power-operated sea valves are to
be arranged for manual operation in the event of a failure of the power supply.
21.3.1 Strainer Plates
Sea chests are to be fitted with strainer plates at the craft’s side. The strainers are to have a clear
area of at least 1.5 times the area of the sea valves. Efficient means are to be provided for clearing
the strainers.
23 Scuppers and Drains
23.1 General
23.1.1 Application
These requirements apply to gravity drain systems from watertight and non-watertight spaces
located either above or below the freeboard deck.
23.1.2 Definitions
23.1.2(a) Gravity drain system. A gravity drain system is a piping system in which flow is
accomplished solely by the difference between the height of the inlet end and the outlet end. For
the purposes of the Rules, gravity drain systems include those which discharge both inside and
outside the craft.
23.1.2(b) Gravity discharge. A gravity discharge is an overboard drain from a watertight space
such as spaces below freeboard deck or within enclosed superstructures or deckhouses. Back-
flooding through a gravity discharge would affect the reserve buoyancy of the craft.
23.1.2(c) Inboard end. The inboard end of an overboard gravity discharge pipe is that part of the
pipe at which the discharge originates. The inboard end to be considered for these requirements is
the lowest inboard end where water would enter the craft if back-flooding would occur.
23.1.2(d) Scupper. A scupper is an overboard drain from a non-watertight space or deck area.
Back-flooding through a scupper would not affect the reserve buoyancy of the craft.
23.1.3 Basic Principles
Enclosed watertight spaces (spaces below freeboard deck or within enclosed superstructures or
deckhouses) are to be provided with means of draining. This may be achieved by connection to
the bilge system or by gravity drains. In general, a gravity drain is permitted wherever the position
of the space allows liquid to be discharged by gravity through an appropriate opening in the
boundary of the space. Unless specifically stated (see 4-4-2/23.5.1(b) or the following paragraph),
the discharge can be directed overboard or inboard. Where directed overboard, means are to be
provided to prevent entry of sea water through the opening in accordance with 4-4-2/23.3. Where
directed inboard, suitable arrangements are to be provided to collect and dispose of the drainage.
Non-watertight spaces (open superstructures or deckhouses) and open decks, where liquid can
accumulate, are also to be provided with means of draining. In general, a gravity drain is permitted
for all non-watertight spaces. All such drains are to be directed overboard.
Gravity drains are to be capable of draining the space when the craft is on even keel and either
upright or listed 5 degrees on either side.
23.3 Protection from Sea Water Entry

23.3.1 Overboard Gravity Discharges – Normally Open
23.3.1(a) General. Discharges led through the shell, either from spaces below the freeboard deck
or from within superstructures and deckhouses on the freeboard deck fitted with doors complying
with the requirements of 3-2-9/7, are to be fitted with efficient and accessible means for preventing
water from passing inboard.
Normally, each separate discharge is to have one automatic non-return valve with a positive means of
closing it from a position above the freeboard deck, except as below. Alternatively, one automatic non-
return valve and one positive closing valve controlled from above the freeboard deck may be accepted.
Where the vertical distance from the summer loadline to the inboard end of the discharge pipe
exceeds 0.01L, the discharge may have two automatic non-return valves without positive means of
closing, provided that the inboard valve is always accessible for examination under service conditions.
The inboard valve is to be above the tropical load waterline. If this is not practicable, then,
provided a locally controlled stop valve is interposed between the two non-return valves, the
inboard valve need not be fitted above the tropical load waterline.
Where the vertical distance from the summer load waterline to the inboard end of the discharge
pipe exceeds 0.02L, a single automatic non-return valve without positive means of closing may be
accepted, provided it is located above the tropical load waterline (or, where assigned, timber tropical
load waterline). If this is impracticable, a locally operated positive closing valve may be provided
below the single non-return valve, in which case, the non-return valve need not be located above
the specified tropical load waterline.
L is defined in 3-1-1/3. The means for operating the positive-action valve is to be readily accessible
and provided with an indicator showing whether the valve is open or closed.
23.3.1(b) Manned Machinery Space. Where sanitary discharges and scuppers lead overboard
through the shell in way of manned machinery spaces, the fitting to the shell of a locally operated
positive closing valve, together with a non-return valve inboard, will be acceptable.
See 4-4-2/Figure 3 for the acceptable arrangement of scuppers, inlets and discharges.
FIGURE 3
Overboard Discharges – Valve Requirements
Discharges coming from enclosed spaces below the freeboard deck Discharges coming from other
or on the freboard deck spaces
Discharges
Alternatives where inboard end
General requirement through outboard end > 450 mm otherwise
where inboard end manned below FB deck or
< 0.01L above SWL machinery > 0.01L above SWL > 0.02L above SWL < 600 mm above SWL
space
Superstructure
or Deckhouse Deck
FB FB FB FB FB FB
Deck Deck Deck Deck Deck Deck
TWL TWL
SWL SWL SWL SWL SWL SWL
*/ control of the valves are to be

in an approved position
*/
Symbols: non return valve without positive remote control

means of closing
inboard end of pipes normal thickness
non return valve with positive
outboard end of pipes means of closing controlled locally substantial thickness
pipes terminating on the open deck valve controlled locally
23.3.2 Overboard Gravity Discharges – Normally Closed

For overboard discharges which are closed at sea, such as gravity drains from topside ballast tanks, a
single screw down valve operated from above the freeboard deck is acceptable.
23.3.3 Scuppers and Discharges below the Freeboard Deck – Shell Penetration
Scuppers and discharge pipes originating at any level and penetrating the shell either more than
450 mm (17.5 in.) below the freeboard deck or less than 600 mm (23.5 in.) above the summer load
waterline are to be provided with a non-return valve at the shell. This valve, unless required above,
may be omitted if the length of piping up to the freeboard deck has a wall thickness at least equal
to the thickness of the shell plating or extra-heavy pipe, whichever is less.
23.3.4 Required Minimum Wall Thicknesses for Pipes

For pipes in the gravity drain systems covered by 4-4-2/23.3, the wall thickness of steel piping is
not to be less than given below:
23.3.4(a) Piping where substantial thickness is required. For scupper and discharge pipes between
hull plating and the closeable or non-return valve, where substantial thickness is required:
i) External diameter of pipes equal to or less than 80 mm (3.15 in.): thickness not less than
7.0 mm (0.276 in.)
ii) External diameter of pipes 180 mm (7.1 in): thickness not less than 10.0 mm (0.394 in.)
iii) External diameter of pipes equal to or more than 220 mm (8.7 in.): thickness not less than
12.5 mm (0.5 in.)
Intermediate sizes are to be determined by linear interpolation.
23.3.4(b) Piping where substantial thickness is not required. For scupper and discharge pipes inboard
of a closeable or non-return valve, where substantial thickness is not required:
i) External diameter of pipes equal to or less than 155 mm (6.1 in.): thickness not less than
4.5 mm (0.177 in.)
ii) External diameter of pipes equal to or more than 230 mm (9.1 in.): thickness not less than
6.0 mm (0.236 in.)
Intermediate sizes are to be determined by linear interpolation.
23.5 Gravity Drains from Superstructures or Deckhouses

23.5.1 Enclosed Cargo Spaces
Drainage of enclosed cargo spaces situated on the bulkhead deck or the freeboard deck is to be
provided with the following:
23.5.1(a) Where the summer freeboard is such that the deck edge of the space being drained is
not immersed when the craft heels five degrees, the drainage is to be by means of a sufficient number
of gravity drains of suitable size discharging directly overboard, in accordance with 4-4-2/23.3.
23.5.1(b) Where the summer freeboard is such that the deck edge of the space being drained is
immersed when the craft heels five degrees, the drainage of the enclosed cargo spaces is to be led to
a suitable space, or spaces, of adequate capacity, having a high water level alarm and provided with
suitable arrangements for discharge overboard. In addition, the system is to be designed such that:
i) The number, size and disposition of the drain pipes are to prevent unreasonable accumulation
of free water;
ii) The pumping arrangements are to take into account the requirements for any fixed,
pressurized, water spraying, fire extinguishing system;
iii) Water contaminated with oil or other dangerous substances is not drained to machinery
spaces or other spaces where sources of ignition may be present; and
iv) Where the enclosed cargo space is protected by a fixed gas fire extinguishing system, the
drain pipes are fitted with means to prevent the escape of the smothering gas.
23.5.2 Open Superstructures and Deckhouses
Scuppers leading from superstructures or deckhouses not fitted with doors complying with the
requirements of 3-2-9/7 are to be led overboard.
23.7 Craft Receiving Subdivision Loadlines

For craft receiving subdivision loadlines, the bulkhead deck is to apply to provisions given in 4-4-2/23.3
when it is higher than the freeboard deck.
25 Cooler Installations External to the Hull
25.1 General
The inlet and discharge connections of external cooler installations are to be in accordance with 4-4-2/19.1
through 4-4-2/19.5 and 4-4-2/21.1, except that wafer type valves will be acceptable.
25.3 Integral Keel Cooler Installations

The positive closing valves required by 4-4-2/25.1 need not be provided if the keel (skin) cooler installation
is integral with the hull. To be considered integral with the hull, the installation is to be constructed such
that channels are welded to the hull with the hull structure forming part of the channel, the channel material is
to be at least the same thickness and quality as that required for the hull and the forward end of the cooler
is to be faired to the hull with a slope of not greater than 4 to 1.
If positive closing valves are not required at the shell, all flexible hoses or joints are to be positioned above
the deepest load waterline or be provided with an isolation valve.
25.5 Non-integral Keel Cooler Installations

Where non-integral keel coolers are used, if the shell penetrations are not fully welded, the penetration is to
be encased in a watertight enclosure.
Non-integral keel coolers are to be suitably protected against damage from debris and grounding by
recessing the unit into the hull or by the placement of protective guards.
PART Section 3: Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks
4
SECTION 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks
1 General Arrangement of Bilge Systems

A pumping system is to be provided in all craft capable of pumping from and draining any compartment
when the craft is on an even keel and either upright or listed five degrees. For this purpose, wing suctions
will often be necessary, except in narrow compartments at the ends of the craft. Arrangements are to be made
whereby water in the compartment will drain to the suction pipes. Efficient means are to be provided for
draining water from all tank tops and other watertight flats. Peak tanks and comparatively small compartments,
such as chain lockers, echo sounder spaces, and decks over peak tanks, etc., may be drained by ejectors or
hand pumps. Where ejectors are used for this purpose, the overboard discharge arrangements are to comply
with 4-4-2/23.
3 Bilge Pumps
3.1 Number of Pumps

3.1.1 Monohull Craft
3.1.1(a) 24 m (79 ft) or Greater. Each monohull craft 24 m (79 ft) in length or greater is to be
provided with two power-driven bilge pumps, one of which may be attached to the propulsion unit.
3.1.1(b) Under 24 m (79 ft). Each monohull crafter under 24 m (79 ft) in length is to be provided
with at least one fixed power-driven pump, which may be an attached unit, and one portable hand
pump.
3.1.2 Multihull Craft
3.1.2(a) 24 m (79 ft) or Greater. On multihull craft 24 m (79 ft) in length or greater, each hull is
to be provided with at least two power-driven bilge pumps, unless a bilge pump in one hull is capable
of pumping bilge in the other hull. At least one bilge pump in each hull is to be an independently-
driven pump
3.1.2(b) Under 24 m. On multihull craft under 24 m (79 ft) in length, each hull is to be provided
with at least one fixed power-driven bilge pump, which may be an attached unit, unless the system
is arranged such that a single fixed power-driven bilge pump is capable of taking suction from
either hull. In this case, one portable and pump is also to be provided.
3.1.3 Alternative Arrangement-Submersible Pumps
As an alternative to 4-4-3/3.1.1 and 4-4-3/3.1.2, an arrangement utilizing submersible pumps may
be utilized. In bilge pumping arrangements where a bilge main is not provided, then, with the
exception of spaces forward of public spaces and crew accommodations, at least one fixed
submersible pump is to be provided for each space. In addition, at least one portable pump is to be
provided and be supplied from the emergency supply, if electric, for use on individual spaces.
Section 3 Bilge and Ballast Systems and Tanks 4-4-3
3.3 Capacity
The capacity of each pump is to be in accordance with the following:
Craft Length Minimum Capacity per Pump

Below 24 m (79 ft) 5.5 m3/hr (25 gpm)
(hand pump 5 gpm, 1.13 m3/hr)
24 m (79 ft) or greater but below 30.5 m (100 ft) 11.36 m3/hr (50 gpm)
30.5 m (100 ft) or greater but below 45.7 m (150 ft) 14.33 m3/hr (66.6 gpm)
45.7 m (150 ft) and greater Q = 5.66d2/103 m3/hr
Q = 16.1d2 gpm
Q = pump capacity
d = required diameter of main bilge line suction, mm (in.). See 4-4-3/5.9.
When more than two pumps are connected to the bilge system, their arrangement and aggregate capacity
are not to be less effective.
The total capacity, Qt, of fixed submersible bilge pumps for each hull is not to be less than 2.4 times the
pump capacity, Q, determined in the above.
The capacity, Qn, of each submersible pump is not to be less than:
Qt
Qn = m3/hr (gpm), with a minimum capacity of 8 m3/hr (35 gpm)
N −1
3.5 Centrifugal Pumps

Where centrifugal pumps are installed, suitable means for priming are to be provided.
3.7 Independent Power Bilge Pumps

Sanitary, ballast and general service pumps may be accepted as independent power bilge pumps, provided
they are of the required capacity and are fitted with the necessary control valves required by 4-4-3/5.1 for
pumping bilges.
5 Bilge and Ballast Piping
5.1 General
The arrangement of the bilge and ballast pumping systems is to be such as to prevent the possibility of
water or oil passing into the cargo and machinery spaces, or from one compartment to another, whether
from the sea, water ballast or oil tanks. The bilge and ballast mains are to have separate control valves at
the pumps.
5.3 Installation
Bilge or ballast pipes, where permitted to pass through compartments intended for the carriage of oil, are to
be of either steel or wrought iron. Where the craft’s hull is constructed of Aluminum of FRP, aluminum
pipe may be used provided it is extra heavy.
Where bilge pipes in way of deep tanks are not led through a watertight or oil-tight tunnel, the bilge lines
are to be of steel and extra heavy. Similarly, where ballast pipes in way of deep tanks other than ballast
tanks are not led through a watertight or oil-tight tunnel, the ballast lines are to be of steel and extra heavy.
Where the craft’s hull is constructed of Aluminum of FRP, aluminum pipe may be used provided it is extra
heavy. For both bilge and ballast piping, the number of joints is to be kept to a minimum and to be arc
welded or extra heavy flanged. The piping within a deep tank is to be installed to take care of expansion. A
non-return valve is to be fitted at the open end of bilge pipes.
5.5 Manifolds, Cocks and Valves

5.5.1 General
All manifolds, cocks and valves in connection with the bilge pumping arrangement are to be in
positions which are accessible at all times under ordinary circumstances. All valves in the machinery
space controlling the bilge suctions from the various compartments are to be of the stop-check
type. If valves are fitted at the open ends of pipes, they are to be of the non-return type.
5.5.2 Common-main-type Bilge Systems
A common-main bilge system normally consists of one or more main lines installed along the
length of the craft fitted with branch bilge suction connections to various compartments. Where
only one fore-and-aft bilge main is installed, the bilge main is to be located inboard of 20% of the
molded beam of the craft, measured inboard from the side of the ship perpendicular to the
centerline at the level of the summer load line. If there is at least one bilge main on each side of
the craft, then those bilge mains may be installed within 20% of the molded beam, measured
inboard from the side of the ship perpendicular to the centerline at the level of the summer load
line, provided they are fitted with branch lines and control valves arranged such that it is possible
to effectively pump out each compartment using the main(s) on either side of the craft.
For all common-main-type bilge systems, the control valves required in the branches from the
bilge main are to be accessible at all times and are to be of the stop-check type with an approved
type of remote operator. Remote operators may be located in a manned machinery space, or from
an accessible position above the freeboard deck or from underdeck walkways. Remote operators
may be of the hydraulic, pneumatic, electric or reach-rod type.
5.5.3 Controls for Ballast Tank Valves
Ballast tank valves are to be arranged so they will remain closed at all times, except when ballasting.
For this purpose, manual screw thread operated valves, positive holding arrangements for butterfly
type valves or other equivalent arrangements may be used. Where installed, remote controlled
valves are to be arranged so they will close and remain closed upon loss of control power, or will
remain in their last position and are provided with a readily accessible manual means of operation
in case of loss of power to the valve control system. Remote control of bilge and ballast valves is
to be clearly marked at the control station and means are to be provided to indicate whether the
valve is open or closed.
5.7 Strainers
Bilge lines in machinery spaces other than emergency suctions are to be fitted with strainers easily accessible
from the floor plates and are to have straight tail pipes to the bilges. The ends of bilge lines in other
compartments are to be fitted with suitable strainers having an open area of not less than three times the
area of the suction pipe.
5.9 Size of Bilge Suctions

The least internal diameter of bilge suction pipes is to be that of the nearest commercial size within 6 mm
(0.25 in.) of the diameter determined by the following equations:
5.9.1 Main Line
For the diameter of main bilge line suctions and direct bilge suctions to the pumps:
d = 25 + 1.68 L( B + D) mm d=1+ L( B + D) / 2500 in.
5.9.2 Branch Lines

For the equivalent diameter of the combined branch suctions to a compartment:
d = 25 + 2.16 c( B + D) mm d=1+ c( B + D) / 1500 in.
where
d = internal diameter of pipe, in mm (in)
L = length of craft, as defined in 3-1-1/3, in m (ft)
B = breadth of craft, as defined in 3-1-1/5, in m (ft)
c = length of compartment, in m (ft)
D = molded depth to bulkhead or freeboard deck, in m (ft), except that for the
main line in a craft having an enclosed cargo space on the bulkhead or
freeboard deck which is internally drained in accordance with 4-4-2/23.5.1(b)
and which extends for the full length of the craft, D is to be measured to the
next deck above the bulkhead or freeboard deck. Where the enclosed cargo
spaces cover a lesser length, D is to be taken as a molded depth to the
bulkhead or freeboard deck plus h/L, where  and h are aggregate length
and height, respectively, of the enclosed cargo spaces.
5.9.3 Main Line Reduction
Where engine room bilge pumps are fitted primarily for drainage within the engine room, L may
be reduced by the combined length of the cargo tanks or cargo holds. In such cases, the cross
sectional area of the bilge main is not to be less than twice the required cross sectional area of the
engine room branch lines.
5.9.4 Alternate Size Requirements
For craft below 30.5 m (150 ft) in length, the bilge pipe sizes may be in accordance with the
following in lieu of 4-4-3/5.9.1.
Craft Length Minimum Pipe Size (I.D.)

Below 24 m (79 ft) 25 mm (1 in.)
24 m (79 ft) or greater but 38 mm (1.25 in.)
below 30.5 m (100 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft) or greater 38 mm (1.5 in.)
by below 45.7 m (150 ft)
5.9.5 Size Limits

For craft of 45.7 m (150 ft) in length or greater, no main suction piping is to be less than 63 mm
(2.5 in.) internal diameter. No branch piping need be more than 100 mm (4 in.) I.D., nor is it to be
less than 25 mm (1 in.) I.D.
5.9.6 Bilge Common-main
The diameter of each common-main bilge line may be determined by the equation for bilge branches
given in 4-4-3/5.9.2 using the combined compartment length upstream of the point where the
diameter is being determined. In case of double hull construction with full depth wing tanks served by
a ballast system, where the beam of the craft is not representative of the breadth of the compartment, B
may be appropriately modified to the breath of the compartment. However, no common-main
bilge pipe needs to be more than the diameter for the bilge main given in 4-4-3/5.9.1.
5.11 Gravity Drains

Gravity drains that penetrate the main machinery space watertight bulkheads below the freeboard deck and
terminate within the main machinery space are to be fitted with a valve operable from above the freeboard
deck or with quick-acting, self-closing valves. The valve should preferably be located in the main machinery
space. When gravity drains from other spaces are terminated in cargo holds, the cargo hold bilge well is to
be fitted with a high level alarm. Gravity drains which terminate in spaces which are protected by fixed gas
extinguishing systems are to be fitted with means to prevent the escape of extinguishing medium.
5.13 Ballast Water Treatment Systems (1 July 2012)

Where a ballast water treatment system is to be installed, it is to comply with the requirements in Sections
4 and 5 of the ABS Guide for Ballast Water Treatment and the same is to be verified by ABS.
7 Emergency Bilge Suctions for Main Machinery Spaces (2016)

An emergency bilge suction is to be fitted in each machinery space containing a propulsion prime mover.
The emergency bilge suction is to be led straight to the largest independently driven pump in the main
machinery space, other than the required bilge pumps. Where this pump is not suitable, the second largest
suitable pump in the main machinery space may be used for this service, provided that the selected pump is
not one of the required bilge pumps and its capacity is not less than that of the required bilge pump.
The area of the emergency bilge suction pipe is to be equal to the full suction inlet of the pump selected. The
emergency bilge line is to be provided with a suction stop-check valve, which is to be so located as to enable
rapid operation, and a suitable overboard discharge line. For the emergency bilge inlet, the distance between
the open end of the suction inlet and the tank top is to be adequate to allow a full flow of water. The hand wheel
of emergency bilge suction valve is to be position not less than 460 mm (18 in.) above the floor plates.
9 Vent Pipes
9.1 General
Except for comparatively small compartments that are not fitted with a fixed means of drainage, vent pipes
are to be fitted to all tanks, cofferdams, voids, tunnels and compartments which are not fitted with other
ventilation arrangements. In all craft, the structural arrangement in double- bottom and other tanks is to be
such as to permit the free passage of air and gases from all parts of the tanks to the vent pipes. Each tank is
to be fitted with at least one vent pipe which is to be located at the highest part of the tank. Vent pipes are
to be arranged to provide adequate drainage under normal conditions. No shutoff valve or closing device
that can prevent the venting from a tank is to be installed in vent piping.
9.3 Height and Wall Thickness

9.3.1 Vents Exposed to Weather
Vent pipes on decks exposed to the weather are to have the following heights:
i) 760 mm (30 in.) for those on the freeboard deck; and
ii) 450 mm (17.5 in.) for those on the superstructure deck.
The height is to be measured from the deck to the point where water may have access below.
Where these heights may interfere with the working of the craft, a lower height may be accepted,
provided that ABS is satisfied that the closing arrangements and other circumstances justify a lower
height.
Vent pipes for tanks containing fuels with a flash point below 60°C (140°F) are to extend 2.4 m (8 ft)
above the weather deck or other effective arrangements which have been approved are to be
provided. Where fuel oil with a flash point below 43°C (109°F) is permitted to be carried for
consumption by gas turbines, the vents are to terminate with approved flame arresters.
The wall thicknesses of vent pipes where exposed to the weather are to be not less than that specified
below. For vent pipes located on the fore deck, as defined in 3-2-11/9.7.1, the strength and wall
thickness requirements are to also comply with 3-2-11/9.7.2 and 3-2-11/9.7.3:
Nominal Size, d Min. Wall Thickness

d ≤ 65 mm (2.5 in.) 6.0 mm (0.24 in.)
65 mm (2.5 in.) < d < 150 mm (6 in.) by interpolation (1)
d ≥ 150 mm (6 in.) 8.5 mm (0.33 in.)
Note:
1 6 + 0.029(d – 65) mm or 0.24 + 0.026(d – 2.5) in.
9.3.2 Vents not Exposed to Weather

Vent pipes not exposed to the weather need not comply with the height and wall thickness required
by 4-4-3/9.3.1.
9.5 Size
Vent pipes are to have a minimum internal diameter not less than 38 mm (1.5 in.) and not less than the
internal diameter of the fill line. Where tanks are to be filled by pump pressure, the aggregate area of the
vents in the tank is to be at least 125% of the effective area of the filling line, except that when overflows
are fitted, the area of the overflow is to be at least 125% of the effective area of the filling line and the
vents need not exceed the above minimum size.
Notwithstanding the above, the pump capacity and pressure head are to be considered in the sizing of vents
and overflows. When high capacity and/or high head pumps are used, calculations demonstrating the adequacy
of the vent and overflows are to be submitted.
9.7 Location
Vents for compartments required for subdivision (such as double bottom or wing spaces) are to be led above
the freeboard or bulkhead deck. In addition, vents for ballast tanks, fuel oil tanks, cargo tanks, thermal oil
tanks and those cofferdams adjacent to cargo oil tanks are to be led to the weather. Vents for other tanks
may terminate within the machinery space, provided that the open ends are situated to prevent the possibility
of overflowing on electric equipment, engines or heated surfaces.
For craft of 500 gross tons and above, vent pipes for fuel oil service tanks, fuel oil settling tanks and lubricating
oil tanks which directly serve the engines are to be located and arranged and/or suitably protected from
mechanical damage in order to minimize the possibility of being broken and allowing the ingress of
seawater splashes or rainwater into the above mentioned tanks.
9.9 Vent Outlets

All vent and overflow pipes on the open deck are to terminate by way of return bends.
9.9.1 Fuel Oil Tank Vents
Vent outlets from fuel oil tanks are to be fitted with corrosion-resistant flame screens having a
clear area through the mesh of not less than the required area of the vent pipe. Either a single
screen of corrosion-resistant wire of at least 12 by 12 meshes per lineal cm (30 by 30 mesh per
lineal inch), or two screens of at least 8 by 8 meshes per lineal cm (20 by 20 mesh per lineal inch)
spaced not less than 13 mm (0.5 inch) nor more than 38 mm (1.5 inch) apart are acceptable.
Note: Mash count is defined as a number of openings in a lineal cm (inch) counted from the center of any wire
to the center of a parallel wire.
9.9.2 Vent Closure

All vents terminating in the weather are to be fitted with return bends (gooseneck), or equivalent,
and the vent outlet is to be provided with an automatic means of closure type i.e., close automatically
upon submergence (e.g., ball float or equivalent), complying with 4-4-3/9.9.3.
9.9.3 Vent Outlet Closing Devices
9.9.3(a) General. Where vent outlets required by 4-4-3/9.9.2 are to be fitted with automatic closing
devices, they are to comply with the following:
9.9.3(b) Design.
i) Vent outlet automatic closing devices are to be so designed that they will withstand both
ambient and working conditions, and be suitable for use at inclinations up to and including
±40°.
ii) Vent outlet automatic closing devices are to be constructed to allow inspection of the closure
and the inside of the casing as well as changing the seals.
iii) Efficient ball or float seating arrangements are to be provided for the closures. Bars, cage
or other devices are to be provided to prevent the ball or float from contacting the inner
chamber in its normal state and made in such a way that the ball or float is not damaged
when subjected to water impact due to a tank being overfilled.
iv) Vent outlet automatic closing devices are to be self-draining.
v) The clear area through a vent outlet closing device in the open position is to be at least
equal to the area of the inlet.
vi) An automatic closing device is to:
• Prevent the free entry of water into the tanks,
• Allow the passage of air or liquid to prevent excessive pressure or vacuum developing
in the tank.
vii) In the case of vent outlet closing devices of the float type, suitable guides are to be provided
to ensure unobstructed operation under all working conditions of heel and trim. [see
4-4-3/9.9.3(b)i)]
viii) The maximum allowable tolerances for wall thickness of floats should not exceed ±10%
of thickness.
ix) The inner and outer chambers of an automatic air pipe head is to be of a minimum thickness
of 6 mm (0.24 inch).
9.9.3(c) Materials.
i) Casings of vent outlet closing devices are to be of approved metallic materials adequately
protected against corrosion.
ii) For galvanized steel air pipe heads, the zinc coating is to be applied by the hot method
and the thickness is to be 70 to 100 micrometers (2.756 to 3.937 mil).
iii) For areas of the head susceptible to erosion (e.g., those parts directly subjected to ballast
water impact when the tank is being pressed up, for example the inner chamber area above
the air pipe, plus an overlap of 10° or more to either side) an additional harder coating
should be applied. This is to be an aluminum bearing epoxy, or other equivalent coating,
applied over the zinc.
iv) Closures and seats made of non-metallic materials are to be compatible with the media
intended to be carried in the tank and to seawater, and suitable for operating at ambient
temperatures between –25°C and 85°C (–13°F and 185°F).
9.9.3(d) Type Testing.
i) Testing of Vent Outlet Automatic Closing Devices. Each type and size of vent outlet
automatic closing device is to be surveyed and type tested at the manufacturer’s works or
other acceptable location.
The minimum test requirements for a vent outlet automatic closing device are to include the
determination of the flow characteristics of the vent outlet closing device, the measurement
of the pressure drop versus the rate of volume flow using water and with any intended
flame or insect screens in place and also tightness tests during immersion/emerging in
water, whereby the automatic closing device is to be subjected to a series of tightness tests
involving not less than two (2) immersion cycles under each of the following conditions:
• The automatic closing device is to be submerged slightly below the water surface at a
velocity of approximately 4 m/min. (13.12 ft/min) and then returned to the original
position immediately. The quantity of leakage is to be recorded.
• The automatic closing device is to be submerged to a point slightly below the surface
of the water. The submerging velocity is to be approximately 8 m/min and the air
pipe vent head is to remain submerged for not less than 5 minutes. The quantity of
leakage is to be recorded.
• (2014) Each of the above tightness tests are to be carried out in the normal position as
well as at an inclination of 40 degrees under the strictest conditions for the device. In
cases where such strictest conditions are not clear, tests shall be carried out at an
inclination of 40 degrees with the device opening facing in three different directions:
upward, downward, sideways (left or right). See 4-4-3/Figures 1 to 4.
The maximum allowable leakage per cycle is not to exceed 2 ml/mm (1.312 × 10-2 gal/inch)
of nominal diameter of inlet pipe during any individual test.
ii) Discharge/Reverse Flow Test (2014). The air pipe head shall allow the passage of air to
prevent excessive vacuum developing in the tank. A reverse flow test shall be performed.
A vacuum pump or another suitable device shall be connected to the opening of the air
pipe leading to the tank. The flow velocity shall be applied gradually at a constant rate
until the float gets sucked and blocks the flow. The velocity at the point of blocking shall
be recorded. 80% of the value recorded will be stated in the certificate. Each type and size
of vent outlet automatic closing device is to be surveyed and type tested at the manufacturer’s
works or other acceptable location.
iii) Testing of Non-Metallic Floats. Impact and compression loading tests are to be carried
out on the floats before and after pre-conditioning as follows:
Test Temperature °C (°F): –25°C (–13°F) 20°C (68°F) 85°C (185°F)

Test Conditions
Dry Yes Yes Yes
After immersing in water Yes Yes Yes
After immersing in fuel oil NA Yes NA
Immersing in water and fuel oil is to be for at least 48 hours.

a) Impact Test. The test may be conducted on a pendulum type testing machine.
The floats are to be subjected to 5 impacts of 2.5 N-m (1.844 lbf-ft) each and are
not to suffer permanent deformation, cracking or surface deterioration at this impact
loading.
Subsequently the floats are to be subjected to 5 impacts of 25 N-m (18.44 lbf-ft)
each. At this impact energy level some localized surface damage at the impact
point may occur. No permanent deformation or cracking of the floats is to appear.
b) Compression Loading Test. Compression tests are to be conducted with the
floats mounted on a supporting ring of a diameter and bearing area corresponding
to those of the float seating with which it is intended that float shall be used. For
ball type float, loads are to be applied through a concave cap of the same internal
radius as the test float and bearing on an area of the same diameter as the seating.
For a disc type float, loads are to be applied through a disc of equal diameter as
the float.
A load of 3430 N (350 kgf, 770 lbf) is to be applied over one minute and maintained
for 60 minutes. The deflection is to be measured at intervals of 10 minutes after
attachment of the full load.
The record of deflection against time is to show no continuing increase in
deflection and, after release of the load, there is to be no permanent deflection.
iv) Testing of Metallic Floats. The above described impact tests are to be carried out at room
temperature and in the dry condition.
FIGURE 1
Example of Normal Position (2014)
Opening
FIGURE 2
Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing Upward (2014)
Vertical
Opening
40 degrees
FIGURE 3
Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing Downward (2014)
Vertical
Opening
40 degrees
FIGURE 4
Example of Inclination 40 Degrees Opening Facing Sideways (2014)
Vertical
Opening
40 degrees
11 Overflow Pipes
11.1 General Requirements

Overflow pipes discharging through the craft’s side are to be located as far above the deepest load line as
practicable and are to be provided with nonreturn valves located on the craft’s side. Where the overflow
does not extend above the freeboard deck, there is to be provided, in addition, an efficient and accessible
means for preventing water from passing inboard. Such means may consist of another nonreturn valve
located in an accessible position above the deepest load line.
Where it is impracticable to locate the inner valve in an accessible position, one nonreturn valve with
positive means for closing from an accessible position above the freeboard or bulkhead deck will be
acceptable, provided there are suitable arrangements to insure the valve not being closed by unauthorized
persons and provided a notice is posted in a conspicuous place at the operating station to the effect that the
valve is never to be closed, except as may be required in an emergency.
11.3 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid Tanks

Overflow pipes from combustible and flammable liquid tanks are to be led to an overflow tank or to a
storage tank with sufficient excess capacity (normally 5 minutes at transfer pump capacity) to accommodate
the overflow. An alarm device is to be provided to give warning when the liquid reaches a predetermined
level in the overflow tank. If a sight flow glass is also provided in the overflow pipe, then such sight
glasses are to be fitted only in vertical sections of overflow pipes and be in readily visible positions.
For craft in which the overflow of fluid from tanks containing combustible and flammable liquids is
accomplished via overflow through the tanks vent, there is to spill containment provided at the outlet of the
vent with a minimum capacity of 1/2 barrel (0.079 m3, 21 gal.) for each vent.
11.5 Overflow Common Header

Where overflows from the tanks in more than one watertight subdivision are connected to a common
header below the freeboard or bulkhead deck, the arrangement is to be such as to prevent fore-and-aft
flooding of one watertight bulkhead subdivision from another in the event of damage.
13 Sounding
13.1 General
All tanks are to be fitted with a suitable means of determining the level of the liquid therein. Such means
may be sounding pipes, gauge glasses or other approved level indicating systems or devices.
All compartments, including cofferdams and pipe tunnels, which are not readily accessible are to be fitted
with sounding pipes if the compartment is adjacent to the sea or has pipes carrying liquids passing through it.
13.3 Sounding Pipes

Sounding pipes are not to be less than 38 mm (1.5 in.) inside diameter. They are to be led as straight as
possible from the lowest part of the tank or compartment to the bulkhead deck or to a position which is
always accessible. If sounding pipes terminate below the freeboard deck, they are to be provided with means
for closing in the following manner:
13.3.1 Oil Tanks
Quick-acting, self-closing gate valves are required.
13.3.2 Other Tanks
A screw cap secured to the pipe with a chain or a gate valve is required.
Provision is to be made to prevent damaging the craft’s plating by the striking of the sounding rod.
In general, sounding pipes are not to pass through bilge wells, but if this is not practicable, the
pipe is to be at least extra-heavy in the bilge well. Sounding pipes for combustible or flammable
fluids are not to terminate in accommodation spaces.
13.3.3 Ignition of Spillage

13.3.3(a) Fuel Oil Tanks. Sounding pipes for fuel oil tanks are not to terminate in any space where
the risk of ignition of spillage may exist. In particular, they are not to terminate in machinery spaces
or in close proximity to internal combustion engines, generators, electric equipment or surfaces with
temperatures in excess of 220°C (428°F) in other spaces. Where it is impracticable to do otherwise,
sounding pipes from fuel oil tanks may terminate in machinery spaces, provided the following are met:
i) The sounding pipes terminate in locations remote from ignition hazards or effective
precautions such as shielding are taken to prevent fuel oil spillage from coming into contact
with a source of ignition; and
ii) The terminations of sounding pipes are fitted with quick-acting, self-closing gate valves
and with a small diameter self-closing test cock or equivalent located below the gate valve,
provided for the purpose of ascertaining that fuel oil is not present in the sounding pipe
before the gate valve is opened. Provisions are to be made so as to prevent spillage of fuel
oil through the test cock from creating an ignition hazard; and
iii) An approved level gauge is provided. However, short sounding pipes may be used for oil
tanks other than double bottom tanks without the additional closed level gauge, provided
an overflow system is fitted, see 4-4-3/11. The oil level gauge may also be omitted for craft
less than 500 gross tons.
13.3.3(b) Lubricating Oil Tanks. Sounding pipes from lubricating oil tanks may terminate in
machinery spaces provided that the following are met:
i) The sounding pipes are to terminate in locations remote from the ignition hazards, or
effective precautions, such as shielding, are taken to prevent oil spillage from coming into
contact with a source of ignition.
ii) The termination of sounding pipes is fitted with a quick-acting self-closing gate valve.
Alternatively, for lubricating oil tanks that cannot be filled by a pump, the sounding pipes
may be fitted with an appropriate means of closure such as a shut-off valve or a screw cap
attached by chain to the pipe.
13.5 Gauge Glasses

Tanks may be fitted with gauge glasses, provided the gauge glasses are fitted with a valve at each end and
adequately protected from mechanical damage.
Gauge glasses for tanks containing flammable or combustible liquids are to be of the flat glass type having
approved self-closing valves at each end. For hydraulic oil tanks located in spaces other than category A
machinery spaces, cylindrical gauge glasses with approved self-closing valves at each end will be acceptable,
provided such spaces do not contain internal combustion engines, generators, major electrical equipment or
piping having a surface temperature in excess of 220°C (428°F).
Gauge glasses for tanks integral with the shell which are located below the deepest load waterline are to be
of the flat glass type and have approved self-closing valves at each end.
Isolation valves are to be fitted to allow for gauges removal without emptying the tank, see 4-4-1/9.17.3.
13.7 Level Indicating Systems and Devices

Where a level indicating device or system is provided for determining the level in a tank containing
flammable or combustible liquid, failure of the device/system is not to result in the release of the contents
of the tank through the device. Level switches, which penetrate below the tank top, may be used, provided
they are contained in a steel enclosure or other enclosures not being capable of being destroyed by fire. If
an overflow is not fitted, means are also to be provided to prevent overfilling of the tank in the event of
malfunction of the indicating device/system.
15 Oil Pollution Prevention Measures
15.1 General
Means are to be provided to process oil contaminated water from machinery space bilges prior to
discharging it overboard. In general, the discharge criteria of MARPOL 73/78, ANNEX I, Regulation 15
are to be complied with.
15.3 Oily Water Filtering or Separating Equipment

An oily water filtering equipment capable of processing oily mixtures to produce an effluent with oil
content not exceeding 15 parts per millions (PPM) and complying with IMO Resolution MEPC.107(49) is
to be provided to allow oily waters from the bilges to be processed prior to discharging them overboard.
15.5 Sludge Tank

A tank or tanks of adequate capacity is to be provided to receive oily residues such as those resulting from
the oily water filtering.
The sludge tank is to be so designed as to facilitate cleaning.
15.7 Sludge Piping System

15.7.1 Sludge Pump
The sludge tank is to be provided with a designated pump of a suitable type, capacity and discharge
head for the discharge of the tank content to shore reception facilities.
15.7.2 Standard Discharge Connection
To enable the discharge of sludge to shore reception facilities, the sludge piping is to be provided
with a standard discharge connection in accordance with 4-4-3/Table 1.
TABLE 1
Dimensions and Details of Standard Discharge Connection Flange
Dimension
Outside diameter 215 mm (8.5 in.)
Inner diameter According to pipe outside diameter
Bolt circle diameter 183 mm (7.20 in.)
Slots in flange 6 holes 22 mm (0.87 in.) in diameter equidistantly placed on a bolt circle of the
above diameter, slotted to the flange periphery. The slot width to be 22 mm
Flange thickness 20 mm (0.787 in.)
Bolts and nuts: 6 sets, each of 20 mm in diameter and of suitable length
The flange is designed to accept pipes up to a maximum internal diameter of 125 mm (4.92 in.) and is to
be of steel or other equivalent material having a flat face. This flange, together with a gasket of oil-proof
material, is to be suitable for a service pressure of 6 kg/cm2 (85 psi)
15.7.3 Sludge Piping

There is to be no interconnection between the sludge tank discharge piping and bilge piping other
than the possible common piping, with appropriate valves, leading to the standard discharge
connection. Piping to and from sludge tanks is to have no direct connection overboard other than
the standard discharge connection referred to in 4-6-4/5.7.4(b).
PART Section 4: Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks
4
SECTION 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks
1 Fuel Oil Piping Systems
1.1 General Arrangement

1.1.1 Tanks
1.1.1(a) Structural Tanks. As far as practicable, fuel oil tanks are to be part of the craft’s structure
and located outside of Category A machinery spaces. Where fuel oil tanks, other than double bottom
tanks, are necessarily located adjacent to or within a Category A machinery space, the arrangements
are to reduce the area of the tank boundary common with the machinery space of category A to a
minimum, and to comply with the following:
i) Fuel tanks having boundaries common with machinery spaces of category A are not to
contain fuel oils having a flash point of 60°C (140°F) or less.
ii) At least one of their vertical sides is to be contiguous to the machinery space boundaries.
The arrangements in 4-4-4/Figure 1 are acceptable for structural tanks provided the
requirements of 4-4-4/11 are complied with. (The side shell is not being included in
contiguous boundary of the category A machinery space.)
iii) The bottom of the fuel oil tank is not to be so exposed that it will be in direct contact with
flame should there be a fire in a Category A machinery space. The fuel tank is to extend to
the double bottom. For craft below 500 GT where double bottoms are not fitted, the bottom
of the tank is to extend to the bottom shell plate. Alternatively, the bottom of the fuel oil
tank is to be fitted with a cofferdam. The cofferdam is to be fitted with suitable drainage
arrangements to prevent accumulation of oil in the event of oil leakage from the tank.
FIGURE 1
Acceptable Fuel Oil Tanks Arrangements Inside Category A Machinery Spaces (2013)
A
Cofferdam
Cofferdam
F.O.T
≤ 30 m3 Side Shell
F.O.T F.O.T
≤ 30 m3
Machinery
Machinery Aft. Bhd
Space Space
(Category A) (Category A)
Fwd. Bhd
F.O.T
Cofferdam
Double Bottom
A Section A-A
Section 4 Fuel Oil and Lubricating Oil Systems and Tanks 4-4-4
1.1.1(b) Free Standing Tanks In general, the use of free standing fuel oil tanks is to be avoided.
Where permitted, they are to be placed in an oil tight spill tray of ample size with adequate means
of drainage in accordance with 4-4-1/9.23.
1.1.2 Spillage
No fuel oil tank is to be situated where spillage or leakage therefrom can constitute a hazard by
falling on heated surfaces or electrical equipment. Precautions are to be taken to prevent any oil
that may escape under pressure during inspection or maintenance of any pump, filter or heater
from coming into contact with a source of ignition as defined in 4-1-1/13.17.
To prevent the ignition of fuel oil, all hot surfaces likely to reach a temperature above 220°C
(428°F) during service are to be insulated with non-combustible, and preferably non-oil-absorbent
materials. Such insulation materials, if not impervious to oil, are to be encased in oil-tight steel
sheathing or equivalent. The insulation assembly is to be well-installed and supported having
regard to its possible deterioration due to vibration.
1.1.3 Service and Settling Tanks (2016)
At least two fuel oil service tanks or two groups of fuel oil service tanks for each type of fuel used
onboard necessary for propulsion and vital systems, or equivalent arrangements, are to be
provided. Each service tank or, where separate groups of tanks are arranged for use, each group of
service tanks is to have a capacity of at least eight hours at the rating of the propulsion plant to
obtain one half of the craft’s maximum design speed or 15 knots, whichever is greater, and the
normal operating load at sea of the generator plant. The capacity of the service tanks will be
specially considered for craft with operational limitations.
A service tank is a fuel tank which contains only fuel of a quality ready for use, that is, fuel of a
grade and quality that meets the specification required by the equipment manufacturer and is fitted
with fuel oil piping arranged so that the tank can provide a readily available source of fuel oil to
the propulsion and generator engines. A service tank is to be declared as such and is not to be used
for any other purpose.
Use of a settling tank with or without purifiers or use of purifiers alone is not acceptable as an
equivalent arrangement to providing a service tank.
1.1.4 Craft Over 500 Gross Tons
Tanks containing fuel oil having a flash point above 60°C (140°F) are to be separated from
passenger, crew, and baggage compartments by an impervious and continuous boundary between
the tanks and the accommodation spaces and any welds in the boundary are to be full penetration
welds. In accommodation spaces, any access manholes into the tanks are to be arranged through
cofferdam spaces. Fuel oil is not to be carried forward of public spaces and crew accommodation.
1.3 Piping, Valves and Fittings

Fuel oil pipes, valves and fittings are to be of steel or other approved materials. See 4-4-2/5.
1.5 Oil Heating Arrangements

1.5.1 Oil Heaters
Where heaters are provided in fuel oil systems, they are to be fitted with a temperature control and
either a high temperature alarm or a low flow alarm, except where the maximum temperature of
the heating medium does not exceed 220°C (428°F).
Where electric heaters are fitted, they are to be arranged to de-energize automatically when the oil
level falls to a predetermined height to ensure that the heating elements are permanently submerged
during operation. In addition, a safety temperature switch with a manual reset independent from
the automatic control sensor is to be provided to cut off the electric power supply in order to avoid
a surface temperature of 220°C (428°F) or above.
1.5.2 Tanks
Unless specially approved otherwise, fuel oil in storage tanks is not to be heated to temperatures
within 10°C (18°F) below flash point of the fuel oil.
Where heating arrangements are provided for settling and service tanks, the control and alarm
requirements of 4-4-4/1.5.1 are applicable.
1.5.3 Piping Arrangement
As far as practicable, all parts of the oil fuel system containing heated oil under pressure exceeding
1.8 bar (1.8 kgf/cm2, 26 psi) are not to be placed in a concealed position such that defects and
leakage cannot readily be observed. The machinery spaces in way of each parts of the oil fuel
system are to be adequately illuminated.
1.7 Overflows from Combustible and Flammable Liquid Tanks

For overflow pipes from combustible and flammable liquid tanks, see 4-4-3/11
1.9 Fuel Oil Purifiers

Fuel oil purifiers for heated oil are to be placed in a separate room or rooms reserved for the purifiers and
their heaters. If it is impracticable to located the purifiers in a separate room, special consideration will be
given with regard to location and containment of possible leakage and shielding.
3 Fuel Oil Transfer and Filling
3.1 General
Where fuel oil transfer arrangements are furnished, two transfer pumps are to be provided and one of them
is to be independent of the main engine. The fuel oil pumping arrangements are to be distinct from the
other pumping systems as far as practicable, and the means provided for preventing dangerous interconnection
in service are to be thoroughly effective. Where service fuel oil tanks are filled automatically or by remote
control, means are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage.
3.3 Pipes in Oil Tanks

Oil pipes and other pipes, where passing through oil tanks, are to be of wrought iron or steel, except that
other materials may be considered where it is demonstrated that the material is suitable for the intended
service. All packing is to be of a composition not affected by oil.
3.5 Control Valves or Cocks

Valves or cocks controlling the various suctions are to be located close to the bulkhead where the suctions
enter the machinery spaces and, wherever practicable, directly over the gutterway in way of deep and settling
tanks. Pumps, strainers, etc., requiring occasional examination are to have drip pans.
3.7 Valves on Oil Tanks (2016)

Where pipe lines emanate from fuel oil tanks at such a level that they will be subjected to a static head of
oil from the tank, they are to be fitted with positive closing valves. The valves are to be secured at the tank.
A short length of Extra Strong pipe connecting the valve to the tank is also acceptable. Where the fuel oil
piping passes through adjacent tanks, the valve required above may be located where the pipe run exits the
adjacent tank(s), provided the piping in the adjacent tanks is extra-heavy and has all welded connections.
However, if the adjacent tank is a fuel oil tank, the pipe run within the fuel oil tank is to be at least standard
thickness.
If the valves are installed on the outside of the tank, they are not to be of cast iron. The use of nodular iron,
also known as ductile iron or spheroidal-graphite iron, may be used, provided the material has an elongation
not less than 12% in 50 mm (2 in.). Arrangements are to be provided for closing them at the valve and for
tanks having a capacity of 500 liters (132 US gal.) or greater, from a readily accessible and safe location
outside of the compartment in which the valve is located.
If the positive closing valve required above is situated in a shaft tunnel or pipe tunnel or similar space,
arrangements for closing may be effected by means of an additional valve on the pipe or pipes outside of
the tunnel or similar space. If such an additional valve is fitted in the machinery space, it is to be operated
from a position outside of this space.
If the valves are located inside of the tank, they may be of cast iron and arranged for remote control only,
but additional valves for local control are to be located in the machinery space.
Where independent filling lines are fitted, they are to enter at or near the top of the tank, but if this is
impracticable, they are to be fitted with non-return valves at the tank.
The valves required above may be remotely operated by reach rods or by electric, hydraulic or pneumatic
means. The source of power to operate these valves is to be located outside of the space in which the
valves are located. The positioning of the valve by either local or remote means is not to interfere with the
ability of the other means to close the valve. This remote means of closure is to override all other means of
valve control. The use of an electric, hydraulic or pneumatic system is not acceptable to directly keep the
valve in the open position.
Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used in the construction of the valves or the closure
mechanism, unless adequately protected to ensure effective closure facility in the event of fire. If electric
cables are utilized, they are to be fire-resistant, meeting the requirements of IEC 60331. See 4-6-4/13.1.3.
Hydraulic systems are to be in accordance with 4-4-6/1 for both Class I and II piping systems. For a pneumatic
system, the air supply may be from a source from within the space, provided a separate receiver complying
with the following is located outside of the space:
i) Sufficient capacity to close all connected valves twice.
ii) Fitted with low air pressure alarm.
iii) Air supply line is fitted with a non-return valve adjacent to the receiver.
For cargo craft under 500 gross tons and constructed of aluminum and FRP, pipes, valves and fittings
which are required to be “not readily rendered ineffective by heat” may be accepted if the solidus melting
point of the material is greater than or equal to that of the material forming the bottom shell plating.
3.9 Remote Shutdown of Pumps

Machinery driving fuel oil transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps are to be fitted
with remote shutdowns complying with 4-5-1/5.3.
3.11 Oil Drain Tanks

Drain tanks, where fitted, for waste oil, fuel oil overflows, drains, all oil drip pans, fuel injection piping, etc.,
are to have air and sounding pipes. Non-return valves are to be fitted in drain lines entering the drain tanks,
except where backflow would not present a hazard. Suitable means are to be provided for pumping out
these drain tanks.
Oil tanks not forming a part of the craft’s structure, where permitted by 4-4-4/1.1.1, are to have suitable
drip pans with adequate means of drainage, in accordance with 4-4-1/9.23.
5 Fuel Oil Service and Injection Systems

Fuel oil service and injection systems for internal-combustion engines are to be in accordance with 4-2-1/3,
4-2-1/5 and 4-2-1/7.
7 Low Flash Point Fuels
7.1 General
Fuel oils with a flash point of 60°C (140°F) closed-cup or below may be accepted for the following:
7.1.1
Craft classed for restrictive service within areas having a climate ensuring that ambient temperatures of
spaces where such fuel oil is stored will not rise within 10°C (18°F) below its flash point may use
fuel oil with flash point of 60°C (140°F) or below, but not less than 43°C (110°F).
7.1.2
For emergency generators, fuel oil with a flash point of not less than 43°C (110°F) may be used.
See 4-6-2/5.5.2.
7.1.3
For gas turbines, subject to compliance with the requirements of Section 4-2-2.
Tanks containing low-flash point fuel oil are to be separated from passenger, crew, and baggage compartments
by vapor-proof enclosures or cofferdams which are suitably ventilated and drained. Low-flash point fuel
oil is not to be carried forward of public spaces and crew accommodation.
7.3 Fuel Heating

For oil heating arrangements, see 4-4-4/1.5.
7.5 Fuel Oil Tank Vents

Vent pipes are to extend at least 2.4 m (8 ft) above the weather deck or other effective arrangements which
have been approved are to be provided.
9 Lubricating Oil Systems
9.1 General
The lubricating systems are to be so arranged that they will function satisfactorily under the conditions
specified in 4-1-1/17. The lubricating-oil piping is to be entirely separated from other piping systems. In
addition, the requirements of 4-4-4/1.1.2, 4-4-4/1.3 and 4-4-4/1.5 are applicable.
The requirements in 4-4-4/3.7 are also applicable for lubricating-oil tanks. However, arrangements for remotely
closing the valve from a position outside of the compartment need not be provided if inadvertent valve
closure could result in damage to the running machinery due to lack of lubricating oil. Where the machinery
is arranged for automatic shutdown upon loss of lubricating oil, the valve required by 4-4-4/3.7 is to be
provided with means to close it from a readily accessible and safe location outside of the compartment in
which the valve is located.
9.3 Sight Flow Glasses

Sight flow glasses may be used in lubricating systems, provided they are fire-resistant.
9.5 Internal Combustion Engines

For internal combustion engines, see also 4-2-1/9.
9.7 Reduction Gears

For reduction gears, see also 4-2-1/9.11.
9.9 Electrical Machinery

For electrical machinery, see also 4-6-3/3.3, 4-6-3/3.5 and 4-6-4/3.15.
9.11 Hose Reels

Where hose reels are used for filling the engine or reduction gear sumps with oil, a self-closing valve is to
be provided at the end of the filling hose to prevent spillage. Suitable arrangements are to be provided to
properly drain and store the hose and reel when not in use. Hoses are to be approved for oil service and in
accordance with the requirements for burst pressure, fire resistance, reinforcement and end fittings in
4-4-1/9.19.
11 Additional Measures for Oil Pollution Prevention
11.1 General
11.1.1 Application
The provisions of 4-4-4/11 provide the arrangement of fuel oil tanks for compliance with MARPOL
73/78, as amended. They are to be applied in addition to the requirements of 4-4-4/1 and 4-4-4/3
and are applicable to all types of craft classed with ABS.
11.1.2 Submission of Plans
Plans showing compliance with the applicable requirements in 4-4-4/11.3 are to be submitted for
review.
11.3 Tank Protection Requirements

11.3.1 General (2014)
The requirements in this section apply to craft having an aggregate fuel oil capacity of 600 m3
(21,190 ft3) and above. However, the requirements need not be applied to individual fuel oil tanks
with a capacity not greater than 30 m3 (1060 ft3), provided that the aggregate capacity of such
excluded tanks is not greater than 600 m3 (21,190 ft3). Further, individual fuel oil tanks are not to
have capacity greater than 2,500 m3 (88,290 ft3).
Fuel oil tanks of any volume are not to be used for ballast water.
Fuel oil tank means a tank in which fuel oil is carried, but excludes those tanks which would not
contain fuel oil in normal operation, such as overflow tanks. Fuel oil capacity means the volume
of a tank in cubic meters (cubic feet) at 98% tank filling.
Fuel oil means any oil used as fuel oil connection with the propulsion and auxiliary machinery of
the craft in which such oil is carried.
11.3.2 Protective Location of Tanks
The protective locations for the tanks specified in 4-4-4/11.3.1 above are to be as follows:
11.3.2(a) Deterministic Approach. All applicable tanks are to be located away from the craft's
bottom or side shell plating for a distance as specified in i), ii) or iii). Small suction wells may
extend below fuel oil tanks bottoms, if they are as small as possible and the distance between the
craft’s bottom plate and the suction well bottom is not reduced by more than half of the distance
required by i).
i) For craft having an aggregate oil fuel capacity of 600 m3 (21,190 ft3) and above, all tanks
are to be arranged above craft’s molded line of bottom shell plating at least of the distance
h as specified below:
h = B/20 m or
h = 2.0 m (6.6 ft), whichever is smaller
where B is the breadth of the craft, as defined in 3-1-1/5, in m (ft).
h is in no case to be less than 0.76 m (2.5 ft).
ii) For craft having an aggregate oil fuel capacity greater than or equal to 600 m3 (21190 ft3)
but less than 5000 m3 (176570 ft3), tanks are to be arranged inboard of the molded line of
side plating not less than the distance w as specified below:
w = 0.4 + 2.4C/20000 m w = 1.31 + 7.87C/706290 ft
where
C = craft’s total volume of oil fuel in m3 (ft3) at 98% tank filling;
w = at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft)
for individual tanks smaller than 500 m3 (17,657 ft3) w is to be at
least 0.76 m (2.5 ft)
iii) For craft having an aggregate oil fuel capacity of 5000 m3 (176570 ft3) and above, tanks are
to be arranged inboard of the molded line of side plating not less than the distance w as
specified below:
w = 0.5 + C/20000 m w = 1.64 + C/706290 ft or
w = 2.0 m w = 6.6 ft, whichever is smaller
where C is the craft’s total volume of oil fuel in m3 (ft3) at 98% tank filling.
The minimum value of w = 1.0 m (3.3 ft).
11.3.2(b) Probabilistic Approach. As an alternative to the deterministic approach of 4-4-4/11.3.2(a),
arrangements complying with the accidental oil fuel outflow performance standard of Regulation
12A, Annex I, MARPOL 73/78, as amended, would be acceptable.
11.5 Class Notation – POT

In addition to the requirements for fuel oil tank protection as specified in 4-4-4/11.3.1 utilizing the deterministic
approach of 4-4-4/11.3.2(a), where lubricating oil tanks are also arranged in the same manner as required
by the deterministic approach [4-4-4/11.3.2(a)] for fuel oil tanks, craft are to be eligible for the optional
Class notation, POT – Protection of Fuel and Lubricating Oil Tanks. Further, the following exemptions
are applicable to lubrication oil tanks:
i) In application of equation in 4-4-4/11.3.2(a)ii) or iii), total volume of lubricating oil tanks need not
be accounted for C (craft’s total volume of oil fuel in m3 (ft3) at 98% tank filling).
ii) Tanks used as main engine lubricating oil drain tanks need not be located in a protected location
away from the craft’s side or bottom plates.
PART Section 5: Internal Combustion Engine Systems
4
SECTION 5 Internal Combustion Engine Systems
1 Fuel Oil System

Fuel oil systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/3.
3 Lubricating Oil System

Lubricating oil systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/9.
5 Cooling Water System

Cooling water systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/11.
7 Exhaust Piping
Exhaust piping for internal combustion engines is to comply with 4-2-1/15.
9 Starting-air Systems
Starting-air systems for internal combustion engines are to comply with 4-2-1/13.
PART Section 6: Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems
4
SECTION 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems
1 Hydraulic Systems
1.1 General
The arrangements for Group I hydraulic piping systems are to be in accordance with the requirements of
this section, except that hydraulic systems which form part of a unit which is independently manufactured
and assembled and which does not form part of the craft’s piping system (such as a crane) are not covered
by this section.
Plans clearly showing the arrangements and details are to be submitted for review.
Hydraulic pumps, actuators, motors and accessories are to be suitable for the intended duty, compatible
with the working fluid and are to be designed to operate safely at full power conditions. In general, the
hydraulic fluid is to be non-flammable or have a flash point above 157°C (315°F).
The requirements for fuel oil tanks contained in 4-4-4/1.1.2 and 4-4-4/1.3 are applicable to tanks containing
hydraulic fluid. See also 4-3-3/7 and 4-3-2/17.
1.3 Valves
1.3.1 General
In general, valves are to comply with the requirements of 4-4-2/9 and 4-4-2/11.
1.3.2 Relief Values
Relief valves are to be provided for the protection of the hydraulic system. Each relief valve is to
be capable of relieving not less than full pump flow with a maximum pressure rise of not more
than 10% of the relief valve setting.
1.5 Piping
Piping is to meet the requirements of 4-4-1/5 and 4-4-2/5, except that mill tests need not be witnessed by
the Surveyor. In such cases, mill certificates are to be provided which verify the chemical and mechanical
properties for the pipe.
1.7 Pipe Fittings

Fittings and flanges are to meet the requirements of 4-4-2/9, 4-4-2/13 and 4-4-2/17, except as follows:
1.7.1 Split Flanges
Split flanges are not to be used in steering gear systems, certified thruster systems, nor in systems
which are vital to the propulsion or safety of the craft. Split flanges may be considered for use in
other systems. Where split flanges are permitted, they are not to be used to join sections of piping,
but may be used for connections to machinery, provided the materials and construction are
suitable for the system design pressure.
1.7.2 Straight-Thread “O”-Ring Connection
Straight-thread “O”-ring type connections may be used for connections to equipment such as
pumps, valves, cylinders, accumulators, gauges and hoses. Such connections are not to be used for
joining sections of pipe.
Section 6 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems 4-4-6
1.7.3 Tapered Threaded Connection

Tapered threaded connections up to and including 89 mm O.D. (3 in. NPS) may be used without
limitation for connections to equipment such as pumps, valves, cylinders, accumulators, gauges
and hoses. Tapered threaded connections are not to be used in steering gear systems, controllable
pitch propeller systems, and other systems associated with propulsion or propulsion control,
except where permitted by 4-4-2/13.1. Such connections are not to be used for joining sections of
pipe, except where permitted by 4-4-2/13.1.
1.9 Accumulators and Fluid Power Cylinders

Accumulators are to meet the requirements of Part 4, Chapter 4 of the Steel Vessel Rules. Each accumulator
which may be isolated is to be protected by suitable relief valves. Where a gas charging system is used, a
relief valve is to be provided on the gas side of the accumulator.
Fluid Power Cylinders are to meet the requirements of 4-4-6/3.
1.11 Design Pressure

The pressure used for determining the strength and design of piping and components is not to be less than
the relief valve setting.
1.13 Segregation of High Pressure Hydraulic Units

Hydraulic units with working pressures above 15.5 bar (15.8 kgf/cm2, 225 psi) installed within a machinery
space are to be placed in separate room or rooms or shielded as necessary to prevent any oil or oil mist that
may escape under pressure from coming into contact with surfaces with temperatures in excess of 220°C
(428°F), electrical equipment or other sources of ignition. For the purpose of this requirement, a hydraulic
unit includes the power pack and all components of the hydraulic piping system.
3 Fluid Power Cylinders
3.1 General
Fluid power cylinders subject to pressures or temperatures greater than those indicated below are to be
designed, constructed and tested in accordance with a recognized standard for fluid power cylinders.
• Hydraulic fluid – flammable: 7 bar (7.1 kgf/cm2, 101.5 psi) or 60°C (140°F)
• Hydraulic fluid – non-flammable: 16 bar (16.3 kgf/cm2, 232 psi) or 200°C (392°F)
• Air: 16 bar (16.3 kgf/cm2, 232 psi) or 200°C (392°F)
Acceptance will be based on the manufacturer’s certification of compliance and on verification of permanent
identification on each cylinder bearing the manufacturer's name or trademark, standard of compliance and
maximum allowable working pressure and temperature.
3.3 Non-compliance with a Recognized Standard

Cylinders subject to pressures or temperatures higher than those indicated above which are not constructed
to a recognized standard may be accepted based on the following:
i) Regardless of diameter, the design of the cylinder is to be shown to comply with one of the following:
• A recognized pressure vessel code,
• Section 4-4-1 of the Steel Vessel Rules. For instance, the cylinder is to have a wall thickness
not less than that given by equation 2 of 4-4-1A1/3.1, and the cylinder ends are to meet the
requirements of flat heads in 4-4-1A1/5.7, or
• Verification through burst tests. Steel cylinders (other than cast steel) are to withstand not less
than 4 times the maximum allowable working pressure, while cast steel, cast iron and nodular
iron cylinders are to withstand not less than 5 times the maximum allowable working pressure.
Documentation in this regard is to be submitted for review.
ii) Each individual unit is to be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the maximum allowable working
pressure (2 times, for cast iron and nodular iron cylinders) by the manufacturer. A test certificate is
to be submitted.
iii) Each cylinder is to be affixed with a permanent nameplate or marking bearing the manufacturer’s
name or trademark and the maximum allowable working pressure and temperature.
3.5 Materials
i) The materials of the cylinders are to comply with the requirements of the standard or code to which
they are designed and constructed. Where the design is verified though burst tests, the materials of
the cylinder are to comply with 4-4-1/3 of the Steel Vessel Rules or other acceptable standards.
ii) Ordinary cast iron having an elongation of less than 12% is not to be used for cylinders expected
to be subjected to shock loading.
iii) Copies of certified mill test reports are to be made available to the Surveyor upon request.
3.7 Rudder Actuators

Rudder actuators are to be in accordance with the requirements of 4-3-3/5.11.
3.9 Cylinders below Pressures or Temperatures Indicated in 4-4-6/3.1

Cylinders subject to pressures and temperatures at or below those indicated in 4-4-6/3.1 may be used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s rating and verification of suitable for the intended service.
3.11 Exemptions (2013)

Fluid power cylinders that do not form part of the craft’s piping systems, machinery or equipment covered
in Part 4 of these Rules are exempt from the requirements of 4-4-6/3. However, those fluid power cylinders
which are integrated into piping systems associated with optional classification notations are to comply
with the requirements of 4-4-6/3 and the applicable requirements specified in the pertinent ABS Rules and
Guides.
5 Pneumatic Systems
5.1 Application
Requirements of 4-4-6/5 apply to shipboard pneumatic systems for control and actuation services. Requirements
for starting air systems are in 4-2-1/13. Pneumatic systems fitted in self-contained equipment not associated
with propulsion and maneuvering of the craft and completely assembled by the equipment manufacturer
need not comply with this subsection. Such pneumatic systems, however, are to comply with the accepted
practice of the industry
5.3 Pneumatic System Components

5.3.1 Air Reservoirs
The design and construction of all air receivers are to be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Part 4, Chapter 4 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
5.3.2 Pipe Fittings and Joints
The piping system and its components are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
Part 4, Chapter 4 of these Rules.
5.5 Pneumatic System Requirements

5.5.1 Pneumatic Air Source
Compressed air for general pneumatic control and actuation services may be drawn from engine
starting air reservoirs. In which case, the aggregate capacity of the starting air reservoirs is to be
sufficient for continued operation of these services after the air necessary for the required number
of engine starts (as specified in 4-2-1/13.3.1) has been used.
For propulsion remote control purposes, pneumatic air is to be available from at least two air
compressors. The starting air system, where consisting of two air compressors, may be used for this
purpose. The required air pressure is to be automatically maintained. Pneumatic air supplies to safety
and control systems may be derived from the same source but are to be by means of separate lines
5.5.2 Air Quality
5.5.2(a) General. Provisions are to be made to minimize the entry of oil or water into the compressed
air system. Suitable separation and drainage arrangements are to be provided before the air enters
the reservoirs.
5.5.2(b) Safety and Control Air Systems. For requirements regarding the quality of the air supplied
to safety and control air systems, see 4-7-1/11.7.
5.5.3 Overpressure Protection
Means are to be provided to prevent overpressure in any part of the pneumatic system. This
includes the water jackets or casings of the air compressors and coolers which may be subjected to
dangerous over-pressure due to leakage into them from the air pressure parts.
PART Section 7: Other Piping Systems and Tanks
4
SECTION 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks
1 Fixed Oxygen-Acetylene Installations
1.1 Application
Provisions of 4-4-7/1.3 apply to fixed oxygen-acetylene installations that have two or more cylinders of
oxygen and acetylene, respectively. Spare cylinders of gases need not be counted for this purpose. Provisions
of 4-4-7/1.5 and 4-4-7/1.7, as applicable, are to be complied with for fixed installations regardless of the
number of cylinders.
1.3 Gas Storage

1.3.1 Storage of Gas Cylinders
1.3.1(a) Storage room. The gas cylinders are to be stored in rooms dedicated for this purpose only.
A separate room is to be provided for each gas. The rooms are to be on or above the upper-most
continuous deck and are to be constructed of steel. Access to the rooms is to be from the open
deck and the door is to open outwards. The boundaries between the rooms and other enclosed
spaces are to be gastight. Suitable drainage of the storage room is to be provided.
1.3.1(b) Open area. Where no storage room is provided, the gas cylinders may be placed in an
open storage area. In such cases, they are to be provided with weather protection (particularly
from heavy seas and heat) and effectively protected from mechanical damage. Suitable drainage of
the open storage area is to be provided.
1.3.1(c) Piping passing through storage room or area. Piping systems containing flammable
fluids are not to run through the storage room or open storage area
1.3.2 Ventilation of Storage Room
Gas cylinder storage rooms are to be fitted with ventilation systems capable of providing at least
six air changes per hour based on the gross volume of the room. The ventilation system is to be
independent of ventilation systems of other spaces. The space within 3 m (10 ft) from the power
ventilation exhaust, or 1 m (3 ft) from the natural ventilation exhaust is to be considered a hazardous
area. The fan is to be of a non-sparking construction. See 4-6-3/9.7. Small storage spaces provided
with sufficiently large openings for natural ventilation need not be fitted with mechanical ventilation.
1.3.3 Electrical Installation in Storage Room (2016)
Electrical equipment installed within the storage room, including the ventilation fan motor, is to be
of a certified safe type. Electrical equipment installed within the storage room may be any of the
types indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be IEC Publication 60079-20-1 group IIC class T2.
1.5 Piping System Components

1.5.1 Pipe and Fittings
1.5.1(a) General. In general, all oxygen and acetylene pipes, pipe fittings, pipe joints and valves
are to be in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-4-2 for Group I piping systems, except as
modified below. Further, only high pressure oxygen and acetylene piping is to be certified as Group
I piping, see 4-4-1/5.1 for the materials testing.
Section 7 Other Piping Systems and Tanks 4-4-7
1.5.1(b) Piping Materials. Materials for acetylene on the high-pressure side between the
cylinders and the regulator are to be steel. Copper or copper alloys containing more than 65% copper
are not to be used in acetylene piping (high or low pressure). Materials for oxygen on the high-
pressure side are to be steel or copper. All pipes, both high- and low-pressure sides, are to be seamless.
1.5.1(c) Design Pressure. Pipes, pipe fittings and valves on the oxygen high-pressure side are to
be designed for not less than 207 bar (211 kgf/cm2, 3000 psi). Pipes used on the low-pressure side
are to be at least of standard wall thickness.
1.5.1(d) Pipe joints. All pipe joints outside of the storage room or open storage area are to be welded.
1.5.1(e) Flexible Hoses. Flexible hoses used to connect oxygen or acetylene gas cylinders to a
fixed piping system or manifold are to comply with an acceptable standard and be suitable for the
intended pressure and service. Further, the internal surface of a hose used to connect an acetylene
tank is to be of a material that is resistant to acetone and dimethylformamide decomposition*.
Where a flexible hose is connected from an oxygen cylinder to the piping system or manifold
directly (i.e., no intervening pressure regulator), the internal liner of the oxygen hose is to be of a
material that has an autoignition temperature of not less than 400°C (752°F) in oxygen*.
* Note: Criteria based on ISO 14113:1997 Gas welding equipment – rubber and plastic hoses assembled for
compressed or liquefied gases up to a maximum design pressure of 450 bar.
1.5.2 Pressure Relief Devices

Pressure relief devices are to be provided in the gas piping if the maximum design pressure of the
piping system can be exceeded. These devices are to be set to discharge at not more than the
maximum design pressure of the piping system to a location in the weather, remote from sources
of vapor ignition or openings to spaces or tanks. The area within 3 m (10 ft) of the pressure relief
device discharge outlet is to be regarded as a hazardous area. The pressure relief devices may be
either a relief valve or a rupture disc.
1.5.3 System Arrangements
Where two or more gas cylinders are connected to a manifold, high pressure piping between each
gas cylinder and the manifold is to be fitted with a non-return valve. The piping is not to run
through unventilated spaces or accommodation spaces. Outlet stations are to be fitted with shut-off
valves. Outlet stations are to be provided with suitable protective devices to prevent back flow of
gas and the passage of flame into the supply lines.
1.5.4 Gas Cylinders
Gas cylinders are to be designed, constructed and certified in accordance with the provisions of
4-4-1/1.11.4 of the Steel Vessel Rules. Each cylinder is to be fitted with a suitable pressure relief
device such as a fusible plug or a rupture disc.
The area within 3 m (10 ft) of the pressure relief device discharge outlet is to be regarded as a
hazardous area.
1.7 Testing
Piping on the oxygen high-pressure side is to be tested before installation to at least 207 bar (211 kgf/cm2,
3000 psi) and the piping on the acetylene high-pressure side is to be tested in accordance with Section 4-4-2.
The entire system is to be leak-tested with nitrogen or a suitable inert gas after installation. Care is to be
taken to cleanse the piping with suitable medium to remove oil, grease and dirt and to blow-through with
oil-free nitrogen or other suitable medium before putting the system in service. The system is to be
operationally tested in the presence of the Surveyor under working conditions after installation.
3 Fuel Storage and Refueling Systems for Helicopter Facilities
3.1 Fuels with Flash Point Above 60°C (140°F)

When fixed helicopter fuel storage and pumping systems are provided and the flash point of the fuel is
above 60°C (140°F), closed cup test, the installation is to comply with 4-4-4/1, 4-4-4/3 and 4-4-7/3.3.5.
3.3 Fuels with Flash Point at or Below 60°C (140°F) – Installations on an Open Deck
3.3.1 General
The designated fuel storage and refueling areas are to be suitably isolated from areas which contain a
source of vapor ignition, escape routes and embarkation stations, and are not to be located on landing
areas. The storage and refueling areas are to be permanently marked as an area where smoking and
open flames are not permitted.
3.3.2 Tanks
Fixed fuel storage tanks are to be of metal construction. Mounting, securing arrangements and
electrical bonding of the storage tank and refueling system are to be approved.
3.3.3 Vents and Sounding
Fuel storage tank venting and sounding arrangements are to comply with 4-4-3/9.5, 4-4-3/9.7, 4-4-4/7.5
and 4-4-3/13.
3.3.4 Tank Valves
Fuel storage tank outlet valves are to be provided with a means of remote closure. Means are also
to be provided for remote shutdown of the refueling pumps.
3.3.5 Spill Containment (2015)
To contain spillage and retain fire extinguishing agents, a coaming of at least 150 mm (6 in.) in height
is to be provided. The coaming is to surround the fuel storage area, which consists of the fuel tank,
associated piping and any pumping unit adjacent to the storage tank. Where the pumping unit or
any other unit such as dispenser/coalescer unit is remote from the tank, a separate coaming is to be
provided around each unit.
Drainage is to be provided for the area enclosed by the coaming, complying with the following:
i) The area within the coaming is to be sloped toward the drain line.
ii) Drainage from the area within the coaming is to be led through a valve designed for
selective output (e.g., 3-way valve) either to a holding tank complying with 4-4-7/3.3.2
and 4-4-7/3.3.3 above or directly overboard. No other valves may be fitted in the drain line.
iii) The cross sectional area of the drain line from the fuel tank coaming is to be at least twice
that of the fuel storage tank outlet connection.
Fuel tank coamings not provided with drainage arrangements in accordance with the above are to
be sized to contain the full volume of the fuel storage tank plus 150 mm (6 in.) of foam.
3.3.6 Electrical Equipment (2016)
All electrical equipment installed within 3 meters (10 ft) of either the tank vent outlet or the
pumping/refueling equipment is to be of a certified safe type. Electrical equipment installed may be
any of the types indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be IEC Publication 60079-20-1 group IIA class T3.
3.5 Fuels with Flash Points at or Below 60°C (140°F) – Installation within Enclosed Spaces
3.5.1 Independent Tanks
Fuel storage tanks and their venting and sounding arrangements are to comply with 4-4-7/3.3.2
and 4-4-7/3.3.3. The valving arrangements on the tanks are to comply with 4-4-4/3.7.
3.5.2 Integral Tanks

The venting and sounding arrangements for integral tanks are to comply with 4-4-7/3.3.3. Overflow
and valving arrangements are to comply with 4-4-3/11 and 4-4-4/3.7, respectively. Cofferdams
meeting the requirements of 5C-2-1/5.3 of the Steel Vessel Rules are to be provided to separate
fuel tanks from the spaces mentioned therein.
3.5.3 Access Arrangements
The access to the fuel storage and refueling compartment is to be from the open deck by means of
a trunk, if necessary. The compartment is to be bounded by gas tight bulkheads/decks and there is
to be no direct access from any other compartment to the fuel storage and refueling compartment
or access trunk.
3.5.4 Electrical Equipment (2016)
Electrical equipment installed in the refueling pump room and the space in which an independent
helicopter fuel tank storage is located is to be of a certified safe type. All electrical equipment
installed within three (3) meters (10 ft) of the tank vent outlet is to be of a certified safe type.
Electrical equipment installed may be any of the types indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be IEC
Publication 60079-20-1 group IIA class T3.
3.5.5 Pumps
Fuel pumps for helicopter refueling are to comply with 4-4-7/1 and are to be provided with remote
shut-down.
3.5.6 Piping
Helicopter refueling piping systems are to comply with 4-4-7/3.1.
3.5.7 Bilge/Drainage System
Provision is to be made for drainage of the refueling pump room and cofferdams. A separate bilge
pump, ejector or a bilge suction from a refueling pump may be provided for this purpose. The
arrangements are to be in accordance with 4-4-7/5.1.
3.5.8 Ventilation
Systems for the refueling pump room and the space in which an independent helicopter fuel tank
is located are comply with the below
3.5.8(a) System and Arrangement. Refueling pump rooms are to have a mechanical extraction
ventilating system and ducting, in accordance with 4-4-7/3.5.8(a)i), 4-4-7/3.5.8(a)ii), 4-4-7/3.5.8(a)iii),
and 4-4-7/3.5.8(a)iv) below.
i) Lower Intake. Lower (main) intakes are to be located at the lowest floor level. The number
of air changes through the main intake with the damper in item ii) closed is to be at least
twenty changes per hour based on the gross volume of the pump room.
ii) Emergency Intake. An emergency intake is to be provided at approximately 2 m (6.5 ft)
above the lowest floor with damper capable of being opened or closed from the exposed
main deck and lowest floor level so that it can be used when the lower intakes are not
available. The air changes in that condition is to be at least fifteen changes per hour.
iii) Dampers. Where the ratio of areas of the upper emergency intake and lower main intakes
is such that the required number of respective air changes in items i) and ii) above can be
obtained, the dampers may not be required.
iv) Floor Plate. Floors are to be open grating type to allow the free flow of air. See 5C-1-1/5.25
and 5C-2-1/5.23 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
3.5.8(b) Fan Motors and Fans. Fan motors are to be located outside of the pump room and outside
of the ventilation ducts. Fans are to be of nonsparking construction in accordance with 4-6-3/9.7.
Provision is to be made for immediate shutdown of the fan motors upon release of the fire
extinguishing medium.
5 Liquefied Petroleum Gases
5.1 General
Liquefied petroleum gas may be used for cooking and heating on all craft except passenger craft. Liquefied
petroleum gas systems are to be of the vapor withdrawal type only. Cylinders designed to admit the liquid
phase of the gas into any other part of the system are prohibited. All component parts of the system, except
cylinders, appliances and low pressure tubing, shall be designed to withstand a pressure of 34 bar (35 kgf/cm2,
500 psi) without rupture.
5.3 Storage Cylinders

Cylinders for the storage of liquefied petroleum gases are to be designed and constructed in accordance
with a recognized pressure vessel standard.
5.5 Installation and Testing

Where liquefied petroleum gases are used, the installation and testing is to comply with a recognized standard.
7 Fast Supply Craft

Where it is intended to carry limited amounts of hazardous and noxious liquid substances in bulk on fast
support craft, the arrangement is to comply with Part 5, Chapter 2 of the Rules for Building and Classing
Offshore Support Vessels, as applicable.
9 Liquid Mud Cargo Tanks

Liquid mud cargo tanks are to be provided with vent pipes complying with 4-4-3/9. In order to prevent
overpressure or underpressure in the event of overflow into the vent pipe or clogging of the flame screen in
the case of oil based mud, vents for liquid mud tanks are to also be provided with a suitable burst disc(s)
rated below the mud tank design pressure. Spare burst discs are to be carried on board so that damage burst
disc can be replaced. Suitable means of gauging the mud tanks such as a tank ullage method or level
indicating devices may be fitted in lieu of sounding pipe per 4-4-3/13.3.
PART Chapter 5: Fire Extinguishing Systems
4
CHAPTER 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 All Craft ............................................................................................... 157
1 General ...........................................................................................157
1.1 Classification Requirements ........................................................ 157
1.3 Governmental Authority ............................................................... 157
1.5 Automated Propulsion Machinery Spaces ................................... 157
1.7 Plans and Specifications.............................................................. 157
1.9 Fire Control Plans ........................................................................ 157
1.11 Additional Fixed Fire Fighting Systems........................................ 157
3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants and Hoses ..................................158
3.1 Materials ...................................................................................... 158
3.3 Fire Pumps .................................................................................. 158
3.5 Fire Main ...................................................................................... 158
3.7 Hydrants ...................................................................................... 158
3.9 Hoses .......................................................................................... 159
3.11 Nozzles ........................................................................................ 159
5 Means for Closing of Openings, Stopping of Machinery and Oil
Containment ....................................................................................160
5.1 Ventilation Fans and Openings .................................................... 160
5.3 Other Auxiliaries .......................................................................... 160
5.5 Oil Tank Suction Pipes ................................................................ 160
7 Helicopter Facilities .........................................................................160
7.1 Application ................................................................................... 160
7.3 Provisions for Helicopter Deck ..................................................... 160
7.5 Provisions for Enclosed Helicopter Facilities ............................... 161
7.7 Operation Manual ........................................................................ 161
9 Tanks for Low Flashpoint Fuel for Gas Turbines ............................162
11 Portable Extinguishers ....................................................................162
13 Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm Systems .......................................162
13.1 General ........................................................................................ 162
13.3 Machinery Space ......................................................................... 162
13.3 Accommodation and Service Spaces .......................................... 162
15 Paint and Flammable Liquid Lockers ..............................................162
15.1 Lockers of 4 m2 (43 ft2) or More Floor Area and Lockers with
Access to Accommodation Spaces.............................................. 162
15.3 Lockers of Less Than 4 m2 (43 ft2) Floor Area Having no
Access to Accommodation Spaces.............................................. 163
17 Spaces Containing Dangerous Goods ...........................................163
TABLE 1 Classification of Portable and Semi-portable
Extinguishers......................................................................... 164
TABLE 2 Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers ........................... 164
SECTION 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over .......................... 165
1 Fire Safety Measures ...................................................................... 165
3 Size of Fire Main ............................................................................. 165
5 Main and Emergency Fire Pumps .................................................. 165
5.1 Main Fire Pumps ......................................................................... 165
5.3 Emergency Fire Pumps ............................................................... 166
7 International Shore Connection ...................................................... 167
9 Machinery Spaces .......................................................................... 168
9.1 Fixed Local Application Firefighting Systems .............................. 168
11 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems ................................................... 168
11.1 Gas Smothering .......................................................................... 168
11.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems ............................................................. 170
11.5 Foam ........................................................................................... 170
11.7 Fixed Water Spraying Systems ................................................... 170
13 Fireman’s Outfit ............................................................................... 171
15 Emergency Escape Breathing Devices (EEBDs) ........................... 171
15.1 Accommodation Spaces .............................................................. 171
15.3 Machinery Spaces ....................................................................... 171
17 Portable Fire Extinguishers ............................................................. 171
19 Portable Foam Applicator Units ...................................................... 172
19.1 Specification ................................................................................ 172
19.3 System Performance ................................................................... 172
21 Sample Extraction Smoke Detection Systems ............................... 172
23 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in way of Cargo
Spaces ............................................................................................ 172
23.1 Cargo Craft of 2000 Gross Tons and Over .................................. 172
23.3 Exceptions ................................................................................... 172
23.5 Controls ....................................................................................... 172
25 Ro-Ro Cargo Spaces ...................................................................... 172
25.1 Fire Detection .............................................................................. 172
25.3 Fire Extinguishing Arrangements ................................................ 173
25.5 Portable Fire Extinguishers ......................................................... 173
25.7 Ro-Ro Spaces Carrying Motor Vehicles with Fuel in Their
Tanks........................................................................................... 173
27 Cargo Spaces Carrying Vehicles with Fuel in Their Tanks
(Other Than Ro-Ro Spaces) ........................................................... 173
29 Release of Smoke from Machinery Space ..................................... 173
TABLE 1 Minimum Steel Pipe Wall Thickness for CO2 Medium

Distribution Piping ................................................................. 169
TABLE 2 Minimum Number of Required EEBDs ................................. 171
FIGURE 1 International Shore Connection ............................................ 167
SECTION 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons ............................... 174
1 Fire Pumps ......................................................................................174
1.1 Number of Pumps ........................................................................ 174
1.3 Capacity....................................................................................... 174
3 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems ...................................................174
3.1 Fixed Systems ............................................................................. 174
3.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems ............................................................. 174
5 Portable Extinguishers ....................................................................175
7 Axe ..................................................................................................175
TABLE 1 Fire Pump Minimum Capacity for Craft Less Than

500 Gross Tons.....................................................................174
SECTION 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length ................................. 176
1 General ...........................................................................................176
3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants, and Hoses .................................176
3.1 Number of Pumps ........................................................................ 176
3.3 Pump Capacity and Pressure ...................................................... 176
3.5 Materials ...................................................................................... 176
3.7 Hydrants ...................................................................................... 176
3.9 Hoses and Nozzles ...................................................................... 176
5 Portable Fire Extinguishers .............................................................176
7 Machinery Spaces ..........................................................................177
9 Accommodation and Service Spaces .............................................178
11 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems ...................................................178
TABLE 1 Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers ...........................177
PART Section 1: All Craft
4
SECTION 1 All Craft
1 General
1.1 Classification Requirements

The following are the minimum classification requirements for high-speed cargo craft which do not proceed,
in the course of their voyage, more than 8 hours, at operational speed, from a place of refuge. Cargo craft
which proceed more than 8 hours from a place of refuge are to comply with the applicable requirements of
the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels or the ABS Rules for Building and Classing Steel
Vessels Under 90 Meters (295 Feet) in Length.
1.3 Governmental Authority

Attention is directed to the appropriate governmental authority. In each case, there may be additional
requirements depending on the gross tonnage, length, type and intended service of the craft, as well as other
particulars and details. Consideration will be given to fire extinguishing systems which comply with the
published requirements of the governmental authority of the country in which the craft is to be registered.
1.5 Automated Propulsion Machinery Spaces

Where automatic controls for propulsion machinery spaces are installed and it is intended that the propulsion
machinery spaces are either not continuously manned at sea or only one person is required on watch, the
requirements of Part 4, Chapter 7 are to be met.
1.7 Plans and Specifications

The plans together with supporting data and particulars listed in 4-1-1/7 are to be submitted for review.
1.9 Fire Control Plans

1.9.1 Required Information
Fire control plans are to be general arrangement plans showing for each deck the provision, location,
controls and particulars, as applicable, of fixed fire detection, alarm and extinguishing systems,
portable fire fighting appliances and equipment, controls for shutdowns of the ventilation system,
fuel oil pumps and valves, along with details of the means provided for the closing of openings,
and locations of accesses to critical spaces (such as fire control stations, Category A machinery
spaces, etc.). For craft where structural fire protection is required by the Rules, locations and type
of fire retarding bulkheads are to be specified on the plan.
1.9.2 Plan Location
The fire control plans are to be conspicuously posted in the craft for the guidance of the crew.
1.11 Additional Fixed Fire Fighting Systems

Where a fixed fire extinguishing system not required by Sections 4-5-2, 4-5-3 or 4-5-4 is installed, such
system is to meet the applicable requirements of 4-5-2/11 and is to be submitted for approval.
Chapter 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems
Section 1 All Craft 4-5-1
3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants and Hoses
3.1 Materials
Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used for fire mains unless adequately protected.
In order to be considered not “readily rendered ineffective by heat”, a component is to be certified as having
passed an applicable, recognized fire test, or the material is to have a melting temperature higher than the
test temperature specified in an applicable fire test.
For cargo craft less than 500 gross tons constructed of aluminum and FRP, pipes, valves and fittings which
are required to be "not readily rendered ineffective by heat" may be accepted provided the solidus melting
point of the material is greater than or equal to that of the material forming the bottom shell plating
3.3 Fire Pumps

3.3.1 Number of Pumps
All craft are to have at least two fire pumps. Refer to 4-5-2/5 for craft of 500 gross tons or over, or
4-5-3/1 for craft under 500 gross tons. Refer to 4-5-4/3 for craft under 24 m (79 ft) in length.
3.3.2 Type of Pumps
Sanitary, ballast, bilge or general service pumps may be accepted as fire pumps, provided that they
are not normally used for pumping oil. If the pumps are subject to occasional duty for the transfer
or pumping of fuel oil, changeover arrangements that prevent operation for firefighting when
configured for fuel transfer are to be fitted.
3.3.3 Pressure
Power-driven fire pumps are to have sufficient pressure to produce 12 m (40 ft) jet throw through
any two adjacent hydrants located in accordance with 4-5-1/3.7.1. Also refer to 4-5-2/5.1 or 4-5-3/1.
3.3.4 Relief Valves
In conjunction with all fire pumps, relief valves are to be provided if the pumps are capable of
developing a pressure exceeding the design pressure of the water service pipes, hydrants and hoses.
These valves are to be so placed and adjusted as to prevent excessive pressure in any part of the fire
main system. In general, the relief valve is to be set to relieve at no greater than 1.7 bar (1.75 kgf/cm2,
25 psi) in excess of the pump pressure necessary to maintain the requirements of 4-5-1/3.3.3.
3.5 Fire Main

3.5.1 Size
Refer to 4-5-2/3 for craft of 500 gross tons and over. For craft under 500 gross tons, the diameter of the
fire main and water service pipes is to be sufficient for the effective distribution of the maximum
required discharge from the pump(s). Refer to 4-5-3/1, 4-5-3/Table 1 and 4-5-4/3.3.
3.5.2 Cocks or Valve
A valve is to be fitted to serve each fire hose so that any fire hose may be removed while the fire
pumps are at work.
3.5.3 Cold Weather Protection
Fire main systems are to be provided with drains, circulation loops or other means for cold weather
protection.
3.7 Hydrants
3.7.1 Number and Position of Hydrants
The number and position of the hydrants are to be such that at least two jets of water not emanating
from the same hydrant, one of which is to be from a single length of hose, may reach any part of
the craft normally accessible to the passengers or crew while the craft is being navigated. In
addition, the arrangements are to be such that at least two jets of water can reach any part of any
cargo space when empty.
3.7.2 Materials
Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat are not be used for fire protection systems unless
adequately protected. See 4-5-1/3.1.
3.7.3 Installation
The pipes and hydrants are to be so placed that the fire hoses may be easily coupled to them. In
craft where deck cargo may be carried, the positions of the hydrants are to be such that they are
always readily accessible and the pipes are to be arranged to avoid risk of damage by such cargo.
3.9 Hoses
3.9.1 General
Fire hoses are to be of a type certified by a competent independent testing laboratory as being
constructed of nonperishable material to a recognized standard. The hoses are to be sufficient in
length to project a jet of water to any of the spaces in which they may be required to be used.
Fire hoses are to have a length of at least 10 m (33 ft), but not more than:
• 15 m (50 ft) in machinery spaces;
• 20 m (66 ft) in other spaces and open decks; and
• 25 m (82 ft) for open deck on craft with a maximum breath in excess of 30 m (98 ft)
Each hose is to have a nozzle and the necessary couplings. Fire hoses, together with any necessary
fittings and tools, are to be kept ready for use in conspicuous positions near the hydrants.
3.9.2 Diameter
For craft less than 500 gross tons, hoses are not to have a diameter greater than 38 mm (1.5 in.).
Hoses for craft under 20 m (65 ft) in length may be of a good commercial grade having a diameter
of not less than 16 mm (5/8 in.), and are to be have a minimum test pressure of 10.3 bar (10.5 kgf/cm2,
150 psi) and a minimum burst pressure of 31.0 bar (31.6 kgf/cm2, 450 psi).
3.9.3 Number of Fire Hoses
In craft of 1,000 gross tonnage and upwards, the number of fire hoses to be provided is to be at
least one for each 30 m (100 ft) length of the craft and one spare, but in no case less than five in
all. This number does not include any hoses required in any engine or boiler room.
In craft of less than 1,000 gross tonnage, the number of fire hoses to be provided is to be at least
one for each 30 m (100 ft) length of the craft and one spare. However, the number of hoses is to be
in no case less than three.
Unless one hose and nozzle is provided for each hydrant in the craft, there are to be complete
interchangeability of hose couplings and nozzles.
3.11 Nozzles
3.11.1 Size
Standard nozzle sizes are to be 12 mm (0.5 in.), 16 mm (0.625 in.) and 19 mm (0.75 in.), or as near
thereto as possible. Larger diameter nozzles may be permitted subject to compliance with 4-5-1/3.3.3.
For accommodation and service spaces, a nozzle size greater than 12 mm (0.5 in.) need not be
used. For machinery spaces and exterior locations, the nozzle size is to be such as to obtain the
maximum discharge possible from two jets at the pressure mentioned in 4-5-1/3.3.3 from the
smallest pump; however, a nozzle size greater than 19 mm (0.75 in.) need not be used.
3.11.2 Type
All nozzles are to be of an approved dual-purpose type (i.e., spray and jet type) incorporating a
shut-off. Fire hose nozzles of plastic type material such as polycarbonate may be accepted subject
to review of their capacity and serviceability as marine use fire hose nozzles.
5 Means for Closing of Openings, Stopping of Machinery and Oil

Containment
5.1 Ventilation Fans and Openings

Means are to be provided for stopping ventilation fans serving machinery and cargo spaces, and for closing
all doorways, ventilators and other openings to such spaces. These means are to be capable of being
operated from outside such spaces in case of fire. See 4-6-2/19.1.1.
5.3 Other Auxiliaries

Machinery driving forced- and induced-draft fans, oil-fuel transfer pumps, oil-fuel unit pumps and other
similar fuel pumps, fired equipment such as an incinerator, lubricating oil service pumps, thermal oil circulating
pumps and oil separators (purifiers) are to be fitted with remote shutdowns situated outside of the spaces
concerned so that they may be stopped in the event of a fire arising in the space. This need not apply to
oily water separators. See 4-6-2/19.1.2.
In addition to the remote shutdowns required above, a means to shut down the equipment is to be provided
within the space itself.
5.5 Oil Tank Suction Pipes

Except for small independent tanks having a capacity of less than 500 liters (132 gal.), every oil-suction
pipe from a storage, settling, daily service tank or lube oil tank situated above the double bottom is to be
fitted with a valve capable of being closed in the event of a fire from outside of the space where such tanks
are located. In the special case of deep tanks situated in any shaft or pipe tunnel, control may be effected
by means of an additional valve on the pipe line outside of the tunnel. See 4-4-4/3.7.
Where inadvertent valve closure could result in damage to the running machinery due to lack of lubricating
oil, a valve is to be fitted on the lubricating oil tank, but remote control of the valve from outside of the
space is not required. See 4-4-4/1.1.
7 Helicopter Facilities
7.1 Application
For each helicopter deck on board a craft designated for helicopter operations, fire fighting system and
equipment complying with 4-5-1/7.3.2 and 4-5-1/7.3.3 as applicable, are to be provided.
Helicopter deck (helideck) is a purpose-built helicopter landing area, on a craft including all structure, fire
fighting appliances and other equipment necessary for the safe operation of helicopters, but not those areas
for occasional or emergency helicopter operations (e.g., circle H marked on hatch covers for drop-
off/pickup of pilot). Helicopter facility is a helideck including any refueling and hangar facility.
7.3 Provisions for Helicopter Deck

7.3.1 Hoses and Nozzles
At least two combination solid stream and water spray nozzles and hoses sufficient in length to reach
any part of the helicopter deck are to be provided.
7.3.2 Portable Extinguishers
The helicopter deck is to be protected by at least two dry powder extinguishers of a total capacity
of not less than 45 kg (100 lb).
7.3.3 Back-up System
A back-up fire fighting system is to be provided consisting of CO2 extinguishers of a total capacity
of not less than 18 kg (40 lb) or equivalent, one of these extinguishers being equipped so as to
enable it to reach the engine area of any helicopter using the helicopter deck. The back-up system
is to be located so that the equipment would not be vulnerable to the same damage as the dry
powder extinguisher required by 4-5-1/7.3.2.
7.3.4 Fixed Foam System

A suitable fixed foam fire extinguishing system, consisting of monitors or hose streams or both, is
to be installed to protect the helicopter landing area in all weather conditions in which helicopters
can operate. The system is to be capable of delivering foam solution at a discharge rate in accordance
with the following table for at least five minutes. The operation of the foam system is not to interfere
with the simultaneous operation of the fire main.
Category Helicopter Overall Length, LH Discharge Rate

Liters/min. gpm
H1 LH < 15 m (49 ft) 250 66
H2 15 m (49 ft) ≤ LH < 24 m (79 ft) 500 132
H3 24 m (79 ft) ≤ LH < 35 m (115 ft) 800 211
The foam agent is to meet the performance standards for Level B foam in the International Civil
Aviation Organization’s Airport Services Manual (Part 1 Chapter 8, Paragraph 8.1.5, Table 8-1)
and be suitable for use with sea water.
7.3.5 Fireman’s Outfits
In addition to the fireman’s outfits required in 4-5-2/15, two additional sets of fireman’s outfits are
to be provided and stored near the helicopter deck.
7.3.6 Other Equipment
The following equipment is to be provided near the helicopter deck and is to be stored in a manner
that provides for immediate use and protection from the elements:
• Adjustable wrench
• Fire resistant blanket
• Bolt cutters with arm length of 60 cm (24 in.) or more
• Grab hook or salving hook
• Heavy duty hack saw, complete with six spare blades
• Ladder
• Lifeline of 5 mm (3/16 in.) diameter × 15 m (50 ft) length
• Side cutting pliers
• Set of assorted screw drivers
• Harness knife complete with sheath
7.5 Provisions for Enclosed Helicopter Facilities

Hangars, refueling and maintenance facilities are to be treated as machinery space of category A with
regard to structural fire protection, fixed fire-extinguishing system and fire detection system requirements.
See 4-5-2/11 and 4-5-1/13.
7.7 Operation Manual

Each helicopter facility is to have an operation manual, including a description and a checklist of safety
precautions, procedures and equipment requirements. This manual may be part of the craft’s emergency
response procedures.
9 Tanks for Low Flashpoint Fuel for Gas Turbines

Where fuel with a flash point below 43°C (109°F) is permitted by 4-2-2/3.11 for gas turbines, each space
containing a non-integral tank for the low flash point fuel is to be fitted with a Fixed Fire Detection and
Alarm System complying with 4-5-1/13.1 and a Fixed Fire Extinguishing System complying with 4-5-2/11.
11 Portable Extinguishers
Portable extinguishers are to be provided in the quantities and locations indicated in 4-5-1/Table 1 and
4-5-1/Table 2.
13 Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
13.1 General
Where required, Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm Systems are to comply with Regulations 7.7.1 and 7.7.2
of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft and Chapter 9 of the International Code for Fire
Safety Systems.
13.3 Machinery Space

A Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm System complying with 4-5-1/13.1 are to be provided for any machinery
space containing an internal combustion engine, gas turbine, oil filling station, or switchboards of aggregate
capacity exceeding 750 kW (1000 hp)
13.3 Accommodation and Service Spaces

A Fixed Fire Detection and Alarm System complying with 4-5-1/13.1 is to be provided for all accommodation
and service spaces
15 Paint and Flammable Liquid Lockers

Paint and flammable liquid lockers or any similar service spaces used for the storage of flammable liquids
(such as solvents, adhesives, lubricants etc.) are to be protected by a fire extinguishing arrangement enabling
the crew to extinguish a fire without entering the space. Unless required or permitted otherwise by the flag
Administration, one of the following systems is to be provided:
15.1 Lockers of 4 m2 (43 ft2) or More Floor Area and Lockers with Access to Accommodation
Spaces
Paint lockers and flammable liquid lockers of floor area 4 m2 (43 ft2) or more and also such lockers of any
floor area with access to accommodation spaces are to be provided with one of the fixed fire extinguishing
systems specified below:
i) CO2 system, designed for 40 % of the gross volume of the space.
ii) Dry powder system, designed for at least 0.5 kg/m3 (0.03 lb/ft3).
iii) Water spraying system, designed for 5 liters/m2/minute (0.12 gpm/ft2). The water spraying system
may be connected to the craft’s fire main system, in which case, the fire pump capacity is to be
sufficient for simultaneous operation of the fire main system, as required in 4-5-2/5.1, and the water
spray system. Precautions are to be taken to prevent the nozzles from being clogged by impurities
in the water or corrosion of piping, nozzles, valves and pump.
iv) Systems or arrangements other than those referenced above may be also considered, provided they
are not less effective.
15.3 Lockers of Less Than 4 m2 (43 ft2) Floor Area Having no Access to Accommodation
Spaces
For paint lockers and flammable liquid lockers of floor area less than 4 m2 (43 ft2) having no access to
accommodation spaces, portable fire extinguisher(s) sized in accordance with 4-5-1/11.1i) and which can
be discharged through a port in the boundary of the lockers may be accepted. The required portable fire
extinguishers are to be stowed adjacent to the port. Alternatively, a port or hose connection may be
provided for this purpose to facilitate the use of water from the fire main.
17 Spaces Containing Dangerous Goods

Craft intending to carry dangerous goods are to comply with the applicable requirements of Chapter 7 Part
D of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft.
TABLE 1
Classification of Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers
Fire extinguishers are designated by type as follows: A, for fires in combustible materials such as wood; B, for fires in
flammable liquids and greases; C, for fires in electrical equipment.
Fire extinguishers are designated by size where I is the smallest. Sizes I and II are hand portable extinguishers and sizes III
and V are semi-portable extinguishers.
Classification Water Foam Carbon Dioxide Dry Chemical

Type Size liters (US gallons) liters (US gallons) kg (lb) kg (lb)
A II 9 (2.5) 9 (2.5) — 5 (11) (1)
B II — 9 (2.5) 5 (11) 5 (11)
B III — 45 (12) 15.8 (35) 9 (20)
B V — 152 (40) 45 (100) (2) 22.5 (50) (2)
C I — — 1.8 (4) 0.9 (2)
C II — — 5 (11) 5 (11)
Notes:
1 Must be specifically approved as Type A, B, C extinguisher
2 For outside use, double the amount to be carried.
TABLE 2
Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers
Space Classification Quantity and Location (5)
Safety Areas
Communicating corridors A-II 1 in each main corridor not more than 46 m (150 ft) apart. (May be located in
stairways.)
Pilothouse C-II 2 in vicinity of exit. See Notes 4 and 6.
Radio room C-II 1 in vicinity of exit. See Note 4.
Accommodations
Sleeping Accommodations A-II 1 in each sleeping accommodation space. (Where occupied by more than four
persons.)
Service Spaces
Galleys B-II or C-II 1 for each 230 m2 (2500 ft2) or fraction thereof for hazards involved.
Storerooms A-II 1 for each 230 m2 (2500 ft2) or fraction thereof located in vicinity of exits,
either inside or outside of spaces. See Note 4.
Workshops A-II 1 outside the space in vicinity of exit. See Note 4.
Machinery Spaces
Internal combustion or gas B-II 1 for each 746 kW (1000 hp), but not less than 2 nor more than 6. See Note 1.
turbine engines and B-III 1 required. See Note 3.
Electric motors or generators C-II 1 for each motor or generator unit. See Note 2.
of the open type
Notes:
1 When installation is on weather deck or open to atmosphere at all times, one B-II for every three engines is allowable.
2 Small electrical appliances, such as fans, etc., are not to be counted or used as basis for determining number of
extinguishers required.
3 Not required on craft of less than 500 gross tons.
4 Vicinity is intended to mean within 1 m (3 ft).
5 For craft of 1000 gross tons and above, at least five extinguishers are to be provided for accommodation spaces,
service spaces, spaces where the craft’s radio, main navigation equipment or emergency source of power is
located, and locations where the fire recording or fire control equipment is located.
6 For cargo ships less than 500 gross tons, “C-I” portable extinguishers may be used.
PART Section 2: Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over
4
SECTION 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over
1 Fire Safety Measures

The applicable requirements of Section 3-4-1 are to be complied with.
3 Size of Fire Main

The diameter of the fire main and water service pipes is to be sufficient for the effective distribution of the
maximum required discharge from two fire pumps operating simultaneously, except that the diameter need
only be sufficient for the discharge of 140 m3/hr (616 gpm).
5 Main and Emergency Fire Pumps
5.1 Main Fire Pumps

5.1.1 Number of Pumps
For craft of 1000 gross tons and above, the pumps are to be independently power-driven. For craft
less than 1000 gross tons, only one of the pumps need be independently power-driven and one of
the pumps may be attached to the propulsion unit.
5.1.2 Total Pump Capacity
The fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.1.1 are to be capable of delivering for firefighting purposes a
quantity of water, at the appropriate pressure prescribed, not less than four-thirds of the quantity
required under 4-4-3/3.3 to be dealt with by each of the independent bilge pumps when employed
on bilge pumping, using in all cases L = length of craft, as defined in 3-1-1/3, except that the total
required capacity of the fire pumps need not exceed 180 m3/hr (792 gpm).
5.1.3 Individual Pump Capacity
Each of the fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.1.1 is to have a capacity of not less than 40% of the
total required capacity, but not less than 25 m3/hr (110 gpm), and in any event is to be capable of
delivering at least the two required jets of water. These pumps are to be capable of supplying the
water under the required conditions. Where more pumps than required are installed, their capacity
will be subject to special consideration.
5.1.4 Pressure
For craft 1000 gross tons and over with the two power-driven pumps simultaneously delivering
through the nozzles specified in 4-5-1/3.11 the quantity of water specified in 4-5-1/3.5.1 through
any adjacent hydrants, a pressure of 2.5 bar (2.6 kgf/cm2, 37 psi) is to be maintained at all hydrants.
For craft less than 1000 gross tons, the power-driven fire pumps are to have sufficient pressure to
produce 12 m (40 ft) jet throw through any two adjacent hydrants located in accordance with
4-5-1/3.5.1.
Section 2 Requirements for Craft 500 Gross Tons and Over 4-5-2
5.1.5 Arrangement
Unless an emergency fire pump complying with 4-5-2/5.3 is provided, the two main fire pumps,
including their power source, fuel supply, electric cables, and lighting and ventilation for the spaces
in which they are located, are to be in separate compartments so that a fire in any one compartment
will not render both main pumps inoperable. Only one common boundary is allowed between the
compartments, in which case, the single common boundary is to be at least to A-0 standard.
No direct access is allowed between the compartments except that where this is impracticable, an
access meeting the requirements in 4-5-2/5.1.6 may be considered.
5.1.6 Alternative Arrangement
Where it is impracticable to do otherwise, a direct access between the compartments containing
the main fire pumps may be considered, provided:
i) A watertight door capable of being operated locally from both sides of the bulkhead, and
from a safe and accessible location outside of these spaces is provided. The means for the
latter operation is expected to be available in the event of fire in these spaces; or
ii) An air lock consisting of two gastight steel doors. The doors are to be self-closing without
any hold back arrangements.
iii) In addition to the arrangements specified in 4-5-2/5.1.6i) or 4-5-2/5.1.6ii) above, a second
protected means of access is to be provided to the space containing the fire pumps.
5.1.7 Isolation
Isolating valves and other arrangements, as necessary, are to be provided so that if a fire pump and
its associated piping within its compartment are rendered inoperable, the fire main can be pressurized
with a fire pump located in another compartment.
5.3 Emergency Fire Pumps

5.3.1 When Required
If a fire in any one compartment could put all main pumps out of action (see 4-5-2/5.1.2), an
independently power-driven and self-priming emergency fire pump complying with this paragraph
is to be provided.
5.3.2 Arrangement
An emergency fire pump system, including power source, fuel supply, electric cables, and lighting,
as well as lighting and ventilation for the emergency fire pump space, is to be in a separate
compartment than the main fire pumps so that a fire in any one compartment will not render both
the main and the emergency fire pumps inoperable.
No direct access is permitted between the main machinery space and the spaces containing the
emergency fire pump and its source of power. Where this is impracticable, access between the space
containing the emergency fire pump and the main machinery space, in accordance with 4-5-2/5.1.6,
may be considered
The space containing the emergency fire pump is not to be contiguous to the boundaries of machinery
spaces of Category A or the spaces containing the main fire pumps. Where this is impracticable,
the common bulkhead between the two spaces is to be constructed to A-60 standard. The insulation
is to extend at least 450 mm (18 in.) outside of the area of the joint bulkheads and decks.
5.3.3 Capacity
The emergency fire pump is to be capable of supplying at least two jets of water required by
4-5-1/3.5.1, using the available hydrants, hoses and nozzles, and is to have a capacity of at least 40%
of the total capacity of the fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.1.2 or 25 m3/hr (110 gpm), whichever is
greater.
When the pump is delivering the quantity of water, as above, the pressure at the hydrant is to be
not less than the pressure given in 4-5-2/5.1.4.
In addition, the emergency fire pump is also to be capable of simultaneously supplying the amount
of water needed for any fixed extinguishing system protecting the space containing the main pumps.
5.3.4 Starting
Internal combustion engines larger than 15 kW (20 hp) are to be provided with power starting systems
having a capacity sufficient for at least six starts within 30 minutes, including at least two within
the first ten minutes. For engines of 15 kW (20 hp) and smaller, manual means of starting is sufficient.
Any internal combustion engine driving an emergency fire pump is to be capable of readily being
started in its cold condition down to a temperature of 0°C (32°F). If this is impracticable or if
lower temperatures are likely to be encountered, consideration is to be given to the provision and
maintenance of heating arrangements.
5.3.5 Fuel Supply
Any service fuel tank is to contain sufficient fuel to enable the pump to run on full load for at least
three hours and sufficient reserves of fuel are to be available outside of the main machinery space
to enable the pump to be run on full load for an additional 15 hours.
5.3.6 Suction
The total suction head and the net positive suction head of the pump is to be such that the
requirements of 4-5-2/5.3.3 and 4-5-2/5.1.4 will be satisfied under all conditions of list, trim, roll
and pitch likely to be encountered in service. The sea valve is to be operable from a position near
the pump or locked in the open position (provided possible flooding can be detected).
7 International Shore Connection

At least one international shore connection, as shown in 4-5-2/Figure 1, is to be provided and kept aboard
the craft with gasket, bolts and eight washers. Facilities are to be available enabling such a connection to
be used on either side of the craft.
FIGURE 1
International Shore Connection
Coupling permanently attached that will
fit the vessel's hydrants and hose.
14.5 mm (9/16 in.)min.
Flat Face
64 mm
(21/2 in.)
132 mm
(51/4 in.)
178 mm
(7 in.)
19 mm
(3/4 in.)
Bolts: 4, each of 16 mm ( 5/8 in.) diameter, 50 mm (2 in.) in length

Flange Surface: Flat face
Material: Any suited for 10 bar (10.5 kgf/cm 2, 150 psi)
Gasket: Any suited for 10 bar (10.5 kgf/cm 2, 150 psi) service
9 Machinery Spaces
Category A machinery spaces are to be protected by a fixed fire extinguishing system complying with 4-5-2/11.
9.1 Fixed Local Application Firefighting Systems (1 July 2015)

For cargo craft of 2000 gross tonnage and above, the machinery spaces of category A above 500 m3
(17,657 ft3) in volume, in addition to the fixed fire extinguishing system required in 4-5-2/11, are to be
protected by an approved type of fixed water-based or equivalent local application firefighting system
complying with the provisions of the IMO Guidelines for the Approval of Fixed Water-based Local
Application Firefighting System for Use in Category A Machinery Spaces, MSC/Circ. 1387. In the case of
periodically unattended machinery spaces, the fire fighting system is to have both automatic and manual
release capabilities. In case of continuously manned machinery spaces, the fire fighting system is only
required to have a manual release capability. The fixed local fire fighting systems are to protect areas such
as the following without the necessity of engine shutdown, personnel evacuation or sealing the spaces:
i) The fire hazard portion of internal combustion machinery;
ii) The fire hazard portions of incinerators; and
ii) Boiler front.
iii) Purifiers for heated fuel oil. See 4-4-4/1.9
Activation of any local application system shall give a visual and distinct audible alarm in the protected
space and at continuously manned stations. The alarm is to indicate the specific system activated. The
system alarm requirements described within this paragraph are in addition to, and not a substitute for, the
detection and fire alarm system required elsewhere in Section 4-5-2 and Section 4-5-3. A bridge alarm is to
be provided with a visual notification when the system has been deactivated or placed in manual mode.
11 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems
11.1 Gas Smothering

11.1.1 Storage (2013)
Where the gas smothering medium is stored outside of the protected space, the storeroom is to be
situated in a safe and readily accessible position and is to be effectively ventilated by a ventilation
system independent of all other spaces.
Spaces for storage of cylinders or tanks for extinguishing gas are not to be used for other purposes.
These spaces are not to be located forward of the forward collision bulkhead, when fitted. Access
to these spaces is to be possible from the open deck. Spaces situated below the deck are to be
located no more than one deck below the open deck.
Spaces where entrance from the open deck is not provided or which are located below deck are to
be fitted with mechanical ventilation. The exhaust duct (suction) is to be lead to the bottom of the
space. Such spaces are to be ventilated with at least six air changes per hour.
Fire-extinguishing media protecting the cargo holds (see 4-5-2/25) may be stored in a room located
forward of the cargo holds, but aft of the collision bulkhead, provided that both the local manual
release mechanism and remote control(s) for the release of the media are fitted, and the latter is of
robust construction or so protected as to remain operable in case of fire in the protected spaces.
The remote controls are to be placed in the accommodation area in order to facilitate their ready
accessibility by the crew. The capability to release different quantities of fire-extinguishing media
into different cargo holds so protected is to be included in the remote release arrangement.
11.1.2 Design (2015)
Containers and associated pressure components are to be designed based upon an ambient temperature
of 55°C (131°F).
For CO2 fire extinguishing systems, the wall thickness of steel piping is to be suitable for the
pressure and not less than the thickness identified in 4-5-2/Table 1. Column A is for piping from
storage containers to distribution station, and column B is for piping from distribution station to
nozzles. For other fixed gas fire extinguishing systems, calculations showing compliance with
4-4-2/5.9 are to be submitted for approval.
Where the fire-extinguishing medium is used as the power source for the pre-discharge alarm, the
piping to the alarm is to comply with Column B of 4-5-2/Table 1.
The relief valve of a CO2 fire extinguishing system is to discharge outside of the CO2 container
storage compartment.
Gray cast iron piping components are not to be used for fixed gas fire extinguishing systems.
Threaded joints in CO2 systems are to be allowed only inside protected spaces and in CO2 cylinder
rooms.
TABLE 1
Minimum Steel Pipe Wall Thickness for CO2
Medium Distribution Piping (2013)
Nominal OD A B Nominal OD A B
size, mm mm mm mm size, in. in. in. in.
15 21.3 2.8 2.6 1/2 0.840 0.110 0.102
20 26.9 2.8 2.6 3/4 1.050 0.110 0.102
25 33.7 4.0 3.2 1 1.315 0.157 0.126
32 42.4 4.0 3.2 11/4 1.660 0.157 0.126
40 48.3 4.0 3.2 11/2 1.9 0.157 0.126
50 60.3 4.5 3.6 2 2.375 0.177 0.142
65 76.1 5.0 3.6 21/2 2.875 0.197 0.142
80 88.9 5.5 4.0 3 3.5 0.220 0.157
90 101.6 6.3 4.0 31/2 4.0 0.248 0.157
100 114.3 7.1 4.5 4 4.5 0.28 0.177
125 139.7 8.0 5.0 5 5.563 0.315 0.197
150 168.3 8.8 5.6 6 6.625 0.346 0.22
Notes:
1 The above minimum thicknesses are derived from those thicknesses available
in ISO 4200 Series 1 (OD), JIS (N.P.S.), or ASTM (N.P.S.). Diameter and
thickness according to other recognized standards will be accepted.
2 For threaded pipes, where approved, the thickness is to be measured to the
bottom of the thread.
3 The internal surface of pipes outside of the engine room is to be galvanized.
4 For larger diameters the minimum wall thickness will be subject to special
consideration by ABS.
5 In general, the minimum thickness is the nominal wall thickness and no
allowance need be made for negative tolerance or reduction in thickness due
to bending.
11.1.3 Alarm
(2013) Means are to be provided for automatically giving audible and visual warning of the release of
fire extinguishing gas into any space to which personnel normally have access. The alarm is to
operate for at least a 20 second period before the gas is released. Alarms may be pneumatically
(by the extinguishing medium or by air) or electrically operated.
11.1.3(a) Electric. If electrically operated, the alarms are to be supplied with power from the
main and an emergency source of electrical power.
11.1.3(b) Pneumatic. If pneumatically operated by air, the air supply is to be dry and clean and
the supply reservoir is to be automatically kept charged at all times and is to be fitted with a low
pressure alarm. The air supply may be taken from the starting air receivers. Any stop valve fitted
in the air supply line is to be locked or sealed in the open position. Any electrical components
associated with the pneumatic system are to be powered from the main and an emergency source
of electrical power.
11.1.3(c) Uninterruptible Power Supply (2013). For fire extinguishing systems that protect the
machinery space containing the main source of power, instead of the power supply arrangements
required above for electrically operated alarms and electrical components associated with pneumatic
alarms, an uninterruptible power supply which is supplied with power from the emergency
switchboard is to be provided.
11.1.4 Controls
Except as otherwise permitted herein, two independent manual control arrangements are to be
provided, one of them being positioned at the storage location and the other in a readily accessible
position outside the protected space.
11.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems (2013)

In addition to the applicable requirements of 4-7-3/3.3 of the Steel Vessel Rules, Fixed Carbon Dioxide
Fire Extinguishing System is to be in accordance with the requirements of 7.7.3.3.2-7.7.3.3.16 and 7.7.3.4
of the International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft and Chapter 5 of the International Code for Fire
Safety Systems
11.5 Foam
11.5.1 Fixed High Expansion Foam Systems
In addition to the applicable requirements of the Rules, fixed, high expansion foam systems are to be in
accordance with Chapter 6.2.1 and Chapter 6.2.2 of the International Code for Fire Safety Systems.
Fixed foam fire-extinguishing systems using inside air are to be designed, constructed and tested
in accordance with the requirements identified in MSC.1/Circ. 1271, Guidelines for the Approval
of High-Expansion Foam Systems Using Inside Air for the Protection of Machinery Spaces and
Cargo Pump-Rooms.
Foam concentrates are to be of an approved type.*
*Note: Reference is made to the International Maritime Organization MSC/Circular 670 “Guidelines for the
Performance and Testing Criteria, and Surveys of High-Expansion Foam Concentrates for Fixed Fire-
Extinguishing Systems.”
11.5.2 Fixed Low Expansion Foam Systems

Low expansion foam systems may be fitted in addition to the required fixed fire extinguishing system.
In addition to the applicable requirements of the Rules, fixed low expansion foam systems are to
be in accordance with Chapter 6.2.1 and Chapter 6.2.3 of the International Code for Fire Safety
Systems. Foam concentrates are to be of an approved type.**
**Note: Reference is made to the International Maritime Organization MSC/Circular 582 “Guidelines for the
Performance and Testing Criteria, and Surveys of Low-Expansion Foam Concentrates for Fixed Fire-
Extinguishing Systems.”
11.7 Fixed Water Spraying Systems

In addition to the requirements of the Rules, fixed water spraying systems are to be in accordance with
Chapter 7 of the International Code for Fire Safety Systems.
13 Fireman’s Outfit
At least two complete fireman’s outfits are to be carried onboard the craft. Each outfit is to consist of an
approved breathing apparatus, a lifeline, a safety lamp, an axe, non-conducting boots and gloves, a rigid
helmet and protective clothing. At least one spare charge is to be carried for each self-contained breathing
apparatus. The fireman’s outfits and equipment are to be stored so as to be easily accessible and ready for use
and are to be stored in widely separate positions.
15 Emergency Escape Breathing Devices (EEBDs)
15.1 Accommodation Spaces

All ships are to carry at least two emergency escape breathing devices and one spare device within
accommodation spaces.
15.3 Machinery Spaces

On all craft, within the machinery spaces, emergency escape breathing devices are to be situated ready for
use at easily visible places, which can be reached quickly and easily at any time in the event of fire. The
location of emergency escape breathing devices is to take into account the layout of the machinery space
and the number of persons normally working in the spaces. (See the Guidelines for the performance,
location, use and care of emergency escape breathing devices, MSC/Circ. 849 and 1081). The number and
locations of EEBDs are to be indicated in the fire control plan required in 4-5-1/1.9.
A summary of the MSC/Circ. 1081 requirements are shown in 4-5-2/Table 2. This applies to machinery
spaces where crew are normally employed or may be present on a routine basis.
TABLE 2
Minimum Number of Required EEBDs
A. In machinery spaces for category A containing internal combustion machinery used for main
propulsion (1):
a) One (1) EEBD in the engine control room, if located within the machinery space
b) One (1) EEBD in workshop areas. If there is, however, a direct access to an escape way from the
workshop, an EEBD is not required; and
c) One (1) EEBD on each deck or platform level near the escape ladder constituting the second means of
escape from the machinery space (the other means being an enclosed escape trunk or watertight door at
the lower level of the space).
B. In machinery spaces of category A other than those containing internal combustion machinery used
for main propulsion,
One (1) EEBD should, as a minimum, be provided on each deck or platform level near the escape ladder
constituting the second means of escape from the space (the other means being an enclosed escape trunk or
watertight door at the lower level of the space).
C. In other machinery spaces
The number and location of EEBDs are to be determined by the Flag Administration.
Note:
1 Alternatively, a different number or location may be determined by the Flag Administration
taking into consideration the layout and dimensions or the normal manning of the space.
17 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Spare charges are to be provided for 100% of the first ten (10) extinguishers and 50% of the remaining fire
extinguishers capable of being recharged on board. Not more than sixty (60) total spare charges are required.
Instructions for recharging are to be carried on board.
For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, additional portable fire extinguishers of the
same quantity, type, capacity and number, as determined above, are to be provided in lieu of spare charges.
19 Portable Foam Applicator Units

Each Category A machinery space is to be provided with at least one portable foam applicator unit.
19.1 Specification
A portable foam applicator unit is to consist of a foam nozzle/branch pipe, either of a self-inducing type or
in combination with a separate inductor, capable of being connected to the fire main by a fire hose, together
with a portable tank containing at least 20 l (5.3 US gal.) of foam concentrate and at least one spare tank of
foam concentrate of the same capacity.
19.3 System Performance

i) The nozzle/branch pipe and inductor is to be capable of producing effective foam suitable for
extinguishing an oil fire, at a foam solution flow rate of at least 200 l/min (52.8 gpm) at the nominal
pressure in the fire main.
ii) The foam concentrate shall be approved by ABS based on guidelines in the Guidelines for the
Performance and Testing Criteria and Surveys of Low-expansion Foam Concentrates for Fixed
Fire-extinguishing Systems (MSC/Circ.582/Corr.1).
iii) The values of the foam expansion and drainage time of the foam produced by the portable foam
applicator unit is not to differ more than ±10% of that determined in 4-5-2/19.3ii).
iv) The portable foam applicator unit is to be designed to withstand clogging, ambient temperature
changes, vibration, humidity, shock, impact and corrosion normally encountered on ships.
21 Sample Extraction Smoke Detection Systems

Any required fixed sample extraction smoke detection system is to meet the requirements in Chapter 10 of
the International Code for Fire Safety Systems.
23 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in way of Cargo Spaces
23.1 Cargo Craft of 2000 Gross Tons and Over

Except for cargo spaces covered by 4-5-2/25 and 4-5-2/27, cargo spaces of cargo craft of 2000 gross tons and
above are to be provided with approved fixed fire extinguishing systems.
23.3 Exceptions
A fixed system need not be fitted in the case of cargo holds fitted with steel hatch covers, and where all
ventilators and other openings leading to the holds can be effectively closed, and the craft is constructed
and intended solely for carrying ore, coal, grain, unseasoned timber or noncombustible cargoes.
23.5 Controls
As an alternative to providing the controls required by 4-5-2/11.1.4, a single manual means may be provided
at the storage location.
25 Ro-Ro Cargo Spaces
25.1 Fire Detection

An approved automatic fire detection and fire alarm system complying with 4-5-1/13 and the following is
to be provided. Manual call points are to be provided to activate the fire alarm from the navigation bridge
and the passageways having entrances to the ro-ro spaces. The fire alarm indicator/control panel is to be
located on the bridge or at the fire control station, if provided. When the indicator/control panel is located
at the fire control station, an additional alarm is to be provided on the navigation bridge.
25.3 Fire Extinguishing Arrangements

Ro-ro cargo spaces capable of being sealed are to be fitted with an approved fixed gas fire extinguishing
system. If a carbon dioxide system is fitted, the quantity of gas available is to be at least sufficient to give a
minimum volume of free gas equal to 45% of the gross volume of the largest such cargo space which is
capable of being sealed, and the arrangements are to be such as to ensure that at least two thirds of the gas
required for the relevant spaces is introduced within 10 minutes.
In lieu of the above, a fixed high expansion foam system or water spray system may be fitted subject to
special consideration. Ro-ro spaces not capable of being sealed are to be fitted with a fixed pressure water-
spraying system. The water-spraying system, drainage and pumping arrangements will be subject to special
consideration.
As an alternative to providing the controls required by 4-5-2/11.1.4, a single manual means may be provided
at the storage location.
25.5 Portable Fire Extinguishers

At least one approved portable extinguisher is to be located at each cargo space access.
25.7 Ro-Ro Spaces Carrying Motor Vehicles with Fuel in Their Tanks
25.7.1
Each ro-ro cargo space intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their
own propulsion is to meet the requirements of 4-6-6/1.5.
25.7.2
Gravity drainage systems are not to be led to machinery spaces or other spaces where sources of
ignition are present.
25.7.3
In addition, each space is to be provided with at least three water fog applicators and one portable
foam applicator unit complying with the provisions of 4-5-2/19, provided that at least two such
units are available on the craft for use in such ro-ro cargo spaces.
25.7.4
Portable fire extinguishers suitable for fighting oil fires are to be provided at each vehicle deck
level in all spaces where vehicles are carried. Extinguishers are to be located not more than 20 m
(65 ft) apart on both sides of the craft. Portable extinguishers required under 4-5-2/25.5 may be
credited in meeting this requirement.
27 Cargo Spaces Carrying Vehicles with Fuel in Their Tanks (Other

Than Ro-Ro Spaces)
Cargo spaces, other than ro-ro spaces, intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks
for their own propulsion are to comply with 4-5-2/25 with the following exceptions:
i) A sample extraction smoke detection system complying with the provisions of 4-5-2/21 may be
permitted in lieu of 4-5-2/25.1, and
ii) The provisions of 4-5-2/25.7.3 and 4-5-2/25.7.4 may be omitted
29 Release of Smoke from Machinery Space

Suitable arrangements are to be made to permit the release of smoke, in the event of fire, from the machinery
space of Category A. The normal ventilation may be acceptable for this purpose. The means of control is to
be provided for permitting the release of smoke and such control is to be located outside the space concerned
so that they will not be rendered inaccessible in the event of fire in the space they serve. See also 4-6-3/5.17.1.
PART Section 3: Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons
4
SECTION 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons
1 Fire Pumps
1.1 Number of Pumps

All craft are to have at least two fire pumps. Only one of the pumps need be independently power-driven,
and one of the pumps may be attached to the propulsion unit.
1.3 Capacity
The capacity of each power-driven fire pump is to be in accordance with the 4-5-3/Table 1. Hand pumps,
where permitted, are to have a minimum capacity of 1.1 m3/hr (5 gpm).
TABLE 1
Fire Pump Minimum Capacity for Craft Less Than 500 Gross Tons
Craft Length Minimum Capacity
24 m (79 ft) or greater but less than 30.5 m (100 ft) 11.0 m3/hr (50 gpm)
30.5 m (100 ft) or greater but less than 61 m (200 ft) 14.3 m3/hr (66.6 gpm)
61 m (200 ft) or greater Capacity to be in accordance with 4-5-2/5.1
3.1 Fixed Systems

For all craft, fixed fire extinguishing systems are to be fitted in the machinery spaces when propulsion and
auxiliary engines with a total aggregate power of 750 kW (1000 bhp) or greater are installed (see 4-1-1/13.1)
and in any machinery space in which an oil fuel unit for heated fuel oil is installed, regardless of the total
aggregate power. Also see 4-5-2/11.
3.3 Carbon Dioxide Systems

Where a fixed carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system is installed, the system is to comply with the
requirements of 4-5-2/11.1 and 4-5-2/11.3, except that storage arrangements may be in accordance with the
following.
3.3.1 Storage
Generally, the cylinders are to be located outside of the protected space in a room which is
situated in a safe and readily accessible location. The access doors to the storage space are to open
outwards. The storage room is to be gastight and effectively ventilated. The ventilation system is
to be independent of the protected space. Any entrance to the storage room is to be independent of
the protected space, except that where this is impracticable due to space limitations, the following
requirements may be considered:
Section 3 Requirements for Craft Under 500 Gross Tons 4-5-3
i) The door between the storage location and the protected space is to be self-closing with
no hold-back arrangements.
ii) The space where cylinders are stored is to be adequately ventilated by a system which is
independent of the protected space.
iii) Means are to be provided to prevent unauthorized release of gas, such as containment
behind a break glass.
iv) There is to be provision to vent the bottles to the atmosphere in order to prevent a hazard
to personnel occupying the storage area.
v) An additional entrance to the storage location, independent of the protected space, is provided.
5 Portable Extinguishers
Machinery spaces are to be provided with portable fire extinguishers, in accordance with the applicable
requirements in 4-5-1/Table 2.
7 Axe
One fire axe is to be provided on each craft.
PART Section 4: Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length
4
CHAPTER 5 Fire Safety Systems
SECTION 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length
1 General
Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in length are to comply with the following and the requirements of 4-5-1/1,
4-5-1/9, and 4-5-1/15.
3 Fire Pumps, Fire Main, Hydrants, and Hoses
3.1 Number of Pumps

All craft are to have at least two fire pumps. Only one of the pumps need be independently power-driven,
and one of the pumps may be attached to the propulsion unit. For craft less than 24 m (79 ft) in length, one
power-driven pump, which may be an attached unit, and one hand operated fire pump may be provided.
3.3 Pump Capacity and Pressure

Power driven pumps are to have a capacity of at least 5.5 m3/hr (25 gpm). Hand pumps, where permitted
are to have a minimum capacity of at least 1.1 m3/hr (5 gpm). The pumps are to have sufficient pressure
such that they are capable of directing an effective stream of water to any part of the craft through any
single hydrant.
3.5 Materials
Piping for the fire main is to meet the requirements of Section 4-4-2/5.
3.7 Hydrants
The number and position of the hydrants are to be such that at least one jet of water may reach any part of
the craft with a single hose.
3.9 Hoses and Nozzles

Hoses may be of a good commercial grade having a diameter of not less than 16 mm (5/8 in.) and are to
have a minimum test pressure of 10.3 bar (10.5 kgf/cm2 150 psi) and a minimum burst pressure of 31.0 bar
(31.6 kgf/cm2, 450 psi).
One fire hose with the couplings and nozzle is to be provided for each hydrant and for each portable hand
pump. Additionally, at least one spare hose is to be kept onboard.
Nozzles are to be the dual-purpose type (with spray and jet capability) and may be of commercial grade
with a rating at least equal to the hose.
5 Portable Fire Extinguishers

Portable extinguishers are to be provided in the quantities and locations indicated in 4-5-4/Table 1. See
4-5-1/Table 2 for classification.
Section 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-5-4
TABLE 1
Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers
Space Classification Quantity and Location
Safety Areas
Communicating corridors A-II 1 in each main corridor
(May be located in stairways)
Pilothouse C-II 1 in vicinity of exit. See Note 3.
Accommodations
Sleeping accommodations A-II 1 in each slopping accommodation space. (Where occupied by
more than 4 persons)
Service Spaces
Galley B-II or C-II 1 for each galley
Storerooms A-II 1 for each located in vicinity of exits, either inside or outside of
spaces. See Note 3.
Workshops A-II 1 outside the space in vicinity of exit. See Note 3.
Machinery Spaces/Machinery Compartments
Internal combustion or gas turbine B-II 1 for each 746 kW (1000 hp), but not less than 2 nor more than
engines in an engine room (5) 6. See Note 1 and Note 4
Internal combustion or gas turbine B-II 1 for each engine propulsion engine, but not less than 2
engines in an engine compartment (6)
Outboard engines B-II 1 required
Electric motors or generators of the C-II 1 for each motor generator unit. See Note 2.
open type
Notes
1 When installation is on weather deck or open to atmosphere at all times, one B-II for every three engines is allowable.
2 Small electrical appliances, such as fans, etc., are not to be counted or used as bases for determining number of
extinguishers required.
3 Vicinity is intended to mean within 1 m (3 ft).
4 For engine rooms, at least one fire extinguisher is to be located outside the machinery spaces in vicinity of the entrance
to the space.
5 An engine room is defined as an enclosed space which contains the propulsion or generating machinery fitted
with a door and having sufficient size so that a person can safely enter the space with all equipment in operation.
6 An engine compartment is defined as an enclosed space which contains the propulsion or generating machinery
of sufficient size for the equipment only and is typically not accessed while the craft is in operation.
7 Machinery Spaces
Engine Rooms (as defined in 4-5-4/Table 1, Note 5) and Engine Compartments (as defined in 4-5-4/Table
1, Note 6), with propulsion and auxiliary engines having a total aggregate power of 750 kW (1000 bhp) or
greater are installed are to be fitted with a fixed fire extinguishing system complying with 4-5-2/11.
Automatic release may be approved for small, unattended engine rooms fitted with a Medium Release
Warning System complying with 4-5-2/11.1.3. Also, warning signs are to be provided, indicating that the
space is protected by an automatic fire extinguishing system.
The storage containers may be located inside the protected space, provided the controls for the release of
the medium are located in a readily accessible location outside protected space. Furthermore, the point
where the controls enter the protected space to the location of the storage containers is as short as practical.
Engine Rooms (as defined in 4-5-4/Table 1, Note 5) and Engine Compartments (as defined in 4-5-4/Table 1,
Note 6) are to be fitted with a fire detection system complying with 4-5-1/13
Section 4 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length 4-5-4
9 Accommodation and Service Spaces

A fire detection and alarm system complying with 4-5-1/13 is to be provided for accommodation and service
spaces where the sum of the length of the spaces is greater than 5 meters (16.5 feet) or where sleeping
accommodations are provided, regardless of length of the spaces.

In addition to 4-5-2/11, other extinguishing systems may be approved, provided they are shown to be no
less effective than approved gas systems.
Chapter 6: Electrical Installations
4
CHAPTER 6 Electrical Installations
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 General ................................................................................................ 187
1 Applications ..................................................................................... 187
3 Definitions ....................................................................................... 187
3.1 Cascade Protection ..................................................................... 187
3.3 Earth ............................................................................................ 187
3.5 Earthed Distribution System ........................................................ 187
3.7 Essential Services ....................................................................... 187
3.9 Explosion-proof (Flameproof) Equipment .................................... 188
3.11 Hazardous Area (Hazardous Location) ....................................... 188
3.13 High Voltage ................................................................................ 188
3.15 Hull-return System ....................................................................... 188
3.17 Increased Safety ......................................................................... 188
3.19 Inhomogeneous Field .................................................................. 188
3.21 Intrinsically-safe ........................................................................... 188
3.23 Low Voltage................................................................................. 188
3.25 Minimum Comfortable Condition of Habitability ........................... 189
3.27 Nominal Voltage .......................................................................... 189
3.29 Non-periodic Duty Rating ............................................................ 189
3.31 Non-sparking Fan ........................................................................ 189
3.33 Overvoltage Category ................................................................. 189
3.35 Overvoltage Withstand Test ........................................................ 189
3.37 Periodic Duty Rating .................................................................... 189
3.39 Pollution Degree .......................................................................... 189
3.41 Portable Apparatus ...................................................................... 189
3.43 Pressurized Equipment ............................................................... 189
3.45 Semi-enclosed Space ................................................................. 189
3.47 Separate Circuit ........................................................................... 190
3.49 Short Circuit................................................................................. 190
3.51 Short-time Rating ........................................................................ 190
5 Plans and Data to Be Submitted ..................................................... 190
7 Standard Distribution System ......................................................... 190
9 Voltage and Frequency Variations.................................................. 190
11 Materials.......................................................................................... 190
13 Insulation Material ........................................................................... 191
13.1 Class A Insulation ........................................................................ 191
13.3 Class B Insulation ........................................................................ 191
13.5 Class E Insulation ........................................................................ 191
13.7 Class F Insulation ........................................................................ 191
13.9 Class H Insulation ........................................................................ 191
13.11 Insulation for Temperature Above 180°C (356°F) ........................ 191
15 Degree of Protection for Enclosure .................................................191
17 Temperature Ratings ......................................................................192
17.1 General ........................................................................................ 192
17.3 Reduced Ambient Temperature ................................................... 192
19 Clearances and Creepage Distances .............................................192
21 Service Trial ....................................................................................193
21.1 Electrical Installation for Ship Services ........................................ 193
21.3 Communication Facilities ............................................................. 193
TABLE 1 Voltage and Frequency Variations ........................................193

TABLE 2 Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment
(First IP Numeral) ..................................................................194
TABLE 3 Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment
(Second IP Numeral).............................................................195
TABLE 4 Primary Essential Services ...................................................195
TABLE 5 Secondary Essential Services ..............................................196
SECTION 2 Shipboard Systems ............................................................................ 197

1 Plans and Data to be Submitted .....................................................197
1.1 Wiring .......................................................................................... 197
1.3 Short-circuit Data ......................................................................... 198
1.5 Protective Device Coordination ................................................... 198
1.7 Load Analysis .............................................................................. 198
3 Ship Service Main Source of Power ...............................................198
3.1 Power Supply by Generators ....................................................... 198
3.3 Generator Driven by Propulsion Unit ........................................... 200
3.5 Sizing of AC Generator ................................................................ 200
5 Emergency Source of Power ..........................................................201
5.1 General ........................................................................................ 201
5.3 Emergency Services .................................................................... 203
5.5 Power Supply .............................................................................. 204
5.7 Transitional Source of Power ....................................................... 205
5.9 Emergency Switchboard .............................................................. 205
5.11 Arrangements for Periodic Testing .............................................. 206
5.13 Craft Intended to Carry Passengers ............................................ 206
5.15 Starting Arrangements for Emergency Generator Sets ............... 206
5.16 Use of Emergency Generator in Port (for Craft 500 GT and
Over)............................................................................................ 207
5.17 Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines .............. 208
5.2 Alternative to Emergency Source of Power ................................. 202
5.19 Craft Less than 500 GT Having Electrical Plants of 75 kW and
Above .......................................................................................... 208
5.21 Requirements by the Governmental Authority ............................. 209
7 Distribution System ......................................................................... 209
7.1 Ship Service Distribution System ................................................ 209
7.3 Hull Return System ..................................................................... 211
7.5 Earthed Distribution Systems ...................................................... 211
7.7 External or Shore Power Supply Connection .............................. 211
7.9 Harmonics ................................................................................... 212
9 Circuit Protection System................................................................ 212
9.1 System Design ............................................................................ 212
9.3 Protection for Generators ............................................................ 213
9.5 Protection for Alternating-current (AC) Generators ..................... 214
9.7 Protection for Direct Current (DC) Generators ............................ 215
9.9 Protection for Accumulator Batteries ........................................... 215
9.11 Protection for External or Shore Power Supply ........................... 216
9.13 Protection for Motor Branch Circuits ............................................ 216
9.15 Protection for Transformer Circuits .............................................. 217
9.17 Protection for Meters, Pilot Lamps and Control Circuits .............. 217
9.19 Protection of Harmonic Filter Circuits .......................................... 217
11 System for Steering Gear ............................................................... 218
11.1 Power Supply Feeder .................................................................. 218
11.3 Protection for Steering Gear Circuit ............................................. 218
11.5 Emergency Power Supply ........................................................... 219
11.7 Controls, Instrumentation, and Alarms ........................................ 219
13 Lighting and Navigation Light Systems........................................... 219
13.1 Lighting System ........................................................................... 219
13.3 Navigation Light System .............................................................. 220
15 Interior Communication Systems .................................................... 220
15.1 Navigation Bridge ........................................................................ 220
15.3 Main Propulsion Control Stations ................................................ 220
15.5 Voice Communications ................................................................ 221
15.7 Emergency and Interior-communication Switchboard ................. 221
15.9 Public Address System................................................................ 221
17 Manually Operated Alarms ............................................................. 222
17.1 General Emergency Alarm System ............................................. 222
17.3 Engineers’ Alarm ......................................................................... 222
17.5 Refrigerated Space Alarm ........................................................... 223
17.7 Elevator ....................................................................................... 223
19 Fire Protection and Fire Detection Systems ................................... 223
19.1 Emergency Stop .......................................................................... 223
19.3 Fire Detection and Alarm System ................................................ 223
21 Special Requirements for Non-metallic Craft.................................. 223
21.1 Bonding of Metal Parts ................................................................ 223
21.3 Pressure Refueling Points ........................................................... 224
21.5 Metallic Pipes .............................................................................. 224
21.7 Primary Conductors for Lightning Discharge ............................... 224
21.9 Secondary Conductors ................................................................ 224
21.11 Electrical Resistance and Cross Section of Bonding Path........... 224
21.13 Lightning Protection System ........................................................ 224
TABLE 1 Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines .......208
FIGURE 1 Cofferdam with Extension Beyond the Boundaries of

the Space Containing the Emergency Source ......................201
FIGURE 2 Cofferdam without Extension Beyond the Boundaries of
the Space Containing the Emergency Source ......................202
FIGURE 3 Boundary Insulated to A-60 with the Insulation Extending
Beyond the Boundaries of the Space Containing the
Emergency Source................................................................202
SECTION 3 Shipboard Installation ........................................................................ 225

1 Plans and Data to be Submitted .....................................................225
1.1 Booklet of Standard Details ......................................................... 225
1.3 Arrangement of Electrical Equipment .......................................... 225
1.5 Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas .................................... 225
1.7 Maintenance Schedule of Batteries ............................................. 226
3 Equipment Installation and Arrangement........................................226
3.1 General Consideration ................................................................. 226
3.3 Generators ................................................................................... 227
3.5 Ship Service Motors..................................................................... 227
3.7 Accumulator Batteries.................................................................. 228
3.9 Switchboard ................................................................................. 230
3.11 Distribution Boards ...................................................................... 230
3.13 Motor Controllers and Control Centers ........................................ 231
3.15 Resistors for Control Apparatus ................................................... 231
3.17 Lighting Fixtures .......................................................................... 231
3.19 Heating Equipment ...................................................................... 232
3.21 Magnetic Compasses .................................................................. 232
3.23 Portable Equipment and Outlets .................................................. 232
3.25 Receptacles and Plugs of Different Ratings ................................ 232
3.27 Installation Requirements for Recovery from Dead Ship
Condition ..................................................................................... 232
3.29 Services Required to be Operable Under a Fire Condition .......... 232
3.31 High Fire Risk Areas .................................................................... 233
5 Cable Installation ............................................................................233
5.1 General Considerations ............................................................... 233
5.3 Insulation Resistance for New Installation ................................... 234
5.5 Protection for Electric-magnetic Induction ................................... 235
5.7 Joints and Sealing ....................................................................... 235
5.9 Support, Fixing and Bending ....................................................... 235
5.11 Cable Run in Bunches ................................................................. 237
5.13 Deck and Bulkhead Penetrations ................................................ 237
5.15 Mechanical Protection ................................................................. 238
5.17 Emergency and Essential Feeders .............................................. 238
5.19 Mineral Insulated Cables ............................................................. 239
5.21 Fiber Optic Cables ....................................................................... 239
5.23 Battery Room ............................................................................... 239
5.25 Paneling and Dome Fixtures ....................................................... 239
5.27 Sheathing and Structural Insulation ............................................. 239
5.29 Splicing of Electrical Cables ........................................................ 239
5.31 Splicing of Fiber Optic Cables ..................................................... 240
5.33 Cable Junction Box ..................................................................... 240
7 Earthing ........................................................................................... 241
7.1 General........................................................................................ 241
7.3 Permanent Equipment ................................................................. 241
7.5 Connections ................................................................................ 241
7.7 Portable Cords ............................................................................ 241
7.9 Cable Metallic Covering............................................................... 241
7.11 Lightning Earth Conductors ......................................................... 241
9 Equipment and Installation in Hazardous Areas ............................. 242
9.1 General Considerations ............................................................... 242
9.3 Certified-safe Type and Pressurized Equipment and Systems.... 242
9.5 Paint Stores ................................................................................. 244
9.7 Non-sparking Fans ...................................................................... 244
TABLE 1 Minimum Degree of Protection ............................................. 246

TABLE 2 Minimum Bending Radii of Cables ........................................ 247
TABLE 3 Size of Earth-continuity Conductors and Earthing
Connections .......................................................................... 247
FIGURE 1 Example of Area Affected by Local Fixed Pressure Water-

spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing System in
Machinery Spaces ................................................................ 227
FIGURE 2 Cables within High Fire Risk Areas....................................... 238
SECTION 4 Machinery and Equipment................................................................. 248

1 Plans and Data to Be Submitted ..................................................... 248
1.1 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Over ...................................... 248
1.3 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Below .................................... 248
1.5 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc. .................... 248
3 Rotating Machines .......................................................................... 248
3.1 General........................................................................................ 248
3.3 Testing and Inspection ................................................................ 249
3.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement ........................................... 249
3.7 Overload and Overcurrent Capability .......................................... 250
3.9 Dielectric Strength of Insulation ................................................... 250
3.11 Temperature Ratings ................................................................... 250
3.13 Construction and Assemblies ...................................................... 251
3.15 Lubrication ................................................................................... 252
3.17 Turbines for Generators .............................................................. 252
3.19 Diesel Engines for Generators .................................................... 253
3.21 Alternating-current (AC) Generators ............................................ 254
3.23 Direct-current (DC) Generators ................................................... 255
5 Accumulator Batteries .....................................................................256
5.1 General ........................................................................................ 256
5.3 Construction and Assembly ......................................................... 257
5.5 Engine-starting Battery ................................................................ 257
7 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc. ......................257
7.1 General ........................................................................................ 257
7.3 Testing and Inspection................................................................. 258
7.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement ............................................ 259
7.7 Dielectric Strength of Insulation ................................................... 259
7.11 Bus Bars, Wiring and Contacts .................................................... 260
7.13 Control and Protective Devices ................................................... 261
7.15 Switchboards ............................................................................... 262
7.17 Motor Controllers and Control Centers ........................................ 262
7.19 Battery Systems and Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) ....... 263
9 Transformers ...................................................................................265
9.1 General ........................................................................................ 265
9.3 Temperature Rise ........................................................................ 265
9.7 Testing ......................................................................................... 266
10 Semiconductor Converters for Adjustable Speed Motor Drives .....266
10.1 Application ................................................................................... 266
10.3 Standards of Compliance ............................................................ 266
10.5 Design, Construction and Assembly Requirements ..................... 266
10.7 Inspection and Testing................................................................. 270
10.9 Integration Requirements ............................................................ 273
11 Other Electric and Electronics Devices ...........................................273
11.1 Circuit Breakers ........................................................................... 273
11.3 Fuses ........................................................................................... 273
11.5 Semiconductor Converters .......................................................... 274
11.7 Cable Junction Boxes .................................................................. 274
13 Cables and Wires ............................................................................274
13.1 Cable Construction ...................................................................... 274
13.3 Portable and Flexing Electric Cables ........................................... 276
13.5 Mineral-insulated Metal-sheathed Cable ..................................... 276
TABLE 1 Factory Test Schedule for Generators and Motors

≥ 100 kW (135 hp).................................................................277
TABLE 2 Dielectric Strength Test for Rotating Machines ....................278
TABLE 3 Limits of Temperature Rise for Air-Cooled Rotating
Machines ...............................................................................279
TABLE 4 Nameplates ...........................................................................280
TABLE 5 Factory Testing Schedule for Switchboards, Chargers,
Motor Control Centers and Controllers .................................281
TABLE 6 Clearance and Creepage Distance for Switchboards,
Distribution Boards, Chargers, Motor Control Centers
and Controllers ......................................................................281
TABLE 7 Equipment and Instrumentation for Switchboard .................. 282
TABLE 8 Temperature Rise for Transformers...................................... 283
TABLE 9 Types of Cable Insulation ..................................................... 283
TABLE 10 Maximum Current Carrying Capacity for Insulated Copper
Wires and Cables .................................................................. 284
TABLE 11 Additional Services Requiring Electrical Equipment to be
Designed, Constructed and Tested to the Requirements
in Section 4-6-4 ..................................................................... 286
FIGURE 1 Limiting Curves for Loading 4-stroke Diesel Engines Step by Step
from No-load to Rated Power as Function of the Brake Mean
Effective Pressure ................................................................. 254
SECTION 5 Specialized Installations .................................................................... 287

1 High Voltage Systems..................................................................... 287
1.1 General........................................................................................ 287
1.3 System Design ............................................................................ 288
1.5 Circuit Breakers and Switches – Auxiliary Circuit Power
Supply Systems ........................................................................... 289
1.7 Circuit Protection ......................................................................... 289
1.9 Equipment Installation and Arrangement .................................... 290
1.11 Machinery and Equipment ........................................................... 293
1.13 Design Operating Philosophy ...................................................... 296
1.15 Preliminary Operations Manual ................................................... 297
3 Electric Propulsion System ............................................................. 298
3.1 General........................................................................................ 298
3.3 System Design ............................................................................ 298
3.5 Propulsion Power Supply Systems .............................................. 300
3.7 Circuit Protection ......................................................................... 300
3.9 Protection for Earth Leakage ....................................................... 301
3.11 Electric Propulsion Control .......................................................... 301
3.13 Instrumentation at the Control Station ......................................... 302
3.15 Equipment Installation and Arrangement .................................... 303
3.17 Machinery and Equipment ........................................................... 303
3.19 Dock and Sea Trials .................................................................... 306
5 Three-wire Dual-voltage DC System .............................................. 306
5.1 Three-wire DC Craft’s Generators ............................................... 306
5.3 Neutral Earthing .......................................................................... 307
5.5 Size of Neutral Conductor ........................................................... 307
7 Electrical Plants of Less Than 75 kW ............................................. 307
7.1 General........................................................................................ 307
7.3 Standard Details .......................................................................... 307
7.5 Calculations of Short-circuit Currents .......................................... 307
7.7 Lightning Protection ..................................................................... 307
7.9 Temperature Ratings ................................................................... 308
7.11 Generators .................................................................................. 308
7.13 Emergency Source of Power ....................................................... 308
7.15 Cable Construction ...................................................................... 308
7.17 Switchboards, Distribution Boards and Panels ............................ 308
7.19 Navigation Running Lights ........................................................... 308
TABLE 1 High Voltage Equipment Locations and Minimum Degree

of Protection ..........................................................................309
SECTION 6 Specialized Craft and Services ......................................................... 310

1 Installations in Special-Category Spaces .......................................310
1.1 Application ................................................................................... 310
1.3 Ventilation System ....................................................................... 310
1.5 Location and Type of Equipment ................................................. 310
SECTION 7 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) In Length ................................. 312
1 General ...........................................................................................312
3 Interior Communication Systems and Manually Operated
Alarms .............................................................................................312
5 Battery Starting Systems ................................................................312
PART Section 1: General
4
SECTION 1 General
1 Applications
Electrical apparatus and wiring systems are to be constructed and installed to the satisfaction of the Surveyor,
in accordance with the following requirements which are applicable to all ocean-going craft, but which
may be modified for craft classed for limited service. The following detailed rules are minimum requirements
for classification purposes. Consideration will be given, however, to arrangements or details which can be
shown to comply with other recognized standards, provided they are not less effective.
For craft having an aggregate generator capacity not exceeding 75 kW, the requirements contained in 4-6-5/7
are to be complied with. Where generators are not arranged for parallel operation, the capacity of the
largest generator may be taken as the ‘aggregate generator capacity’. Electrical installations in machinery
spaces with gasoline engines will be specially considered.
For craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in length, the requirements contained in Section 4-6-7 are to be
complied with.
For passenger craft, see Section 5-1-1.
3 Definitions
The following definitions apply for the purpose of this Section.
3.1 Cascade Protection (2014)

The application of protective devices in which the device nearest to the source of power has short-circuit
ratings equal to or in excess of the maximum prospective short-circuit current, while devices in succeeding
steps further from the source have lower short-circuit ratings.
3.3 Earth (2014)

A large conducting body, such as the metal hull of the ship, used as an arbitrary zero of potential.
3.5 Earthed Distribution System

A system in which one pole of a single phase system or the neutral point of a three phase system is earthed,
but the earthing connection does not normally carry current.
3.7 Essential Services

Essential services are those considered necessary for:
• Continuous operation to maintain propulsion and steering (primary essential services);
• Non-continuous operation to maintain propulsion and steering and a minimum level of safety for the craft’s
navigation and systems, including safety for dangerous cargoes to be carried (secondary essential services);
and
• Emergency services as described in 4-6-2/5.3 (each service is either primary essential or secondary essential
depending upon its nature).
Examples of primary essential services and secondary essential services are as listed in 4-6-1/Table 4 and
4-6-1/Table 5, respectively.
Chapter 6 Electrical Installations
3.9 Explosion-proof (Flameproof) Equipment

Explosion-proof equipment is equipment:
3.9.1
Having an enclosure capable of:
i) Withstanding an explosion within it of a specified flammable gas or vapor, and
ii) Preventing the ignition of the specified flammable gas or vapor in the atmosphere surrounding
the enclosure by sparks, flashes or explosions of the gas or vapor within, and
3.9.2 (2016)
Operates at such an external temperature that a surrounding flammable atmosphere will not be
ignited. Where explosion-proof equipment is required by these Rules, equipment certified as being
flameproof, as defined in IEC Publication 60079 series or other recognized standard may be accepted.
3.11 Hazardous Area (Hazardous Location)

An area where flammable or explosive vapor, gas, or dust may normally be expected to accumulate.
3.13 High Voltage (2014)

High Voltage in these Rules refers to voltages above 1000 V up to and including 15 kV AC.
3.15 Hull-return System

A system in which insulated conductors are provided for connection to one pole or phase of the supply, the
hull of the craft or other permanently earthed structure being used for effecting connections to the other
pole or phase.
3.17 Increased Safety

Type of protection applied to electrical apparatus that does not produce arcs or sparks in normal service, in
which additional measures are applied so as to give increased security against the possibility of excessive
temperatures and of the occurrence of arc and sparks. See IEC Publication 60079-7.
3.19 Inhomogeneous Field (2014)

An electric field which does not have a constant voltage gradient between electrodes.
3.21 Intrinsically-safe
A circuit or part of a circuit is intrinsically safe when any spark or any thermal effect produced in the test
conditions prescribed in a recognized standard (such as IEC Publication 60079-11) is incapable of causing
ignition of the prescribed explosive gas atmosphere.
3.21.1 Category “ia” (2016)
Apparatus which is incapable of causing ignition in normal operation, or with a single fault, or
with any combination of two faults applied, with the following safety factors:
In normal operation: 1.5
With one fault: 1.5
With two faults: 1.0
Above safety factors are applied to the current, voltage, or their combination, as specified in 5.2 of
IEC Publication 60079-11.
3.23 Low Voltage (2016)

Low Voltage in these Rules refers to voltages up to and including 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC.
3.25 Minimum Comfortable Condition of Habitability (2014)

A condition in which at least services such as cooking, heating, domestic refrigeration, mechanical
ventilation, sanitary and fresh water are adequately provided.
3.27 Nominal Voltage (2014)

Nominal Voltage (Un) – The nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the purpose of conveniently
designating its voltage class (as 120/240 V, 480/277 V, 600 V). The actual voltage at which a circuit
operates can vary from the nominal within a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
Uo (as relates to cable voltage rating) – The rated power frequency voltage between conductor and earth or
metallic screen for which the cable is designed.
3.29 Non-periodic Duty Rating

A rating at which the machine is operated continuously or intermittently with varying load and speed within
the permissible operating range. The load and speed variations include the overloads applied frequently,
which may greatly exceed the full load rating of the machine.
3.31 Non-sparking Fan

A fan consisting of a combination of impeller and housing which are unlikely to produce sparks by static
electricity or by entry of foreign objects in both normal and abnormal conditions.
3.33 Overvoltage Category (2014)

Overvoltage Category (of a circuit or within an electrical system) – Conventional number based on limiting
the values of prospective transient overvoltages occurring in a circuit and depending on the means employed
to influence the overvoltages.
3.35 Overvoltage Withstand Test (2014)

Overvoltage Withstand Test (layer test) – Test intended to verify the power-frequency withstand strength
along the winding under test and between its phase (strength between turns and between layers in the windings).
3.37 Periodic Duty Rating

A rating at which the machine is operated repeatedly on a cycle of sequential loading with starting, electric
braking, no-load running, rest and de-energized periods, where applicable. The time for the duration of
operating cycle (duty cycle) is to be 10 minutes and the ratio (i.e., cyclic duration factor) between the
period of loading (including starting and electric braking) and the duty cycle is to be one of the values of
15%, 25%, 40% or 60%.
3.39 Pollution Degree (2014)

Pollution Degree (of environmental conditions) – A conventional number based on the amount of conductive
or hygroscopic dust, ionized gas or salt, and on the relative humidity and its frequency of occurrence resulting in
hygroscopic absorption or condensation of moisture leading to reduction in dielectric strength and/or surface
resistivity of the insulating materials of devices and components.
3.41 Portable Apparatus

Portable apparatus is any apparatus served by a flexible cord.
3.43 Pressurized Equipment

Equipment having an enclosure in which positive pressure is maintained to prevent against the ingress of
external atmosphere and complying with the requirements in 4-6-3/9.3.3.
3.45 Semi-enclosed Space

A space limited by decks and/or bulkheads in such a manner that the natural conditions of ventilation in the
space are notably different from those obtained on open deck.
3.47 Separate Circuit

A circuit which is independently protected by a circuit protection device at the final sub-circuit and is
dedicated to a single load.
3.49 Short Circuit

A short circuit is an abnormal connection through a negligible impedance, whether made accidentally or
intentionally, between two points of different potential in a circuit.
3.51 Short-time Rating

A rating at which the machine is operated for a limited period, which is less than that required to reach the
steady temperature condition, followed by a rest and de-energized period of sufficient duration to re-establish
the machine temperature within 2°C (3.6°F) of the coolant.
5 Plans and Data to Be Submitted

See 4-6-2/1, 4-6-3/1, 4-6-4/1 and 4-6-5/3.3.
7 Standard Distribution System (2014)

The following are recognized as standard systems of distribution. Distribution systems differing from these
will be specially considered.
• Two-wire direct current
• Three-wire direct current
• Two-wire single-phase alternating
• Three-wire three-phase alternating current*
• Four-wire three-phase alternating current with solidly earthed neutral but not with hull return
* Note: Three-wire single-phase AC may be used in conjunction with this system for lighting.
However, the electrical distribution voltages throughout the craft are not to exceed:
• 500 V for power cooking heating and other permanently connected equipment; and
• 250 V for lighting, internal communications and receptacle outlets.
Subject to the acceptance by the Administration, high voltage systems as outlined in 4-6-5/1 may be acceptable
for propulsion systems.
9 Voltage and Frequency Variations

Electrical appliances supplied from the main or emergency systems, are to be so designed and manufactured
that they are capable of being operated satisfactorily under the normally occurring variations in voltage and
frequency. Unless otherwise stated in national or international standards, the variations from the rated value
may be taken from the 4-6-1/Table 1. Any special system, such as electronic circuits, which cannot operate
satisfactorily within the limit shown in 4-6-1/Table 1, is not to be supplied directly from the system but by
alternative means, such as through a stabilized supply.
For generators, see 4-6-4/3.17.1, 4-6-4/3.19.1, and 4-6-4/3.21.2.
11 Materials
All electrical equipment is to be constructed of durable and flame-retardant materials. Materials are to be
resistant to corrosion, moisture, high and low temperatures, and are to have other qualities necessary to prevent
deterioration in the ambient conditions that the equipment may be expected to encounter.
13 Insulation Material
For the purposes of these requirements, insulating material is designated as follows.
13.1 Class A Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as cotton, silk and paper when suitably impregnated or coated
or when immersed in a dielectric liquid such as oil. Other materials or combinations of materials may be
included in this class if by experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at
105°C (221°F).
13.3 Class B Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as mica, glass fiber, etc., with suitable bonding substances.
Other materials or combinations of materials, not necessarily inorganic, may be included in this class if by
experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at 130°C (266°F).
13.5 Class E Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials which by experience or accepted tests can be shown to be capable
of operation at 120°C (248°F) (materials possessing a degree of thermal stability allowing them to be operated
at a temperature 15°C (27°F) higher than Class A materials).
13.7 Class F Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as mica, glass fiber, etc., with suitable bonding substances.
Other materials or combinations of materials, not necessarily inorganic, may be included in this class if by
experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at 155°C (311°F).
13.9 Class H Insulation

Materials or combinations of materials such as silicone elastomer, mica, glass fiber, etc., with suitable bonding
substances such as appropriate silicone resins. Other materials or combinations of materials may be included
in this class if by experience or accepted tests they can be shown to be capable of operation at 180°C (356°F).
13.11 Insulation for Temperature Above 180°C (356°F)

Materials or combination of materials which by experience or accepted tests can be shown to be capable of
satisfactory operation at temperature over 180°C (356°F) will also be considered. Supporting background
experience or report of tests conducted in accordance with a recognized standard ascertaining their suitability
for the intended application and temperature operation are to be submitted for review.
15 Degree of Protection for Enclosure (2014)

The designation to indicate the degree of protection consists of the characteristic letters IP followed by two
numerals (the “characteristic numerals”) indicating conformity with conditions stated in 4-6-1/Table 2 and
4-6-1/Table 3. The test and inspection for determining the degree of protection may be carried out in accordance
with IEC Publication 60529 by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be
submitted upon request from ABS. The type of enclosure required for protection of equipment is to be suitable
for the intended location. See 4-6-3/3.1.1 for selection of a protective enclosure for electrical equipment based
on location condition. Equipment in compliance with recognized national standards will also be considered.
For high voltage equipment see 4-6-5/Table 1.
17 Temperature Ratings
17.1 General (2014)

For purposes of rating of equipment a maximum ambient air temperature of 45°C (113°F) is to be assumed.
Where ambient temperatures in excess of 45°C (113°F) are expected the rating of equipment is to be based
on the actual maximum ambient air temperature.
The use of lower ambient temperatures may be considered provided the total rated temperature of the equipment
is not exceeded and where the lower values can be demonstrated. The use of a value for ambient temperature
less than 40°C (104°F) is only permitted in spaces that are environmentally controlled.
17.3 Reduced Ambient Temperature

17.3.1 Environmentally Controlled Spaces
Where electrical equipment is installed within environmentally-controlled spaces, the ambient
temperature for which the equipment is to be rated may be reduced from 45°C and maintained at a
value not less than 35°C, provided:
i) The equipment is not to be used for emergency services.
ii) Temperature control is achieved by at least two independent cooling systems so arranged
that in the event of loss of one cooling system for any reason, the remaining system(s) is
capable of satisfactorily maintaining the design temperature. The cooling equipment is to
be rated for a 45°C ambient temperature.
iii) The equipment is to be able to initially start to work safely at a 45°C ambient temperature
until such a time that the lesser ambient temperature may be achieved.
iv) Audible and visual alarms are provided, at a continually-manned control station, to indicate
any malfunction of the cooling systems.
17.3.2 Rating of Cables
In accepting a lesser ambient temperature than 45°C, it is to be ensured that electrical cables for
their entire length are adequately rated for the maximum ambient temperature to which they are
exposed along their length.
17.3.3 Ambient Temperature Control Equipment
The equipment used for cooling and maintaining the lesser ambient temperature is to be classified
as a secondary essential service, in accordance with 4-6-1/3.7, and the capability of cooling is to
be witnessed by the Surveyor at sea trial.
19 Clearances and Creepage Distances

The distances between live parts of different potential and between live parts and the case or other earthed
metal, whether across surfaces or in air, are to be adequate for working voltage having regard to the nature
of the insulating material and the conditions of service. See 4-6-4/7.11.6 and 4-6-5/1.1.3 for additional
requirements for switchboard and high voltage systems.
21 Service Trial
21.1 Electrical Installation for Ship Services

All auxiliary apparatus is to be tried under working conditions. Each generator is to be run for a time sufficient
to show satisfactory operation, and parallel operation with all possible combinations is to be demonstrated.
Each auxiliary motor necessary to the operation of the craft is to be run for a time sufficient to show
satisfactory performance at such load as can readily be obtained. All main switches and circuit breakers are
to be operated, but not necessarily at full load. The operation of the lighting system, heaters, etc., is to be
satisfactorily demonstrated. The entire installation is to operate to the satisfaction of the Surveyor, and the
drop in voltage on any part of the installation is not to exceed 6%. See 4-6-3/5.1.3.
21.3 Communication Facilities

Satisfactory operation of the interior communications system required by 4-6-2/15 is to be demonstrated to
the Surveyor during sea trials. Particular attention is to be given to demonstrating that the voice communication
systems required by 4-6-2/15 provide the capability of carrying on a conversation while the craft is being
navigated.
TABLE 1
Voltage and Frequency Variations [See 4-6-1/9]
Voltage and Frequency Variations
for AC Distribution Systems
Quantity in Operation Permanent Variation Transient Variation
(Recovery Time)
Frequency ±5% ±10% (5 s)
Voltage +6%, −10% ±20% (1.5 s)
Voltage Variations for DC Distribution Systems

(such as systems supplied by DC generators or rectifiers)
Parameters Variations
Voltage tolerance (continuous) ±10%
Voltage cyclic variation deviation 5%
Voltage ripple (AC r.m.s over steady DC voltage) 10%
Voltage Variations for Battery Systems

Type of System Variations
Components connected to the battery during charging +30%, –25%
(see Note)
Components not connected to the battery during +20%, –25%
charging
Note: Different voltage variations as determined by the charging/discharging
characteristics, including the ripple voltage from the charging device,
may be considered.
TABLE 2
Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment (First IP Numeral)
First IP Short Description Definition
Numeral
0 Non-protected No special protection
1 Protected against solid objects A large surface of the body, such as a hand (but no protection against deliberate
greater than 50 mm (2 in.) access). Solid object exceeding 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter.
2 Protected against solid objects Fingers or similar objects not exceeding 80 mm (3.15 in.) in length. Solid objects
greater than 50 mm (2 in.) exceeding 12 mm (0.5 in.) in diameter.
3 Protected against solid objects Tools, wires, etc. of diameter or thickness greater than 2.5 mm (0.1 in.). Solid
greater than 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) objects exceeding 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) in diameter
4 Protected against solid objects Wires or strips of thickness greater than 1 mm (0.04 in.). Solid objects exceeding
greater than 1 mm (0.04 in.) 1 mm (0.04 in.) in diameter.
5 Dust protected Ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust does not enter in sufficient quantity
to interfere with satisfactory operation of the equipment
6 Dust-tight No ingress of dust
[Designation]
The degree of protection is designated as shown in the following examples:
When it is required to indicate the degree of protection by only one characteristic numeral which shows either degree of
protection against foreign bodies and electrical shock or against liquid, the omitted numeral is to be replaced by the letter X.
Examples:
1 IP56 The first characteristic numeral of “5”
The second characteristic numeral of “6”.
2 IPX5 Degree of protection against only liquid.
3 IP2X Degree of protection against only foreign bodies and electrical shock.
TABLE 3
Degree of Protection of Electrical Equipment (Second IP Numeral) (2016)
Second IP Short Description Definition
Numeral
0 Non-protected No special protection.
1 Protected against dripping Dripping water (vertically falling drops) is to have no harmful effect.
water
2 Protected against dripping Vertically dripping water is to have no harmful effect when the enclosure is tilted at
water when tilted up to 15°. any angle up to 15° from its normal position.
3 Protected against spraying Water falling as spray at an angle up to 60° from the vertical is to have no harmful
water effect.
4 Protected against splashing Water splashed against the enclosure from any direction is to have no harmful
water effect.
5 Protected against water jets Water projected by a nozzle against the enclosure from any direction is to have no
harmful effect.
6 Protected against heavy seas Water from heavy seas or water projected in powerful jets is not to enter the
enclosure in harmful quantities.
7 Protected against the effects Ingress of water in a harmful quantity is not to be possible when the enclosure is immersed
of immersion in water under defined conditions of pressure and time.
8 Protected against submersion The equipment is suitable for continuous submersion in water under conditions which are
to be specified by the manufacturer.
Note: Normally, this will mean that the equipment is hermetically sealed. However,
with certain types of equipment, it can mean that water can enter, but only in such a
manner that it produces no harmful effects.
9 (2016) Protected against high pressure Water projected at high pressure and high temperature against the enclosure from
and temperature water jets any direction shall not have harmful effects
See Designation and examples in 4-6-1/Table 2.
TABLE 4
Primary Essential Services
(a) Steering gears
(b) Pumps for controllable pitch propellers
(c) Scavenging air blower, fuel oil supply pumps, fuel valve cooling pumps, lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps
for main and auxiliary engines, turbines and shafting necessary for propulsion.
(d) Ventilation necessary to maintain propulsion
(e) Forced draft fans, feed water pumps, water circulating pumps, vacuum pumps and condensate pumps for steam plants on
steam turbine ships, and also for auxiliary boilers on craft where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential
services
(f) Oil burning installations for auxiliary boilers where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential services
(g) Low duty gas compressor and other boil-off gas treatment facilities supporting boil-off gas usage as fuel to main
propulsion or electric power generation machinery.
(h) Electrical equipment for electric propulsion plant with lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps
(i) Electric generators and associated power sources supplying primary essential equipment
(j) Hydraulic pumps supplying primary essential equipment
(k) Viscosity control equipment for heavy fuel oil
(l) Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems of equipment for primary essential services.
TABLE 5
Secondary Essential Services
(a) Windlass
(b) Fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment equipment
(c) Lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil treatment equipment
(d) Pre-heaters for heavy fuel oil
(e) Starting air and control air compressors
(f) Bilge, ballast and heeling pumps
(g) Fire pumps and other fire extinguishing medium pumps
(h) Ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms
(i) Services considered necessary to maintain dangerous spaces in a safe condition (inert gas system of an oil carrier,
ventilation for Ro-Ro cargo spaces, etc.)
(j) Navigation lights, aids and signals
(k) Internal communication equipment required by 4-6-2/15
(l) Fire detection and alarm system
(m) Lighting system
(n) Electrical equipment for watertight and fire-tight closing appliances
(o) Electric generators and associated power sources supplying secondary essential equipment
(p) Hydraulic pumps supplying secondary essential equipment
(q) Control, monitoring and safety systems for cargo containment systems
(r) Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems of equipment for secondary essential services.
(s) Ambient temperature control equipment required by 4-6-1/17.3
(t) Watertight Doors (see Sections 3-2-5/1.3, 3-2-9 and 3-2-10)
PART Section 2: Shipboard Systems
4
SECTION 2 Shipboard Systems
1.1 Wiring
1.1.1 Systems
One line diagrams for the following electrical systems are to be submitted for review.
• Power Supply and Distribution
• Lighting including Navigation Light
• Internal Communication
• General Emergency Alarm
• Fire Detection and Alarm
• Steering Gear Control
• Intrinsically-safe Equipment
• Emergency Generator Starting
• Inert Gas Control, Monitoring, and Alarm
1.1.2 Data for Wiring Systems
The one line diagrams are to show the circuit designation, type and size of cables, cable grouping
and banking, trip setting and rating of the circuit protection devices, the location of electrical
equipment accompanied by list of components, complete feeder list, rated load current for each
branch circuit. The one line diagram for power supply and distribution systems is to indicate the
following component details.
Note: For craft having a length of 61 m (200 ft) and over, a voltage drop calculation for the longest run of each
cable size is to be included.
• Generator: kW rating, voltage, rated current, frequency, number of phases, power factor
• Batteries: type, voltage, capacity, conductor protection (when required)
• Motors: kW rating, remote stops (when required)
• Transformers: kVA rating, rated voltage and current on primary and secondary side, connection
method
The one line diagram for power supply and distribution systems is also to include a list of sequential
start of motors and equipment having emergency tripping or preferential tripping features.
Section 2 Shipboard Systems 4-6-2
1.3 Short-circuit Data (2016)

In order to establish that the protective devices on the main and emergency switchboards have sufficient
short-circuit breaking and making capacities, data are to be submitted giving the maximum calculated
short-circuit current in symmetrical rms and asymmetrical peak values available at the main bus bars
together with the maximum allowable breaking and making capacities of the protective device. Similar
calculations are to be made at other points in the distribution system, where necessary, to determine the
adequacy of the interrupting capacities of the protective devices.
Reference may be made to IEC Publication 61363-1 Electrical Installations of Ships and Mobile and Fixed
Offshore Units – Part 1: Procedures for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in Three-Phase A.C.
1.5 Protective Device Coordination

A protective device coordination study is to be submitted for review. This protective device coordination
study is to consist of an organized time-current study of all of the protective devices in series from the
utilization equipment to the source for all circuit protection devices having different setting or time-current
characteristics for long-time delay tripping, short-time delay tripping and instantaneous tripping, where
applicable. Where an over-current relay is provided in series and adjacent to the circuit protection device,
the operating and time-current characteristics of the relay are to be considered for coordination. See 4-6-2/9.1.5.
1.7 Load Analysis

An electric-plant load analysis is to be submitted for review. The electric-plant load analysis is to cover all
operating conditions of the craft, such as normal sea going, cargo handling (loading/unloading), harbor
in/out and emergency operations.
The analyses are to include:
• The simultaneous operation of loads on the emergency switchboard as per 4-6-2/5.3. Where the
emergency generator capacity is less than the sum of all of the nameplate rated loads, which can be
simultaneously connected to the emergency switchboard, then the analysis is to be supported by a
justification for each reduced or non-simultaneous load used.
• High voltage ship service transformers or converters, where applicable per 4-6-2/7.1.6
• Identifying the loads to be tripped to ensure continuity of supply per 4-6-2/3.3.2iv), 4-6-2/3.1.6(a),
4-6-2/9.3.3.
3 Ship Service Main Source of Power
3.1 Power Supply by Generators

3.1.1 Number of Generators
Craft using electricity for craft’s service power or lights are to be provided with at least two
electric generators for the craft service electrical demand.
3.1.2 Capacity of Generators
The capacity of the generating sets is to be such that in the event of any one generating set being
stopped, it will still be possible without recourse to the emergency source of power to supply those
services necessary to provide normal operational conditions of propulsion and safety, preservation
of the cargo and minimum comfortable conditions of habitability, which are to include at least
adequate services for cooking, heating, domestic refrigeration, mechanical ventilation, sanitary and
fresh water. See also 4-6-2/3.1.6. In addition, the generating sets are to be such that with any one
generator or its primary source of power out of operation, the remaining generating sets are capable
of providing the electrical services necessary to start the main propulsion plant in conjunction with
other machinery, as appropriate, from a dead ship condition, as defined in 4-1-1/13.23, within thirty
minutes of the blackout. See also 4-6-2/3.1.3.
3.1.3 Starting from Dead Craft Condition

In restoring the propulsion from a dead ship condition (see 4-1-1/13.23), no stored energy is to be
assumed available for starting the propulsion plant, the main source of electrical power and other
essential auxiliaries. It is assumed that means are available to start the emergency generator at all times.
The emergency source of electrical power may be used to restore the propulsion, provided its
capacity either alone or combined with that of any other available source of electrical power is
sufficient to provide at the same time those services required to be supplied by 4-6-2/5.3.2 to
4-6-2/5.3.3.
The emergency source of electrical power and other means needed to restore the propulsion are to
have a capacity such that the necessary propulsion starting energy is available within 30 minutes
of blackout, as defined in 4-1-1/13.25. Emergency generator-stored starting energy is not to be
directly used for starting the propulsion plant, the main source of electrical power and/or other
essential auxiliaries (emergency generator excluded).
See also 4-6-2/3.1.6 and 4-6-4/7.15.2, below.
3.1.4 Power Supplied by Propulsion Generator
For craft propelled by electric power and having two or more constant voltage propulsion generators,
the ship’s service electric power may be derived from this source and additional ship’s service
generators need not be fitted, provided that with one propulsion generator out of service, a speed
of seven knots or one-half of the design speed, whichever is the lesser, can be maintained. See
4-6-5/3.17.4 and 4-6-5/3.17.5.
3.1.5 Fuel Capacity for Generator Prime Mover
Where the fuel for any ship’s service generator prime mover differs from the fuel for the main
propulsion plant, adequate fuel capacity for that ship’s service generator prime mover with adequate
margins is to be provided for the longest anticipated run of the craft between fueling ports.
3.1.6 System Arrangement
3.1.6(a) General. For craft of 500 GT and above where the main source of electrical power is
necessary for propulsion and steering and the safety of the craft, the system is to be so arranged
that the electrical supply to equipment necessary for these services is maintained or is capable of
being restored in the case of loss of any one of the generators in service in accordance with the
provision in 4-6-2/3.1.6(b) or 4-6-2/3.1.6(c).
Load shedding of nonessential services and, where necessary, secondary essential services (see
4-6-1/3.7) or other arrangements as may be necessary are to be provided to protect the generators
against the sustained overload. For main bus bar subdivision, see 4-6-4/7.15.2.
3.1.6(b) Single Generator Operation. Where the electrical power is normally supplied by a single
generator, provision is to be made upon loss of power for automatic starting and connecting to the
main switchboard of a stand-by generator(s) of sufficient capacity with automatic restarting of the
essential auxiliaries in sequential operation, if necessary to permit propulsion and steering and to
ensure the safety of the craft. Starting and connection to the main switchboard of the standby
generator is to be preferably within 30 seconds after loss of the electrical power supply, but in no
case in more than 45 seconds.
3.1.6(c) Multiple Generator Operation. Where the electrical power is normally supplied by more
than one generator set simultaneously in parallel operation, the system is to be so arranged that in
the event of the loss of any one of the generators in service, the electrical supply to equipment
necessary for propulsion and steering and to ensure the safety of the craft will be maintained by
the remaining generator(s) in service.
3.3 Generator Driven by Propulsion Unit

3.3.1 Constant Speed Drive
A generator driven by a main propulsion unit (shaft generator) capable of operating continuously
at a constant speed (e.g., a system where the craft speed and direction are controlled only by
propeller pitch) may be considered to be one of the generators required by 4-6-2/3.1.1, provided
that the arrangements stated in i) to iii) below are complied with:
i) The generator and the generating systems are capable of maintaining the voltage and
frequency variation within the limits specified in 4-6-4/3.21.2 and 4-6-1/Table 1 under all
weather conditions during sailing or maneuvering and also while the craft is stopped.
ii) The rated capacity of the generator and the generating systems is safeguarded during all
operations given under i) and is such that the services required by 4-6-2/3.1.2 can be
maintained upon loss of any generator in service.
iii) An arrangement is made for starting a standby generator and connecting it to the switchboard,
in accordance with 4-6-2/3.1.6.
3.3.2 Variable Speed Drive
Shaft generator installations not capable of operating continuously at a constant speed may be used
for normal operational and habitable conditions of the craft, provided that the arrangements stated
in i) to v) below are complied with. This type of generator will not be counted as one of the
generators required by 4-6-2/3.1.2.
i) In addition to this type of generator, generators of sufficient and adequate rating are provided,
which constitute the main source of electrical power required by 4-6-2/3.1.2.
ii) When the frequency variations at the main bus bar exceed the following limits due to the
speed variation of the propulsion machinery which drives the generator, arrangements are
made to comply with 4-6-2/3.1.6.
Permanent frequency variation: ±5.5%
Transient frequency variation: ±11% (5 sec)
iii) The generators and the generating systems are capable of maintaining the voltage and
frequency variation within the limits specified in 4-6-4/3.21.2 and 4-6-1/Table 1.
iv) Where load-shedding arrangements are provided, they are fitted in accordance with
4-6-2/9.3.3.
v) Where the propulsion machinery is capable of being operated from the navigation bridge,
means are provided or procedures are in place to ensure that power supply to essential
services is maintained during maneuvering conditions in order to avoid a blackout situation.
3.5 Sizing of AC Generator

In selecting the capacity of an alternating-current generating plant, particular attention is to be given to the
starting current of motors forming part of the system. Under the normal seagoing condition of the craft with
one generator held in reserve as a standby, the remaining generator sets, operating in parallel and initially
carrying the minimum load necessary for operating the craft, are to have sufficient capacity with respect to
the largest idle motor on the craft so that the motor can be started and the voltage drop occasioned by its
starting current will not cause any already running motor to stall or control equipment to drop out.
5 Emergency Source of Power
5.1 General
A self-contained emergency source of electrical power is to be provided.
5.1.1 Location
The emergency source of electrical power, its associated transforming equipment, if any, transitional
source of emergency power, the emergency switchboard, the emergency lighting switchboard and
the fuel oil tank for the emergency generator prime mover are to be located above the uppermost
continuous deck outside of the machinery casing, and are to be readily accessible from the open
deck. They are not to be located forward of the collision bulkhead.
5.1.2 Separation
5.1.2(a) Machinery Space of Category A. The location of the emergency source of electrical power,
its associated transforming equipment, if any, and the emergency switchboard, and the transitional
source of emergency power (if required) is to be such that a fire or other casualty in the space
containing the main source of electrical power, its associated transforming equipment, if any, and
the main switchboard, or in any machinery space of category A will not interfere with the supply,
control and distribution of emergency electrical power. As far as practicable, the space containing
the emergency source of electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if any, the transitional
source of emergency electrical power and the emergency switchboard, including trunks to such
spaces, are not to be contiguous to the boundaries of machinery spaces of category A or those
spaces containing the main source of electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if any,
and the main switchboard.
5.1.2(b) Machinery Space Other Than Category A. Spaces containing emergency sources of
power are to be separated from machinery spaces (as defined in 4-1-1/13.3), other than Category
A machinery spaces, by a boundary insulated to a level of not less than A-15 for bulkheads and
decks and A-0 for the overhead from any such space (including trunks to such spaces). Where the
emergency source of power is a generator, the above is not intended to preclude the location of the
emergency generator in the same space as its prime mover, regardless of size.
5.1.2(c) Alternative Arrangement. The following alternative arrangements may be considered in lieu
of 4-6-2/5.1.2(a):
i) Separation by a cofferdam having dimensions as required for ready access and extending
at least 150 mm (6 in.) beyond the boundaries of the space containing the self-contained
emergency source of power and its associated equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.1.2(a). See
4-6-2/Figure 1 below. Except for cables feeding services located in the machinery space,
emergency electric cables are not to be installed in such cofferdams unless the cofferdam
is insulated to A-60.
FIGURE 1
Cofferdam with Extension Beyond the Boundaries of
the Space Containing the Emergency Source
Space containing emergency 150 mm (6 in.)

source of power and its
associated equipment
Cofferdam
Category A Machinery Space
ii) Separation by a cofferdam having dimensions as required for ready access between
category A machinery space and the space containing the self-contained emergency
source of power and its associated equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.1.2(a) without extension
beyond the boundaries. Any contiguous lines between these spaces at the corner of the
cofferdam are to be insulated to A-60 for a length of 450 mm (18 in.) at the category A
machinery space side. See 4-6-2/Figure 2 below.
FIGURE 2
Cofferdam without Extension Beyond the Boundaries of
the Space Containing the Emergency Source
A-60 insulation Space containing emergency 450 mm (18 in.)

Cofferdam
iii) The contiguous boundaries insulated to A-60 with the insulation extending at least 450 mm
(18 in.) beyond the boundary of the space containing the self-contained emergency source
of power and its associated equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.1.2(a). See 4-6-2/Figure 3 below.
The arrangements indicated in 4-6-2/Figure 3 below can be considered only when it can
be shown that the arrangements are in compliance with the requirements of the flag
administration.
FIGURE 3
Boundary Insulated to A-60 with the Insulation
Extending Beyond the Boundaries of the Space
Containing the Emergency Source
A-60 insulation Space containing emergency 450 mm (18 in.)

5.2 Alternative to Emergency Source of Power

Where the main source of electrical power is located in two or more compartments which are not contiguous,
each of which has its own self-contained systems, including power distribution and control systems,
completely independent of each other and such that a fire or other casualty in any one of the spaces will not
affect the power distribution from the others, or to the services required by 4-6-2/5.3, the requirements of
4-6-2/5.1, 4-6-2/5.1.1, and 4-6-2/5.5.4 may be considered satisfied without an additional emergency source
of electrical power, provided that:
i) There is at least one generating set, meeting the requirements of 4-7-9/Table 8 and each of sufficient
capacity to meet the requirements of 4-6-2/5.3, in each of at least two non-contiguous spaces;
ii) The arrangements required by i) in each such space are equivalent to those required by 4-6-2/5.5.2,
4-6-2/5.9 and 4-6-2/5.15 so that a source of electrical power is available at all times to the services
required by 4-6-2/5, and
iii) The generator sets referred to in i) and their self-contained systems are installed in accordance
with 4-6-2/5.1.1
5.3 Emergency Services

i) The electrical power available from the emergency source is to be sufficient to supply all those
services that are essential for safety in an emergency, due regard being paid to such services as
may have to be operated simultaneously. Where the sum of the loads on the emergency generator
switchboard exceeds the power available, an analysis demonstrating that the power required to
operate the services simultaneously is to be produced. The analysis is to be submitted for review
in support of the sizing of the emergency generator.
ii) The emergency source of electrical power is to be capable, having regard to starting currents and
the transitory nature of certain loads, of supplying simultaneously at least the services listed in
4-6-2/5.3.1 through 4-6-2/5.3.7 for the period specified.
5.3.1 For a Period of 12 Hours, Emergency Lighting:
i) At the stowage positions of life-saving appliances;
ii) At all escape routes such as alleyways, stairways, exits from accommodation and service
spaces, embarkation points, etc.;
iii) In the public spaces, if any;
iv) In the machinery spaces and main emergency generating spaces, including their control
positions;
v) In control stations;
vi) At the stowage positions for fireman’s outfits, and
vii) At the steering gear.
5.3.2 For a Period of 12 Hours:
i) The navigation lights and other lights required by the International Regulation for Preventing
Collisions at Sea in force;
ii) Electrical internal communication equipment for announcements during evacuation;
iii) Fire-detection and general alarm system and manual fire alarms, and
iv) Remote control devices of fire-extinguishing systems, if electrical.
v) The navigational equipment as required by Chapter 13 of the IMO International Code of
Safety for High-Speed Craft. Where such provision is unreasonable or impracticable, the
Administration may waive this requirement for craft of less than 5,000 GT.
5.3.3 For a Period of 4 Hours of Intermittent Operation:
i) The daylight signaling lamps, if they have no independent supply from their own accumulator
battery, and
ii) The craft’s whistle, if electrically driven.

i) Navigational equipment;
ii) Essential electrically powered instruments and controls for propulsion machinery, if
alternate sources of power are not available for such device;
iii) One of fire pumps required by 4-5-2/5.3 if dependent upon the emergency generator for
its source of power;
iv) The sprinkler pump and drencher pump, if fitted;
v) The emergency bilge pump and all the equipment essential for the operation of electrically
powered remote controlled bilge valves; and
vi) Craft radio facilities and other loads as set out in 14.13.2 of the IMO International Code
of Safety for High-Speed Craft.
5.3.5 For a Period of 10 Minutes:
Power drives for directional controls devices including those required to direct thrust forward and
astern.
5.3.7 Craft on Short Duration Voyages
In a craft engaged regularly in voyages of short duration where an adequate standard of safety is
attained, a lesser period than the 12 hour period specified in 4-6-2/5.3.1, 4-6-2/5.3.2, and 4-6-2/5.3.4iii),
but not less than 5 hours may be accepted.
5.5 Power Supply

5.5.1 General
The emergency source of electrical power may be either a generator or an accumulator battery, in
accordance with 4-6-2/5.5.2 or 4-6-2/5.5.3, below:
5.5.2 Generator (2014)
Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, it is to be:
5.5.2(a) driven by a prime mover with an independent supply of fuel having a flashpoint (closed
cup test) of not less than 43°C (110°F)*, and
* Fuel with a lower flashpoint, but not lower than 35°C, may be used in gas turbines only subject
to compliance with the provisions specified in 4-2-2/2.
5.5.2(b)
i) Started automatically upon failure of the main source of electrical power supply and
connected automatically to the emergency switchboard – then, those services referred to
in 4-6-2/5.7 are to be connected automatically to the emergency generator as quickly as is
safe and practicable, subject to a maximum of 45 seconds, or
ii) Provided with a transitional source of emergency electrical power, as specified in 4-6-2/5.7,
unless an emergency generator is provided capable both of supplying the services referred
to in 4-6-2/5.7 of being automatically started and supplying the required load as quickly
as is safe and practicable, subject to a maximum of 45 seconds, and
5.5.2(c) An adequate fuel capacity for the emergency generator prime mover is to be provided.
Where it is intended to use fuel with a flash point of less than 60°C (140°F) then details of the
precautions used to address the associated hazardous area issues are to be submitted to ABS for review
(see also 4-4-4/7).
5.5.3 Accumulator Battery
Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery, it is to be capable of:
5.5.3(a) carrying the emergency electrical load without recharging while maintaining the voltage
of the battery throughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage;
5.5.3(b) automatically connecting to the emergency switchboard in the event of failure of the
main source of electrical power; and
5.5.3(c) immediately supplying at least those services specified in 4-6-2/5.7.
5.5.4 Emergency Generator for Non-emergency Services
Provided that suitable measures are taken for safeguarding independent emergency operation under
all circumstances, the emergency generator may be used, exceptionally, and for short periods, to
supply non-emergency circuits during the blackout situation (see 4-1-1/13.25) dead craft condition
(see 4-1-1/13.23), and routine use for testing (see 4-6-2/5.11). The generator is to be safeguarded
against overload by automatically shedding such non-emergency services so that supply to the
required emergency loads is always available. See also 4-6-2/5.9.5.
For use of the emergency generator in port, see 4-6-2/5.16.
5.7 Transitional Source of Power

The transitional source of emergency electrical power where required by 4-6-2/5.5.2(b)ii) is to consist of
an accumulator battery which is to operate without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the battery
throughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage and be of sufficient
capacity and is to be so arranged as to supply automatically in the event of failure of either the main or the
emergency source of electrical power for half an hour at least the following services if they depend upon
an electrical source for their operation:
5.7.1 For a Period of 30 Minutes:
The loads specified in 4-6-2/5.3.1, 4-6-2/5.3.2 and 4-6-2/5.3.3 and
5.7.2 With Respect to the Watertight Doors:
i) Power to operate the watertight doors, but not necessarily simultaneously, unless an
independent temporary source of stored energy is provided. The power source should
have sufficient capacity to operate each door at least three times (i.e., closed-open-closed)
against an adverse list of 15°, and
ii) Power to the control, indication and alarm circuits for the watertight doors for half an hour.
For the transitional phase of loads as per 4-6-2/5.7.1 above, such loads may not be connected to
the transitional source of power provided that:
• The services are fitted with an independent supply for the period specified from an accumulator
battery suitably located for use in an emergency.
• The emergency lighting, in respect of the machinery space and accommodation and service spaces
are provided by permanently fixed, individual, automatically charged, relay operated accumulator
lamps.
5.9 Emergency Switchboard

5.9.1 General
The emergency switchboard is to be installed as near as is practicable to the emergency source of
electrical power.
5.9.2 Emergency Switchboard for Generator
Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, the emergency switchboard is to
be located in the same space unless the operation of the emergency switchboard would thereby be
impaired.
5.9.3 Accumulator Battery
No accumulator battery fitted in accordance with 4-6-2/5.5.3 or 4-6-2/5.7 is to be installed in the
same space as the emergency switchboard. An indicator is to be mounted on the main switchboard
or in the machinery control room to indicate when these batteries are being discharged.
5.9.4 Interconnector Feeder Between Emergency and Main Switchboards (2014)

The emergency switchboard is to be supplied during normal operation from the main switchboard
by an interconnector feeder which is to be protected at the main switchboard against overload and
short circuit. The interconnector feeder is to be disconnected automatically at the emergency
switchboard upon failure of the main source of electrical power. Where the system is arranged for
feedback operation, the interconnector feeder is also to be protected at the emergency switchboard
against short circuit. In addition, the circuit protection device at the emergency switchboard on the
interconnector feeder is to trip to prevent overloading of the emergency generator.
In designs where the main switchboard voltage is different from that of the emergency switchboard
the power to the emergency switchboard is to be supplied from the main ship service switchboard.
As far as practicable, the circuit coordination is to be arranged such that the outgoing circuits from
the main ship service switchboard will coordinate with the transformer circuit breakers to prevent
the supply to the emergency switchboard from being unavailable due to a fault on one of the other
outgoing circuits from the main ship service switchboard.
Note: For the purpose of this Rule, the main ship service switchboard is a switchboard which is connected to
the secondary of the step-down transformer producing the required voltage.
5.9.5 Disconnection of Non-emergency Circuits

For ready availability of the emergency source of electrical power, arrangements are to be made,
where necessary, to disconnect automatically non-emergency circuits from the emergency switchboard
so that electrical power is to be available automatically to the emergency circuits.
5.11 Arrangements for Periodic Testing

Provision is to be made to enable the periodic testing of the complete emergency system and is to include
the testing of automatic starting arrangements.
5.13 Craft Intended to Carry Passengers

See Section 5-1-1.
5.15 Starting Arrangements for Emergency Generator Sets

5.15.1 Cold Conditions
Emergency generating sets are to be capable of being readily started in their cold condition at a
temperature of 0°C (32°F). If this is impracticable or if lower temperatures are likely to be
encountered, heating arrangements are to be provided for ready starting of the generating sets.
5.15.2 Number of Starts
Each emergency generator that is arranged to be automatically started is to be equipped with approved
starting devices with a stored energy capability of at least three consecutive starts. Unless a second
independent means of starting is provided, the source of stored energy is to be protected to
preclude critical depletion by the automatic starting system, i.e., the automatic starting system is
only allowable for consumption of the stored energy source to a level that would still provide the
capability for starting the emergency generator upon intervention by personnel. In addition, a
second source of energy is to be provided for an additional three starts within 30 minutes unless
manual starting can be demonstrated to the Surveyor to be effective.
5.15.3 Charging of Stored Energy
The stored energy is to be maintained at all times, as follows:
5.15.3(a) Electrical and hydraulic starting systems are to be maintained from the emergency
switchboard.
5.15.3(b) Compressed air starting systems may be maintained by the main or auxiliary compressed
air receivers through a suitable non-return valve or by an emergency air compressor which, if
electrically driven, is supplied from the emergency switchboard.
5.15.3(c) All of these starting, charging and energy storing devices are to be located in the emergency
generator space. These devices are not to be used for any purpose other than the operation of the
emergency generating set. This does not preclude the supply to the air receiver of the emergency
generating set from the main or auxiliary compressed air system through the non-return valve
fitted in the emergency generator space.
5.15.4 Manual Starting
Where automatic starting is not required, as per 4-6-2/5.5.2(b)ii), manual (hand) starting is permissible,
such as manual cranking, inertia starters, manually charged hydraulic accumulators or power charge
cartridges, where they can be demonstrated to the Surveyor as being effective.
When manual (hand) starting is not practicable, the requirements of 4-6-2/5.15.2 and 4-6-2/5.15.3
are to be complied with, except that starting may be manually initiated.
5.16 Use of Emergency Generator in Port (for Craft 500 GT and Over)
Unless instructed otherwise by the Flag Administration, the emergency generator may be used during lay
time in port for supplying power to the craft, provided the following requirements are complied with.
5.16.1 Arrangements for the Prime Mover
5.16.1(a) Fuel oil tank. The fuel oil tank for the prime mover is to be appropriately sized and
provided with a level alarm, which is to be set to alarm at a level where there is still sufficient fuel
oil capacity for the emergency services for the period of time required by 4-6-2/5.3.
5.16.1(b) Rating. The prime mover is to be rated for continuous service.
5.16.1(c) Filters. The prime mover is to be fitted with fuel oil and lubricating oil filters, in
accordance with 4-2-1/7.1 and 4-2-1/9.9, respectively.
5.16.1(d) Monitoring. The prime mover is to be fitted with alarms, displays and automatic shutdown
arrangements, as required in 4-7-3/Table 7, except that for fuel oil tank low-level alarm, 4-6-2/5.16.1(a)
above is to apply instead. The displays and alarms are to be provided in the centralized control
station. Monitoring at the engineers’ quarters is to be provided as required in 4-7-3/21.5.
5.16.1(e) Fire detection. The emergency generator room is to be fitted with fire detectors. Where
the emergency generator is located in a space separated from the emergency switchboard, fire detectors
are to be located in each space. The fire detection and alarm system is to be in compliance with 4-
5-1/13 and may be a part of another system.
5.16.2 System Arrangements
5.16.2(a) Independence. The power supply circuits, including control and monitoring circuits,
for the use of the emergency generator in port are to be so arranged and protected that any electrical
fault, except for the emergency generator and the emergency switchboard, will not affect the
operation of the main and emergency services.
5.16.2(b) Changeover arrangement. Means are to be provided to readily change over to emergency
operation.
5.16.2(c) Overload prevention. The generator is to be safeguarded against overload by automatically
shedding such other loads so that the supply to the required emergency loads is always available.
5.16.3 Operational Instruction
Operational instructions, such as that on fuel oil tank level, harbor/seagoing mode changeover
arrangements, etc., are to be provided onboard. Before the craft is underway, all valves, switches,
etc., are to be in the positions for their intended mode of operation of the emergency generator and
the emergency switchboard. Such instructions are to be distinctly posted at the emergency generator
room. Planned maintenance is to be carried out only while in port.
5.17 Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines

5.17.1 Information to be Submitted
Information demonstrating compliance with these requirements is to be submitted for review. The
information is to include instructions to test the alarm and safety systems.
5.17.2 Alarms and Safeguards
5.17.2(a) Alarms and safeguards are to be fitted in accordance with 4-6-2/Table 1.
5.17.2(b) The safety and alarm systems are to be designed to ‘fail safe’. The characteristics of the
‘fail safe’ operation are to be evaluated on the basis not only of the system and its associated
machinery, but also the complete installation, as well as the ship.
5.17.2(c) Regardless of the engine output, if shutdowns additional to those specified in 4-6-2/Table 1
are provided, except for the overspeed shutdown, they are to be automatically overridden when the
engine is in automatic or remote control mode during navigation.
5.17.2(d) The alarm system is to function in accordance with 4-7-1/9.7.1 through 4-7-1/9.7.7,
with additional requirements that grouped alarms are to be arranged on the bridge.
5.17.2(e) In addition to the fuel oil control from outside the space, a local means of engine
shutdown is to be provided.
5.17.2(f) Local indications of at least those parameters listed in 4-6-2/Table 1 are to be provided
within the same space as the diesel engines and are to remain operational in the event of failure of
the alarm and safety systems.
TABLE 1
Alarms and Safeguards for Emergency Diesel Engines
[See 4-6-2/5.17]
Systems Monitored Parameters A Auto Notes
Shut [ A = Alarm; x = apply ]
Down
Fuel oil A1 Leakage from pressure pipes x
Lubricating oil B1 Temperature – high x For engines having a power of 220 kW
or more.
B2 Lubricating oil pressure – low x
B3 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x For engines having a power of 2250 kW
concentration – high; or (3000 hp) and above or having a cylinder
Bearing temperature – high; or bore of more than 300 mm (11.8 in.).
Alternative arrangements See 4-2-1/7.2 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
Cooling medium C1 Pressure or flow – low x For engines having a power of 220 kW
or more.
C2 Temperature – high x
Engine D1 Overspeed activated x x For engines having a power of 220 kW
or more.
5.19 Craft Less than 500 GT Having Electrical Plants of 75 kW and Above
5.19.1 General
This requirement is intended for craft less than 500 GT having electrical plants of an aggregate
capacity of 75 kW and above. The emergency source of electrical power is to be self-contained
and readily available. 4-6-2/5.1.1, 4-6-2/5.1.2, 4-6-2/5.5 through 4-6-2/5.13 and 4-6-2/5.21 are
also applicable. Where the source of electrical power is a battery, see 4-6-3/3.7 for the installation.
For emergency lighting, a relay-controlled, battery-operated lantern is acceptable.
5.19.2 Capacity
The emergency source of electrical power is to be capable of supplying simultaneously at least the
following services for the period as specified herein:
5.19.3 For a Period of 6 Hours, Emergency Lighting:
i) At the stowage positions of life-saving appliances;
ii) At all escape routes such as alleyways, stairways, exits from accommodation and service
spaces, embarkation points, etc.;
iii) In the public spaces, if any;
iv) In the machinery spaces and main emergency generating spaces, including their control
positions;
v) In control stations;
vi) At the stowage positions for fireman’s outfits, and
vii) At the steering gear.
i) The navigation lights and other lights required by the International Regulation for Preventing
Collisions at Sea in force;
ii) Craft radio facilities and other loads as set out in 14.13.2 of the IMO International Code
of Safety for High-Speed Craft.
iii) Electrical internal communication equipment for announcements during evacuation.
5.21 Requirements by the Governmental Authority

Attention is directed to the requirements of the governmental authority of the country whose flag the craft
flies for the emergency services and the accumulator batteries required in various types of craft.
7 Distribution System
7.1 Ship Service Distribution System

7.1.1 General
Current-carrying parts with potential to earth are to be protected against accidental contact.
For recognized standard distribution systems, see 4-6-1/7. Separate feeders are to be provided for
essential and emergency services.
7.1.2 Method of Distribution
The output of the ship’s service generators may be supplied to the current consumers by way of
either branch system, meshed network system or ring main system. The cables of a ring-main or
other looped circuit (e.g., interconnecting section boards in a continuous circuit) are to be formed
of conductors having sufficient current-carrying and short-circuit capacity for any possible load
and supply configuration.
7.1.3 Through-feed Arrangements
The size of feeder conductors is to be uniform for the total length, but may be reduced beyond any
intermediate section board and distribution board, provided that the reduced size section of the
feeder is protected by an overload device.
7.1.4 Motor Control Center
Feeder cables from the main switchboard or any section board to the motor control centers are to
have a continuous current-carrying capacity not less than 100% of the sum of the nameplate ratings
of all of the motors supplied. Feeder cables of lesser current capacity are permitted, where the design
is such that connected consumers are not operated simultaneously, under any operating mode.
7.1.5 Motor Branch Circuit

A separate circuit is to be provided for each fixed motor having a full-load current rating of 6 amperes
or more, and the conductors are to have a carrying capacity of not less than 100% of the motor
full-load current rating. No branch circuit is to have conductors less than 1.5 mm2 wire. Circuit-
disconnecting devices are to be provided for each motor branch circuit and to be in accordance
with 4-6-3/3.13.2 and 4-6-4/7.17.2.
7.1.6 Power Supply Through Transformers and Converters
7.1.6(a) Continuity of Supply (2014). Where transformers and/or converters form a part of the
craft’s electrical system supplying essential services and services necessary for minimum comfortable
conditions of habitability, the number and capacity of the transformers and/or converters are to be
such that with any one transformer or converter or any one single phase of a transformer out of
service, the remaining transformers and/or converters or remaining phases of the transformer are
capable of supplying power to these loads under normal seagoing conditions.
See 4-6-5/1.3.6 for the additional requirements applicable for high voltage transformers.
7.1.6(b) Arrangements. Each required transformer is to be located as a separate unit with separate
enclosure or equivalent, and is to be served by separate circuits on the primary and secondary
sides. Each of the secondary circuits is to be provided with a multipole isolating switch. This
multipole isolating switch is not to be installed on the transformer casing or its vicinity (in so far
as practicable), to preclude its damage by fire or other incident at the transformer. A circuit
breaker provided in the secondary circuit, in accordance with 4-6-2/9.15.1, will be acceptable in
lieu of a multipole isolating switch.
7.1.6(c) Transformers and Converters for Battery Charger. Where batteries connected to a single
battery charger are the sole means of supplying DC power to equipment for essential services, as
defined in 4-6-1/3.7, failure of the single battery charger under normal operating conditions should not
result in total loss of these services once the batteries are depleted. In order to ensure continuity of
the power supply to such equipment, one of the following arrangements is to be provided:
i) Duplicate battery chargers; or
ii) A single battery charger and a transformer/rectifier (or switching converter) which is
independent of the battery charger, provided with a change-over switch; or
iii) Duplicate transformer/rectifier (or switching converter) units within a single battery charger,
provided with a change-over switch.
The above requirements are not applicable for the following:
• The equipment for the essential services which contains a single transformer/ rectifier with a
single AC power supply feeder to such equipment.
• The services which are not used continuously, such as battery chargers for engine starting
batteries, etc.
7.1.7 Ventilation System
Ventilation fans for cargo space are to have feeders separate from those for accommodations. See
also 4-6-2/19.1.1 and 4-6-3/3.7.3.
7.1.8 Heating Appliances
Each heater is to be connected to a separate final subcircuit. However, a group of up to 10 heaters
whose total current does not exceed 16 A may be connected to a single final subcircuit.
7.1.9 Circuits for Bunker or Cargo Space
All lighting and power circuits terminating in a bunker or cargo space are to be provided with a
multiple pole switch outside of the space for disconnecting such circuits.
7.3 Hull Return System

7.3.1 General
7.3.1 All Craft. The hull return system is not to be used for power, heating or lighting except
that the following systems may be used for all types of craft.
i) Impressed current cathodic protective systems;
ii) Limited and locally earthed systems, provided that any possible resulting current does not
flow directly through any hazardous areas; or
iii) Insulation level monitoring devices, provided the circulation current does not exceed 30 mA
under all possible conditions.
Current-carrying parts with potential to earth are to be protected against accidental contact.
7.3.2 Final Subcircuits and Earth Wires
Where the hull return system is used, all final subcircuits (i.e., all circuits fitted after the last protective
device) are to consist of two insulated wires, the hull return being achieved by connecting to the
hull one of the bus bars of the distribution board from which they originate. The earth wires are to
be in accessible locations to permit their ready examination and to enable their disconnection for
testing of insulation.
7.5 Earthed Distribution Systems

System earthing is to be effected by means independent of any earthing arrangements of the non-current-
carrying parts. Means of disconnection is to be provided in the neutral earthing connection of each
generator so that the generator may be disconnected for maintenance. In distribution systems with neutral
earthed or for generators intended to be run with neutrals interconnected, the machines are to be designed
to avoid circulating currents exceeding the prescribed value. Transformer neutral is not to be earthed unless
all corresponding generator neutrals are disconnected from the system (e.g. during shore supply).
7.7 External or Shore Power Supply Connection

7.7.1 General
Where arrangements are made for the supply of electricity from a source on shore or other external
source, a termination point is to be provided on the craft for the reception of the flexible cable
from the external source. Fixed cables of adequate rating are to be provided between the termination
point and the main or emergency switchboard. Means for disconnecting the external or shore power
supply are to be provided at the receiving switchboard. See 4-6-2/9.11 for the protection of external
or shore power supply circuit.
7.7.2 Earthing Terminal
An earth terminal is to be provided for connecting the hull to an external earth.
7.7.3 Indicators
The external supply connection or shore connection is to be provided with a pilot lamp and a voltmeter
(and frequency meter for AC) at main or emergency switchboard to show energized status of the cable.
7.7.4 Polarity or Phase Sequence
Means are to be provided for checking the polarity (for DC) or the phase sequence (for three-phase
AC) of the incoming supply in relation to the craft’s system.
7.7.5 Information Plate
An information plate is to be provided at or near the connection box giving full information on the
system of supply and the nominal voltage (and frequency if AC) of the craft’s system and the
recommended procedure for carrying out the connection.
7.7.6 Securing of Trailing Cable
Provision is to be made for securing the trailing cable to a framework to absorb stress on the electrical
terminals by catenary tension of the cable.
7.9 Harmonics (2014)

The total harmonic distortion (THD) in the voltage waveform in the distribution systems is not to exceed
8% and any single order harmonics not to exceed 5%. Other higher values may be accepted provided the
distribution equipment and consumers are designed to operate at the higher limits. Where higher values of
harmonic distortion are expected, any other possible effects, such as additional heat losses in machines,
network resonances, errors in control and monitoring systems are to be considered.
9 Circuit Protection System
9.1 System Design

9.1.1 General
Electrical installations are to be protected against accidental overload and short circuit, except
i) As permitted by 4-6-2/11.3,
ii) Where it is impracticable to do so, such as engine starting battery circuit, and
iii) Where by design, the installation is incapable of developing overload, in which case it may
be protected against short circuit only.
The protection is to be by automatic protective devices for:
i) Continued supply to remaining essential circuits in the event of a fault, and
ii) Minimizing the possibility of damage to the system and fire.
Three-phase, three-wire alternating current circuits are to be protected by a triple-pole circuit
breaker with three overload trips or by a triple-pole switch with a fuse in each phase. All branch
circuits are to be protected at distribution boards only, and any reduction in conductor sizes is to
be protected. Dual-voltage systems having an earthed neutral are not to have fuses in the neutral
conductor, but a circuit breaker which simultaneously opens all conductors may be installed, when
desired. In no case is the dual-voltage system to extend beyond the last distribution board.
9.1.2 Protection Against Short-circuit
9.1.2(a) Protective Devices. Protection against short-circuit is to be provided for each non-earthed
conductor by means of circuit breakers or fuses.
9.1.2(b) Rated Short-circuit Breaking Capacity. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity of every
protective device is not to be less than the maximum available fault current at that point. For
alternating current (AC), the rated short-circuit breaking capacity is not to be less than the root
mean square (rms) value of the AC component of the prospective short-circuit current at the point
of application. The circuit breaker is to be able to break any current having an AC component not
exceeding its rated breaking capacity, whatever the inherent direct current (DC) component may
be at the beginning of the interruption.
9.1.2(c) Rated Short-circuit Making Capacity. The rated short-circuit making capacity of every
switching device is to be adequate for maximum peak value of the prospective short-circuit current
at the point of installation. The circuit breaker is to be able to make the current corresponding to
its making capacity without opening within a time corresponding to the maximum time delay required.
9.1.3 Protection Against Overload
9.1.3(a) Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers or other mechanical switching devices for overload
protection are to have a tripping characteristic (overload-trip time) adequate for the overload
capacity of all elements in the system to be protected and for any discrimination requirements.
9.1.3(b) Fuses. A fuse of greater than 320 amperes is not to be used for overload protection.
9.1.3(c) Rating. Fuse ratings and rating (or settings, if adjustable) of time-delay trip elements of
circuit breakers are not to exceed the rated current capacity of the conductor to be protected as
listed in 4-6-4/Table 10, except as otherwise permitted for generator motor, and transformer circuit
protection in 4-6-2/9.3, 4-6-2/9.13 and 4-6-2/9.15. If the standard ratings or settings of overload
devices do not correspond to the rating or the setting allowed for conductors, the next higher
standard rating or setting may be used, provided that it does not exceed 150% of the allowable
current carrying capacity of the conductor, where permitted by the Standard to which the feeder
cables have been constructed. Except as otherwise permitted for motor and transformer branch-
circuit protection, adjustable-trip circuit breakers of the time-delay or instantaneous type are to be
set to operate at not more than 150% of the rated capacity of the conductor to be protected.
9.1.3(d) Indication. The rating or setting of the overload protective device for each circuit is to
be permanently indicated at the location of the protective device.
9.1.4 Back-up Protection
9.1.4(a) Back-up Fuse Arrangements. Circuit breakers having breaking and/or making capacities
less than the prospective short-circuit current at the point of application will be permitted, provided
that such circuit breakers are backed-up by fuses which have sufficient short-circuit capacity for
that application. The fuse is to be specifically designed for back-up combinations with the circuit
breaker, and the maximum fault rating for the combination is to be provided.
9.1.4(b) Cascade Protection. Cascade protection may be permitted, subject to special consideration.
Such special consideration is not intended for new construction craft, however may be granted
when modifications are performed to existing craft. The cascade protection is to be arranged such
that the combination of circuit protective devices has sufficient short-circuit breaking capacity at
the point of application [see 4-6-2/9.1.2(b)]. All circuit protective devices are to comply with the
requirements for making capacity [see 4-6-2/9.1.2(c)]. Cascade protection is not to be used for
circuits of primary essential services. Where cascade protection is used for circuits of secondary
essential services, such services are to be duplicated, provided with means of automatic transfer
and the automatic transfer is to alarm at a manned location. Cascade protection may be used for
circuits of non-essential services.
9.1.5 Coordinated Tripping
Coordinated tripping is to be provided between generator, bus tie, bus feeder and feeder protective
devices. See also 4-6-2/9.3.2 and 4-6-2/9.7.1. Except for cascade system (backup protection) in
4-6-2/9.1.4, the coordinated tripping is also to be provided between feeder and branch-circuit protective
devices for essential services. Continuity of service to essential circuits under short-circuit conditions
is to be achieved by discrimination of the protective devices, as follows:
9.1.5(a) The tripping characteristics of protective devices in series is to be coordinated.
9.1.5(b) Only the protective device nearest to the fault is to open the circuit, except for the cascade
system (back-up protection), as specified in 4-6-2/9.1.4(a).
9.1.5(c) The protective devices are to be capable of carrying, without opening, a current not less
than the short-circuit current at the point of application for a time corresponding to the opening of
the breaker, increased by the time delay required for discrimination.
9.3 Protection for Generators

9.3.1 General
Generators of less than 25 kW not arranged for parallel operation may be protected by fuses. Any
generators arranged for parallel operation and all generators of 25 kW and over are to be protected
by a trip-free circuit breaker whose trip settings are not to exceed the thermal withstand capacity
of the generator. The long-time over-current protection is not to exceed 15% above either the full-
load rating of continuous rated machines or the overload rating of special-rated machines. The
shutting down of the prime mover is to cause the tripping of the ship service generator circuit breaker.
9.3.2 Trip Setting for Coordination

The instantaneous and short-time overcurrent trips of the generators are to be set at the lowest
values of current and time which will coordinate with the trip settings of feeder circuit breakers.
See also 4-6-2/9.1.5, 4-6-2/9.5.1, and 4-6-2/9.5.2(a).
9.3.3 Load-shedding Arrangements
9.3.3(a) Provision for Load Shedding Arrangements. In order to safeguard continuity of the electrical
power supply, automatic load-shedding arrangements or other equivalent arrangements are to be
provided:
i) Where only one generating set is normally used to supply power for propulsion and steering
of the craft, and a possibility exists that due to the switching on of additional loads, whether
manually or automatically initiated, the total load exceeds the rated generator capacity of
the running generator, or
ii) Where electrical power is normally supplied by more than one generator set simultaneously
in parallel operation for propulsion and steering of the craft, upon the failure of one of the
parallel running generators, the total connected load exceeds the total capacity of the
remaining generator(s).
9.3.3(b) Services not Allowed for Shedding. Automatic load-shedding arrangements or other
equivalent arrangements are not to automatically disconnect the following services. See 4-6-1/3.7
for the definition of essential services.
i) Primary essential services that, when disconnected, will cause immediate disruption to
propulsion and maneuvering of the craft,
ii) Emergency services as listed in 4-6-2/5.3, and
iii) Secondary essential services that, when disconnected, will:
• cause immediate disruption of systems required for safety and navigation of the craft,
such as:
Lighting systems,
Navigation lights, aids and signals,
Internal communication systems required by 4-6-2/15, etc.
• prevent services necessary for safety from being immediately reconnected when the
power supply is restored to its normal operating conditions, such as:
Fire pumps, and other fire extinguishing medium pumps,
Bilge pumps,
Ventilation fans for engine and boiler rooms
9.3.4 Emergency Generator
The emergency generator is also to comply with 4-6-2/9.1, 4-6-3/9.3, 4-6-2/9.5 and 4-6-2/9.7, where
applicable. See also 4-6-2/5.9.
9.5 Protection for Alternating-current (AC) Generators

9.5.1 Short-time Delay Trip
Short-time delay trips are to be provided with circuit breakers for AC generators. See also 4-6-2/9.3.2.
The current setting of the short time delay trip is to be less than the steady state short-circuit current
of the generator.
For generators with a capacity of less than 200 kW having prime movers such as diesel engines or
gas turbines which operate independently of the electrical system, consideration may be given to
omission of short-time delay trips if instantaneous trips and long time overcurrent protection (see
4-6-2/9.3.1) are provided. When the short time delay trips are omitted, the thermal withstand capacity
of the generator is to be greater than the steady state short-circuit current of the generator, until
activation of the tripping system.
9.5.2 Parallel Operation

Where AC generators are arranged for parallel operation with other AC generators, the following
protective devices are to be provided.
9.5.2(a) Instantaneous Trip (2016). Instantaneous trips are to be installed and set in excess of the
maximum short-circuit contribution of the individual generator where three or more generators are
arranged for parallel operation. Alternative suitable protection, such as generator differential protection,
which will trip the generator circuit breaker in the event of a fault in the generator or in the supply
cable between the generator and its circuit breaker, would also be acceptable. See also 4-6-2/9.3.2.
9.5.2(b) Reverse Power Protection . A time-delayed reverse active power protection or other
devices which provide adequate protection is to be provided. The setting of protective devices is to
be in the range of 2% to 6% of the rated power for turbines and in the range of 8% to 15% of the
rated power for diesel engines. A setting of less than 8% of the rated power of diesel engines may
be allowed with a suitable time delay recommended by the diesel engine manufacturer. A fall of
50% in the applied voltage is not to render the reverse power protection inoperative, although it
may alter the setting to open the breaker within the above range.
9.5.2(c) Undervoltage Protection. Means are to be provided to prevent the generator circuit
breaker from closing if the generator is not generating and to open the same when the generator
voltage collapses.
In the case of an undervoltage release provided for this purpose, the operation is to be instantaneous
when preventing closure of the breaker, but is to be delayed for discrimination purposes when
tripping a breaker.
9.7 Protection for Direct Current (DC) Generators

9.7.1 Instantaneous Trip
DC generator circuit breakers are to be provided with an instantaneous trip set below the generator
maximum short-circuit current and are to coordinate with the trip settings of feeder circuit breakers
supplied by the generator.
9.7.2(a) Reverse Current Protection. DC generators arranged for parallel operation with other
DC generators or with an accumulator battery are to be provided with instantaneous or short-time
delayed reverse current protection. The setting of the protection devices is to be within the power
range specified by 4-6-2/9.5.2(a). When an equalizer connection is provided, the reverse current
device is to be connected on the pole opposite to the equalizer connection where the series
compound winding for the generator is connected. Reverse current protection is to be adequate to
deal effectively with reverse current conditions emanating from the distribution system (e.g.,
electric driven cargo winches).
9.7.2(b) Generator Ammeter Shunts. Generator ammeter shunts are to be so located that the
ammeters indicate total generator current.
9.7.2(c) Undervoltage Protection. Requirements for AC generator in 4-6-2/9.5.2(c) are also
applicable to DC generator.
9.9 Protection for Accumulator Batteries

Accumulator (storage) batteries, other than engine starting batteries, are to be protected against overload
and short circuits by devices placed as near as practicable to the batteries, but outside of the battery rooms,
lockers or boxes, except that the emergency batteries supplying essential services are to have short circuit
protection only. Fuses may be used for the protection of emergency lighting storage batteries instead of
circuit breakers up to and including 320 amperes rating. The charging equipment, except converters, for all
batteries with a voltage of more than 20% of the line voltage is to be provided with reverse current protection.
9.11 Protection for External or Shore Power Supply

9.11.1 General
Where arrangements are made for the supply of electricity from a source on shore or other external
source, permanently fixed cables from the external supply or shore connection box to the main or
emergency switchboard are to be protected by fuses or circuit breakers located at the connection
box.
9.11.2 Interlocking Arrangement
Where the generator is not arranged for parallel operation with the external or shore power supply,
an interlocking arrangement is to be provided for the circuit breakers or disconnecting devices
between the generator and the external or shore power supply in order to safeguard from connecting
unlike power sources to the same bus.
9.13 Protection for Motor Branch Circuits

9.13.1 General
Trip elements of circuit breaker for starting and for short-circuit protection are to be in accordance
with 4-6-2/9.13.2 or 4-6-2/9.13.3, except that circuit breakers having only instantaneous trips may
be provided as part of the motor control center. Where circuit breakers having only instantaneous
trips are provided, the motor running protective device is to open all conductors, and the motor
controller is to be capable of opening the circuit without damage to itself resulting from a current
up to the setting of the circuit breaker. Circuit-disconnecting devices are to be provided for each
motor branch circuit and to be in accordance with 4-6-3/3.13.2 and 4-6-4/7.17.2.
9.13.2 Direct-current Motor Branch Circuits
The maximum fuse rating or the setting of the time-delay trip element is to be 150% of the full-
load rating of the motor served. If that rating or setting is not available, the next higher available
rating or setting may be used.
9.13.3 Alternating-current Motor Branch Circuits
The maximum fuse rating or setting of the trip element is to be the value stated below. If that
rating or setting is not available, the next higher available rating or setting may be used.
Rating or Setting in % Motor

Type of Motor
Full-load Current
Squirrel-cage and 250
Synchronous Full-voltage,
Reactor or Resistor-starting
Autotransformer Starting 200
Wound Rotor 150
When fuses are used to protect polyphase motor circuits, it is to be arranged to protect against
single-phasing.
The setting of magnetic instantaneous trips for short-circuit protection only is to exceed the transient
current inrush of the motor, and to be the standard value nearest to, but not less than, 10 times full-
load motor current.
9.13.4 Motor Running Protection
Running protection is to be provided for all motors having a power rating exceeding 0.5 kW,
except that such protection is not to be provided for steering gear motors (see 4-6-2/11.3). The
running protection is to be set between 100% and 125% of the motor rated current.
For athwartship thrusters having only instantaneous trips, a motor overload alarm in the wheelhouse
is acceptable in lieu of the motor running protection.
9.13.5 Undervoltage Protection and Undervoltage Release

Undervoltage protection is to be provided for motors having power rating exceeding 0.5 kW (0.7 hp)
to prevent undesired restarting upon restoration of the normal voltage, after a stoppage due to a
low voltage condition or voltage failure condition.
Undervoltage release is to be provided for the following motors unless the automatic restart upon
restoration of the normal voltage will cause hazardous conditions:
i) Primary essential services (see 4-6-1/Table 4).
ii) Only those secondary essential services (see 4-6-1/Table 5) necessary for safety, such as:
• Fire pumps and other fire extinguishing medium pumps.
• Ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms where they may prevent the normal
operation of the propulsion machinery (See Note 1 below)
Special attention is to be paid to the starting currents due to a group of motors with undervoltage
release controllers being restarted automatically upon restoration of the normal voltage. Means
such as sequential starting is to be provided to limit excessive starting current, where necessary.
Note 1: Undervoltage protection is to be provided for ventilation fans for engine and boiler room, which are
supplied by an emergency source of power for the purpose of removing smoke from the space after a fire
has been extinguished.
9.15 Protection for Transformer Circuits

9.15.1 Setting of Overcurrent Device
Each power and lighting transformer feeder is to be protected by an overcurrent device rated or set
at a value not more than 125% of rated primary current. When a transformer is provided with an
overcurrent device in the secondary circuit rated or set at not more than 125% of rated secondary
current, the feeder overcurrent device may be rated or set at a value less than 250% of the rated
primary current.
When the transformers are arranged for parallel operation, means are to be provided to disconnect
the transformer from the secondary circuit. Where power can be fed into secondary windings,
short-circuit protection (i.e., short-time delay trips) is to be provided in the secondary connections.
In addition, when the disconnecting device in primary side of the transformer is opened due to any
reason (e.g., the short-circuit protection, overload protection, or manual operation for opening),
the disconnecting device in the secondary side of the transformer is to be arranged to open the
circuit automatically.
9.17 Protection for Meters, Pilot Lamps and Control Circuits

Indicating and measuring devices are to be protected by means of fuses or current limiting devices. For
devices such as voltage regulators where interruption of the circuit may have serious consequences, fuses
are not to be used. If fuses are not used, means are to be provided to prevent fire in the unprotected part of
installation. Fuses are to be placed as near as possible to the tapping from the supply.
9.19 Protection of Harmonic Filter Circuits (2014)

Harmonic filters circuits shall be protected against overload and short-circuit. An alarm is to be initiated in
a continuously manned location in the event of an activation of overload or short-circuit protection.
In cases where multiple harmonic filter circuits are used in series or in parallel, current imbalance between
the different filter circuits is to be continuously monitored. The total rms current into each phase of a
passive harmonic filter circuit is also to be monitored. Detection of a current imbalance shall be alarmed in
a continuously manned location. If the current imbalance exceeds the ratings of the individual filter circuit
components, the appropriate circuits shall automatically trip and be prevented from interacting with other
parts of the electrical network.
Harmonic filters that contain capacitors are to have means of monitoring and of providing advance warning
of capacitor(s) deterioration. Harmonic filters containing oil filled capacitors are to be provided with suitable
means of monitoring oil temperature or capacitor internal pressure. Refer to 4-5-2/9.5 for additional
requirements. Detection of capacitor(s) deterioration shall be alarmed locally at the equipment and in a
continuously manned location. Power to the harmonic filter circuit containing the deteriorated capacitor(s)
shall be automatically disconnected and the capacitor discharged safely upon detection of deterioration.
In cases where provisions for automatic/manual switching and/or disconnection of harmonic filter circuits
are provided, there are to be provisions to prevent transient voltages in the system and to automatically
discharge the capacitors in the harmonic filter circuits before they can be put back on-line.
Capacitors used in harmonic filters/capacitor banks are to be prevented from producing a leading system
power factor which could potentially lead to generator(s) becoming self-excited. In cases where a leading
power factor condition approaches the point of the generator(s) becoming self-excited, the appropriate
capacitive circuits shall be automatically disconnected and prevented from interacting with the rest of the
electrical network.
11 System for Steering Gear
11.1 Power Supply Feeder (1 July 2016)

Each electric or electro-hydraulic steering gear is to be served by at least two exclusive circuits fed directly
from the main switchboard. However, one of the circuits may be supplied through the emergency switchboard.
For craft fitted with alternative propulsion and steering arrangements, such as azimuthing propulsors,
where the propulsion power exceeds 2,500 kW per thruster unit, see 4-3-5/5.13.3 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
An auxiliary electric or electro-hydraulic steering gear associated with a main electric or electro-hydraulic
steering gear may be connected to one of the circuits supplying this main steering gear. The circuits supplying
an electric or electro-hydraulic steering gear are to have adequate rating for supplying all motors, control
system and instrumentation which are normally connected to them and operated simultaneously. The
circuits are to be separated throughout their length as widely as is practicable.
11.3 Protection for Steering Gear Circuit

11.3.1 Short Circuit Protection
Each steering gear feeder is to be provided with short-circuit protection which is to be located at
the main or emergency switchboard. Long term overcurrent protection is not to be provided for
steering gear motors.
11.3.1(a) Direct Current (DC) Motors. For DC motors, the feeder circuit breaker is to be set to
trip instantaneously at not less than 300% and not more than 375% of the rated full-load current of
the steering-gear motor, except that the feeder circuit breaker on the emergency switchboard may
be set to trip at not less than 200%.
11.3.1(b) Alternating Current (AC) Motors. For AC motors, the protection against excess current,
including starting current, if provided, is to be for not less than twice the full load current of the
motor or circuit so protected, and is to be arranged to permit the passage of the appropriate starting
currents.
11.3.1(c) Fuses as Motor-feeder Protection. The use of fuses instead of circuit breakers for steering
gear motor feeder short-circuit protection is not permitted.
11.3.1(d) Control System Power Supply Circuit. The power supply circuit for steering gear control
system is to be provided with short circuit protection only. See also 4-3-3/11.5.
11.3.2 Undervoltage Release
Power unit motor controllers and other automatic motor controllers are to be fitted with undervoltage
release.
11.5 Emergency Power Supply

Where the rudder stock is required by 3-2-8/7.1 to be over 230 mm (9 in.) diameter using Ks = 1.0 in way
of the tiller, excluding strengthening for navigation in ice, an alternative power supply, sufficient at least to
supply the steering gear power unit and also its associated control system and rudder angle indicator, is to
be provided automatically within 45 seconds either from the emergency source of electrical power or from
an independent source of power located in the steering gear compartment. The steering gear power unit
under alternative power supply is to be capable of moving the rudder from 15 degrees on one side to 15
degrees on the other side in not more than 60 seconds with the craft at the summer draft while running at
one half the maximum speed ahead or 7 knots, whichever is the greater. The alternative power supply is to
have a capacity for at least 10 minutes of continuous operation. See 4-6-2/5.3.5.
11.7 Controls, Instrumentation, and Alarms

See 4-3-3/11.
13 Lighting and Navigation Light Systems
13.1 Lighting System

13.1.1 Main Lighting System
A main electric lighting system is to provide illumination throughout those parts of the craft
normally accessible to and used by passengers or crew. It is to be supplied from the main source
of electrical power.
13.1.2 System Arrangement
13.1.2(a) Main Lighting System. The arrangement of the main electric lighting system is to be
such that a fire or other casualty in spaces containing the main source of electrical power, associated
transforming equipment, if any, the main switchboard and the main lighting switchboard will not
render the emergency electric lighting system required by 4-6-2/5.3.2 of this Section or 5C-7-5/13.5.3
of the Steel Vessel Rules inoperative.
13.1.2(b) Emergency Lighting System. The arrangement of the emergency electric lighting system
is to be such that a fire or other casualty in spaces containing the emergency source of electrical
power, associated transforming equipment, if any, the emergency switchboard and the emergency
lighting switchboard will not render the main electric lighting system required by 4-6-2/13.1.1
inoperative.
13.1.3 Lighting Circuits
13.1.3(a) Machinery Space and Accommodation Spaces . In spaces such as:
• Public spaces
• Category A machinery spaces
• Galleys
• Corridors
• Stairways leading to boat-decks, including stairtowers and escape trunks
there is to be more than one final sub-circuit for lighting, one of which may be supplied from the
emergency switchboard in such a way that failure of any one circuit does not leave these spaces in
darkness.
13.1.3(b) Cargo Spaces. Fixed lighting circuits in cargo spaces are to be controlled by multipole-
linked switches situated outside of the cargo spaces. Means are to be provided on the multipole
linked switches to indicate the live status of circuits.
13.1.4 Protection for Lighting Circuits
Lighting circuits are to be protected against overload and short-circuit. Overload protective
devices are to be rated or set at not more than 30 amperes. The connected load is not to exceed the
lesser of the rated current carrying capacity of the conductor or 80% of the overload protective
device rating or setting. The control switches are to be rated for the load controlled.
13.3 Navigation Light System

13.3.1 Feeders
The masthead, side and stern lights are to be separately connected to a distribution board reserved
for navigation lights, placed in an accessible position on the bridge, and connected directly or through
transformers to the main or emergency switchboard. These lights are to be fitted with duplicate
lamps or other dual light sources and are to be controlled by an indicator panel. Provision is to be
made on the bridge for the navigation lights to be transferred to an alternative supply. See
4-6-2/5.3.2 for power supply.
13.3.2 Navigation Light Indicator
Each navigation light, as listed in 4-6-2/13.3.1, is to be provided with an indicator panel which
gives audible and/or visual warning automatically in the event of extinction of the light. If an
audible device is used, it is to be connected to a separate source of supply, for example, a primary
or accumulator (storage) battery. If a visual signal is used which is connected in series with the
navigation light, means are to be provided to prevent the extinction of the navigation light due to
failure of the visual signal. A means for disconnection of each navigation light circuit is to be
provided at the indicator panel.
13.3.3 Protection
Each navigation light, as listed in 4-6-2/13.3.1, is to be protected by a fuse or circuit breaker in
each insulated pole. Similarly, the navigation light indicator panel is to be provided with a fused-
feeder disconnect double-pole switch or double-pole circuit breaker which may be fitted on the
distribution board or the indicator panel. The rating of the fuses or circuit breaker setting is to be
at least twice that of the largest branch fuse or the circuit breaker setting and greater than the
maximum panel load.
15 Interior Communication Systems
15.1 Navigation Bridge

15.1.1 General
At least two independent means are to be provided for communicating orders from the navigation
bridge to the position in the machinery space or in the control room from which the speed and
direction of thrust of the propellers are normally controlled. Appropriate means of communication
are to be provided to any other positions from which the main propulsion machinery may be
controlled. See 4-6-2/5.3.2 for power supply.
15.1.2 Engine Order Telegraph
One of the communicating means between the navigation bridge and the main propulsion control
position is to be an engine room telegraph which provides visual indication of the orders and responses
both in the machinery space and on the navigation bridge. Final sub-circuit for power supply to this
system is to be independent of other electrical systems and control, monitoring and alarm systems.
See 4-6-2/5.3.2 for power supply. Communication network and power supply circuit for this may be
combined with the engine order telegraph system specified in 4-6-2/15.3. For craft less than 500 GT,
an engine order telegraph need not be provided if the propulsion plant is controlled entirely from the
navigation bridge with no means of normal engine control from the engine room.
15.3 Main Propulsion Control Stations

A common talking means of voice communication and calling or engine order telegraph repeater is to be
provided between the main propulsion control station and local control positions for main propulsion engines
and controllable pitch propellers. Voice communication systems are to provide the capability of carrying
on a conversation while the craft is being navigated. Final sub-circuit for power supply to these are to be
independent of other electrical systems and the control, monitoring and alarm systems. Communication
network and power supply circuit for the voice communication system may be combined with the system
required in 4-6-2/15.5.
15.5 Voice Communications

15.5.1 Propulsion and Steering Control Stations
A common talking means of voice communication and calling is to be provided between the
navigation bridge, main propulsion control station and the steering gear compartment so that the
simultaneous talking among these spaces is possible at all times and the calling to these spaces is
always possible even if the line is busy.
15.5.2 Elevator
Where an elevator is installed, a telephone is to be permanently installed in all cars and connected
to a continuously manned area. The telephone may be sound powered, battery operated or electrically
powered from the emergency source of power.
15.5.3 Independence of Power Supply Circuit
Final sub-circuit for power supply to these voice communication systems is to be independent of other
electrical systems and control, monitoring and alarm systems. See 4-6-2/5.3.2 for power supply.
15.7 Emergency and Interior-communication Switchboard

Emergency and interior-communication switchboards, when fitted, are to comply with the applicable parts
of 4-6-4/7, and attention is directed to the requirements of the governmental authority whose flag the craft flies.
15.9 Public Address System

Craft with the keel laid or in similar stage of construction on or after 1 July 1998 are to meet the following
requirements. A public address system is to be provided complying with subparagraphs 4-6-2/15.9.1
through 4-6-2/15.9.3, as follows:
15.9.1
The system is to be a loud speaker installation enabling the broadcast of messages to all spaces where
crew members or passengers, or both, are normally present, and to muster stations. The system is
to provide for the broadcast of messages from the navigation bridge and other places onboard, as may
be required by ABS, with an override function so that all emergency messages may be broadcast if
any loudspeaker in the spaces concerned has been turned off, its volume has been turned down or
the public address system is in use for other purposes.
The system is to be installed with acoustic marginal conditions and is not to require any action
from the addressee. The system is to be protected against unauthorized use.
15.9.2
With the underway in normal conditions, the minimum sound pressure levels for broadcasting
emergency announcements in interior spaces are to be 75 dB (A) and at least 20 dB (A) above the
corresponding speech interference level.
15.9.3
The system is to be connected to the emergency source of power.
For passenger craft, see Section 5-1-1.
15.9.4 (2013)
Where a single system serves for both public address and general emergency alarm functions, the
system is to be arranged so that a single failure is not to cause the loss of both systems and is to
minimize the effect of a single failure. The major system components, such as power supply unit,
amplifier, alarm tone generator, etc., are to be duplicated. Power supply is to comply with
4-6-2/17.1.2(b) and 4-6-2/17.1.2(c).
For cargo craft, the coverage provided by the arrangement of the system loops and speakers is to
be such that after a single failure, the announcements and alarms are still audible in all spaces.
Duplication of system loops and speakers in each room or space is not required provided the
announcements and alarms are still audible in all spaces.
For passenger craft, a single system serving for both public address and general emergency alarm
functions would still be required to have at least two loops sufficiently separated throughout their
length with two separate and independent amplifiers. See 5C-7-5/13.15ii) of the Steel Vessel Rules.
17 Manually Operated Alarms
17.1 General Emergency Alarm System

17.1.1 General
Each craft over 100 GT is to be fitted with a general emergency alarm system, complying with the
requirements of 4-6-2/17.1.2, to summon crew to muster stations and initiate the actions included
in the muster list. The system is to be supplemented by either a public address system, in
accordance with 4-6-2/15.9, or other suitable means of communication. Any entertainment sound
system is to be automatically turned off when the general emergency alarm is activated. For
passenger craft, see also 5C-7-5/13.13 and 5C-7-5/13.15 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
17.1.2 System Requirements
17.1.2(a) The general emergency alarm system is to be capable of sounding the general emergency
alarm signal consisting of seven or more short blasts followed by one long blast on the ship’s
whistle or siren and additionally on an electrically operated bell or klaxon or other equivalent warning
system, which is to be powered from the craft’s main supply and the emergency source of
electrical power required by 4-6-2/5.
17.1.2(b) There are to be not less than two sources of power supply for the electrical equipment
used in the operation of the General Emergency Alarm System, one of which is to be from the
emergency switchboard and the other from the main switchboard. The supply is to be provided by
separate feeders reserved solely for that purpose. Such feeders are to run to an automatic change-
over switch situated in, or adjacent to, the main general emergency alarm control panel.
17.1.2(c) An alarm is to be provided to indicate when there is a loss of power in any one of the
feeders required by 4-6-2/17.1.2(b).
17.1.2(d) As an alternative to two feeders as described in 4-6-2/17.1.2(b), a battery may be considered
as one of the required sources, provided the battery has the capacity of at least 30 minutes of
continuous operation for alarming and 18 hours in standby. A low voltage alarm for the battery
and the battery charger output is to be provided. The battery charger is to be supplied from the
emergency switchboard.
17.1.2(e) The system is to be capable of operation from the navigation bridge and, except for
ship’s whistle, also from other strategic points. The system is to be audible throughout all of the
accommodation and normal crew working spaces. The alarm is to continue to function after it has
been triggered until it is manually turned off or is temporarily interrupted by a message on the
public address system.
17.1.2(f) (2014) The minimum sound pressure levels for the emergency alarm tone in interior
spaces are to be 80 dB and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels existing during normal
equipment operation with the craft underway in moderate weather.
17.1.2(g) The sound pressure levels at the sleeping position in cabins and in cabin bathrooms are
to be at least 75 dB (A) and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels. (Refer to Code on
Alarms and Indicators adopted by IMO Resolution A.830 (19).)
17.3 Engineers’ Alarm

On craft of 500 gross tons and over, an engineers’ alarm operable from the centralized propulsion machinery
control station in the engine room or at the propulsion machinery local control position, as appropriate, is
to be provided. It is to be audible in each engineer’s cabin, and its sound pressure level is to comply with
4-6-2/17.1.2. See 4-6-2/5.3.3 for power supply.
17.5 Refrigerated Space Alarm

Fan and diffuser rooms serving subfreezing compartments are to be provided with a device capable of
activating an audible and visual alarm in a manned control center and operable from within the latter space
for the protection of personnel. See 4-6-2/5.3.3 for power supply.
17.7 Elevator
A device which will activate an audible and visual alarm in a manned control center is to be provided in all cars.
Such alarm system is to be independent of power and control systems of the elevator. See 4-6-2/5.3.3(e)
for power supply.
19 Fire Protection and Fire Detection Systems
19.1 Emergency Stop

19.1.1 Ventilation System (2013)
19.1.1(a) General. All electrical ventilation systems are to be provided with means for stopping
the motors in case of fire or other emergency. These requirements do not apply to closed re-circulating
systems within a single space. For passenger craft, the ventilation fans of each zone in the
accommodation spaces are to be capable of being independently controlled from a continuously
manned control station See also 4-6-6/1.3.6 and 4-5-1/5.1.
19.1.1(b) Propulsion Machinery Space Ventilation. Machinery-space ventilation is to be provided
with means for stopping the ventilation fans. The means for stopping the power ventilation serving
machinery spaces is to be entirely separate from the means for stopping the ventilation of spaces
in 4-6-2/19.1.1(c) and 4-6-2/19.1.1(d).
19.1.1(c) Machinery Spaces other than Propulsion Machinery Spaces. Power ventilation systems
serving these spaces are to be fitted with means for stopping the ventilation fan motors in the event of
fire. The means for stopping the power ventilation serving these spaces is to be entirely separate from
the means for stopping the ventilation of spaces in 4-6-2/19.1.1(b) and 4-6-2/19.1.1(d). See 4-5-1/5.1.
19.1.1(d) Accommodation Spaces, Service Spaces, Control Stations and Other Spaces. A control
station for all other power ventilation systems is to be located in a centralized fire-fighting location or
navigation bridge, or in an accessible position leading to, but outside of, the space ventilated.
19.1.2 Other Auxiliaries
See 4-4-4/3.9 and 4-5-1/5.3 for emergency tripping and emergency stop for other auxiliaries, such
as forced and induced draft fans, fuel oil units, lubricating oil service pumps, thermal oil circulating
pumps and oil separators (purifiers).
19.3 Fire Detection and Alarm System

See 4-5-1/13, 4-5-2/25.1, and 4-7-3/21.7.
21 Special Requirements for Non-metallic Craft

The following is applicable to non-metallic craft:
21.1 Bonding of Metal Parts

In order to minimize the risk of fire, structural damage, electrical shock and radio interference due to
lighting strike or electrostatic discharge, all metal parts of the craft should be bonded together, in so far as
possible in consideration of galvanic corrosion between dissimilar metals, to form a continuous electrical
system, suitable for the earth return of electrical equipment and to connect the craft to the water when
waterborne. The bonding of isolated components inside the structure is not generally necessary, except in
fuel tanks.
21.3 Pressure Refueling Points

Each pressure refueling point should be provided with a means of bonding the fueling equipment to the
craft.
21.5 Metallic Pipes

Metallic pipes capable of generating electrostatic discharges, due to the flow of liquids and gases should be
bonded so as to be electrically continuous throughout their length and should be adequately earthed.
21.7 Primary Conductors for Lightning Discharge

Primary conductors provided for lightning discharge currents should have a minimum cross-section of
50 mm2 in copper or equivalent surge-carrying capacity in aluminum.
21.9 Secondary Conductors

Secondary conductors provided for the equalization of static discharges, bonding of equipment, etc., but
not for carrying lighting discharges should have a minimum cross section of 6.5 mm2 copper or equivalent
surge current carrying capacity in aluminum.
21.11 Electrical Resistance and Cross Section of Bonding Path

The electrical resistance between bonded objects and the basic structure should not exceed 0.05 Ohms
except where it can be demonstrated that a higher resistance will not cause a hazard. The bonding path
should have sufficient cross-sectional area to carry the maximum current likely to be imposed on it without
excessive voltage drop.
21.13 Lightning Protection System

A lightning protection system consisting of a copper spike, a conductor of a minimum cross-section per
4-6-2/21.7 above and a grounding plate of not less than 450 cm2 (1 ft2) is to be installed. The spike is to
project at least 150 mm (6 in.) above the uppermost part of the craft, the conductor is to run clear of metal
objects and as straight as practicable, and the grounding plate is to be located so that it is immersed under
all conditions of heel.
PART Section 3: Shipboard Installation
4
SECTION 3 Shipboard Installation
1.1 Booklet of Standard Details (2014)

A booklet of the standard wiring practices and details, including such items as cable supports, earthing
details, bulkhead and deck penetrations, cable joints and sealing, cable splicing, watertight and explosion-
proof connections to equipment, earthing and bonding connections, etc., as applicable, is to be submitted.
Where cable penetration methods for A- or B-class decks or bulkheads are shown, evidence of approval by
an Administration signatory to 1974 SOLAS as amended is also to be submitted.
For high voltage systems see installation requirements given in 4-6-5/1.9.3.
For high voltage cables the minimum cable bending radii and securing arrangements, taking the relevant
recommendations of the cable manufacturer into consideration, are to be included. Cable tray segregation
(HV to HV and HV to LV arrangements) are also to be included.
1.3 Arrangement of Electrical Equipment

A general arrangement plan showing the location of at least the following electrical equipment is to be
submitted for review.
• Generator, Essential Motor and Transformer
• Battery
• Switchboard, Battery Charger and Motor Controller
• Emergency Lighting Fixture
• General Emergency Alarm Device and Alarm Actuator
• Detector, Manual Call Point and Alarm Panel for Fire Detection and Alarm System
• Certified-safe Type Equipment
Where cable splices or cable junction boxes are provided, locations of the splices and cable junction boxes
together with the information of their services are also to be submitted for review.
1.5 Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas

A plan showing hazardous areas is to be submitted for review together with the following:
• A list/booklet of intended electrical equipment in the indicated hazardous areas, including a description
of the equipment, applicable degree of protection and ratings. See 4-6-3/9.3.
• For intrinsically-safe systems, also wiring plans, installation instructions with any restrictions imposed
by the certification agency.
• Detail of installation for echo sounder, speed log and impressed current cathodic protection system
where located in these areas.
When the selection of the equipment has been finalized, a list/booklet identifying all equipment in the hazardous
areas, their method of protection (flameproof, intrinsically safe, etc.), rating (flammable gas group and
temperature class), manufacturer’s name, model number and evidence of certification is to be submitted for
review. A copy of this list/booklet is to be maintained onboard for future reference. See 4-6-3/9.1.4.
Section 3 Shipboard Installation 4-6-3
1.7 Maintenance Schedule of Batteries

Maintenance Schedule of batteries for essential and emergency services. See 4-6-3/3.7.5.
3 Equipment Installation and Arrangement
3.1 General Consideration

3.1.1 Equipment Location
3.1.1(a) General. Electrical equipment is to be so placed or protected as to minimize the probability
of mechanical injury or damage from the accumulation of dust, oil vapors, steam or dripping
liquids. Equipment liable to generate arc is to be ventilated or placed in a compartment ventilated
to avoid accumulation of flammable gases, acid fumes and oil vapors. See 4-6-3/Table 1 for the
required degree of protection for various locations.
3.1.1(b) Equipment in Areas Affected by Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist
Fire Extinguishing System in Machinery Spaces (2014). Electrical and electronic equipment within
areas affected by Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing
Systems are to be suitable for use in the affected area. See 4-6-3/Figure 1. Where enclosures have
a degree of protection lower than IP44, evidence of suitability for use in these areas is to be submitted
to ABS taking into account:
i) The actual Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing
system being used and its installation arrangements, and
ii) The equipment design and layout (e.g., position of inlet ventilation openings, filters, baffles,
etc.) to prevent or restrict the ingress of water mist/spray into the equipment. The cooling
airflow for the equipment is to be maintained.
Note:
Additional precautions may be required to be taken with respect to:
a. Tracking as the result of water entering the equipment
b. Potential damage as the result of residual salts from sea water systems
c. High voltage installations
d. Personnel protection against electric shock
Equipment may require maintenance after being subjected to water mist/spray.
FIGURE 1
Example of Area Affected by Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local
Water-mist Fire Extinguishing System in Machinery Spaces (2014)
Water-spray or Water-mist Nozzle
Diesel Engine for Generator
Generator
Affected area where water may

extend.
3.1.2 Protection from Bilge Water

All generators, motors and electric couplings are to be so arranged that they cannot be damaged by
bilge water; and, if necessary, a watertight coaming is to be provided to form a well around the
base of such equipment with provision for removing water from the well.
3.1.3 Accessibility
The design and arrangement of electrical apparatus is to provide accessibility to parts requiring
inspection or adjustment. Armature and field coils, rotors and revolving fields are to be removable
and where air ducts are used, there are to be means of access.
3.3 Generators
All generators are to be located with their shafts in a fore-and-aft direction on the craft and are to operate
satisfactorily in accordance with the inclination requirements of 4-1-1/17. Where it is not practicable to
mount the generators with the armature shafts in the fore-and-aft direction, their lubrication will require
special consideration. Provision is to be made to prevent oil or oil vapor from passing into the machine
windings.
3.5 Ship Service Motors

3.5.1 General
Motors for use in the machinery space above the floor plate or spaces where subject to mechanical
injury or dripping of oil or water are to have an enclosure of at least IP22 protection, in accordance
with 4-6-3/Table 1. However, where they are protected by drip covers, they may have an enclosure
of a lower protection grade than IP22. The motors having a protection enclosure of IP22 or lower
are to be installed at a location high enough to avoid bilge water. Motors below the level of the
floor plates are to have an enclosure of at least IP44 protection. Where motors intended for service
at sea are not mounted with the rotor shafts in the fore-and-aft direction, the type of bearing and
lubrication will require special consideration.
3.5.2 Pump Motors

Motors for operating plunger and close-coupled pumps are to have the driving end entirely enclosed
or designed to prevent leakage from entering the motor.
3.5.3 Motors on Weather Decks
Motors for use on weather decks are to have an enclosure of at least IP56 protection or are to be
enclosed in watertight housings.
3.5.4 Motors Below Decks
Motors below decks are to be installed at a location as dry as practicable and away from steam,
water and oil piping.
3.7 Accumulator Batteries

3.7.1 General
The following requirements are applicable to permanently installed power, control and monitoring
storage batteries of acid or alkaline types. Batteries are to be so arranged that the trays are accessible
and provided with not less than 254 mm (10 in.) headroom. Where a relief valve is provided for
discharging excessive gas due to overcharge, arrangements are to be made for releasing the gas to
the weather deck away from any source of ignition.
3.7.2 Battery Installation and Arrangements
3.7.2(a) Large Batteries (2016). Large storage batteries, those connected to a charging device
with an output of more than 2 kW, are to be installed in a room assigned to the battery only, but
may be installed in a deck locker if such a room is not available. No electrical equipment is to be
installed in the battery rooms unless essential for the operational purposes and certified safe for
battery room atmosphere. Electrical equipment installed in battery rooms may be any of the types
indicated in 4-6-3/9.1.1 and is to be IEC Publication 60079-20-1 group IIC class T1.
3.7.2(b) Moderate-size Batteries. Batteries of moderate size, those connected to a charging
device with a power output of 0.2 kW up to and including 2 kW, may be installed in the battery
room or may be installed in battery lockers or deck boxes in the emergency generator room, machinery
space or other suitable location. Cranking batteries are to be located as closely as possible to the
engine or engines served.
3.7.2(c) Small Batteries. Small batteries are to be installed in a battery box and may be located
as desired, except they are not to be located in sleeping quarters unless hermetically sealed.
3.7.2(d) Low-hydrogen-emission Battery Installations. A low-hydrogen-emission battery installation
with a battery charger having a charging rate of a large or moderate battery size installation may
be treated as a moderate or small battery installation, respectively, if the following are met:
i) Calculations under the worst case charging conditions are submitted that demonstrate that
the low-hydrogen-emission battery installation does not emit more hydrogen under similar
charging conditions than a bank of standard lead acid batteries supplied by a 2 kW charger
for a moderate battery installation or 0.2 kW charger for a small battery installation, and
ii) A warning notice is placed to notify maintenance personnel that additional batteries are
not to be installed, and batteries are only to be replaced by other batteries of the same or
lower hydrogen emission rate.
3.7.2(e) Battery Trays. Trays for batteries are to be chocked with wood strips or equivalent to prevent
movement, and each tray is to be fitted with nonabsorbent insulating supports on the bottom and
with similar spacer blocks at the sides or with equivalent provision to secure air-circulation space
all around each tray.
3.7.2(f) Identification of Battery Types. Lead-acid batteries and alkaline batteries, when placed
in the same battery compartment, are to be effectively identified as to type and segregated.
3.7.3 Ventilation
3.7.3(a) Battery Rooms. Battery rooms are to be ventilated to avoid accumulation of flammable
gas. Natural ventilation may be employed if ducts are run directly from the top of the battery room
to the open air above.
If natural ventilation is impractical, mechanical exhaust ventilation is to be provided with fan intake
at the top of the room. Fans are to be of non-sparking construction in accordance with 4-6-3/9.7
and capable of completely changing the air in the battery room in not more than two minutes.
Alternatively, a lesser ventilation rate may be considered, provided that satisfactory calculations
are submitted substantiating that adequate ventilation is available to maintain the flammable gases
within the battery room to a level below the lower explosive limit (L.E.L.) at the maximum battery
charging current. Where the ventilation rate is based on low hydrogen emission type batteries, a
warning notice to this effect is to be provided in a visible place in the battery room. Openings for
air inlet are to be provided near the floor.
3.7.3(b) Battery Lockers. Battery lockers are to be ventilated, if practicable, similarly to battery
rooms by a duct led from the top of the locker to the open air or to an exhaust ventilation duct.
Louvers or equivalent are to be provided near the bottom for entrance of air.
3.7.3(c) Deck Boxes. Deck boxes are to be provided with a duct from the top of the box, terminating
in a goose neck, mushroom head or equivalent to prevent entrance of water. Holes for air inlet are
to be provided on at least two opposite sides of the box. The entire deck boxes, including openings
for ventilation, is to be weathertight to prevent entrance of spray or rain.
3.7.3(d) Small Battery Boxes. Boxes for small batteries require no ventilation other than openings
near the top to permit escape of gas.
3.7.4 Protection from Corrosion
The interiors of battery rooms, including the structural parts and shelves therein, as well as ventilation
inlets and outlets are to be painted with corrosion-resistant paint. Shelves in battery rooms or lockers
for acid batteries are to have a watertight lining of sheet lead not less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) on all
sides. For alkaline batteries, the shelves are to be similarly lined with steel not less than 0.8 mm
(1/32 in.) thick. Alternatively, a battery room may be fitted with a watertight lead pan, steel for
alkaline batteries, over the entire deck, carried up not less than 152 mm (6 in.) on all sides. Deck
boxes are to be lined in accordance with the above alternative method. Boxes for small batteries
are to be lined to a depth of 76 mm (3 in.), consistent with the methods described above.
3.7.5 Maintenance of Batteries
3.7.5(a) Maintenance Schedule of Batteries (1 July 2016). Where batteries are fitted for use for
essential and emergency services, a maintenance schedule of such batteries is to be provided and
maintained.
The schedule is to include all batteries used for essential and emergency services, including system
batteries installed in battery rooms, battery lockers and deck boxes as well as batteries installed
within vendor supplied equipment. Examples of batteries included with equipment are:
• Computer equipment and programmable logic controllers (PLC) used in computer based systems
and programmable electronic systems, when used for essential or emergency services.
• Navigation equipment, such as the equipment required by chapter 13 and 14 of the International
Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft.
The schedule is to be submitted for review, during their plan approval or the new building survey,
and is to include at least the following information regarding the batteries.
• Type and manufacturer’s type designation
• Voltage and ampere-hour rating
• Location
• Equipment and/or system(s) served
• Maintenance/replacement cycle dates

• Date(s) of last maintenance and/or replacement
• For replacement batteries in storage, the date of manufacture and shelf life (See Note below)
Note: Shelf life is the duration of storage under specified conditions at the end of which a battery retains the
ability to give a specified performance.
3.7.5(b) Procedure of maintenance. Procedures are to be put in place to show that, where batteries
are replaced, they are to be of an equivalent performance type. Details of the schedule, procedures,
and the maintenance records are to be included in the ship’s safety management system and
integrated into the ship’s operational maintenance routine, as appropriate, which are to be verified
by the Surveyor.
3.7.6 Replacement of Batteries
Where a vented type battery (See Note 1) replaces a valve-regulated, sealed type battery (See Note 2),
the requirements in 4-6-3/3.7.2 and 4-6-3/3.7.3 are to be complied with on the basis of the charging
capacity.
Notes:
1 A vented battery is one in which the cells have a cover provided with an opening through which
products of electrolysis and evaporation are allowed to escape freely from the cells to atmosphere.
2 A valve-regulated battery is one in which cells are closed but have an arrangement (valve)
which allows the escape of gas if the internal pressure exceeds a predetermined value.
3.9 Switchboard (2015)

Switchboards are to be so arranged as to give easy access as may be needed to apparatus and equipment,
without danger to personnel. Switchboards are to be located in a dry place so as to provide a clear working
space of at least 900 mm (35 in.) at the front of the switchboard and a clearance of at least 600 mm (24 in.)
at the rear which may be reduced to 457 mm (18 in.) in way of stiffeners or frames, except that for
switchboards which are enclosed at the rear and are fully serviceable from the front, clearance at the rear
will not be required unless necessary for cooling. Switchboards are to be secured to a solid foundation.
They are to be self-supported or be braced to the bulkhead or the deck above. In case the last method is
used, means of bracing is to be flexible to allow deflection of the deck without buckling the assembly
structure.
3.11 Distribution Boards

3.11.1 Location and Protection
Distribution boards are to be located in accessible positions and not in such space as bunkers,
storerooms, cargo holds or compartments allotted alternately to passengers or cargo. Distribution
boards may be located behind panels/linings within accommodation spaces, including stairway
enclosures, without the need to categorize the space to a fire integrity standard, provided no provision
is made for storage. Distribution boards are to have approved noncombustible, non-hygroscopic
enclosures. Metal enclosures and all exposed metal parts in nonmetallic enclosures are to be
earthed to the craft’s structure. All cases are to be of adequate mechanical strength.
3.11.2 Switchboard-type Distribution Boards
Distribution boards of the switchboard type, unless installed in machinery spaces or in compartments
assigned exclusively to electric equipment and accessible only to authorized personnel, are to be
completely enclosed or protected against accidental contact and unauthorized operation.
3.11.3 Safety-type Panels
If the method of operation demands the handling of switches by persons unfamiliar with electrical
equipment, the distribution board is to be of the safety type. This type of distribution board is to be
used for controlling branch lighting circuits. Dead front type panels are to be used where voltage
to earth is in excess of 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms between conductors.
3.11.4 Lighting Distribution Boards (2013)

To prevent the simultaneous loss of main and emergency lighting distribution boards due to localized
fire or other casualty, these distribution boards are to be installed as widely apart as practicable in
the machinery spaces.
For spaces other than the machinery space (e.g. accommodation space, ro-ro cargo spaces, etc.), these
lighting distribution boards are to be installed at locations which are separated by a boundary wall.
For the navigation bridge, the main and emergency lighting distribution boards are not to be
installed in the same compartment of the navigation console or panel.
Cables emanating from the main or emergency lighting switchboard to the main or emergency
lighting distribution board respectively are also to be installed as widely apart as practicable. See
also 4-6-2/13.1.2.
3.13 Motor Controllers and Control Centers

3.13.1 Location and Installation
Motor control centers are to be located in a dry place. Clear working space is to be provided around
motor control centers to enable doors to be fully opened and equipment removed for maintenance
and replacement. Motor control centers are to be secured to a solid foundation, be self-supported
or be braced to the bulkhead.
3.13.2 Disconnecting Arrangements
3.13.2(a) Device. Means are to be provided for disconnecting the motor and controller from all
supply conductors, except that a manually operated switch or circuit breaker may serve as both
controller and disconnecting means (see 4-6-4/7.17.2).
3.13.2(b) Location. The disconnecting device may be in the same enclosure with the controller
or may be in a separate enclosure, and is to be externally operated. Except for remotely controlled
fire extinguishing purpose motors, the branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker on the power-
distribution board or switchboard may serve as the disconnect device if in the same compartment
with the controller.
3.13.2(c) Locking Means. If the disconnecting device is not within sight of both motor and
controller, or if it is more than 15.25 m (50 ft) from either, it is to be arranged for locking in the
open position. For remotely controlled fire extinguishing purpose motors, the locking means are to
be provided at the feeder circuit breaker for such motors.
3.13.2(d) Identification Plate. The disconnect switch, if not adjacent to the controller, is to be
provided with an identification plate.
3.13.2(e) Open and Close Indications. The disconnect device is to indicate by a position of the
handle, or otherwise, whether it is open or closed.
3.13.3 Indicating-light Circuits
Where indicating-light circuits are employed, their potential is to be limited to 150 volts if the
opening of the foregoing disconnecting devices does not de-energize the indicating circuit.
3.15 Resistors for Control Apparatus

The resistor is to be protected against corrosion either by rust-proofing or embedding in a protective
material. Resistors are to be located in well-ventilated compartments and are to be mounted with ample
clearances, about 305 mm (12 in.), to prevent excessive heating of adjacent craft’s structure or dangerous
overheating of unprotected combustible material. The arrangement of the electrical equipment and wiring
located within these spaces is to be such as to prevent their exposure to ambient temperatures in excess of
that for which they have been designed.
3.17 Lighting Fixtures

Lighting fixtures are to be so arranged as to prevent temperature rises which could damage the cables and
wiring, and to prevent surrounding material from becoming excessively hot.
3.19 Heating Equipment

Electric radiators, if used, are to be fixed in position and be so constructed as to reduce fire risks to a
minimum. Electric radiators of the exposed-element type are not to be used.
3.21 Magnetic Compasses

Precautions are to be taken in connection with apparatus and wiring in the vicinity of the magnetic
compass to prevent disturbance of the needle from external magnetic fields.
3.23 Portable Equipment and Outlets

Portable equipment are not to be used in cargo oil pump rooms or other hazardous areas nor are portable
lights to be used for berth lights in passenger accommodations or crew’s quarters.
3.25 Receptacles and Plugs of Different Ratings (2015)

Receptacles and plugs of different electrical ratings are not to be interchangeable. In cases where it is
necessary to use 230 volt portable equipment, the receptacles for their attachment are to be of a type which
will not permit attaching 115 volt equipment.
3.27 Installation Requirements for Recovery from Dead Ship Condition

Means are to be provided to ensure that machinery can be brought into operation from the dead ship condition
without external aid. See 4-1-1/19.
Where the emergency source of power is an emergency generator which complies with 4-6-2/5.15 and
4-6-2/3.1.3, this emergency generator may be used for restoring operation of the main propulsion plant,
boilers and auxiliary machinery.
Where there is no emergency generator installed, the arrangements for bringing main and auxiliary machinery
into operation are to be such that the initial charge of starting air or initial electrical power and any power
supplies for engine operation can be developed onboard ship without external aid. If for this purpose an
emergency air compressor or an electric generator is required, these units are to be powered by a hand-
starting oil engine or a hand-operated compressor.
The arrangements for bringing the main and auxiliary machinery into operation are to have a capacity such
that the starting energy and any power supplies for propulsion engine operation are available within 30 minutes
of a blackout condition.
3.29 Services Required to be Operable Under a Fire Condition

For the purpose of 4-6-3/5.17.2, services required to be operable under a fire condition include, but not
limited thereto, are the following:
i) Fire and general alarm system
ii) Fire extinguishing system including fire extinguishing medium release alarms
iii) Emergency Fire Pump
iv) Fire detection system
v) Control and power systems for all power operated fire doors and their status indicating systems
vi) Control and power systems for all power operated watertight doors and their status indicating systems
vii) Emergency lighting
viii) Public address system
ix) Remote emergency stop/shutdown arrangement for systems which may support the propagation of
fire and/or explosion
x) For passenger craft, see 5C-7-5/13.7.2(b) of the Steel Vessel Rules.
3.31 High Fire Risk Areas (1 July 2016)

For the purpose of 4-6-3/5.17, the examples of the high fire risk areas are the following:
i) Machinery spaces as defined by 4-1-1/13.1 and 13.3, except spaces having little or no fire risk such
as machinery spaces which do not contain machinery having a pressure lubrication system and
where storage of combustibles is prohibited (e.g., ventilation and air-conditioning rooms, windlass
room, steering gear room, stabilizer equipment room, electrical propulsion motor room, rooms
containing section switchboards and purely electrical equipment other than oil-filled electrical
transformers (above 10 kVA), shaft alleys and pipe tunnels, and spaces for pumps and
refrigeration machinery not handling or using flammable liquids).
ii) Spaces containing fuel treatment equipment and other highly flammable substances
iii) Galley and pantries containing cooking appliances
iv) Laundry containing drying equipment
v) For passenger craft, see 5C-7-5/13.7.2(c) of the Steel Vessel Rules.
5 Cable Installation
5.1 General Considerations

5.1.1 Continuity of Cabling
Electric cables are to be installed in continuous lengths between terminations at equipment or in
cable junction boxes. See 4-6-3/5.33. However, approved splices will be permitted at interfaces of
new construction modules, when necessary to extend existing circuits for a craft undergoing repair
or alteration, and in certain cases to provide for cables of exceptional length (See 4-6-3/5.29).
5.1.2 Choice of Cables
The rated operating temperature of the insulating material is to be at least 10°C (18°F) higher than
the maximum ambient temperature likely to exist or to be produced in the space where the cable is
installed.
5.1.3 Cable Voltage Drop for New Installation
The cross-sectional area of conductors are to be so determined that the drop in voltage from the main
or emergency switchboard bus-bars to any and every point of the installation when the conductors
are carrying the maximum current under normal steady conditions of service will not exceed 6%
of the nominal voltage. For supplies from batteries with a voltage not exceeding 55 V, this figure
may be increased to 10%.
The above values are applicable under normal steady conditions. Under special conditions of short
duration, such as motor starting, higher voltage drops may be accepted, provided the installation is
capable of withstanding the effects of these higher voltage drops.
5.1.4 Restricted Location of Cabling (2015)
Cables and wiring are to be installed and supported in such a manner as to avoid chafing or other
damage. Cables are to be located with a view to avoiding, as far as practicable, spaces where excessive
heat and gases may be encountered, also spaces where they may be exposed to damage, such as
exposed sides of deckhouses. Cables are not to be installed in the bilge or tanktop area unless
protected from bilge water. Cables are not to be installed in water tanks, oil tanks, cargo tanks,
ballast tanks or any liquid tanks except to supply equipment and instrumentations specifically
designed for such locations and whose functions require it to be installed in the tank.
5.1.5 Means of Drainage from Cable Enclosures
Where cables are installed in a cable draw box and horizontal pipes or the equivalent used for
cable protection, means of drainage are to be provided.
5.1.6 High Voltage Cables
Cables serving systems above 1 kV are not to be bunched with cables serving systems of 1 kV and
below.
5.1.7 Paint on Cables

Where paint or any other coating is systematically and intentionally applied on the electric cables,
it is to be established that the mechanical and fire performance properties of the cable are not
adversely affected.
In this regard:
i) Fire retardant property is to be confirmed to be in compliance with 4-6-4/13.1.2.
ii) It is to be confirmed that the paint and the solvent used will not cause damages to the
cable sheath, e.g., cracking.
Overspray on cables or painted exterior cables are not subject to the requirements of this section.
5.1.8 Cable Installation above High Voltage Switchgear and Control-gear
Where a pressure relief flap is provided for high voltage switchgear and high voltage control-gear,
the cables are not to be installed near and above this equipment in order to prevent the damage of
cables from the flare/flame released from the relief flap upon occurrence of short circuit in this
equipment.
5.1.9 Ultra Violet (UV) Light Protection for Wiring Insulation within Fluorescent Light Fixtures (2014)
Where the supply cable’s outer sheathing or covering is removed once the cable enters a fluorescent
light fixture to facilitate routing and/or connection, the insulation on the individual conductors is
to be protected against the possible detrimental effects of UV light exposure by one of the following:
i) The insulation is to be manufactured with additives that protect the insulation from UV
light damage and a test report is to be submitted to ABS.
ii) Adequate shielding arrangements are to be provided inside the fixture for the entire length
of the exposed insulation within the fixture.
iii) UV protective sleeves are to be installed on the full length of the exposed conductors
inside the fixture during the installation.
5.1.10 Protection of Cables in Tanks (2015)
Where cables are installed in liquid tanks, the following arrangements are to be complied with:
i) Cables are to be installed in steel pipes with at least extra-heavy wall thickness with all
joints welded and with corrosion-resistant coating.
ii) Cable gland with gastight packing is to be provided for the cable at both ends of the cable
conduit pipe
iii) Cable inside of the vertical cable conduit pipe is to be suitably supported (e.g., by sand-
filling or by strapping to a support-wire). Alternatively, the cable inside of the vertical
conduit pipe may be accepted without provided support if the mechanical strength of the
cable is sufficient to prevent cable damage due to the cable weight within the conduit pipe
under continuous mechanical load. Supporting documentation is to be submitted to verify
the mechanical strength of the cable with respect to the cable weight inside of the conduit.
5.3 Insulation Resistance for New Installation

Each power and each light circuit is to have an insulation resistance between conductors and between each
conductor and earth of not less than the following values.
Up to 5 amperes load 2 meg ohms

10 amperes load 1 meg ohm
25 amperes load 400,000 ohms
Over 200 amperes load 25,000 ohms
If the above values are not obtained, any or all appliances connected to the circuit may be disconnected for
this test.
5.5 Protection for Electric-magnetic Induction

5.5.1 Multiple Conductor Cables
All phase conductors of alternating-current cables are to be contained within the same sheath in
order to avoid overheating due to induction by use of multiple conductor cables.
5.5.2 Single Conductor Cables
AC installations are to be carried out, as far as possible, in twin or multi-conductor cables. However,
when it is necessary to use single conductor cables in circuits rated in excess of 20 A, the following
arrangements are to be complied with:
5.5.2(a) Cables are supported on non-fragile insulators;
5.5.2(b) There are to be no magnetic materials between cables of a group; and
5.5.2(c) Where single conductor cables are run in bunches, each group of cables is to comprise
360 electrical degrees. To this end, in three-phase circuits, single conductor cable runs of 30 m
(100 ft) or longer and having a cross-sectional area of 185 mm2 (365,005 circ. mils) or more are to
be transposed throughout the length at intervals not exceeding 15 m (50 ft) in order to equalize to
some degree the impedance of the three phase circuits. Alternatively, such cables may be installed in
trefoil formation.
See 4-6-4/13.1.5 for armor.
5.5.3 Non-shielded Signal Cables
Except for fiber optic cables, non-shielded signal cables for automation and control systems essential
for the safe operation of the craft which may be affected by electromagnetic interference are not to
be run in the same bunch with power or lighting cables.
5.7 Joints and Sealing

Cables not having a moisture-resistant insulation are to be sealed against the admission of moisture by
methods such as taping in combination with insulating compound or sealing devices. Cables are to be
installed in such a manner that stresses on the cable are not transmitted to the conductors. Terminations and
joints in all conductors are to be so made as to retain the original electrical, flame retarding and, where
necessary, fire resisting properties of the cable. Terminal boxes are to be secured in place and the moisture-
resistant jacket is to extend through the cable clamp. Enclosures for outlets, switches and similar fittings
are to be flame and moisture-resistant and of adequate mechanical strength and rigidity to protect the contents
and to prevent distortion under all likely conditions of service. See also 4-6-3/5.17.1 and 4-6-3/5.29.
5.9 Support, Fixing and Bending

5.9.1 Support and Fixing
5.9.1(a) Where cables are fixed by means of clips, saddles or straps, they are to have a surface
area so large and shaped such that the cables remain tight without their coverings being damaged.
Metal clips may be screwed directly to deck or bulkhead, except on watertight bulkheads.
5.9.1(b) The distances between supports are to be suitably chosen according to the type of cable
and the probability of vibration, and are not to exceed 400 mm (16 in.); for a horizontal cable run
where the cables are laid on cable supports in the form of tray plates, separate support brackets or
hanger ladders, the spacing between the fixing points may be up to 900 mm (36 in.), provided that
there are supports with maximum spacing, as specified above. This exemption does not apply to
cable runs along weather decks when the cable run is arranged so that the cables can be subjected
to forces by water washing over the deck.
Note: When designing a cable support system for single-core cables, consideration is also to be given to the
effects of electrodynamic forces developing on the occurrence of a short-circuit.
The above-given distances between cable supports are not necessarily adequate for these cables.
Further, other recognized standards for cable support and fixing will be considered.
5.9.1(c) The supports and the corresponding accessories are to be robust and are to be of
corrosion-resistant material or suitably treated before erection to resist corrosion.
5.9.1(d) Cable clips or straps made from an approved material other than metal (such as polyamide,
PVC) may be used.
5.9.1(e) When cables are fixed by means of clips or straps, referred to in Item 4-6-3/5.9.1(d) above,
and these cables are not laid on top of horizontal cable trays or cable supports, suitable metal cable
clips or saddles are to be added at regular distances not exceeding 2 m (6.5 ft) in order to prevent
the release of cables during a fire. This also applies to the fixing of non-metallic conduits or pipes.
Note: Item 4-6-3/5.9.1(e) does not necessarily apply in the case of cable runs with only one or a few cables
with small diameters for the connection of a lighting fitting, alarm transducer, etc.
5.9.1(f) Non-metallic clips, saddles or straps are to be flame retardant in accordance with IEC
Publication 60092-101.
5.9.2 Bending Radius
For bending radius requirements, see 4-6-3/Table 2.
5.9.3 Plastic Cable Trays and Protective Casings
5.9.3(a) Installations . Cable trays and protective casings made of plastic materials are to be
supplemented by metallic fixing and straps such that, in the event of a fire, they and the cables
affixed are prevented from falling and causing an injury to personnel and/or an obstruction to any
escape route. See 4-6-3/5.9.1(e). Cable trays and protective casings made of plastic materials are
to be flame retardant (see Appendix 4-8-4A1 of the Steel Vessel Rules). Where plastic cable trays
and protective casings are used on open deck, they are additionally to be protected against UV
light by such as anti-UV coating or equivalent.
Note: “Plastic” means both thermoplastic and thermosetting plastic materials with or without reinforcement,
such as PVC and fiber reinforced plastics (FRP). “Protective casing” means a closed cover in the form of
a pipe or other closed ducts of non-circular shape.
5.9.3(b) Safe Working Load . The load on the cable trays and protective casings is to be within
the Safe Working Load (SWL). The support spacing is to be not greater than the manufacturer’s
recommendation nor in excess of the spacing at the SWL test (see Appendix 4-8-4A1 of the Steel
Vessel Rules). In general, the spacing is not to exceed 2 meters.
Note: The selection and spacing of cable tray and protective casing supports are to take into account:
• Dimensions of the cable trays and the protective casings;
• Mechanical and physical properties of their material;
• Mass of the cable trays/protective casings;
• Loads due to weight of cables, external forces, thrust forces and vibrations;
• Maximum accelerations to which the system may be subjected;
• Combination of loads.
5.9.3(c) Cable occupation ratio in protective casing. The sum of the total cross-sectional area of
all cables on the basis of their external diameter is not to exceed 40% of the internal cross-
sectional area of the protective casing. This does not apply to a single cable in a protective casing.
5.9.3(d) Hazardous areas. Cable trays and protective casings passing through hazardous areas
are to be electrically conductive (see Appendix 4-8-4A1 of the Steel Vessel Rules).
5.9.3(e) Type Testing . Cable trays and protective casings made of plastic materials are to be type
tested in accordance with Appendix 4-8-4A1 of the Steel Vessel Rules. Alternate test procedures
for impact resistance test, safe working load test, flame retardant test, smoke and toxicity tests and/or
resistivity test from an international or national standard may be considered instead of the test
specified in Appendix 4-8-4A1 of the Steel Vessel Rules. The type test reports are to be submitted
for review.
5.11 Cable Run in Bunches

5.11.1 Reduction of Current Rating
Where cables which may be expected to operate simultaneously are laid close together in a cable
bunch in such a way that there is an absence of free air circulation around them, the following
reduction factor is to be applied to the current rating obtained from 4-6-4/Table 10:
Number of Cables in One Bunch Reduction Factor

one to six 1.0
seven to twelve 0.85
Bunches of more than twelve cables will be subject to special consideration based on the type and
service of the various cables in the bunch.
5.11.2 Clearance and Segregation
A clearance is to be maintained between any two cable bunches of at least the diameter of the
largest cable in either bunch. Otherwise, for the purpose of determining the number of cables in
the bunch, the total number of cables on both sides of the clearance will be used.
5.11.3 Cable of Lower Conductor Temperature
The current rating of each cable in a bunch is to be determined based on the lowest conductor
temperature rating of any cable in the bunch.
5.13 Deck and Bulkhead Penetrations (1 July 2013)

5.13.1 General
Where cables pass through watertight, firetight, or smoke-tight bulkheads or decks, the penetrations
are to be made through the use of approved stuffing tubes, transit devices or pourable materials
installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation procedures to maintain the watertight integrity
or fire-rating of the bulkheads or decks. These devices or pourable materials are not to damage the
cable physically or through chemical action or through heat build-up, and are to be examined and
tested as specified in 3-7-1/Table 1 and 4-6-3/5.13.4.
Where cable conduit pipe or equivalent is carried through decks or bulkheads, arrangements are to
be made to maintain the integrity of the water or gas tightness of the structure.
5.13.2 Non-watertight Penetrations
When cables pass through non-watertight bulkheads where the bearing surface is less than 6.4 mm
(0.25 in.), the holes are to be fitted with bushings having rounded edges and a bearing surface for
the cable of at least 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) in length. Where cables pass through deck beams or similar
structural parts, all burrs are to be removed in way of the holes and care is to be taken to eliminate
sharp edges.
5.13.3 Collision Bulkhead
Cables are not to pass through a collision bulkhead.
5.13.4 Watertight and Fire-rated Deck and Bulkhead Cable Penetrations
During installation of deck and bulkhead watertight and fire-rated cable penetrations, the attending
Surveyor is to confirm that the installer is familiar with and has access to the manufacturer’s
installation procedures for stuffing tubes, transit devices or pourable materials.
After installation, all watertight and fire-rated cable penetrations are to be visually examined.
Watertight cable penetrations are to be tested as required by 3-7-1/Table 1.
5.15 Mechanical Protection

5.15.1 Metallic Armor
Electric cables installed in locations liable to damage during normal operation of the craft are to be
provided with braided, metallic armor and be otherwise suitably protected from mechanical injury,
as appropriate for the location. See also 4-6-3/9.1.3 for cables in hazardous areas.
5.15.2 Conduit Pipe or Structural Shapes
Where cables are installed in locations in way of cargo ports, hatches, tank tops, open decks subject
to seas, and where passing through decks, they are to be protected by substantial metal shields,
structural shapes, pipe or other equivalent means. All such coverings are to be of sufficient strength
to provide effective protection to the cables. When expansion bends are fitted, they are to be
accessible for maintenance. Where cables are installed in metal piping or in a metal conduit system,
such piping and systems are to be earthed and are to be mechanically and electrically continuous
across all joints.
5.17 Emergency and Essential Feeders

5.17.1 Location (2013)
As far as practicable, cables and wiring for emergency and essential services, including those listed
in 4-6-3/3.29, except for Emergency Fire Pumps (see 4-6-3/5.17.3), are not to pass through high
fire risk areas (see 4-6-3/3.31).
These cables and wiring are also to be run in such a manner as to preclude their being rendered
unserviceable by heating of the bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent space.
5.17.2 Services Necessary Under a Fire Condition (2013)
Where cables for services required to be operable under a fire condition (see 4-6-3/3.29), except
for the Emergency Fire Pump (see 4-6-3/5.17.3), including their power supplies pass through high
fire risk areas (see 4-6-3/3.31) other than those which they serve, they are to be so arranged that a
fire in any of these areas does not affect the operation of the service in any other area. This may
be achieved by any of the following measures:
5.17.2(a) Fire resistant cables in accordance with 4-6-4/13.1.3 are installed and run continuous to
keep the fire integrity within the high fire risk area. See 4-6-3/Figure 2.
FIGURE 2
Cables within High Fire Risk Areas
Other area High fire risk area Other area
EG ESB DB Electrical consumers
DB
Fire resistant cable Flame retardant cable Connection box
5.17.2(b) At least two loops/radial distributions run as widely apart as is practicable and so arranged
that in the event of damage by fire at least one of the loops/radial distributions remains operational.
5.17.2(c) Systems that are self-monitoring, fail safe or duplicated with cable runs separated as widely
as practicable, may be exempted from the requirements in 4-6-3/5.17.2(a) and 4-6-3/5.17.2(b).
5.17.3 Electrical Cables for the Emergency Fire Pump (2013)

The electrical cables to the emergency fire pump are not to pass through the machinery spaces
containing the main fire pumps and their sources of power and prime movers. They are to be of a fire
resistant type, in accordance with 4-6-4/13.1.3, where they pass through other high fire risk areas.
5.17.4 Requirements by the Governmental Authority
Attention is directed to the requirements of the governmental authority of the country whose flag
the craft flies for the installation of emergency circuits required in various types of craft.
5.19 Mineral Insulated Cables

At all points where mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable terminates, an approved seal is to be provided
immediately after stripping to prevent entrance of moisture into the mineral insulation. In addition, the
conductors extending beyond the sheath are to be insulated with an approved insulating material. When
mineral-insulated cable is connected to boxes or equipment, the fittings are to be approved for the conditions of
service. The connections are to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation recommendation.
5.21 Fiber Optic Cables

The installation of fiber optic cables is to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations to
prevent sharp bends where the fiber optic cables enter the equipment enclosure. Consideration is to be given
to the use of angled stuffing tubes. The cables are to be installed so as to avoid abrading, crushing, twisting,
kinking or pulling around sharp edges.
5.23 Battery Room

Where cables enter battery rooms, the holes are to be bushed, as required for watertight bulkheads in
4-6-3/5.13. All connections within battery rooms are to be resistant to the electrolyte. Cables are to be
sealed to resist the entrance of electrolyte by spray or creepage. The size of the connecting cable is to be
based on current-carrying capacities given in 4-6-4/Table 10 and the starting rate of charge or maximum
discharge rate, whichever is the greater, is to be taken into consideration in determining the cable size.
5.25 Paneling and Dome Fixtures

Cables may be installed behind paneling, provided all connections are accessible and the location of
concealed connection boxes is indicated. Where a cable strip molding is used for cable installation on the
incombustible paneling, it is to be of incombustible material. Dome fixtures are to be installed so that they
are vented or they are to be fitted with fire-resistant material in such a manner as to protect the insulated
wiring leading to the lamps and any exposed woodwork from excessive temperature.
5.27 Sheathing and Structural Insulation

Cables may be installed behind sheathing, but they are not to be installed behind nor imbedded in structural
insulation. They are to pass through such insulation at right angles and are to be protected by a continuous
pipe with a stuffing tube at one end. For deck penetrations, this stuffing tube is to be at the upper end of the
pipe and for bulkhead penetrations, it is to be on the uninsulated side of the bulkhead. For refrigerated-
space insulation, the pipe is to be of phenolic or similar heat-insulating material joined to the bulkhead stuffing
tube, or a section of such material is to be inserted between the bulkhead stuffing tube and the metallic pipe.
5.29 Splicing of Electrical Cables

5.29.1 Basis of Approval
Replacement insulation is to be fire-resistant and is to be equivalent in electrical and thermal
properties to the original insulation. The replacement jacket is to be at least equivalent to the original
impervious sheath and is to assure a watertight splice. Splices are to be made using an approved
splice kit which contains the following:
• Connector of correct size and number
• Replacement insulation
• Replacement jacket
• Instructions for use
In addition, prior to approval of a splicing kit, it will be required that completed splices be tested
for fire resistance, watertightness, dielectric strength, etc. to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. This
requirement may be modified for splice kits which have had such tests conducted and reported on
by an independent agency acceptable to ABS.
5.29.2 Installation
All splices are to be made after the cable is in place and are to be accessible for inspection. The
conductor splice is to be made using a pressure type butt connector by use of a one-cycle compression
tool. See 4-6-3/9.1.3 for splices in hazardous area.
5.29.3 Protection
Splices may be located in protected enclosures or in open wireways. Armored cables having splices
will not be required to have the armor replaced, provided that the remaining armor has been earthed
in compliance with 4-6-3/7.9 or provided that the armor is made electrically continuous. Splices
are to be so located such that stresses (as from the weight of the cable) are not carried by the splice.
5.31 Splicing of Fiber Optic Cables

Splicing of fiber optic cables is to be made by means of approved mechanical or fusion methods.
5.33 Cable Junction Box

Except for propulsion cables, junction boxes may be used in the installation of electric cables aboard the
craft, provided the plans required by 4-6-3/1.3 for junction boxes are submitted and the following requirements
are complied with.
5.33.1
The design and construction of the junction boxes are to comply with 4-6-4/11.7 as well as
4-6-3/5.33.2, below.
5.33.2
The junction boxes are to be suitable for the environment in which they are installed (i.e.,
explosion-proof in hazardous areas, watertight or weathertight on deck, etc.).
5.33.3
Separate junction boxes are to be used for feeders and circuits of each of the following rated voltage
levels:
5.33.3(a) Rated voltage levels not exceeding those specified in 4-6-3/7.1i).
5.33.3(b) Rated voltage levels exceeding those in 4-6-3/5.33.3(a) up to and including 1 kV. A
physical barrier is to be used within the junction box to separate distribution systems of different
rated voltages, such as 480 V, 600 V and 750 V.
5.33.3(c) Rated voltage levels exceeding 1 kV. Separate junction boxes are to be used for each of
the rated voltage levels exceeding 1 kV.
Each junction box and the compartment in the junction box separated by a physical barrier are to
be appropriately identified as regards the rated voltage of the feeders and circuits that it contains.
A physical barrier may be used in lieu of two separate junction boxes for circuits having rated
voltage levels corresponding to those in either 4-6-3/5.33.3(a) or 4-6-3/5.33.3(b).
5.33.4
The junction boxes for emergency feeders and circuits are to be separate from those used for
normal ship service feeders and circuits.
5.33.5
Cables are to be supported, as necessary, within junction boxes so as not to put stress (as from the
weight of the cable) on the cable contact mountings. The connections are to be provided with locking
type connections.
In addition to the above, the applicable requirements in 4-6-3/5 and 4-6-4/13 regarding cable
installation and application details are to be complied with.
7 Earthing
7.1 General
Exposed metal parts of electrical machines or equipment which are not intended to be live but which are
liable under fault conditions to become live are to be earthed unless the machines or equipment are:
i) Supplied at a voltage not exceeding 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms between conductors; auto-
transformers are not to be used for the purpose of achieving this voltage; or
ii) Supplied at a voltage not exceeding 250 V AC rms by safety isolating transformers supplying only
one consuming device; or
iii) Constructed in accordance with the principle of double insulation.
7.3 Permanent Equipment

The metal frames or cases of all permanently installed generators, motors, controllers, instruments and similar
equipment are to be permanently earthed through a metallic contact with the craft’s structure. Alternatively,
they are to be connected to the hull by a separate conductor, in accordance with 4-6-3/7.5. Where outlets,
switches and similar fittings are of non-metallic construction, all exposed metal parts are to be earthed.
7.5 Connections
7.5.1 General
All earthing conductors are to be of copper or other corrosion-resistant material and are to be protected
against damage. The nominal cross-sectional area of every copper earthing conductor is to be not
less than that required by 4-6-3/Table 3.
7.5.2 Earthed Distribution System
Earthing conductors in an earthed distribution system are to comply with 4-6-3/7.5.1, except that
the earthing conductor in line C4 of 4-6-3/Table 3 is to be A/2.
7.5.3 Connection to Hull Structure
All connections of an earth-continuity conductor or earthing lead to the craft’s structure are to be
made in an accessible position and be secured by a screw of brass or other corrosion-resistant material
having a cross-sectional area equivalent to the earth-continuity conductor or earthing lead, but not
less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter. The earth connection screw is to be used for this purpose only.
See 4-4-1/9.21 for control of static electricity.
7.7 Portable Cords

Receptacle outlets operating at 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms or more are to have an earthing pole.
7.9 Cable Metallic Covering

All metal sheaths, armor of cable and mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable are to be electrically continuous
and are to be earthed to the metal hull at each end of the run, except that final sub-circuits may be earthed
at the supply end only. All metallic coverings of power and lighting cables passing through hazardous areas
or connected to equipment in such an area are to be earthed at least at each end. See also 4-7-7/3.1.
7.11 Lightning Earth Conductors

Each wooden mast or topmast is to be fitted with lightning earth conductors. They need not be fitted to
steel masts. See 4-6-2/21 for non-metallic craft.
9 Equipment and Installation in Hazardous Areas
9.1 General Considerations

9.1.1 General (2015)
Electrical equipment and wiring are not to be installed in hazardous areas unless essential for
operational purposes. Generally electrical equipment certified for use in hazardous areas in
accordance with the IEC 60079 series is considered suitable for use in temperatures from –20°C to
40°C (–4°F to 104°F). Account is to be taken of the temperature at the point of installation when
selecting electrical equipment for installation in hazardous areas.
9.1.1(a) Electrical Equipment Types (2016). Only electrical equipment of the following types,
complying with IEC Publication 60079 series or other recognized standards, is to be considered
for installation in hazardous areas.
• Intrinsically safe type (Ex i)
• Flameproof (explosion-proof) type (Ex d)
• Increased safety type (Ex e)
• Pressurized or purged type (Ex p)
Consideration is to be given to the flammability group and the temperature class of the equipment
for suitability for the intended hazardous area, see IEC Publication 60079-20.
9.1.1(b) Fans. Fans used for the ventilation of the hazardous areas are to be of non-sparking
construction in accordance with 4-6-3/9.7.
9.1.2 Lighting Circuits
All switches and protective devices for lighting fixtures in hazardous areas are to interrupt all
poles or phases and are to be located in a non-hazardous area. However, a switch may be located
in a hazardous area if the switch is of a certified safe type for the hazardous location in which it is
to be installed. On solidly grounded distribution systems, the switches need not open the grounded
conductor. The switches and protective devices for lighting fixtures are to be suitably labeled for
identification purposes.
9.1.3 Cables Installation
Cables in hazardous areas are to be armored or mineral-insulated metal-sheathed, except for cables
of intrinsically safe circuits subject to the requirements of 4-6-3/5.15. Where cables pass through
hazardous area boundaries, they are to be run through gastight fittings. No splices are allowed in
hazardous areas, except in intrinsically-safe circuits.
9.1.4 Permanent Warning Plates
Permanent warning plates are to be installed in the vicinity of hazardous areas in which electrical
equipment is installed, such as the pump room, to advise personnel carrying out maintenance,
repair or surveys of the availability of the booklet/list of equipment in hazardous areas referenced
in 4-6-3/1.5, if required for their use.
9.3 Certified-safe Type and Pressurized Equipment and Systems

9.3.1 Installation Approval
Electrical equipment in hazardous areas is to be of a type suitable for such locations. Where
permitted by the Rules, electrical equipment of a certified safe type, such as explosion-proof type
and intrinsically-safe electrical instruments, circuitry and devices, will be approved for installation,
provided such equipment has been type-tested and certified by a competent independent testing
laboratory as explosion-proof or intrinsically-safe and provided that there is no departure in the
production equipment from the design so tested and approved.
9.3.2 Intrinsically-safe System

9.3.2(a) Installation of Cables and Wiring. Installations with intrinsically safe circuits are to be
erected in such a way that their intrinsic safety is not adversely affected by external electric or
magnetic fields under normal operating condition and any fault conditions, such as a single-phase
short circuit or earth fault in non-intrinsically safe circuits, etc.
9.3.2(b) Separation and Mechanical Protection. The installation of the cables is to be arranged
as follows:
i) Cables in both hazardous and non-hazardous areas are to meet one of the following
requirements:
• Intrinsically safe circuit cables are to be installed a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) from
all non-intrinsically safe circuit cables, or
• Intrinsically safe circuit cables are to be so placed as to protect against the risk of
mechanical damage by use of a mechanical barrier, or
• Intrinsically safe or non-intrinsically safe circuit cables are to be armored, metal
sheathed or screened.
ii) Conductors of intrinsically safe circuits and non-intrinsically safe circuits are not to be
carried in the same cable.
iii) Cables of intrinsically safe circuits and non-intrinsically safe circuits are not to be in the
same bundle, duct or conduit pipe.
iv) Each unused core in a multi-core cable is to be adequately insulated from earth and from
each other at both ends by the use of suitable terminations.
9.3.2(c) Sub-compartment. When intrinsically safe components are located by necessity within
enclosures that contain non-intrinsically safe systems, such as control consoles and motor starters,
such components are to be effectively isolated in a sub-compartment by earthed metallic or
nonmetallic insulating barriers having a cover or panel secured by bolts, locks, Allen-screws, or
other approved methods. The intrinsic safety in the sub-compartment is not to be adversely affected
by external electric or magnetic fields under normal operating condition and any fault conditions
in non-intrinsically safe circuits.
9.3.2(d) Termination Arrangements. Where it is impracticable to arrange the terminals of
intrinsically safe circuit in the sub-compartment, they are to be separated from those for non-
intrinsically safe circuits by either of the following methods. Other National or International
recognized Standards will also be accepted.
i) When separation is accomplished by distance, then the clearance between terminals is to
be at least 50 mm, or
ii) When separation is accomplished by use of an insulating partition or earthed metal partition,
the partitions are to extend to within 1.5 mm of the walls of the enclosure, or alternatively
provide a minimum measurement of 50 mm between the terminals when taken in any
direction around the partition.
9.3.2(e) Identification Plate. The terminals and sub-compartment for intrinsically safe circuit
and components are to have a nameplate indicating that the equipment within is intrinsically safe
and that unauthorized modification or repairs are prohibited.
9.3.2(f) Replacement. Unless specifically approved, replacement equipment for intrinsically-safe
circuits is to be identical to the original equipment.
9.3.3 Pressurized Equipment

Pressurized equipment is to consist of separately ventilated enclosures supplied with positive-
pressure ventilation from a closed-loop system or from a source outside the hazardous areas, and
provision is to be made such that the equipment cannot be energized until the enclosure has been
purged with a minimum of ten air changes and required pressure is obtained. Ventilating pipes are
to have a minimum wall thickness of 3 mm (0.12 in. or 11 gage). In the case of loss of pressurization,
power is to be automatically removed from the equipment, unless this would result in a condition
more hazardous than that created by failure to de-energize the equipment. In this case, in lieu of
removal of power, an audible and visual alarm is to be provided at a normally manned control station.
Pressurized equipment in compliance with IEC Pub. 60079-2, NFPA 496 or other recognized
standard will also be acceptable.
9.5 Paint Stores

9.5.1 General (2016)
Electrical equipment in paint stores and in ventilation ducts serving such spaces as permitted in
4-6-3/9.1.1 is to comply with the requirements for group IIB class T3 in IEC Publication 60079-20-1.
The following type of equipment will be acceptable for such spaces.
i) Intrinsically-safe defined by 4-6-1/3.21
ii) Explosion-proof defined by 4-6-1/3.9
iii) Pressurized defined by 4-6-1/3.43
iv) Increased safety defined by 4-6-1/3.17
v) Other equipment with special protection recognized as safe for use in explosive gas
atmospheres by a national or other appropriate authority.
9.5.2 Open Area Near Ventilation Openings
In the areas on open deck within 1 m (3.3 ft) of the ventilation inlet or within 1 m (3.3 ft) (if natural)
or 3 m (10 ft) (if mechanical) of the exhaust outlet, electrical equipment and cables, where permitted
by 4-6-3/9.1.1, are to be in accordance with 4-6-3/9.1.2, 4-6-3/9.1.3 and 4-6-3/9.3.1.
9.5.3 Enclosed Access Spaces
The enclosed spaces giving access to the paint store may be considered as nonhazardous, provided
that:
i) The door to the paint store is gastight with self-closing devices without holding back
arrangements,
ii) The paint store is provided with an acceptable, independent, natural ventilation system
ventilated from a safe area, and
iii) Warning notices are fitted adjacent to the paint store entrance stating that the store contains
flammable liquids.
9.7 Non-sparking Fans

9.7.1 Design Criteria
9.7.1(a) Air Gap. The air gap between the impeller and the casing is to be not less than 10% of
the shaft diameter in way of the impeller bearing, but not less than 2 mm (0.08 in.). It need not be
more than 13 mm (0.5 in.).
9.7.1(b) Protection Screen. Protection screens of not more than 13 mm (0.5 in.) square mesh are
to be fitted in the inlet and outlet of ventilation openings on the open deck to prevent the entrance of
an object into the fan casing.
9.7.2 Materials
9.7.2(a) Impeller and its Housing. Except as indicated in 4-6-3/9.7.2(c) below, the impeller and the
housing in way of the impeller are to be made of alloys which are recognized as being spark proof
by appropriate test.
9.7.2(b) Electrostatic Charges. Electrostatic charges both in the rotating body and the casing are
to be prevented by the use of antistatic materials. Furthermore, the installation on board of the
ventilation units is to be such as to ensure the safe bonding to the hull of the units themselves.
9.7.2(c) Acceptable Combination of Materials. Tests referred to in 4-6-3/9.7.2(a) above are not
required for fans having the following combinations:
i) Impellers and/or housings of nonmetallic material, due regard being paid to the elimination
of static electricity;
ii) Impellers and housings of non-ferrous materials;
iii) Impellers of aluminum alloys or magnesium alloys and a ferrous (including austenitic stainless
steel) housing on which a ring of suitable thickness of non-ferrous materials is fitted in
way of the impeller;
iv) Any combination of ferrous (including austenitic stainless steel) impellers and housings with
not less than 13 mm (0.5 in.) Tip design clearance.
9.7.2(d) Unacceptable Combination of Materials. The following impellers and housings are
considered as sparking-producing and are not permitted:
i) Impellers of an aluminum alloy or magnesium alloy and a ferrous housing, regardless of
tip clearance;
ii) Housing made of an aluminum alloy or a magnesium alloy and a ferrous impeller, regardless
of tip clearance;
iii) Any combination of ferrous impeller and housing with less than 13 mm (0.5 in.) design
tip clearance.
9.7.3 Type Test
Type tests on the finished product are to be carried out using an acceptable national or international
standard. Such type test reports are to be made available when requested by the Surveyor.
TABLE 1
Minimum Degree of Protection [See 4-6-3/3.1.1] (2014)
(For high voltage equipment, see 4-6-5/Table 1)
Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control Centers
& Controllers (See 4-6-3/3.9 to 4-6-3/3.13)
Generators (See 4-6-3/3.3)
Example Condition Motors (See 4-6-3/3.5)
of of Transformers, Converters
Location Location Lighting Fixtures
(See 4-6-3/3.17)
Heating Appliances
(See 4-6-3/3.19)
Accessories (3)
Dry accommodation space Danger of touching live IP20 - IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
(4) parts only
Dry control rooms IP20 - IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Control rooms Danger of dripping liquid IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22
(5) and/or moderate mechanical
Machinery spaces above floor plates IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
damage
Steering gear rooms IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
Refrigerating machinery rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
Emergency machinery rooms IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
General store rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22
Pantries IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
Provision rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22
Bathrooms and Showers Increased danger of liquid - - - - IP34 IP44 IP55
and/or mechanical damage
Machinery spaces below floor plates - - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55 (2)
Closed fuel oil or lubricating oil IP44 - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55 (2)
separator rooms
Ballast pump rooms Increased danger of liquid IP44 - IP44 IP44 IP34 IP44 IP55
and mechanical damage
Refrigerated rooms - - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55
Galleys and Laundries IP44 - IP44 IP44 IP34 IP44 IP44(6)
Shaft or pipe tunnels in double bottom Danger of liquid spray IP55 - IP55 IP55 IP55 IP55 IP56
presence of cargo dust,
Holds for general cargo - - - - IP55 - IP55
serious mechanical damage,
and/or aggressive fumes
Open decks Exposure to heavy seas IP56 - IP56 - IP55 IP56 IP56
Bilge wells Exposure to submersion - - - - IPX8 - IPX8
Notes
1 Empty spaces shown with “-“ indicate installation of electrical equipment is not recommended.
2 Socket outlets are not to be installed in machinery spaces below the floor plates, enclosed fuel and lubricating oil
separator rooms or spaces requiring certified safe equipment.
3 “Accessories” include switches, detectors, junction boxes, etc. Accessories which are acceptable for use in hazardous
areas are limited by the condition of the areas. Specific requirements are given in the Rules. See 4-6-3/3.23.
4 For the purpose of this Table, the wheelhouse may be categorized as a “dry control room” and consequently, the
installation of IP20 equipment would suffice therein, provided that: (a) the equipment is located as to preclude being
exposed to steam or dripping/spraying liquids emanating from pipe flanges, valves, ventilation ducts and outlets, etc.,
installed in its vicinity, and (b) the equipment is placed to preclude the possibility of being exposed to sea or rain.
5 See 4-6-3/3.1.1(b) where the equipment is located within areas protected by local fixed pressure water-spraying or
water-mist fire extinguishing system and its adjacent areas.
6 (2014) Socket outlets in galleys and laundries are to maintain their protection against splashed water when not in use.
TABLE 2
Minimum Bending Radii of Cables [See 4-6-3/5.9.2]
Cable Construction Overall Diameter, Minimum Internal
Insulation Outer Covering D Bending Radius
Thermoplastic or Unarmored or unbraided D ≤ 25 mm (1 in.) 4D
thermosetting with
D > 25 mm 6D
circular copper
conductor Metal braid screened or armored Any 6D
Metal wire or metal-tape armored or Any 6D
metal-sheathed
Composite polyester/metal laminate Any 8D
tape screened units or collective tape
screening
Thermoplastic or Any Any 8D
thermosetting with
shaped copper
conductor
Mineral Hard metal-sheathed Any 6D
TABLE 3
Size of Earth-continuity Conductors and Earthing Connections
[See 4-6-3/7.5]
Cross-sectional Area, A, of
Minimum Cross-sectional Area of
Type of Earthing Connection Associated Current
Copper Earthing Connection
Carrying Conductor
A1 A ≤ 16 mm2 A
Earth-continuity conductor in
A2 16 mm < A ≤ 32 mm
2 2 16 mm2
flexible cable or flexible cord
A3 A > 32 mm 2 A/
2
For cables having an insulated earth-continuity conductor
B1a A ≤ 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
B1b 1.5 mm < A ≤ 16 mm
2 2 A
Earth-continuity conductor B1c 16 mm2 < A ≤ 32 mm2 16 mm2
incorporated in fixed cable B1d A > 32 mm2 A/
2
For cables with bare earth wire in direct contact with the lead sheath
B2a A ≤ 2.5 mm2 1 mm2
B2b 2.5 mm < A ≤ 6 mm
2 2 1.5 mm2
C1a Stranded earthing connection:
1.5 mm2 for A ≤ 1.5 mm2
A ≤ 3 mm 2 A for A > 1.5 mm2
C1b Unstranded earthing connection:
Separate fixed earthing conductor
3 mm2
C2 3 mm < A ≤ 6 mm
2 2 3 mm2
C3 6 mm < A ≤ 125 mm
2 2 A/
2
C4 A > 125 mm2 64 mm2 (see Note 1)
Notes:
1 For earthed distribution systems, the size of earthing conductor is not to be less than A/2.
2 Conversion Table for mm2 to circular mils:
mm2 circ. mils mm2 circ. mils mm2 circ. mils mm2 circ. mils
1 1,973 2.5 4,933 6 11,841 70 138,147
1.5 2,960 4 7,894 16 31,576 120 236,823
PART Section 4: Machinery and Equipment
4
SECTION 4 Machinery and Equipment
1 Plans and Data to Be Submitted
1.1 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Over

For rotating machines of 100 kW and over intended for essential services (primary and secondary) or for
services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11, drawings showing the following particulars are to be submitted: assembly,
seating arrangements, terminal arrangements, shafts, coupling, coupling bolts, stator and rotor details together
with data for complete rating, class of insulation, designed ambient temperature, temperature rise, degree
of protection for enclosures, weights and speeds for rotating parts. Plans to be submitted for generator prime
movers are given in 4-2-3/1.5, 4-2-4/1.5 and 4-2-1/1.9 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
1.3 Rotating Machines of 100 kW and Below

Complete rating, class of insulation, and degree of enclosure.
1.5 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc.

For switchboards, distribution boards, battery charger units, uninterruptible power system (UPS) units, motor
control centers, and motor controllers intended for essential services (primary and secondary) or for services
indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11, drawings showing arrangements and details, front view, and installation
arrangements are to be submitted for review together with data for protective device rating and setting,
type of internal wiring, and size and rated current carrying capacity (together with short-circuit current
data) of bus bars and internal wiring for power circuit. In addition, a schematic or logic diagram with a
written description giving the sequence of events and system operating procedures for electrical power
supply management on switchboards and sequential or automatic change-over of the motors are also to be
submitted for review.
3 Rotating Machines
3.1 General
3.1.1 Applications
All rotating electrical machines of 100 kW and over intended for essential services (see 4-6-1/3.7)
or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11 are to be designed, constructed and tested in accordance
with the requirements of 4-6-4/3.
All other rotating electrical machines are to be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance
with established industrial practices and manufacturer’s specifications. Manufacturer’s tests for
rotating electric machines less than 100 kW for essential services or for services indicated in
4-6-4/Table 11 are to include at least the tests described in 4-6-4/3.3.1(b), regardless of the standard
of construction The test certificates are to be made available when requested by the Surveyor.
Acceptance of machines will be based on satisfactory performance test after installation.
3.1.2 Certification on Basis of an Approved Quality Assurance Program
See 4-1-1/3.
Section 4 Machinery and Equipment 4-6-4
3.1.3 References
3.1.3(a) Inclination. For the requirements covering inclination for design condition, see 4-1-1/17.
3.1.3(b) Insulation Material. For the requirements covering insulation material, see 4-6-1/13.
3.1.3(c) Capacity of Generators. For requirements covering main generator capacity, see 4-6-2/3.1.2
and 4-6-2/3.5. For requirements covering emergency generator capacity, see 4-6-2/5.3.1.
3.1.3(d) Power Supply by Generators. For requirements covering power supply by main or
emergency generator, see 4-6-2/3.1.2 and 4-6-2/5.5.2, respectively.
3.1.3(e) Protection for Generator Circuits. For requirements covering protection for generator,
see 4-6-2/9.3, 4-6-2/9.5 and 4-6-2/9.7.
3.1.3(f) Protection for Motor Circuits. For requirements covering protection for motor branch
circuit, see 4-6-2/9.13.
3.1.3(g) Installation. For requirements covering installation, see 4-6-3/3.3 for generators and
4-6-3/3.5 for motors.
3.1.3(h) Protection Enclosures and its Selection. For requirements covering degree of the protection
and the selection of equipment, see 4-6-1/15 and 4-6-3/3.1, respectively.
3.3 Testing and Inspection

3.3.1 Applications
3.3.1(a) Machines of 100 kW and Over. All rotating machines of 100 kW and over intended for
essential services (see 4-6-1/3.7) or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11 are to be tested in
accordance with 4-6-4/Table 1 in the presence of and inspected by the Surveyor, preferably at the
plant of the manufacturer.
3.3.1(b) Machines Below 100 kW. All rotating machines of less than 100 kW intended for essential
services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11 are to be tested in accordance with 4-6-4/Table 1
(item 2 through item 10 and item 12). The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose
certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.
3.3.1(c) Other Machines. For machines not intended for essential services or for services indicated
in 4-6-4/Table 11, the tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will
be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.
3.3.2 Special Testing Arrangements
In cases where all of the required tests are not carried out at the plant of the manufacturer, the
Surveyor is to be notified and arrangements are to be made so that the remaining tests will be
witnessed.
3.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement

The resistance is to be measured before the commencement of the testing and after completion of the
testing for all circuits. Circuits or groups of circuits of different voltages above earth are to be tested
separately. This test is to be made with at least 500 volts DC and the insulation resistance in megohms of
the circuits while at their operating temperatures is to be normally at least equal to:
Rated Voltage of the Machine
(Rating in kVA/100) + 1000
The minimum insulation resistance of the fields of machines separately excited with voltage less than the
rated voltage of the machine is to be on the order of one-half to one megohm.
3.7 Overload and Overcurrent Capability

3.7.1 AC Generators
AC generators are to be capable of withstanding a current equal to 1.5 times the rated current for
not less than 30 seconds. The test may be performed in conjunction with the short circuit testing,
provided the electrical input energy to the machine is not less than that required for the above
overload capability.
3.7.2 AC Motors
3.7.2(a) Overcurrent Capacity. Three phase motors, except for commutator motors, having rated
outputs not exceeding 315 kW and rated voltages not exceeding 1 kV are to be capable of
withstanding a current equal to 1.5 times the rated current for not less than two minutes. For three-
phase and single phase motors having rated outputs above 315 kW, the overcurrent capacity is to
be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specification. The test may be performed at a reduced speed.
3.7.2(b) Overload Capacity. Three-phase induction motors are to be capable of withstanding for
15 seconds, without stalling or abrupt change in speed, an excess torque of 60% of their rated
torque, the voltage and frequency being maintained at their rated values.
3.7.2(c) Overload Capacity for Synchronous Motors. Three phase synchronous motors are to be
capable of withstanding an excess torque, as specified below, for 15 seconds without falling out of
synchronism, the excitation being maintained at the value corresponding to the rated load.
Synchronous (wound rotor) 35% excess torque

induction motors:
Synchronous (cylindrical rotor) 35% excess torque
motors:
Synchronous (salient pole) 50% excess torque
motors:
When automatic excitation is used, the limit of torque values is to be the same as with the excitation
equipment operating under normal conditions.
3.9 Dielectric Strength of Insulation

3.9.1 Application
The dielectric test voltage is to be successively applied between each electric circuit and all other
electric circuits and metal parts earthed, and for direct-current (DC) rotating machines between
brush rings of opposite polarity. Interconnected polyphase windings are to be considered as one
circuit. All windings except that under test are to be connected to earth.
3.9.2 Standard Voltage Test
The insulation of all rotating machines is to be tested with the parts completely assembled and not
with the individual parts. The dielectric strength of the insulation is to be tested by the continuous
application for 60 seconds of an alternating voltage having a frequency of 25 to 60 Hz and voltage
in 4-6-4/Table 2. The requirements in 4-6-4/Table 2 apply to those machines other than high
voltage systems covered by 4-6-5/1.11.1(e).
3.9.3 Direct Current Test
A standard voltage test using a direct current source equal to 1.7 times the required alternating-
current voltage will be acceptable.
3.11 Temperature Ratings

3.11.1 Temperature Rises
3.11.1(a) Continuous Rating Machines. After the machine has been run continuously under a
rated load until steady temperature condition has been reached, the temperature rises are not to
exceed those given in 4-6-4/Table 3.
3.11.1(b) Short-time Rating Machines. After the machine has been run at a rated load during the
rated time followed by a rest and a de-energized period of sufficient duration to re-establish the
machine temperatures within 2°C (3.6°F) of the coolant, the temperature rises are not to exceed
those given in 4-6-4/Table 3. At the beginning of the temperature measurement, the temperature of
the machine is to be within 5°C (8°F) of the temperature of the coolant.
3.11.1(c) Periodic Duty Rating Machines. The machine has been run at a rated load for the
designed load cycle to be applied and continued until obtaining the practically identical temperature
cycle. At the middle of the period causing the greatest heating in the last cycle of the operation,
the temperature rises are not to exceed those given in 4-6-4/Table 3.
3.11.1(d) Non-periodic Duty Rating Machines. After the machine has been run continuously or
intermittently under the designed variations of the load and speed within the permissible operating
range until reaching the steady temperature condition, the temperature rises are not to exceed
those given in 4-6-4/Table 3.
3.11.1(e) Insulation Material Above 180°C (356°F). Temperature rises for insulation materials
above 180°C (356°F) will be considered in accordance with 4-6-1/13.11.
3.11.2 Ambient Temperature
These final temperatures are based on an ambient temperature of 50°C (122°F), for machines
located within boiler and engine rooms in accordance with 4-6-1/17. Where provision is made for
ensuring the ambient temperature of the space is being maintained at 40°C (104°F) or less, as by
air cooling or by locating the machine outside of the boiler and engine rooms, the temperature
rises of the windings may be 5°C (9°F) higher. The ambient temperature is to be taken in at least
two places within 1.83 m (6 ft) of the machine under test and by thermometers having their bulbs
immersed in oil contained in an open cup.
3.13 Construction and Assemblies

3.13.1 Enclosure, Frame and Pedestals
Magnet frames and pedestals may be separate but are to be secured to a common foundation.
3.13.2 Shafts and Couplings
3.13.2(a) Rotors of non-integrated auxiliary machinery. The design of the following specified
rotating shafts and components, when not integral with the propulsion shafting, are to comply with
the following:
• Rotor shaft: 4-2-4/5.3.1* and 4-2-4/5.3.2*
• Hollow shaft: 4-3-1/7.3
• Key: 4-3-1/9 and 4-2-4/5.3.2*
• Coupling flanges and bolts: 4-2-1/17 and 4-3-1/19
* Note: Rules for Building and Classing Steel Vessels
3.13.2(b) Rotors of integrated auxiliary machinery. Shaft motors and shaft generators, which are
an integral part of the line shafting, shall be evaluated for maximum combined load (steady and
dynamic torque and bending) acting within operating range of installation. Accordingly, the shaft
diameter design criteria per 4-2-4/5.3.1 and 4-2-4/5.3.2 of the Steel Vessel Rules is to be evaluated
for maximum torsional moment acting within the operating speeds, instead of torsional moment T
at rated speed.
The shaft diameter of the motors and generators, that are an integral part of the line shafting, may
also be designed per 4-3-1/7 and are to be evaluated based on engineering analyses.
3.13.3 Circulating Currents
Means are to be provided to prevent circulating currents from passing between the journals and
the bearings, where the design and arrangement of the machine is such that damaging current may
be expected. Where such protection is required, a warning plate is to be provided in a visible place
cautioning against the removal of such protection.
3.13.4 Rotating Exciters

Rotating exciters are to conform to all applicable requirements for generators.
3.13.5 Insulation of Windings
Armature and field coils are to be treated to resist oil and water.
3.13.6 Protection Against Cooling Water
Where water cooling is used, the cooler is to be so arranged as to avoid entry of water into the
machine, whether through leakage or from condensation in the heat exchanger.
3.13.7 Moisture Condensation Prevention (2014)
All generators, and each motor rated 50 kW and over, are to be provided with a means to prevent
moisture condensation in the machine when idle.
Where steam-heating coils are installed for this purpose, there are to be no pipe joints inside of the
casings. See item 7 in 4-6-4/Table 7 for space heater pilot lamp for alternating-current generators.
3.13.8 Terminal Arrangements
Terminals are to be provided at an accessible position and protected against mechanical damage
and accidental contact for earthing, short-circuit or touching. Terminal leads are to be secured to
the frame and the designation of each terminal lead are to be clearly marked. The ends of terminal
leads are to be fitted with connectors. Cable glands or similar are to be provided where cable
penetrations may compromise the protection property of terminal enclosures.
3.13.9 Nameplates
Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an accessible position of the
machine and are to indicate at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/Table 4a.
3.15 Lubrication
Rotating machines are to have continuous lubrication at all running speeds and all normal working bearing
temperatures, with the craft’s inclinations specified in 4-1-1/17. Unless otherwise approved, where forced
lubrication is employed, the machines are to be provided with means to shut down their prime movers
automatically upon failure of the lubricating system. Each self-lubricating sleeve bearing is to be fitted
with an inspection lid and means for visual indication of oil level or an oil gauge.
3.17 Turbines for Generators

Gas-turbine prime movers driving generators are to meet the applicable requirements in Section 4-2-3 of
the Steel Vessel Rules and, in addition, are to comply with the following requirements.
3.17.1 Operating Governor
An effective operating governor is to be fitted on prime movers driving main or emergency electric
generators and is to be capable of automatically maintaining the speed within the following limits.
Special consideration will be given when an installation requires different characteristics.
3.17.1(a) Transient Frequency Variations. The transient frequency variations in the electrical
network, when running at the indicated loads below, are to be within ±10% of the rated frequency
when:
i) Running at full load (equal to rated output) of the generator and the maximum electrical
step load is suddenly thrown off,
In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated output of a generator is thrown off, a
transient frequency variation in excess of 10% of the rated frequency may be acceptable,
provided the overspeed protective device, fitted in addition to the governor, as required by
4-6-4/3.17.2, is not activated.
ii) Running at no load and 50% of the full load of the generator is suddenly thrown on followed
by the remaining 50% load after an interval sufficient to restore the frequency to steady state.
In all instances, the frequency is to return to within ±1% of the final steady state condition
in no more than five seconds.
3.17.1(b) Frequency Variations in Steady State. The permanent frequency variation is to be within
±5% of the rated frequency at any load between no load and full load.
3.17.1(c) Emergency Generator Prime Movers. For gas turbines driving emergency generators,
the requirements of 4-6-4/3.17.1(a) and 4-6-4/3.17.1(b) are to be met. However, for the purpose of
4-6-4/3.17.1(a)ii), where the sum of all loads that can be automatically connected is larger than
50% of the full load of the emergency generator, the sum of these loads is to be used as the first
applied load.
3.17.2 Overspeed Governor
In addition to the normal operating governor, an overspeed governor is to be fitted which will trip
the turbine throttle when the rated speed is exceeded by more than 15%. Provision is to be made
for hand tripping. See 4-6-4/3.15 for pressure-lubricated machines.
3.17.3 Power Output of Gas Turbines
To satisfy the requirements of 4-6-2/3.1, the required power output of gas turbine prime movers
for ship’s service generator sets is to be based on the maximum expected inlet air temperature.
3.19 Diesel Engines for Generators

Diesel-engine prime movers are to meet the applicable requirements in Part 4, Chapter 2 and, in addition,
are to comply with the following requirements.
3.19.1 Operating Governor
An effective operating governor is to be fitted on prime movers driving main or emergency electric
generators and is to be capable of automatically maintaining the speed within the following limits.
Special consideration will be given when an installation requires different characteristics.
3.19.1(a) Transient Frequency Variations. The transient frequency variations in the electrical
network, when running at the indicated loads below, are to be within ±10% of the rated frequency with
a recovery time within ±1% of the final steady state condition in not more than 5 seconds when:
i) Running at full load (equal to rated output) of the generator and the maximum electrical
step load is suddenly thrown off,
In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated output of a generator is thrown off, a
transient frequency variation in excess of 10% of the rated frequency may be acceptable,
provided the overspeed protective device, fitted in addition to the governor, as required by
4-6-4/3.19.2, is not activated.
ii) Running at no load and 50% of the full load of the generator is suddenly thrown on
followed by the remaining 50% load after an interval sufficient to restore the frequency to
steady state.
3.19.1(b) Power Management System. Where the electrical power system is fitted with a power
management system and sequential starting arrangements, the application of loads in multiple
steps of less than 50% of rated load in 4-6-4/3.19.1(a)ii) above may be permitted, provided it is in
accordance with 4-6-4/Figure 1. The details of the power management system and sequential
starting arrangements are to be submitted and its satisfactory operation is to be demonstrated to
the Surveyor.
FIGURE 1
Limiting Curves for Loading 4-stroke Diesel Engines
Step by Step from No-load to Rated Power as Function
of the Brake Mean Effective Pressure
3.19.1(c) Frequency Variations in Steady State. The permanent frequency variation is to be within
±5% of the rated frequency at all loads between no load and full load.
3.19.1(d) Emergency Generator Prime Movers. For prime movers driving emergency generators,
the requirements of 4-6-4/3.19.1(a)i) and 4-6-4/3.19.1(c) above are to be met even when:
i) Their total consumer load is applied suddenly, or
ii) Their total consumer load is applied in steps, subject to:
• The total load is supplied within 45 seconds since power failure on the main switchboard
• The maximum step load is declared and demonstrated
• The power distribution system is designed such that the declared maximum step loading
is not exceeded
• The compliance of time delays and loading sequence with the above is to be
demonstrated at ship’s trials.
3.19.2 Overspeed Governor
In addition to the normal operating governor, each auxiliary diesel engine having a maximum
continuous output of 220 kW and over is to be fitted with a separate overspeed device so adjusted
that the speed cannot exceed the maximum rated speed by more than 15%. Provision is to be made
for hand tripping. See 4-6-4/3.15 for pressure-lubricated machines.
3.21 Alternating-current (AC) Generators

3.21.1 Control and Excitation of Generators
Excitation current for generators is to be provided by attached rotating exciters or by static
exciters deriving their source of power from the machine being excited.
3.21.2 Voltage Regulation
3.21.2(a) Voltage Regulators. A separate regulator is to be supplied for each AC generator. When
it is intended that two or more generators will be operated in parallel, reactive-droop compensating
means are to be provided to divide the reactive power properly between the generators.
3.21.2(b) Variation from Rated Voltage – Steady Conditions. Each AC generator for ship’s service
driven by its prime mover having governor characteristics complying with 4-6-4/3.17.1 or 4-6-4/3.19.1
is to be provided with an excitation system capable of maintaining the voltage under steady conditions
within plus or minus 2.5% of the rated voltage for all loads between zero and rated load at rated
power factor. These limits may be increased to plus or minus 3.5% for emergency sets.
3.21.2(c) Variation from Rated Voltage – Transient Conditions. Momentary voltage variations
are to be within the range of minus 15% to plus 20% of the rated voltage, and the voltage is to be
restored to within plus or minus 3% of the rated voltage in not more than 1.5 seconds when:
• A load equal to the starting current of the largest motor or a group of motors, but in any case,
at least 60% of the rated current of the generator, and power factor of 0.4 lagging or less, is
suddenly thrown on with the generator running at no load; and
• A load equal to the above is suddenly thrown off.
Consideration can be given to performing the test required by 4-6-4/Table 1, Item 4 according to
precise information concerning the maximum values of the sudden loads instead of the values
indicated above, provided precise information is available. The precise information concerning
the maximum values of the sudden loads is to be based on the power management system
arrangements and starting arrangements provided for the electrical system.
3.21.2(d) Short Circuit Conditions. Under steady-state short-circuit conditions, the generator together
with its excitation system is to be capable of maintaining a steady-state short-circuit current of not
less than three times its rated full load current for a period of two seconds or of such magnitude
and duration as required to properly actuate the associated electrical protective devices.
For AC generating sets operating in parallel, the following requirements are to be complied with.
See also 4-6-2/9.5.2 for protection of AC generators in parallel operation.
3.21.3(a) Reactive Load Sharing. The reactive loads of the individual generating sets are not to
differ from their proportionate share of the combined reactive load by more than 10% of the rated
reactive output of the largest generator, or 25% of the rated reactive output of the smallest
generator, whichever is the less.
3.21.3(b) Load Sharing. For any load between 20% and 100% of the sum of the rated output
(aggregate output) of all generators, the load on any generator is not to differ more than 15% of
the rated output in kilowatt of the largest generator or 25% of the rated output in kilowatt of the
individual generator in question, whichever is the less, from its proportionate share of the combined
load for any steady state condition. The starting point for the determination of the foregoing load-
distribution requirements is to be at 75% of the aggregate output with each generator carrying its
proportionate share.
3.21.3(c) Facilities for Load Adjustment. Facilities are to be provided to adjust the governor
sufficiently fine to permit an adjustment of load not exceeding 5% of the aggregate output at normal
frequency.
3.23 Direct-current (DC) Generators

3.23.1 Control and Excitation of Generators
3.23.1(a) Field Regulations. Means are to be provided at the switchboard to enable the voltage of
each generator to be adjusted separately. This equipment is to be capable of adjusting the voltage
of the DC generator to within 0.5% of the rated voltage at all loads between no-load and full-load.
3.23.1(b) Polarity of Series Windings. The series windings of each generator for a two wire DC
system are to be connected to the negative terminal of each machine.
3.23.1(c) Equalizer Connections. See 4-6-4/7.15.3.
3.23.2 Voltage Regulation

3.23.2(a) Shunt or Stabilized Shunt-wound Generator. When the voltage has been set at full-load
to its rated value, the removal of the load is not to cause a permanent increase of the voltage
greater than 15% of the rated voltage. When the voltage has been set either at full-load or at no-
load, the voltage obtained at any value of the load is not to exceed the no-load voltage.
3.23.2(b) Compound-wound Generator. Compound-wound generators are to be so designed in
relation to the governing characteristics of the prime mover that with the generator at full-load
operating temperature and starting at 20% load with voltage within 1% of rated voltage, it gives at
full-load a voltage within 1.5% of rated voltage. The average of ascending and descending voltage
regulation curves between 20% load and full-load is not to vary more than 3% from rated voltage.
3.23.2(c) Automatic Voltage Regulators. Ship’s service generators which are of a shunt type are
to be provided with automatic voltage regulators. However, if the load fluctuation does not interfere
with the operation of essential auxiliaries, shunt-wound generators without voltage regulators or
stabilized shunt-wound machines may be used. An automatic voltage regulator will not be required
for the ship’s service generators of an approximately flat-compounded type. Automatic voltage
regulators are to be provided for all service generators driven by variable speed engines used also
for propulsion purposes, whether these generators are of the shunt, stabilized shunt or compound-
wound type.
For DC generating sets operating in parallel, the following requirements are to be complied with.
See also 4-6-2/9.7.2 for protection of DC generators in parallel operation.
3.23.3(a) Stability. The generating sets are to be stable in operation at all loads from no-load to
full-load.
3.23.3(b) Load Sharing. For any load between 20% and 100% of the sum of the rated output
(aggregate output) of all generators, the load on any generator is not to differ more than 12% from
the rated output in kilowatts of the largest generator or 25% from the rated output in kilowatts of
the individual generator in question, whichever is the less, from its proportionate share of the
combined load for any steady state condition. The starting point for the determination of the
foregoing load-distribution requirements is to be at 75% of the aggregate output with each
generator carrying its proportionate share.
3.23.3(c) Tripping of Circuit Breaker. DC generators which operate in parallel are to be provided
with a switch which will trip the generator circuit breaker upon functioning of the overspeed device.
5 Accumulator Batteries
5.1 General
5.1.1 Application
All accumulator batteries for engine starting, essential or emergency services are to be constructed
and installed in accordance with the following requirements. Accumulator batteries for services
other than the above are to be constructed and equipped in accordance with good commercial
practice. All accumulator batteries will be accepted subject to a satisfactory performance test
conducted after installation to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
5.1.2 Sealed Type Batteries
Where arrangements are made for releasing gas through a relief valve following an overcharge
condition, calculations demonstrating compliance with the criteria in 4-6-3/3.7.3 under the expected
rate of hydrogen generation are to be submitted together with the details of installation and mechanical
ventilation arrangements.
5.1.3 References
5.1.3(a) Emergency Services. For requirements covering emergency services and transitional
source of power, see 4-6-2/5.5.3 and 4-6-2/5.7, respectively.
5.1.3(b) Protection of Batteries. For requirements covering protection of batteries, see 4-6-2/5.9.
5.1.3(c) Battery Installation. For requirements covering battery installation, ventilation of the battery
location and protection from corrosion, see 4-6-3/3.7.
5.1.3(d) Cable Installation. For requirements covering cable installation in the battery room, see
4-6-3/5.23.
5.3 Construction and Assembly

5.3.1 Cells and Filling Plugs
The cells are to be so constructed as to prevent spilling of electrolyte due to an inclination of 40 deg.
from normal. The filling plugs are to be so constructed as to prevent spilling of electrolyte due to
the craft’s movements such as rolling and pitching.
5.3.2 Crates and Trays
The cells are to be grouped in crates or trays of rigid construction equipped with handles to facilitate
handling. For protection from corrosion, see 4-6-3/3.7.4. The mass of crates or trays are not to
exceed 100 kg (220.5 lb).
5.3.3 Nameplate
Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an accessible position of each
crate or tray and are to indicate at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/Table 4b.
5.5 Engine-starting Battery

Battery systems for engine-starting purposes may be of the one-wire type and the earth lead is to be carried
to the engine frame. See also 4-2-1/13.9 and 4-6-2/5.15 for main engine starting and the starting arrangement
of the emergency generator, respectively.
7 Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Controllers, etc.
7.1 General
7.1.1 Applications
Switchboards are to provide adequate control of the generation and distribution of electric power.
The following equipment are to be constructed and tested in accordance with the following
requirements to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
7.1.1(a) Switchboards. Switchboards for essential services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11.
7.1.1(b) Motor Controllers. Motor Controllers of 100 kW and over intended for essential services
or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11.
7.1.1(c) Motor Control Centers. Motor control centers with aggregate loads of 100 kW or more
intended for essential services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11.
7.1.1(d) Battery Charger Units and Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) Units. Battery charger
units of 25 kW and over and uninterruptible power system (UPS) units of 50 kVA intended for
essential services, services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11, emergency source of power or transitional
source of power.
7.1.1(e) Distribution Boards. Distribution boards associated with the charging or discharging of
the battery system or uninterruptible power system (UPS) in 4-6-4/7.1.1(d).
Switchboard, distribution board, battery charger units, uninterruptible power system (UPS) units, motor
control centers and motor controllers not covered by the above paragraph are to be constructed
and equipped in accordance with good commercial practice, and will be accepted subject to a
satisfactory performance test conducted after installation to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
7.1.2 References
7.1.2(a) Inclination. For requirements covering inclination for design condition, see 4-1-1/17.
7.1.2(b) Emergency Switchboard. For requirements covering emergency switchboard, see 4-6-3/5.9.
7.1.2(c) Circuit Breakers. For requirements covering generator circuit breakers, see 4-6-4/11.1.
7.1.2(d) Feeder Protection. For requirements covering feeder protection, see 4-6-2/9.3 to 4-6-2/9.17,
4-6-2/11.3, 4-6-2/13.1.4 and 4-6-2/13.3.3
7.1.2(e) Hull Return and Earthed Distribution System. For requirements covering hull return system
and earthed distribution system, see 4-6-2/7.3 and 4-6-2/7.5, respectively
7.1.2(f) Earthing. For requirements covering earthing connections, see 4-6-3/7.
7.1.2(g) Installation. For requirements covering installation, see 4-6-3/3.9 for switchboard,
4-6-3/3.11 for distribution boards and 4-6-3/3.13 for motor controllers and control centers.
7.1.2(h) Protection Enclosures and its Selection. For requirements covering degree of the protection
and the selection of equipment, see 4-6-1/15 and 4-6-3/3.1, respectively.
7.3 Testing and Inspection

7.3.1 Applications
7.3.1(a) Switchboards. All switchboards intended for essential services or for services indicated
in 4-6-4/Table 11, are to be tested in the presence of and inspected by the Surveyor, preferably at
the plant of the manufacturer. For other switchboards, the tests may be carried out by the
manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request
from ABS.
7.3.1(b) Motor Controllers. All motor controllers of 100 kW and over intended for essential
services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11 are to be tested in the presence of and inspected
by the Surveyor, preferably at the plant of the manufacturer. For other motor controllers, the tests
may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be
submitted upon request from ABS.
7.3.1(c) Motor Control Centers. All motor control centers with aggregate loads of 100 kW and
over intended for essential services or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11 are to be tested in
the presence of and inspected by the Surveyor, preferably at the plant of the manufacturer. For
other motor control centers, the tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of
tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.
7.3.1(d) Battery Charger Units, Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) Units, and Distribution
Boards . Battery charger units of 25 kW and over, uninterruptible power system (UPS) units of 50 kW
and over, and distribution boards [associated with the charging or discharging of the battery system
or uninterruptible power system (UPS)] are used for essential services (see 4-6-1/3.7), services
indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11, emergency source of power (see 4-6-2/5), and transitional source of
power (see 4-6-2/5.7) are to be tested in the presence of and inspected by the Surveyor, preferably
at the plant of the manufacturer. For all other battery charger units, uninterruptible power system
(UPS) units, and distribution boards, the tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose
certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.
7.3.1(e) Test Items. Tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements in 4-6-4/Table 5.
7.3.2 Special Testing Arrangements
In cases where all of the required tests are not carried out at the plant of the manufacturer, the
Surveyor is to be notified and arrangements are to be made so that the remaining tests may be
witnessed.
7.5 Insulation Resistance Measurement

The insulation resistance between current-carrying parts (connected together for the purpose of this test)
and earth and between current-carrying parts of opposite polarity is to be measured at a DC voltage of not
less than 500 volts before and after the dielectric strength tests. The insulation resistance measurement
after the dielectric strength tests is to be carried out before components which have been disconnected for
the dielectric tests are reconnected, and the insulation resistance is not to be less than 1 megohm.
7.7 Dielectric Strength of Insulation

The dielectric strength of the insulation is to be tested for 60 seconds by an alternating voltage applied in
accordance with 4-6-4/Table 5 between:
i) All live parts and the interconnected, exposed conductive parts, and
ii) Each phase and all other phases connected for this test to the interconnected exposed conductive
parts of the unit.
The test voltage at the moment of application is not to exceed 50% of the values given in 4-6-4/Table 5. It
is to be increased steadily within a few seconds to the required test voltage and maintained for 60 seconds.
Test voltage is to have a sinusoidal waveform and a frequency between 45 Hz and 60 Hz.
7.7.1 Production-line Apparatus
Standard apparatus produced in large quantities for which the standard test voltage is 2500 volts or
less may be tested for one second with a test voltage 20% higher than the one-minute test voltage.
7.7.2 Devices with Low Insulation Strength
Certain devices such as potential transformers having inherently lower insulation strength are to
be disconnected during the test.

7.9.1 Enclosures and Assemblies
Enclosures and assemblies are to be constructed of steel or other suitable, incombustible,
moisture-resistant materials and reinforced as necessary to withstand the mechanical, electrical
(magnetic) and thermal stresses likely to be encountered in service, and are to be protected against
corrosion. No wood is to be used, except for hardwood for nonconducting hand rails. Insulating
materials are to be flame retardant and moisture resistant. The supporting framework is to be of
rigid construction.
7.9.2 Dead Front
The dead-front type is to be used. Live-front type is not acceptable, regardless of the voltage ratings.
7.9.3 Mechanical Strength
All levers, handles, hand wheels, interlocks and their connecting links, shafts and bearings for the
operation of switches and contactors are to be of such proportions that they will not be broken or
distorted by manual operation.
7.9.4 Mechanical Protection
The sides and the rear and, where necessary, the front of switchboards are to be suitably guarded.
Exposed live parts having voltages to earth exceeding a voltage of 55 volts DC or 55 volts AC rms
between conductors are not to be installed on the front of such switchboards. Unless the
switchboard is installed on an electrically insulated floor, non-conducting mats or gratings are to
be provided at the front and rear of the switchboard. Where the floor on which the switchboard is
installed is of electrically insulated construction, the insulation level of the floor to the earth is to
be at least 50 MΩ. A notice plate is to be posted at the entrance to the switchboard room or on the
switchboard front panel to state that the floor in the room is of electrically insulated construction.
Drip covers are to be provided over switchboards when subject to damage by leaks or falling objects.
7.11 Bus Bars, Wiring and Contacts

7.11.1 Design
Copper bar is to be used for main and generator bus in the switchboard. Other materials and
combination of materials will be specially considered. Generator bus bars are to be designed on the
basis of maximum generator rating. All other bus bars and bus-bar connections are to be designed
for at least 75% of the combined full-load rated currents of all apparatus that they supply, except
that when they supply one unit or any group of units in continuous operation, they are to be designed
for full load.
7.11.2 Operating Temperature of Bus Bars
Bus bars are to be proportioned to avoid temperature which will affect the normal operation of
electrical devices mounted on the board.
7.11.3 Short Circuit Rating
Circuit breakers and bus bars are to be mounted, braced and located so as to withstand the thermal
effects and mechanical forces resulting from the maximum prospective short circuit current.
Switchboard instruments, controls, etc. are to be located with respect to circuit breakers so as to
minimize the thermal effects due to short circuit currents.
7.11.4 Internal Wiring
Instrument and control wiring is to be of the stranded type and is to have heat-resisting and flame-
retarding insulation. Wiring from hinged panels is to be of the extra-flexible type.
7.11.5 Arrangement
7.11.5(a) Accessibility. The arrangement of bus bars and wiring on the back is to be such that all
lugs are readily accessible.
7.11.5(b) Locking of Connections. All nuts and connections are to be fitted with locking devices
to prevent loosening due to vibration. Bolted bus bar connections are to be suitably treated (e.g.,
silver plating) to avoid deterioration of electrical conductivity over time.
7.11.5(c) Soldered Connections. Soldered connections are not to be used for connecting or
terminating any wire or cable of nominal cross-sectional area of greater than 2.5 mm2 (4,933 circ.
mils). Soldered connections, where used, are to have a solder contact length at least 1.5 times the
diameter of the conductor.
7.11.6 Clearances and Creepage Distances
7.11.6(a) General. Bare main bus bars, but not including the conductors between the main bus bars
and the supply side of outgoing units, are to have minimum clearances (in air) and creepage distances
(across surfaces) in accordance with 4-6-4/Table 6.
7.11.6(b) Alternative (2014). Alternatively, reduced creepage and clearance distances may be used
provided:
i) The equipment is not installed in ‘Machinery Spaces of Category A’ or in areas affected
by a Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing System.
ii) The minimum clearance distance shall not be less than 8 mm
iii) The minimum creepage distance shall not be less than 16 mm.
iv) The equipment complies with IEC 61439-1.
v) In applying IEC 61439-1, the equipment is considered to be:
• Of overvoltage Category III,
• Installed in an environment of pollution degree 3,
• Having insulating material of type IIIa, and
• Installed in inhomogeneous field conditions
vi) The temperature dependent criteria in IEC 61439-1 are derated to meet the ambient
temperatures found on marine installations. Refer to 4-1-1/Table 2.
vii) The equipment is subject to an impulse voltage test with test voltage values shown in the
Table below. Where intermediate values of rated operational voltage are used, the next
higher rated impulse withstand test voltage is to be used. The impulse voltage test reports
are to be submitted to ABS for review.
Rated Operational Voltage Rated Impulse Withstand Test Voltage

V kV
50 0.8
100 1.5
150 2.5
300 4
600 6
1000 8
7.11.7 Terminals
Terminals or terminal rows for systems of different voltages are to be clearly separated from each
other. The rated voltage is to be clearly indicated at least once for each group of terminals which
have been separated from the terminals with other voltage ratings. Terminals with different voltage
ratings, each not exceeding 50 V DC or 50 V AC may be grouped together. Each terminal is to
have a nameplate indicating the circuit designation.
7.13 Control and Protective Devices

7.13.1 Circuit-disconnecting Devices
7.13.1(a) Systems Exceeding 50 Volts (2016). Distribution boards, chargers or controllers for
distribution to motors, appliances, and lighting or other branch circuits are to be fitted with
multipole circuit breakers or a multipole switch-fuse combination in each unearthed conductor.
7.13.1(b) System of 50 Volts and Less (2016). For distribution boards, chargers or controllers where
voltage to earth or between poles does not exceed 50 volts DC or 50 volts AC rms, the fuses may be
provided without switches.
7.13.1(c) Disconnect Device. The rating of the disconnecting device is to be coordinated with the
voltage and current requirements of the load. The disconnect device is to indicate by position of
the handle, or otherwise, whether it is open or closed.
7.13.2 Arrangement of Equipment
7.13.2(a) Air Circuit Breakers. Air circuit breaker contacts are to be kept at least 305 mm (12 in.)
from the craft’s structure unless insulation barriers are installed.
7.13.2(b) Voltage Regulators. Voltage regulator elements are to be provided with enclosing cases
to protect them from damage.
7.13.2(c) Equipment Operated in High Temperature. Where rheostats or other devices that may
operate at high temperatures are mounted on the switchboard, they are to be naturally ventilated
and so located or isolated by barriers as to prevent excessive temperature of adjacent devices.
When this cannot be accomplished, the rheostat or other device is to be mounted separately from
the switchboard.
7.13.2(d) Accessibility to Fuses. All fuses, except for instrument and control circuits, are to be
mounted on or be accessible from the front of the switchboard.
7.13.2(e) Protective Device for Instrumentation. All wiring on the boards for instrumentation is
to be protected by fuses or current limiting devices. See 4-6-2/9.17.
7.13.2(f) Wearing Parts. All wearing parts are to be accessible for inspection and readily renewable.
7.13.3 Markings
Identification plates are to be provided for each piece of apparatus to indicate clearly its service.
Identification plates for feeders and branch circuits are to include the circuit designation and the
rating of the fuse or circuit-breaker trip setting required by the circuit.
7.15 Switchboards
In addition to 4-6-4/7.1 to 4-6-4/7.13, as applicable, the switchboards for essential or emergency services
are to comply with the following requirements.
7.15.1 Handrails
Insulated handrail or insulated handles are to be provided on the front of the switchboard. Similarly,
where access to the rear is required, insulated handrail or insulated handles are also to be fitted on
the rear of the switchboard.
7.15.2 Main Bus Bar Subdivision (2014)
Craft with the keel laid or in similar stage of construction on or after 1 July 1998 are to meet the
following requirements. Where the main source of electrical power is necessary for propulsion of
the craft, the main bus bar is to be subdivided into at least two sections which are to be normally
connected by circuit breaker or other approved means. As far as practicable, the connection of
generating sets and any other duplicated equipment is to be equally divided between the sections.
If the arrangement is such that the main switchboard is divided into separate sections which are
interconnected by cable, the cable is to be protected at each end against faults.
7.15.3 Equalizer Circuit for Direct-current (DC) Generators
7.15.3(a) Equalizer Main Circuit. The current rating of the equalizer main circuit for direct-
current (DC) generators is not to be less than half of the rated full-load current of the generator.
7.15.3(b) Equalizer Bus Bars. The current rating of the equalizer bus bars is not to be less than
half of the rated full-load current of the largest generator in the group.
7.15.4 Equipment and Instrumentation
Equipment and instrumentation are to be provided in accordance with 4-6-4/Table 7. They are to
be suitable for starting, stopping, synchronizing and paralleling each generator set from the main
switchboard. They may be mounted on the centralized control console, if the main switchboard is
located in the centralized control station.
7.17 Motor Controllers and Control Centers

In addition to 4-6-4/7.1 to 4-6-4/7.13, as applicable, the motor controllers and control centers for essential
or emergency services are to comply with the following requirements.
7.17.1 Enclosures and Assemblies
The following materials are acceptable for the enclosures:
• Cast metal, other than die-cast metal, at least 3 mm (1/8 in.) thick at every point.
• Nonmetallic materials which have ample strength, are noncombustible and non-absorptive
(e.g., laminated phenolic material).
• Sheet metal of adequate strength.
Motor control centers are to be constructed so that they are secured to a solid foundation, be self-
supported, or be braced to the bulkhead.
7.17.2 Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers
Means are to be provided for the disconnection of the full load from all live poles of supply of every
motor rated at 0.5 kW or above and its controlgear. Where the controlgear is mounted on or adjacent
to a main or auxiliary distribution switchboard, a disconnecting switch in the switchboard may be
used for this purpose. Otherwise, a disconnecting switch within the controlgear enclosure or a separate
enclosed disconnecting switch is to be provided. Disconnect switches and circuit breakers are to
be operated without opening the enclosures in which they are installed.
7.17.3 Auto-starters
Alternating-current (AC) motor manual auto-starters with self-contained auto-transformers are to
be provided with switches of the quick-make-and-break type, and the starter is to be arranged so
that it will be impossible to throw to the running position without having first thrown to the
starting position. Switches are to be preferably of the contactor or air-break-type.
7.19 Battery Systems and Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)

In addition to 4-6-4/7.1 to 4-6-4/7.13, as applicable, equipment for essential, emergency, and transitional sources
of power services are to comply with the following requirements. Such equipment would include the battery
charger unit, uninterruptible power system (UPS) unit, and the distribution boards associated with the charging
or discharging of the battery system or uninterruptible power system (UPS).
7.19.1 Definitions
Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) – A combination of converters, switches and energy storage
means, for example batteries, constituting a power system for maintaining continuity of load power
in case of input power failure.
Off-line UPS unit – A UPS unit where under normal operation the output load is powered from the
bypass line (raw mains) and only transferred to the inverter if the bypass supply fails or goes outside
preset limits. This transition will invariably result in a brief (typically 2 to 10 ms) break in the load
supply.
Line interactive UPS unit – An off-line UPS unit where the bypass line switch to stored energy power
when the input power goes outside the preset voltage and frequency limits.
On-line UPS unit – A UPS unit where under normal operation the output load is powered from the
inverter, and will therefore continue to operate without break in the event of the supply input failing
or going outside preset limits.
DC UPS unit – A UPS unit where the output is in DC (direct current).
7.19.2 Battery Charging Rate
Except when a different charging rate is necessary and is specified for a particular application, the
charging facilities are to be such that the completely discharged battery can be recharged to 80%
capacity in not more than 10 hours. See also 4-6-4/7.19.6(c)
7.19.3 Discharge Protection
An acceptable means, such as reverse current protection, is to be provided for preventing a failed
component in the battery charger unit or uninterruptible power system (UPS) unit from discharging
the battery.
7.19.4(a) Construction. Battery charger units and uninterruptible power system (UPS) units are
to be constructed in accordance with the IEC 62040 Series, or an acceptable and relevant national
or international standard.
7.19.4(b) Operation. The operation of the UPS is not to depend upon external services.
7.19.4(c) Type. The type of UPS unit employed, whether off-line, line interactive or on-line, is to
be appropriate to the power supply requirements of the connected load equipment.
7.19.4(d) Continuity of Supply. An external bypass is to be provided to account for a failure
within the uninterruptible power system (UPS). For battery charger units and DC UPS units, see
4-6-2/7.1.6(c).
7.19.4(e) Monitoring and Alarming. The battery charger unit or uninterruptible power system
(UPS) unit is to be monitored and audible and visual alarm is to be given in a normally attended
location for the following.
• Power supply failure (voltage and frequency) to the connected load

• Earth fault,
• Operation of battery protective device,
• When the battery is being discharged, and
• When the bypass is in operation for on-line UPS units. When changeover occurs, for battery
charger units and DC UPS units required to comply with 4-6-2/7.1.6(c).
7.19.5 Location
7.19.5(a) Location. The UPS unit is to be suitably located for use in an emergency. The UPS unit
is to be located as near as practical to the equipment being supplied, provided the arrangements comply
with all other Rules, such as 4-6-3/3.7, 4-6-3/3.9, 4-6-3/3.11, and 4-6-3/3.13 for location of electrical
equipment.
7.19.5(b) Ventilation. UPS units utilizing valve regulated sealed batteries may be located in
compartments with normal electrical equipment, provided the ventilation arrangements are in
accordance with the requirements of 4-6-3/3.7. Since valve regulated sealed batteries are considered
low-hydrogen-emission batteries, calculations are to be submitted in accordance with 4-6-3/3.7.2(d)
to establish the gas emission performance of the valve regulated batteries compared to the standard
lead acid batteries. Arrangements are to be provided to allow any possible gas emission to be led
to the weather, unless the gas emission performance of the valve regulated batteries does not
exceed that of standard lead acid batteries connected to a charging device of 0.2 kW.
7.19.5(c) Battery Installation. For battery installation arrangements, see 4-6-3/3.7.
7.19.6 Performance
7.19.6(a) Duration. The output power is to be maintained for the duration required for the connected
equipment as stated in 4-6-2/5.3 for emergency services and 4-6-2/5.7 of transitional source of power,
as applicable.
7.19.6(b) Battery Capacity. No additional circuits are to be connected to the battery charger unit
or UPS unit without verification that the batteries have adequate capacity. The battery capacity is,
at all times, to be capable of supplying the designated loads for the time specified in 4-6-4/7.19.6(a).
7.19.6(c) Recharging. On restoration of the input power, the rating of the charging facilities are
to be sufficient to recharge the batteries while maintaining the output supply to the load equipment.
See also 4-6-4/7.19.2.
7.19.7 Testing and Survey
7.19.7(a) Surveys. Equipment units are to be surveyed during manufacturing and testing in
accordance with 4-6-4/7.3.1.
7.19.7(b) Testing. Appropriate testing is to be carried out to demonstrate that the battery charger
units and uninterruptible power system (UPS) units are suitable for the intended environment. This
is expected to include as a minimum the following tests:
• Functionality, including operation of alarms;
• Temperature rise;
• Ventilation rate;
• Battery capacity
7.19.7(c) Test upon power input failure. Where the supply is to be maintained without a break
following a power input failure, this is to be verified after installation by practical test.
9 Transformers
9.1 General
9.1.1 Applications
All transformers which serve for essential or emergency electrical supply are to be constructed,
tested and installed in accordance with the following requirements. Transformers other than the above
services, auto-transformers for starting motors or isolation transformers are to be constructed and
equipped in accordance with good commercial practice. All transformers are to be of the dry and air
cooled type. The use of liquid immersed type transformers will be subject to special consideration.
Transformers other than for essential or emergency services will be accepted subject to a satisfactory
performance test conducted after installation to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
9.1.2 References
9.1.2(a) Power Supply Arrangement. For requirements covering arrangement of power supply
through transformers to ship’s service systems, see 4-6-2/7.1.6.
9.1.2(b) Protection. For requirements covering protection of transformers, see 4-6-2/9.15.
9.1.2(c) Protection Enclosures and its Selection. For requirements covering selection of the
protection enclosures for location conditions, see 4-6-3/3.1.1.
9.1.3 Forced Cooling Arrangement (Air or Liquid)
Where forced cooling medium is used to preclude the transformer from exceeding temperatures
outside of its rated range, monitoring and alarm means are to be provided and arranged so that an
alarm activates when pre-set temperature conditions are exceeded. Manual or automatic arrangements
are to be made to reduce the transformer load to a level corresponding to the cooling available.
9.3 Temperature Rise (2014)

The maximum temperature rise of the transformer insulated windings, based on an ambient temperature of
45°C (113°F), is not to exceed the values listed in 4-6-4/Table 8.

9.5.1 Windings
All transformer windings are to be treated to resist moisture, sea atmosphere and oil vapors.
9.5.2 Terminals
Terminals are to be provided in an accessible position. The circuit designation is to be clearly marked
on each terminal connection. The terminals are to be so spaced or shielded that they cannot be
accidentally earthed, short-circuited or touched.
9.5.3 Nameplate
Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an accessible position of the
transformer and are to indicate at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/Table 4c.
9.5.4 Prevention of the Accumulation of Moisture
Transformers of 10 kVA/phase and over are to be provided with effective means to prevent
accumulation of moisture and condensation within the transformer enclosure where the transformer
is disconnected from the switchboard during standby (cold standby). Where it is arranged that the
transformer is retained in an energized condition throughout a period of standby (hot standby), the
exciting current to the primary winding may be considered as a means to meet the above purpose.
In case of hot standby, a warning plate is to be posted at or near the disconnecting device for the
primary side feeder to the transformer.
9.7 Testing
For single-phase transformers rated 1 kVA and above or three-phase transformers rated 5 kVA and above
intended for essential or emergency services, the following tests are to be carried out by the transformer’s
manufacturer in accordance with a recognized standard whose certificate of test is to be submitted for
review upon request.
i) Measurement of winding resistance, voltage ratio, impedance voltage, short circuit impedance,
insulation resistance, load loss, no load loss and excitation current, phase relation and polarity.
ii) Dielectric strength.
iii) Temperature rise (required for one transformer of each size and type). See 4-6-4/9.3.
10 Semiconductor Converters for Adjustable Speed Motor Drives (2014)
10.1 Application
All semiconductor converters that are used to control motor drives having a rated power of 100 kW (135 hp)
and over intended for essential services (see definition in 4-6-1/3.7) or for services indicated in 4-6-4/Table 11
are to be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with the requirements of 4-6-4/10.
Manufacturer’s tests for semiconductor converters that are used to control motor drives having a rated power
less than 100 kW (135 hp) for essential services (see definition in 4-6-1/3.7) or for services indicated in
4-6-4/Table 11 are to include at least the tests described in 4-6-4/10.7. All other semiconductor converters
used to control motor drives are to be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with established
industrial practices and manufacturer’s specifications.
The required tests may be carried out at the manufacturer facility whose certificates of tests will be acceptable
and are to be submitted upon request to ABS. All semiconductor converters will only be accepted subject
to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor after installation.
10.3 Standards of Compliance

The design of semiconductor converters for adjustable speed motor drives, unless otherwise contradicted
by ABS Rules, shall be in compliance with the requirements of IEC Publication 61800-5-1:2007 (titled
‘Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems : Safety Requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy’)
and 60146-1-1:2009 (titled ‘Semiconductor converters – General requirements and line commutated
converters – Specification of basic requirements). For convenience, the following requirements are listed.
10.5 Design, Construction and Assembly Requirements

10.5.1 Rating
Semiconductor converters are to be rated for continuous load conditions and if required by the
application, are to have specified overload capabilities.
The operation of the semiconductor converter equipment, including any associated transformers,
reactors, capacitors and filter circuits, shall not cause harmonic distortion and voltage and frequency
variations in excess of the values mentioned in 4-6-2/7.9 and 4-6-1/Table 1, respectively.
The semiconductor converter circuits shall be able to withstand voltage and current transients that
the system may be subject to for certain applications.
The semiconductor converters are to be suitable for environmental conditions found in marine
installations such as those mentioned in 4-1-1/Table 1 and 4-1-1/Table 2.
10.5.2 Enclosures
Enclosures and assemblies are to be constructed of steel or other suitable incombustible, moisture-
resistant materials and reinforced as necessary to withstand the mechanical, electro-magnetic and
thermal stresses which may be encountered under both normal and fault conditions.
Enclosures are to be of the closed type. The degree of protection of the enclosure is to be in accordance
with 4-6-3/Table 1. For HV converters, the enclosure is to satisfy the requirements in 4-6-5/Table 1.
All wearing parts are to be accessible for inspection and be readily replaceable.
10.5.3 Nameplate Data

A nameplate made of corrosion resistant material is to be provided on the semiconductor assembly
and is to indicate at least the following:
i) Manufacturer’s name and identification reference/equipment serial number
ii) Number of input and output phases
iii) Rated input voltage and current
iv) Rated output voltage and current
v) Rated input and output frequency, if any
vi) Range of output frequency
vii) Maximum permissible prospective symmetrical rms short-circuit current of the power source
viii) Cooling methods
ix) Degree of protection
10.5.4 Warning Labels
Appropriate warning labels informing the user of the dangers with working with the different parts
of the converter assembly is to be placed at all appropriate places of the assembly.
10.5.5 Hand Rails
Insulated handrails or insulated handles are to be provided for each front panel of the assembly.
Where access to the rear is also required, insulated handrails or insulated handles are to be fitted to
the rear of the assembly as well.
10.5.6 Accessibility
All components of the semiconductor converter assembly are to be mounted in such a manner that
they can be removed from the assembly for repair or replacement without having to dismantle the
complete unit.
10.5.7 Capacitor Discharge
Capacitors within a semiconductor converter assembly shall be discharged to a voltage less than
60 V, or to a residual charge less than 50 µC, within 5 seconds after the removal of power. If this
requirement cannot be met, appropriate warning labels shall be placed on the assembly.
10.5.8 Cooling Arrangements
Design of cooling systems is to be based on an ambient air temperature of 45°C (113°F) indicated
in 4-1-1/39 and 4-1-1/Table 2.
Semiconductor converter assemblies are to be installed away from sources of radiant energy in
locations where the circulation of air is not restricted to and from the assembly and where the
temperature of the inlet air to air-cooled converters will not exceed that for which the converter
has been designed.
Where arrangements for forced cooling have been provided, the equipment is, unless otherwise
specifically required, to be designed such that power cannot be applied to, or retained on, the
semiconductor circuits, unless effective cooling is maintained. Other effective means of protection
against equipment over-temperature such as reduction in the driven load may also be acceptable.
Semiconductor assemblies with forced cooling are to be provided with a means of monitoring the
temperature of the cooling medium. Over-temperature of the cooling medium is to be alarmed
locally and at a continuously manned location and the equipment shutdown when temperature exceeds
the manufacturer specified value.
Semiconductor assemblies with liquid cooling are to be provided with a means to detect leakage.
In case of leakage, an audible and visible alarm is to be initiated locally and remotely at a continuously
manned location. Means to contain any leakage are to be provided so that the liquid does not cause
a failure of the semiconductor assembly or any other electrical equipment located near the converter.
The resistivity of the cooling liquid is to be monitored and an alarm given both locally and remotely
in a continuously manned location if the resistivity exceeds the manufacturer specified value.
In case of failure of the cooling system, an alarm is to be given both locally and remotely at a
continuously manned location and the output current is to be reduced automatically.
Cooling liquids are to be non-conductive and non-flammable.
10.5.9 Emergency Stop
When required, semiconductor converter assemblies shall be provided with an emergency stop
function. The emergency stop circuit is to be hard-wired and independent of any control system signal.
10.5.10 Electrical Protection (2016)
10.5.10(a) Overvoltage Protection. Means are to be provided to prevent excessive overvoltage in
a supply system to which semiconductor converters are connected and to prevent the application
of voltages in excess of the rating of semiconductor devices.
10.5.10(b) Overcurrent Protection. Arrangements are to be made so that the permissible current
of semiconductor converters or semiconductor devices associated with the semiconductor converter
cannot be exceeded during operation.
10.5.10(c) Short Circuit Protection. Semiconductor converters and the associated semiconductor
devices are to be protected against short circuit.
10.5.10(d) Filter Circuits. Filter circuits are to be protected against overvoltage, overcurrent and
short circuit.
10.5.10(e) Alarms. Visual and audible alarms are to be provided at the control station in the event
of operation of the protection system.
10.5.11 Clearance and Creepage Distances
Clearance and creepage distances used in standard production (COTS) semiconductor converter
assemblies are to be in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1 and suitable for overvoltage category III,
pollution degree 3 and insulating material group IIIa. The relevant values are reproduced in the
Table below for convenience.
System Voltage (V) Minimum Clearance Distance (mm)

≤50 0.8
100 0.8
150 1.5
300 3.0
600 5.5
1000 8.0
3600 25
7200 60
12000 90
15000 120
Note: Interpolation is permitted.
Working Voltage (rms) (V) Minimum Creepage Distance (mm)

50 1.9
100 2.2
125 2.4
160 2.5
200 3.2
250 4.0
320 5.0
400 6.3
500 8.0
630 10.0
800 12.5
1000 16
1250 20
1600 25
2000 32
2500 40
3200 50
4000 63
5000 80
6300 100
8000 125
10000 160
Note: Interpolation is permitted.
10.5.12 Protection and Monitoring Requirements

Semiconductor assemblies, as a minimum, shall have alarm functions for the following parameters:
i) Overcurrent
ii) Overload
iii) Overvoltage
iv) Ground fault
v) Loss of cooling
vi) Increase in resistivity of cooling medium (for liquid cooled converters)
vii) Over-temperature
viii) Loss of communication to process control
ix) Loss of motor speed feedback
If harmonic filters are used in conjunction with semiconductor converter assemblies, refer to
4-6-2/9.19 for additional protection requirements.
For craft with electric propulsion, refer to 4-7-2/Table 6B.
10.5.13 Load-sharing
When semiconductor converters have multiple parallel/series circuits, load sharing between the
multiple circuits is to be distributed uniformly, as far as practicable.
10.5.14 EMC Emission Requirements

If requested by the customer, EM immunity and EM emissions testing of the semiconductor assembly
shall be done as an optional test in accordance with IEC 61800-3 (titled ‘Adjustable speed
electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods’).
Note: Radiated and conducted emissions/immunity does not depend on the equipment alone but also on the
interaction between the semiconductor converter assembly and the rest of the power system. There shall
be communication between the manufacturer and the customer as to what installation guidelines may
need to be followed to satisfy the different EM emission/immunity requirements, such as cable routing,
types of interconnect cables used, cable shielding, etc.
10.5.15 Harmonic Filter Requirements

If harmonic filter circuits are used in association with semiconductor converter assemblies to reduce
the harmonics and transients in the system, they are to comply with the requirements in 4-6-2/9.19.
10.5.16 Performance
The converter control system shall be able to control the motor by speed ramp, torque or power, as
per customer specification.
Upon loss of the reference signal, the converter shall either decelerate the driven motor to minimum
speed/torque/power or down to standstill as per customer specification for the required application.
When, during normal operation, the motor is decelerated to standstill, it shall be possible to de-energize
the motor by blocking the control signals to the power semiconductors, while leaving the converter
input circuit energized.
When automatic restart is specified, the converter shall be capable of catching an already spinning
motor.
10.7 Inspection and Testing

(2016) Semiconductor assemblies for motor drives shall undergo Type tests, Routine tests and Optional
tests, if any specifically required by the Owner, at manufacturer’s production facility as per the Table
below. The Type tests, Routine tests and Optional tests shall be conducted in the presence of and witnessed
by an ABS Surveyor. Type tests shall be carried out one prototype of a converter or the first of a batch of
identical converters. Routine tests shall be carried on each assembly. A summary of the required type tests
and routine tests are given in the Table below:
No. Tests Type Test Routine ABS Reference IEC Test Reference
(see 4-6-4/10.7) Test
1 Visual inspection x x 4-6-4/10.7.1 61800-5-1/5.2.1
2 Insulation test (AC or DC voltage test) x x 4-6-4/10.7.2 61800-5-1/5.2.3.2
3 Insulation resistance test x x 4-6-4/10.7.4 60146-1-1/7.2.3.1
4 Impulse voltage test x 4-6-4/10.7.3 61800-5-1/5.2.3.1
5 Cooling system test x x 4-6-4/10.7.5 61800-5-1/5.2.4.5
6 Breakdown of components test x 4-6-4/10.7.6 61800-5-1/5.2.3.6.4
7 Light load and functional test x x 4-6-4/10.7.7 60146-1-1/7.3.1
8 Rated current test x 4-6-4/10.7.8 60146-1-1/7.3.2
9 Temperature rise test x 4-6-4/10.7.9 61800-5-1/5.2.3.8
10 Capacitor discharge test x 4-6-4/10.7.10 61800-5-1/5.2.3.7
10.7.1 Visual Inspection

Semiconductor assemblies are subject to visual inspection for the following aspects:
i) Verify enclosure integrity, alignment of different cabinets in the assembly as per system
drawings.
ii) Verify if nameplate is present as per 4-6-4/10.5.3.
iii) Check if adequate and visible warning and safety labels are present.
iv) General hardware and electrical point-to-point wire check.
v) Verify correct routing and connections of fiber optic cables and ethernet cables.
vi) Verify correct connection of grounding wires on the assembly.
vii) Point-to-point inspection of cooling system, if applicable. For drive assemblies with
liquid cooling, verification of proper installation of piping and hoses, correct orientation
of flow restrictors and related coolant liquid monitoring instrumentation.
viii) Door interlocks, if any
10.7.2 Insulation Test (AC or DC Voltage Test)
Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to insulation tests to ensure adequate dielectric strength of
insulation of its components and to verify that clearance distances have not been compromised
during manufacturing operations. The insulation test is to be performed with the appropriate AC
or DC voltage (equal to the peak value of the specified AC rms voltage) mentioned in Table 21/
Table 22/Table 23 of IEC 61800-5-1(2007). The AC test voltage is to be voltage of sinusoidal
wave form and a frequency of 50 Hz/60 Hz and is to be applied continuously for at least 60
seconds. All main power, control power and logic circuits have to be subject to the insulation test.
10.7.3 Impulse Voltage Test
Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to an Impulse voltage test to simulate the impact of
impulse transient over voltages generated in the mains supply or those caused by switching of
equipment. The impulse voltage test is to be done as per 5.2.3.1 of IEC 61800-5-1(2007). For purposes
of selection of test voltages, the semiconductor assembly shall be treated as belonging to overvoltage
category III.
Impulse voltage tests shall be done as a routine test on assemblies that do not satisfy the clearance
and creepage distance requirements of 4-6-4/10.5.11.
10.7.4 Insulation Resistance Test
One minute after the insulation test, insulation resistance shall be measured by applying a direct
voltage of at least 500 V.
10.7.5 Cooling System Test
Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to cooling system tests that test for failure of the cooling
system and the associated response of the semiconductor assembly to these cooling system failures
as per 5.2.4.5 of IEC 61800-5-1 (2007).
In addition, for liquid cooled semiconductor assemblies, the cooling piping system shall be subject to
a coolant leak pressure test. The cooling system piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times
the design pressure for a period of 30 minutes. The pressure relief mechanism shall also be
checked for proper calibration and operation. The cooling system shall be verified as having no
leakage by monitoring the pressure and by visual inspection.
The instrumentation critical to the operation of the cooling system such as valve positions,
programming of level switch sensors, flow sensors, pressure sensors, temperature sensors, pressure
relief valve operation, coolant conductivity sensor, etc., shall be checked to ensure correct calibration
and functionality.
10.7.6 Breakdown of Components Test
Components which have been identified by circuit analysis could result in a thermal or electric
shock hazard are to be subject to a breakdown test as per 5.2.3.6.4 of IEC 61800-5-1.
10.7.7 Light Load and Functional Test
Semiconductor assemblies shall be subject to a light load and functional test to ensure that all parts
of the electrical circuit and the cooling system work properly together and that the assembly meets
the required proof of performance as per customer requirements. The main things to be checked
include, but are not limited to:
i) Verify that the control equipment, auxiliaries, protection equipment and main circuit are
operating properly together.
ii) Check power supplies to different power and control circuits of the assembly and associated
communication control interfaces.
iii) Check pre-charge circuit settings.
iv) Verify the various software parameters.
v) Check for voltage/current sharing in the semiconductor devices used in the arms of the
converter.
vi) Testing of the converter for scenarios like, but not limited to, emergency trip of the assembly,
input fault protection, loss of cooling, local and remote control operation, etc.
vii) Testing of the converter for any specific customer defined scenario like output power
ramp-down on loss of input power, ability of the converter to catch a spinning motor after
recovering from a trip or from automatic restart, etc.
10.7.8 Rated Current Test
The test is carried out to verify that the equipment will operate satisfactorily at rated current. The
DC terminals shall be short-circuited directly or with a reactor and an alternating voltage of
sufficient value, to cause at least the rated continuous direct current to flow, shall be connected to
the AC terminals of the converter and operation of the assembly shall be checked.
10.7.9 Temperature Rise Test
The test is carried out to verify that parts and accessible surfaces of the semiconductor assembly
do not exceed temperature limits specified below and the manufacturer’s temperature limits of
safety-relevant parts. The temperature rise test is to be conducted at worst-case conditions of rated
power and rated output current.
Materials and Components Thermometer Method (°C) Resistance Method (°C)

Rubber/Thermoplastic-insulated conductors 55 -
User terminals Note 1 -
Copper bus bars and connecting straps 120 -
Winding Insulation
Class A 95 105
Class E 100 115
Class B 105 125
Class F 115 135
Class H 135 155
Class N 175 195
Phenolic composition 145 -
Bare resistor material 395 -
Capacitor Note 2 -
Power switching semiconductors Note 2 -
Printed wiring boards (PWB’s) Note 2 -
Liquid cooling medium Note 2 -
Notes:
1 Maximum terminal temperature shall not exceed 15°C more than the insulation temperature
rating of the conductor or cable specified by the manufacturer.
2 Maximum temperature shall be as specified by the manufacturer.
10.7.10 Capacitor Discharge Test

Verification of the capacitor discharge time as required in 4-6-4/10.7.7 is required to be done by a
test and/or by calculation.
10.9 Integration Requirements

10.9.1 Integration
In cases where the semiconductor converters are integrated into larger assemblies that have other
components (i.e., transformers, reactors, motors, etc.), the individual tests of the other components
shall be done in accordance with relevant portions of the ABS Rules.
Installation requirements such as earthing of equipment, selection of cable and acceptable cable
lengths, etc., should be as per manufacturer installation guidelines.
10.9.2 Reactors and Transformers for Semiconductor Converters
10.9.2(a) Voltage Regulation. Means to regulate transformer output voltage are to be provided to
take care of increase in converter forward resistance and, in addition, to obtain the necessary
performance characteristics of the converter unit in which the transformer is used.
10.9.2(b) High Temperature Alarm. Interphase reactors and transformers used with the
semiconductor converters for main and auxiliary propulsion systems are to be provided with a
high temperature alarm at the switchboard or the propulsion control station. The setting value of
the alarm is to be determined by their specific insulation class and is not to exceed the temperature
corresponding to the limit listed in 4-6-4/9.3.
10.9.3 Critical Speeds
The semiconductor converter supplier, the driven equipment supplier and the Owner should come
to an agreement on the calculations of the resulting critical lateral speeds of the whole mechanical
string with special attention being paid to the following:
i) Take into account the influence of the stiffness of the bearing arrangement and the foundation.
ii) Avoid any continuous running with insufficient damping close to lateral critical speeds
(±20%).
11 Other Electric and Electronics Devices
11.1 Circuit Breakers

11.1.1 General
Circuit breakers are to be constructed and tested to comply with IEC Publication 60947-2 or other
recognized standard. The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests
will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS. Circuit breakers of the thermal
type are to be calibrated for an ambient-air temperature, as provided in 4-6-1/17.
Note: Where thermal-type breakers are mounted within enclosures, it is pointed out that the temperature within
the enclosure may exceed the designated ambient-air temperature.
11.1.2 Mechanical Property

Arc-rupturing and main contacts of all open frame circuit breakers are to be self-cleaning.
11.1.3 Isolation
The electrical system is to be arranged so that portions may be isolated to remove circuit breakers
while maintaining services necessary for propulsion and safety of the craft, or circuit breakers are
to be mounted or arranged in such a manner that the breaker may be removed from the front
without disconnecting the copper or cable connections or without de-energizing the supply to the
breaker. Draw-out or plug-in type circuit breakers are acceptable for this purpose.
11.3 Fuses
Fuses are to be constructed and tested to comply with IEC Publication 60269 or other recognized standard.
The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be
submitted upon request from ABS. All components of the fuse are to be resistant to heat, mechanical stresses
and corrosive influences which may occur in normal use.
11.5 Semiconductor Converters

11.5.1 General
The requirements in this subsection are applicable to static converters for essential and emergency
services using semiconductor rectifying elements such as diodes, reverse blocking triodes thyristors,
etc. The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable
and is to be submitted upon request from ABS. All semiconductor converters will be accepted subject
to a satisfactory performance test conducted after installation to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
11.5.2 Cooling Arrangements
Semiconductor converters are preferably to be of a dry and air-cooled type. Where semiconductor
converters are of a liquid-immersed type, a liquid over-temperature alarm and gas over-pressure
protection devices are to be provided. If provision is made for breathing, a dehydrator is to be
provided. Where arrangement for the forced cooling is provided, the circuit is to be designed so
that power cannot be applied to, or retained on, converter stacks unless effective cooling is maintained.
11.5.3 Accessibility
Semiconductor converter stacks or semiconductor components are to be mounted in such a manner
so that they can be removed from equipment without dismantling the complete unit.
11.5.4 Nameplate
A nameplate or identification is to be provided on the semiconductor converter and is to indicate
at least the information as listed in 4-6-4/Table 4d.
11.7 Cable Junction Boxes

11.7.1 General
The design and construction of the junction boxes are to be in compliance with 4-6-4/11.7.2 or
other recognized standard. The tests may be carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of
tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted upon request from ABS.
Live parts are to be mounted on durable flame-retardant moisture-resistant material, of permanently
high dielectric strength and high resistance. The live parts are to be so arranged by suitable spacing
or shielding with flame-retardant insulating material that short-circuit cannot readily occur between
conductors of different polarity or between conductors and earthed metal. Junction boxes are to be
made of flame-retardant material and are to be clearly identified, defining their function and voltage.
13 Cables and Wires
13.1 Cable Construction

13.1.1 General (2016)
Electric cables are to have conductors, insulation and moisture-resistant jackets, in accordance with
IEC Publication 60092-350, 60092-352, 60092-353, 60092-354, 60092-360, 60092-370, 60092-376,
or IEEE Std. 45. Other recognized marine standards will also be considered. The tests may be
carried out by the manufacturer whose certificate of tests will be acceptable and is to be submitted
upon request from ABS. Network cables are to comply with a recognized industry standard.
Conductors are to be of copper and stranded in all sizes. Conductors are not to be less than the
following in cross sectional size:
• 1.0 mm2 (1,973.5 circ. mils) for power and lighting,
• 0.5 mm2 (986.8 circ. mils) for control cables,
• 0.5 mm2 (986.8 circ. mils) for essential or emergency signaling and communications cables,
except for those assembled by the equipment manufacturer, and
• 0.35 mm2 (690.8 circ. mils) for telephone cables for nonessential communication services,
except for those assembled by the equipment manufacturer.
See 4-6-4/Table 10 for current carrying capacity for insulated copper wires and cables.
Note: See clause 3.16 and clause 4.6 of IEC 60092-350 concerning the provision of an extruded impervious
inner sheath that will prevent the migration of gas through the cable.
13.1.2 Flame Retardant Property

13.1.2(a) Standards. All electric cables are to be at least of a flame retardant type complying
with the following:
• (2016) Depending on the intended installation, cables constructed to IEC Publication 60092
standards are to comply with the flammability criteria of IEC Publication 60332-3-22 or
60332-3-21, Category A or A F/R, or
• Cables constructed to IEEE Std. 45 are to comply with the flammability criteria of that standard,
or
• (2016) Cables constructed to another recognized marine standard, where specially approved,
are to comply with the flammability criteria of IEC Publication 60332-3-22 or 60332-3-21,
Category A or A F/R (depending on the intended installation) or other acceptable standards.
Consideration will be given to the special types of cables, such as radio frequency cable, which do
not comply with the above requirements.
13.1.2(b) Alternative Arrangement. Flame-retardant marine cables, including network cables, which
have not passed the above-mentioned bunched cable flammability criteria may be considered,
provided that the cable is treated with approved flame-retardant material or the installation is
provided with approved fire stop arrangements. Special consideration may be given to the flame
retardancy of special types of cables, such as radio frequency cables. When specifically approved,
bus duct may be used in lieu of cable.
13.1.3 Fire Resistant Property (2016)
Where electrical cables are required to be fire resistant, they are to comply with the requirements
of IEC Standard 60331-1 for cables greater than 20 mm overall in diameter, otherwise they are to
comply with the IEC Standard 60331-2 for cable diameters 20 mm or less. For special cables,
requirements in the following standards may be used:
• IEC Standard 60331-23: Procedures and requirements – Electric data cables
• IEC Standard 60331-25: Procedures and requirements – Optical fiber cables
Cables complying with alternative national standards suitable for use in a marine environment
may be considered. Fire resistant type cables are to be easily distinguishable. See also 4-6-3/3.29
and 4-6-3/5.17.
13.1.4 Insulation Material
All electrical cables for power, lighting, communication, control and electronic circuits are to have
insulation suitable for a conductor temperature of not less than 60°C (140°F). See 4-6-4/Table 9
for types of cable insulation.
13.1.5 Armor for Single-conductor Cables
The armor is to be nonmagnetic for single-conductor alternating-current cables.
13.1.6 Fiber Optic Cables
Fiber optic cables are to be constructed and tested to a recognized fiber optic cable construction
standard acceptable to ABS. The requirements of flame retardancy for the electrical cables are
applicable to the fiber optic cables. The construction of the fiber optic cable which may pass through
or enter a hazardous area is to be such that escape of gases to a safe area is not possible through
the cable.
13.3 Portable and Flexing Electric Cables

Unless otherwise required in the Rules, cables for portable equipment and cables subject to flexing service
need not be armored.
13.5 Mineral-insulated Metal-sheathed Cable

Mineral-insulated cable provided with approved fittings for terminating and connecting to boxes, outlets
and other equipment may be used for any service up to 600 volts and may be used for feeders and branch
circuits in both exposed and concealed work in dry or wet locations. The moisture-resisting jacket (sheath)
of mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable exposed to corrosive conditions is to be made of or protected by
materials suitable for those conditions.
TABLE 1
Factory Test Schedule for Generators and Motors ≥ 100 kW (135 hp)
[See 4-6-4/3.3.1(a)]
AC generators AC motors DC machines
Tests Type Routine Type Routine Type Routine
test (1) test (2) test (1) test (2) test (1) test (2)
1 Visual inspection. x x x x x x
2 Insulation resistance
x x x x x x
measurement.
3 Winding resistance
x x x x x x
measurement.
4 Verification of voltage
x x(3)
regulation system.
5 Rated load test and temperature
x x x
rise measurement.
6 Overload/over-current test. x x(4) x x(4) x x(4)
7 Verification of steady short
x
circuit condition. (5)
8 Over-speed test. x x x(6) x(6) x(6) x(6)
9 Dielectric strength test. x x x x x x
(7)
10 Running balance test. x x x x x x
11 Verification of degree of
x x x
protection.
12 Bearing check after test. x x x x x x
13 Air gap measurement. x x x x
14 Commutation check. x
Notes:
1 Type tests apply to prototype machines or to at least the first of a batch of machines.
2 Machines to be routine tested are to have reference to the machine of the same type that has passed a type test.
Reports of routine tested machines are to contain manufacturers’ serial numbers of the type tested machines and
the test results.
3 Only functional test of voltage regulator system.
4 Applicable only to generators and motors ≥ 100 kW (135 hp) for essential services.
5 Verification at steady short circuit condition applies to synchronous generators only.
6 Where so specified and agreed upon between purchaser and manufacturer. Not required for squirrel cage motors.
7 Static balance (machine rated 500 rpm or less) or dynamic balance (over 500 rpm) will be accepted in lieu of the
specified test on machines to be close-coupled to engines and supplied without shaft and/or bearings, or with incomplete
set of bearings.
TABLE 2
Dielectric Strength Test for Rotating Machines [See 4-6-4/3.9]
Item Machine or Part Test Voltage (AC rms)
1 Insulated windings of rotated machines having rated output 500 V + twice the rated voltage.
less than 1 kVA, and of rated voltage less than 100 V with the
exception of those in items 4 to 8.
2 Insulated windings of rotating machines having rated output 1,000 V + twice the rated voltage with minimum of 1,500 V
less than 10,000 kVA with the exception of those in items 1 (See Note 1).
and 4 to 8 (See Note 2).
3 Insulated windings of rotating machines having rated output 1,000 V + twice the rated voltage.
10,000 kVA or more, and of rated voltage (see Note 1) up to
24,000 V with the exception of those in items 4 to 8 (see Note
2).
4 Separately-excited field windings of DC machines. 1,000 V + twice the maximum rated circuit voltage with
minimum of 1,500 V (See Note 1).
5 Field windings of synchronous generators and synchronous
motors.
a) Field windings of synchronous generators Ten times the rated excitation voltage with a minimum of
1,500 V and a maximum of 3,500 V.
b) When the machine is intended to be started with the field Ten times the rated excitation voltage with a minimum of
winding short-circuited or connected across a resistance of 1,500 V and a maximum of 3,500 V.
value less than ten times the resistance of winding.
c) When the machine will be started either with: 1,000 V + twice the maximum value of the voltage with a
– the field winding connected across resistance or more than minimum of 1,500 V
ten times the field winding resistance, or – between the terminals of the field winding,
– the field windings on open circuit or without a field dividing or
switch. – between the terminals of any section for a sectionalized field
winding,
which will be occurred under the specified starting conditions
(see Note 3).
6 Secondary (usually rotor) windings of induction motors or
synchronous induction motors if not permanently short-
circuited (e.g., if intended for rheostatic starting)
a) For non-reversing motors or motors reversible from standstill 1,000 V + twice the open-circuit standstill voltage as
only. measured between slip-rings or secondary terminals with rated
voltage applied to the primary windings.
b) For motors to be reversed or braked by reversing the primary 1,000 V + four times the open-circuit standstill secondary
supply while the motor is running. voltage as defined in item 6.a. above.
7 Exciters (except as listed below) As for windings to which they are connected. 1,000 V + twice
Exception 1—Exciters of synchronous motors (including the rated exciter voltage with a minimum of 1,500 V.
synchronous induction motors) if connected to earth or
disconnected from the field winding during starting
Exception 2—Separately excited field windings of exciters
(see Item 4 above).
8 Assembled group of machines and apparatus. A repetition of the tests in items 1 to 7 above is to be avoided
if possible. But, if a test on an assembled group of several
pieces of new apparatus, each one is made, the test voltage to
be applied to such assembled group is to be 80% of the lowest
test voltage appropriate for any part of the group (see Note 4).
Notes:
1 For two-phase windings having one terminal in common, the rated voltage for the purpose of calculating the test
voltage is to be taken as 1.4 times the voltage of each separate phase.
2 High-voltage tests on machines having graded insulation is to be subject to special consideration.
3 The voltage, which is occurred between the terminals of field windings or sections thereof under the specified starting
conditions, may be measured at any convenient reduced supply voltage. The voltage so measured is to be increased
in the ratio of the specified starting supply voltage to the test supply voltage.
4 For windings of one or more machines connected together electrically, the voltage to be considered is the maximum
voltage that occurs in relation to earth.
TABLE 3
Limits of Temperature Rise for Air-Cooled Rotating Machines
[See 4-6-4/3.11.1] (2015)
Ambient Temperature = 45°C
Temperature Limit of Temperature Rise, °C

Item for Class of Insulation
Part of Machine Measuring
No.
Method A E B F H
AC windings of machines having rated output of Resistance 55 — 75 95 120
a) 5,000 kW (or kVA) or more Embedded temp.
60 — 80 100 125
detector
AC windings of machines having rated output above Resistance 55 70 75 100 120
1
b) 200 kW (or kVA) but less than 5,000 kW (or kVA) Embedded temp.
60 — 85 105 125
detector.
AC windings of machines having rated outputs of
c) Resistance 55 70 75 100 120
200 kW (or kVA) or less (1)
Thermometer 45 60 65 80 100
2 Windings of armatures having commutators
Resistance 55 70 75 100 120
Field windings of AC and DC machines having DC Thermometer 45 60 65 80 100

3
excitation, other than those in item 4 Resistance 55 70 75 100 120
Field winding of synchronous machines with
cylindrical rotors having DC excitation winding
a) Resistance — — 85 105 130
embedded in slots, except synchronous induction
motors
Thermometer 45 60 65 80 100
Stationary field windings of AC machines having Resistance 55 70 75 100 120
b)
more than one layer Embedded temp.
— — 85 105 130
4 detector.
Low resistance field winding of AC and DC Thermometer 55 70 75 95 120
c) machines and compensating windings of DC
machines having more than one layer Resistance 55 70 75 95 120
Single-layer windings of AC and DC machines with Thermometer 60 75 85 105 130
d) exposed bare or varnished metal surfaces and single
layer compensating windings of DC machines (2) Resistance 60 75 85 105 130
5 Permanently short-circuited windings

Magnetic cores and all structural components, The temperature rise of any parts is not to be detrimental to the
6 whether or not in direct contact with insulation insulating of that part or to any other part adjacent to it.
(excluding bearings)
The temperature rise of any parts is not to be detrimental to the
insulating of that part or to any other part adjacent to it.
Commutators, slip-rings and their brushes and
7 Additionally, the temperature is not to exceed that at which the
brushing
combination of brush grade and commutator/slip-ring materials
can handle the current over the entire operating range.
Notes
1 With application of the superposition test method to windings of machines rated 200 kW (or kVA) or less with
insulation classes A, E, B or F, the limits of temperature rise given for the resistance method may be increased by 5°C.
2 Also includes multiple layer windings provided that the under layers are each in contact with the circulating coolant.
TABLE 4 Nameplates
a. Rotating Machines [See 4-6-4/3.13.9] b. Accumulator Battery [See 4-6-4/5.3.3]
The manufacturer’s name The manufacturer’s name

The manufacturer’s serial number (or identification mark) The type designation
The year of manufacture The rated voltage
Type of Machine (Generator or motor, etc.) The ampere-hour rating at a specific rate of discharge
Degree of protection enclosures (by IP code) The specific gravity of the electrolyte
Class of rating or duty type (in the case of a lead-acid battery, the specific gravity when
The rated output the battery is fully charged).
The rated voltage
The rated current and type of current (AC or DC) c. Transformer [See 4-6-4/9.5.3]
The rated speed (r.p.m.) or speed range
The class of insulation or permissible temperature rise The manufacturer’s name
The ambient temperature The manufacturer’s serial number (or identification mark)
The year of manufacture
Number of phase (for AC machines) The number of phases
The rated frequency (for AC machines) The rated power
Power factor (for AC machines) The rated frequency
Type of winding (for DC machines) The rated voltage in primary and secondary sides
The rated current in primary and secondary sides
Exciter voltage (for synchronous machines or DC machines The class of insulation or permissible temperature rise
with separate excitation) The ambient temperature
Exciter current at rating (for synchronous machines or DC
machines with separate excitation) d. Semiconductor Converter [See 4-6-4/11.5.4]
Open-circuit voltage between slip-rings and the slip-ring
current for rated conditions (for wounded-rotor induction The manufacturer’s name
machines) The identification number of the equipment
TABLE 5
Factory Testing Schedule for Switchboards, Chargers, Motor Control Centers and
Controllers [See 4-6-4/7.3.1] (2016)
1 Insulation resistance measurements in accordance with 4-6-4/7.5.
2 Dielectric strength test in accordance with 4-6-4/7.7 and the table below.
3 Protective device tripping test, such as overcurrent tripping, emergency tripping, preferential tripping, etc.
4 Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and, if necessary, electrical operation test.
Standard Test Voltage for Dielectric Strength Test

Dielectric Test
Rated Insulation Voltage Voltage AC rms
Up to and including 12 V 250 V
over 12 V to 60 V inclusive 500 V
over 1000 V to 1500 V inclusive* 3500 V
Note: *For Direct-current (DC) only
TABLE 6
Clearance and Creepage Distance for Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Chargers,
Motor Control Centers and Controllers (1) [See 4-6-4/7.11.6]
Rated insulation voltage (V) Minimum clearances mm (in.) Minimum creepage distances mm (in.)
Up to 250 15 (19/32) 20 (25/32)
From 251 to 660 20 (25/32) 30 (13/16)
(2)
Above 660 25 (1) 35 (13/8)
Notes:
1 The values in this table apply to clearances and creepage distances between live parts as well as between live parts
and exposed conductive parts, including earthing.
2 For 1 kV to 15 kV systems, see 4-6-5/1.1.4.
TABLE 7
Equipment and Instrumentation for Switchboard [See 4-6-4/7.15.4]
Instrumentation and
Equipment Alternating-current (AC) Switchboard Direct-current (DC) Switchboard
1. Pilot Lamp A pilot lamp for each generator connected between A pilot lamp for each generator connected between
generator and circuit breaker. See Note 3. generator and circuit breaker.
2. Generator A generator switch or disconnecting links in series with A generator switch, or disconnecting links, in series with
Disconnect the generator circuit breaker which is to disconnect the circuit breaker which will open positive, negative,
completely all leads of the generator and the circuit neutral and equalizer leads, except that for 3-wire
breaker from the buses, except the earth lead. (1) generators, equalizer poles may be provided on the
circuit breaker. For 3-wire generators, the circuit
breakers are to protect against a short circuit on the
equalizer buses. (1)
3. Field Rheostat A field rheostat for each generator and each exciter. (2) A field rheostat for each generator. (2).
4. Insulation A means for continuously monitoring the electrical A means for continuously monitoring the electrical
Monitor and insulation level to earth, and an audible or visual alarm insulation level to earth, and an audible or visual alarm
Alarm for abnormally low insulation values. (3) for abnormally low insulation values. For 3-wire
generators, see 4-6-5/5.3. (3)
5. Ammeter An ammeter for each generator with a selector switch to An ammeter for each 2-wire generator. For each 3-wire
read the current of each phase. (3) generator, an ammeter for each positive and negative
lead and a center-zero ammeter in the earth connection at
the generator switchboard. Ammeters are to be so
located in the circuit as to indicate total generator
current.
6. Voltmeter A voltmeter for each generator, with a selector switch to A voltmeter for each generator with voltmeter switch for
each phase of the generator and to one phase of the bus. (3) connecting the voltmeter to indicate generator voltage
and bus voltage. For each 3-wire generator, a voltmeter
with voltmeter switch for connecting the voltmeter to
indicate generator voltage, positive to negative, positive
to neutral, and neutral to negative. Where permanent
provisions for shore connections are fitted, one voltmeter
switch to provide also for reading shore-connection
voltage, positive to negative.
7. Space Heater Where electric heaters are provided for generators, a Where electric heaters are provided for generators, a
Pilot Lamp heater pilot lamp is to be fitted for each generator. heater pilot lamp is to be fitted for each generator.
8. Synchroscope A synchroscope or synchronizing lamps with selector Not applicable.
or Lamps switch for paralleling in any combination. See Note 3.
9. Prime mover Control for prime mover speed for paralleling. (3) Not applicable.
Speed Control
10. Wattmeter Where generators are arranged for parallel operation, an Not applicable.
indicating wattmeter is to be fitted for each generator. (3)
11. Frequency A frequency meter with selector switch to connect to any Not applicable.
Meter generator. (3)
12. Field Switch A double-pole field switch with discharge clips and Not applicable.
resistor for each generator. (2)
13. Voltage A voltage regulator. (3) Not applicable.
Regulator
14. Stator Winding For alternating current propulsion generator above 500 For direct current propulsion generator above 500 kW,
Temperature kW, a stator winding temperature indicator is to be fitted an interpole winding temperature indicator is to be fitted
Indicator for each generator control panel. (3,4) for each generator control panel. (3,4)
Notes:
1 The switch or links may be omitted when draw-out or plug-in mounted generator breakers are furnished.
2 For generators with variable voltage exciters or rotary amplifier exciters, each controlled by voltage-regulator unit acting
on the exciter field, the field switch, the discharge resistor and generator field rheostat may be omitted.
3 Where craft have centralized control systems in accordance with Part 4, Chapter 7 and the generators can be paralleled
from the centralized control station, and the switchboard is located in the centralized control station, this equipment may
be mounted on the control console. See 4-6-4/7.15.4.
4 For high voltage systems, see also 4-6-5/1.11.1(c).
TABLE 8
Temperature Rise for Transformers (1, 2) (2014)
Insulation Class Average Winding-Temperature Rise Limits
at Rated Current, °C (°F)
A (105) 55 (99)
E (120) 70 (126)
B (130) 75 (135)
F (155) 95 (171)
H (180) 120 (216)
200 130 (234)
220 145 (261)
Notes:
1 Metallic parts in contact with or adjacent to insulation are not to attain a temperature in excess of that allowed for
the hottest-spot copper temperature adjacent to that insulation.
2 (2014) Temperature rises are based on an ambient temperature of 45°C (113°F). See 4-6-4/9.3.
TABLE 9
Types of Cable Insulation [See 4-6-4/13.1.4] (2013)
Insulation Type Designation Insulation Materials Maximum Conductor Temperature
V75, PVC Polyvinyl Chloride – Heat resisting 75°C (167°F) *
R85, XLPE Cross-linked Polyethylene 85°C (185°F) *
E85, EPR Ethylene Propylene Rubber 85°C (185°F) *
R90, XLPE Cross-linked Polyethylene 90°C (194°F) *
E90, EPR Ethylene Propylene Rubber 90°C (194°F) *
M95 Mineral (MI) 95°C (203°F) *
S95 Silicone Rubber 95°C (203°F) *
* A maximum conductor temperature of 250°C (482°F) is permissible for special applications and standard end fittings may be
used, provided the temperature does not exceed 85°C (185°F) at the end of fittings. However, when the temperature at the end of
the fittings is higher than 85°C (185°F), special consideration will be given to an appropriate end fitting.
TABLE 10
Maximum Current Carrying Capacity for Insulated Copper Wires and Cables (2014)
Conductor Maximum Current in Amperes (see 4-6-4/13.1.1)
Size 45°C (113°F) Ambient; 750 V and Less, AC or DC; see Notes
1-core 2-core 3- or 4-core
103 R85 R90 R85 R90 R85 R90
mm2 circ V75 XLPE XLPE M95 V75 XLPE XLPE M95 V75 XLPE XLPE M95
mils E85 E90 S95 E85 E90 S95 E85 E90 S95
EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR
1.0 13 16 20 11 14 17 9 11 14
1.25 15 18 23 13 15 20 11 13 16
1.5 17 21 23 26 14 18 20 22 12 15 16 18
4.11 21 25 32 18 21 27 15 18 22
2.5 24 28 30 32 20 24 26 27 17 20 21 22
6.53 28 34 38 24 29 32 20 24 27
4 32 38 40 43 27 32 34 37 22 27 28 30
10.4 38 45 51 32 38 43 27 32 36
6 41 49 52 55 35 42 44 47 29 34 36 39
16.5 51 60 68 43 51 58 36 42 48
10 57 67 72 76 48 57 61 65 40 47 50 53
20.8 59 70 78 50 60 66 41 49 55
26.3 68 81 91 58 69 77 48 57 64
16 76 91 96 102 65 77 82 87 53 64 67 71
33.1 79 93 105 67 79 89 55 65 74
41.7 91 108 121 77 92 103 64 76 85
25 101 120 127 135 86 102 108 115 71 84 89 95
52.6 105 124 140 89 105 119 74 87 98
66.4 121 144 162 103 122 138 85 101 113
35 125 148 157 166 106 126 133 141 88 104 110 116
83.7 140 166 187 119 141 159 98 116 131
50 156 184 196 208 133 156 167 177 109 129 137 146
106 163 193 217 139 164 184 114 135 152
133 188 222 250 160 189 213 132 155 175
70 192 228 242 256 163 194 206 218 134 160 169 179
168 217 257 289 184 218 246 152 180 202
95 232 276 293 310 197 235 249 264 162 193 205 217
212 251 297 335 213 252 285 176 208 235
120 269 319 339 359 229 271 288 305 188 223 237 251
250 278 330 371 236 281 315 195 231 260
150 309 367 389 412 263 312 331 350 216 257 272 288
300 312 370 416 265 315 354 218 259 291
350 343 407 458 292 346 389 240 285 321
185 353 418 444 470 300 355 377 400 247 293 311 329
400 373 442 498 317 376 423 261 309 349
450 402 476 536 342 405 456 281 333 375
240 415 492 522 553 353 418 444 470 291 344 365 387
500 429 509 572 365 433 486 300 356 400
550 455 540 607 387 459 516 319 378 425
300 477 565 601 636 405 480 511 541 334 396 421 445
600 481 570 641 409 485 545 337 399 449
650 506 599 674 430 509 573 354 419 472
700 529 628 706 450 534 600 370 440 494
750 553 655 737 470 557 626 387 459 516
TABLE 10 (continued)
Maximum Current Carrying Capacity for Insulated Copper Wires and Cables (2014)
Conductor Maximum Current in Amperes (see 4-6-4/13.1.1)
Size 45°C (113°F) Ambient; 750 V and Less, AC or DC; see Notes
1-core 2-core 3- or 4-core
103 R85 R90 R85 R90 R85 R90
mm2 circ V75 XLPE XLPE M95 V75 XLPE XLPE M95 V75 XLPE XLPE M95
mils E85 E90 S95 E85 E90 S95 E85 E90 S95
EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR EPR
400 571 677 690 761 485 575 587 647 400 474 483 533
800 576 682 767 490 580 652 403 477 540
850 598 709 797 508 603 677 419 496 558
900 620 734 826 527 624 702 434 514 578
950 641 760 854 545 646 726 449 532 598
500 656 778 780 875 558 661 663 744 459 545 546 613
1000 662 784 882 563 666 750 463 549 617
600 736 872 981 626 741 834 515 610 687
625 755 894 1006 642 760 855 529 626 704
Notes:
1 The values given above have been calculated for an ambient of 45°C (113°F), and assume that a conductor temperature
equal to the maximum rated temperature of the insulation is reached and maintained continuously in the case of a
group of four cables bunched together and laid in free air.
2 The current rating values given in 4-6-4/Table 10 (and those derived therefrom) may be considered applicable, without
correction factors, for cables double-banked on cable trays, in cable conduits or cable pipes, except as noted in
Note 3.
3 For bunched cables, see 4-6-3/5.11.1.
4 These current ratings are applicable for both armored and unarmored cables.
5 If ambient temperature differs from 45°C (113°F), the values in 4-6-4/Table 10 are to be multiplied by the following
factors.
Maximum Conductor Ambient Correction Factor
Temperature 40°C (104°F) 50°C (122°F) 55°C (131°F) 60°C (140°F) 65°C (149°F) 70°C (158°F)
75°C (167°F) 1.08 0.91 0.82 0.71 0.58 —
85°C (185°F) 1.06 0.94 0.87 0.79 0.71 0.61
90°C (194°F) 1.05 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.74 0.67
95°C (203°F) 1.05 0.95 0.89 0.84 0.77 0.71
6 Where the number of conductors in a cable exceeds four, as in control cables, the maximum current carrying capacity
of each conductor is to be reduced as in the following table:
No. of Conductors % of 3–4/C TYPE Values in 4-6-4/Table 10

5–6 80
7–24 70
25–42 60
43 and above 50
7 When a mineral-insulated cable is installed in such a location that its copper sheath is liable to be touched when in
service, the current rating is to be multiplied by the correction factor 0.80 in order that the sheath temperature does
not exceed 70°C (158°F).
8 Cables being accepted based on approved alternate standard may have current carrying capacity of that standard,
provided the cables are in full compliance with that standard.
TABLE 11
Additional Services Requiring Electrical Equipment to be Designed, Constructed and
Tested to the Requirements in Section 4-6-4
[See 4-6-4/1, 4-6-4/3.1.1, 4-6-4/3.3.1, 4-6-4/7.1.1 and 4-6-4/7.3.1]
(a) Equipment necessary for specific class notations (Such as refrigerated cargo notations, dynamic positioning
systems, etc.). See Note.
(b) Cargo Pump Motors (oil carriers, gas carriers, chemical carriers, liquefied gas carriers, etc.)
(c) Motors for hydraulic power unit for hydraulically driven cargo pump motors
(d) High duty gas compressors on liquefied gas carriers
Note: See 6-2-1/7 of the Steel Vessel Rules for refrigerated cargo notations and the ABS Guide for Dynamic Positioning
Systems for dynamic positioning notations.
PART Section 5: Specialized Installations
4
SECTION 5 Specialized Installations
1 High Voltage Systems
1.1 General
1.1.1 Application
The following requirements in this Subsection are applicable to AC systems with nominal voltage
(phase to phase) exceeding 1 kV. Unless stated otherwise, high voltage equipment and systems are
to comply with the other parts in Part 4, Chapter 6 for low voltage equipment and systems, as well.
1.1.2 Standard Voltages
The nominal standard voltage is not to exceed 15 kV. A higher voltage may be considered for
special application.
1.1.3 Air Clearance and Creepage Distance (1 July 2016)
1.1.3(a) Air Clearance. Phase-to-phase air clearances and phase-to-earth air clearances between
non-insulated parts are to be not less than the minimum as specified below.
Nominal Voltage Minimum air

in kV clearance in mm (in.)
3–3.3 55 (2.2)
6–6.6 90 (3.6)
10–11 120 (4.8)
15 160 (6.3)
Where intermediate values of nominal voltages are accepted, the next higher air clearance is to be
observed.
1.1.3(b) Reduction. Alternatively, reduced clearance distances may be used provided:
i) The equipment is not installed in ‘Machinery Spaces of Category A’ or in areas affected
by a Local Fixed Pressure Water-spraying or Local Water-mist Fire Extinguishing System.
ii) The equipment is subject to an impulse voltage test with test voltage values shown in
Table below. Where intermediate values of rated operational voltage are used, the next
higher rated impulse withstand test voltage is to be used. The impulse voltage test reports
are to be submitted to ABS for review.
Rated Voltage Rated Impulse Withstand

kV Voltage
kV (peak value)
3.6 40
7.2 60
12 75
15 95
Section 5 Specialized Installations 4-6-5
1.1.3(c) Insulating Material. Any insulating material that is used to cover live parts of equipment
used to comply with clearance distance requirements is to be suitable for the application. The
equipment manufacturer is to submit documentation which demonstrates the suitability of such
insulation material.
1.1.3(d) Creepage Distances (1 July 2016). Creepage distances between live parts and between
live parts and earthed metal parts are to be in accordance with IEC 60092-503 for the nominal voltage
of the system, the nature of the insulation material, and the transient overvoltage developed by
switch and fault conditions.
i) The minimum creepage distances for main switchboards and generators are given in the
Table below:
Nominal Minimum Creepage Distance for Proof Tracking Index

Voltage mm (in.)
V 300 V 375 V 500 V >600 V
1000-1100 26 (1.02)(1) 24 (0.94)(1) 22 (0.87)(1) 20 (0.79)(1)
< 3300 63 (2.48) 59 (2.32) 53 (2.09) 48 (1.89)
< 6600 113 (4.45) 108 (4.25) 99 (3.9) 90 (3.54)
≤ 11000(2) 183 (7.20) 175 (6.89) 162 (6.38) 150 (5.91)
Notes:
1 A distance of 35 mm is required for busbars and other bare
conductors in main switchboards.
2 Creepage distances for equipment with nominal voltage above
11 kV shall be subject to consideration.
ii) The minimum creepage distances for equipment other than main switchboards and
generators are given in the Table below:
Nominal Minimum Creepage Distance for Proof Tracking Index

Voltage mm (in.)
V 300 V 375 V 500 V >600 V
1000-1100 18 (0.71) 17 (0.67) 15 (0.59) 14 (0.55)
< 3300 42 (1.65) 41 (1.61) 38 (1.50) 26 (1.02)
< 6600 83 (3.27) 80 (3.15) 75 (2.95) 70 (2.76)
≤ 11000* 146 (5.75) 140 (5.51) 130 (5.11) 120 (4.72)
* Note: Creepage distances for equipment with nominal voltage above 11 kV shall
be subject to consideration.
1.3 System Design

1.3.1 Selective Coordination
Selective coordination is to be in accordance with 4-6-2/9.1.5, regardless of the system neutral
earthing arrangement.
1.3.2 Earthed Neutral Systems
1.3.2(a) Neutral earthing. The current in the earth fault condition is to be not in excess of full
load current of the largest generator on the switchboard or relevant switchboard section and in no
case less than three times the minimum current required for operation of any device in the earth
fault condition.
At least one source neutral to ground connection is to be available whenever the system is in the
energized mode.
1.3.2(b) Equipment. Electrical equipment in directly earthed neutral or other neutral earthed
systems is to be able to withstand the current due to a single phase fault against earth for a period
necessary to trip the protection device.
1.3.3 Neutral Disconnection
Each generator neutral is to be provided with means for disconnection.
1.3.4 Hull Connection of Earthing Impedance
All earthing impedances are to be connected to the hull. The connection to the hull is to be so
arranged that any circulating currents in the earth connections will not interfere with radio, radar,
communication and control equipment circuits. In systems with neutral earthed, connection of the
neutral to the hull is to be provided for each generator switchboard section.
1.3.5 Earth Fault Detection
An earth fault is to be indicated by visual and audible means. In low impedance or direct earthed
systems, provision is to be made to disconnect automatically the faulty circuits. In high impedance
earthed systems where outgoing feeders will not be isolated in case of an earth fault, the insulation
of the equipment is to be designed for the phase to phase voltage.
1.3.6 Number and Capacity of Transformers (2014)
Requirements for the number and capacity of transformers are given in 4-6-2/7.1.6(a).
For transformers with a high voltage winding over 1000 V, the following would not be accepted
as complying with the above requirement:
i) The provision of a spare single phase transformer to substitute a failed transformer.
ii) The operation of two single phase transformers in an open delta (V-V) connection.
1.5 Circuit Breakers and Switches – Auxiliary Circuit Power Supply Systems
1.5.1 Source and Capacity of Power Supply
Where electrical energy or mechanical energy is required for the operation of circuit breakers and
switches, a means of storing such energy is to be provided with a capacity at least sufficient for
two on/off operation cycles of all of the components. However, the tripping due to overload or
short-circuit, and under-voltage is to be independent of any stored electrical energy sources. This
does not preclude the use of stored energy for shunt tripping, provided alarms are activated upon
loss of continuity in the release circuits and power supply failures. The stored energy may be
supplied from within the circuit in which the circuit breakers or switches are located.
1.5.2 Number of External Sources of Stored Energy
Where the stored energy is supplied from a source external to the circuit, such supply is to be from
at least two sources so arranged that a failure or loss of one source will not cause the loss of more
than one set of generators and/or essential services. Where it will be necessary to have the source
of supply available for dead craft startup, the source of supply is to be provided from the emergency
source of electrical power
1.7 Circuit Protection

1.7.1 Protection of Generator
Protection against phase-to-phase fault in the cables connecting the generators to the switchboard
and against inter-winding faults within the generator is to be provided. This is to trip the generator
circuit breaker and automatically de-excite the generator. In distribution systems with a low impedance
earthed neutral, phase to earth faults are to be likewise treated.
1.7.2 Protection of Power Transformers (2014)

Power transformers are to be provided with overload and short circuit protection. Each high-voltage
transformer intended to supply power to the low-voltage craft service switchboard is to be protected
in accordance with 4-6-2/9.15. In addition, the following means for protecting the transformers or
the electric distribution system are to be provided:
1.7.2(a) Coordinated Trips of Protective Devices. Discriminative tripping is to be provided for
the following. See 4-6-2/9.1.5.
i) Between the primary side protective device of the transformer and the feeder protective
devices on the low-voltage craft service switchboard, or
ii) Between the secondary side protective device of the transformer, if fitted, and the feeder
protective devices on the low-voltage craft service switchboard.
1.7.2(b) Load Shedding Arrangement. Where the power is supplied through a single set of three-
phase transformers to a low-voltage craft service switchboard, automatic load shedding
arrangements are to be provided when the total load connected to the low voltage craft service
switchboard exceeds the rated capacity of the transformer. See 4-6-2/1.7 and 4-6-2/9.3.3.
1.7.2(c) Protection from Electrical Disturbance. Means or arrangements are to be provided for
protecting the transformers from voltage transients generated within the system due to circuit
conditions, such as high-frequency current interruption and current suppression (chopping) as the
result of switching, vacuum cartridge circuit breaker operation or thyristor-switching.
An analysis or data for the estimated voltage transients is to be submitted to show that the insulation
of the transformer is capable of withstanding the estimated voltage transients. See 4-6-5/1.11.3(b).
1.7.2(d) Protection from Earth Faults. Where a Y-neutral of three-phase transformer windings is
earthed, means for detecting an earth fault are to be provided. The detection of the earth fault is to
activate an alarm at the manned control station or to automatically disconnect the transformer
from the high-voltage power distribution network.
1.7.2(e) Transformers Arranged in Parallel (2014). Refer to 4-6-2/9.15.2 for requirements.
1.7.3 Voltage Transformers for Control and Instrumentation
Voltage transformers are to be provided with overload and short circuit protection on the secondary
side.
1.7.4 Fuses
Fuses are not to be used for overload protection.
1.7.5 Over Voltage Protection
Lower voltage systems supplied through transformers from high voltage systems are to be protected
against overvoltages. This may be achieved by:
i) Direct earthing of the lower voltage system,
ii) Appropriate neutral voltage limiters, or
iii) Earthed screen between primary and secondary winding of transformers
1.9 Equipment Installation and Arrangement

1.9.1 Degree of Protection
The degree of equipment protection is to be in accordance with 4-6-3/Table 1.
1.9.2 Protective Arrangements
1.9.2(a) Interlocking Arrangements. Where high-voltage equipment is not contained in an enclosure
but a room forms the enclosure of the equipment, the access doors are to be so interlocked that
they cannot be opened until the supply is isolated and the equipment earthed down.
1.9.2(b) Warning Plate (1 July 2016). At the entrance of such spaces, a suitable marking is to be
placed which indicates danger of high-voltage and the maximum voltage inside the space. For
high-voltage electrical equipment installed outside these spaces, a similar marking is to be
provided. An adequate, unobstructed working space is to be left in the vicinity of high voltage
equipment for preventing potential severe injuries to personnel performing maintenance activities.
In addition, the clearance between the switchboard and the ceiling/deckhead above is to meet the
requirements of the Internal Arc Classification according to IEC 62271-200.
1.9.2(c) Exposure of HV Equipment to Damaging Environments (2014). Consideration should be
given to designing the arrangement of the installation to avoid exposure of high voltage equipment
to contaminants, such as oil or dust, as might be found in machinery spaces or close to ventilation
air inlets to the space, or to water spray from water-mist systems and local fire hose connections.
1.9.3 Cables
1.9.3(a) Runs of Cables. In accommodation spaces, high voltage cables are to be run in enclosed
cable transit systems.
1.9.3(b) Segregation. High voltage cables of different voltage ratings are not to be installed in the
same cable bunch, duct, pipe or box. Where high voltage cables of different voltage ratings are
installed on the same cable tray, the air clearance between cables is not to be less than the
minimum air clearance for the higher voltage side in 4-6-5/1.1.3(a). However, high voltage cables
are not to be installed on the same cable tray for the cables operating at the nominal system voltage
of 1 kV or less.
Higher voltage equipment is not to be combined with lower voltage equipment in the same
enclosure, unless segregation or other suitable measures are taken to ensure safe access to lower
voltage equipment
1.9.3(c) Installation Arrangements. High voltage cables are to be installed on cable trays or
equivalent when they are provided with a continuous metallic sheath or armor which is effectively
bonded to earth. Otherwise, they are to be installed for their entire length in metallic casings
effectively bonded to earth.
1.9.3(d) Termination and Splices (2014). Terminations in all conductors of high voltage cables
are to be, as far as practicable, effectively covered with suitable insulating material. In terminal boxes,
if conductors are not insulated, phases are to be separated from earth and from each other by
substantial barriers of suitable insulating materials. High voltage cables of the radial field type
(i.e., having a conductive layer to control the electric field within the insulation) are to have
terminations which provide electric stress control.
Terminations are to be of a type compatible with the insulation and jacket material of the cable
and are to be provided with means to ground all metallic shielding components (i.e., tapes, wires, etc.).
Splices and joints are not permitted in propulsion cables. For purposes of this Rule, propulsion
cables are those cables whose service is related only to propulsion.
1.9.3(e) Cable Rating (2014). The rated phase to earth voltage (Uo) of high voltage cables shall
not be less than shown in the Table below:
Nominal System Highest System Rated Phase to Earth Voltage (Uo)

Voltage (Un) Voltage (Um) (kV)
(kV) (kV) Systems with Automatic Systems without Automatic
Disconnection Upon Disconnection Upon
Detection of an Earth Fault Detection of an Earth Fault
3.0 3.6 1.8 3.6
3.3 3.6 1.8 3.6
6.0 7.2 3.6 6.0
6.6 7.2 3.6 6.6
10.0 12.0 6.0 10.0
11.0 12.0 6.0 11.0
15.0 17.5 8.7 15.0
1.9.3(f) Cable Current Carrying Capacities (2014). The maximum current carrying capacity of
high voltage cables is to be in accordance with the Table below:
Conductor Size Maximum Current in Amperes

(mm2) 45°C Ambient; 1000 V and More
1-Core 3-Core
85°C 90°C 85°C 90°C
16 80 85 55 60
25 105 115 75 80
35 130 140 90 95
50 165 175 115 120
70 205 215 140 150
95 245 260 170 185
120 285 305 200 210
150 330 350 230 245
185 375 400 260 280
240 440 470 310 325
300 505 540 355 375
400 605 645 425 450
500 700 740 490 520
1.9.3(g) Marking. High voltage cables are to be readily identifiable by suitable marking.
1.9.3(h) Cable Test after Installation (1 July 2016). A voltage withstand test is to be carried out on
each completed cable and its accessories before a new high voltage installation, including additions
to an existing installation, is put into service.
An insulation resistance test is to be carried out prior to the voltage withstand test being conducted.
For cables with rated voltage (Uo/U) above 1.8/3 kV (Um = 3.6 kV) an AC voltage withstand test
may be carried out upon advice from high voltage cable manufacturer. One of the following test
methods to be used:
i) An AC test voltage for 5 min with the phase‐to‐phase voltage of the system applied
between the conductor and the metallic screen/sheath.
ii) An AC voltage test for 24 h with the normal operating voltage of the system.
iii) A DC test voltage equal to 4Uo may be applied for 15 minutes.
For cables with rated voltage (Uo/U) up to 1.8/3 kV (Um = 3.6 kV), a DC voltage equal to 4Uo
shall be applied for 15 minutes.
After completion of the test, the conductors are to be connected to earth for a sufficient period in
order to remove any trapped electric charge.
The insulation resistance test is then repeated.
The above tests are for newly installed cables. If due to repairs or modifications, cables which
have been in use are to be tested, lower voltages and shorter durations should be considered.
1.9.4 High Voltage Shore Connection (2014)
Where arrangements are made for the supply of electricity at high voltage from onshore, and
designed to allow the shipboard generators to be shut down while in port, the requirements given
in the ABS Guide for High Voltage Shore Connection.
1.11 Machinery and Equipment

1.11.1 Rotating Machines
1.11.1(a) Protection (2014). Refer to 4-6-5/Table 1 for ingress protection (IP) requirements.
1.11.1(b) Windings. Generator stator windings are to have all phase ends brought out for the
installation of the differential protection.
1.11.1(c) Temperature Detectors. Rotating machines are to be provided with temperature detectors
in their stator windings to actuate a visual and audible alarm in a normally attended position whenever
the temperature exceeds the permissible limit. If embedded temperature detectors are used, means
are to be provided to protect the circuit against over-voltage.
1.11.1(d) Space Heater. Effective means are to be provided to prevent the accumulation of moisture
and condensation within the machines when they are idle.
1.11.1(e) Tests (2014). Each design of HV generator and motor is to be assessed by testing in
accordance with the “type tests” schedule indicated in 4-6-4/Table 1. Each subsequent production
unit of and accepted design is to be tested in accordance with the “routine tests” schedule also
indicated in 4-6-4/Table 1.
i) Inter-turn Insulation Test. In addition to the tests normally required for rotating machinery,
a high frequency, high voltage test, in accordance with IEC Publication 60034-15, is to be
carried out on the individual coils in order to demonstrate a satisfactory withstand level of
the inter-turn insulation to steep fronted switching surges.
ii) Immediately after the high voltage test the insulation resistance is to be measured using a
direct current insulation test meter between:
a) All current carrying parts connected together and earth
b) All current carrying parts of different polarity or phase where both the ends of
each polarity or phase are individually accessible.
The minimum values of test voltage and corresponding insulation resistance are given in
the table below. The insulation resistance is to be measured close to the operating
temperature. If this is not possible then an approved method of calculation is to be used.
Rated Voltage Minimum Test Minimum Insulation

Un (V) Voltage (V) Resistance (MΩ)
1000< Un ≤ 7200 1000 Un/1000 + 1
7200 < Un ≤ 15000 5000 Un/1000 + 1
1.11.2 Switchgear and Control-gear Assemblies (2014)

Switchgear and control gear assemblies are to be constructed according to the IEC Publication
62271-200 and the following additional requirements:
1.11.2(a) Mechanical Construction and Configuration (2016).
i) Switchgear is to be of metal-enclosed type in accordance with IEC Publication 62271-200
or of the insulation-enclosed type in accordance with IEC Publication 62271-201.
ii) Refer to 4-6-4/7.15.2 for requirements for the division of main bus bars.
1.11.2(b) Clearance and Creepage Distances. For clearance and creepage distances, see 4-6-5/1.1.3.
1.11.2(c) Locking Facilities. Withdrawable circuit breakers and switches are to be provided with
mechanical locking facilities in both service and disconnected positions. For maintenance purposes,
key locking of withdrawable circuit breakers, switches and fixed disconnectors is to be possible.
Withdrawable circuit breakers, when in the service position, are to have no relative motion between
fixed and moving parts.
1.11.2(d) Shutters (1 July 2016). The fixed contacts of withdrawable circuit breakers and
switches are to be so arranged that in the withdrawn position, the live contacts of the bus bars are
automatically covered. Shutters are to be clearly marked for incoming and outgoing circuits. This
may be achieved with the use of colors or labels.
1.11.2(e) Earthing and Short-circuiting Facilities. For maintenance purposes, an adequate number
of earthing and short circuiting facilities are to be provided to enable equipment and cables to be
earthed or short-circuited to earth before being worked upon.
1.11.2(f) Arc Flash and Associated Installation Requirements (1 July 2016)
i) Internal Arc Classification (IAC). Switchgear and control gear assemblies are to be Internal
Arc Classified (IAC). Where switchgear and control gear are accessible by authorized
personnel only accessibility Type A is sufficient (IEC 62271-200; Annex AA; AA 2.2).
Accessibility Type B is required if accessible by non-authorized personnel. Installation and
location of the switchgear and control gear is to correspond with its internal arc classification
and classified sides (F, L and R).
ii) Calculations, in accordance with the applicable parts of Standard IEEE 1584 or other
recognized standard, are to be made to establish:
• The maximum current that can flow in the case of an arc fault
• The maximum time and current that could flow if arc protection techniques are adopted
• The distance, from the location of the arc flash, at which the arc flash energy would
be 1.2 calories per cm2 if the enclosure is open
iii) In addition to the marking required by the equipment design standard, arc flash data consistent
with the Design Operating Philosophy and the required PPE is also to be indicated at each
location where work on the HV equipment could be conducted.
1.11.2(g) Tests (2014). A power frequency voltage test is to be carried out on high voltage switchgear
and control-gear assemblies with test voltages shown in the Table below. The test procedure is to
be in accordance with IEC Publication 62271-200.
Rated Voltage Rated Power Frequency Withstand

(kV) Voltage (kV)
3.6 10
7.2 20
12 28
15 38
Where intermediate values of switchgear rated voltages are used, the next higher power frequency
withstand test voltage is to be used.
1.11.3 Transformers
1.11.3(a) Application (1 July 2016). Provisions of 4-6-5/1.11.3 are applicable to power transformers
for essential services. See also 4-6-4/9. Items 4-6-5/1.11.3(c) and 4-6-5/1.11.3(d) are applicable to
transformers of the dry type only. These requirements are not applicable to transformers intended
for the following services:
• Instrument transformers.
• Transformers for static converters.
• Starting transformers.
Dry type transformers are to comply with the applicable Parts of the IEC Publication 60076-11.
Liquid filled transformers are to comply with the applicable Parts of the IEC 60076 Series. Oil
immersed transformers are to be provided with the following alarms and protections:
• Liquid level (Low) – alarm
• Liquid temperature (High) – alarm
• Liquid level (Low) – trip or load reduction
• Liquid temperature (High) – trip or load reduction
• Gas pressure relay (High) – trip
1.11.3(b) Plans. In addition to the details required in 4-6-4/9, the applicable standard of construction
and the rated withstanding voltage of the insulation are also to be submitted for review.
1.11.3(c) Enclosure. Transformers are to have a degree of protection in accordance with
4-6-1/Table 2, but not less than IP23. However, when installed in spaces accessible to unqualified
personnel, the degree of protection is to be increased to IP44. For transformers not contained in
enclosures, see 4-6-5/1.9.1.
1.11.3(d) Space heater. Effective means to prevent accumulation of moisture and condensation
within the transformers (when de-energized) is to be provided.
1.11.3(e) Testing. Three-phase transformers or three-phase bank transformers of 100 kVA and
above are to be tested in the presence of the Surveyor. The test items are to be in accordance with
the standard applicable to the transformer. The tests are also to be carried out in the presence of the
Surveyor for each individual transformer. Transformers of less than 100 kVA will be accepted
subject to a satisfactory performance test conducted to the satisfaction of the Surveyor after installation.
Specific requirements are applicable for the following tests:
i) In the dielectric strength test, the short duration power frequency withstand voltage to be
applied is to follow the standard applicable to the transformer but not less than the estimated
voltage transient generated within the system. If the short duration power frequency withstand
voltage is not specified in the applicable standard, IEC 60076-3 is to be referred to. For
the voltage transient, see 4-6-5/1.7.2(c).
ii) The induced over-voltage withstand test (layer test) is also to be carried out in accordance
with the standard applicable to the transformers in the presence of the Surveyor. This test
is intended to verify the power-frequency withstand strength along the winding under test
and between its phase (strength between turns and between layers in the windings). If the
induced over-voltage withstand test is not specified in the applicable standard, IEC
60076-3 is to be referred to.
1.11.3(f) Nameplate. In addition to the requirements in 4-6-4/Table 4c, the following information
is also to be indicated on the nameplate:
• Applicable standard
• Short duration power frequency withstand voltage for verification of insulation level of each
winding
1.11.4 Cables
1.11.4(a) Standards. Cables are to be constructed to IEC Publication 60092-353, 60092-354 or
other equivalent recognized standard. See also 4-6-4/13.1.
1.13 Design Operating Philosophy (2014)

1.13.1 Objective
While this section covers the specific ABS requirements for High Voltage (HV) systems, it is
recognized that system design and equipment construction are only parts of an overall approach
that are required to allow HV systems to be operated safely. Other aspects that contribute towards
HV safety include maintenance procedures, craft and equipment operating procedures, permit to
work procedures, company safety policy, personal protective equipment (PPE) and training, most
of which are beyond the role of Classification. However, in order to assist ABS in its review of the
design and construction of the craft and its equipment it is necessary for ABS to be assured that
the design is part of a larger overall approach or plan.
The High Voltage Design Principles document is to outline the concepts that are the basis of the
design. It should identify risks and document the strategies that are used to mitigate each of the
risks (e.g., remote switching, arc flash energy reduction equipment).
1.13.2 HV System Failures
The design should take into account each reasonably foreseeable failure type and address what
actions will be expected of the crew for each failure. Due to the limited availability of specialist
tools, equipment and spare parts on board and recognizing the additional dangers associated with
space limitations, the remoteness of specialized medical help and facilities in the event of
emergencies, it is desirable that, as far as practicable, the crew is not exposed to dangers that could
be avoided. For these reasons it is preferable that the craft’s HV electrical system be designed
such that the crew can safely isolate any damaged distribution equipment and switch to alternative
supplies without the need to open the HV equipment.
1.13.3 Activities
For all HV switchboards and distribution boards, each type of operation or activity is to be identified
and the means of undertaking the operation or activity safely is to be established. The operations
and activities to be considered are to include the following:
i) Taking readings
ii) Normal operational switching
iii) Isolation and making safe
iv) Maintenance
v) Fault finding
vi) Inspection
vii) Class Surveys
Where switchgear design calls for circuit breakers to be inspected prior to being put back into service
following operation on overcurrent, this should also be covered.
1.13.4 Accessibility (1 July 2016)
An adequate, unobstructed working space of at least 2 m (6 ft) is to be left in the vicinity of high
voltage equipment for preventing potential severe injuries to personal performing maintenance
activities. Where the clear space around a location where activity is taking place is less than 2 m (6 ft),
then the activities are to be covered in sufficient detail to take into account the work involved and the
possible need to have clear and safe access for emergency medical evacuation. Where recommended
by the switchgear manufacturer, the working space may be reduced to a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft)
due to special considerations such as the use of arc resistant switchgear.
Activities that do not require operation at the switchboard (e.g., telephones or manual call points)
should not require the operator to be within 2 m (6 ft) of the switchboard.
1.13.5 Modifications
No modifications are to be made to HV switchgear without the plans being approved and the
drawings being made available to the ABS Surveyor in advance of the work taking place. Testing
of approved modifications is to be conducted in the presence of the ABS Surveyor. Temporary
repairs are to be in full compliance with the requirements of these Rules.
1.13.6 HV Systems with Enhanced Operating Redundancy
Where the HV electrical system is designed with sufficient redundancy to allow switching and
isolation along the principles in 4-6-5/1.13.2 and still meet the requirements of 4-6-2/3.1.2 with
one generator in reserve, then the activity associated with that failure is not required to be included.
1.15 Preliminary Operations Manual (2014)

1.15.1 Objective
The preliminary operations manual contains the shipyard’s description of operations affecting the
craft’s HV equipment. The description ‘preliminary’ is used to capture the fact that it may not be
the final document used by the craft’s Owner.
The manual is to be complete and sufficiently detailed to capture each piece of HV equipment and
how the activities associated with that equipment can be achieved consistently with the Design
Operating Philosophy. This manual is to be made available to the Owner by the shipyard.
The Owner will need the information contained in the preliminary operations manual to understand
how the shipyard designed the HV equipment to be operated safely. It is likely that the Owner will
modify some aspects of the manual to bring it in line with their own company policies, organizational
responsibilities and legal duties.
The preliminary operations manual is to include for each piece of HV equipment:
i) Details of the tasks (operations and activities) associated with that piece of equipment
ii) Details of the ‘Authorization’ needed to perform each of the tasks
iii) Details of the tools required to perform each of the tasks
iv) Details of PPE and safety equipment (locks, barriers, tags, rescue hooks, etc.)
v) Identify the tasks for which a ‘permit to work’ system is to be used.
1.15.2 Details of Authorization
For each operation or task involving HV switchgear and for access to the HV switchgear rooms,
the appropriate authorizations are to be determined before delivery.
1.15.3 Training Requirements for Authorization
Part of the basis of establishing any level of authorization is training. It is not expected that the
shipyard will stipulate what training qualifications are required. However, a description of the
subjects that would need to be covered in the training for each level of authorization should be
included.
The Owner can be guided by the above information in making decisions regarding the crew training
requirements.
1.15.4 Test, Maintenance Tools and PPE
Where tasks require the use of PPE, the required protection clothing rating should be identifiable
in the preliminary operations manual and on a label on the HV equipment where that task will take
place. The level of protection offered by the PPE is to be readily identified on the PPE itself in the
same terms or units as used on the labels.
Some PPE for general use is not suitable for High Voltage or arc flash hazards, mostly through
inappropriate fire performance; such PPE is to be excluded from high voltage switchgear rooms.
Information alerting the crew of the need to be able to recognize and use the right PPE is to be
included in the manual.
1.15.5 Inspection and Maintenance of Test Equipment Tools and PPE

Where PPE or test equipment is provided by the shipyard the means for its proper use, inspection,
calibration and maintenance is to be made available. The instructions or directions regarding
where they are kept are to be contained in the Preliminary Operations Manual.
Where the PPE is not provided by the shipyard a description or specification regarding the required
tools and PPE should be provided in the Preliminary Operations Manual.
3 Electric Propulsion System
3.1 General
3.1.1 Application (2014)
The following requirements in this subsection are applicable to electric propulsion systems. Electric
propulsion systems complying with other recognized standards will also be considered, provided it
can be shown, through either satisfactory service experience or a systematic analysis based on sound
engineering principles, to meet the overall safety standards of these Rules. Unless stated otherwise,
electric propulsion equipment and systems are to comply with the applicable requirements in other
parts of Part 4, Chapter 6, as well.
3.1.2 Plans and Data to be Submitted
In addition to the plans and data to be submitted in accordance with 4-6-2/1, 4-6-3/1 and 4-6-4/1,
the following plans and data are to be submitted for review.
• One-line diagrams of the propulsion control system for power supply, circuit protection, alarm,
monitoring, safety and emergency shutdown systems, including list of alarm and monitoring
points.
• Plans showing the location of the propulsion controls and its monitoring stations.
• Arrangements and details of the propulsion control console or panel, including schematic diagram
of the system therein.
• Arrangements and details of electric coupling.
• Arrangements and details of the semiconductor converters enclosure for the propulsion system,
including data for the semiconductor converter and cooling system with its interlocking
arrangement.
3.3 System Design

3.3.1 General (2016)
For the purposes of the electric propulsion system requirements, an electric propulsion system is one
in which the main propulsion of the craft is provided by at least one electric motor. A craft may
have more than one electrical propulsion system.
An integrated electric propulsion system is a system where a common set of generators supply
power to the craft service loads as well as the propulsion loads.
In the case of an integrated electrical propulsion system, the electrical drive train is considered to
consist of the equipment connected to the electrical network such as a drive (frequency converter)
and the propulsion motor(s).
All electrical equipment that is part of the electric propulsion drive train is to be built with redundancy
such that a single failure will not completely disable the propulsion of the craft. Where electric
motors are to provide the sole means of propulsion for a craft, a single propulsion motor with dual
windings does not meet this requirement.
3.3.2 Generating Capacity

For craft with an integrated electric propulsion system, under normal sea-going conditions, when
one generator is out of service, the remaining generator capacity is to be sufficient to carry all of
the craft services (essential services, normal services and for minimum comfortable conditions of
habitability) and an effective level of propulsion.
3.3.3 Power Management System (2014)
For craft with an integrated electric propulsion system, a power management system is to be
provided. The power management system is to control load sharing between generators, prevent
blackouts, maintain power to the essential service loads and maintain power to the propulsion loads.
The system is to account for the following operating scenarios.
• All generators in operation, then the loss of one generator
• When at least one generator is not in operation and there is an increase in the propulsion loads
or a loss of one of the generators that would result in the need to start a generator that was not
in operation.
• Upon failure of the power management system, there is to be no change in the available electrical
power. Failure of the power management system is to be alarmed at a manned control station.
Further, the system is to prevent overloading the generators, by reducing the propulsion load or
load shedding of non-essential loads. In general, the system is to limit power to the propulsion
loads to maintain power to the craft’s essential service loads. However, the system is to shed
non-essential loads to maintain power to the propulsion loads.
An audible and visible alarm is to be installed at each propulsion control location and is to be
activated when the system is limiting the propulsion power in order to maintain power to the other
essential service loads.
When at least one generator is not in operation, consideration should be given to keeping one
generator in standby mode, so that it can be brought on line within 45 seconds, upon failure of one
of the running generators.
Operation with only one generator on line should only be considered, when another generator can
be brought on line within 45 seconds of failure of the running generator.
3.3.4 Regenerative Power (2014)
For systems where regenerative power may be developed, the regenerative power is not to cause
overspeeding of the prime mover or variations in the system voltage and frequency which exceeds
the limits of 4-6-1/9. See also 4-6-5/3.17.4(a) and 4-6-5/3.17.4(e).
3.3.5 Harmonics (2014)
A harmonic distortion calculation is to be submitted for review for all craft with electric propulsion.
The calculation is to indicate that the harmonic distortion levels at all locations throughout the
power distribution system (main generation switchboard, downstream power distribution switchboards,
etc.) are within the limits of 4-6-2/7.9. The harmonic distortion levels at dedicated propulsion
buses are also to be within the limits of 4-6-2/7.9, otherwise documentation from the manufacturer
is to be submitted indicating that the equipment is designed for operation at a higher level of distortion.
Where higher values of harmonic distortion are expected, any other possible effects, such as additional
heat losses in machines, network resonances, errors in control and monitoring systems are to be
considered.
Means of monitoring voltage harmonic distortion shall be provided, including alarms at the main
generation switchboard and at continuously manned stations when to notify of an increase in total
or individual harmonic distortion levels above the maximum allowable levels.
Harmonic filters, if used, are to comply with requirements mentioned in 4-6-2/9.19.
3.5 Propulsion Power Supply Systems (2014)

3.5.1 Propulsion Generators
3.5.1(a) Power Supply. The power for the propulsion equipment may be derived from a single
generator. If a craft service generator is also used for propulsion purposes other than for boosting
the propulsion power, such generator and power supply circuits to propulsion systems are also to
comply with the applicable requirements in this subsection. See also 4-6-2/3.1.4.
3.5.1(b) Single System. If a propulsion system contains only one generator and one motor and
cannot be connected to another propulsion system, more than one exciter set is to be provided for
each machine. However, this is not necessary for self-excited generators or for multi-propeller
propulsion craft where any additional exciter set may be common for the craft.
3.5.1(c) Multiple Systems. Systems having two or more propulsion generators, two or more
semiconductor converters or two or more motors on one propeller shaft are to be so arranged that
any unit may be taken out of service and disconnected electrically without preventing the operation
of the remaining units.
3.5.1(d) Excitation Systems. Arrangements for electric propulsion generators are to be such that
propulsion can be maintained in case of failure of an excitation system or failure of a power supply
for an excitation system. Propulsion may be at reduced power under such conditions where two or
more propulsion generators are installed, provided such reduced power is sufficient to provide for
a speed of not less than 7 knots or 1/2 of design speed, whichever is the lesser.
3.5.1(e) Features for Other Services. If the propulsion generator is used for other purposes than
for propulsion, such as dredging, cargo oil pumps and other special services, overload protection
in the auxiliary circuit and means for making voltage adjustments are to be provided at the control
board. When propulsion alternating-current generators are used for other services for operation in
port, the port excitation control is to be provided with a device that is to operate just below normal
idling speed of the generator to remove excitation automatically.
3.5.2 Propulsion Excitation
3.5.2(a) Excitation Circuits. Every exciter set is to be supplied by a separate feeder. Excitation
circuits are not to be fitted with overload circuit-interrupting devices, except those intended to
function in connection with the protection for the propulsion generator. In such cases, the field
circuit breaker is to be provided with a discharge resistor, unless a permanent discharge resistor is
provided.
3.5.2(b) Field Circuits. Field circuits are to be provided with means for suppressing voltage rise
when a field switch is opened. Where fuses are used for excitation circuit protection, it is essential
that they do not interrupt the field discharge resistor circuit upon rupturing.
3.5.2(c) Craft’s Service Generator Connection. Where the excitation supply is obtained from the
craft’s service generators, the connection is to be made to the generator side of the generator circuit
breaker with the excitation supply passing through the overload current device of the breaker.
3.7 Circuit Protection (2016)

3.7.1 Setting
Overcurrent protective devices, if any, in the main circuits are to be set sufficiently high so as not
to operate on overcurrents caused by maneuvering or normal operation in heavy seas or in floating
broken ice.
3.7.2 Direct-current (DC) Propulsion Circuits
3.7.2(a) Circuit Protection. Direct-current propulsion circuits are not to have fuses. Each circuit
is to be protected by overload relays to open the field circuits or by remote-controlled main-circuit
interrupting devices. Provision is to be made for closing circuit breakers promptly after opening.
3.7.2(b) Protection for Reversal of the Rotation. Where separately driven DC generators are
connected electrically in series, means shall be provided to prevent reversal of the rotation of a
generator upon failure of the driving power of its prime mover.
3.7.3 Excitation Circuits

An overload protection is not to be provided for opening of the excitation circuit.
3.7.4 Reduction of Magnetic Fluxes
Means are to be provided for selective tripping or rapid reduction of the magnetic fluxes of the
generators and motors so that overcurrents do not reach values which may endanger the plant.
3.7.5 Direct-current (DC) Propulsion Motors Supplied by Semiconductor Converters
The protection features of the semiconductor converters are to be arranged to avoid a damaging
flashover in the DC propulsion motor. A possible cause of a damaging flashover would be removal
of the field current. The protection features of the semiconductor converters are to take into account
the increase in armature current created by the removal of the field current, due to accidental loss
of the field, or activation of a protection feature intended to protect the field.
To verify compliance with the above, the maximum time-current characteristics that can be
commutated by the motor as well as the time-current characteristics of the protective features of
the semiconductor converters are to be submitted for review. To avoid a damaging flashover, the
maximum time-current characteristics of the motor is to be provided by the motor manufacturer
and is to be used by the semiconductor converter manufacturer to determine the appropriate set
points for the protection features of the semiconductor converters.
3.9 Protection for Earth Leakage

3.9.1 Main Propulsion Circuits
Means for earth leakage detection are to be provided for the main propulsion circuit and be arranged
to operate an alarm upon the occurrence of an earth fault. When the fault current flowing is liable
to cause damage, arrangements for opening the main propulsion circuit are also to be provided.
3.9.2 Excitation Circuits
Means are to be provided for earth leakage detection in excitation circuits of propulsion machines
but may be omitted in circuits of brushless excitation systems and of machines rated up to 500 kW.
3.9.3 Alternating Current (AC) Systems
Alternating current propulsion circuits are to be provided with an earthing detector alarm or indicator.
If the neutral is earthed for this purpose, it is to be through an arrangement which will limit the
current at full-rated voltage so that it will not exceed approximately 20 amperes upon a fault to
earth in the propulsion system. An unbalance relay is to be provided which is to open the generator
and motor-field circuits upon the occurrence of an appreciable unbalanced fault.
3.9.4 Direct-current (DC) Systems
The earthing detector may consist of a voltmeter or lights. Provision is to be made for protection
against severe overloads, excessive currents and electrical faults likely to result in damage to the
plant. Protective equipment is to be capable of being so set as not to operate on the overloads or
overcurrents experienced in a heavy seaway or when maneuvering.
3.11 Electric Propulsion Control

3.11.1 General
Failure of a control signal is not to cause an excessive increase in propeller speed. The reference
value transmitters in the control stations and the control equipment are to be so designed that any
defect in the desired value transmitters or in the cables between the control station and the propulsion
system will not cause a substantial increase in the propeller speed.
3.11.2 Automatic and Remote Control Systems
Where two or more control stations are provided outside of the engine room, or where automatic
control of the propulsion machinery is provided, Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-8, as applicable, are
to be complied with. See 4-7-1/3 for propulsion class symbols.
3.11.3 Testing and Inspection

Controls for electric propulsion equipment are to be inspected when finished and dielectric strength
tests and insulation resistance measurements made on the various circuits in the presence of the
Surveyor, preferably at the plant of manufacture. The satisfactory tripping and operation of all
relays, contactors and the various safety devices are also to be demonstrated.
3.11.4 Initiation of Control
The control of the propulsion system can be activated only when the delegated control lever is in
zero position and the system is ready for operation.
3.11.5 Emergency Stop
Each control station shall have an emergency stop device which is independent of the control lever.
3.11.6 Prime Mover Control
Where required by the system of control, means are to be provided at the control assembly for
controlling the prime mover speed and for mechanically tripping the throttle valve.
3.11.7 Control Power Failure
If failure of the power supply occurs in systems with power-aided control (e.g., with electric,
pneumatic or hydraulic aid), it is to be possible to restore control in a short time.
3.11.8 Protection
Arrangements are to be made so that opening of the control system assemblies or compartments
will not cause inadvertent or automatic loss of propulsion. Where oil gauges are mounted on the
main-control assembly, provision is to be made so that the oil will not come in contact with the
energized parts in case of leakage.
3.11.9 Interlocks
All levers for operating contactors, line switches, field switches and similar devices are to be
interlocked to prevent their improper operation. Interlocks are to be provided with the field lever
to prevent the opening of any main circuit without first reducing the field excitation to zero, except
that when the generators simultaneously supply power to an auxiliary load apart from the propulsion,
the field excitation need only be reduced to a low value.
3.13 Instrumentation at the Control Station

3.13.1 Indication, Display and Alarms
The necessary instruments to indicate existing conditions at all times are to be provided and mounted
on the control panel convenient to the operating levers and switches. Instruments and other devices
mounted on the switchboard are to be labeled and the instruments provided with a distinguishing
mark to indicate full-load conditions. Metallic cases of all permanently installed instruments are to
be permanently earthed. The following instruments, where applicable, are to be provided.
3.13.1(a) For AC Systems. Ammeter, voltmeter, indicating wattmeter and field ammeter (*) for
each propulsion generator and for each synchronous motor. See also 4-7-3/Table 5.
3.13.1(b) For DC Systems. An ammeter for each main circuit and one or more voltmeters with
selector switches for reading voltage on each propulsion generator and motor. See also 4-7-3/Table 5.0
3.13.1(c) For Electric Slip Couplings. An ammeter for the coupling excitation circuit.
* Field ammeter is not required for brushless generators
3.13.2 Indication of Propulsion System Status

The control stations of the propulsion systems are to have at least the following indications for
each propeller.
3.13.2(a) “Ready for Operation”. Power circuits and necessary auxiliaries are in operation.
3.13.2(b) “Faulty”. Propeller is not controllable.
3.13.2(c) “Power Limitation”. In case of disturbance, for example, in the ventilators for propulsion
motors, in the converters, cooling water supply or load limitation of the generators.
3.15 Equipment Installation and Arrangement (2014)

3.15.1 General
The arrangement of bus bars and wiring on the back of propulsion-control assemblies is to be such
that all parts, including the connections, are accessible. All nuts and connections are to be fitted
with locking devices to prevent loosening due to vibration. Clearance and creepage distance are to
be provided between parts of opposite polarity and between live parts and earth to prevent arcing.
See 4-6-1/19, 4-6-4/7.11.6 and 4-6-5/1.11.2(b).
3.15.2 Accessibility and Facilities for Repairs
3.15.2(a) Accessibility. For purposes of inspection and repair, provision is to be made for access
to the stator and rotor coils, and for the withdrawal and replacement of field coils. Adequate access is
to be provided to permit resurfacing of commutators and slip-rings, as well as the renewal and
bedding of brushes.
3.15.2(b) Facility for Supporting. Facilities shall be provided for supporting the shaft to permit
inspection and withdrawal of bearings.
3.15.2(c) Slip-couplings. Slip-couplings are to be designed to permit removal as a unit without
axial displacement of the driving and driven shaft, and without removing the poles.
3.15.4 Propulsion Cables
Propulsion cables are not to have splices or joints, except terminal joints, and all cable terminals
are to be sealed against the admission of moisture or air. Similar precautions are to be taken during
installation by sealing all cable ends until the terminals are permanently attached. Cable supports
are to be designed to withstand short-circuited conditions. They are to be spaced less than 915 mm
(36 in.) apart and are to be arranged to prevent chafing of the cable. See 4-6-3/5.9.1.
3.17 Machinery and Equipment (2014)

3.17.1 Material Tests
The following materials intended for main propulsion installation are to be tested in accordance
with the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2): thrust shafts, line shafts, propeller shafts,
shafting for propulsion generators and motors, coupling bolts, and in the case of direct-connected
turbine-driven propulsion generators, fan shrouds, centering and retaining rings. Major castings or
built-up parts such as frames, spiders and end shields are to be surface inspected and the welding
is to be in accordance with the ABS Rules for Materials and Welding (Part 2).
3.17.2 Temperature Rating
When generators, motors or slip-couplings for electric propulsion are fitted with an integral fan
and will be operated at speeds below the rated speed with full-load torque, full-load current or
full-load excitation temperature rise limits according to 4-6-4/Table 3 are not to be exceeded.
3.17.3 Protection Against Moisture Condensation
4-6-4/3.13.7 is applicable for rotating machines and converters, regardless of the weight of the
machines.
3.17.4 Prime Movers

3.17.4(a) Capability. The prime mover rated output is to have adequate overloading and build-up
capacity for supplying the power which is necessary during transitional changes in operating conditions
of the electrical equipment. When maneuvering from full propeller speed ahead to full propeller
speed astern with the craft making full way ahead, the prime mover is be capable of absorbing a
proportion of the regenerated power without tripping due to overspeed.
3.17.4(b) Speed Control. Prime movers of any type are to be provided with a governor capable of
maintaining the preset steady speed within a range not exceeding 5% of the rated full-load speed for
load changes from full-load to no-load.
3.17.4(c) Manual Controls. Where the speed control of the propeller requires speed variation of
the prime mover, the governor is to be provided with means for local manual control, as well as
for remote control. For turbines driving AC propulsion generators, where required by the system of
control, the governor is to be provided with means for local hand control, as well as remote adjustment
from the control station.
3.17.4(d) Parallel Operation. In case of parallel operation of generators, the governing system is
to permit stable operation to be maintained over the entire operational speed range of the prime movers.
3.17.4(e) Protection for Regenerated Power. Braking resistors or ballast consumers are to be
provided to absorb excess amounts of regenerated energy and to reduce the speed of rotation of
the propulsion motor. These braking resistors or ballast consumers are to be located external to the
mechanical and electric rotating machines. Alternatively, the amount of regenerated power may be
limited by the action of the control system.
3.17.5 Rotating Machines for Propulsion
The following requirements are applicable to propulsion generators and propulsion motors.
3.17.5(a) Ventilation and Protection. Electric rotating machines for propulsion are to be enclosed
ventilated or be provided with substantial wire or mesh screen to prevent personnel injury or entrance
of foreign matter. Dampers are to be provided in ventilating air ducts, except when re-circulating
systems are used.
3.17.5(b) Fire-extinguishing Systems. Electric rotating machines for propulsion which are enclosed
or in which the air gap is not directly exposed are to be fitted with fire-extinguishing systems suitable
for fires in electrical equipment. This will not be required where it can be established that the
machinery and insulation is self-extinguishing.
3.17.5(c) Air Coolers. Air cooling systems for propulsion generators are to be in accordance with
4-2-1/11.3 and 4-2-1/11.7. Water-air heat exchangers of rotating propulsion machines for single
systems (single generator and single motor), as specified in 4-6-5/3.5.1(b), are to have double wall
tubes and be fitted with a leak detector feature to monitor for any water leakage. A visual and
audible alarm is to be provided at a normally manned location to indicate such water leakage.
3.17.5(d) Temperature Sensors. Stator windings of AC machines and interpole windings of DC
machines rated above 500 kW are to be provided with temperature sensors. See 4-7-4/Table 6.
3.17.5(e) Generator Excitation (2014). Excitation current for propulsion generators may be
derived from attached rotating exciters, static exciters, excitation motor-generator sets or special
purpose generating units. Power for these exciters may be derived from the machine being excited
or from any ship service, emergency or special purpose generating units.
3.17.5(f) Propulsion Motors (2014). Propulsion motors are to be designed to be capable of
withstanding the mechanical and thermal effects of a short-circuit at its terminals.
3.17.6 Direct-current (DC) Propulsion Motors
3.17.6(a) Rotors. The rotors of DC propulsion motors are to be capable of withstanding overspeeding
up to the limit reached in accordance with the characteristics of the overspeed protection device at
its normal operational setting.
3.17.6(b) Overspeed Protection. An overspeed protection device is to be provided to prevent
excessive overspeeding of the propulsion motors due to light loads, loss of propeller, etc.
3.17.7 Electric Couplings

3.17.7(a) General. Couplings are to be enclosed ventilated or be provided with wire or mesh screen
to prevent personnel injury or the entrance of foreign material. All windings are to be specially
treated to resist moisture, oil and salt air.
3.17.7(b) Accessibility for Repairs. The coupling is to be designed to permit removal as a unit
without moving the engine. See also 4-6-5/3.15.2.
3.17.7(c) Temperature Rating. The limits of temperature rise are to be the same as for
alternating-current generators given in 4-6-4/Table 3, except that when a squirrel-cage element is
used, the temperature of this element may reach such values as are not injurious. Depending upon
the cooling arrangements, the maximum temperature rise may occur at other than full-load rating
so that heat runs will require special consideration. For this purpose, when an integral fan is fitted,
the coupling temperatures are not to exceed the limits in 4-6-4/Table 3 when operated continuously
at 70% of full-load rpm, full excitation and rated torque. Temperature rises for insulation materials
above 180°C (356°F) will be considered in accordance with 4-6-1/13.11.
3.17.7(d) Excitation. Excitation is to be provided as required for propulsion generators. See
4-6-4/3.21.1, 4-6-4/3.23.1 and 4-6-5/3.17.5(e).
3.17.7(e) Control Equipment. Electric-coupling control equipment is to be combined with the
prime mover speed and reversing control and is to include a two-pole disconnect switch, short-
circuit protection only, ammeter for reading coupling current, discharge resistor and interlocking
to prevent energizing the coupling when the prime mover control levers are in an inappropriate
position.
3.17.7(f) Nameplates. Nameplates of corrosion-resistant material are to be provided in an
accessible position of the electric coupling and are to contain the following typical details:
• Manufacturer’s name, serial number and frame designation
• Rated output and type of rating
• Ambient temperature range
• Rated voltage, speed and temperature rise
• Rated exciter voltage and current
3.17.8 Semiconductor Converters for Propulsion (2014)
Semiconductor converters are to comply with the requirements in 4-6-4/10.
3.17.9 Reactors and Transformers for Semiconductor Converters
3.17.9(a) General. Interphase reactors and transformers used with semiconductor converters are
to conform with the requirements of 4-6-4/9.1.1, 4-6-4/9.1.2(c), 4-6-4/9.3, 4-6-4/9.5.1 and 4-6-4/9.5.2,
and the following.
3.17.9(b) Voltage Regulation. Means to regulate transformer output voltage are to be provided to
take care of increase in converter forward resistance and, in addition, to obtain the necessary
performance characteristics of the converter unit in which the transformer is used.
3.17.9(c) High Temperature Alarm. Interphase reactors and transformers used with the
semiconductor converters for main and auxiliary propulsion systems are to be provided with high
temperature alarm at the switchboard or the propulsion control station. The setting value of the
alarm is to be determined by their specific insulation class and is not to exceed the temperature
corresponding to the limit listed in 4-6-4/Table 8.
3.17.10 Switches
3.17.10(a) General Design. All switches are to be arranged for manual operation and so designed
that they will not open under ordinary shock or vibration. Contactors, however, may be operated
pneumatically, by solenoids or other means in addition to the manual method which is to be provided,
unless otherwise approved.
3.17.10(b) Generator and Motor Switches. Switches for generators and motors are preferably to
be of the air-break type, but for alternating-current systems, where they are to be designed to open
full-load current at full voltage, oil-break switches using nonflammable liquid may be used if provided
with leak-proof, non-spilling tanks.
3.17.10(c) Field Switches. Where necessary, field switches are to be arranged for discharge resistors
unless discharge resistors are permanently connected across the field. For alternating-current systems,
means are to be provided for de-energizing the excitation circuits by the unbalance relay and ground
relay.
3.17.11 Propulsion Cables
3.17.11(a) Conductors. The conductors of cables external to the components of the propulsion
plant, other than cables and interconnecting wiring for computers, data loggers or other automation
equipment requiring currents of very small value, are to consist of not less than seven strands and
have a cross-sectional area of not less than 1.5 mm2 (2,960 circ. mils).
3.17.11(b) Insulation Materials. Ethylene-propylene rubber, cross-linked polyethylene or silicone
rubber insulated cables are to be used for propulsion power cables, except that polyvinyl chloride
insulated cables may be used where the normal ambient temperature will not exceed 50°C (122°F).
3.17.11(c) Braided Metallic Armor and Impervious Metallic Sheaths. Propulsion cables need not
have braided metallic armor nor impervious metallic sheaths. Where metallic sheaths are provided,
they are not to be used with single alternating current cables.
3.17.11(d) Inner Wiring. The insulation of internal wiring in main control gear, including
switchboard wiring, shall be of flame-retardant quality.
3.17.11(e) Testing. All propulsion cables, other than internal wiring in control gears and
switchboards, are to be subjected to dielectric and insulation tests in the presence of the Surveyor.
3.19 Dock and Sea Trials (2014)

Complete tests of the entire electric propulsion system are to be carried out during sea-trials including the
following:
i) Duration runs with the craft at full propulsion load.
ii) Maneuvering tests which should include a reversal of the craft from full speed ahead to full speed
astern during which important measurements such as system currents, voltages, speed, etc. shall
be recorded.
iii) Tests to check for operation of all protective devices, safety functions, alarms, indicators, control
modes and stability tests for control.
All tests necessary to demonstrate that major components of the electric propulsion plant and the system as
a whole are satisfactory for duty are to be performed. Immediately prior to trials, the insulation resistance
is to be measured and recorded.
5 Three-wire Dual-voltage DC System
5.1 Three-wire DC Craft’s Generators

Separate circuit-breaker poles are to be provided for the positive, negative, neutral and also for the equalizer
leads, unless protection is provided by the main poles. When equalizer poles are provided for the three-
wire generators, the overload trips are to be of the algebraic type. No overload trip is to be provided for the
neutral pole, but it is to operate simultaneously with the main poles. A neutral overcurrent relay and alarm
system is to be provided and set to function at a current value equal to the neutral rating.
5.3 Neutral Earthing

5.3.1 Main Switchboard
The neutral of three-wire dual-voltage direct-current systems is to be solidly earthed at the generator
switchboard with a zero-center ammeter in the earthing connection. The zero-center ammeter is to
have a full-scale reading of 150% of the neutral-current rating of the largest generator and be marked
to indicate the polarity of earth. The earth connection is to be made in such a manner that it will
not prevent checking the insulation resistance of the generator to earth before the generator is
connected to the bus. The neutrals of three-wire DC emergency power systems are to be earthed at
all times when they are supplied from the emergency generator or storage battery. The earthed
neutral conductor of a three-wire feeder is to be provided with a means for disconnecting and is to
be arranged so that the earthed conductor cannot be opened without simultaneously opening the
unearthed conductors.
5.3.2 Emergency Switchboard
No direct earth connection is to be provided at the emergency switchboard. The neutral bus or
buses are to be solidly and permanently connected to the neutral bus of the main switchboard. No
interrupting device is to be provided in the neutral conductor of the bus-tie feeder connecting the
two switchboards.
5.5 Size of Neutral Conductor

The capacity of the neutral conductor of a dual-voltage feeder is to be 100% of the capacity of the unearthed
conductors.
7 Electrical Plants of Less Than 75 kW
7.1 General
Electrical plants having an aggregate capacity of less than 75 kW are to comply with the following requirements
and the requirements in this Part 4, Chapter 6, as applicable – except 4-6-1/17, 4-6-2/1.3, 4-6-2/1.5, 4-6-2/3,
4-6-2/5, 4-6-2/7.1.6(b), 4-6-2/9.1.5, 4-6-2/11.5, 4-6-2/11.7, 4-6-2/13.3, 4-6-2/15, 4-6-2/17.1, 4-6-2/17.3,
4-6-2/19.3, 4-6-3/1.1, 4-6-3/3.9, 4-6-4/7.15.2, 4-6-4/13 and 4-6-5/1.
7.3 Standard Details

Standard wiring practices and details, including such items as cable supports, earthing details, bulkhead
and deck penetrations, cable joints and sealing, cable splicing, watertight and explosion-proof connections
to equipment, earthing and bonding connections, etc., as applicable, are to be indicated on the submitted plans
or may be submitted in a booklet format.
7.5 Calculations of Short-circuit Currents

In the absence of precise data, the following short circuit currents at the machine terminals are to be assumed:
7.5.1 Direct Current System
Ten times the full load current for generators normally connected (including spare) for each generator
capable of being simultaneously connected.
Six times full load current for motors simultaneously in service.
7.5.2 Alternating Current System
Ten times the full load current for generators normally connected (including spare) for each generator
capable of being simultaneously connected-symmetrical rms
Three times full load current of motors simultaneously in service.
7.7 Lightning Protection

For lighting protection systems, see 4-6-2/21 and 4-6-3/7.11.
7.9 Temperature Ratings

In the requirements contained in 4-6-5/7, an ambient temperature of 40°C (140°F) has been assumed for all
locations. Where the ambient temperature is in excess of this value, the total temperature specified is not to be
exceeded. Where equipment has been rated on ambient temperature less than that contemplated, consideration
will be given to the use of such equipment, provided the total temperature for which the equipment is rated
will not be exceeded.
7.11 Generators
Craft using electricity for propulsion auxiliaries or preservation of cargo are to be provided with at least
two generators. These generators are not to be driven by the same engine. The capacity of the generating
sets is to be sufficient to carry the necessary load essential for the propulsion and safety of the craft and
preservation of the cargo (if applicable) with any one generator set in reserve. Craft having only one
generator are to be provided with a battery source to supply sufficient lighting for safety.
7.13 Emergency Source of Power

7.13.1 Capacity
The emergency source of electrical power is to have adequate capacity to provide emergency
lighting for a period of at least six hours.
7.13.2 Sources
The emergency power source may be any of the following:
i) An automatically connected or manually controlled storage battery; or
ii) An automatically or manually started generator; or
iii) Relay-controlled, battery-operated lanterns.
7.13.3 Battery Sources
Where the source of electrical power is a battery connected to a charging device with an output of
more than 2 kW, the battery is to be located as near as practicable to, but not in the same space as,
the emergency switchboard, distribution board or panel.
7.15 Cable Construction

Cables are to have copper conductors constructed in accordance with a recognized standard and are to be
of the stranded type, except sizes not exceeding 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) may have solid conductors.
7.17 Switchboards, Distribution Boards and Panels

7.17.1 Installation
Switchboards, distribution box panels and panels are to be installed in dry, accessible and well-
ventilated areas. Not less than 610 mm (24 in.) clearance is to be provided in front of switchboards,
distribution box panels and panels. When located at the helm or other area adjacent to or part of an
open cockpit or weather deck, they are to be protected by a watertight enclosure.
A voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter and voltage regulator are to be provided for each generator
installed. Control equipment and measuring instruments are to be provided as necessary to insure
satisfactory operation of the generator or generators.
7.19 Navigation Running Lights

Mast head, port, starboard and stem lights, when required, are to be controlled by a running light indicator
panel. A fused-feeder disconnect switch is to be provided. The rating of the fuses is to be at least twice that
of the largest branch fuse and greater than the maximum panel load.
TABLE 1
High Voltage Equipment Locations and Minimum Degree of Protection (2014)
Switchboards, Distribution Boards, Motor Control Centers
and Controllers
Generators
Example Condition Motors
of of Transformers, Converters
Location Location Junction/Connection Boxes
Dry control rooms Danger of touching live IP32 N/A N/A IP23 IP44
Authorized Personnel Only parts only
Dry control rooms IP42 N/A N/A IP44 IP44
Control rooms Danger of dripping liquid IP32 N/A N/A IP23 IP44
Authorized Personnel Only and/or moderate mechanical
Control Rooms damage IP42 N/A N/A IP44 IP44
Above floor plates in machinery spaces IP32 IP23 IP23 IP23 IP44
Authorized Personnel Only (1)
Above floor plates in machinery spaces IP42 IP23 IP43 IP44 IP44
Emergency machinery rooms IP32 IP23 IP23 IP23 IP44
Authorized Personnel Only
Emergency machinery rooms IP42 IP23 IP43 IP44 IP44
Below floor plates in machinery spaces Increased danger of liquid N/A N/A * * IP44
Authorized Personnel Only and/or mechanical damage
Below floor plates in machinery spaces N/A N/A * N/A IP44
Ballast pump rooms Increased danger of liquid IP44 N/A IP44 IP44 IP44
Authorized Personnel Only and mechanical damage
Ballast pump rooms IP44 N/A IP44 IP44 IP44
Holds for general cargo Danger of liquid spray * * * * IP55
presence of cargo dust,
serious mechanical damage,
and/or aggressive fumes
Open decks (2) Not exposed to seas N/A IP56 IP56 IP56 IP56
(2)
Open decks Exposed to seas N/A N/A * * *
“*” indicates that equipment in excess of 1000 V is not normally permitted in these locations
Notes:
1 See 4-6-3/3.1.1 where the equipment is located within areas affected by local fixed pressure water-spraying or
water-mist fire extinguishing systems
2 For High Voltage Shore Connections (HVSC) see the requirements in the ABS Guide for High Voltage Shore
Connection
3 Where the IP rating of the high voltage electrical equipment has been selected on the basis that it is only accessible
to authorized personnel, the entrance doors to the spaces in which such equipment is located, are to be marked
accordingly.
PART Section 6: Specialized Craft and Services
4
SECTION 6 Specialized Craft and Services
1 Installations in Special-Category Spaces
1.1 Application
In addition to the foregoing requirements in this Section, the following requirements are applicable for
installations in special-category spaces.
Special category spaces are those enclosed spaces intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in
their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such vehicles can be driven, and to which
passengers have access, including spaces intended for the carriage of cargo vehicles.
1.3 Ventilation System

1.3.1 Arrangement
The ventilating system for special-category spaces is to be independent from other ventilation
systems and is to be capable of being controlled from a position outside the space.
1.3.2 Capacity
An effective power ventilation system of sufficient capacity to give at least 10 air changes per
hour while navigating and 20 air changes per hour at the quayside during vehicle loading and
unload operations is to be provided.
1.3.3 Fans
Exhaust fans are to be of non-sparking construction in accordance with 4-6-3/9.7.
1.3.4 Material and Arrangement of Ducts
Ventilation ducts, including dampers, are to be of steel. Ducts serving spaces capable of being
sealed are to be separated for such space.
1.3.5 Exhaust Inlet and Outlet
Inlet for exhaust ducts are to be located within 450 mm (17.75 in.) above the vehicle deck. The
outlet is to be sited in a safe position, having regard to the source of ignition near the outlet.
1.3.6 Emergency Shutdown
Arrangements are to be provided to permit a rapid shutdown and effective closure of the ventilation
system in case of fire, taking into account the weather and sea conditions. See also 4-6-6/1.3.1.
1.3.7 Operating Compartment Indication
Means are to be provided on the operating compartment or other appropriate locations to indicate
any loss of the ventilating capacity.
1.5 Location and Type of Equipment

1.5.1 Certified Safe Type Equipment
Except as provided for in 4-6-6/1.5.2 below, electrical equipment and wiring within the enclosed
vehicle spaces referred to in 4-6-6/1.3.1 are to be increased-safety, explosion-proof or intrinsically-
safe type.
Section 6 Specialized Vessels and Services 4-6-6
1.5.2 Arrangements
Except for a distance within 450 mm (17.75 in.) above the platform that does not have openings of
sufficient size permitting penetrations of petroleum gases downward, electrical equipment of a
type so enclosed and protected as to prevent the escape of sparks, e.g., protection degree of IP55
of equivalent
1.5.3 Equipment in Ducts from Vehicle Space
Electrical equipment and wiring installed within an exhaust duct are to be increased-safety,
explosion-proof or intrinsically-safe type.
4
SECTION 7 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) In Length
1 General
Electrical systems are to comply with a recognized standard acceptable to ABS. Examples of acceptable
standards are given below:
• ISO 10133 Small Craft – Electrical Systems – Extra-low-voltage DC installations
• ISO 13297 Small Craft – Electrical Systems – Alternating current installations
• ABYC, Section E-11 (AC and DC) AC and DC Electrical Systems on Boats
3 Interior Communication Systems and Manually Operated Alarms

Interior communication and Alarms systems complying with 4-6-2/15 and 4-6-2/17 are required except as
modified below:
• Craft which do not have below deck spaces are not required to have interior communication systems.
• Craft which have below deck spaces which are not normally occupied while in operations are not
required to have interior communication systems.
• Alternatives to the requirements of 4-6-2/15 and 4-6-2/17 will be considered provided they are shown
to be no less effective than the requirements of that Section.
5 Battery Starting Systems

Craft are to comply with 4-2-1/13.9. Alternatively where the propulsion engines can be started manually,
only one battery (battery bank) will be required.
PART Chapter 7: Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
4
CHAPTER 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 General Provisions ............................................................................ 319
1 Application ...................................................................................... 319
1.1 Scope .......................................................................................... 319
1.3 Propulsion and Maneuvering ....................................................... 319
3 Class Notations ............................................................................... 319
3.1 Craft Greater Than 500 GT ......................................................... 320
3.3 Periodical Survey ........................................................................ 320
5 Definitions ....................................................................................... 320
5.1 General Definitions ...................................................................... 320
5.3 Definitions for Computerized Systems ........................................ 322
7 Plans and Data ............................................................................... 322
7.1 Specifications .............................................................................. 322
7.3 System Design Plans .................................................................. 322
7.5 Control Console Plans ................................................................. 325
7.7 Installation Plans ......................................................................... 325
9 Conceptual Requirements for System Design ................................ 325
9.1 Fail-safe....................................................................................... 325
9.3 System Independence ................................................................. 325
9.5 Local Control ............................................................................... 325
9.7 Monitoring Systems ..................................................................... 325
9.9 Safety Systems ........................................................................... 326
9.11 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) ................................... 326
11 Power Supply .................................................................................. 326
11.1 General........................................................................................ 326
11.3 Electric......................................................................................... 326
11.5 Hydraulic ..................................................................................... 327
11.7 Pneumatic ................................................................................... 327
13 Automatic Safety Shutdown ............................................................ 327
SECTION 2 Remote Propulsion Control ............................................................... 328

1 Application ...................................................................................... 328
3 System Requirements..................................................................... 328
3.1 General........................................................................................ 328
3.3 System Design ............................................................................ 328
3.5 System Power Supply ................................................................. 328
5 Remote Propulsion Control on Navigation Bridge .......................... 329
5.1 General........................................................................................ 329
5.3 Propeller Control ......................................................................... 329
5.5 Ordered Speed and Direction ...................................................... 329
5.7 Emergency Shutdown.................................................................. 329
5.9 Starting of Propulsion Machinery ................................................. 329
5.11 Transfer Between Remote Control Stations ................................ 329
5.13 Failure of Propulsion Control or Failure of Control Transfer ........ 330
5.15 Critical Speeds of Propulsion Drives............................................ 330
5.17 Automatic Propulsion Controls .................................................... 330
5.19 Local Manual Control ................................................................... 330
5.21 Communications Systems ........................................................... 330
5.23 Station in Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge ............ 330
7 Remote Propulsion Control Station Other than Navigation
Bridge ..............................................................................................331
7.1 General ........................................................................................ 331
7.3 Propulsion Machinery Space ....................................................... 331
9 Propulsion and Associated Machinery Start-up ..............................331
11 Arrangement and Monitoring of Machinery Space .........................331
11.1 Bilges ........................................................................................... 331
11.3 Fire Prevention ............................................................................ 332
11.5 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems .............................................. 332
11.7 Fire Alarm Call Points .................................................................. 332
13 Safety System .................................................................................332
13.1 General ........................................................................................ 332
13.3 Safety System Alarms ................................................................. 332
13.5 Override of Safety System Functions .......................................... 332
13.7 Restart of Propulsion Machinery .................................................. 333
15 Equipment .......................................................................................333
15.1 Electrical Equipment .................................................................... 333
15.3 Computer Based Equipment ........................................................ 333
15.5 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Equipment ........................................... 333
15.7 Acceptance Tests ........................................................................ 333
TABLE 1 Instrumentation and Controllers on Remote Propulsion

Control Stations.....................................................................334
SECTION 3 ACCU Notation.................................................................................... 336

1 Application.......................................................................................336
3 System Requirements.....................................................................336
3.1 General ........................................................................................ 336
3.3 System Design ............................................................................ 336
3.5 System Power Supply.................................................................. 336
3.7 Supply and Arrangement ............................................................. 337
5 Location of Centralized Control Station ..........................................337
7 Remote Controls from Centralized Control Station.........................337
9 Monitoring in Centralized Control Station .......................................337
9.1 Instrumentation ............................................................................ 337
9.3 Operator Interface........................................................................ 337
9.5 Engineer’s Alarm ......................................................................... 337
11 Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge ............................... 338
13 Monitoring Station in the Engineers’ Quarters ................................ 338
13.1 Engineers’ Public Space and Engineers’ Cabins ......................... 338
13.3 Muting the Audible Alarms........................................................... 338
13.5 Communication ........................................................................... 338
15 Safety Systems ............................................................................... 338
15.1 General........................................................................................ 338
15.3 System Design ............................................................................ 338
15.5 Automatic Start and Changeover ................................................ 339
15.7 Automatic Slowdown ................................................................... 339
15.9 Automatic Shutdown ................................................................... 339
17 Specific Requirements for Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery ..... 339
17.1 Propulsion Diesel Engines........................................................... 339
17.3 Propulsion Gas Turbines ............................................................. 339
17.5 Automatic Starting of Propulsion Auxiliaries ................................ 339
17.7 Electric Propulsion ....................................................................... 339
17.9 Generators and Electrical Systems ............................................. 339
17.11 Propulsion Auxiliaries .................................................................. 340
19 Propulsion Machinery Space .......................................................... 340
19.1 Fuel Oil System Arrangements.................................................... 340
19.3 Bilge Level Monitoring ................................................................. 340
21 Fire Safety ....................................................................................... 341
21.1 Fire Fighting Station .................................................................... 341
21.3 Fire Main System ........................................................................ 341
21.5 Controls at Fire Fighting Station .................................................. 341
21.7 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems .............................................. 342
23 Equipment ....................................................................................... 342
TABLE 2 Instrumentation and Controllers in Centralized Control

Station – All Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery ................ 343
TABLE 3 Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Medium and
High Speed (Trunk Piston) Diesel Engines .......................... 345
Centralized Control Station – Propulsion
Gas Turbines......................................................................... 347
TABLE 5A Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Electric Propulsion ................. 348
TABLE 5B Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in
Centralized Control Station – Generator
Prime Mover for Electric Propulsion...................................... 350
Centralized Control Station – Auxiliary Turbines
and Diesel Engines ............................................................... 352
TABLE 7 Monitoring of Auxiliary Prime-movers and Electrical
Generators ............................................................................ 354
SECTION 4 Craft Classed with ABCU Notation...................................................... 355
1 General ...........................................................................................355
3 Station in the Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge.........355
5 Centralized Monitoring Station ........................................................355
7 Communications .............................................................................355
9 Sea Trials ........................................................................................355
SECTION 5 Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than

24 meters (79 feet) .............................................................................. 356
1 General ...........................................................................................356
3 Definitions .......................................................................................356
5 Required Plans and Data ................................................................356
7 Electrical Cables and Console Wiring .............................................356
9 Alarms .............................................................................................357
11 Safety System .................................................................................357
13 Propulsion .......................................................................................357
15 Propulsion-machinery Spaces ........................................................357
15.1 Fire Protection ............................................................................. 357
15.3 Protection Against Flooding ......................................................... 357
17 Operating Compartment .................................................................357
TABLE 8 Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment

(Applicable to craft complying with 4-7-5/17) ........................358
SECTION 6 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length ................................. 359
1 General ...........................................................................................359
3 Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment .....................359
5 Start in Gear Protection ..................................................................359
SECTION 7 Installation, Tests and Trials ............................................................. 360

1 General ...........................................................................................360
3 Equipment Locations ......................................................................360
3.1 Electromagnetic Avoidance ......................................................... 360
3.3 Moisture Condensation ................................................................ 360
3.5 Signal Cables Installation ............................................................ 360
5 Sea Trials ........................................................................................360
5.1 Propulsion Remote Control .......................................................... 360
5.3 Local Manual Control ................................................................... 361
5.5 Craft Receiving ACCU or ABCU Notation ................................... 361
SECTION 8 Computer-based Systems ................................................................. 362

1 Application.......................................................................................362
3 Systems Requirements ...................................................................362
3.1 System Security ........................................................................... 362
3.3 Program and Memory Data ......................................................... 362
3.5 Start-up After Power Failure ........................................................ 362
3.7 Self-Monitoring ............................................................................ 362
3.9 Power Supply .............................................................................. 362
3.11 System Independence ................................................................. 362
3.13 Response Time ........................................................................... 362
3.15 Fail-safe....................................................................................... 363
3.17 Modifications ............................................................................... 363
5 Additional Requirements for Integrated Systems ........................... 363
5.1 General........................................................................................ 363
5.3 Component Independence .......................................................... 363
5.5 Data Communication ................................................................... 363
7 Hardware......................................................................................... 364
7.1 Design for Ease of Maintenance ................................................. 364
7.3 User Interface and Input Devices ................................................ 364
7.5 Visual Display Unit ...................................................................... 364
7.7 Graphical Display ........................................................................ 365
7.9 Wireless Data Communication .................................................... 365
9 Tests and Evidence ........................................................................ 366
9.1 System Categories ...................................................................... 366
9.3 Tests ........................................................................................... 366
TABLE 1 Assignment to System Categories by Effects of Failure ....... 367

TABLE 2 Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance ............................ 368
SECTION 8 Appendix 1 – Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and

Evidence of Quality Assurance in 4-7-8/Table 3 .............................. 369
1 Evidence of Quality System ............................................................ 369
1.1 Quality Plan for Software ............................................................. 369
1.3 Inspection of Components (Only Hardware) from
Sub-suppliers .............................................................................. 369
1.5 Quality Control in Production ....................................................... 369
1.7 Final Test Reports ....................................................................... 369
1.9 Traceability of Software ............................................................... 369
3 Hardware and Software Description ............................................... 369
3.1 Software Description ................................................................... 369
3.3 Hardware Description .................................................................. 369
3.5 Failure Analysis for Safety Related Functions Only
(For Example FMEA) ................................................................... 370
5 Evidence of Software Testing ......................................................... 370
5.1 Evidence of Software Testing According to Quality Plan ............. 370
5.3 Analysis Regarding Existence and Fulfillment of Programming
Procedures for Safety Related Functions .................................... 370
7 Hardware Tests ............................................................................... 370
7.1 Type Tests................................................................................... 370
9 Software Tests ................................................................................ 370
9.1 Module Tests ............................................................................... 370
9.3 Subsystem Tests ......................................................................... 370
9.5 System Tests............................................................................... 370
11 Performance Tests ..........................................................................371
11.1 Integration Tests .......................................................................... 371
11.3 Fault Simulation ........................................................................... 371
11.5 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) ................................................... 371
13 On-board Tests ...............................................................................371
13.1 Complete System Test ................................................................ 371
13.3 Integration Tests .......................................................................... 371
13.5 Wireless Data Communication Tests ........................................... 371
15 Modifications ...................................................................................371
15.1 Tests After Modifications ............................................................. 371
SECTION 9 Equipment ........................................................................................... 372

1 Application.......................................................................................372
3 Environmental Test Conditions .......................................................372
5 Environmentally Controlled Space ..................................................372
7 Electric and Electronic Equipment ..................................................372
9 Hydraulic Equipment .......................................................................372
11 Pneumatic Equipment .....................................................................372
13 Installations .....................................................................................373
13.1 General ........................................................................................ 373
13.3 Ranges in Ambient Temperatures ............................................... 373
13.5 Electromagnetic and Conducted Interference .............................. 373
13.7 Shielded Cables........................................................................... 373
13.9 Electrical Grounding .................................................................... 373
13.11 Condensation .............................................................................. 373
13.13 Cold Environment ........................................................................ 373
13.15 Protection Against Falling Liquids or Leakage of Fluid
Medium ........................................................................................ 373
13.17 Measuring and Sensing Devices ................................................. 374
13.19 Marking ........................................................................................ 374
15 Equipment Tests .............................................................................374
15.1 Prototype Environmental Testing ................................................. 374
15.3 Production Unit Certification ........................................................ 374
15.5 Type Approval Program ............................................................... 374
TABLE 9 Type Tests for Control, Monitoring and Safety

Equipment .............................................................................375
TABLE 10 Tests for Unit Certification of Control, Monitoring and
Safety Equipment ..................................................................382
FIGURE 1 Test Set-up for Conducted Low Frequency Test

(See Test No. 13 of 4-7-9/Table 9) .......................................381
PART Section 1: General Provisions
4
SECTION 1 General Provisions
1 Application
1.1 Scope
The installation of machinery and monitoring of the propulsion-machinery space in high-speed craft is to
be so arranged to permit the normal operation of the craft with the propulsion machinery space unattended.
The requirements contained in this Chapter are in addition to those in other Chapters of these Rules.
The following table indicates the applicability of the relevant requirements:
Craft's Length (L) Gross Tonnage (GT) Gross Tonnage (GT)

Under 500 500 or over
L < 24 m (79 ft) Use Section 4-7-6 N/A
24 m (79 ft) ≤ L ≤ 46 m (150 ft) Use Section 4-7-5 Use Sections 4-7-1 through. 4-7-4 as
applicable
L > 46 m (150 ft) Use Section 4-7-5 Use Part 4, Section 9 of the Steel
Vessel Rules
Consideration will be given to craft of special design, such as surface effect craft, air cushion craft, etc.,
upon submission of manufacturer’s specification and drawings.
1.3 Propulsion and Maneuvering

Provisions of this Section are applicable:
i) Where it is intended that the propulsion machinery space be periodically unmanned and where it is
intended that the propulsion machinery be directly controlled from the operating compartment on
the navigation bridge or from any remote propulsion control station adjacent to or outside the
propulsion machinery space; or
ii) Where, in lieu of manning the propulsion machinery space locally, it is intended to monitor it and
to control and monitor the propulsion and auxiliary machinery from a continuously manned
centralized control station.
3 Class Notations
Control and monitoring systems for propulsion, and monitoring systems for propulsion-machinery space
that comply with the relevant requirements of this Chapter will be distinguished in the Record as follows.
A certificate indicating the degree of automation, particulars and operating limitations, if any, will be
issued. A notation preceded by À (Maltese cross) signifies that the installations have been assembled and
installed under survey by the Surveyor. A notation without À (Maltese cross) signifies that pertinent control
and monitoring systems have not been assembled and installed under survey, but have subsequently been
surveyed and satisfactorily reported upon by the Surveyor.
Chapter 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation
Section 1 General Provisions 4-7-1
3.1 Craft Greater Than 500 GT

3.1.1· ACCU Notation
Control and monitoring systems complying with Section 4-7-3 will be distinguished in the Record
by the notation ACCU.
3.1.2· ABCU Notation
Control and monitoring systems complying with Section 4-7-4 will be distinguished in the Record
by the notation ABCU.
Note: ACCU or ABCU notation may be granted to craft of less than 500 GT, provided that the applicable requirements
in Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-4 of this Chapter are met.
3.3 Periodical Survey

The continuance of validity of these notations is subject to periodical survey of the propulsion remote
control and automation systems as outlined in Section 7-8-2 of the ABS Rules for Survey After Construction
(Part 7).
5 Definitions
5.1 General Definitions

5.1.1 Alarm
Visual and audible signals indicating an abnormal condition of a monitored parameter.
5.1.2 Control
The process of conveying a command or order to enable the desired action to be effected.
5.1.3 Control System
An assembly of devices interconnected or otherwise coordinated to convey the command or order.
5.1.4 Automatic Control
A means of control that conveys predetermined orders without action by an operator.
A system designed to measure and to display the state of a monitored parameter and which may
include one or more of sensors, read-outs, displays, alarms and means of signal transmission.
5.1.6 Local Control
A device or array of devices located on or adjacent to a machine to enable it to be operated within
sight of the operator.
5.1.7 Remote Control
A device or array of devices connected to a machine by mechanical, electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic
or other means and by which the machine may be operated remote from, and not necessarily within
sight of, the operator.
5.1.8 Remote Control Station
A location fitted with means of remote control and monitoring.
5.1.9 Monitoring System
A system designed to supervise the operational status of machinery or systems by means of
instrumentation, which provides displays of operational parameters and alarms indicating abnormal
operating conditions.
5.1.10 Safety System

An automatic control system designed to automatically lead machinery being controlled to a
predetermined less critical condition in response to a fault which may endanger the machinery or
the safety of personnel and which may develop too fast to allow manual intervention.
To protect an operating machine in the event of a detected fault, the automatic control system may
be designed to automatically:
i) Slow down the machine or to reduce its demand;
ii) Start a standby support service so that the machine may resume normal operation; or
iii) Shut down the machine.
For the purposes of this Chapter, automatic shutdown, automatic slowdown and automatic start of
standby pump are all safety system functions. Where “safety system” is stated hereinafter, it means
any or all three automatic control systems.
5.1.11 Emergency Shutdown Systems
Systems intended for manual activation in an emergency to stop a particular system’s function or
machinery operation.
5.1.12 Fail-safe
A designed failure state which has the least critical consequence. A system or a machine is fail-
safe when, upon the failure of a component or subsystem or its functions, the system or the machine
automatically reverts to a designed state of least critical consequence.
5.1.13 Systems Independence
Systems are considered independent where they do not share components such that a single failure
in any one component in a system will not render the other systems inoperative.
5.1.14 Propulsion Machinery
Propulsion machinery includes the propulsion prime mover, reduction gear, clutch, and controllable
pitch propellers, as applicable.
5.1.15 Unmanned Propulsion Machinery Space
Propulsion machinery space which can be operated without continuous attendance by the crew
locally in the machinery space and in the centralized control station.
5.1.16 Centralized Control Station
A propulsion control station fitted with instrumentation, control systems and actuators to enable
propulsion and auxiliary machinery be controlled and monitored, and the state of propulsion machinery
space to be monitored, without the need for regular local attendance in the propulsion machinery
space.
5.1.17 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
A failure analysis methodology used during design to postulate every failure mode and the
corresponding effect or consequences. Generally, the analysis is to begin by selecting the lowest
level of interest (part, circuit, or module level). The various failure modes that can occur for each
item at this level are identified and enumerated. The effect for each failure mode, taken singly and
in turn, is to be interpreted as a failure mode for the next higher functional level. Successive
interpretations will result in the identification of the effect at the highest function level, or the final
consequence. A tabular format is normally used to record the results of such a study.
5.1.18 Vital Auxiliary Pumps
Vital auxiliary pumps are that directly related to and necessary for maintaining the operation of
propulsion machinery. For diesel propulsion engines, fuel oil pump, lubricating oil pump, cooling
water pumps are examples of vital auxiliary pumps.
5.1.19 Summary-alarm
A common alarm activated by any abnormal condition of the monitored machinery or system.
5.1.20 Operating Compartment

The enclosed area from which the navigation and control of the craft is exercised.
5.1.21 Integrated Propulsion Machinery
A propulsion machinery having its auxiliaries (fuel oil pumps, cooling water pumps, etc.), necessary
for normal operation driven by the engine, the reduction gear or the propulsion shaft.
5.3 Definitions for Computerized Systems

5.3.1 Computer Based System
A system of one or more microprocessors, associated software, peripherals and interfaces.
5.3.2 Integrated System
A combination of computer based systems, which are interconnected in order to allow communication
between computer systems; between computer systems and monitoring, control, and craft management
systems; and to allow centralized access to information and/or command/control. For example, an
integrated system may consist of systems capable of performing passage execution (e.g., steering,
speed control, traffic surveillance, voyage planning); machinery management and control (e.g., power
management, machinery monitoring, fuel oil/lubrication oil transfer); cargo operations (e.g., cargo
monitoring, inert gas generation, loading/discharging); etc.
5.3.3 Interface
A transfer point at which information is exchanged. Examples of interfaces include: input/output
interface (for interconnection with sensors and actuators); communications interface (to enable serial
communications/networking with other computers or peripherals).
5.3.4 Peripheral
A device performing an auxiliary function in the system, e.g. printer, data storage device.
7 Plans and Data

The following plans and data are to be submitted for review, as applicable.
7.1 Specifications
A general description of the operation of the system is to be given. This is to include a list of monitoring
points, their alarm settings and their normal ranges.
7.3 System Design Plans

7.3.1 Propulsion Remote Control System
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for the following items:
• Propulsion control (e.g., from operating compartment on navigation bridge, centralized control
station, etc.)
• Control transfer
• Independent local manual control
• Starting of propulsion machinery
• Critical speeds
• Shaft turning gear
• Propulsion manual emergency shutdown
• Operating compartment/Navigation bridge instrumentation
• Communications systems
7.3.2 Propulsion Machinery Control from the Centralized Control Station

Operational descriptions for the following items:
• Propulsion gas turbines
• Propulsion diesel engines
• Electric propulsion
7.3.3 Propulsion Machinery Safety System
Operational descriptions for the following items:
• Initiation of automatic shutdown
• Initiation of automatic slowdown
• Initiation of automatic starting of standby units
• Override of automatic shutdown
• Override of automatic slowdown
• Re-start of propulsion machinery
7.3.4 Propulsion Machinery Monitoring System
Description of monitoring systems including a list of alarms and displays including preset parameters
for the following items:
• Centralized control station alarm and instrumentation
• Operating compartment/Navigation bridge instrumentation
• Monitoring station in the engineer’s accommodation
7.3.5 Generator Prime Mover Remote Control Systems
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for remote control, monitoring and safety systems
of generator prime movers including, but not limited to, the a list of alarms and displays, initiation
of automatic shutdown, automatic changeover of prime mover auxiliaries, preset parameter, etc.,
at each of the following control stations, as applicable:
• Centralized control station
• Operating compartment/Navigation bridge
• Monitoring station in engineer’s accommodation
7.3.6 Electrical Power Generating System
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for remote control and monitoring and displays
at each of the control stations indicated in 4-7-1/7.3.5, as applicable, along with a description of
the power management systems.
7.3.7 Remote Auxiliary Machinery Control Systems
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions for the following auxiliary machinery controls:
• Controls from centralized control station
• Control of electric generators, including automatic starting of electric generator and electric
power management system
• Control of auxiliary machinery
• Automatic starting of vital auxiliary pumps
7.3.8 Failure Modes and Effect Analysis (FMEA)

Information containing at least the following is to be submitted for review:
• System block diagrams showing system breakdown and components of interests.
• A tabulation of the following:
- Systems and components of interests
- Potential failures
- Failure detection
- Responses of the system to the failures
- Possible consequences of failure
- Conclusions, comments or recommendations
7.3.9 Fire Safety Arrangements
Schematic diagrams and descriptions of the fire detection and alarm systems, fire precautions, fire
extinguishing equipment, and fire fighting station arrangements.
7.3.10 Communication Systems
Schematic diagrams and arrangements of internal communication systems.
7.3.11 Power Supply Arrangements
Schematic diagrams and operational descriptions of power supply to the control, monitoring and
safety systems.
7.3.12 Computer-based Systems
The following are to be submitted as appropriate:
• Block diagram showing system configuration including user interface, description of hardware
specifications, hardware FMEA, fail-safe features, security arrangements, power supply, systems
(control, monitoring and safety shutdown) independence.
• Software logic flow chart, description of software functions, self-test features, response time
in respect of design data volume and CPU capability, data communication protocol (for integrated
systems), documentation on quality standard of software development and testing.
7.3.13 Wireless Data Communication Equipment
The following documentation is to be submitted for wireless data communication equipment.
i) Documentation which demonstrates that the wireless data communication equipment provides
an improvement in the safety of the vessel, compared to wired data communication. See
4-7-8/7.9.3.
ii) General details of the wireless system and equipment.
iii) Risk analysis. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(a).
iv) Evidence of type testing. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(b).
v) On-board test schedule. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(c).
vi) Details of manufacturers recommended installation and maintenance practices. Network
plan with arrangement and type of antennas and identification of location. Details of the
wireless data communication network. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(d).
vii) Specification of wireless communication system protocols and management functions.
See 4-7-8/7.9.3(e).
viii) Details of radio-frequency and power levels. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(f).
ix) For functions that are provided with an alternative means of control, a description of the
functions and a description of the alternative means of control. See 4-7-8/7.9.3(g).
7.5 Control Console Plans

Schematic diagrams, parts list (including manufacturer’s names and model names), function descriptions,
construction plans and outline view of the following equipment:
• Operating compartment/Navigation bridge console
• Centralized control and monitoring console
7.7 Installation Plans

7.7.1 Installation Arrangements
Locations of centralized control station (if provided) and remote control stations in the operating
compartment on the navigation bridge; arrangements of the centralized control station containing
control consoles and other equipment, including glass windows, doors, and ventilation fitting, as
applicable.
7.7.2 Electrical One-line Diagrams
Type, size and protection of cables between control and monitoring equipment.
9 Conceptual Requirements for System Design

The following are conceptual requirements for control system design in general and are to be complied
with except where specially exempted.
9.1 Fail-safe
Fail-safe concept is to be applied to the design of all remote control systems, manual emergency control
systems and safety systems. In consideration of its application, due regard is to be given to safety of individual
machinery, the system of which the machinery forms a part, and the craft as a whole.
9.3 System Independence

Systems performing different functions (e.g., monitoring systems, control systems and safety systems) are
to be, as much as practicable, independent of each other such that a single failure in one will not render the
others inoperative. Specifically, the shutdown function of the safety system is to be independent of control
and monitoring systems. However, except for the shutdown functions and automatic start/ changeover of
the required pumps [see 4-7-4/13.3ii)], common sensors will be acceptable for all other functions.
9.5 Local Control

In general, local manual controls are to be fitted to enable safe operation during commissioning and
maintenance, and to allow for effective control in the event of an emergency or failure of remote control.
The fitting of remote controls is not to compromise the level of safety and operability of the local controls
9.7 Monitoring Systems

Monitoring systems are to have the following detail features.
9.7.1 Independence of Visual and Audible Alarm Circuits
As much as practicable, a fault in the visual alarm circuits is not to affect the operation of the audible
alarm circuits.
9.7.2 Audible Alarms
Audible alarms associated with machinery are to be distinct from other alarms, such as fire alarm,
general alarm, gas detection alarm, etc., and are to be of sufficient loudness to attract the attention
of duty personnel. For spaces of unusual high noise level, a beacon light or similar, installed in a
conspicuous place may supplement the audible alarm in such spaces; however, red light beacons
are only to be used for fire alarms.
9.7.3 Visual Alarms

Visual alarms are to be a flashing signal when first activated. The flashing display is to change to a
steady display upon acknowledgment. The steady display is to remain activated, either individually
or in the summarized fashion, until the fault condition is rectified. Other arrangements capable of
attracting the operator’s attention to an alarm condition in an effective manner will be considered.
9.7.4 Acknowledgment of Alarms
Newly activated alarms are to be acknowledged by manual means. This means is to mute the
audible signal and change the flashing visual display to steady display. Other alarm conditions,
occurring during the process of acknowledgment, are to be alarmed and displayed. The latter
alarm is not to be suppressed by the acknowledgment of the former alarm.
The acknowledgment of the alarm at an associated remote control station is not to mute and steady
the same alarm signals at the centralized control station.
9.7.5 Temporarily Disconnecting Alarms
Alarm circuits may be temporarily disabled, for example for maintenance purposes, provided that
such action is clearly indicated at the associated station in control and at the centralized control
station, if fitted. For ACCU fire alarm systems, see 4-7-3/21.7.
9.7.6 Built-in Alarm Testing
Audible alarms and visual alarm indicating lamps are to be provided with means of testing that
can be operated without disrupting the normal operation of the monitoring systems.
9.7.7 Self-Monitoring
Monitoring system is to include a self-monitoring mechanism such that a fault (e.g., power failure,
sensor failure, etc.) may be detected and alarmed.
9.9 Safety Systems

In addition to complying with 4-7-1/9.1 through 4-7-1/9.7, safety systems are also to comply with the
following:
i) Means are to be provided to indicate the cause of the safety action.
ii) Alarms are to be given in the operating compartment on the navigation bridge, at the centralized
control station and at the local manual control position, as applicable, upon the activation of safety
system.
iii) Propulsion machinery shutdown by safety system is not to be designed to restart automatically,
unless first actuated by a manual reset.
iv) Safety system for the protection of one machine unit is to be independent of that of the other units.
9.11 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)

Failure modes and effects analysis (FMEA) may be carried out during system design to investigate if any
single failure in control systems would lead to undesirable consequences such as loss of propulsion, loss of
propulsion control, etc. The analysis may be qualitative or quantitative.
11 Power Supply
11.1 General
Power source for control, monitoring and safety systems may be electric, hydraulic or pneumatic or a
combination thereof. Each power supply is to be monitored and its failure is to be alarmed.
11.3 Electric
Where the power supply is electric, each of the control, monitoring and safety systems is to be supplied by
a separate circuit. Each of these circuits is to be protected for short circuit and monitored for voltage failure.
11.5 Hydraulic
Where the power supply is hydraulic, hydraulic pumps are to be fitted in duplicate. The reservoir is to be
of sufficient capacity to contain all the fluid when drained from the system, maintain the fluid level at an
effective working level and allow air and foreign matter to separate out. The pump suctions are to be sized
and positioned to prevent cavitation or starvation of pump. A duplex filter, which can be cleaned without
interrupting the oil supply, is to be fitted on the discharge side of pumps. The hydraulic fluid is to be
suitable for its intended operation. Hydraulic supplies to safety and control systems may be derived from
the same source but are to be by means of separate lines.
11.7 Pneumatic
Compressed air for control and monitoring systems is to be supplied from at least two air compressors. The
starting air system, where consisting of two air compressors, may be used for this purpose. The system is
to be arranged such that a single failure will not result in the loss of air supply. The required air pressure is
to be automatically maintained.
Means are to be provided to assure that the compressed air for control and monitoring systems is clean, dry
and oil-free to a specification compatible with the control and monitoring equipment. In this regard, the
compressors, cooling equipment, filters and dryers are to be selected and arranged as necessary to ensure
the quality of the air supplied will comply with the standards or criteria identified by the manufacturers of
the pneumatic equipment being installed in the system (e.g., max. solid particle size/density, max. dew
point, max. oil content, etc.).
Air supplies to safety systems and control systems may be derived from the same source, but are to be by
separate lines incorporating shutoff valves.
13 Automatic Safety Shutdown

To avert rapid deterioration of propulsion and auxiliary machinery, the following automatic shutdowns are
to be provided, regardless of the mode of control: manual, remote or automatic. These shutdowns are not to
be fitted with manual override.
i) For all diesel engines:
• Overspeed
ii) For all gas turbines (see 4-2-3/Table 1 of the Steel Vessel Rules):
• Failure of lubricating oil system
• Failure of flame or ignition
• High exhaust gas temperature
• High compressor vacuum
• Overspeed
• Excessive vibration
• Excessive axial displacement of rotors
iii) For propulsion reduction gears:
• Shutdown prime movers upon failure of reduction gear lubricating oil system.
iv) For generators:
• For generators fitted with forced lubrication system only: shutdown prime movers upon
failure of generator lubricating oil system (see 4-6-4/3.15).
v) For propulsion DC motor
• Overspeed
PART Section 2: Remote Propulsion Control
4
SECTION 2 Remote Propulsion Control
1 Application
The requirements in this Section apply to craft capable of operating the craft from the operating compartment
on the navigation bridge but because of their compact propulsion-machinery space design are not fitted
with the means to control the propulsion and its associated machinery from a centralized location within or
adjacent to the propulsion-machinery space. Where the propulsion machinery space is continuously manned,
these requirements may be varied in accordance with the requirements of the Flag Administration.
3 System Requirements
3.1 General
The remote propulsion control station within the operating compartment is to be:
i) As effective as local control;
ii) Provided with control of speed and direction of thrust of the propeller; and
iii) Provided with instrumentation sufficient to provide the operator with information about the state
of the propulsion machinery and the control system itself.
3.3 System Design

In general, conceptual requirements in 4-7-1/9 are to be applied. Further requirements are provided in
4-7-2/5 through 4-7-2/9 hereunder.
Note: The notation ABCU may be assigned to a craft which complies with the requirements in Section 4-7-4 in addition
to 4-7-2/5 through 4-7-2/9.
3.5 System Power Supply

3.5.1 General
Power supply requirements provided in 4-7-1/11, as applicable, are to be complied with. If electric,
the power supply to each of the control, monitoring and safety systems is to be individually monitored.
3.5.2 Power Supply Failure
In the event of failure of the power supply the following are to be effected:
• Operate an alarm at the operating compartment on navigation bridge and at the local manual
station or the centralized control station, if fitted; and
• The propulsion prime movers are to continue to operate at the last ordered speed and the
propellers at the last ordered direction of thrust until local control is in operation or control
power is safely resumed.
Section 2 Remote Propulsion Control 4-7-2
5 Remote Propulsion Control on Navigation Bridge
5.1 General
Where propulsion machinery is to be controlled from the operating compartment on the navigation bridge,
means for control and monitoring are to be as provided in 4-7-2/Table 1. The following control and monitoring
features are also to be provided. These requirements do not apply to bridge wing propulsion control stations.
5.3 Propeller Control

The speed, direction of thrust and, where applicable, the pitch of the propeller, are to be fully controllable
from the operating compartment on the navigation bridge under all sailing conditions, including maneuvering.
The control is to be performed by a single control device for each independent propeller, with automatic
performance of all associated services, including, where necessary, means of preventing overload of the
propulsion machinery. Where multiple propellers are designed to operate simultaneously, they may be
controlled by one control device.
5.5 Ordered Speed and Direction

When under navigation bridge control, ordered speed and direction of propulsion machinery, including
pitch of propellers, where applicable, are to be indicated at the local propulsion machinery control position,
and at the centralized control station if fitted.
5.7 Emergency Shutdown

A manually operated emergency-stopping device for the propulsion machinery is to be provided on the
navigation bridge. This device is to be independent of the remote propulsion control system. The shutdown
may only be activated by the deliberate action of the operator and is to be so arranged as to prevent its
inadvertent operation.
5.9 Starting of Propulsion Machinery

Where it is necessary to restart the propulsion machinery in order to reverse it to go astern, means to start
the propulsion machinery is to be provided on the navigation bridge. In such cases, and in other cases
where propulsion machinery can be started from a remote control station, the following are to be provided:
i) An alarm to indicate a low level starting medium energy condition, e.g., a low starting air pressure,
which is to be set at a level to permit further starting operation.
ii) A display to indicate starting medium energy level, e.g., starting air pressure.
iii) Where automatic starting of the propulsion machinery is fitted, the number of consecutive automatic
attempts is to be limited in order to safeguard sufficient capacity for local manual starting.
iv) Starting of the propulsion machinery is to be automatically inhibited where conditions exist which
may damage the propulsion machinery (e.g., shaft-turning gear engaged, insufficient lubricating
oil pressure, etc.). The activation of such inhibition is to be alarmed at the remote control station.
5.11 Transfer Between Remote Control Stations

Remote control of the propulsion machinery is to be possible only from one location at a time. At each
location there is to be an indicator showing which location is in control of the propulsion machinery. The
following protocol is to be observed for transfer of control between stations:
i) The transfer of propulsion control between stations is to take effect only with acknowledgment
by the receiving station. This, however, does not apply to transfer of control between the centralized
control station and the local manual control.
ii) The transfer of propulsion control between the operating compartment on the navigation bridge
and the propulsion machinery space is to be possible only in the propulsion machinery space (i.e.,
at either the centralized control station or the local manual control position).
iii) The centralized control station is to be capable of assuming propulsion control at any time or
blocking orders from other remote control stations. However, where special operating requirements
of the craft prevail, override control over the centralized control station will be considered.
iv) Transfer of control between stations should be accomplished smoothly and control of the controlled
equipment is to be maintained during the transfer.
5.13 Failure of Propulsion Control or Failure of Control Transfer

In the event of failure of the propulsion control system or failure of control transfer, the propulsion units
are to continue to operate at the last ordered speed and direction of thrust of the propellers until local control
is in operation or control power is safely resumed. However, considerations will be given to special cases,
where due to the intended craft’s propulsion design and operational requirements, it may be necessary to
automatically bring the craft to slow speed without hazarding passengers or the craft.
5.15 Critical Speeds of Propulsion Drives

Adequate means are to be provided at the remote propulsion control station to alert the station operator of
operation of the propulsion drives within barred speed ranges.
5.17 Automatic Propulsion Controls

Automatic propulsion control systems are to be designed to maintain the controlled machinery within preset
parameters and to ensure the machinery operation in the correct sequence and time intervals. Deviation
from these preset conditions is to force the sequential controls to a safe sequence stage that will not be
detrimental to the propulsion machinery and overall safety of the craft. Additionally, the automatic propulsion
control system is to be designed and arranged so that a failure in the system is not to compromise the
integrity nor the manual operation of the propulsion machinery.
5.19 Local Manual Control

Means are to be provided for local manual control so that satisfactory operation of the propulsion machinery
can be exercised in the event of the failure of the remote propulsion control system. For this purpose, indicators
for propeller speed and direction of rotation (for fixed pitch propellers) or pitch position (for controllable
pitch propellers) are to be provided at this local manual control station. The means of communication, as
required by 4-6-2/15, is to be fitted at this manual control station.
It is also to be possible to control auxiliary machinery, which are essential for propulsion and safety of the
craft, at or near the machinery concerned.
5.21 Communications Systems

For communication systems associated with propulsion control stations, the requirements in 4-6-2/15 are
applicable.
5.23 Station in Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge

Effective control of the propulsion machinery from the operating compartment, is to be performed with
automatic performance of all associated functions, including, where necessary, means of preventing overload
of the propulsion machinery. The required means for automatic control to operate the propulsion machinery
is to be capable of meeting load demands from standby to full system rated load under all operating conditions,
without the need for manual adjustment or manipulation.
The operating compartment control station is to include the controls, displays and alarms as required in
4-7-2/Table 1. In addition, the following controls arranged for easy reach of the crew member for use in an
emergency are to be provided at the operating compartment:
i) Stopping the main propulsion and auxiliary machinery. The stopping device for the main propulsion
is to be independent of the navigation bridge control system.
ii) Disconnecting all electrical power sources from the normal power distribution system (the operating
control is be so arranged to preclude its inadvertent or careless operation).
iii) Stopping the machinery-space ventilation blowers and closing of openings.
iv) Stopping all fuel-oil pumps and forced-draft blowers.

v) If provided, closing machinery-space skylights.
vi) Closing machinery-space watertight and fire resistant doors.
vii) Closing propulsion-machinery space fuel oil tanks suction valves.
viii) Starting the emergency generator or connecting a source of emergency power, unless automatic
operation is provided.
ix) Means for starting any one of the fire pumps (inclusive of the one located outside the propulsion
machinery space) including associated valves necessary to deliver required capacity to the fire main.
x) Releasing of the fire-fighting media for the propulsion-machinery space. This release is to be manual
and not initiated automatically by signals from the fire-detecting system.
7 Remote Propulsion Control Station Other than Navigation Bridge
7.1 General
Where a remote propulsion control station is provided at a location other than the navigation bridge, such
station is to comply with requirements applicable to that at the navigation bridge, with the exception of the
provision of a telegraph.
7.3 Propulsion Machinery Space

Where a remote propulsion control station is provided in or in the vicinity of the propulsion machinery
space to supplement the operation of a locally manned propulsion machinery space, such a station is to be
fitted with:
• Remote propulsion control station as in 4-7-2/7.1;
• Alarms, displays and controls as required in 4-7-3/Table 2; and
• Alarms and displays of 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 6, as applicable.
9 Propulsion and Associated Machinery Start-up

Starting of the propulsion and associated machinery or preparing the engines for sea may be performed
manually, but if done automatically this is to be programmed that the propulsion machinery cannot be started
until all engine auxiliaries are functioning correctly.
11 Arrangement and Monitoring of Machinery Space
11.1 Bilges
11.1.1 General
The propulsion-machinery space is to be provided with a bilge water-level system to detect excessive
water influx or rise in the propulsion-machinery space bilges, at the various angles of craft’s heel
and trim; the bilge wells are to be large enough to accommodate the normal drainage. Excessive
water influx or rise in the bilge wells is to be alarmed at the centralized control and monitoring
station (if fitted) and the operating compartment on navigation bridge. See also 4-7-2/Table 1 and
4-7-3/Table 2 for alarms and displays.
11.1.2 Excessive Automatic Starting of Bilge Pumps
Means are to be provided to indicate, at the centralized control and monitoring station (if fitted),
and the operating compartment on navigation bridge when the influx of liquid is greater than the
pump capacity or when the pump is operating more frequently than would normally be expected.
Additionally, special attention is to be given to oil pollution prevention requirements.
11.3 Fire Prevention

To minimize the outbreak of fire, the following is to be provided:
i) In high pressure fuel-oil piping (see 4-2-1/7.3), an oil leakage condition is to be alarmed at the
operating compartment on the navigation bridge and at the centralized control and monitoring
station (if fitted).
ii) Drip trays for collecting oil as required in 4-4-1/9.23 are to be of suitable height and provided with
suitable drainage to a collecting tank incorporating a high level alarm audible at the centralized
control and monitoring station (if fitted).
iii) Fuel oil pumps and filters are to be shielded, or grouped in a special room or location ventilated by
suction.
11.5 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

Propulsion machinery space is to be provided with a fixed fire detection and alarm system complying with
4-7-1/23. This fixed fire detection and alarm system may be combined with other fire detection and alarm
systems required on board the craft. The fire control panel is to be located on the navigation bridge or in
the fire fighting station, if fitted. If located in the fire fighting station, a repeater panel is to be fitted on the
navigation bridge. Propulsion machinery space fire is to be alarmed in the centralized control station.
11.7 Fire Alarm Call Points

Manually operated fire alarm call points are to be provided in, and in the passageways leading to, the
propulsion-machinery space.
13 Safety System
13.1 General
In all cases, the automatic safety shutdowns in 4-7-1/13 are to be provided. Other safety system functions,
such as automatic startup of standby pump or automatic slowdown, as appropriate, may be provided.
13.3 Safety System Alarms

13.3.1 Threshold Warning for Safety System Activations
Where the propulsion machinery is capable of remote control from the navigation bridge regardless
of manned or unmanned machinery space, automation systems are to be designed in a manner
such that a threshold warning of impending or imminent slowdown or shutdown of the propulsion
system is given to the officer in charge of the navigational watch in time to assess navigational
circumstances in an emergency.
In particular, the systems are to control, monitor, report, alert and take safety action to slow down
or shut down propulsion while providing the officer in charge of the navigational watch an opportunity
to manually intervene (override), except for those cases where manual intervention will result in
total failure of the engine and/or propulsion equipment within a short time, for example in the case
of over speed.
13.3.2 Alarms for Safety System Activations
Activation of the safety system to automatic slowdown or automatic shutdown of propulsion
machinery is each to be arranged with an individual alarm at the remote propulsion control station.
The audible alarm may be silenced at the control station, however the visual alarm is to remain
activated until it is acknowledged in the machinery space.
13.5 Override of Safety System Functions

Automatic slowdowns and automatic shutdowns indicated in 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5 may be
provided with override, except those specified in 4-7-1/13. Automatic slowdowns and automatic shutdowns
where provided in excess of those indicated in 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5 are to be provided with
override. Overrides are to be as follows:
i) The activation of the override is to be alarmed and clearly identifiable at the remote propulsion
control station and is to be so designed that it cannot be left activated.
ii) Overrides fitted on the navigation bridge are to be operable only when the propulsion control is
from the operating compartment on navigation bridge.
iii) The override actuator is to be arranged to preclude inadvertent operation.
13.7 Restart of Propulsion Machinery

Propulsion machinery shutdown by safety system is not to resume operation until it is reset manually.
15 Equipment
Remote propulsion controls fitted on craft not receiving ACCU or ABCU notations are to be in accordance
with the following requirements.
15.1 Electrical Equipment

Requirements in 4-7-9/7 are applicable.
15.3 Computer Based Equipment

Requirements in Section 4-7-8 are applicable. Equipment type tests in 4-7-8/7.9, duplication of equipment
and duplication of data links in integrated systems in 4-7-8/5 and duplication of monitor in centralized
control station (if fitted) in 4-7-8/7.5 are not applicable.
15.5 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Equipment

The requirements of 4-7-9/9 and 4-7-9/11 are applicable in general. However, flash point limitation on
hydraulic fluids is applicable only to craft to be assigned with ACCU or ABCU notations.
15.7 Acceptance Tests

All equipment is to be performance tested in the presence of a Surveyor in accordance with 4-7-9/Table 10
either in the shop or after installation. All installations are to be functionally tested to the satisfaction of the
surveyor on board and during sea trials, see Section 4-7-7.
TABLE 1
Instrumentation and Controllers on Remote Propulsion Control Stations
Notes
System Monitored/Controlled Parameter A D C [ A = Alarm; D = Display;
C = Controller/Actuator ]
[ x = applies ]
Propulsion A1 Propeller speed x x
control & A2 Propeller direction x x
monitoring
A3 Propeller pitch x x As applicable
A4 Telegraph x x Applicable to operating compartment only
A5 Emergency shutdown of propulsion engine x To be protected from accidental tripping
A6 Starting of propulsion engine x For reversible engines only
A7 Stored starting energy level – low x x For reversible engines and engines fitted
with means of starting at remote control
station
A8 Inhibition of starting of propulsion engine x Where remote engine starting is fitted
A9 Automatic shutdown activated x
A10 Automatic slowdown activated x If provided
A11 Safety system override x x x If fitted (see 4-7-2/13.5). To be of a design
that cannot be left activated
A12 Shaft turning gear engaged x To automatically inhibit starting of engine
A13 Operating in barred speed range x
A14 Main engine, overspeed x
A15 Threshold warning for safety system x For navigation bridge only (see 4-7-2/13.3.2).
activations
System B1 Power source – fails x
monitoring B2 Individual power supply to control, monitoring x x Alarm may be common.
and safety systems – fails \See 4-2-1/7.3.3i Steel Vessel Rules) for
main power supply failure alarm for
governor control system (no display is
required)
B3 Alarm system – disconnected x
B4 Integrated computerized system: data highway x Alarm is to be activated before critical data
abnormal conditions overload.
B5 Integrated computerized system: duplicated x
data link – failure of one link
Others C1 Control station transfer x x Display: to indicate the station in control.
Control: to provide 1) transfer switch & 2)
acknowledgment switch.
C2 Normal power supply to the powered x Distinct from other alarms
directional or trim control devices, failure
C3 Any permanently installed nickel-cadmium x Associated with propulsion, steering and
battery, thermal runway trim related machinery
C4 Compass system, failure x Distinct from other alarms
C5 Side, masthead or stern navigation lights, x Distinct from other alarms
extinction
C6 Air conditioning system – fails x If necessary for equipment environment
control
TABLE 1 (continued)
Instrumentation and Controllers on Remote Propulsion Control Stations
Notes
[ x = applies ]
Additional requirements for Navigation Bridge for craft assigned with ACCU or ABCU
ACCU/ D1 Summary alarms – activated by alarm x Distinct from other alarms
ABCU conditions in 4-7-3/Table 2 and 4-7-3/Table 3
through 4-7-3/Table 6 as applicable.
D2 High voltage rotating machine – Stationary x 4-6-5/1.11.1(c)
windings temperature – high
D3 Controllable pitch propeller hydraulic power x x If standby unit is provided with automatic
unit run/start/stop starting, such starting is to be alarmed.
D4 Vital auxiliary pumps, start/stop and transfer x For ABCU craft with non-integrated
switches machinery, it may be combined with
emergency controls
D5 FO settling and service tanks, level low/high x Distinct from other alarms
D6 FO tank, heater temperature high x
D7 FO and LO collect. Tank, level high or overflow x Distinct from other alarms
D8 High pressure FO system, leakage x Distinct from other alarms
D9 Essential fluid reservoirs, level low x Contents of which are essential for normal
craft operation
D10 Ventilation system, failure x For ventilating spaces in which
inflammable vapors may accumulate
D11 System power source: main and emergency x x
feeder – status and failure
D12 Propulsion machinery space – fire detected x
D13 Start main fire pump and pressurize fire main x x
D14 Propulsion machinery space – bilge level high x
D15 Bilge pump operation, automatic operation x Distinct from other alarms
D16 Emergency controls x
PART Section 3: ACCU Notation
4
SECTION 3 ACCU Notation
1 Application
Where, in lieu of manning the propulsion machinery space locally, it is intended to monitor the propulsion
machinery space and to control and monitor the craft’s propulsion and auxiliary machinery, steering and
trim related machinery from a centralized control station and from the navigation bridge during periodically
unattended propulsion machinery space, the provisions of Sections 4-7-1 and 4-7-2 and this Section are to
be complied with. These provisions cover propulsion machinery during start-up, navigating and maneuvering,
and do not cover operations in port or at mooring or anchorage.
The notation ACCU will be assigned upon verification of compliance and upon satisfactory tests and trails
carried out in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-7-7 in the presence of a Surveyor.
3 System Requirements
3.1 General
In general, the craft is to be fitted with:
i) A remote propulsion control station on the navigation bridge complying with 4-7-3/1 with capability
to monitor the propulsion machinery space and the machinery plant;
ii) A centralized control station complying with 4-7-3/5 through 4-7-3/9, which is to be further provided
with safety system functions capable of taking automated corrective actions in the event of a fault
in the machinery plant; such a station may be periodically unattended;
iii) A monitoring station in the engineers’ quarters capable of alarming any undesirable state of the
propulsion machinery space and of the machinery plant; and
iv) A fire fighting station with means to effect rapid response to control fire in the propulsion machinery
space.
3.3 System Design

In general, conceptual requirements in 4-7-1/9 are applicable. Specific details are provided in 4-7-3/7
through 4-7-3/21. FMEA (4-7-1/9.11) is to be conducted to demonstrate that control, monitoring and safety
systems are so designed that any single failure will not result in the loss of propulsion control, the loss of
propulsion or other undesirable consequences. The FMEA report is to be submitted for review.
3.5 System Power Supply

3.5.1 Power Source
Electrical power supply is to meet the requirements of 4-7-2/3.5. In addition, power for control,
monitoring and safety systems is to be fed from two feeders, one from the main switchboard or
other suitable distribution board, and the other from the emergency switchboard or an emergency
distribution board. The supply status of these feeders is to be displayed and their failure is to be
alarmed at the centralized control station and the navigation bridge.
Section 3 ACCU Notation 4-7-3
3.5.2 Power Transfer

The two feeders are to be connected to a transfer switch in the centralized control station. Power
supply to controls, monitoring and safety systems may be commonly connected to the transfer
switch. The transfer between the power supplies is to be effected automatically upon failure of a
supply and by manual means at the centralized control station. Power transfer is to be achieved
without a break in power supply.
3.7 Supply and Arrangement

3.7.1 Continuity of Power
Provision is to be made for automatic starting and connecting to the main switchboard of a standby
generator of sufficient capacity to permit propulsion and steering and to ensure the safety of the craft
with automatic re-starting of the essential auxiliaries including, where necessary, sequential operations.
This standby electric power to be available in no more than 45 seconds. To satisfy the aforementioned
requirement, the operation of propulsion machinery and vital services may be at reduced power.
5 Location of Centralized Control Station

The centralized control station is to be located within, or adjacent to, the propulsion machinery space.
Consideration will be given to this station being located away from the propulsion machinery space,
provided its operation and monitoring of the propulsion machinery and propulsion machinery space is to
be as effective as if it is located either within or adjacent to the propulsion machinery space.
Where this station is in an enclosure located in or adjacent to machinery space, at least two means of
access, separated as remote from each other as practicable, are to be provided. Where fitted, glass windows
forming parts of the boundaries, are to be of shatter-resistance type (e.g., laminated glass or wire mesh
embedded glass).
7 Remote Controls from Centralized Control Station

Necessary controls to operate the propulsion machinery and its associated auxiliary systems are to be
provided in the centralized control station. This includes the following control functions.
i) Remote propulsion control as provided in Section 4-7-2.
ii) Put on-line a standby generator as described in 4-7-3/17.9.1.
iii) Start, stop and transfer auxiliaries necessary for the operation of propulsion and power generation
machinery as described in 4-7-3/17.11.
All required controls are shown in the “C” column of 4-7-3/Table 2.
9 Monitoring in Centralized Control Station
9.1 Instrumentation
Alarms and displays for monitoring propulsion and auxiliary machinery and for propulsion machinery space
are to be provided in the centralized control station as specified in columns “A” and “D” of 4-7-3/Table 2
through 4-7-3/Table 6, as applicable. Alternative monitored parameters, which may provide equal effectiveness,
will be considered.
9.3 Operator Interface

Where a computer is used as the operator interface to display monitoring information, the centralized control
station is to be provided with at least two computers, including keyboards and monitors, unless other means
of display are provided capable of displaying the same information.
9.5 Engineer’s Alarm

Where alarms are not acknowledged at the centralized control station in a pre-set period of time (e.g.,
2 minutes), the system is to activate the engineers’ alarm audible in the engineers’ accommodations (see
also 4-7-3/13.3).
11 Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge

Remote propulsion control is to be provided on the navigation bridge. The required controls and associated
alarms and displays are to comply with 4-7-2/5 and 4-7-2/Table 1. Additional alarms, displays and controls
as specified at the lower half of 4-7-2/Table 1 are also to be provided.
13 Monitoring Station in the Engineers’ Quarters
13.1 Engineers’ Public Space and Engineers’ Cabins

At least one alarm monitoring station is to be provided in the engineers’ public space, such as the officers’
lounge or officers’ mess room. Where the engineer on-duty is assigned to work in a specific space, such as
the ship’s office or engineers’ office, then such a space is also to be provided with an alarm monitoring
station. In addition, an alarm monitoring station is to be provided in each engineer’s cabin through a selector
switch so arranged as to ensure connection to at least one of these cabins. Each station is to be provided with:
• An alarm for fire in the propulsion machinery space;
• An alarm for high bilge water level in the propulsion machinery space; and
• A summary-alarm to be activated by any of the alarm conditions listed in 4-7-3/Tables 2 through 6.
The fire alarm is to have a separate visual display and a distinct sound from the summary alarm, and other
alarms where fitted. A selector switch is not to be provided for fire alarm.
13.3 Muting the Audible Alarms

All alarms in 4-7-3/13.1 are to be silenced only at the centralized control station. Alternatively, arrangements
may be made to silence the summary and the bilge alarms at the alarm monitoring stations in the engineers’
public space or at a selected engineer’s cabin, provided the associated visual alarm is not extinguished. The
arrangements are to be such that if the audible alarm is not also silenced manually at the centralized control
station in a preset period of time (e.g., 2 minutes), the system is to activate the engineer’s alarm (see
4-6-2/17.3).
13.5 Communication
The communication system required by 4-6-2/15 is to include the engineer’s accommodation area.
15 Safety Systems
15.1 General
To allow for unattended operation, the centralized control station is to be provided with safety system functions
specified in “Auto start”, “Auto slowdown” and “Auto shutdown” columns of 4-7-3/Tables 3 through 6 as
applicable. The following features are also applicable.
15.3 System Design

In addition to complying with 4-7-1/9.9, the following are applicable in order to safeguard continued
operation of machinery:
i) Safety system is to be designed to take the least drastic action first in response to a fault, and when
this fails to avert the situation, to intervene sequentially with more drastic actions. The system is to
incorporate ability to automatically start a standby pump, or automatic slowdown or automatic
shutdown of propulsion machinery, as applicable.
ii) For propulsion machinery (4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5), automatic start/changeover,
automatic slowdown and automatic shutdown systems are to be independent of monitoring and
control systems. However, common sensors as specifically indicated in these tables may be allowed.
iii) In lieu of automatic slowdown, illuminated warning sign “reduced power” with audible alarm may
be provided on the navigation bridge to allow manual slowdown to be effected.
iv) Overrides for safety system actions are to comply with 4-7-2/13.5.
15.5 Automatic Start and Changeover

In the event of detecting low or the loss of system pressure as specified in 4-7-3/Tables 3 through 4 (in
“Auto start” column), automatic startup of and changeover to the standby pumps, which are essential to
maintain the running of the propulsion machinery, are to be provided.
15.7 Automatic Slowdown

Automatic slowdown, where indicated in 4-7-3/Table 3 is to be provided in order to maintain the continuous
operation of the propulsion machinery in the event of specified alarm conditions.
15.9 Automatic Shutdown

Automatic shutdowns are to be provided, where indicated in 4-7-3/Table 3 through 4-7-3/Table 5, to protect
the propulsion machinery from serious damage. Where automatic shutdown is indicated in these tables as a
requirement along with 4-7-3/15.5 or 4-7-3/15.7 or both, the intent is that either 4-7-3/15.5 or 4-7-3/15.7 or
both is to be activated first; and if the state of the propulsion machinery does not improve, then 4-7-3/15.9
is to be activated.
17 Specific Requirements for Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery

The following are requirements for control, monitoring and safety systems applicable to individual propulsion
and auxiliary machinery plant supplemental to those of 4-7-3/7 through 4-7-3/15 above.
17.1 Propulsion Diesel Engines

Alarms and displays (A and D columns) in 4-7-3/Table 3 are applicable.
17.3 Propulsion Gas Turbines

17.5 Automatic Starting of Propulsion Auxiliaries

Where power is automatically restored following a blackout as per 4-6-2/3.1.6, auxiliaries that are essential
for propulsion and maneuvering are to be automatically started. In order not to overload the generator
while the motors are starting, means such as sequential starting are to be provided where necessary.
17.7 Electric Propulsion

17.9 Generators and Electrical Systems

Alarms and displays (A and D columns) in 4-7-3/Table 2 and 4-7-3/Table 6 are applicable. The following
are also to be complied with.
17.9.1 Starting of Generators
In addition to complying with 4-6-2/3.1.6 for automatically restoring power to equipment necessary
for propulsion, steering and safety, arrangements are to be provided to enable manually starting
and placing in service any generator from a single location. This location may be at the main
switchboard or in the centralized control station.
17.9.2 Monitoring of Generators
Where the main switchboard is not located in the centralized control station alarms and displays
for monitoring the generators and main switchboard, as indicated in 4-7-3/Table 2, are to be provided
in the centralized control station.
17.11 Propulsion Auxiliaries

The centralized control station is to be provided with means to remotely start and stop auxiliary pumps
associated with the operation of the following:
• Propulsion engine
• Electrical power generators
• Controllable pitch propellers
• Fuel oil transfer system
Automatic transferring of vital auxiliary pumps, where fitted, is to be alarmed at the centralized control station.
19 Propulsion Machinery Space
19.1 Fuel Oil System Arrangements

19.1.1 Fuel Oil Settling and Service Tanks
Low level conditions of fuel oil settling and daily service tanks are to be alarmed at the centralized
control station. Where automatic filling is provided, the arrangements are to include automatic
pump shutdown and start-up at predetermined high and low levels respectively. In such cases, fuel
oil high level alarm is also to be provided.
19.1.2 Fuel Oil Overflow and Drain Tanks
Fuel oil overflow tanks and fuel oil drain tank receiving fuel oil from drip pans, spill trays and other
leakage containment facilities are to be fitted with a high level alarm at the centralized control
station.
19.1.3 Fuel Oil Heating
Fuel oil tanks provided with heating arrangements and fuel oil heaters are to be fitted with the
following alarms at the centralized control station.
i) High temperature alarm and temperature display for the heated fuel oil in the settling and
service tanks.
ii) Fuel oil high temperature (or low viscosity) alarm, or a low flow alarm at the heater outlet.
This alarm may be omitted if a fuel oil high temperature alarm required by 4-7-3/Tables 3
through 6, monitors the fuel oil high temperature for the heaters also.
iii) High temperature alarm for the fluid heating medium (steam, thermal oil, etc.) for fuel oil
tanks or fuel oil heater, where the maximum temperature of the heating medium would
exceed 220°C (428°F).
19.1.4 Fuel Oil Filling Arrangements
Where automatic filling is provided, the fuel oil settling or service tanks are to be of a capacity
sufficient for at least 8 hours operation at normal power.
Where automatic filling is not provided, the capacities of these tanks are to be sufficient for at least
24 hours operation at normal power. Otherwise, a time limitation will be noted in the classification
record.
19.3 Bilge Level Monitoring

19.3.1 Bilge Level
The propulsion machinery space is to be provided with two independent systems to detect excessive
rise of bilge water in the bilges or bilge wells. The arrangements including the number of sensors
and locations are to be such that accumulation of bilge water may be detected at the various angles
of craft’s heel and trim. The alarm is to be given in the centralized control station.
19.3.2 Bilge Pump

Where the bilge pumps are arranged for automatic operation, means are to be provided to indicate,
at the centralized control station, when the pump is operating more frequently than would normally
be expected, or when the pump is operating for an excessive length of time. Additionally, attention
is to be given to oil pollution prevention requirements.
21 Fire Safety
21.1 Fire Fighting Station

A fire-fighting station is to be provided and to be located outside the propulsion machinery space. However,
consideration may be given to the installation of the fire-fighting control station within the room housing
the centralized control station provided that the room’s boundary common with the propulsion machinery
space, including glass windows and doors, is insulated to A-60 standard. The doors opening into the
propulsion machinery space are to be self-closing. The ventilation system to the room is to be separate
from other systems serving the propulsion machinery space and the ventilation inlet is to be taken from a
safe space outside the propulsion machinery space. There is to be a protected access, insulated to A-60
standard, from the room to the open deck.
21.3 Fire Main System

In order to provide immediate water delivery from the fire main system at a suitable pressure, provisions
are to be made for remotely starting one of the main fire pumps at the navigation bridge, unless the fire
main is permanently pressurized.
21.5 Controls at Fire Fighting Station

The fire-fighting station is to be provided with remote manual controls for the operations detailed in the
following list:
i) Shutdown of ventilation fans serving the machinery space. See 4-6-2/9.1.1.
ii) Shutdown of fuel oil, lubricating oil and thermal oil system pumps. See 4-6-2/19.1.2.
iii) Shutdown of inert gas generators and incinerators, and of auxiliary blowers of propulsion diesel
engines. See 4-6-2/19.1.2.
iv) Closing of propulsion machinery space fuel oil tanks suction valves.
v) Shutdown of fixed local application fire fighting systems, see 4-5-2/9.1, before activation of a
high-expansion foam fire extinguishing system, see 4-5-2/11.51, to avoid adverse water action on
the foam.
vi) Closing of propulsion machinery space skylights, openings in funnels, ventilator dampers, and
other openings.
vii) (2014) Closing of propulsion machinery space watertight and fire-resistant doors. Self-closing doors
with no hold-back arrangements may be excluded.
viii) Starting of emergency generator where it is not arranged for automatic starting.
ix) Starting of a fire pump located outside the propulsion machinery space, including operation of all
necessary valves, to pressurize the fire main. However, valves located near the pump need not be
provided with remote operation from the fire fighting station, if they are kept locked open (LO), or
closed (LC), as appropriate, to provide immediate water supply to the fire main. The position of
the valves (open or closed) is to be clearly marked. Where the sea chest valve is located in the
same compartment as the fire pump and the sea chest valve is kept locked open, a high-level bilge
alarm is to be fitted in the fire pump space. If the sea chest is located in a different space than the
compartment containing the fire pump, then a high-level bilge alarm is to be fitted in the fire pump
space, as well as the compartment containing the sea chest, in order to detect possible flooding in
each of these spaces. The high-level bilge alarm is to sound in the centralized control station. Starting
of one of the main fire pumps is also to be provided on the navigation bridge (see 4-7-3/15.5.2).
ix) Actuation of the fixed fire extinguishing system for the propulsion machinery space.
21.7 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

21.7.1 General
The propulsion machinery space is to be provided with a fixed fire detection and alarm system
complying with 4-5-1/13. This fixed fire detection and alarm system may be combined with other
fire detection and alarm system required on board the craft. The fire control panel is to be located
on the navigation bridge or in the fire fighting station. If located in the fire fighting station, a
repeater panel is to be fitted on the navigation bridge. Propulsion machinery space fire is to be
alarmed in the centralized control station.
21.7.2 Temporarily Disconnecting Alarms
A fire detector loop or detector(s) covering the unattended machinery space may be temporarily
disabled, for example, for maintenance purposes, provided that such action is to be clearly indicated
at the fire control panel and at the centralized control station described in 4-7-3/21.7.1. Disabled
loop or detectors are to be reactivated automatically after a preset time period.
21.7.3 Fire Alarm Call Points
Manually operated fire alarm call points are to be provided at the following locations:
• Centralized control station
• Passageways leading to, the propulsion machinery spaces
• Navigation bridge
23 Equipment
Components, equipment, subsystems, etc. used in control, monitoring and safety systems of propulsion
machinery and vital auxiliary pumps are to be designed and tested in accordance with the provisions in
Section 4-7-9.
TABLE 2
Instrumentation and Controllers in Centralized Control Station –
All Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery
Notes
[ x = applies ]
Propulsion A1 As in 4-7-2/Table 1 items A1 through C6, with x x x Following items of 4-7-2/Table 1 are to be
control and following additional features modified:
monitoring - Item A4: additional telegraph is not
required for centralized control station.
- Item A6: starting of propulsion engine is
required for all engine types
- Item C1: acknowledgement switch for
transfer of control station is not required in
centralized control station
A2 System power supply main and emergency x x x
feeders: failure, status and transfer
A3 Propulsion engine auxiliaries – status and x x Automatic start/stop, if fitted, is to be
start/stop alarmed.
A4 Controllable pitch propeller (CPP) hydraulic x x
power unit start/stop
A5 CPP hydraulic oil pressure – low and high x High-pressure alarm is required only if
required by design. See 4-3-3/17.3.2 and
4-3-3/17.3.3
A6 CPP hydraulic oil temperature – high x If it is a system design feature
A7 CPP hydraulic oil tank level – low x
Electric B1 Starting, paralleling & putting generator on line x
Power B2 Generator running x
Generating Not required if main switchboard is located
Plant B3 Voltage – high and low x x
in the centralized control station
B4 Current – high x x
B5 Frequency – high and low x x
B6 Failure of on-line generator x
B7 Generator engine auxiliaries start/stop x x Automatic start/stop, if fitted, is to be
alarmed
B8 Bearing lub. oil inlet pressure – low x x Automatic shutdown prime mover.
4-6-4/3.15
B9 Generator cooling inlet pump or fan motor – fails x 4-6-4/3.13.6
B10 Generator cooling medium temp. – high x x 4-6-4/3.13.6
High voltage C1 Stationary windings temperature – high x 4-6-5/1.11.1(c)
rotating
machine
Fuel oil D1 Settling and service tank level – low and high x High level alarm required only if automatic
system filling is provided
D2 Overflow tank and drain tank level – high x
D3 Transfer pump start/stop x x Start/stop may be automatic.
D4 Heated fuel oil in settling and service tank, fuel x x 4-7-3/19.1.3i)
oil temperature – high
D5 Fuel oil tank heating medium temperature – high x 4-7-3/19.1.3iii)
D6 Fuel oil heater, fuel oil temperature – high (or x 4-7-3/19.1.3ii)
viscosity – low) or flow – low
D7 Fuel oil heater, heating medium temperature – x 4-7-3/19.1.3iii)
high
TABLE 2 (continued)
Instrumentation and Controllers in Centralized Control Station –
All Propulsion and Auxiliary Machinery
Notes
[ x = applies ]
Stern tube E1 Tank level – low x
lub. oil
Propulsion F1 Bilge level – high x
machinery F2 Bilge pump status x x Alarm applicable to automatically started
space bilge pump that starts/stops excessively or
running unduly long
F3 Fire detected x
F4 Air condition system – fails x If necessary for equipment environmental
control
Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to provide indication of
the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM, etc.) or status indication. The engineering unit is
to effectively display the relevant information concerning the monitored parameter. An alternative engineering unit
which provides equivalent effectiveness, may be considered.
TABLE 3
Instrumentation and Safety System Functions in Centralized Control Station –
Medium and High Speed (Trunk Piston) Diesel Engines (2013)
Auto Auto Auto Notes
Systems Monitored Parameters A D Slow Start Shut [ A = Alarm. D = Display. x = apply. ]
down down
Sensors Common or separate c c c s s c = common; s = separate
Fuel oil A1 Fuel oil after filter (engine inlet), x x x
pressure – low
A2 Fuel oil before injection pumps, x For heavy fuel oil burning engines only.
temp. – high (or viscosity – low)
A3 Fuel oil before injection pumps, x For heavy fuel oil burning engines only.
temp. – low (or viscosity – high)
A4 Leakage from high pressure pipes x
A5 Fuel oil service tank, level – low x High level alarm is also required if without
suitable overflow arrangements.
A6 Common rail fuel oil pressure – low x
Lubricating oil B1 Lub. oil to main bearing and thrust x x x x
(Diesel engine) bearing, pressure – low
B2 Lub. oil filter differential, pressure – x x
high
B3 Lub. oil inlet, temp. – high x x
B4 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x x For engines having a power of 2250 kW
Bearing temperature – high or bore of more than 300 mm (11.8 in.).
Alternative arrangements Single sensor having two independent
outputs for initiating alarm and for
shutdown will satisfy independence of
alarm and shutdown.
See 4-2-1/7.2.2 of the Steel Vessel Rules
B5 Each cylinder lubricator, flow rate – x x If necessary for the safe operation of the
low engine.
B6 Common rail servo oil pressure – low x
Lubricating oil B7 Reduction gear lub. oil inlet pressure x x x x x Shutdown is to affect all power input to
(other than – low gear
diesel engine)
Sea water C1 Sea water cooling system pressure – x x x
cooling low
Cylinder fresh D1 Water inlet, pressure – low or flow – x x x x
water cooling low
D2 Water outlet (general), temp. – high x x x Two separate sensors are required for alarm
and slowdown.
D3 Cooling water expansion tank, level – x
low
Compressed E1 Starting air before shutoff valve, x x
air pressure – low
E2 Control air pressure – low x x
Scavenge air F1 Scavenge air receiver temp. – high x
Exhaust gas G1 Exhaust gas after each cylinder, x x x For engine power > 500 kW/cylinder
temp. – high
G2 Exhaust gas after each cylinder, x For engine power > 500 kW/cylinder
deviation from average, temp. – high
TABLE 3 (continued)
Medium and High Speed (Trunk Piston) Diesel Engines (2013)
Auto Auto Auto Notes
Systems Monitored Parameters A D Slow Start Shut [ A = Alarm. D = Display. x = apply. ]
down down
Sensors Common or separate c c c s s c = common; s = separate
Engine H1 Speed x
H2 Overspeed x x
Power J1 Control, alarm or safety system, x
power supply failure
Turbocharger K1 Turbocharger lub. oil inlet pressure – x Unless provided with a self-contained
low lubricating oil system integrated with the
turbocharger
K2 (2013) Turbocharger lub. oil outlet x Where outlet temperature from each
temp., each bearing – high bearing cannot be monitored due to the
engine/ turbocharger design, alternative
arrangements may be accepted. Continuous
monitoring of inlet pressure and inlet
temperature in combination with specific
intervals for bearing inspection in
accordance with the turbocharger
manufacturer’s instructions may be
accepted as an alternative.
Display = display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to provide
indication of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM, etc.) or status indication.
The engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information concerning the monitored parameter. An
alternative engineering unit which provides equivalent effectiveness, may be considered.
Auto Slowdown = automatic slowdown of diesel engine, along with activation of suitable alarm.
Auto Start = automatic starting of a standby pump, along with activation of suitable alarm.
Auto Shutdown = automatic stopping of the diesel engines, along with activation of suitable alarm.
TABLE 4
Propulsion Gas Turbines (2013)
Auto Auto Notes (see also bottom of table)
System Monitored Parameter A D Start Shut [ A = Alarm; D = Display, x =apply ]
down
Sensors Common/separate c c s s c = common sensor; s = separate sensor
Fuel oil A1 Pressure or flow – low x x
A2 Temperature – high and low (or x x For heavy fuel oil.
viscosity –low and high)
Lubricating oil B1 Inlet pressure – low x x x x For turbines, reduction gears and thrust
bearings
B2 Inlet temperature – high x x For turbines, reduction gears and thrust
bearings
B3 Main bearing temp. or main bearing oil x x For turbines, reduction gears and thrust
outlet temp. – high bearings
B4 Filter differential pressure – high x
B5 Tank level – low x x
Cooling C1 (2013) Pressure or flow – low x x
medium C2 Temperature – high x
Starting D1 Stored starting energy level – low x
D2 (2013) Ignition failure x x
Combustion E1 Combustion or flame failure x x
Exhaust gas F1 Temperature – high x x x
Turbine G1 Vibration level – high x x
G2 Rotor axial displacement – large x x Auto shutdown may be omitted for rotors
fitted with roller bearings
G3 Overspeed x x
G4 Vacuum at compressor inlet – high x x
Auto start = automatic starting of standby pump in the system, with activation of suitable alarm.
Auto shutdown = automatic closing of main fuel valve, with activation of suitable alarm.
TABLE 5A
Electric Propulsion
Auto Notes
System Monitored Parameter A D Shut [A = Alarm; D = Display; x =apply]
down
Propulsion A1 Bearing lub oil inlet pressure – low x x x Prime mover automatic shutdown
Generator A2 Voltage – off-limits x x To read all phases and at least one bus
A3 Frequency – off-limits x x
A4 Current x To read all phases
A5 Stationary windings temperature – high x x To read all phases; for generators >500kW
A6 Main generator circuit breakers – x
open/close
A7 Generator running x
A8 Failure of on-line generator x
A9 Transfer of standby generator x
A10 Generator cooling medium temperature x x If applicable
– high
A11 Failure of generator cooling pump or x If applicable
fan motor
A12 Field voltage and current x For DC generator
A13 Inter-pole winding temperature – high x x For DC generator
Propulsion B1 Bearing, lub. oil inlet pressure – low x x x
Motor - AC B2 Armature voltage – off-limits x x To read all phases and at least one bus
B3 Field voltage x
B4 Frequency – off-limits x x
B5 Armature current x To read all phases
B6 Field current x For synchronous motors
B7 Ground lights or similar x
B8 Stationary windings temperature – high x x To read all phases; for motors >500kW
B9 Motor circuit breakers – open/close x
B10 Motor running x
B11 Failure of on-line motor x
B12 Transfer of standby motor x
B13 Motor cooling medium temperature – high x x If applicable
B14 Failure of cooling pump or fan motor x If applicable
Propulsion C1 Bearing lub oil inlet pressure – low x x x
Motor - DC C2 Armature voltage – off-limits x x
C3 Field voltage x
C4 Armature current x
C5 Field current x
C6 Ground lights or similar x
C7 Motor circuit breakers – open/close x
C8 Motor running x
C9 Motor overspeed x x
C10 Failure of on-line motor x
C11 Transfer of standby motor x
C12 Motor cooling medium temperature – high x x If applicable
C13 Failure of cooling pump or fan motor x If applicable
TABLE 5A (continued)
Electric Propulsion
Auto Notes
System Monitored Parameter A D Shut [A = Alarm; D = Display; x =apply]
down
Propulsion D1 Voltage x
SCR D2 Current x
D3 Overload (high current) x Alarms before protective device is activated
D4 Open/close position for assignment x
switches
D5 SCR cooling medium temperature – high x x If applicable
D6 Failure of SCR cooling pump or fan motor x If applicable
D7 Inter-phase reactor temperature – high x x
Transformer E1 Transformer winding temperature – high x x For each phase
TABLE 5B
Generator Prime Mover for Electric Propulsion (2013)
Auto Auto Notes
Systems Monitored Parameters A D Start Shut
down [A = Alarm; D = Display; x = apply]
Trunk Piston Type Diesel Engines

Fuel oil F1 Fuel oil after filter (engine inlet), x x x
Pressure – low
F2 Fuel oil before injection pumps, x For heavy fuel oil burning engines
temp. – high (or viscosity – low) only.
F3 Fuel oil before injection pumps, x For heavy fuel oil burning engines
temp. – low (or viscosity – high) only.
F4 Leakage from high pressure pipes x
F5 Fuel oil service tank, level – low x High level alarm is also required if
without suitable overflow
arrangements.
F6 Common rail fuel oil pressure – x
low
Lubricating G1 Lub. oil to main bearing, pressure x x x x
oil – low
G2 Lub. oil filter differential, x x
pressure – high
G3 Lub. oil inlet, temp. – high x x
G4 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x x For engines having a power of 2250
concentration – high; or kW (3000 hp) and above or cylinder
Bearing temperature – high; or bore of more than 300 mm (11.8 in.).
Alternative arrangement Single sensor having two independent
outputs for initiating alarm and for
shutdown will satisfy independence
of alarm and shutdown.
See 4-2-1/7.2.2 of the Steel Vessel
Rules
G5 Each cylinder lubricator, flow rate x If necessary for the safe operation of
– low the engine.
G6 Common rail servo oil pressure – x
low
Sea cooling H1 Sea water cooling system x x x
water pressure – low
Cylinder J1 Water inlet, pressure – low or x x x
fresh water flow – low
cooling J2 Water outlet (general), temp. – x x
high
J3 Cooling water expansion tank, x
level – low
Compressed K1 Starting air before shut-off valve, x x
air pressure – low
K2 Control air pressure – low x x
Exhaust gas L1 Exhaust gas after each cylinder, x x For engine power > 500 kW/cylinder
temp. – high
TABLE 5B (continued)
Generator Prime Mover for Electric Propulsion (2013)
Auto Auto Notes
Systems Monitored Parameters A D Start Shut
down [A = Alarm; D = Display; x = apply]
Turbocharger M1 Turbocharger oil inlet pressure - x Unless provided with a self-contained

low lubricating oil system integrated with
the turbocharger
M2 (2013) Turbocharger oil outlet Where outlet temperature from each
temp., each bearing – high bearing cannot be monitored due to
the engine/ turbocharger design,
alternative arrangements may be
accepted. Continuous monitoring of
inlet pressure and inlet temperature in
combination with specific intervals
for bearing inspection in accordance
with the turbocharger manufacturer’s
instructions may be accepted as an
alternative.
Engine N1 Over speed x x
Power P1 Main x x
Supply P2 Emergency x
Gas Turbines
Fuel oil Q1 Pressure or flow – low x x
Q2 Temperature – high and low (or x x For heavy fuel oil.
viscosity – low and high)
Lubricating R1 Inlet pressure – low x x x x
oil R2 Inlet temperature – high x x
R3 Bearing temp. or bearing oil x x
outlet temp. – high
R4 Filter differential pressure – high x
R5 Tank level – low x x
Cooling S1 Pressure or flow – low x x
medium S2 Temperature – high x
Starting T1 Stored starting energy level – low x
T2 Ignition failure x x
Combustion U1 Combustion or flame failure x x
Exhaust gas V1 Temperature – high x x x
Turbine W1 Vibration level – high x x
W2 Rotor axial displacement – large x x Auto shutdown may be omitted for
rotors fitted with roller bearings
W3 Overspeed x x
W4 Vacuum at compressor inlet – x x
high
Power Z1 Main x x
Supply Z2 Emergency x
Auto Start = automatic starting of a standby pump, along with activation of suitable alarm.
Auto Shutdown = automatic stopping of the diesel engines and gas turbine, along with activation of suitable alarm.
TABLE 6
Auxiliary Turbines and Diesel Engines
Auto Notes
Engine Monitored System & Parameter A D Shut
down [ A = Alarm; D = Display; x = apply ]
Diesel Lubricating A1 Bearing oil inlet pressure – low x x x
Engine oil A2 Bearing inlet oil temperature – x x
high
A3 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x x For engines having a power of 2250 kW
Bearing temperature – high; or bore more than 300 mm (11.8 in.).
Alternative arrangements Single sensor having two independent
outputs for initiating alarm and for initiating
alarm and for shutdown will satisfy
independence of alarm and shutdown.
See 4-2-1/7.2.2 of the Steel Vessel Rules
A4 Common rail servo oil pressure x
– low
Cooling A5 Pressure or flow – low x x
medium A6 Temperature at outlet – high x x
A7 Expansion tank level – low x
Fuel oil A8 Fuel oil leakage from injection x
pipe
A9 Fuel oil temp. – high and low x For heavy fuel oil only
(or viscosity – low and high)
A10 Service tank level – low x
A11 Common rail fuel oil pressure – x
low
Starting A12 Energy level – low x x
medium
Exhaust A13 Exhaust gas temperature after x For engines having a power of more than
each cylinder – high 500 kW/cyl.
Speed A14 Overspeed x x
A15 Engine speed x Computer based monitoring system can
utilize the speed signal as an “on line”
signal.
Gas Lubricating B1 Inlet pressure inlet – low x x x
Turbine oil B2 Inlet temperature – high x x
B3 Bearing temp. or oil outlet x x
temp. – high
B4 Filter differential pressure x
Cooling B5 Pressure or flow – low x x
medium B6 Temperature – high x
Fuel oil B7 Pressure, inlet – low x x
B8 Temp. – high and low (or x For heavy fuel oil only
viscosity – low and high)
Exhaust gas B9 Temperature – high x
Combustion B10 Combustion or flame failure x x
Starting B11 Ignition failure x x
B12 Stored starting energy level – x
low
TABLE 6 (continued)
Auxiliary Turbines and Diesel Engines
Auto Notes
Engine Monitored System & Parameter A D Shut
down [ A = Alarm; D = Display; x = apply ]
Gas Turbine B13 Vibration level – high x x
Turbine B14 Axial displacement – high x x Auto shutdown may be omitted for rotors
fitted with roller bearings
B15 Overspeed x x
B16 Vacuum at compressor inlet – x x
high
TABLE 7
Monitoring of Auxiliary Prime-movers and Electrical Generators
(See also 4-7-4/Table 3)
Item Alarm Display Remarks
(1) (4)
A1 Pressure, lube oil inlet – low x Pressure Automatic engine shutdown

A2 Temperature, inlet – high x Temperature
Lube Oil
A3 Common rail servo oil pressure – x
low
B1 Pressure or flow – low x Pressure, or
Cooling flow
Medium B2 Temperature, outlet – high x
B3 Level, expansion tank – low x If separate from main system
C1 Fuel oil leakage from pressure pipe x
Diesel Fuel C2 Level, in fuel oil daily service tank – x See also 4-7-3/19
Engine Oil low
C3 Common rail fuel oil pressure – low x
D1 Oil mist in crankcase, mist x Automatic engine shutdown (2)
concentration – high; or
Crankcase
Bearing temperature – high; or
Alternative arrangements
Starting E1 Pressure or level – low x Pressure, or
Medium level
F1 Device activated x Automatic shutdown. See
Overspeed 4-2-1/7.5.3 and 4-2-1/7.3 of the
Steel Vessel Rules
G1 Pressure, bearing, lube oil inlet – x Pressure Prime mover automatic
low shutdown
G2 Voltage – off-limits x Voltage To read all phases and at least
Electrical one bus (3)
Generator
G3 Frequency – off-limits x Frequency
G4 Current – high x Current To read all phases (3)
G5 Transfer of standby generator x
Notes:
1 Required alarm is denoted by a (x).
2 For engines having a power of 2250 kW (3000 hp) and above or having a cylinder bore of more than 300 mm (11.8
in.). Single sensor having two independent outputs for initiating alarm and for initiating alarm and for shutdown
will satisfy independence of alarm and shutdown. See 4-2-1/7.2 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
3 For D.C. generation. Additionally, field voltmeters and ammeters are to be included.
4 Display of the analog or digital signal for the monitored parameter. The display of the signal is to provide indication
of the monitored parameter in engineering units (such as degrees, PSI, RPM, etc.) or status indication. The
engineering unit is to effectively display the relevant information concerning the monitored parameter. An
PART Section 4: Craft Classed with ABCU Notation
4
SECTION 4 Craft Classed with ABCU Notation
1 General
The requirements in this Section apply to craft capable of operating as ACCU classed craft but because of
their compact propulsion-machinery space design are not fitted with the means to control the propulsion
and its associated machinery from a centralized location within the propulsion-machinery space or adjacent
to the machinery space. Except as noted herein, the requirements in Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-3, as
applicable, are to be complied with.
3 Station in the Operating Compartment on Navigation Bridge

Controls, alarms and displays as listed in 4-7-2/5.23 are to be provided on the station in the operating
compartment. See 4-7-2/Table 1. For craft having nonintegrated propulsion machinery, the means for
starting, stopping and transferring vital auxiliary pumps (see 4-7-3/17.11) are to be fitted at the station in
the operating compartment and may also be fitted in the centralized station. See 4-7.1/5.1.21 for definition
of integrated propulsion machinery.
5 Centralized Monitoring Station

The requirements in 4-7-3/9 are applicable except that the centralized station need not be provided with
propulsion controls but is to include displays and alarms needed for the monitoring of the propulsion
machinery and associated ship service systems, electrical power generating machinery, and monitoring of
propulsion-machinery space. The monitoring system is to provide the same degree of equivalency as if the
propulsion-machinery space was manned. See 4-7-3/Tables 2 through 6 for required alarms and displays
to be fitted at this station.
7 Communications
Communications as required in 4-7-3/13.5 is also to include the centralized monitoring station in the
propulsion-machinery space.
9 Sea Trials
In addition to the trials per 4-7-7/5, successful operation of the propulsion machinery is to be demonstrated
with the propulsion-machinery space unattended for a period of at least 12 hours.
PART Section 5: Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 24 meters (79 feet)
4
SECTION 5 Craft Less Than 500 GT Having a Length Greater

Than 24 meters (79 feet)
1 General
The requirements contained in this Section are intended for craft less than 500 GT having a length greater
than 24 m (79 ft). The installation of machinery and monitoring of the propulsion machinery space in such
craft is to be so arranged to permit the normal operation of the craft with the propulsion-machinery space
unattended. For craft having a length equal or less than 24 m (79 ft), see Section 4-7-6.
Note: ACCU or ABCU class notation may be granted to craft of < 500 GT and a length greater than 24 meters (79 ft),
provided that the applicable requirements in Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-4 of this Chapter are met.
3 Definitions
See 4-7-1/5.
5 Required Plans and Data

Plans and specifications are to be submitted in accordance with Section 4-1-1 for approval and are to
include the following information.
i) Machinery arrangement plans showing location of control stations in relation to controlled units;
ii) Arrangements and details of control consoles including front views, installation arrangements together
with schematic diagrams for all power, control and monitoring systems including their functions;
and a list of alarms/displays as required in 4-7-5/17;
iii) Type and size of all electrical cables and wiring associated with the control systems including voltage
rating, service voltage and currents together with overload and short-circuit protection;
iv) Description of all alarm and emergency tripping arrangements; functional sketches or description of
all special valves, actuators, sensors and relays;
v) Schematic plans and supporting data of fire protection and extinguishing systems, including fire
detection and alarm systems and bilge high water alarms,
vi) Schematic plans of hydraulic or pneumatic control systems.
7 Electrical Cables and Console Wiring

In general, cables are to be used external to the consoles and they are to be of the marine type in accordance
with the applicable parts of Section 4-6-4. Cables in accordance with other standards which are not less
effective will be considered. Cables and console wiring for control and monitoring are to be of the flame-
retarding type and are to be stranded except that solid conductors may be used in low-energy circuits
where they are properly supported and not subject to undue vibration or movements.
Section 5 Craft Less than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 79 ft (24 meters) 4-7-5
9 Alarms
The alarm system is to be able to indicate more than one fault at the same time and is to be so arranged that
acceptance of one fault is not to inhibit another alarm. Audible alarms are to be maintained until they are
acknowledged, and visual indication is to remain until the fault is corrected.
11 Safety System
Safety systems are to be of the fail-safe type and are to respond automatically to fault conditions that may
endanger the machinery or safety of the crew. This automatic action is to cause the machinery to take the
least drastic action first, as appropriate, by reducing its normal operating output or switching to a stand-by
machinery and last, by stopping it, i.e., disrupting source of fuel or power supply, etc. However, the propulsion
machinery is to automatically shut down upon a loss of lubricating oil or an overspeed condition, and such
conditions are to be alarmed. Where arrangements for overriding the shutdown of the main propelling
machinery are fitted, these are to be such as to preclude inadvertent activation. Visual means shall be
provided to show whether or not it has been activated.
13 Propulsion
The requirements in 4-7-2/5.3, 4-7-2/5.5, 4-7-2/5.11, 4-7-2/5.13 and 4-7-2/5.15 are applicable. Additionally, it
is to be possible to control the propelling machinery locally in the case of failure in any part of the control systems.
15 Propulsion-machinery Spaces
15.1 Fire Protection

15.1.1 Fire Prevention
15.1.1(a) Piping for high pressure fuel injection and return piping on main and auxiliary engines
is to be effectively shielded and secured to prevent fuel or fuel mist from reaching a source of
ignition on the engine or its surroundings. Leakages from such piping are to be collected in a
suitable drain tank provided with high level alarm audible at the operating compartment.
15.1.1(b) Drip trays for collecting fuel and lubricating oil are to be fitted below pumps, heaters,
burners, tanks not forming part of the craft’s structure, etc., with connections to a suitable drain
tank with high level alarm audible at the operating compartment.
15.1.1(c) Where daily service fuel oil tanks are filled automatically or by remote control, means
are to be provided to prevent overflow spillages. Similar consideration is to be given to other
equipment which treat flammable liquids automatically (e.g., fuel oil purifiers), which whenever
practicable shall be installed in a special space reserved for purifiers and their heaters.
15.1.1(d) Where fuel oil daily service tanks or settling tanks are fitted with heating arrangements,
a high temperature alarm, audible at the operating compartment, is to be provided if the flashpoint
of the fuel oil can be exceeded.
15.1.2 Fire Detection
A fire detection system is to be provided for the machinery spaces.
15.3 Protection Against Flooding

Bilges in machinery spaces are to be provided with a high level alarm in such a way that the accumulation
of liquids is detected at normal angles of trim and heel. The detection system is to initiate an audible and
visual alarm in the operating compartment.
17 Operating Compartment
In addition to other instrumentation which may be required for the satisfactory operation of the propulsion
machinery and navigation of the craft, the following controls, alarms and displays are to be provided at the
operating compartment in accordance with 4-7-5/Table 8.
Section 5 Craft Less than 500 GT Having a Length Greater Than 79 ft (24 meters) 4-7-5
TABLE 8
Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment
(Applicable to craft complying with 4-7-5/17)
Items Display Alarm
1 Propeller Speed RPM
2 Propeller Ahead
3 Direction or Astern
4 Pitch Pitch
5 Generator voltage Volt (1)
6 Generator current Amps (1)
The following alarms giving distinctive indication of conditions requiring immediate action and in full view of the crew
7 Main engines Overspeed
8 Normal electrical supply Loss
9 Control power Available Failure
10 Any permanently installed nickel-cadmium battery associated with systems for the Thermal
control and monitor of the craft’s propulsion, steering and trim related machinery and runaway
propulsion-machinery space
11 Activation of a fire-detection system Light Fire
12 Bilge level High
With the exception of items 15 and 21, the following alarms are to be distinct from those referred in items 7 through 12 and are to
indicate conditions requiring actions to prevent degradation to an unsafe condition
13 L.O. Pressure to main engine & reduction gear Pressure Low
14 Engine coolant Temperature High
15 Starting air (if applicable) pressure Low
16 Normal power supply to the powered directional or trim control devices Failure
17 Compass system Failure
18 Side, masthead or stern navigation lights Extinction
19 Fuel oil tank level Low
20 Oil collecting tank [see 4-7-5/15.1.1ii)] High or
Overflow
21 Fuel oil day tank heater temperature [see 4-7-5/15.1.1iv)] High
22 Level of contents of any fluid reservoir the contents of which are essential for normal Low
craft operation
23 High pressure fuel line [see 4-7-5/15.1.1i)] Leakage
24 Any ventilation fan installed for ventilating spaces in which inflammable vapors may Failure
accumulate
25 Any automatic bilge pump Operation
Emergency Controls to be Fitted at the Operating Compartment and Arranged for Easy Reach of the Crew Members
Provision of
Items
Device
26 Stops for main propulsion and auxiliary machinery x
26 Means to disconnect electrical power sources from the normal power distribution system x
27 Stops for the machinery-space ventilation blowers and means for closing of openings as per 4-7-1/5 x
29 Stops for all fuel-oil pumps and forced-draft blowers x
30 Means for starting any one of the fire pumps (inclusive of the one located outside the propulsion- x
machinery space) including associated valves necessary to deliver required capacity to the fire main
31 Releasing of the fire-fighting media for the propulsion-machinery space. This release is to be manual x
and not initiated automatically by signals from the fire-detecting system.
Note:
1 As an alternative, these displays may be provided locally.
4
SECTION 6 Craft Less Than 24 meters (79 feet) in Length
1 General
Craft less than 24 meters (79 feet) in length may receive the À ACCU or À ABCU notations provided
they meet the requirements of Sections 4-7-1 through 4-7-4, as applicable.
3 Displays and Alarms at the Operating Compartment

In general, suitable displays and alarms as recommended by the engine manufacturer should be provided to
ensure the proper operation of the propulsion plant. The following displays are suggested but not required:
• Engine RPM
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Generator output
• Alternator output
• Status of batteries (when used for essential or emergency services)
• Out-drive trim angle (for outboard and inboard/outboard propulsion systems)
• Fuel level
• Automatic bilge pump operation
• Activation of Fire Detection System
5 Start in Gear Protection

Craft are to be fitted with a means to prevent the motor from being started in gear.
PART Section 7: Installation, Tests and Trials
4
SECTION 7 Installation, Tests and Trials
1 General
Control equipment and instrumentation are to be so placed or protected as to minimize the likelihood of
sustaining damage from the accumulation of dust, oil vapors, steam or dripping liquids, or from activities
around their location.
3 Equipment Locations
3.1 Electromagnetic Avoidance

In general, the installation of equipment in areas of unusual electromagnetic sources is to be avoided.
3.3 Moisture Condensation

Installation of equipment in locations where ambient temperature fluctuations can lead to accumulation of
moisture condensation inside equipment enclosure is to be avoided unless the equipment is protected by,
for instance, space heaters, or such equipment is to be designed and constructed to function in this environment.
3.5 Signal Cables Installation

To avoid electromagnetic noise caused by circulating currents, the conductive shield and cable armor are to
be grounded only at one end of the cable.
To avoid possible signal interference, signal cables occupying the same cable tray, trunk or conduit with
power cables are to be effectively shielded.
5 Sea Trials
During sea trial the following tests, as appropriate, are to be carried out to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
5.1 Propulsion Remote Control

5.1.1 Control Functions
The ability to effectively control the propulsion from the remote propulsion control station is to be
demonstrated during sea trials, or at dockside. These trials are to include:
• Propulsion control transfer
• Propulsion starting
• Verification of propulsion control responses
• Response to propulsion control power failure
• Automatic propulsion shutdown
• Automatic propulsion slowdown
• Actuation of propulsion emergency stop devices
• For turbine-driven craft, actuation of the shaft turning device.
Section 7 Installation, Tests and Trials 4-7-7
5.1.2 Throttle Response

Response of propulsion machinery to throttle control demands is to be tested to demonstrate
during sea-trial that no part of the plant or engine is jeopardized by the rate at which the throttle is
moved from one extreme position to the other.
5.3 Local Manual Control

5.3.1 Propulsion Machinery
Independent manual local control of the propulsion machinery is to be demonstrated during trials.
This is to include demonstration of independent manual control through the full maneuvering
range and transfer from automatic control.
5.5 Craft Receiving ACCU or ABCU Notation

In addition to the tests required in 4-7-7/5.1 and 4-7-7/5.3, craft intended to be operated with periodically
unattended machinery space are to be tested as follows.
5.5.1 Loss of Generator Tests
The loss of electric power (see 4-7-3/17.5) is to be simulated with the main engine running and
simulated loss of generator to test:
• Automatic restoration of electric power by standby generator(s);
• Automatic starting of vital auxiliaries; and
• Starting and restoration of control of propulsion prime mover from the centralized control
station or the navigation bridge, as appropriate.
5.5.2 Fire Fighting Control Function Tests
All controls provided at the fire fighting station (4-7-3/21.5) are to be functionally tested.
5.5.3 Full Functional Test
After the propulsion machinery has been running for at least 2 hours, the machinery is to be
operated over its full range of power to demonstrate the adequacy of all control systems. The
propulsion machinery is to be run for at least 4 more hours; in total a minimum duration of
6 hours. During this period, the ability to control the machinery functions correctly for all loads
and engine maneuvers without any manual intervention in the propulsion machinery space for 4
hours is to be demonstrated.
PART Section 8: Computer-based Systems
4
SECTION 8 Computer-based Systems
1 Application
Computer based systems where used for control, monitoring and safety systems are to comply with the
provisions of Section 4-7-8, and are subject to the classification requirements regardless of ACC or ACCU
notation, see 4-7-8/Table 1 for examples. See 4-7-1/7.3.12 for plans and data to be submitted for review.
3 Systems Requirements
3.1 System Security

Computer based systems are to be protected against unintentional or unauthorized modification of software.
3.3 Program and Memory Data

To preclude the possible loss or corruption of data as a result of power disruption, programs and associated
memory data considered to be essential for the operation of the specific system are to be stored in non-
volatile memory.
3.5 Start-up After Power Failure

The system’s software and hardware is to be designed so that upon restoration of power supply, after power
failure, automatic or remote control and monitoring capabilities can immediately be available after the pre-
established computer control access (sign-in) procedure has been completed.
3.7 Self-Monitoring
Computer based systems are to be self-monitoring and any incorrect operation or abnormal condition is to
be alarmed at the computer work station.
3.9 Power Supply

The power supply is to be monitored for voltage failure and protected for short circuit. Where redundant
computer systems are provided to satisfy 4-7-8/3.11, they are to be separately fed.
3.11 System Independence

Control, monitoring and safety systems are to be arranged such that a single failure or malfunction of the
computer equipment will not affect more than one of these system functions. This is to be achieved by
dedicated equipment for each of these functions within a single system, or by the provision of redundancy,
or by other suitable means considered not less effective.
3.13 Response Time

The computer system’s memory is to be of sufficient capacity to handle the operation of all computer
programs as configured in the computer system. The time response for processing and transmitting data is
to be such that undesirable chain of events may not arise as a result of unacceptable data delay or response
time during the computer system’s worst data overload operating condition. For propulsion-related system
applications, the time limit on response delays for safety and alarm displays is not to exceed 2 seconds.
(The response delay is to be taken as the time between detection of an alarm or safety critical condition and
the display of the alarm or actuation of the safety system.)
Section 8 Computer-based Systems 4-7-8
3.15 Fail-safe
A computer-based system is to be designed such that failure of any of the system’s components will not
cause unsafe operation of the process or the equipment it controls. FMEA is to be used to determine that
any component failure will not result in the complete loss of control, the shutdown of the process or equipment,
or other undesirable consequences.
3.17 Modifications
Any significant modification to the software or hardware for system category II and III is to be submitted
for approval. In addition, modifications of parameters for system Category III by the manufacturer are to be
approved by ABS. Any modifications made after a performance test witnessed by the Surveyor as per item 6
of 4-7-8/Table 2 are to be documented and traceable. See also 4-7-8/3.1.
Note: A significant modification is a modification which influences the functionality and/or safety of the system.
5 Additional Requirements for Integrated Systems
5.1 General
Common hardware in an integrated system serving many subsystems (e.g., monitor, keyboard, microprocessor,
etc.) is to be duplicated or otherwise provided with a means of backup.
5.3 Component Independence

Failure of one part (individual module, equipment or subsystem) of the integrated system is not to affect
the functionality of other parts, except for those functions directly dependent upon information from the
defective part.
5.5 Data Communication

5.5.1 Data Communication Network
5.5.1(a) General. The requirements in 4-7-8/5.5 are applicable to the system of Category II and
III using shared data communication network to transfer data between distributed programmable
electronic equipment or systems.
5.5.1(b) Monitoring of the Network The data communication network is to be continuously
monitored to detect failures on the communication network itself and data communication failure
on nodes connected to the network. Any detected abnormal condition is to be alarmed at the
centralized control station and on the navigation bridge.
5.5.1(c) Prevention of Overloading. Safeguards are to be provided to prevent unacceptable data
transmission delays (overloading of network). Alarm is to be activated prior to a critical data
overload condition.
5.5.1(d) Integrity of Data. Means are to be provided to ensure the integrity of data and provide
timely recovery of corrupted or invalid data.
5.5.2 Duplicated Data Communication Network
5.5.2(a) Duplication of the Network. When the same data communication network is used for
two or more essential functions (e.g., propulsion control and generator control), this network is to
be duplicated, and each is to be routed as far apart from the other as practical. The duplicate
network is for standby purpose only and not to be used to reduce traffic in the online network.
5.5.2(b) Monitoring of the Network. Duplicated data communication network is to be arranged
so that upon the failure of the online network, the standby network is automatically connected to
the system. Switching between duplicated networks is not to disturb data communication or
continuous functioning of the system. The failure of one network is to be alarmed at the centralized
control station and on the navigation bridge.
5.5.3 Connection Failure

A complete failure in connectivity between component systems and the data highway is not to
affect individual functionality of the component systems.
Where a single component failure results in loss of data communication, means are to be provided
to automatically restore data communication.
Loss of a data communication network is not to affect the ability to operate essential services by
alternate means.
7 Hardware
7.1 Design for Ease of Maintenance

The design and layout of the hardware is to ensure ease of access to interchangeable parts for repairs and
maintenance. Each replaceable part is to be simple to replace and is to be constructed for easy and safe
handling. All replaceable parts are to be so designed that it is not possible to connect them incorrectly or to
use incorrect replacements. Where this is not practicable, the replaceable parts, their mounting location,
including their means of electrical connection, are to be clearly marked.
7.3 User Interface and Input Devices

7.3.1 General
Input devices are to have clearly marked functions and, as far as practicable, are to be arranged to
avoid conceivable inadvertent errors in their operations.
7.3.2 Security
Input devices, such as keyboard, which can be used to effect changes to equipment or processes
under control, are to be provided with security arrangement, such as password, so as to limit access
to authorized personnel only.
Where a single action of, for example, pressing of a key is able to cause dangerous operating conditions
or malfunctions, measures are to be taken to prevent execution by a single action such as use of
two or more keys.
7.3.3 Control Status
Where control action can be effected from more than one station, conflicting control station actions
are to be prevented by means of interlock or warning. Control status is to be indicated at all stations.
7.5 Visual Display Unit

7.5.1 General
The size, color and density of text and graphic information displayed on a visual display unit are
to be such that it may be easily read from the normal operator position under all operational lighting
conditions. The brightness and contrast are to be capable of being adjusted.
7.5.2 Alarm Display
Where alarms are displayed by means of visual display unit, they are to appear in the sequence as
the incoming signals are received. Alarming of the incoming fault signals is to appear on the screen
regardless of the mode the computer or the visual display unit is in.
7.5.3 Propulsion Monitoring
Where a computer is used as the operator interface to display monitoring parameters, the centralized
control station is to be provided with at least two computers, including keyboards and monitors,
unless other means of display are provided capable of displaying the same information.
7.5.4 Color Monitor
The failure of a primary color is not to prevent an alarm to be distinctly indicated.
7.7 Graphical Display

7.7.1 General
Information is to be presented clearly and intelligibly according to its functional relations. Display
presentations are to be restricted to the data which is directly relevant for the user.
7.7.2 Alarms
Alarms are to be clearly distinguishable from other information and are to be visually and audibly
presented with priority over other information regardless of the mode the computer or the visual
display unit is in.
7.9 Wireless Data Communication

Wireless data communication will be specially considered depending upon the purpose.
7.9.1 Non-essential and Recreational Purposes, Entirely Within the Living Accommodations
Wireless data communication used for non-essential and recreational purposes, entirely within the
living accommodations, will be specially considered provided it is demonstrated that there is no
detrimental effect on essential services. Further documentation is to be submitted for review
which demonstrates compliance with 4-7-8/7.9.3(c), 4-7-8/7.9.3(e) and 4-7-8/7.9.3(f).
7.9.2 Non-essential and Recreational Purposes
Wireless data communication used for non-essential and recreational purposes, within the living
accommodations and outside of the living accommodations, will be specially considered provided
there is no detrimental effect on essential services. Further documentation is to be submitted for
review which demonstrates compliance with 4-7-8/7.9.3(a) through 4-7-8/7.9.3(f).
7.9.3 Vessel Services (Non-Recreational Purposes)
Wireless data communication used for vessel services (such as essential services, category I
systems, category II systems, category III systems, etc.) will be specially considered provided the
use of the wireless data communications results in an improvement in the safety of the vessel,
compared to wired data communication. Documentation which demonstrates an improvement in
safety is to be submitted for review. Further documentation is to be submitted for review which
demonstrates compliance with 4-7-8/7.9.3(a) through 4-7-8/7.9.3(g).
Note: For assignment of system categories, see 4-7-8/9.1.1. Since a failure of a category I system should not
lead to a dangerous situation and failure of a category II system could eventually lead to a dangerous
situation, an improvement in the safety of the vessel will be more difficult to demonstrate for wireless
data communication used in category II system, compared to category I systems. Since a failure of a
category III system may immediately lead to an accident with catastrophic severity, wireless systems and
equipment are unlikely to be permitted in category III systems.
7.9.3(a) Risk Analysis. A suitable risk analysis (such as an Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
(FMEA)) is to be performed which demonstrates that an interruption or failure in the wireless data
communication will not lead to a hazardous situation.
Note: Consideration is to be given to the possibility of corrupted data and intermittent failures with comparatively
long recovery times between interruptions.
7.9.3(b) Type Testing. The wireless equipment is to meet the environmental type testing
requirements of 4-7-9/13.1 and 4-7-9/Table 9 based on the proposed location of installation.
7.9.3(c) Wireless Data Communication Tests. The wireless data communication is to not cause
interference with any vessel systems. This is applicable to all wireless data communication
equipment (even wireless data communication equipment for non-essential services). See the tests
required by 4-7-8A1/13.5.
7.9.3(d) Wireless Data Communication Network. The wireless data communication network is to
meeting the requirements of 4-7-8/5.3, 4-7-8/5.5.1, 4-7-8/5.5.2 and 4-7-8/5.5.3.
7.9.3(e) Wireless System Protocols. Wireless data communication is to follow recognized

international wireless system protocols that incorporate the following.
i) Message integrity. Fault prevention, detection, diagnosis and correction so that the received
message is not corrupted or altered when compared to the transmitted message.
ii) Configuration and device authentication. Only devices that are included in the wireless
system are to permitted to connect to the wireless system.
iii) Message encryption. Protection of the confidentiality and criticality of the data content.
iv) Security management. Protection of network assets, prevention of unauthorized access to
network assets.
7.9.3(f) Radio-Frequency and Power Level. The wireless system is to comply with the radio-
frequency and power level requirements of the International Telecommunications Union and flag
state requirements.
Note: Consideration is to be given to system operation in the event of port state and local requirements that pertain
to the use of radio-frequency transmission prohibiting the operation of a wireless data communication
system due to radio-frequency and power level restrictions.
7.9.3(g) Alternative Means of Control. Functions that are required to operate continuously to
provide essential services dependent on wireless data communication are to be provided with an
alternative means of control that can be brought into action within an acceptable period of time.
9 Tests and Evidence
9.1 System Categories

Computer-based systems subject to classification requirements are to be assigned into the appropriate
system category (I, II or III) according to the possible extent of the damage that may be caused by a single
failure within the computer-based systems, as shown in 4-7-8/Table 1.
Examples of assignment to system categories are shown in the right column of 4-7-8/Table 1 but are not
exhaustive.
9.3 Tests
9.3.1 Test Program
Tests are to be carried out, and the evidence of quality assurance is to be maintained in accordance
with 4-7-8/Table 3.
Where the Surveyor’s witness is required in accordance with 4-7-8/9.3.2 and 4-7-8/9.3.3, the test
procedure for hardware test and performance test for computer-based system of Category II and III
is to be submitted for review. For these computer-based systems, the test procedure is to include
the tests in 4-7-9/Table 10 and the required functions in Section 4-7-8 for verification.
9.3.2 Hardware Test
All computer hardware of module, sub-system or system level in Category II or III subject to
classification requirements are to be qualified in accordance with Section 4-7-9, except for printer,
data recording, logging device or similar.
Type tests according to 4-7-9/Table 9 and Surveyor’s witness for the tests in 4-7-9/15.1i), ii) and
iii) are to be carried out for the computer hardware associated with ACC or ACCU notation.
Surveyor’s witness in 4-7-9/15 is not required for the computer hardware that is not associated
with a specific class notation (e.g., ACC, ACCU, etc.). In this case, the test report witnessed and
approved by another IACS Member Society for compliance with 4-7-9/Table 9 (or IACS UR E10) is
acceptable.
9.3.3 Performance Test

For computer-based system of Category II and III associated with a specific class notation (e.g., ACC,
ACCU, etc.), a performance test is to be witnessed by the Surveyor in accordance with item 6 of
4-7-8/Table 2.
The performance test is not required to be witnessed by the Surveyor for computer-based systems
of Category II, which are not associated with a specific class notation. However, the performance
test is to be witnessed by the Surveyor for computer-based systems of Category III. The manufacturer
is required to submit the performance test report to ABS regardless of the system category, when
requested.
TABLE 1
Assignment to System Categories by Effects of Failure
System Category Effects of Failure Examples
Failure will not lead to dangerous situations for human Non-essential systems
I safety, safety of the vessel and/or threat to the Maintenance support systems
environment. Information and diagnostic systems
Failure could eventually lead to dangerous situations Alarm and monitoring equipment
for human safety, safety of the vessel and/or threat to Cargo tank gauging system
the environment.
Control systems for auxiliary machinery
Main propulsion remote control systems (e.g., the
control system from navigation bridge, etc.)
II Fire detection systems or gas detection systems
Bilge systems
Governors
Power management system and synchronizing units
for switchboard
Machinery safety protection systems
Failure could immediately lead to dangerous situations Safety system/equipment for main propulsion and
for human safety, safety of the vessel and/or threat to electric power generating system associated with
the environment. propulsion
Burner control and safety systems
III
Control system for propulsion machinery or steering
gear (e.g., the control system from centralized control
station, control system for common rail main diesel
engine, etc.)
Notes:
1. Consideration is to be given to the extent of the damage directly caused by a failure, but not to any
consequential damage. However, the identical redundancy for the safety system will not be taken into
account for the assignment of a system category.
2. The assignment of a computer-based system to the appropriate system category is to be made according
to the greatest likely extent of direct damage.
3. Where independent effective backup or other means of averting danger for the control functions is
provided, the system Category III may be decreased to Category II. Regardless of the effective
backup, Category II systems are not allowed to be decreased to Category I.
TABLE 2
Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance
Item Tests and Evidence System Category
No. I II III
1. Evidence of quality system
1.1 Quality plan for software M M
1.2 Inspection of components (only Hardware) from sub-suppliers M M
1.3 Quality control in production M M
1.4 Final test reports M M S
1.5 Traceability of software M M S
2. Hardware and software description
2.1 Software description M S
2.2 Hardware description M S
2.3 Failure analysis for safety related functions only S
3. Evidence of software testing
3.1 Evidence of software testing according to quality plan M S
3.2 Analysis regarding existence and fulfillment of programming procedures for safety S
related functions
4. Hardware tests
4.1 Type tests according to 4-7-9/Table 7 W W
5. Software tests
5.1 Module tests M S
5.2 Subsystem tests M S
5.3 System test M S
6. Performance tests
6.1 Integration test M W
6.2 Fault simulation W W
6.3 Factory Acceptance Test M W W
7. On-board test
7.1 Complete system test M W W
7.2 Integration test W W
7.3 Wireless Data Communication Test W W W
8. Modifications
8.1 Tests after modifications M S/W S/W
Notes:
1 M = Evidence kept by manufacturer and upon request checked by ABS.
2 S = Evidence to be checked by ABS.
3 W = To be witnessed by the Surveyor.
4 All evidence may be subject to review and therefore, upon request, is to be submitted for review.
5 Definitions and notes relating to 4-7-8/Table 2 are given in Appendix 4-7-8A1.
6 System categories are defined in 4-7-8/Table 1.
PART Appendix 1: Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance in 4-7-8/Table 3
4
SECTION 8 Appendix 1 – Definitions and Notes Relating to

Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance in
4-7-8/Table 3
1 Evidence of Quality System
1.1 Quality Plan for Software

A plan for software lifecycle activities is to be produced which defines relevant procedures, responsibilities
and system documentation, including configuration management.
1.3 Inspection of Components (Only Hardware) from Sub-suppliers

Proof that components and/or sub-assemblies conform to specification.
1.5 Quality Control in Production

Evidence of quality assurance measures on production.
1.7 Final Test Reports

Reports from testing of the finished product and documentation of the test results.
1.9 Traceability of Software

Modification of program contents and data, as well as change of version, has to be carried out in accordance
with a procedure and is to be documented.
3 Hardware and Software Description
3.1 Software Description

Software is to be described:
• Description of the basic and communication software installed in each hardware unit
• Description of application software (not program listings)
• Description of functions, performance, constraints and dependencies between modules or other components
3.3 Hardware Description

Hardware is to be described.
• System block diagram, showing the arrangement, input and output devices and interconnections
• Connection diagrams
• Details of input and output devices
• Details of power supplies
Section 8 Appendix 1 – Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance
in 4-7-8/Table 3 4-7-8A1
3.5 Failure Analysis for Safety Related Functions Only (For Example FMEA)
The analysis is to be carried out using appropriate means:
• Fault tree analysis
• Risk analysis
• Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (FMEA) or Failure Mode, Effects and Criticality Analysis (FMECA)
The purpose is to demonstrate that for single failures, systems will fail to safety and that systems in operation
will not be lost or degraded beyond acceptable performance for system Category III.
In addition to the above for the FMEA or FMECA requirements of the safety related functions of computer
based systems, see additional FMEA or FMECA requirements of 4-7-1/7.3.8 for ACC or ACCU notation.
5 Evidence of Software Testing
5.1 Evidence of Software Testing According to Quality Plan

Procedures for verification and validation activities are to be established:
• Methods of testing
• Test programs producing
• Simulation
5.3 Analysis Regarding Existence and Fulfillment of Programming Procedures for Safety
Related Functions
Specific assurance methods are to be planned for verification and validation of satisfaction of requirements:
• Diverse programs
• Program analysis and testing to detect formal errors and discrepancies to the description
• Simple structure
7 Hardware Tests
7.1 Type Tests

Type tests according to 4-7-9/Table 10.
Special consideration may be given to tests witnessed and approved by another IACS member society. See
4-7-8/9.3.2.
9 Software Tests
9.1 Module Tests

Software module tests are to provide evidence that each module performs its intended function and does
not perform unintended functions.
9.3 Subsystem Tests

Subsystem testing is to verify that modules interact correctly to perform the intended functions and do not
perform unintended functions.
9.5 System Tests

System testing is to verify that subsystems interact correctly to perform the functions in accordance with
specified requirements and do not perform unintended functions.
Section 8 Appendix 1 – Definitions and Notes Relating to Tests and Evidence of Quality Assurance
in 4-7-8/Table 3 4-7-8A1
11 Performance Tests
11.1 Integration Tests

Integration testing for computer-based systems is to be carried out using satisfactorily tested system
software, and as far as practicable intended system components.
11.3 Fault Simulation

Faults are to be simulated as realistically as possible to demonstrate appropriate system fault detection and
system response. The results of any required failure analysis are to be observed.
11.5 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)

Factory acceptance testing is be carried out in accordance with a test program. Testing is to be based on
demonstrating that the computer-based system fulfills the requirements specified in Section 4-7-8.
13 On-board Tests
13.1 Complete System Test

Testing is to be performed on the completed system comprising actual hardware components with the final
application software, in accordance with an approved test program.
13.3 Integration Tests

On board testing is to verify that correct functionality has been achieved with all systems integrated.
13.5 Wireless Data Communication Tests

Tests during harbor and sea trials are to be conducted to demonstrate that radio-frequency transmission
from wireless data communication equipment does not cause failure of any equipment and does not cause
the wireless data communication equipment itself to fail as a result of electromagnetic interference during
expected operating conditions.
Notes:
1 Where electromagnetic interference caused by wireless data communication equipment is found to be
causing failure of equipment or systems, the layout and/or equipment is to be changed to prevent further
failures from occurring.
2 In the unlikely case when wireless data communication is permitted in systems of category III, the level
of witnessing will be determined during review. The scope of the testing for systems of category III will
be more extensive than for systems of category II.
15 Modifications
15.1 Tests After Modifications

Modifications to approved systems are to be notified in advance.
PART Section 9: Equipment
4
SECTION 9 Equipment
1 Application
Requirements of Section 4-7-9 apply to equipment that are components of the control, monitoring and
safety systems of propulsion machinery, vital auxiliary pumps and the electrical power generating plant
including its prime mover for craft to be assigned with ACCU or ABCU notation.
3 Environmental Test Conditions

Control, safety and monitoring equipment is to be designed such that it will successfully withstand the test
conditions stipulated in 4-7-9/Table 9, as applicable.
Upon request by the manufacturer, equipment designed to environmental conditions in excess of those in
4-7-9/Table 9 may be tested to such conditions and certified accordingly.
5 Environmentally Controlled Space

Where equipment is designed to operate only in a temperature regulated environment the temperature
regulating system (such as air-conditioner) is to be backed up by a stand-by unit. Failure of the system is to
be alarmed.
7 Electric and Electronic Equipment

Equipment is to be constructed of robust, durable and flame-retardant material. It is to be designed to
incorporate the degree of enclosure protection as required by 4-6-3/Table 1. Wiring and cables are to meet
the requirements contained in 4-6-4/7.11.5 and 4-6-4/13 respectively.
Non-current carrying metal parts are to effectively earthed.
9 Hydraulic Equipment
Hydraulic equipment is to be suitable for the intended service, compatible with the working fluid and is to
be in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-4-6. The hydraulic fluid is to be non-flammable or have
a flash point above 157°C (315°F).
11 Pneumatic Equipment
Pneumatic equipment is to be suitable for the intended service and is to be in accordance with the provisions
of Section 4-4-6.
Section 9 Equipment 4-7-9
13 Installations
13.1 General
The installation of equipment associated with automatic or remote control and monitoring systems is to be
carried out taking into consideration adverse effects that may be introduced by their exposure to unintended
temperatures, weather, vibration conditions, falling objects or liquid, electromagnetic interference, high voltage
systems, electric noise, etc. Additionally, the installation is to facilitate the checking, adjustment and
replacement of components, including filters and sensing devices, without disrupting the normal operation
of the system, as far as practicable.
13.3 Ranges in Ambient Temperatures

For the selection and installation of equipment associated with control and monitoring systems, a temperature
range of 5°C (41°F) to 55°C (131°F) is to be considered for machinery space, control rooms, accommodations
and navigation bridge. When equipment is located inside panels or cubicles, consideration is to be given to
the temperature rise inside those panels due to the dissipation of heat from its own components. See also
4-7-2/Table 9, Note 1.
Where compliance with the above temperature ranges cannot be met, consideration will be given to the
installation of equipment per 4-7-2/13.13.
13.5 Electromagnetic and Conducted Interference

In general, the installation of equipment associated with automatic or remote control and monitoring systems
in areas of unusual electromagnetic systems in areas of unusual electromagnetic sources is to be avoided.
Where the values per 4-7-2/Table 1 may be exceeded, appropriate measures are to be implemented to
reduce the effects of electromagnetic and conducted interference. To avoid electromagnetic noise caused
by circulating currents, the conductive shield and cable armor is to be earthed only at one end of the cable.
Description of the preventive measures to be followed is to be submitted for review.
13.7 Shielded Cables

To avoid possible signal interference, cables for automatic or remote control and monitoring systems occupying
the same cable tray, trunk or conduit with power cables are to be of the shielded type.
13.9 Electrical Grounding

Automatic or remote control and monitoring systems are not to have common earth conductors with systems
of higher voltage level.
13.11 Condensation
Electrical equipment liable to be exposed to ambient temperature fluctuations is to be provided with means
to prevent accumulation of moisture inside of the component’s enclosure (i.e., by the provisions of space
heaters that automatically energize upon shutdown or disconnection of the electrical component).
13.13 Cold Environment

Electrical equipment which may be adversely affected by the exposure to temperatures lower than those
for which they are designed are to be provided with suitable heating arrangements so that they may be
readily operated when needed. See 4-7-2/13.3.
13.15 Protection Against Falling Liquids or Leakage of Fluid Medium

Electrical equipment is not to be installed in the same compartment or cabinet containing equipment or
pipes carrying water, oil or steam unless effective measures are taken in order to protect the electrical
equipment from possible fluid leakage (i.e., welded connections, physical isolation together with suitable
draining arrangements, etc.).
13.17 Measuring and Sensing Devices

The installation of measuring and sensing elements is to permit their easy access for functional testing or
replacement.
13.19 Marking
All units, controllers, actuators, displays, terminal strips, cable and test points, etc., are to be clearly and
permanently marked. Their systems and system’s functions are to be included so that they can be easily
identified in associated drawings and instrument lists.
15 Equipment Tests
15.1 Prototype Environmental Testing

The following tests are to be carried out as a prototype testing in the presence of the Surveyor:
i) Power supply variation test (item 1 in 4-7-9/Table 9)
ii) Vibration test (item 5 in 4-7-9/Table 9)
iii) Inclination test (item 6 in 4-7-9/Table 9)
Other prototype environmental tests specified in 4-7-9/Table 9 are to be conducted by the manufacturers;
acceptance will be based on review of manufacturer’s certified test reports by ABS. Omission of certain
tests may be considered taking into consideration of the location of installation, functionality, contained devices,
etc. of the equipment.
In general, field sensors (e.g., pressure transmitters) and field devices (e.g., solenoid valves), circuit breakers
and cables may be exempted from tests specified in 4-7-9/Table 9.
For computer based systems, the equipment to be tested includes microprocessors, storage devices, power
supply units, signal conditioners, analog/digital converters, computer monitors (visual display units), keyboards,
etc., but may exclude printer, data recording or logging device not required in this section.
15.3 Production Unit Certification

After assembled to a complete assembly unit or subassembly unit, each production unit of equipment used
in control, monitoring and safety systems is to be tested at the manufacturer’s shop in the presence of the
Surveyor to verify the tests in 4-7-9/Table 10.
15.5 Type Approval Program

At the request of the manufacturer, equipment, subassemblies, or complete assemblies of control, monitoring
and safety systems may be considered for Type Approval in accordance with the provisions of 1-1-A2/5.3
(RQS) or 1-1-A2/5.5 (PQA). Where qualified, they may be listed on the ABS website as Type Approved
Products.
Those products type-approved under 1-1-A2/5.3 (RQS) will be acceptable, subject to renewal and updating
of the certificates, for the purposes of Part 4, Chapter 7 without the need for the Surveyor’s attendance at
the tests and inspections specified in 4-7-9/13.3 and the production unit certification specified in 4-7-9/13.3
and as described in 1-1-A2/5.7.1(a). For those products type-approved under 1-1-A2/5.3 (RQS), the production
unit certification for complete assembly or subassembly units is to be carried out in the presence of the
Surveyor as specified in 4-7-9/13.3 and as described in 1-1-A2/5.7.1(b).
For the updating or renewal of type approval, please refer to 1-1-A2/5.7.2 and 1-1-A2/5.7.4.
TABLE 9
Type Tests for Control, Monitoring and Safety Equipment (2016)
PROCEDURE
No TEST ACCORDING. TO: TEST PARAMETERS OTHER INFORMATION
[See Note 7]
1. Power supply --- AC Supply
variations
Combination Voltage Frequency
(a) electric variation variation
permanent permanent
(%) (%)
1 +6 +5
2 +6 –5
3 – 10 –5
4 – 10 +5
Combination Voltage Frequency

transient transient
1.5 s (%) 5 s (%)
5 + 20 + 10
6 – 20 – 10
DC Supply
Voltage tolerance continuous ± 10%
Voltage cyclic variation 5%
Voltage ripple 10 %
Electric battery supply:

+ 30% to – 25% for equipment connected
to charging battery or as determined by the
charging / discharging characteristics,
including ripple voltage from the charging
device;
+ 20% to – 25% for equipment not
connected to the battery during charging
2. Power supply --- Pressure: ± 20%
variations Duration: 15 minutes
(Continued)
(b) Pneumatic
and hydraulic
3. Dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature: 55°C (131°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) Equipment operating during
(2016) Duration: 16 hours conditioning and testing;
Or Functional test during the last
Temperature: 70°C (158°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) hour at the test temperature. For
Duration: 16 hours equipment specified for increased
[See Note 1] temperature the dry heat test is to
be conducted at the agreed test
temperature and duration.
3A. Dry heat – IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature: 70°C (158°F) ± 2°C (3.6°F) Equipment operating during
Higher Temp Duration: 16 hours conditioning and testing;
(see Note 8) [See Note 8] Functional test during the last
(Optional hour at the test temperature;
Test)
(2015)
TABLE 9 (continued)
PROCEDURE
[See Note 7]
4. Damp heat IEC 60068-2-30 - Temperature: 55°C (131°F) Measurement of insulation
(2016) Test Db Humidity: 95% resistance before test;
Duration: 2 cycles 2 x (12 + 12 hours) The test shall start with 25°C ±
3°C and at least 95% humidity;
Equipment operating during the
complete first cycle and switched
off during second cycle, except
for functional test;
Functional test during the first
2 hours of the first cycle at the
test temperature and during the
last 2 hours of the second cycle at
the test temperature. Duration of
the second cycle can be extended
due to more convenient handling
of the functional test.
Recovery at standard atmosphere
conditions;
Insulation resistance
measurements and performance
test.
°5. Vibration IEC 60068-2-6, 2.0 (+3/-0) Hz to 13.2 Hz – amplitude Duration: 90 minutes at 30 Hz in
(2016) Test Fc ±1 mm (0.039 in.) case of no resonance conditions;
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz – acceleration ±0.7 g Duration: 90 minutes for each
For severe vibration conditions, e.g., on resonance frequency at which
diesel engines, air compressors, etc.: Q ≥ 2 is recorded;
2.0 Hz to 25 Hz – amplitude ±1.6 mm During the vibration test, functional
(0.063 in.) tests are to be carried out;
Tests to be carried out in three
25.0 Hz to 100 Hz – acceleration ±4.0 g
mutually perpendicular planes;
It is recommended as guidance
Note: that Q does not exceed 5;
More severe conditions may exist for example Where sweep test is to be carried
on exhaust manifolds or fuel oil injection out instead of the discrete
systems of diesel engines. For equipment
frequency test and a number of
specified for increased vibration levels, the
resonant frequencies are detected
vibration test is to be conducted at the agreed
vibration level, frequency range and duration. close to each other duration of the
test is to be 120 min. Sweep over
Values may be required to be in these cases a restricted frequency range
40 Hz to 2000 Hz – acceleration ± 10.0g at between 0.8 and 1.2 times the
600 °C duration 90 min.
critical frequencies can be used
where appropriate. Note: Critical
frequency is a frequency at which
the equipment being tested may
exhibit:
• malfunction and/or
performance deterioration
• mechanical resonances
and/or other response effects
occur, for example, chatter
TABLE 9 (continued)
PROCEDURE
[See Note 7]
6. Inclination IEC 60092-504 Static 22.5° a) Inclined at an angle of at
least 22.5° to the vertical;
b) Inclined to at an angle of at
least 22.5° on the other side
of the vertical and in the
same plane as in (a);
c) Inclined to at an angle of at
least 22.5° to the vertical
and in plane at right angles
to that used in (a);
d) Inclined to at an angle of at
least 22.5° on the other side
of the vertical and in the
same plane as in (c)
Note: The duration of testing in
each position should be sufficient
to fully evaluate the behavior of
the equipment.
Dynamic 22.5° Using the directions defined in a)
to d) above, the equipment is to
be rolled to an angle of 22.5° each
side of the vertical with a period
of 10 seconds.
The test in each direction is to be
carried out for not less than 15
minutes
Note: These inclination tests are
normally not required for
equipment with no moving parts.
7. Insulation --- Rated Test Min. Insulation Insulation resistance test is to be
resistance supply voltage Resistence carried out before and after: damp
(2016) voltage (DC heat test, cold test, salt mist test,
Before After
(V) voltage) and high voltage test;
test test
(V) • between all phases and earth;
(MΩ) (MΩ)
• and where appropriate
Un ≤ 65 2 × Un 10 1.0
between the phases.
(min. 24 V)
Un is the rated (nominal) voltage.
Un > 65 500 100 10 Note: Certain components, e.g.,
for EMC protection, may be
required to be disconnected for
this test. For high voltage
equipment reference is made to
4-6-5/1.
8. High voltage --- Rated voltage Test voltage [AC voltage Separate circuits are to be tested
Un (V) 50 or 60 Hz] (V) against each other and all circuits
Up to 65 2 × Un + 500 connected with each other tested
against earth;
66 to 250 1500
Printed circuits with electronic
251 to 500 2000 components may be removed
501 to 690 2500 during the test;
Period of application of the test
voltage: 1 minute
TABLE 9 (continued)
PROCEDURE
[See Note 7]
9. Cold IEC 60068-2-1 Temperature: +5°C (41°F) ± 3°C (5.4°F) Initial measurement of insulation
Duration: 2 hours resistance;
Or Equipment not operating during
Temperature: -25°C (-13°F) ± 3°C (5.4°F) conditioning and testing, except
Duration: 2 hours for functional test;
[See Note 2] Functional test during the last
hour at the test temperature;
Insulation resistance measurement
and the functional test after
recovery.
10. Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Four spraying periods with a storage of Initial measurement of insulation
(2016) Test Kb 7 days after each. resistance and initial functional
test;
Equipment not operating during
conditioning of the test specimen;
Functional test on the 7th day of
each storage period;
Insulation resistance
measurement and performance
test: 4 to 6 hours after recovery
[See Note 3]
On completion of exposure, the
equipment shall be examined to
verify that deterioration or
corrosion (if any) is superficial
in nature.
11. Electrostatic IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: 6 kV To simulate electrostatic
discharge Air discharge: 2 kV, 4 kV, 8 kV discharge as may occur when
(2016) persons touch the appliance;
Interval between single discharges: 1 sec.
The test is to be confined to the
Number of pulses: 10 per polarity points and surfaces that can
According to test level 3. normally be reached by the
operator;
Performance Criterion B
[See Note 4].
12. Electro- IEC 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 MHz to 2 GHz To simulate electromagnetic
magnetic field Modulation*: 80% AM at 1000 Hz fields radiated by different
(2016) transmitters;
Field strength: 10 V/m
The test is to be confined to the
appliances exposed to direct
Frequency sweep rate: ≤ 1.5 × 10-3 radiation by transmitters at their
decades/s (or 1% / 3 sec) place of installation.
According to test level 3. Performance criterion A
[See Note 5]
* If for tests of equipment, an
input signal with a modulation
frequency of 1000 Hz is
necessary, a modulation
frequency of 400 Hz may be
chosen.
TABLE 9 (continued)
PROCEDURE
[See Note 7]
13. Conducted AC: To simulate distortions in the
Low Frequency range: rated frequency to 200th power supply system generated,
Frequency harmonic; for instance, by electronic
(2016) consumers and coupled in as
Test voltage (rms): 10% of supply to 15th harmonics;
harmonic reducing to 1% at 100th harmonic
and maintain this level to the 200th harmonic, Performance criterion A
minimum 3 V (rms), maximum 2 W [See Note 5]
See 4-7-2/Figure 1 for test set-up.
DC: For keeping max. 2 W, the voltage
of the test signal may be lower.
Frequency range: 50 Hz – 10 kHz;
Test voltage (rms): 10% of supply,
maximum 2 W
14. Conducted IEC 61000-4-6 AC, DC, I/O ports and signal/control Equipment design and the choice
Radio lines: of materials are to simulate
Frequency Frequency range: 150 kHz – 80 MHz electromagnetic fields coupled as
(2016) high frequency into the test
Amplitude: 3 V rms [See Note 6] specimen via the connecting lines.
Modulation ** : 80% AM at 1000 Hz Performance criterion A
Frequency sweep range: ≤ 1.5 × 10-3 [See Note 5].
decades/sec. (or 1% / 3 sec.) ** If for tests of equipment, an
According to test level 2. input signal with a modulation
frequency of 1000 Hz is necessary,
a modulation frequency of 400 Hz
should be chosen.
15. Electrical Fast IEC 61000-4-4 Single pulse rise time: 5ns (between 10% Arcs generated when actuating
Transients/ and 90% value) electrical contacts;
Burst Single pulse width: 50 ns (50% value) Interface effect occurring on the
(2016) Amplitude (peak): 2 kV line on power power supply, as well as at the
supply port/earth; external wiring of the test
1kV on I/O data control and specimen;
communication ports (coupling clamp); Performance criterion B
Pulse period: 300 ms; [See Note 4].
Burst duration: 15 ms;
Duration/polarity: 5 min
According to test level 3.
16. Surge IEC 61000-4-5 Test applicable to AC and DC power ports Interference generated for
(2016) Open-circuit voltage: instance, by switching “ON” or
Pulse rise time: 1.2 µs (front time) “OFF” high power inductive
consumers;
Pulse width: 50 µs (time to half value)
Test procedure in accordance
Amplitude (peak): 1 kV line/earth;
with figure 10 of the standard for
0.5 kV line/line equipment where power and
Short-circuit current: signal lines are identical;
Pulse rise time: 8 μs (front time) Performance criterion B
Pulse width: 20 μs (time to half value) [See Note 4].
Repetition rate: ≥ 1 pulse/min
Number of pulses: 5 per polarity
Application: continuous
According to test level 2.
TABLE 9 (continued)
PROCEDURE
[See Note 7]
17. Radiated CISPR 16-2-3 For equipment installed in the bridge Procedure in accordance with the
Emission and deck zone: standard but distance 3 m (10 ft)
(2016) Frequency range: Quasi peak Limits: between equipment and antenna
0.15 – 0.3 MHz 80 – 52 dBµV/m Alternatively, the radiation limit
0.3 – 30 MHz 52 – 34 dBµV/m at a distance of 3 m from the
30 – 2000 MHz 54 dBµV/m enclosure port over the frequency
156 MHz to 165 MHz shall be
except for:
30 dB micro-V/m peak.
156 – 165 MHz 24 dBµV/m
For equipment installed in the general
power distribution zone:
Frequency range: Quasi peak Limits:
0.15 – 30 MHz 80 – 50 dBµV/m
30 – 100 MHz 60 – 54 dBµV/m
100 – 2000 MHz 54 dBµV/m
except for:
156 – 165 MHz 24 dBµV/m
18. Conducted CISPR 16-2-1 Test applicable to AC and DC power ports
Emission For equipment installed in the bridge
(2016) and deck zone:
Frequency range: Limits:
10 – 150kHz 96 – 50 dBµV
150 – 350 kHz 60 – 50 dBµV
350 kHz – 30 MHz 50 dBµV
For equipment installed in the general
power distribution zone:
Frequency range: Limits:
10 – 150 kHz 120 – 69 dBµV
150 – 500 kHz 79 dBµV
0.5 – 30 MHz 73 dBµV
19. Flame IEC 60092-101 or Flame application: 5 times 15 sec each. The burnt out or damaged part of
retardant IEC 60695-11-5 Interval between each application: 15 sec. the specimen by not more than
or 1 time 30 sec. 60 mm long.
Test criteria based upon application. No flame, no incandescence or in the
The test is performed with the Equipment event of a flame or incandescence
Under Test (EUT) or housing of the EUT being present, it shall extinguish
applying needle-flame test method. itself within 30 sec. of the removal
of the needle flame without full
combustion of the test specimen.
Any dripping material shall
extinguish itself in such a way as
not to ignite a wrapping tissue.
The drip height is 200 mm ± 5 mm.
TABLE 9 (continued)
Notes:
1 Equipment to be mounted in consoles, housing, etc., together with other equipment is to be tested with 70°C (158°F).
2 For equipment installed in non-weather protected locations or cold locations test is to be carried out at -25°C (-13°F).
3 Salt mist test is to be carried out for equipment installed in weather exposed areas.
4 Performance criterion B (for transient phenomena): The equipment under test is to continue to operate as intended
after the tests. No degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed as defined in the technical specification
published by the manufacturer. During the test, degradation or loss of function or performance which is
self-recoverable is however allowed but no change of actual operating state or stored data is allowed.
5 Performance criterion A (for continuous phenomena): The equipment under test is to continue to operate as
intended during and after test. No degradation of performance or loss is allowed as defined in relevant equipment
standard and the technical specification published by the manufacturer.
6 For equipment installed on the bridge and deck zone, the test levels are to be increased to 10 V rms for spot
frequencies in accordance with IEC 60945 at 2, 3, 4, 6.2, 8.2, 12.6, 16.5, 18.8, 22, 25 MHz.
7 Alternative equivalent testing procedures may be accepted provided the requirements in the other columns are
complied with.
8 (2015) When requested, equipment which has undergone the higher temperature and duration test will be recognized
accordingly in the PDA certificate (see Appendix 1-1-A3 of the ABS Rules for Conditions of Classification –
High-Speed Craft (Part 1)). The purpose of introducing the optional 3HT test is for the convenience of equipment
manufacturers should their clients request evidence that the equipment has been tested to the higher temperature
requirements noted in Item 3A of the Table.
9 (2016) As used in this document, and in contrast to a complete performance test, a functional test is a simplified
test sufficient to verify that the EUT has not suffered any deterioration caused by the individual environmental
tests.
FIGURE 1
Test Set-up for Conducted Low Frequency Test
(See Test No. 13 of 4-7-9/Table 9)
Generator
Power Supply
AC DC
L1 (+)
V Voltmeter *)
EUT N (−)
PE
*) Decoupling (optional)
TABLE 10
Tests for Unit Certification of Control, Monitoring and Safety Equipment (2016)
PROCEDURE
[See Note]
1. Visual - - Conformance to drawings, design
inspection data
Quality of workmanship and
construction
2. Performance Manufacturer’s Standard atmosphere conditions Confirmation that operation is in
test performance test Temperature: 25°C (77°F) ± 10°C (18°F) accordance with the requirements
(2016) program based upon specified for particular systems or
specification and Relative humidity: 60% ± 30% equipment;
relevant Rule Air pressure: 96 kPa (0.98 kgf/cm2, 13.92 Checking of self-monitoring
requirements. psi) ± 10 kPa (0.10 kgf/cm2, 1.45 psi) features;
When the EUT is Checking of specified protection
required to comply against an access to the memory;
with an international
performance standard Checking against effect of
(e.g., protection unerroneous use of control
relays), verification elements in the case of computer
of requirements in systems.
the standard are to
be part of the
performance testing
required in this initial
test and subsequent
performance tests
after environmental
testing where
required by 4-7-9/
Table 9.
3. External --- 3 interruptions during 5 minutes; The time of 5 minutes may be
Power supply switching-off time 30 s each case exceeded if the equipment under
failure test (EUT) needs a longer time for
start up, for example, booting
sequence.
For equipment which requires
booting, one additional power
supply interruption during
booting is to be performed.
Verification of:
the specified action of
equipment upon loss and
restoration of supply;
possible corruption of program
or data held in programmable
electronic systems, where
applicable.
Note: Alternative equivalent testing procedures may be accepted provided the requirements in the other columns are complied with.

HSC Part 4 E-July16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HSC Part 4 E-July16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HSC Part 4 E-July16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part 4: Craft Systems and Machinery

RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING

(Updated July 2016 – see next page)

American Bureau of Shipping

 2015 American Bureau of Shipping. All rights reserved.

July 2016 consolidation includes:

February 2016 consolidation includes:

Rule Change Notice (2016)

Listing by Effective Dates of Changes from the 2015 Rules

EFFECTIVE DATE 1 July 2015 – shown as (1 July 2015)

EFFECTIVE DATE 1 January 2016 – shown as (2016)

Listing by Effective Dates of Changes from the 2016 Rules

EFFECTIVE DATE 1 July 2016 – shown as (1 July 2016)

iv ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 v

CHAPTER 2 Prime Movers ........................................................................................ 14

CHAPTER 3 Propulsion and Maneuvering Machinery............................................ 29

CHAPTER 4 Pumps and Piping Systems ................................................................ 83

CHAPTER 5 Fire Extinguishing Systems .............................................................. 154

CHAPTER 6 Electrical Installations........................................................................ 179

vi ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

CHAPTER 7 Remote Propulsion Control and Automation .................................. 313

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 1

TABLE 1 Machine Installations – Inclinations ........................................13

2 ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

SECTION 1 Conditions of Classification of Machinery

3.1 Basic Requirements

3.3 Type Approval Program

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 3

3.5 Non-mass Produced Machinery

3.7 Details of Certification of Some Representative Products

5 Shipboard Automatic or Remote Control and Monitoring Systems

7 Machinery Plans and Data

7.3 Automation and Remote Control Systems

4 ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

7.5 Boilers, Pressure Vessels and Heat Exchangers

7.7 Electrical Systems

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 5

• Fire detection and alarm

7.9 Fire Safety

7.11 Gas Turbines

7.13 Diesel Engines

6 ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

7.15 Lift Devices

7.17 Piping Systems

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 7

7.21 Reduction Gears

7.25 Steering Gears

7.27 Steering Vanes

7.29 Thrusters (Steerable, Athwartship)

8 ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016

7.33 Windlass or Winch

13.1 Category A Machinery Spaces

13.3 Machinery Spaces

13.5 Oil Fuel Unit

13.7 Accommodation Spaces

ABS RULES FOR BUILDING AND CLASSING HIGH-SPEED CRAFT . 2016 9

13.9 Public Spaces